Q 26 Udehcpu
Uploaded by
ДмитрийQ 26 Udehcpu
Uploaded by
ДмитрийQCPU User's Manual
(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
-Q00(J)CPU -Q26UD(E)HCPU
-Q01CPU -Q26UDVCPU
-Q02(H)CPU -Q50UDEHCPU
-Q06HCPU -Q100UDEHCPU
-Q12HCPU
-Q25HCPU
-Q02PHCPU
-Q06PHCPU
-Q12PHCPU
-Q25PHCPU
-Q12PRHCPU
-Q25PRHCPU
-Q00U(J)CPU
-Q01UCPU
-Q02UCPU
-Q03UD(E)CPU
-Q03UDVCPU
-Q04UD(E)HCPU
-Q04UDVCPU
-Q06UD(E)HCPU
-Q06UDVCPU
-Q10UD(E)HCPU
-Q13UD(E)HCPU
-Q13UDVCPU
-Q20UD(E)HCPU
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Read these precautions before using this product.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention
to safety to handle the product correctly.
In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: " WARNING" and " CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
WARNING
resulting in death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead to
serious consequences.
Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety.
Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future
reference.
[Design Precautions]
WARNING
● Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system
operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller.
Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
(1) Configure external safety circuits, such as an emergency stop circuit, protection circuit, and
protective interlock circuit for forward/reverse operation or upper/lower limit positioning.
(2) The programmable controller stops its operation upon detection of the following status, and the
output status of the system will be as shown below.
Q series module AnS/A series module
Overcurrent or overvoltage protection of
All outputs are turned off All outputs are turned off
the power supply module is activated.
The CPU module detects an error such as a All outputs are held or turned off
All outputs are turned off
watchdog timer error by the self-diagnostic function. according to the parameter setting.
All outputs may turn on when an error occurs in the part, such as I/O control part, where the CPU
module cannot detect any error. To ensure safety operation in such a case, provide a safety
mechanism or a fail-safe circuit external to the programmable controller. For a fail-safe circuit
example, refer to Page 670, Appendix 9.
(3) Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of an output module relay or transistor. Configure an
external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.
1
[Design Precautions]
WARNING
● In an output module, when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a
load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an
external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
● Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power
supply. If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output
or malfunction.
● For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to relevant manuals for the
network. Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.
● When changing data of the running programmable controller from a peripheral connected to the CPU
module or from a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module, configure an
interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely.
For program modification and operating status change, read relevant manuals carefully and ensure
the safety before operation. Especially, in the case of a control from an external device to a remote
programmable controller, immediate action cannot be taken for a problem on the programmable
controller due to a communication failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the
sequence program, and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and
CPU module in case of a communication failure.
[Design Precautions]
CAUTION
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction
due to noise.
● When a device such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve is controlled through an output module, a
large current (approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from
off to on. Take measures such as replacing the module with one having a sufficient current rating.
● After the CPU module is powered on or is reset, the time taken to enter the RUN status varies
depending on the system configuration, parameter settings, and/or program size. Design circuits so
that the entire system will always operate safely, regardless of the time.
2
[Installation Precautions]
CAUTION
● Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in this
manual. Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of
the product.
● To mount the module, while pressing the module mounting lever in the lower part of the module, fully
insert the module fixing projection(s) into the hole(s) in the base unit and press the module until it
snaps into place. Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction, failure, or drop of the module. When
using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations, fix the module with a
screw. Tighten the screw within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the
screw, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in
drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
● When using an extension cable, connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely.
Check the connection for looseness. Poor contact may cause incorrect input or output.
● When using a memory card, fully insert it into the memory card slot. Check that it is inserted
completely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.
● When using an SD memory card, fully insert it into the SD memory card slot. Check that it is inserted
completely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.
● When using an extended SRAM cassette, fully insert it into the connector for cassette connection of
the CPU module. Close the cassette cover after inserting to avoid looseness of the extended SRAM
cassette. Poor contact may cause malfunction.
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing the
module. Failure to do so may result in damage to the product. A module can be replaced online (while
power is on) on any MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in the system where a CPU module
supporting the online module change function is used. Note that there are restrictions on the modules
that can be replaced online, and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure. For
details, refer to this manual and in the manual for the corresponding module.
● Do not directly touch any conductive part of the module, the memory card, the SD memory card, or
the extended SRAM cassette. Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module.
● When using a Motion CPU module and modules designed for motion control, check that the
combinations of these modules are correct before applying power. The modules may be damaged if
the combination is incorrect. For details, refer to the user's manual for the Motion CPU module.
[Wiring Precautions]
WARNING
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before wiring. Failure to do so may
result in electric shock or damage to the product.
● After installation and wiring, attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for
operation. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
3
[Wiring Precautions]
CAUTION
● Individually ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controller with a ground resistance
of 100 or less. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.
● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range. If any spade
solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting in
failure.
● Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module, and connect the cables
correctly. Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire
or failure.
● Connectors for external connection must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the
manufacturer, or must be correctly soldered. Incomplete connections could result in short circuit, fire,
or malfunction.
● Install the connector to the module securely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction
due to noise.
● Place the wires or cables in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be
pulled, resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor connection.
● Connect the cable correctly after confirming the interface type to be connected. Connecting to the
wrong interface or incorrect wiring can result in a failure of the module or external devices.
● Tighten the terminal screw within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause short circuit,
fire, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short
circuit, or malfunction.
● Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module. Such foreign matter can
cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.
● A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips,
from entering the module during wiring. Do not remove the film during wiring. Remove it for heat
dissipation before system operation.
● Do not pull the cable section of a cable for disconnection. When disconnecting a cable with a
connector, hold the connector and pull it. When disconnecting a cable on a terminal block, loosen the
terminal screw before disconnection. Pulling the connected cable can result in malfunction or damage
of the module or the cable.
● Mitsubishi Electric programmable controllers must be installed in control panels. Connect the main
power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block. Wiring
and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by maintenance personnel who is
familiar with protection against electric shock. (For wiring methods, refer to Page 103, Section 4.8.1.)
4
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
WARNING
● Do not touch any terminal while power is on. Doing so will cause electric shock.
● Correctly connect the battery connector. Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or
throw the battery into the fire, or apply liquid or a strong shock to the battery. Doing so will cause the
battery to produce heat, explode, ignite, or liquid spill, resulting in injury and fire.
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before cleaning the module or
retightening the terminal screws, connector screws, or module fixing screws. Failure to do so may
result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
CAUTION
● Before performing online operations (especially, program modification, forced output, and operation
status change) for the running CPU module from the peripheral connected, read relevant manuals
carefully and ensure the safety. Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.
● Do not disassemble or modify the modules. Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire.
● Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS (Personal Handy-phone
System) more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller. Failure to do so
may cause malfunction.
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing the
module. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction. A module can be replaced
online (while power is on) on any MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in the system where a CPU
module supporting the online module change function is used. Note that there are restrictions on the
modules that can be replaced online, and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure.
For details, refer to this manual and the manual for the corresponding module.
● After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the module to/from the base unit, the extended
SRAM cassette to/from the CPU module, or the terminal block to/from the module more than 50 times
(IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively. Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction.
● After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the SD memory card more than 500 times.
Exceeding the limit of 500 times may cause malfunction.
● Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module. Doing so may damage the
battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or any shock is
applied to it, dispose of it without using.
● Before handling the module, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the
human body. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
5
[Disposal Precautions]
CAUTION
● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate
them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (For details of the Battery Directive in EU
countries, refer to Page 678, Appendix 12.)
[Transportation Precautions]
CAUTION
● When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations. (For details of the regulated
models, refer to Page 677, Appendix 11.)
6
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;
i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major
or serious accident; and
ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of
the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.
(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general
industries.
MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR
LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR
USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS,
OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY
MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.
("Prohibited Application")
Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;
• Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any
other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.
• Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of
a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.
• Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as
Elevator and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation,
Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or
Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a
significant risk of injury to the public or property.
Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the
PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT
is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no
special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general
specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi
representative in your region.
7
INTRODUCTION
This manual provides hardware specifications, maintenance and inspection of the system, and troubleshooting of the CPU
modules, power supply modules, and base units required for operating the Q series programmable controllers.
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the
functions and performance of the Q series programmable controller to handle the product correctly.
When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system, ensure the applicability and confirm that
it will not cause system control problems.
Relevant CPU module
CPU module Model
Basic model QCPU Q00(J)CPU, Q01CPU
High Performance model QCPU Q02(H)CPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
Process CPU Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
Q00U(J)CPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UD(E)CPU, Q03UDVCPU,
Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q06UDVCPU,
Universal model QCPU
Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU,
Q26UD(E)HCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU
Precautions when using the Q series CPU module for the first time
Memory must be formatted using a programming tool before first use of the CPU module.
For details of memory formatting, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
Precautions for batteries
(1) When resuming operation with the CPU module which has been stored without battery:
The CPU module memory must be formatted using a programming tool. ( Page 264, Section 13.4)
Remark
This manual does not describe the functions of the CPU module.
For the functions, refer to the following.
Manuals for the CPU module used. (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
For multiple CPU systems, refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
For redundant systems, refer to the following.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
8
Memo
9
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PACKING LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
DISCONTINUED MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 26
1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 33
2.1 Overall Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.2 Component List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.3.1 Bus connection of GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
2.3.2 Peripheral device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE START-UP PROCEDURES 57
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 59
4.1 Installation Environment and Installation Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.1.1 Installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
4.1.2 Installation position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4.2 Mounting a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.2.1 Mounting precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
4.2.2 Base unit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
4.2.3 Installation and removal of module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
4.3 Connecting an Extension Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.3.1 Setting the extension base number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
4.3.2 Connection and disconnection of extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
4.3.3 Extension cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
4.3.4 Voltage drop when an extension base unit is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
4.4 Mounting and Removing a Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.5 Installing and Removing a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.6 Installing and Removing an SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.7 Installing and Removing an Extended SRAM Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.8 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.8.1 Wiring power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
4.8.2 Wiring of 18-point screw terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
4.8.3 Wiring to connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.8.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
CHAPTER 5 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 117
10
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE 119
6.1 Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.1.1 Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.1.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
6.1.3 Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
6.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.2.1 Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
6.2.2 High Performance model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
6.2.3 Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
6.2.4 Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
6.3 Switch Operation at the Time of Writing Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.3.1 Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
6.3.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
6.4 Reset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
6.4.1 Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
6.4.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
6.5 Latch Clear Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6.5.1 Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
6.5.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
6.6 Automatic Write to the Standard ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 187
7.1 Part Names and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
7.1.1 Base unit that can be used in combination with power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
7.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.2.1 Power supply module specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
7.2.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
7.2.3 Selecting the power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
7.2.4 Precautions on power supply capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
7.2.5 Life detection power supply module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
CHAPTER 8 BASE UNIT 223
8.1 Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
8.2 Extension Base Units that can be Combined with the Main Base Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
8.3 Specification Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
CHAPTER 9 MEMORY CARD 235
9.1 Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.1.1 List of usable memory cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
9.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
9.2.1 Memory card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
9.2.2 Specifications of the memory card battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
9.3 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
11
9.3.1 Battery installation into the memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
CHAPTER 10 SD MEMORY CARD 243
10.1 Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
10.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
10.3 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
10.4 Forcibly Disabling the SD Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
CHAPTER 11 EXTENDED SRAM CASSETTE 246
11.1 Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
11.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
11.3 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
CHAPTER 12 BATTERY 248
12.1 Battery Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
12.2 Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
CHAPTER 13 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 253
13.1 Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
13.2 Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
13.3 Replacement Procedure of the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
13.3.1 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
13.3.2 SRAM card battery replacement procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
13.4 Operating the Programmable Controller that Has been Stored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
CHAPTER 14 MODULE CHANGE DURING SYSTEM OPERATION 265
14.1 Online Module Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
14.2 Change of Redundant Power Supply Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING 276
15.1 Visual Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
15.1.1 When the POWER LED does not turn on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
15.1.2 When the POWER LED does not turn on in green . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
15.1.3 When the LIFE LED does not turn on in green or orange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
15.1.4 When the MODE LED does not turn on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
15.1.5 When the RUN LED does not turn on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
15.1.6 When the BOOT LED flickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
15.2 Checking the Error Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
15.3.1 Write to PLC and Read from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
15.3.2 Boot operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
15.3.3 Errors caused by hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
15.3.4 Ethernet communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
12
15.3.5 Socket communication function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
15.3.6 MC protocol function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
15.3.7 Predefined protocol function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
15.3.8 Transmission from an external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
15.3.9 Operating status of the CPU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
15.3.10 Errors caused by SFC program instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
15.3.11 I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
15.3.12 Power supply module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
15.4 Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
APPENDICES 306
Appendix 1 Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Appendix 1.1 Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Appendix 1.2 Reading error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Appendix 1.6 List of error codes (4000 to 4999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Appendix 1.7 List of error codes (5000 to 5999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Appendix 1.8 List of error codes (6000 to 6999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Appendix 1.9 List of error codes (7000 to 10000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Appendix 1.10 Clearing an error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module . . 411
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Appendix 4 Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Appendix 4.1 Display of battery consumption and reduction measures of the consumption . . . . . .601
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Appendix 4.3 SRAM card battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Appendix 5 Checking Serial Number and Function Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Appendix 5.1 Applicable software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Appendix 5.2 GX Configurator versions applicable to a single CPU system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Appendix 6 Added or Changed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Appendix 6.1 Basic model QCPU upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Appendix 6.2 High Performance model QCPU upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Appendix 6.3 Precautions for using older versions of the High Performance model QCPU . . . . . .641
Appendix 6.4 Process CPU upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Appendix 6.5 Redundant CPU upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Appendix 6.6 Universal model QCPU upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Appendix 7 Specifications of L1MEM-2GBSD and L1MEM-4GBSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Appendix 8.1 Requirements for compliance with the EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Appendix 8.1.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Appendix 8.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Appendix 8.1.3 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Appendix 8.1.4 Installation environment of the CC-Link/LT module and the AS-i module . . .662
13
Appendix 8.1.5 Power supply part of the power supply module, Q00JCPU, and Q00UJCPU
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Appendix 8.1.6 Precautions when using a MELSEC-A series module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Appendix 8.1.7 Others. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Appendix 8.2 Requirements to compliance with the Low Voltage Directive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Appendix 8.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller. . . . . . . . .667
Appendix 8.2.2 MELSEC-Q series programmable controller selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Appendix 8.2.3 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Appendix 8.2.4 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Appendix 8.2.5 External wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Appendix 10 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Appendix 11 Precautions for Battery Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Appendix 12 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States . . . . . 678
Appendix 12.1 Disposal precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Appendix 12.2 Exportation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Appendix 13 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Appendix 13.1 CPU modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Appendix 13.2 Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Appendix 13.3 Main base units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
Appendix 13.4 Extension base units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Appendix 13.5 Other optional items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703
INDEX 706
REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
14
MANUALS
To understand the main specifications, functions, and usage of the CPU module, refer to the basic manuals.
Read other manuals as well when using a different type of CPU module and its functions.
Order each manual as needed, referring to the following lists.
The numbers in the "CPU module" and the respective modules are as follows.
Number CPU module
1) Basic model QCPU
2) High Performance model QCPU
3) Process CPU
4) Redundant CPU
5) Universal model QCPU
● : Basic manual, : Other CPU module manuals/Use them to utilize functions.
(1) CPU module user's manual
Manual name CPU module
Description
< Manual number (model code) > 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
QnUCPU Users Manual (Function Explanation,
Functions, methods, and devices for
Program Fundamentals) ●
programming
<SH-080807ENG, 13JZ27>
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function
Functions, methods, and devices for
Explanation, Program Fundamentals) ● ● ● ●
programming
<SH-080808ENG, 13JZ28>
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System) Information on building multiple CPU systems
(system configurations, I/O numbers,
communications between CPU modules, and
communications with I/O modules and
<SH-080485ENG, 13JR75> intelligent function modules)
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System) Redundant system configuration, functions,
communication with external devices, and ●
<SH-080486ENG, 13JR76> troubleshooting
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in
Detailed description of communication via the
Ethernet Port)
built-in Ethernet ports of the CPU module
<SH-080811ENG, 13JZ29>
MELSEC-Q Programming/Structured Programming
Detailed description of the data logging function
Manual (Process Control Instructions)
of the CPU module
<SH-080893ENG, 13JZ39>
15
(2) Programming manual
Manual name CPU module
Description
< Manual number (model code) > 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common
Detailed description and usage of instructions
Instruction) ● ● ● ● ●
used in programs
<SH-080809ENG, 13JW10>
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC) System configuration, specifications, functions,
programming, and error codes for SFC
<SH-080041, 13JF60> (MELSAP3) programs
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (MELSAP-L) System configuration, specifications, functions,
programming, and error codes for SFC
<SH-080076, 13JF61> (MELSAP-L) programs
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Structured
System configuration and programming using
Text)
structured text language
<SH-080366E, 13JF68>
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (PID
Control Instructions) Dedicated instructions for PID control
<SH-080040, 13JF59>
QnPHCPU/QnPRHCPU Programming Manual
(Process Control Instructions) Dedicated instructions for process control
<SH-080316E, 13JF67>
(3) Operating manual
Manual name CPU module
Description
< Manual number (model code) > 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) System configuration, parameter settings, and
online operations of GX Works2, which are
● ● ● ● ●
common to Simple projects and Structured
<SH-080779ENG, 13JU63> projects
GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Operating methods of GX Developer, such as
programming, printing, monitoring, and
<SH-080373E, 13JU41> debugging
16
(4) Intelligent function module manual
Manual name CPU module
Description
< Manual number (model code) > 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Specifications, procedures and settings before
system operation, parameter setting,
programming, and troubleshooting of the CC-
<SH-080668ENG, 13JV16> Link IE Controller Network module
MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local
Specifications, procedures and settings before
Module User's Manual
system operation, parameter setting,
programming, and troubleshooting of the CC-
Link IE Field Network module
<SH-080917ENG, 13JZ47>
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Specifications, procedures and settings before
Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) system operation, parameter setting,
programming, and troubleshooting of a
MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC
<SH-080049, 13JF92> network)
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Specifications, procedures and settings before
Reference Manual (Remote I/O network) system operation, parameter setting,
programming, and troubleshooting of a
MELSECNET/H network system (remote I/O
<SH-080124, 13JF96> network)
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Specifications, procedures for data
Manual (Basic) communication with external devices, line
connection (open/close), fixed buffer
communication, random access buffer
communication, and troubleshooting of the
<SH-080009, 13JL88> Ethernet module
MELSEC-Q/L Ethernet Interface Module User's E-mail function, programmable controller CPU
Manual (Application) status monitoring function, communication via
CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE
Field Network, MELSECNET/H, or
MELSECNET/10, communication using the
data link instructions, and file transfer function
<SH-080010, 13JL89> (FTP server) of the Ethernet module
MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/Local Module
System configuration, performance
User's Manual
specifications, functions, handling, wiring, and
troubleshooting of the QJ61BT11N
<SH-080394E, 13JR64>
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module Overview, system configuration, specifications,
User's Manual (Basic) procedures before operation, basic data
communication method with external devices,
maintenance and inspection, and
troubleshooting for using the serial
<SH-080006, 13JL86> communication module
MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's
Special functions (specifications, usage, and
Manual (Application)
settings) and data communication method with
external devices of the serial communication
module
<SH-080007, 13JL87>
17
(5) Others
Manual name CPU module
Description
< Manual number (model code) > 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual Operating methods of iQ Sensor Solution, such
<SH-081133ENG, 13JV28> as programming and monitoring
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual Specifications, procedures before operation,
system configuration, programming, functions,
parameter settings, and troubleshooting of CC-
<SH-081684ENG, 13JX62> Link IE Field Network Basic
18
MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION
In this manual, pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below.
The following page illustration is for explanation purpose only, and is different from the actual pages.
"" is used for
screen names and items.
The chapter of
the current page is shown.
shows operating
procedures.
shows mouse
operations.*1
[ ] is used for items
in the menu bar and
the project window.
The section of
the current page is shown.
Ex. shows setting or
operating examples.
shows reference
manuals.
shows shows notes that
reference pages. requires attention.
shows useful
information.
*1 The mouse operation example is provided below. (For GX Works2)
19
Menu bar
Ex. [Online] [Write to PLC...]
Select [Online] on the menu bar,
and then select [Write to PLC...].
A window selected in the view selection area is displayed.
Ex. Project window [Parameter]
[PLC Parameter]
Select [Project] from the view selection
area to open the Project window.
In the Project window, expand [Parameter] and
select [PLC Parameter].
View selection area
Icon
High
Basic model Process Redundant Universal model Description
Performance
QCPU CPU CPU QCPU
model QCPU
High
Icons indicate that specifications described
Basic performance Process Redundant Universal
on the page contain some precautions.
20
TERMS
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.
* indicates a part of the model or version.
(Example): Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B Q3B
Term Description
CPU module type
Generic term for the Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU,
CPU module
Redundant CPU, and Universal model QCPU
Basic model QCPU Generic term for the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, and Q01CPU
High Performance model QCPU Generic term for the Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU
Process CPU Generic term for the Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, and Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU Generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU
Generic term for the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU,
Q03UDVCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Universal model QCPU Q06UDVCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q13UDVCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q26UDEHCPU,
Q50UDEHCPU, and Q100UDEHCPU
Generic term for the Q03UDVCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDEHCPU,
Built-in Ethernet port QCPU Q06UDVCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, and Q100UDEHCPU
Generic term for the Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, and
High-speed Universal model QCPU
Q26UDVCPU
Generic term for the Mitsubishi Electric motion controllers: Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN,
Motion CPU Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU, Q172CPUN-T, Q173CPUN-T, Q172HCPU-T, Q173HCPU-T,
Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q172DCPU-S1, Q173DCPU-S1, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU
Generic term for the MELSEC-Q series-compatible PC CPU modules manufactured by
PC CPU module CONTEC Co., Ltd.: PPC-CPU686(MS)-64, PPC-CPU686(MS)-128, and PPC-CPU852(MS)-
512
Generic term for the C Controller modules: Q06CCPU-V, Q06CCPU-V-B, Q12DCCPU-V,
C Controller module
Q24DHCCPU-V, and Q24DHCCPU-LS
Generic term for the Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, and
High-speed Universal model QCPU
Q26UDVCPU
Generic term for the Q03UDVCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDEHCPU,
Built-in Ethernet port QCPU Q06UDVCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, and Q100UDEHCPU
CPU module model
Generic term for the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU,
QnU(D)(H)CPU
Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, and Q26UDHCPU
Generic term for the Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, and
QnUDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
Generic term for the Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
QnUDE(H)CPU
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, and Q100UDEHCPU
21
Term Description
Base unit type
Generic term for the main base unit, extension base unit, slim type main base unit, redundant
Base unit power main base unit, redundant power extension base unit, redundant type extension base
unit base unit, and multiple CPU high speed main base unit
Main base unit Generic term for the Q3B, Q3SB, Q3RB, and Q3DB
Generic term for the Q5B, Q6B, Q6RB, Q6WRB, QA1S5B, QA1S6B,
Extension base unit
QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B, QA6B, and QA6ADP+A5B/A6B
Slim type main base unit Another term for the Q3SB
Redundant power main base unit Another term for the Q3RB
Redundant power extension base unit Another term for the Q6RB
Redundant type extension base unit Another term for the Q6WRB
Multiple CPU high speed main base
Another term for the Q3DB
unit
Generic term for the redundant power main base unit, redundant power extension base unit,
Redundant base unit
and redundant type extension base unit
Redundant power supply base unit Generic term for the redundant power main base unit and redundant power extension base unit
Base unit model
Q3B Generic term for the Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, and Q312B main base units
Q3SB Generic term for the Q32SB, Q33SB, and Q35SB slim type main base units
Q3RB Another term for the Q38RB main base unit for redundant power supply system
Q3DB Generic term for the Q35DB, Q38DB and Q312DB multiple CPU high speed main base units
Q5B Generic term for the Q52B and Q55B extension base units
Q6B Generic term for the Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, and Q612B extension base units
Q6RB Another term for the Q68RB extension base unit for redundant power supply system
Q6WRB Another term for Q65WRB extension base unit for redundant system
QA1S5B Another term for the QA1S51B extension base unit
QA1S6B Generic term for the QA1S65B and QA1S68B extension base units
QA6B Generic term for the QA65B and QA68B extension base units
A5B Generic term for the A52B, A55B, and A58B extension base units
A6B Generic term for the A62B, A65B, and A68B extension base units
QA6ADP+A5B/A6B Abbreviation for A large type extension base unit where the QA6ADP is mounted
QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B Abbreviation for A small type extension base unit where the QA1S6ADP is mounted
Power supply module
Generic term for the Q series power supply module, AnS series power supply module, A series
Power supply module power supply module, slim type power supply module, redundant power supply module, and life
detection power supply module
Generic term for the Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P, and Q64PN
Q series power supply module
power supply modules
AnS series power supply module Generic term for the A1S61PN, A1S62PN, and A1S63P power supply modules
Generic term for the A61P, A61PN, A62P, A63P, A68P, A61PEU, and A62PEU power supply
A series power supply module
modules
Slim type power supply module Abbreviation for the Q61SP slim type power supply module
Redundant power supply module Generic term for the Q63RP, Q64RPN and Q64RP redundant power supply modules
Life detection power supply module Abbreviation for the Q61P-D life detection power supply module
22
Term Description
Network module
Generic term for the CC-Link IE Controller Network module and the CC-Link IE Field Network
CC-Link IE module
module
MELSECNET/H module Abbreviation for the MELSECNET/H network module
Ethernet module Abbreviation for the Ethernet interface module
CC-Link module Abbreviation for the CC-Link system master/local module
Network
CC-Link IE Generic term for the CC-Link IE Controller Network and the CC-Link IE Field Network
MELSECNET/H Abbreviation for the MELSECNET/H network system
Memory extension
Memory card Generic term for the SRAM card, Flash card, and ATA cards
Generic term for the Q2MEM-1MBS, Q2MEM-2MBS, Q3MEM-4MBS, and Q3MEM-8MBS
SRAM card
SRAM cards
Flash card Generic term for the Q2MEM-2MBF and Q2MEM-4MBF Flash cards
ATA card Generic term for the Q2MEM-8MBA, Q2MEM-16MBA, and Q2MEM-32MBA ATA cards
Generic term for the NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM-4GBSD, NZ1MEM-8GBSD, NZ1MEM-
16GBSD, L1MEM-2GBSD, and L1MEM-4GBSD SD memory cards.
SD memory card
A memory device which consists of flash memory (abbreviation for Secure Digital Memory
Card)
Generic term for the Q4MCA-1MBS, Q4MCA-2MBS, Q4MCA-4MBS, and Q4MCA-8MBS
Extended SRAM cassette
extended SRAM cassette
Software package
Programming tool Generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer
GX Works2
Product name for the MELSEC programmable controller software package
GX Developer
PX Developer Product name for SWD5C-FBDQ process control FBD software package
Others
A CPU module which controls each I/O module and intelligent function module
Control CPU In a multiple CPU system, the CPU module which executes the control can be set for each
module.
Controlled module I/O modules and intelligent function modules which are controlled by a control CPU
Abbreviation for the MELSEC communication protocol. The MELSEC communication protocol
is a communication method to access from an external device to the CPU module according to
MC protocol
the communication procedure for the Q series programmable controller (such as a serial
communication module, Ethernet module).
QA6ADP Abbreviation for the QA6ADP QA conversion adapter module
QA1S6ADP Generic term for the QA1S6ADP and QA1S6ADP-S1 Q-AnS base unit conversion adapters
Extension cable Generic term for the QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, and QC100B extension cables
Tracking cable Generic term for the QC10TR and QC30TR tracking cables for the Redundant CPU
Generic term for the Q6BAT, Q7BAT, and Q8BAT CPU module batteries, Q2MEM-BAT SRAM
Battery
card battery, and Q3MEM-BAT SRAM card battery
Generic term for Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal, GOT-A*** series, GOT-F***
GOT
series, GOT1000 series, and GOT2000 series
23
PACKING LIST
The following items are included in the package of this product. Before use, check that all the items are included.
(1) CPU module
(a) Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU
Item Quantity
Module 1
Battery (Q6BAT) 1
Base unit installation screw (M4 × 14 screw) 4
Safety Guidelines (IB-0800423) 1
(b) Other than Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU
Item Quantity
Module 1
Battery (Q6BAT) 1
(2) Main base unit
Item Quantity
Unit 1
Base unit installation screw (M4 × 14 screw*1) 4/5*2
Safety Guidelines (IB-0800423) 1
*1 For the slim type main base unit, M4 × 12 screws are supplied.
*2 Screws as many as the number of installation holes are supplied.
(3) Extension base unit
Item Quantity
Unit 1
Base unit installation screw (M4 × 14 screw) 4/5*3
*3 Screws as many as the number of installation holes are supplied.
(4) Power supply module or I/O module
Item Quantity
Module 1
24
DISCONTINUED MODELS
The following models are described in this manual, but have no longer been produced.
For the onerous repair term after discontinuation of production, refer to "WARRANTY".
Model Production discontinuation
Q61P-A1 March 2009
Q61P-A2 March 2009
Q64P February 2010
L1MEM-2GBSD July 2015
L1MEM-4GBSD July 2015
Q64RP September 2015
25
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Features
This section describes the features of Q series CPU modules.
(1) Large number of I/O points
The Q Series CPU module supports the following number of actual I/O points accessible to the I/O modules
mounted on the base unit.
(a) Basic model QCPU
• Q00JCPU: 256 points (X/Y0 to FF)
• Q00CPU, Q01CPU: 1024 points (X/Y0 to 3FF)
Up to 2048 points (X/Y0 to 7FF) are supported as the number of I/O device points usable for refreshing the
remote I/O of the CC-Link and link I/O (LX, LY) of the MELSECNET/H.
(b) High Performance model QCPU
One module can support 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF).
Up to 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) are supported as the number of I/O device points usable for the remote I/O
stations in the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network, the CC-Link data link, and the MELSECNET/MINI-S3 data
link.
(c) Process CPU and Redundant CPU
One module can support 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF).
Up to 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) are supported as the number of I/O device points usable for the remote I/O
stations in the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network and CC-Link data link.
(d) Universal model QCPU
• Q00UJCPU: 256 points (X/Y0 to FF)
• Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU: 1024 points (X/Y0 to 3FF)
• Q02UCPU: 2048 points (X/Y0 to 7FF)
• Q03UD(E)CPU, Q03UDVCPU,
Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q04UDVCPU,
Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q06UDVCPU,
Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UDVCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU,
Q26UD(E)HCPU, Q26UDVCPU,
Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU: 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
Up to 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) are supported as the number of I/O device points usable for the remote I/O
stations in the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network and CC-Link data link.
26
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
(2) Large selection of CPU modules 1
The following lists the lineup of CPU available for various program size.
CPU module type Program size
Q00(J)CPU 8K steps
Basic model QCPU
Q01CPU 14K steps
Q02(H)CPU 28K steps
Q06HCPU 60K steps
High Performance model QCPU
Q12HCPU 124K steps
Q25HCPU 252K steps
Q02PHCPU 28K steps
Q06PHCPU 60K steps
Process CPU
Q12PHCPU 124K steps
Q25PHCPU 252K steps
Q12PRHCPU 124K steps
Redundant CPU
Q25PRHCPU 252K steps
Q00U(J)CPU 10K steps
Q01UCPU 15K steps
Q02UCPU 20K steps
Q03UD(E)CPU, Q03UDVCPU 30K steps
Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q04UDVCPU 40K steps
Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q06UDVCPU 60K steps
Universal model QCPU
Q10UD(E)HCPU 100K steps
Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q13UDVCPU 130K steps
Q20UD(E)HCPU 200K steps
1.1 Features
Q26UD(E)HCPU, Q26UDVCPU 260K steps
Q50UDEHCPU 500K steps
Q100UDEHCPU 1000K steps
27
(3) High-speed processing
High speed processing has been achieved.
CPU module type LD instruction processing speed
Q00JCPU 200ns
Basic model QCPU Q00CPU 160ns
Q01CPU 100ns
Q02CPU 79ns
High Performance model QCPU Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, 34ns
Process CPU
Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
Q00UJCPU 120ns
Q00UCPU 80ns
Q01UCPU 60ns
Q02UCPU 40ns
Q03UD(E)CPU 20ns
Universal model QCPU Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU,
Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU,
9.5ns
Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU,
Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU,
Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, 1.9ns
Q26UDVCPU
The MELSEC Q series base unit high-speed system bus has achieved faster access to an intelligent function
module and link refresh with a network module.
(a) Basic model QCPU
MELSECNET/H link refreshing: 2.2ms/2K words*1
*1 The Q01CPU is used without using SB and SW, and the MELSECNET/H network module is mounted on the main base
unit.
(b) High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU or
Universal model QCPU
Access to the intelligent function module: 20µs/word (approximately 7 times*2)
MELSECNET/H link refreshing: 4.6ms/8K words (approximately 4.3 times*2)
*2 These are the values resulted from the following comparison:
• Comparing Q02HCPU with Q2ASHCPU-S1
• Comparing Q25PHCPU with Q4ARCPU
• Comparing Q25PRHCPU with Q4ARCPU
28
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
(4) Increase in debugging efficiency through high-speed communication with a 1
programming tool
High-speed communications at 115.2Kbps maximum are available by using RS-232 which reducing the time
required for writing and reading of programs and monitoring. Also, the communication time efficiency of
debugging has been increased.
In addition, High Performance model QCPUs (except for the Q02CPU), Process CPUs, Redundant CPUs and
Universal model QCPUs support USB, so that high-speed communications of 12Mbps are available.
Q25HCPU(USB) 12
Q25HCPU(RS-232) 30
Q2ASHCPU 86
A2USHCPU-S1 94
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 (Unit:s)
(5) Use of AnS/A series I/O modules and special function modules
The AnS/A series compatible extension base units (QA1S5B, QA1S6B, QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B,
QA6B, and QA6ADP+A5B/A6B) can be connected to the main base unit where the High Performance
model QCPU or Universal model QCPU*1 is mounted. This enables the use of AnS/A series I/O modules and
special function modules.
*1 The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "13102" or later is applicable.
(6) Miniaturized modules (space-saving size)
The installation space for the Q series has been reduced by approx. 60% compared with the AnS series.
1.1 Features
AnS series
Q series
98mm
5-slot main base unit: 245mm (Depth: 98mm)
8-slot main base unit: 328mm
12-slot main base unit: 439mm
29
(7) Connection of up to 7 extension base units
Up to seven extension base units can be connected to the Q series CPU module.
The overall extension cable length is 13.2m, which allows flexible layout of base units.
(8) Memory extension
By extending the memory capacity of a CPU module, large size files can be managed. Comments can be set to
all data devices and old programs can be saved as correction history.
(a) Memory card
A memory card (maximum 32M bytes) can be installed. (The maximum size is available only for ATA cards.)
Memory cards are used for the following operations.
• Boot operation
• Restoring backup data
• Writing programs to the ROM
Data that cannot be stored in the built-in memory of the CPU module, such as sampling trace data and file
register data, can be stored as well.
(b) SD memory card
SD memory cards are used for the following operations.
• Boot operation
• Restoring backup data
• Data backup
• Data logging
(c) Extended SRAM cassette
An extended SRAM cassette extends the capacity of the standard RAM in a CPU module.
• An extended SRAM cassette can be used together with an SD memory card, allowing users to store data
separately (for example, boot data in an SD memory card and device data in an extended SRAM
cassette). This improves maintainability.
• With existing CPU modules, file register areas in the standard RAM and an SRAM card cannot be
accessed sequentially, and the boundary needs to be considered at programming. If the standard RAM
capacity is extended using an extended SRAM cassette, the device area can be extended without
considering the boundary.
Remark
Memory extension methods differ depending on the CPU module. ( Page 35, Section 2.2)
30
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
(9) Automatic write to the standard ROM Note 1.1, Note 1.2 Note 1.1 Note 1.2 1
Parameters and programs in a memory card or SD memory card can be written to the standard ROM of the CPU
module without using a programming tool.
If the boot operation is being performed from the standard ROM, parameters and programs in a memory card or
SD memory card can be written to the standard ROM by inserting it to the CPU module. Users do not need a
programming tool (personal computer) on hand to modify parameters and programs.
(10)External input/output forced on/off Note 1.1
Forced on and off of external input and output is available using a programming tool even when the CPU module
is running or program is being processed.
Also, wiring test and operation test can be conducted without halting the CPU module by forcibly turning on or off
the I/O.
(11)Remote password function
When the built-in Ethernet port QCPU, Ethernet module, or serial communication module is externally accessed,
an access to the CPU module can be controlled by setting a remote password.
(12)Remote I/O network of MELSECNET/H Note 1.1
A MELSECNET/H remote I/O system can be configured by installing a MELSECNET/H remote master station.
● The remote password can be set up when the Ethernet module, or serial communication module of function version B or
later is used.
1.1 Features
● The MELSECNET/H remote I/O network can be implemented when the MELSECNET/H network module of function
version B or later is used.
(13)Support of multiple CPU systems
CPU module supports the multiple CPU system.
Multiple CPU systems can be constructed in combination with CPU modules, motion CPU(s), PC CPU module(s),
and C Controller module.
For details of the multiple CPU system, refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
Note 1.1 Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not support the following functions.
• Automatic write to the standard ROM
• External input/output forced on/off
• MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Note 1.2 Universal
The Universal model QCPU does not support the following function.
• Parameter setting of automatic write to the standard ROM
31
(14)Support of redundant power supply systems
The redundant power supply system can be configured using a redundant base unit and redundant power supply
modules.
The system can continue operation even if one of the power supply modules fails, since the other will supply the
power.
(15)Direct connection to Ethernet Note 1.3 Note 1.3
The Built-in Ethernet port QCPU module allows direct connections to Ethernet.
For details of the functions, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
Note 1.3 Universal
Only the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU supports this function.
32
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes system configurations, precautions, and components of the Q Series CPU module.
2
This section describes system configurations for a single CPU system with the Basic model QCPU, High Performance
model QCPU, Process CPU, or Universal model QCPU, and a system configuration when using GOT by bus
connection.
For a multiple CPU system and redundant system (when using the Redundant CPU), refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
33
2.1 Overall Configuration
Extended SRAM cassette
Memory card, SD memory card
Basic model QCPU
High Performance model QCPU
Process CPU
Universal model QCPU
Battery for QCPU (Q6BAT)
Q7BAT-SET
Q3 B main base unit
Q3 RB redundant power main base unit
Q3 SB slim type main base unit
Q3 DB multiple CPU high speed main base unit
Battery holder Battery for QCPU (Q7BAT)
Q8BAT-SET
Extension cable
Power supply module/I/O module/Intelligent function module/Special function module
Q5 B extension base unit
Q8BAT connection cable Battery for QCPU (Q8BAT) Q6 B extension base unit
Q6 RB redundant power extension base unit
QA1S5 B extension base unit
QA1S6 B extension base unit
QA6 B extension base unit
The combination of modules depends on the devices used in the configuration.
For the applicable combinations, refer to the following.
• CPU modules and base units, batteries, memory cards, SD memory cards, and/or extended SRAM
cassettes ( Page 35, Section 2.2)
• Base units and power supply modules ( Page 187, CHAPTER 7)
• Main base units and extension base units ( Page 223, CHAPTER 8)
• CPU modules and intelligent function modules or special function modules
( User's manual for each module)
To correctly configure a system, observe precautions described in Page 39, Section 2.3.
34
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.2 Component List
(1) Basic model QCPU
2
Item Description
Main base unit Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B
Applicable main base Redundant power main base unit Q38RB
unit*1 Slim type main base unit Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB
Multiple CPU high speed main base unit Q35DB, Q38DB, Q312DB
Model requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Applicable extension base
Model requiring a Q series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
unit
Redundant power extension base unit Q68RB
Maximum number of
Q00JCPU: 2
connectable extension
Q00CPU, Q01CPU: 4
base units
Maximum number of Q00JCPU: 16 (max. 16 slots)
mountable modules Q00CPU, Q01CPU: 24 (max. 24 slots)
Extension cable QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
Total length of extension
13.2m
cables
Memory extension ----
Applicable battery Q6BAT
*1 The Q00JCPU does not require a power supply module and the main base unit since the module is an integrated
combination of a power supply module and the main base unit.
2.2 Component List
35
(2) High Performance model QCPU
Item Description
Main base unit Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B
Redundant power main base unit Q38RB
Applicable main base unit
Slim type main base unit Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB
Multiple CPU high speed main base unit Q35DB, Q38DB, Q312DB
Model requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Model requiring a Q series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
Redundant power extension base unit Q68RB
Model requiring no AnS series power supply
Applicable extension base QA1S51B, QA1S6ADP+A1S5B*2
unit module*1
Model requiring a AnS series power supply module*1 QA1S65B, QA1S68B, QA1S6ADP+A1S6B*2
Model requiring A series power supply module*1 QA65B, QA68B, QA6ADP+A6B
Model requiring no A series power supply module*1 QA6ADP+A5B
Maximum number of
connectable extension 7
base units
Maximum number of
64 (max. 64 slots)
mountable modules
Extension cable QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
Total length of extension
13.2m
cables
SRAM card Q2MEM-1MBS, Q2MEM-2MBS, Q3MEM-4MBS
Memory extension Flash card Q2MEM-2MBF, Q2MEM-4MBF
ATA card Q2MEM-8MBA, Q2MEM-16MBA, Q2MEM-32MBA
Applicable battery Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT
*1 The A/AnS series extension base units are applicable only when the Q3B is used as a main base unit.
*2 When the QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B is used, the maximum number of extension base units is 1, and the maximum
number of modules that can be mounted is 20 (with a maximum of 20 slots available). When the QA1S6ADP-
S1+A1S5B/A1S6B is used, the maximum number of extension base units is 3, and the maximum number of
modules that can be mounted is 36 (with a maximum of 36 slots available).
36
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(3) Process CPU
Item Description
Main base unit Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B 2
Applicable main base unit Redundant power main base unit Q38RB
Multiple CPU high speed main base unit Q35DB, Q38DB, Q312DB
Model requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Applicable extension base
Model requiring a Q-series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
unit
Redundant power extension base unit Q68RB
Maximum number of
connectable extension 7
base units
Maximum number of
64 (max. 64 slots)
mountable modules
Extension cable QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
Total length of extension
13.2m
cables
SRAM card Q2MEM-1MBS, Q2MEM-2MBS, Q3MEM-4MBS
Memory extension Flash card Q2MEM-2MBF, Q2MEM-4MBF
ATA card Q2MEM-8MBA, Q2MEM-16MBA, Q2MEM-32MBA
Applicable battery Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT
2.2 Component List
37
(4) Universal model QCPU
Item Description
Main base unit Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B
Applicable main base Redundant power main base unit Q38RB
unit*1 slim type main base unit Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB
Multiple CPU high speed main base unit Q35DB, Q38DB, Q312DB
Model requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Model requiring a Q-series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
Redundant power extension base unit Q68RB
Model requiring no AnS series power supply
Applicable extension base QA1S51B, QA1S6ADP+A1S5B*4
module*3
unit
Model requiring an AnS series power supply
QA1S65B, QA1S68B, QA1S6ADP+A1S6B*4
module*3
Model requiring no A series power supply module*3 QA65B, QA68B, QA6ADP+A6B
Model requiring an A series power supply module*3 QA6ADP+A5B
Maximum number of Q00UJCPU: 2
connectable extension Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU: 4
base units Other than above: 7
Q00UJCPU: 16 (max. 16 slots)
Maximum number of Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU: 24 (max. 24 slots)
mountable modules Q02UCPU: 36 (max. 36 slots)
Other than above: 64 (max. 64 slots)
Extension cable QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
Total length of extension
13.2m
cables
Q2MEM-1MBS, Q2MEM-2MBS, Q3MEM-4MBS,
Other than SRAM card
Q3MEM-8MBS
QnUDVCPU
Flash card Q2MEM-2MBF, Q2MEM-4MBF
*2
ATA card Q2MEM-8MBA, Q2MEM-16MBA, Q2MEM-32MBA
Memory
extension NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM-4GBSD, NZ1MEM-
SD memory card 8GBSD, NZ1MEM-16GBSD, L1MEM-2GBSD,
QnUDVCPU L1MEM-4GBSD
Q4MCA-1MBS, Q4MCA-2MBS, Q4MCA-4MBS,
Extended SRAM cassette
Q4MCA-8MBS
Applicable battery Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT
*1 The Q00JCPU does not require a power supply module and the main base unit since the module is an integrated
combination of a power supply module and the main base unit.
*2 Memory cards cannot be used in the Q00U(J)CPU and Q01UCPU.
*3 The A/AnS series extension base units can be used when the following conditions are satisfied.
• The serial number (first five digits) of the Universal model QCPU used is "13102" or later.
• The Q3B or Q3DB is used as a main base unit, or the Q00UJCPU is used.
*4 When the QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B is used, the maximum number of extension base units is 1, and the maximum
number of modules that can be mounted is 20 (with a maximum of 20 slots available). When the QA1S6ADP-
S1+A1S5B/A1S6B is used, the maximum number of extension base units is 3, and the maximum number of
modules that can be mounted is 36 (with a maximum of 36 slots available).
38
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration
This section describes restrictions on the system configuration using the Q series CPU module.
2
(1) Number of mountable modules
The number of mountable modules and supported functions are restricted depending on the module type.
(a) When the Basic model QCPU is used
Maximum number of
Product Model
modules/units per system
• QJ71GP21-SX
CC-Link IE Controller Network module
• QJ71GP21S-SX
• QJ71LP21
• QJ71BR11
• QJ71LP21-25 Only 1 module*1
MELSECNET/H module • QJ71LP21S-25
• QJ71LP21G
• QJ71LP21GE
• QJ71NT11B
• QJ71E71
• QJ71E71-B2
Ethernet module Only 1 module
• QJ71E71-B5
• QJ71E71-100
• QJ61BT11
CC-Link module Up to 2 modules*2
• QJ61BT11N
• QI60*1
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration
• QX40H*6
Interrupt module • QX70H*6 Only 1 module*3
• QX80H*6
• QX90H*6
High speed data logger module • QD81DL96 Only 1 module*5
High speed data communication module • QJ71DC96 Only 1 module*5
• GOT-A900 Series (for bus
connection only)*4
• GOT1000 Series (for bus
GOT Up to 5 units
connection only)*4
• GOT2000 Series (for bus
connection only)*4
*1 The number is a total of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module and MELSECNET/H module.
*2 Modules of function version B or later are available.
*3 The number is for interrupt modules with no interrupt pointer setting.
With interrupt pointer setting, there is no restriction on the number of modules.
For interrupt pointer setting, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*4 For the available GOT models, refer to the following.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (GT Works2 Version2/GT Designer2 Version2 Compatible Connection System
Manual)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
*5 One module can be mounted for one control CPU.
*6 The module is available only when the interrupt module is selected by setting the function selector switch (SW2) to OFF.
39
(b) When the High Performance model QCPU or Process CPU is used
Maximum number of modules/units
Product Model
per system
CC-Link IE Controller Network • QJ71GP21-SX
Up to 2 modules
module*1 • QJ71GP21S-SX
• QJ71LP21
• QJ71BR11 Up to 4 modules in
• QJ71LP21-25 total
MELSECNET/H module • QJ71LP21S-25 Up to 4 modules
• QJ71LP21G
• QJ71LP21GE
• QJ71NT11B
• QJ71E71
• QJ71E71-B2
Ethernet module Up to 4 modules
• QJ71E71-B5
• QJ71E71-100
• QJ61BT11
CC-Link module No restriction*2
• QJ61BT11N
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 data link • A1SJ71PT32-S3 No restriction
module*3 • A1SJ71T32-S3 (Auto refresh setting not allowed)
• A1SD51S
• A1SD21-S1
AnS Series special function • A1SJ71J92-S3(When using GET/PUT service)
Up to 6 modules in total
module*3 • A1SJ71AP23Q
• A1SJ71AR23Q
• A1SJ71AT23BQ
• A1SI61*3
• QI60
Interrupt module • QX40H*5 Only 1 module
• QX70H*5
• QX80H*5
• QX90H*5
High speed data logger module • QD81DL96 Only 1 module*6
High speed data communication
• QJ71DC96 Only 1 module*6
module*7
• GOT-A900 Series (only for bus connection)*4
GOT • GOT1000 Series (only for bus connection)*4 Up to 5 units
*4
• GOT2000 Series (for bus connection only)
*1 Only the High Performance model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "09012" or later and Process CPU
whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later can be used.
*2 One CPU module can control the following number of modules by setting CC-Link network parameters in a programming
tool.
• CPU modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "08031" or earlier: up to 4 modules
• CPU modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "08032" or later: up to 8 modules
There is no restriction on the number of modules when the parameters are set with the CC-Link dedicated instructions.
For the CC-Link system master/local modules whose parameters can be set by the dedicated instructions, refer to the
following.
MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
*3 The module is available only when the High Performance model QCPU is used.
*4 For the available GOT models, refer to the following.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (GT Works2 Version2/GT Designer2 Version2 Compatible Connection System
Manual)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
*5 The module is available only when the interrupt module is selected by setting the function selector switch (SW2) to OFF.
*6 One module can be mounted for one control CPU.
*7 The function version of the High-Performance model QCPU must be B or later.
40
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(c) When the Redundant CPU is used
For the modules with restriction on the number of mountable modules, refer to the following.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
(d) When the Universal model QCPU is used 2
Maximum number of
Product Model
modules/units per system
CC-Link IE Controller Network • QJ71GP21-SX
module*1 • QJ71GP21S-SX
• QJ71LP21
• QJ71BR11
• QJ71LP21-25 Up to 4 modules*2*3
MELSECNET/H module • QJ71LP21S-25
• QJ71LP21G
• QJ71LP21GE
• QJ71NT11B
CC-Link IE Field network module • QJ71GF11-T2 No restriction*8
• QJ71E71
• QJ71E71-B2
Ethernet module Up to 4 modules*3
• QJ71E71-B5
• QJ71E71-100
• QJ61BT11
CC-Link module No restriction*4*5
• QJ61BT11N
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 data link • A1SJ71PT32-S3 No restriction
*11 • A1SJ71T32-S3 (Auto refresh setting not allowed)
module
• A1SD51S
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration
• A1SD21-S1
• A1SJ71J92-S3
AnS series special function module*11 (When using GET/PUT service) Up to 6 modules in total
• A1SJ71AP23Q
• A1SJ71AR23Q
• A1SJ71AT23BQ
• A1SI61*11
• QX40H*10
Interrupt module • QX70H*10 Only 1 module*6
• QX80H*10
• QX90H*10
High speed data logger module*12 • QD81DL96 Only 1 module*9
High speed data communication
• QJ71DC96 Only 1 module*9
module
• GOT1000 Series (only for bus
connection)*7
GOT Up to 5 units
• GOT2000 Series (for bus connection
only)*7
*1 Only the CC-Link IE Controller Network module whose serial number (first five digits) is "09042" or later can be used.
*2 The number is a total of the CC-Link IE Controller Network modules and MELSECNET/H network modules.
*3 The number of mountable modules for the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU is only one module, and two
modules for the Q02UCPU.
*4 The function version of the Universal model QCPU must be B or later.
41
*5 One CPU module can control the following number of modules by setting CC-Link network parameters in a programming
tool.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU: up to 2 modules
• Q02UCPU: up to 4 modules
• CPU modules other than above: up to 8 modules
There is no restriction on the number of modules when the parameters are set with the CC-Link dedicated instructions.
For the CC-Link system master/local modules whose parameters can be set with the dedicated instructions, refer to the
following.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
*6 The number is for interrupt modules with no interrupt pointer setting.
With interrupt pointer setting, there is no restriction on the number of modules.
For interrupt pointer setting, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*7 For the available GOT models, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
*8 One CPU module can control the following number of modules by setting CC-Link network parameters in a programming
tool.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU: up to 2 modules
• Q02UCPU: up to 4 modules
• CPU modules other than above: up to 8 modules
There is no restriction on the number of modules when the parameters are set with the CC-Link IE Field Network
dedicated instructions.
For the CC-Link IE Field Network modules whose parameters can be set with the dedicated instructions, refer to the
following.
MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
*9 One module can be mounted for one control CPU.
*10 The module is available only when the interrupt module is selected by setting the function selector switch (SW2) to OFF.
*11 This module is applicable only when the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "13102" or later
is used.
*12 The High-speed Universal model QCPU supports only the high speed data logger module whose serial number (first five
digits) is "14122" or later.
42
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(2) Modules with restrictions when used with the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
The following table lists modules with restrictions when used with the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
Product Model Serial number (first five digits)
QJ71LP21-25
2
QJ71LP21S-25
Some modules have restrictions depending on
MELSECNET/H module QJ71LP21G
the use conditions.*1
QJ71LP21GE
QJ71BR11
QJ71C24N
"10042" or later
Serial communication module QJ71C24N-R2
(No restrictions when used with the QnUDVCPU)
QJ71C24N-R4
Web server module QJ71WS96 "10012" or later
MES interface module QJ71MES96 ("14122" or later when used with the QnUDVCPU)
*1 If the following conditions are all met, use the MELSECNET/H module whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or
later.
1) A multiple CPU system containing the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU is configured.
2) A programming tool or GOT is connected to an Ethernet port of the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
3) The programming tool or GOT connected accesses another station via the MELSECNET/H module controlled by
another CPU module.
4) The access target CPU module on another station is A/QnA series.
(3) Number of available slots
Empty slots are included in the number of available slots (modules) in the base unit.
(One slot is occupied even when "empty" and "0 points" are set for the slot 2 as shown in the following figure.)
The number of available slots (modules) varies depending on the base unit.
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration
Page 223, CHAPTER 8
For the assignment concepts of base units and I/O numbers, refer to the following.
User's manual for the CPU module used (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
CPU 0 1 2 3 4
Input Input Empty Input Output
Number of 16 16 0 16 16
slot points points points point points points
Occupies 1 slot.
(4) Power capacity
The power may be insufficient depending on the combination of the mounted modules or the number of the
mounted modules. When mounting modules, consider the power capacity.
If the power is insufficient, change the combination of modules so that the power is sufficient.
(5) External devices connected to Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
When connecting external devices to Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, power off the module and the external devices
before connecting.
43
(6) Precautions for the number of mountable modules
Mount modules so that the total number of I/O points does not exceed the point range of the CPU module.
Modules can be mounted in any slot within the available range.
Even if the total number of slots of the main base unit and extension base units exceeds the number of available
slots (for example, even if six12-slot base units are used), no error occurs as long as modules are mounted within
the available range.
If a module is mounted exceeding the available range, "SP.UNIT LAY ERR." (error code: 2124) occurs.
Main base unit
Q312B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot number
Power supply CPU module
module
Extension base unit
Q612B
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Extension 1
Q612B
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Extension 2
Q612B
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Extension 3
Q612B
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Extension 4
When the GOT has been bus-
connected, one slot of extension
base 1 is used.
Also one GOT occupies 16 I/O
Q612B
points.
60 61 62 63 Extension 5 When using the GOT, consider
the number of slots and the
number of I/O points.
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Refer to the GOT Manual for
details of busconnecting the GOT.
Modules can be Modules cannot be installed.
installed. (Installing modules will result in error.)
44
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(7) Precautions when using AnS/A series modules
1) When using the AnS series special function modules shown below, a limitation is placed on an accessible
device range. 2
• A1SJ71J92-S3 type JEMANET interface module
• A1SD51S type intelligent communication module
Device Accessible device range
Input (X), Output (Y) X/Y0 to 7FF
Internal relay (M), Latch relay (L) M/L0 to 8191
Link relay (B) B0 to FFF
Timer (T) T0 to 2047
Counter (C) C0 to 1023
Data register (D) D0 to 6143
Link register (W) W0 to FFF
Annunciator (F) F0 to 2047
2) The modules listed below cannot be used.
Product Model
A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR11, A1SJ71LR21, A1SJ71QLP21,
MELSECNET/10 network module
A1SJ71QLP21S, A1SJ71QBR11, A1SJ71QLR21
MELSECNET(II), /B data link module A1SJ71AP21, A1SJ71AR21, A1SJ71AT21B
A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2(-B5),
Ethernet module
A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2(-B5)
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration
A1SJ71UC24-R2(-PRF), A1SJ71QC24(-R2), A1SJ71QC24N(-R2),
Serial communication module, computer link module
A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2)
Computer link/multidrop link module A1SJ71UC24-R4*1
CC-Link system master/local module A1SJ61BT11, A1SJ61QBT11
ME-NET interface module A1SJ71ME81
*1 Only multidrop link function can be used. The computer link function and printer function cannot be used.
3) The AnS/A series dedicated instructions for the following modules cannot be used.
Rewriting using the FROM or TO instruction is required.
Product Model
High speed counter module A1SD61, A1SD62, A1SD62D(-S1), A1SD62E
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 A1SJ71PT32-S3, A1SJ71T32-S3
Positioning module A1SD75P1-S3(P2-S3/P3-S3)
ID module A1SJ71ID1-R4, A1SJ71ID2-R4
45
4) System configurations and functions are partially restricted when writing the parameters set under the "High
speed interrupt fixed scan interval" setting.
For the restrictions, refer to the following.
User's manual for the CPU module used (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
5) For the restrictions on mounting an AnS series module on the QA1S6ADP+A1S5oB/A1S6oB, refer to the
following.
QA1S6ADP Q-AnS Base Unit Conversion Adapter User's Manual
QA1S6ADP-S1 Q-AnS Base Unit Conversion Adapter User's Manual
6) For restrictions on mounting the A series module on the QA6B or QA6ADP+A5B/A6B, refer to the
following.
QA65B/QA68B Extension Base Unit User's Manual
QA6ADP QA Conversion Adapter Module User's Manual
7) For restrictions on using varying AnS/A series compatible extension base units, refer to Page 78, Section
4.3.
46
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.3.1 Bus connection of GOT
In the system with the Q series CPU module, the GOT can be bus-connected using the extension cable connector of
the main base unit or extension base unit. 2
This section describes the system configuration when a GOT is bus-connected to the CPU module.
For details of bus-connection of GOT, refer to the following.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
(1) GOT recognized by CPU module
When a GOT is bus-connected, the CPU module recognizes the GOT as an intelligent function module with 16
I/O points.
For this reason, the I/O numbers must be assigned to the CPU module in the GOT setup.
(When bus-connecting a GOT, one extension level (16 points x 10 slots) must be occupied.)
For details of the GOT setup, refer to the following.
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extension Function /Option Function)
GT15 User's Manual
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
(2) Maximum number of GOTs
Up to five GOTs can be bus-connected.
2.3.1 Bus connection of GOT
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration
47
(3) Precautions
• When a GOT is bus-connected to the CPU module, connect the GOT after the last base unit in the system.
Do not position the GOT between base units.
• Extension cables for connecting a GOT on the bus must be a maximum of 13.2m in total length.
• A bus extension connector box (A9GT-QCNB) is required when a first GOT connected on the bus is installed
13.2m or more away from the main base unit. (Note that the bus extension connector box cannot be used for
the Q00JCPU.)
For details of the A9GT-QCNB, refer to the following.
A9GT-QCNB Type Bus Extension Connector Box User's Manual
• When a redundant base unit (Q3RB/Q6RB/Q6WRB) is used, a GOT cannot be bus-connected.
• When the QA1S6B extension base unit is used, connect the GOT after the last extension base unit in the
system, but assign I/O numbers subsequent to those of the Q6B/Q5B.
Extension
stage number I/O number
Q38B main base unit 00 to 7F
Q68B extension base unit 1 80 to FF
QA1S68B extension base unit 3 1A0 to 21F
GOT 2 100 to 19F
• When the QA1S5B, QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B, QA6B, or QA6ADP+A5B/A6B extension base
unit is used, a GOT cannot be bus-connected.
• Before starting up the CPU module, set the extension level number and slot number (initial setting) in the
GOT to be bus-connected.
• Apply the power to the CPU module and GOT by either of the following way.
1) Simultaneously power on the CPU module and GOT.
2) Power on the CPU module first, and then the GOT.
• For the applicable GOT, refer to Page 39, Section 2.3 (1).
• Ground the FG wire of the cable connecting the programmable controller and the GOT on the GOT side.
For the grounding method, refer to the manual for the GOT used.
48
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(4) Outline of system configuration
Main base unit ... The figure shows the configuration when 16-point modules are loaded to each slot.
Q35B (5 slots occupied)
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 .... Slot number
2
00 to 0F
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
30 to 3F
40 to 4F
.... I/O number
Q series
power supply CPU module
module
Extension base unit ... The figure shows the configuration when 16-point modules are loaded to each slot.
Q68B (8 slots occupied)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
C0 to CF
B0 to BF
A0 to AF
50 to 5F
60 to 6F
70 to 7F
80 to 8F
90 to 9F
Q65B (5 slots occupied)
13 14 15 16 17
100 to 10F
110 to 11F
D0 to DF
E0 to EF
F0 to FF
2.3.1 Bus connection of GOT
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 Set on
slots No.: 0 slots No.: 1 slots No.: 2 slots No.: 3 slots No.: 4 the GOT
side.
Stage extension image for GOT connection viewed from CPU module
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
120 to 12F
130 to 13F
140 to 14F
150 to 15F
160 to 16F
GOT (No. of extension stages: 3)
16 points ×10 slots occupied
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Set to empty in "I/O assignment setting"
of PLC parameter
49
Note 2.1
Maximum number
• Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU: 2
of connectable
• Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, or
extension base units The final level is for GOT only.
Q02UCPU: 4
(for GOT bus
• CPU modules other than above: 7
connection)
• Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU: 16 - (number of connected GOTs)
Maximum number
• Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU, or Q01UCPU: 24 - (number of connected GOTs)
of mountable
• Q02UCPU: 36 - (number of connected GOTs)
modules
• CPU modules other than above: 64 - (number of connected GOTs)
Applicable main
Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B, Q35DB, Q38DB, Q312DB
base unit
Model requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Applicable Model requiring a Q-series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
extension base unit Model requiring a AnS series power supply
QA1S65B, QA1S68B
module Note 2.2
Applicable
QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
extension cable
Q series power
supply module Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P, Q64PN
Note 2.1
AnS series power
supply module A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P
Note 2.2
Note 2.2
Note 2.1 Basic Universal
Since the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU are modules integrated with a power supply module and main base unit, the main
base unit (Q3B) and Q series power supply module are not required.
High
Note 2.2 performance Universal
Only the High Performance model QCPU or the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "13102"
or later supports the use of these extension base units.
50
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.3.2 Peripheral device configuration
This section describes peripheral devices that can be used in a system where the Basic model QCPU, High
Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, or Universal model QCPU is installed. 2
(1) When the Basic model QCPU is used
Basic model QCPU
Personal Computer (GX Works2, GX Developer, GX Configurator) *1 RS-232 cable
2.3.2 Peripheral device configuration
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration
*1 For the versions of GX Works2, GX Developer, and GX Configurator that can be used with the Basic model QCPU, refer
to Page 634, Appendix 5.1.
51
(2) When the High Performance model QCPU is used
High Performance model QCPU
Memory card*1
RS-232 cable
Personal Computer
(GX Works2, GX Developer, GX Configurator)*4
USB cable
(Connector type B)*2, *3
Memory card*1 PC card
adapter
Programming unit, connection cable*5, *6
*1 Format ATA cards by a programming tool only. ( Page 240, Section 9.3)
*2 Not applicable to the Q02CPU.
*3 For the writing method to a memory card and USB cables, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
*4 For the GX Works2, GX Developer and GX Configurator versions that can be used with the High Performance model
QCPU, refer to Page 634, Appendix 5.1.
*5 For inquiries and orders of a programming unit (EPU01) and connection cable (EPU20R2CBL), please contact your
local Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. sales office.
*6 Programming units cannot be used when the "High speed interrupt fixed scan interval" parameter is written to the High
Performance model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is “04012” or later.
52
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(3) When the Process CPU is used
Process CPU
Memory card*1
Personal Computer RS-232 cable
(GX Works2, GX Developer,
GX Configurator, PX Developer)*3
Memory card*1 PC card USB cable
adapter (Connector type B)*2
*1 Format ATA cards by a programming tool only. ( Page 240, Section 9.3)
*2 For the writing method to a memory card and USB cables, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
*3 For the GX Works2, GX Developer, GX Configurator, and PX Developer versions that can be used with the Process
CPU, refer to Page 634, Appendix 5.1.
2.3.2 Peripheral device configuration
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration
53
(4) When the Universal model QCPU is used
(a) QnU(D)(H)CPU
Universal model QCPU
Memory card*1
Personal Computer
(GX Works2, GX Developer, RS-232 cable
GX Configurator)*3
Memory card*1 PC card USB cable
adapter (Connector type B)*2
*1 Format ATA cards by a programming tool only. ( Page 240, Section 9.3)
*2 For the writing method to a memory card and USB cables, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
*3 For the GX Works2, GX Developer and GX Configurator versions that can be used with the Universal model QCPU,
refer to Page 634, Appendix 5.1.
54
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(b) QnUDVCPU
Universal model QCPU
2
Extended SRAM cassette
SD memory card 1
Personal Computer
(GX Works2) 3 4
Ethernet cable
USB cable 2
(Connector type miniB)
*1 For the writing method to an SD memory card, refer to the following.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)
*2 For USB cables, refer to the following.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)
*3 For the GX Works2 versions that can be used with the Universal model QCPU, refer to Page 634, Appendix 5.1.
*4 Use the following Ethernet cables.
• For 10BASE-T connection: Cables compliant to Ethernet standards, category 3 or higher (STP/UTP cables (In an
environment subject to electric noise, use shielded twisted pair (STP) cables.))
• For 100BASE-TX connection: Cables compliant to Ethernet standards, category 5 or higher (STP cables)
2.3.2 Peripheral device configuration
2.3 Precautions for System Configuration
55
(c) QnUDE(H)CPU
Universal model QCPU
Memory card*1
Personal Computer
(GX Works2, GX Developer,
GX Configurator) *3 Ethernet cable*4
Memory card*1 PC card
adapter USB cable *2
(Connector type miniB)
*1 Format ATA cards by a programming tool only. ( Page 240, Section 9.3)
*2 For the writing method to a memory card and USB cables, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
*3 For the GX Works2, GX Developer and GX Configurator versions that can be used with the Universal model QCPU,
refer to Page 634, Appendix 5.1.
*4 Use the following Ethernet cables
• For 10BASE-T connection: Cables compliant to Ethernet standards, category 3 or higher (STP/UTP cables (In an
environment subject to electric noise, use shielded twisted pair (STP) cables.))
• For 100BASE-TX connection: Cables compliant to Ethernet standards, category 5 or higher (STP cables)
56
CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE START-UP PROCEDURES
CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE START-UP
PROCEDURES
This chapter provide the start-up procedure for the Q Series CPU module on the assumption that programs and
parameters have been created separately.
For the start-up procedures for a redundant system configured with a Redundant CPU, refer to the following.
3
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
Start
Module installation ••• Page 59, CHAPTER 4
Install any of the following modules required for the system configuration to the
base unit.
• Power supply module
• CPU module (Install a memory card, SD memory card, or extended SRAM
cassette as needed.)
• Intelligent function module and/or special function module
• Network module
• I/O module
Wiring/connection ••• Page 59, CHAPTER 4,
1) Wire the power supply to the power supply module. Page 243, CHAPTER 10,
2) Wire external device(s) to intelligent function module(s), special function Page 246, CHAPTER 11
module(s), and/or I/O module(s).
3) Install wiring between network modules.
4) Install the battery to the CPU module.
5) Connect the main base unit to an extension base unit and also between
extension base units by extension cables and then set the number of bases
to extension base units.
Module initial settings ••• Page 119, CHAPTER 6
1) Halt the CPU module.
2) Set up switches of the intelligent function module(s) and/or special function
module(s).
3) Set up switches of the network module.
System power on ••• Page 119, CHAPTER 6,
Confirm the following items of the system, and then power on the system. Page 187, CHAPTER 7,
• Wiring of the power supply Page 59, CHAPTER 4
• Power supply voltage
• Operating status of the CPU module: Stop status (reset canceled)
Connection of the PC in which a programming tool is installed
••• Operating manual for the
1) Start up Programming tool on the personal computer in which the
programming tool used
programming tool is installed.
2) Connect the personal computer in which the programming tool is installed,
to the CPU module.
(To next page)
57
(From previous page)
Memory formatting ••• Operating manual for the
Format the memory to be used by the "PC Memory Formatting" of Programming programming tool used
*3
tool.
Writing the parameters and programs ••• Operating manual for the
Write the parameters and programs created by the programming tool into the programming tool used
CPU module.
System reboot ••• Page 119, CHAPTER 6
Turn off and on the system power supply, or reset the CPU module.
Error check ••• Page 276, CHAPTER 15
Confirm that the ERR.LED of the CPU module is off.
If the ERR.LED is on or flashing, identify the error cause by the system monitor
or diagnostics of the programming tool*1 to eliminate the error cause.
If the error is related to the parameters or programs, correct them.
Running of the CPU module*2 ••• Page 119, CHAPTER 6
Run the CPU module, and then confirm that the RUN LED of the CPU module
turns on.
Completed
*1 The following types of diagnostics are available.
• PLC diagnostics
• Ethernet diagnostics
• CC IE Control diagnostics
• CC IE Field diagnostics
• MELSECNET diagnostics
• CC-Link and CC-Link/LT diagnostics
*2 CPU modules with a large-capacity program memory may require time before they go into the RUN status.
*3 The Basic model QPCU of the function version B or later does not require formatting the standard RAM, but it requires
clearing the standard RAM. For clearing the standard RAM (file register), refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
For details of the wiring, connection, and initial settings of intelligent function modules, special function modules, and
network modules, refer to manuals for intelligent function modules, special function modules, and network module used.
58
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4.1 Installation Environment and Installation Position
4.1.1 Installation environment
4
Install the programmable controller according to the installation environment shown in the general specifications.
( Page 117, CHAPTER 5)
Do not install the programmable controller to the place where:
• An ambient temperature is outside the range of 0 to 55°C;
• Ambient humidity is outside the range of 5 to 95%RH,
• Condensation occurs due to rapid temperature change;
• Corrosive gas or combustible gas is present;
• Conductive powder such as dust and iron powder, oil mist, salinity, or organic solvent is filled;
• The programmable controller is exposed to direct sunlight;
• A strong electric field or strong magnetic field is generated; and
• The programmable controller is subject to vibration and shock.
4.1.1 Installation environment
4.1 Installation Environment and Installation Position
59
4.1.2 Installation position
When installing the programmable controller to a control panel, fully consider its operability, maintainability, and
environmental resistance.
(1) Installation position
To ensure good ventilation and ease module change, provide clearance between the module top/bottom and
structures/parts as shown below.
(a) In case of main base unit or extension base unit
Indicates the control panel top,
wiring duct or any part position.
30mm or Programmable
*5, *6 more *1, *5 controller
Control Door
panel
20mm or
*4 30mm or more *3
more *4, *5
5mm or more *2, *6 5mm or more *6
*1 For wiring duct with 50mm or less height.
40mm or more for other cases.
*2 20mm or more when the adjacent module is not removed and the extension cable is connected.
*3 80mm or more for the connector type. 140mm or more for installing a tracking cable when using a Redundant CPU.
80mm or more for installing the Q8BAT cable when using the Q8BAT.
*4 45mm or more when the Q7BAT is mounted.
*5 30mm or more from the top and bottom of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
*6 5mm or more from the right and left of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
60
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(b) In case of slim type main base unit
Indicates the control panel top,
wiring duct or any part position.
30mm or Programmable
*5, *6 more *1, *5 controller
Control
panel Door
20mm or
4
*4 30mm or more *3
more *4, *5
17mm or more *2, *6 5mm or more *6
*1 For wiring duct with 50mm or less height.
40mm or more for other cases.
*2 The cable of the power supply module of the slim type main base unit protrudes out of the left end of the module. Install
the module while reserving 17mm or more wiring space.
If the cable sheath is susceptible to damage caused by a structural object or part on the left side of the module, take a
protective measure with spiral tube or a similar insulator.
*3 80mm or more for the connector type. 80mm or more for installing the Q8BAT cable when using the Q8BAT.
*4 45mm or more when the Q7BAT is mounted.
*5 30mm or more from the top and bottom of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
*6 5mm or more from the right and left of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
(2) Module mounting orientation
4.1.2 Installation position
4.1 Installation Environment and Installation Position
• To ensure good ventilation for heat dispassion, install the programmable controller in the orientation as
shown below.
• Do not mount the programmable controller in the orientations as shown below.
Horizontal installation
Vertical mounting
61
(3) Installation surface
Install the base unit on a flat surface. If the surface where the base unit is installed is not even, this may strain the
printed circuit boards and cause malfunctions.
(4) Installation in an area where other devices are installed
Do not install a base unit in proximity to vibration sources such as large magnetic contractors and no-fuse circuit
breakers. Install a base unit on a separate control panel or away from vibration sources.
(5) Distances from other devices
In order to avoid the effects of radiated noise and heat, provide the clearances indicated below between the
programmable controller and devices that generate noise or heat (contactors and relays).
• Required clearance in front of programmable controller : at least 100mm*1
• Required clearance on the right and left of programmable controller : at least 50mm
At least
50mm
At least At least
100mm*1 50mm
Contactor, relay, etc.
*1 When using a Redundant CPU, keep a distance of 100mm or more between the programmable controller and the
tracking cable.
62
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4.2 Mounting a Module
4.2.1 Mounting precautions
This section describes precautions for handling CPU modules, I/O modules, intelligent function modules, power supply
modules, and base units.
• Do not drop or apply strong shock to the module case, memory card, SD memory card, extended SRAM
cassette, terminal block connector, and pin connector.
• Do not remove the printed-circuit board of a module or extended SRAM cassette from the case. 4
Doing so may cause failure of the module and/or printed-circuit board.
• Tighten the module fixing screws and terminal block screws within the specified torque range shown in the
following table.
Screw Tightening torque range
Module fixing screw (M3 × 12) 0.36 to 0.48N•m
I/O module terminal block screw (M3) 0.42 to 0.58N•m
I/O module terminal block fixing screw (M3.5) 0.66 to 0.89N•m
Power supply module terminal screw (M3.5) 0.66 to 0.89N•m
• Be sure to install a power supply module in the power supply installation slot of Q3B, Q3SB, Q3RB,
Q3DB, Q6B, Q6RB, Q6WRB, QA1S6B or QA6B.
Even if the power supply module is not installed, when the I/O modules and intelligent function module
installed on the base units are of light load type, the modules may be operated.
In this case, because a voltage becomes unstable, we cannot guarantee the operation.
• When using an extension cable or a tracking cable, keep it away from the main circuit cable (high voltage
4.2.1 Mounting precautions
4.2 Mounting a Module
and large current).
Keep a distance of 100mm or more from the main circuit.
• The following are precautions on use in combination with a module whose depth is 130mm or more (such as
Q66DA-G).
1) A module that is less than 130mm in depth cannot be mounted between modules that are 130mm or
more in depth.
2) A module that is less than 130mm in depth cannot be mounted on the right side of a module that is
130mm or more in depth.
3) When the power supply module Q64P(N) is used and a module that is 130mm or more in depth is
mounted in slot 0, it may be difficult to mount/remove a CPU module or insert/remove a memory card.
Although there is no problem with the system operation, if it is inconvenient, mount a module that is less
than 130mm in depth in slot 0 or leave the slot empty.
In case of using the QA1S6B, when installing the base unit to DIN rail in an environment of frequent vibration, use a
vibration-proofing bracket (A1S-PLT-D). Mounting the vibration-proofing bracket (A1S-PLT-D) enhances the resistance to
vibration.
Depending on the environment to install the base unit, it is also recommended to secure the base unit directly to the control
panel.
63
4.2.2 Base unit installation
(1) Installing a base unit on a control panel
Install a main base unit, Q00JCPU, and Q00UJCPU (by screwing) in the following procedure.
1. Fit the two base unit top installation screws into the enclosure.
Panel
2. Place the right-hand side notch of the base unit onto the right-hand side screw.
Panel
3. Place the left-hand side pear-shaped hole onto the left-hand side screw.
Panel
4. Fit the installation screws into the holes at the bottom of the base unit, and then retighten all the
installation screws.
● Install the main base unit, Q00JCPU, and Q00UJCPU on the panel while no module is mounted in the right-end slot on
the base.
When removing the base from the panel, remove the module mounted on the right-end slot first and then the base unit.
● The installation screws that provided with the slim type main base unit differ from those provided with other types of the
base unit.
For installation screws for the slim type main base unit, order "cross recessed head bind screw M4 x 12 (black)".
64
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Mounting a base unit on a DIN rail
Note the following when mounting a DIN rail.
Mounting a DIN rail needs special adaptors (optional), which are user-prepared.
(a) Applicable adaptor types
For Q38B, Q312B, Q68B, Q612B, Q38RB, Q68RB,
Q65WRB, Q38DB, Q312DB : Q6DIN1
For Q35B, Q35DB, Q65B, Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU : Q6DIN2
For Q33B, Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB : Q6DIN3
Quantity of included parts
4
DIN rail mounting
Mounting screw
adaptors Adaptor(Large) Adaptor(small) Square washer Stopper
(M5 × 10)
Q6DIN1 2 4 3 3 2
Q6DIN2 2 3 2 2 2
Q6DIN3 1 2 2 2 2
(b) Adaptor installation method
The following figures show how to attach adaptors for mounting a base unit on a DIN rail.
Base unit rear
4.2.2 Base unit installation
4.2 Mounting a Module
Place the hook of the adaptor Push the top of the adaptor
(small) in the lower hole. (small) far enough until it
"clicks".
Insert the adaptor (large) into the grooves of Push the bottom of the adaptor (large) far enough
the base unit from below. until it "clicks".
(c) Applicable DIN rail types (IEC 60715)
TH35-7.5Fe
TH35-7.5Al
TH35-15Fe
65
(d) Distance between DIN rail mounting screws
When using DIN rail, DIN rail mounting screws must be inserted in 200mm distances or less in order to ensure
that the rail has sufficient strength.
DIN rail DIN rail mounting screw
(obtained by user)
35mm
P P P
P=200mm or less
When installing the DIN rail in a frequent vibration and/or shock prone environment, insert the mounting screws
in 200mm intervals or less by the following method show below.
• For Q38B, Q312B, Q68B, Q612B, Q38RB, Q68RB, Q65WRB, Q38DB or Q312DB type
Screw the DIN rail in three places using the mounting screws and square washers included with the DIN
rail mounting adaptors (hereafter referred to as the adaptors) in 'Position A' (bottom of base unit).
B *3 A *2 B *3
Mounting screws (included with adaptors) Mounting screws (obtained by user)
DIN rail Square washers necessary *1 No square washers
35mm
Stopper
P P P P
Stopper
P=200mm or less
66
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
• For Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q33B, Q35B, Q35DB, Q65B, Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q32SB, Q33SB or Q35SB
type
Screw the DIN rail in two places using the mounting screws and square washers included with the
adaptors in 'Position A' (bottom of base unit).
B *3 A *2 B *3
Mounting screws
(included with adaptors) Mounting screws (obtained by user)
DIN rail Square washers necessary*1 No square washers
35mm
Stopper
4
P P P
Stopper
P=200mm or less
*1 The following shows where to position the square washers.
Square washer DIN rail Mounting screws DIN rail
square washer Mounting side
(e.g. Control panel)
Mounting screws
(M5 10) Side view A Side view A
*2 Screw the DIN rail to a control panel using the mounting screws and square washers included with the adaptors in
4.2.2 Base unit installation
4.2 Mounting a Module
'Position A' (bottom of base unit).
*3 Screw the DIN rail with mounting screws(obtained by user) in 'Position B' (Where the base unit is not installed). In this
method the supplied mounting screws and square washers are not used.
● Use only one washer for each mounting screw. Use only the square washers supplied with the adaptors.
If two or more washers are used together for one mounting screw, the screw may interfere with the base unit.
● Make sure to align the square washer sides with the DIN rail.
square washer DIN rail square washer DIN rail
● Use the DIN rail that is compatible with M5 size screws.
67
(e) Stopper mounting
When using the DIN rail in the environment with frequent vibration, use stoppers included with the DIN rail
mounting adaptor shown in (a).
An example of the use of the DIN rail stopper is described in the following procedure. Fix the module according to the
manual of the DIN rail stopper used.
1) Loosen the screw at the top of the Hook Stopper
stopper. (2 stoppers) 1)
Hook
2) Hitch the lower hook of the stopper
to the bottom of the DIN rail. Install
the stopper with the arrowhead side 3) Hitch hook to top of
facing up. DIN rail
3) Hitch the upper hook of the stopper
to the top of the DIN rail. 2) Hitch hook to bottom
of DIN rail
4) Slide the stopper to the end of the
base unit so that they are fully in
contact. Pay attention when the DIN Stopper 4)
rail has been installed on the right side.
The stopper needs to be attached
upside down.
5)
DIN rail
5) Press the stopper toward the opposite
direction from the arrow incised on the
stopper. Then tighten the screw with a (Left side)
screwdriver.
(Tightening torque 1.00 to 1.35N m)
4) Stopper
5)
DIN rail
(Right side)
Make sure that the left and right
stoppers are fixed securely to the
DIN rail. Stopper Stopper
Complete
68
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
In addition, when three or more modules with 130mm or more in depth (such as Q66DA-G etc.) are mounted,
or when the base unit is used in the environment with extremely frequent vibration, use the Q6DIN1A Q-type
base DIN rail mounting adaptor (vibration-proofing bracket kit) where the large mounting bracket is included.
The large mounting bracket enables to enhance the resistance to vibration. Depending on the environment, it is
recommended to mount the base unit directly on the control panel.
1) Q6DIN1A applicable models
Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B, Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB, Q38RB, Q35DB, Q38DB,
Q312DB, Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B, Q68RB, Q65WRB
Quantity of included parts
DIN rail mounting Module
Mounting
4
adaptor (Vibration- Adaptor Adaptor mounting Square Mounting Mounting
Stopper screw
proofing bracket kit) (Large) (small) screw washer bracket L bracket R
(M5 × 10)
(M4 × 10)
Q6DIN1A 2 4 4 3 2 1 1 3
When stoppers are used, the dimension of stoppers need to be considered in the unit installation dimensions. For the base
unit dimensions (W), refer to Page 231, Section 8.3.
Base unit
Stopper Stopper
49
98
35
49
DIN rail
4.2.2 Base unit installation
4.2 Mounting a Module
Base unit width : W DIN rail center
W+18
Unit: mm
69
(f) Dimensions when DIN rail is attached (Side view).
Control board side
DIN rail depth (D)
TH35-7.5Fe, TH35-7.5Al:7.5 D 7.5 Base unit Power supply module
TH35-15Fe:15
5
DIN rail adaptor
(49)
DIN rail: TH35-7.5Fe,
TH35-7.5Al,
TH35-15Fe
98
35
(49)
3
Example) Q64PN Power supply module = 115
Unit: mm
70
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4.2.3 Installation and removal of module
This section explains how to install and remove a power supply, CPU, I/O, intelligent function or another module to and
from the base unit.
(1) Installation and removal of the module on/from Q3B, Q3SB, Q3RB,
Q3DB, Q5B, Q6B, Q6RB and Q6WRB
(a) Installation of module on Q3B, Q3SB, Q3RB, Q3DB, Q5B, Q6B, Q6RB
and Q6WRB 4
Base unit
Securely insert the module
fixing projection (*1) into the
module fixing hole so that the
latch is not misaligned.
Base unit
module Module
fixing hook mounting lever
(*2)
Using the module fixing hole Module fixing
as a supporting point, push projection
the module in the direction
Module connector
of arrow until it clicks.
Base unit
Module fixing hole
Module fixing
projection (*1)
Module
Module
Make sure that the module mounting lever
is inserted in the base unit
securely.
4.2.3 Installation and removal of module
4.2 Mounting a Module
Module fixing hole
Completed
*1 If the module has two module fixing projections, insert the two module fixing projections on the right and left into the
module fixing holes so that they are not misaligned.
Module fixing hook
Base unit hook
Q63RP
Center top
Push
*2 If the module has two module fixing hooks on its top, push the center top of the module so that the two module fixing
hooks on the right and left are securely engaged with the base unit hooks.
71
● When mounting the module, always insert the module fixing projection into the module fixing hole of the base unit.
At that time, securely insert the module fixing projection so that it does not come off from the module fixing hole.
Failure to do so may damage the module connector and module.
● When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibration or impact, secure the module to the
base unit using screws.
Module fixing screw : M3 × 12 (user-prepared)
● After first use of the product, do not mount or remove the module onto or from the base unit more than 50 times (IEC
61131-2 compliant). Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction.
72
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(b) Removal of module from Q3B, Q3SB, Q3RB, Q3DB, Q5B, Q6B, Q6RB,
and Q6WRB
Support the module with both
hands and securely press the
module fixing hook(*1) with your
finger.
Push
Lifting
Pull the module straight toward
you supporting it at its bottom
while pressing the module fixing
hook (*1).
Module fixing
hook 1 4
Module
connector
Module
While lifting the module, take off
the module fixing projection (*2) Base unit
from the module fixing hole.
Module fixing hole
Completed
*1 If the module has two module fixing hooks on its top, push the two modules fixing hooks on the right and left of the
module top simultaneously with your fingers until they stop.
Push simultaneously
4.2.3 Installation and removal of module
4.2 Mounting a Module
Module fixing hook
*2 If the module has two module fixing projections, remove the two module fixing projections on the right and left of the
module bottom from the module fixing holes.
● When removing the module which is secured by module fixing screw, remove the module fixing screw first and then
module fixing projection off the module fixing hole of the base unit.
Failure to do so may damage the module fixing projection.
● Please do not touch the module during turning on electricity and immediately after power supply interception. There is
fear of a burn.
73
(2) Installation and removal of the module on/from QA1S5B and QA1S6B
(a) Installation of module on QA1S5B and QA1S6B
Insert the module fixing Base unit
projections into the module Module
fixing hole in the base unit.
Module
connector
Using the module fixing hole as Module fixing
a support, install the module hole
onto the base unit by pushing it
in the direction of arrow.
Module fixing
projection
Make sure that the
module is firmly inserted
in the base unit. Then,
secure it with the module
mounting screw.
Completed
Module mounting screw
Base unit Module
● Make sure to mount the module with the module fixing projection inserted into the module fixing hole, using the module
mounting screws.
Failure to do so may damage the module connector and module.
● Attach a provided dustproof cover on the left side of the module that is to be mounted to the QA1S5B. If not, foreign
matter will get in the module and cause failure.
74
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(b) Removal of module from QA1S5B and QA1S6B
Remove the module
mounting screw, and
using the bottom of the Base unit
module as a support,
pull the top of the
module toward you.
Module connector
Module
Lift the module upwards
and remove the module
Module fixing hole
4
fixing projection from the
module fixing hole.
Completed
4.2.3 Installation and removal of module
4.2 Mounting a Module
When removing the module which is secured by module mounting screw, remove the module mounting screw first and then
module fixing projection off the module fixing hole of the base unit.
Failure to do so may damage the module fixing projection.
75
(3) Installation and removal of on/from QA6B
(a) Installation of module on QA6B
Module fixing hole (A)
Base unit Hook
Module Module
connector
Insert the two module fixing projections
into the module fixing hole (B) in the
base unit.
Mount the module into the base unit by
pushing it in the direction of the arrow.
Two module
fixing
Check if the hook of the module is Module fixing hole (B) projections
securely inserted in the module fixing
hole (A) in the base unit.
Completed
For use in an environment with particularly frequent vibrations and/or shock, secure the module to the base with screws.
Module fixing screw: M4 × 0.7 × 12mm (User-prepared)
76
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(b) Removal from QA6B
Hold the module with both hands and Base unit
press the hook on the top of module.
Module fixing hole (A)
Pull the module straight toward you
supporting it at its bottom while
pressing the hook.
Module
connector
Hook
4
Module
Lift the module upwards and remove
the module fixing projection from the
module fixing hole (B).
Module
fixing hole (B)
Completed
4.2.3 Installation and removal of module
4.2 Mounting a Module
Disengage the hook from the module fixing hole (A) and then remove the module fixing projection from the module fixing
hole (B). Attempting to remove the module forcibly may damage the hook or module fixing projection.
77
4.3 Connecting an Extension Base Unit
When using two or more extension base units, the base number must be set with their base number setting
connectors.*1
(The number of extension bases is set to 1 by factory default.)
*1 Since the Q6WRB is fixed to the extension 1, extension base No. setting is not required.
4.3.1 Setting the extension base number
Set the extension base number in the following procedure.
1. The base number setting connector of the extension base unit is located under the IN side base
cover. First, loosen the upper and lower screws in the IN side base cover and remove the base
cover from the extension base unit.
Fixing screw
Extension base unit
Flat blade screwdriver
Base cover
Base cover
78
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2. Insert the connector pin in the required base number location of the connector (PIN1) existing
between the IN and OUT sides of the extension cable connector.
Connector pin
4
Number setting for extension bases
Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CPU module
Setting not
Q12PRHCPU*2, Q25PRHCPU*2 Setting available*4
available*3
Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU Setting available Setting prohibited*1
Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU,
Setting available Setting prohibited*1
Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU
Modules other than above Setting available
*1 If these base numbers are set, "BASE LAY ERROR" (error code: 2010) occurs.
4.3.1 Setting the extension base number
4.3 Connecting an Extension Base Unit
*2 The extension base unit can be connected only when the serial number (first five digits) of the Redundant CPU is
"09012" or later and the redundant system is configured.
The extension base unit cannot be connected when the serial number (first five digits) of the Redundant CPU is "09011"
or earlier.
*3 Connect the Q6WRB to the first extension base. Since the Q6WRB is fixed to the first extension base, base number
setting is not required.
*4 The Q6WRB cannot be connected to the second extension base or later bases. Use the Q6RB for the second
extension base or later bases.
79
3. Install the base cover to the extension base unit and tighten the base cover screw. (Tightening
torque: 0.36 to 0.48N•m)
Fixing screw
Base cover
Extension base unit
Flat blade screwdriver
Base cover
● Set extension base numbers in the order of connection, starting from the extension base unit connected to the main base
unit.
● Set correct extension base number for the base number setting connector. Do not set the same extension base number
for two or more extension base units and do not skip extension base number setting. Doing so may cause incorrect input
or incorrect output.
80
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(1) Precautions for setting the extension base numbers
(a) Setting order
Set the extension base number consecutively.
In Auto mode, when any extension base number is skipped, no slots will be allocated to an empty extension
base so that the slots cannot be reserved.
For details of the base mode, refer to the following.
Manuals for the CPU module used (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Main base unit
Q312B
4
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot number
Power supply
CPU module
module
Extension base unit
Q68B
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Extension 1
Q68B
4.3.1 Setting the extension base number
4.3 Connecting an Extension Base Unit
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Extension 2
Skipped
stage number
Q68B
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Extension 3
81
(b) When the same number is set
The same extension number cannot be set for multiple extension base unit.
Main base unit
Q312B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot number
Power supply
CPU module
module
Extension base unit
Q68B
Extension 1
The same extension stage
Q68B number cannot be set!
Extension 1
Extension stage number
setting connector
82
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(c) When connector pins are connected in more than 2 positions, or no pin is used
The extension base unit cannot be used when connector pins for base number setting are inserted in more
than two positions and when not using any connector pin.
Main base unit
Q312B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot number
4
Power supply
CPU module
module
Extension base unit
Q68B
Extension 1
Connector pins must not be
inserted in 2 or more positions!
Q68B
Extension 2
Connector pin must be inserted!
4.3.1 Setting the extension base number
4.3 Connecting an Extension Base Unit
(d) Position of the AnS/A series-compatible extension base unit
(QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B) in the system
For precautions when using the QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B in the system, refer to the following.
QA1S6ADP Q-AnS Base Unit Conversion Adapter User's Manual
QA1S6ADP-S1 Q-AnS Base Unit Conversion Adapter User's Manual
83
(e) Extension base positioning for AnS/A series-compatible extension base units
(QA1S5B, QA1S6B, QA6B, and QA6ADP+A5B/A6B)
When using AnS/A series-compatible extension base units in combination, follow the instructions described
below.
• Connect the units in order of Q5B/Q6B, QA1S5B/QA1S6B, QA6B, and QA6ADP+A5B/A6B
from the nearest position of the main base unit.
• The QA1S6B and QA6ADP+A5B/A6B cannot be used in combination.
• The QA1S51B, which does not have an extension cable connector (OUT), cannot be used with the
QA6B or QA6ADP+A5B/A6B.
Main base unit
Q312B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot number
Power supply
module CPU module
Extension base unit
Q68B
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Extension 1 Extension base unit for mounting
the Q series-compatible module
(Q5 B/Q6 B is connected to
the main base unit or Q5 B/
Q6 B.)
QA1S68
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Extension 2 Extension base unit for mounting
the AnS series-compatible
module (QA1S5 B/QA1S6 B
is connected to the main base
unit, the end of the Q5 B/Q6 B
or QA1S6 B)
QA68B
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Extension 3 Extension base unit for mounting
the A series-compatible module*1
(QA6 B is connected to the
main base unit, the end of the
Q5 B/Q6 B/QA1S6 B or
QA6 B)
*1 When using the QA6ADP+A5B/A6B, connect it below the QA6B.
84
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4.3.2 Connection and disconnection of extension cable
(1) Instructions for handling an extension cable
• Do not step on an extension cable.
• Connect the extension cable to the base unit with the base cover installed to the base unit.
(After you have set the extension number to the extension base unit, reinstall and screw the base cover.)
• When laying an extension cable, secure 55mm or more as the minimum cable bending radius.
If it is less than 55mm, a malfunction may occur due to characteristic deterioration, cable disconnection or
the like.
• The overall length of extension cables must be up to 13.2m. 4
• Do not install extension cables with the main circuit (high voltage and large current) line.
• When connecting or disconnecting an extension cable, do not hold the ferrite cores mounted at both ends of
the cable.
Hold the connector part of the cable for connection or disconnection.
Main base unit
Connector
Ferrite core
Extension cable
4.3.2 Connection and disconnection of extension cable
4.3 Connecting an Extension Base Unit
Holding the ferrite core may cause the cable disconnection in the connector.
Also, if the ferrite core position is shifted, the characteristic will change. When handling the cable, do not to shift
the ferrite core position.
85
(2) Connection of extension cable
When connecting an extension base unit to the main base unit with an extension cable, plug the OUT side connector of the
main base unit and the IN side connector of the extension base unit with an extension cable. The system will not operate
properly if the extension cable is connected in the form of IN to IN, OUT to OUT or IN to OUT.
When connecting two or more extension base units, plug the OUT side connector of the first extension base unit and the IN
side connector of the second extension base unit with an extension cable.
1. To connect an extension cable to the main base unit, remove the portion under the OUT characters
on the base cover with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver (5.5 × 75, 6 × 100).
This also applies to a case where an extension cable is connected to the OUT side connector of
the extension base unit. When connecting an extension cable to the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU,
remove the base cover manually. To remove the base cover, insert the tip of a screwdriver into a
clearance below the base cover and pry it up. Be careful not to damage the connector when
inserting the screw driver since a connector is located inside the base cover.
Main base unit Extension base unit
Cut at 2 places OUT side of Cut at 2 places
Base cover of thin wall base cover of thin wall
Flat blade screwdriver Flat blade screwdriver
2. To connect the extension cable to the next extension base unit, remove the seal put under the IN
characters on the base cover.
Extension base unit
IN side of
base cover
Seal
86
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
3. When plugging the extension cable to any base unit, hold the connector part of the extension
cable.
Main base unit
Connector
4
Extension cable
4. After fitting the extension cable, always tighten the extension cable connector fixing screws.
(Tightening torque: 0.20N•m)
Main base unit
Fixing screw
Flat blade screwdriver
(3) Disconnection of extension cable
When disconnection the extension cable, hold and pull the connector part of the extension cable after confirming
4.3.3 Extension cable specifications
4.3 Connecting an Extension Base Unit
that the fixing screws have been completely removed.
4.3.3 Extension cable specifications
The extension cables are connected to transfer signals between a main base unit and an extension base unit or
between extension base units.
Type
Item
QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B
Cable length 0.45m 0.6m 1.2m 3.0m 5.0m 10.0m
Conductor resistance value 0.044 0.051 0.082 0.172 0.273 0.530
Weight 0.15kg 0.16kg 0.22kg 0.40kg 0.60kg 1.11kg
When the extension cables are used in combination, overall distance of the combined cable must be 13.2m or less.
87
4.3.4 Voltage drop when an extension base unit is used
Since the extension base unit (Q5B or QA1S5B) is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module on the main
base unit, a voltage drop occurs at extension cables. Improper I/O may occur if the specified voltage (4.75VDC or
higher) is not supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5B or QA1S5B.
When using the Q5B or QA1S5B, make sure that the "IN" connector of the Q5B or QA1S5B is supplied with
4.75VDC or higher.
And it is recommended to connect either of the extension base units as close as possible to the main base unit by
using the short extension cable, so as to minimize the effects of voltage drop.
(1) When only the Q5B or QA1S5B is connected to the extension base unit
(a) Selection condition
4.75VDC or higher must be supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5B or QA1S5B in the final extension
base.
88
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(b) How to calculate voltage to "IN" connector
The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4.90VDC.
Therefore, the Q5B or QA1S5B can be used if the voltage drop at the extension cable is 0.15VDC or lower
(4.9VDC - 4.75VDC = 0.15VDC).
.
Extension cable conductor
Extension cable type
resistance
QC05B 0.044
Main base unit QC06B 0.051
Power
supply
QC12B 0.082
module QC30B 0.172 4
QC50B 0.273
V1 R1 Extension base unit (Q5 B)
QC100B 0.530
Extension
I1 stage 1
V2 Extension base unit (Q5 B)
R2
Extension
I2 stage 2
V7 R7 Extension base unit (Q5 B, QA1S5 B)
Extension
I7 stage 7
Symbol Description
4.3.4 Voltage drop when an extension base unit is used
4.3 Connecting an Extension Base Unit
V1 Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5B, QA1S5B)
Voltage drop at the extension cable between the extension base unit (Q5B, QA1S5B) (extension stage n-1) and extension
Vn
base unit (Q5B, QA1S5B) (extension stage n)
R1 Extension cable resistance between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5B, QA1S5B)
Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit (Q5B, QA1S5B) (extension stage n-1) and extension base
Rn
unit (Q5B, QA1S5B) (extension stage n)
l1 to l7 5VDC current consumption among extension base 1 to 7*1
*1 Sum total of currents consumed by Q5B, QA1S5B and currents consumed by the I/O modules, intelligent function
modules mounted on the Q5B, QA1S5B. The symbols including "I" (I1 to I7) vary with the modules mounted on the
Q5B, QA1S5B. For details of the symbol, refer to the user's manuals for the modules used.
89
Voltage drop at extension cable on corresponding extension unit Sum total of
Q5B,
voltage drops to
QA1S5B
"IN" connector
Installation V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7
of Q5B or
position
QA1S5B (V)
Extension 1 R1•I1 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- V=V1
Extension 2 R1 (I1+I2) R2•I2 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- V= V1+V2
Extension 3 R1 (I1+I2+I3) R2 (I2+I3) R3•I3 ---- ---- ---- ---- V=V1+V2+V3
Extension 4 R1 (I1+I2+I3+I4) R2 (I2+I3+I4) R3 (I3+I4) R4•I4 ---- ---- ---- V=V1+V2+V3+V4
V=V1+V2+V3+V4+
Extension 5 R1 (I1+I2+I3+I4+I5) R2 (I2+I3+I4+I5) R3 (I3+I4+I5) R4 (I4+I5) R5•I5 ---- ----
V5
R1 R2 R3 V=V1+V2+V3+V4+
Extension 6 R4 (I4+I5+I6) R5 (I5+I6) R6•I6 ----
(I1+I2+I3+I4+I5+I6) (I2+I3+I4+I5+I6) (I3+I4+I5+I6) V5+V6
R1 R2 R3 R4 V=V1+V2+V3+V4+
Extension 7 R5 (I5+I6+I7) R6 (I6+I7) R7•I7
(I1+I2+I3+I4+I5+I6+I7) (I2+I3+I4+I5+I6+I7) (I3+I4+I5+I6+I7) (I4+I5+I6+I7) V5+V6+V7
The voltage supplied to "IN" connector of the Q5B or QA1S5B in the final extension base reaches 4.75 VDC or
higher on the condition that the sum total of voltage drop to "IN" connector of Q5B or QA1S5B (V) is 0.15V or
lower.
90
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) When the Q6B or QA1S6B is connected between the main base unit and
the Q5B or QA1S5B
(a) Selection condition
4.75VDC or higher must be supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5B or QA1S5B in the final extension
base.
(b) How to calculate voltage to "IN" connector
The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4.90VDC.
Therefore, the Q5B or QA1S5B can be used if the voltage drop at the extension cable is 0.15VDC or lower 4
(4.9VDC - 4.75VDC = 0.15VDC).
[When the Q5B or QA1S5B is connected Extension cable conductor
Extension cable type
to Extension stage 2] resistance
QC05B 0.044
Main base unit
Power QC06B 0.051
supply
module QC12B 0.082
QC30B 0.172
Extension base unit (Q6 B, QA1S6 B) QC50B 0.273
R1
Power QC100B 0.530
supply Extension
V module stage 1
Extension base unit (Q5 B, QA1S5 B)
R2
Extension
I1 stage 2
4.3.4 Voltage drop when an extension base unit is used
4.3 Connecting an Extension Base Unit
Symbol Description
V Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5B, QA1S5B)
5VDC current consumption when the extension base unit (Q5B, QA1S5B) is used as Extension stage n+1
n = 1 to 6, n: Extension number of extension base unit (Q6B) connected
In
(Sum total of currents consumed by Q5B, QA1S5B and currents consumed by the I/O modules, intelligent function
modules mounted on the Q5B, QA1S5B.)
Extension cable resistance between the main base unit and the extension base unit (Q6B, QA1S6B) or the extension base
Rn
unit (Q6B, QA1S6B) and the extension base unit (Q6B, QA1S6B)
Rn+1 Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit (Q6B, QA1S6B) and extension base unit (Q5B, QA1S5B)
Position of extension base unit Voltage drop caused by extension cable from the main
Q6B, QA1S6B Q5B, QA1S5B base unit to IN connector of the Q5B or QA1S5B (V)
Extension1 Extension 2 V=(R1+R2)I1
Extension 1, Extension 2 Extension 3 V=(R1+R2+R3)I2
Extension 1 to 3 Extension 4 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4)I3
Extension 1 to 4 Extension 5 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5)I4
Extension 1 to 5 Extension 6 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5+R6)I5
Extension 1 to 6 Extension 7 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5+R6+R7)I6
The voltage supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5B or QA1S5B reaches 4.75 VDC or higher on the condition
that the voltage drop (V) at the extension cable between the main base unit and Q5B or QA1S5B is 0.15 VDC or
lower.
91
(3) When the GOT is bus-connected
(a) Selection condition
4.75VDC or higher should be supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5B in the final extension.
(b) How to calculate voltage to "IN" connector
The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4.90VDC.
Therefore, the Q5B can be used if the voltage drop is 0.15VDC or lower (4.9VDC -4.75VDC = 0.15VDC).
Extension cable conductor
Extension cable type
resistance
QC05B 0.044
[When the Q5B is connected to Extension stage 2.]
QC06B 0.051
Main base unit
Power
QC12B 0.082
supply
module
QC30B 0.172
QC50B 0.273
Extension base unit (Q6B) QC100B 0.530
R1 Power
supply Extension
V module stage 1
Extension base unit (Q5B)
R2
Extension
I1 stage 2
GOT GOT
Extension
stage 3
Im
Number of connectable GOTs: up to 5
Symbol Description
V Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5B)
5VDC current consumption when the extension base unit (Q5B) is used as Extension n+1,
In n = 1 to 5, n: Extension number of the extension base unit (Q6B) connected
(Sum total of current consumed by Q5B and currents consumed by I/O, intelligent function modules loaded on the Q5B)
5VDC current consumption of the GOT (current consumption per GOT is 255mA)
Im
• Im = 255 × c (c: Number of GOTs connected (c: 1 to 5))
Extension cable resistance between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q6B) or the extension base unit (Q6B)
Rn
and extension base unit (Q6B)
Rn+1 Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit (Q6B) and extension base unit (Q5B)
92
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Position of extension base unit Number of bases
Voltage drop caused by extension cable from the
for GOT bus
Q6B Q5B main base unit to the Q5B IN connector (V)
connection
Extension 1 Extension 2 Extension 3 V=(R1+R2)(I1+Im)
Extension 1, Extension 2 Extension 3 Extension 4 V=(R1+R2+R3)(I2+Im)
Extension 1 to 3 Extension 4 Extension 5 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4)(I3+Im)
Extension 1 to 4 Extension 5 Extension 6 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5)(I4+Im)
Extension 1 to 5 Extension 6 Extension 7 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5+R6)(I5+Im)
The voltage supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5B reaches 4.75 VDC or higher on the condition that the voltage drop (V) 4
at the extension cable between the main base unit and Q5B is 0.15 VDC or lower.
When connecting GOT by extension cable that is 13.2m or longer, the bus extension connector box A9GT-QCNB is
required.
Since the A9GT-QCNB is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module loaded on the main base unit, 30mA must be
added to "Im" as the current consumption of the A9GT-QCNB.
For details of the method for GOT bus connection, refer to the following.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
4.3.4 Voltage drop when an extension base unit is used
4.3 Connecting an Extension Base Unit
93
4.4 Mounting and Removing a Terminal Block
This section describes a procedure for mounting and removing an 18-point terminal block.
(1) Removal procedure
1. Open the terminal cover and loosen the terminal
Terminal block
block mounting screw.
mounting screw
2. Remove the terminal block.
(2) Mounting procedure
Place the terminal block in position, and then tighten the two terminal block mounting screws (upper and lower).
For mounting and removal of other terminal blocks, refer to the user's manual for the module used.
94
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4.5 Installing and Removing a Memory Card
This section describes a procedure for installing and removing a memory card. Note 4.1 Note 4.1
(1) For Q2MEM type memory cards
(a) Installing a memory card
Pay attention to the direction of a memory card.
Insert the card securely into the connector of a CPU module until the height of the card reaches that of the
memory card EJECT button.
4
Memory card
EJECT button
CPU module
Memory card
Insertion direction check
( mark)
(b) Removing a memory card
Press the memory card EJECT button and pull out the memory card.
Memory card
EJECT button
CPU module
4.5 Installing and Removing a Memory Card
Push
Memory card
Note 4.1 Basic Universal
The Basic model QCPU, Q00U(J)CPU, Q01UCPU, and QnUDVCPU do not support the use of a memory card.
95
(2) For Q3MEM type memory cards
(a) Installing a memory card
Pay attention to the direction of a memory card and install the card according to the following procedure.
Install the memory card CPU module Remove the cover, slightly bending
the center of the cover to make
space between the projection
Power off the CPU module, and the mounting hole.
and remove the cover Projection
from the module.
Memory card
EJECT button CPU module
Memory card
Insert a memory card into
the memory card slot.
*Check the insertion
direction. ( mark)
CPU module
Attach a memory card protective
cover to the CPU module.
Completed
96
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(b) Removing a memory card
When removing a memory card from the CPU module, remove a memory card protective cover and press the
EJECT button to pull out the memory card.
Remove a memory card protective cover, press the memory card EJECT button, and pull out the memory card.
Remove the protective
cover, pressing the
fixing claws located on
Remove the memory card the top and bottom of
the cover. CPU module
Power off the CPU module, and
remove the memory card
protective cover.
4
Memory card
EJECT button
Push
CPU module
Press the EJECT button to
remove the memory card.
Completed
(3) Removing a memory card during power-on
Check that the corresponding special relay areas (SM604 and SM605) are off.
• The memory card cannot be removed while "SM604" is on because the CPU module is using the card.
• Turn off "SM605" if it is on.
When both "SM604" and "SM605" are off, remove the memory card according to the following procedure.
4.5 Installing and Removing a Memory Card
1. Turn on the special relay "SM609" using the sequence program or by the device test of a
programming tool.
2. By monitoring the programming tool, check that the special relay "SM600" is turned off.
3. Remove the memory card.
SM600 (Memory card usable flag) : The system turns on this flag when a memory card is
ready to be used.
SM604 (Memory card in-use flag) : The system turns on this flag when a memory card is being
used.
SM605 (Memory card remove/insert : The user turns on this flag to disable insertion/removal of a
prohibit flag) memory card.
(4) Installing a memory card during power-on
1. Install a memory card.
2. Check that the special relay "SM600" is on by monitoring the programming tool.
97
Observe the following precautions when installing or removing a memory card while power is on.
● Note that the data in a memory card may be damaged if the above procedure is not followed. If the operating status of the
CPU module at the time of an error is set to "Stop" in parameter, the CPU module stops its operation upon the occurrence
of "ICM.OPE.ERROR".
● When a memory card is installed, the scan time of the CPU module increases by several 10ms (maximum). The scan
time increases for only one scan where the CPU module performs the mount processing.
● Poor insertion of the memory card may result in "ICM.OPE.ERROR".
● Using the tweezers below is effective when the memory card cannot be removed smoothly.
Product Model name
Plastic tweezers NK-2539
98
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4.6 Installing and Removing an SD Memory Card
This section describes a procedure for installing and removing an SD memory card. Note 4.2 Note 4.2
(1) Installing an SD memory card
Pay attention to the direction of an SD memory card and install the card according to the following procedure.
1. Insert an SD memory card straight into the SD memory card slot.
The notch part of the SD memory card must be on the lower side.
After installing the SD memory card, check that it is inserted completely. Poor contact may cause 4
malfunction.
2. The SD CARD LED starts flashing, and turns on when the card is ready to be used.
3. Check that the SD CARD LED remains on.
If the SD CARD LED does not turn on even after an SD memory card is installed, check that SM606 (SD memory card
forced disable instruction) and SM607 (SD memory card forced disable status flag) are off.
4.6 Installing and Removing an SD Memory Card
Basic High
Note 4.2 performance Process Redundant Universal
The Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and Redundant CPU do not support the use of
SD memory cards. For the Universal model QCPU, only the QnUDVCPU supports the use of SD memory cards.
99
(2) Removing an SD memory card
Pull out the SD memory card according to the following procedure.
1. Disable the access to the SD memory card in either of the following. The SD CARD LED flashes
during the access-disabling processing, and turns off when the processing is completed.
• Press the SD memory card lock switch on the CPU module for over one second.
• Turn on SM609 (Memory card remove/insert enable flag).
SD memory card
lock switch
When removing the SD memory card while the power is on, check that the SD CARD LED is off.
2. Push the SD memory card once, and pull out the card straight.
● Do not remove the SD memory card while any function using the card is being executed.
● When the SD card installation/removal is prohibited or the card is being used, the SD CARD LED does not turn off.
Check the following items to check that the SD card installation/removal is prohibited or the card is being used.
• SM605 (Memory card remove/insert prohibit flag) is off.
• All points in SD604 (Memory card use conditions) are off.
SD604 (Memory card use conditions) turns off when the file in the SD memory card is not used. When SD604
does not turn off, use SM606 (SD memory card forced disable instruction) and SM607 (SD memory card forced
disable status flag) to forcibly disable the use of the SD memory card.
( Page 245, Section 10.4)
100
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4.7 Installing and Removing an Extended SRAM Cassette
This section describes a procedure for installing and removing an extended SRAM cassette. Note 4.3 Note 4.3
(1) Installing an extended SRAM cassette
Insert an extended SRAM cassette while the power is off.
1. Open the cassette cover on the side of the CPU module.
4
Cassette cover
2. Hold the top and the bottom of the knob of the extended SRAM cassette, and insert it straight into
the cassette connector.
The notch part of the extended SRAM cassette must be on the right side.
After installing the cassette, check that it is inserted completely.
Extended SRAM cassette
4.7 Installing and Removing an Extended SRAM Cassette
Tab
3. Close the cassette cover.
Basic High
Note 4.3 performance Process Redundant Universal
The Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and Redundant CPU do not support the use of
extended SRAM cassettes. For the Universal model QCPU, only the QnUDVCPU supports the use of extended SRAM
cassettes.
101
● The data stored in the standard RAM before an extended SRAM cassette is installed are retained even after the cassette
is installed.
● The capacity of the standard RAM after installation can be checked on the "Online Data Operation" window.
[Online] [Read from PLC]
(2) Removing an extended SRAM cassette
Remove an extended SRAM cassette while the power is off.
1. Read the data stored in the standard RAM (including the extended SRAM cassette) using GX
Works2 in advance.
Removing the extended SRAM cassette deletes all the data stored in the standard RAM (including the
cassette).
2. Turn off the power supply of the CPU module.
3. Remove the CPU module from the base unit.
4. Open the cassette cover on the side of the CPU module.
5. Hold the top and the bottom of the tab of the extended SRAM cassette, and pull it out straight from
the connector.
6. Close the cassette cover.
102
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4.8 Wiring
4.8.1 Wiring power supplies
(1) Precautions for wiring power supplies
• Wire cables of the programmable controller power supply, I/O power supply, and motor power supply
separately as shown below.
Main
Programmable
controller power
Isolation
transformer
4
power supply supply
100VAC Programmable
200VAC controller
Relay
terminal block T1
I/O power supply
I/O equipment
Motor power supply
Motor equipment
Inside a control panel
• If there is much noise, such as lightning surge, connect an isolation transformer.
For details on the isolation transformer, refer to the following.
Page 651, Appendix 8.1
• Taking rated current or inrush current into consideration when wiring the power supply, connect a breaker or
an external fuse that have proper blown and detection.
When using a single programmable controller, a 10A breaker or an external fuse are recommended for
wiring protection.
4.8.1 Wiring power supplies
4.8 Wiring
• Do not connect the 24VDC outputs of two or more power supply modules in parallel to supply power to one
I/O module. Parallel connection will damage the power supply modules.
Power supply module I/O module Power supply module I/O module
24VDC
24VDC 24VDC External power supply
• 100VAC, 200VAC and 24VDC wires must be twisted as dense as possible.
Connect the modules with the shortest distance.
Also, to reduce the voltage drop to the minimum, use the thickest wires possible (maximum 2mm2).
• Do not bundle the 100VAC and 24VDC wires with, or run them close to, the main circuit (high voltage, large
current) and I/O signal lines (including common line). Reserve a distance of at least 100mm from adjacent
wires.
103
• Momentary power failure may be detected or the CPU module may be reset due to serge caused by
lightning.
As measures against a noise caused by surge, connect a surge absorber for lightning as shown in the
following figure.
Using the surge absorber for lightning can reduce the influence of lightning.
Programmable
AC controller
I/O equipment
E2
E1 Surge absorber for lightning
• Use an online UPS (uninterruptible power supply) with power distortion factor of 5% or less or line-interactive
UPS. For a standby system UPS, use Mitsubishi small-capacity UPS "FREQUPS FW-F series" (hereafter
abbreviated as FW-F series).*1 (Example: FWF10-0.3K/0.5K)
Do not use any standby system UPS other than the FW-F series.
*1 Use a FW-F series UPS with the serial number starts with P or later or ends with HE.
Starts with "P" or later
Ends with "HE"
● Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightning (E1) from that of the programmable controller (E2).
● Select a surge absorber for lightning whose power supply voltage does no exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage
even at the time of maximum power supply voltage elevation.
104
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Wiring examples
The following figures show wiring examples of cables such as power cables and ground wires to the main base
unit and extension base units.
(a) Single power supply system
Main base unit
100/110VAC
(Q38B)
AC Q61P CPU module
Fuse
4
ERR*1
AC
DC
24VDC FG*2
LG*2
INPUT
100-240VAC
Connect to 24VDC
terminals of I/O module
that requires 24VDC
internally. Extension base unit
(Q68B)
Extension cable Q61P I/O module
ERR*1
FG*2
100VAC LG*2
INPUT
100-240VAC
4.8.1 Wiring power supplies
4.8 Wiring
Ground wire
Grounding
*1 The operation of the ERR terminal is as follows:
<When the power supply module is mounted on the main base unit>
The terminal turns off (opens) when the AC power is not input, a CPU module stop error (including a reset) occurs, or the
fuse of the power supply module is blown.
<When the power supply module is mounted on the extension base unit>
The terminal is always off (opened).
*2 Ground the LG and FG terminals by using a ground wire as thick and short as possible (2mm in diameter).
● Use the thickest possible (max. 2mm2) wires for the 100/200VAC and 24VDC power cables. Twist these wires starting at
the connection terminals. Use a solderless terminal for wiring a terminal block. To prevent short-circuit due to loosening
screws, use the solderless terminals with insulation sleeves of 0.8mm or less.
Note that up to two solderless terminals can be connected per terminal block.
Solderless terminals Terminal block
with insulation sleeves
● When LG and FG terminals are connected, ground the wires.
If not, the programmable controller may become susceptible to noise.
Since the LG terminal has a half of the input voltage, touching this terminal may result in electric shock.
● No system error can be detected by the ERR terminal of an extension base unit. (The ERR terminal is always set to off.)
105
(b) Redundant power supply system
• Q64RPN
System A System B
100V/200VAC
AC
Redundant power main base unit
(Q38RB)
Q64RPN Q64RPN CPU module
ERR*1, *2 ERR*1, *2
100V/200VAC FG*3 FG*3
LG*3 LG*3
AC INPUT INPUT
100-240VAC 100-240VAC
Redundant power extension
Extension cable base unit (Q68RB)
Q64RPN Q64RPN I/O module
ERR*1, *2 ERR*1, *2
FG*3 FG*3
LG*3 LG*3
INPUT INPUT
100-240VAC 100-240VAC
Ground wire
Grounding Ground wire
100V/200VAC Grounding
AC
100V/200VAC
AC
*1 The operation of the ERR terminal is as follows:
<When the redundant power supply module is mounted on the redundant power main base unit>
The terminal turns off (opens) when the AC power is not input, a CPU module stop error (including a reset) occurs, the
redundant power supply module fails, or the fuse of the redundant power supply module is blown.
<When the redundant power supply module is mounted on the redundant power extension base unit>
The terminal turns off (opens) when the AC power is not input, the redundant power supply module fails, or the fuse of
the redundant power supply module is blown.
*2 When input power is supplied to the redundant power supply module mounted on the redundant power main base unit
and the redundant power supply module mounted on the redundant power extension base unit simultaneously, the ON
(short) timing of the ERR terminal on the redundant power main base unit is later than that of the ERR terminal on the
redundant power extension base unit by the initial processing time of the CPU module.
*3 Ground the LG and FG terminals by using a ground wire as thick and short as possible (2mm in diameter).
106
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
• Q64RP
System A System B
100V/200VAC
AC
Redundant power main base unit
(Q38RB)
Q64RP Q64RP CPU module
*1, *2
ERR*1, *2 ERR
100V/200VAC *3 *3
4
FG FG
LG*3 LG*3
AC INPUT INPUT
100-120/ 100-120/
200-240VAC 200-240VAC
Redundant power extension
Extension cable base unit (Q68RB)
Q64RP Q64RP I/O module
*1, *2 *1, *2
ERR ERR
FG*3 FG
*3
*3 *3
LG LG
INPUT INPUT
100-120/ 100-120/
Ground wire 200-240VAC 200-240VAC
Grounding Ground wire
100V/200VAC
Grounding
AC
4.8.1 Wiring power supplies
4.8 Wiring
100V/200VAC
AC
*1 The operation of the ERR terminal is as follows:
<When the redundant power supply module is mounted on the redundant power main base unit>
The terminal turns off (opens) when the AC power is not input, a CPU module stop error (including a reset) occurs, the
redundant power supply module fails, or the fuse of the redundant power supply module is blown.
<When the redundant power supply module is mounted on the redundant power extension base unit>
The terminal turns off (opens) when the AC power is not input, the redundant power supply module fails, or the fuse of
the redundant power supply module is blown.
*2 When input power is supplied to the redundant power supply module mounted on the redundant power main base unit
and the redundant power supply module mounted on the redundant power extension base unit simultaneously, the ON
(short) timing of the ERR terminal on the redundant power main base unit is later than that of the ERR terminal on the
redundant power extension base unit by the initial processing time of the CPU module.
*3 Ground the LG and FG terminals by using a ground wire as thick and short as possible (2mm in diameter).
107
● Use the thickest possible (max. 2mm2) wires for the 100/200VAC and 24VDC power cables. Twist these wires starting at
the connection terminals. Use a solderless terminal for wiring a terminal block. To prevent short-circuit due to loosening
screws, use the solderless terminals with insulation sleeves of 0.8mm or less.
Note that up to two solderless terminals can be connected per terminal block.
Solderless terminals Terminal block
with insulation sleeves
● Supply power to two redundant power supply modules individually (redundant power supply system).
● When two redundant power supply modules (Q64RPN, and Q64RP) are placed together and operated as a redundant
power supply system, it is recommended to use one of them as an AC power input and connect the other to an
uninterruptible power supply to the other.
● When the LG and FG terminals are connected, ground the wires.
If not, the programmable controller may become susceptible to noise.
The LG terminal has a half of the input voltage.
108
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4.8.2 Wiring of 18-point screw terminal block
(1) Precautions
• Insulation-sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used with the terminal block.
It is recommended to cover the wire connections of the crimping terminals with mark or insulation tubes.
• The wires used for connection to the terminal block must be 0.3 to 0.75mm2 in core and 2.8mm max. in
outside diameter.
• Run the input and output lines away from each other.
• When the lines cannot be run away from the main circuit and power lines, use a batch-shielded cable and
ground it on the programmable controller side. 4
In some cases, ground it in the opposite side.
Programmable
controller
Shield cable
Input
RA
Output Shield jacket
DC
• Where wiring runs through piping, ground the piping.
• Run the 24VDC input line away from the 100VAC and 200VAC lines.
• Wiring of 200m or longer will raises current leakage due to the line capacity, resulting in a fault.
• To prevent electric shock or malfunction, provide the external power supply for the module to be changed
online with means that can turn the power supply off individually, e.g. a switch. ( Page 265, CHAPTER
14)
• As a countermeasure against the power surge due to lightning, separate the AC wiring and DC wiring and
4.8.2 Wiring of 18-point screw terminal block
4.8 Wiring
connect a surge absorber for lightning as shown in Page 103, Section 4.8.1.
• Failure to do so increases the risk of I/O device failure due to lightning.
For screw terminal blocks other than the 18-point screw terminal block, refer to the user's manual for the module used.
109
(2) Wiring method
(a) Wiring to an 18-point screw terminal block
1. Strip the insulating coating from the cable.
2. Connect a solderless terminal to the stripped part of
the cable.
For applicable solderless terminals, refer to the
specifications of each module.
3. Wire the solderless terminals to the 18-point screw
terminal block.
For terminal layout, refer to the specifications of each
module.
Screwdriver
110
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4.8.3 Wiring to connectors
(1) Precautions
• Connectors for external devices (A6CON) must be crimped, pressed, or correctly soldered.
• Plug connectors for external devices (A6CON) securely to the module and tighten the two screws.
• Use copper wires having temperature rating of 75°C or more for the connectors.
• Tighten the connector screws within the following specified torque range.
Screw type Tightening torque range
Connector screw (M2.6) 0.20 to 0.29N•m 4
• Place the cables in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled,
resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor connection.
To make the wiring comply with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives, refer to Page 651, Appendix 8.
Even when compliance with the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directives is not required, configuring the system that
complies with the EMC Directive may reduce external noise.
(2) Applicable connectors
The following tables list the crimp tool, pressure-displacement tools, and the types of connectors used for
modules.
(a) 40-pin connector
Type Model Applicable wire size
4.8.3 Wiring to connectors
4.8 Wiring
0.088 to 0.3mm2 (28 to 22 AWG) (stranded)
Soldering connector
A6CON1 Use cables with outside diameter of 1.3mm or shorter to
(straight out type)
connect 40 cables to the connector.
Crimp connector
A6CON2 0.088 to 0.24mm2 (28 to 24 AWG) (stranded)
(straight out type)
28 AWG (stranded)
Pressure-displacement connector
A6CON3 30 AWG (solid)
(straight out type)
Flat cable of 1.27mm pitch
0.088 to 0.3mm2 (28 to 22 AWG) (stranded)
Soldering connector
A6CON4 Use cables with outside diameter of 1.3mm or shorter to
(both for straight out and 45-degree types)
connect 40 cables to the connector.
(b) Crimp tool and pressure-displacement tools for 40-pin connectors
Type Model Contact
Crimp tool FCN-363T-T005/H
Pressure- FCN-367T-T012/H (locator plate) FUJITSU COMPONENT LIMITED
displacement FCN-707T-T001/H (cable cutter) www.fcl.fujitsu.com/en/
tool FCN-707T-T101/H (hand press)
For wiring of the connectors and usage of the crimp tool and pressure-displacement tools, contact FUJITSU
COMPONENT LIMITED.
111
(3) Wiring method
(a) A6CON1, A6CON4
1. Loosen the four fixing screws on the connector and
remove the screws. Open the connector cover from
the connector side.
2. Solder the wires and coat them with heat shrinkable
Heat shrinkable tube tubes.
3. Check the terminal layout and install the wires to
the connector.
When the connector is plugged into an I/O module, an
FG wire needs not to be installed.
112
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4. Place the connector on one side of the connector
cover and put the fixing screws through the screw
holes. Cover the other connector cover onto the
connector.
5. Tighten the four screws.
4.8.3 Wiring to connectors
4.8 Wiring
113
(b) A6CON2
The following table lists the specifications of the FCN-363T-T005/H used for the A6CON2.
Outside
Applicable wire Cross-section area of Length of stripped
Crimp height diameter of
size wire wire part
coated wire
24 AWG 0.20 to 0.24mm2 1.25 to 1.30 1.2 or less 3.0 to 4.0
26 AWG 0.13 to 0.16mm2 1.20 to 1.25 1.2 or less 3.0 to 4.0
28 AWG 0.088 to 0.096mm2 1.15 to 1.20 1.2 or less 3.0 to 4.0
Wiring of the A6CON2 requires special tools.
For usage and adjustment of the tools, contact FUJITSU COMPONENT LIMITED.
(c) A6CON3
Wiring of the A6CON3 requires special tools.
For usage and adjustment of the tools, contact FUJITSU COMPONENT LIMITED.
1. Check the terminal layout and press the wires
against the connector.
Arrangement for a flat cable is in the order of A1B1A2•••••.
(The following figure shows a connector seen from the plug-in side.)
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01
A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01
114
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(4) Plugging a connector
(a) Installation procedure
1. Plug the connector into the slot on the module.
Connector screw
2. Tighten the two connector screws (M2.6).
4.8.3 Wiring to connectors
4.8 Wiring
(b) Removal procedure
Loosen the two connector screws, and then pull out the connector horizontally to the module.
115
4.8.4 Grounding
For grounding, perform the following:
• Use a dedicated grounding wire as far as possible. (Grounding resistance of 100 or less.)
• When a dedicated grounding cannot be provided, use (2) Shared grounding shown below.
Programmable Programmable Programmable
Equipment Equipment Equipment
controller controller controller
Ground Ground
resistance of resistance of
100 or less 100 or less
(1) Independent grounding Recommended (2) Shared grounding Allowed (3) Common grounding Not allowed
• Use thick cables up to 2mm2. Bring the grounding point close to the programmable controller as much as
possible so that the ground cable can be shortened.
116
CHAPTER 5 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 5 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
The following table lists the general specifications of the programmable controller.
Item Specifications
Operating ambient
0 to 55°C
temperature
Storage ambient
-25 to 75°C*3
temperature
Operating ambient
humidity
5 to 95%RH*4, non-condensing
Storage ambient
humidity 5
Constant
Frequency Half amplitude Sweep count
acceleration
Compliant with Under 5 to 8.4Hz ---- 3.5mm
10 times each in
Vibration resistance JIS B 3502 and intermittent
8.4 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 ---- X, Y, Z directions
IEC 61131-2 vibration
Under continuous 5 to 8.4Hz ---- 1.75mm
----
vibration 8.4 to 150Hz 4.9m/s 2 ----
Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2, 3 times each in 3 directions X, Y, Z)
Operating
No corrosive gases
atmosphere
Operating altitude*5 0 to 2000m
Installation location Inside a control panel
Overvoltage
II or less
category*1
Pollution degree*2 2 or less
Equipment class Class I
*1 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public
electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises.
Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand
level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V.
*2 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the
equipment is used.
Pollution level 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be
expected occasionally.
*3 The storage ambient temperature is -20 to 75°C if the system includes the AnS/A series modules.
*4 The operating ambient humidity and storage ambient humidity are 10 to 90%RH if the system includes the AnS/A series
modules.
*5 Do not use or store the programmable controller under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m.
Doing so may cause malfunction. When using the programmable controller under pressure, please consult your local
Mitsubishi Electric representative.
117
Memo
118
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
6.1 Part Names
6.1.1 Basic model QCPU
(1) Q00JCPU
1) 4) 5) 6)
OUT
2)
7)
When opening the cover, 8)
put your finger here.
6.1.1 Basic model QCPU
6.1 Part Names
12) 13)
OUT
3) INPUT
100-240VAC 10) 9)
50/60Hz 105VA
OUTPUT
5VDC3A
14)
INPUT N
100-240VAC
L
11) 15) 16)
119
No. Name Application
1) Base unit installation hole Pear-shaped hole for installing the unit on a panel such as a control panel. (For M4 screw)
Protective cover for extension cable connector. Remove this cover when connecting an
2) Cover
extension base unit.
Connector for transferring signals to or from the extension base unit. Connect an extension
3) Extension cable connector
cable.
4) POWER LED Power indicator LED for 5VDC. Turns on in green during normal output of 5VDC.
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN"
Off: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"
When the error that stops operation is detected
Flash:
When parameters/program is written during STOP and the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is
moved from "STOP" to "RUN".
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
5) RUN LED • Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "STOP" to "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch. ( Page 182, Section 6.4.1)
• Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN" after
changing the parameter values, the new values are not reflected on the parameters
related to the intelligent function module, such as the network parameters.)
On: When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected.
• When continuation of operation at error detection is set in the parameter.
• When the annunciator (F) is turned on by the SET/OUT instruction.
• When battery low occurs.
6) ERR. LED
Off: Normal
Flash:
When the error that stops operation is detected.
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
Connector used for mounting an I/O module or intelligent function module.
7) Module connector (To the connector of the spare space where no module is mounted, fit the accessory connector
cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent dust from entering.)
8) DIN rail adaptor mounting holes Holes for mounting a DIN rail adaptor.
9) FG terminal Ground terminal connected with the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
10) LG terminal Power filter ground having a half potential of the input voltage.
11) Power input terminals Power input terminals for connection of a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply.
Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, clock function and backup
12) Battery
power time function.
13) Battery fixing hook Hook for holding the battery.
For connection of the battery lead wires.
14) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
120
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
No. Name Application
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
15) RS-232 connector*1
Can be connected by the RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
16) RUN/STOP/RESET switch*2 RESET:
Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or like.
( Page 182, Section 6.4.1)
*1 When a cable is connected to the RS-232 connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor connection, moving,
and disconnection by unintentional pulling.
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 connection disconnection prevention holder is available as a clamp for RS-232 connector.
CPU module
RS-232 cable
6
Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
*2 Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
6.1.1 Basic model QCPU
6.1 Part Names
121
(2) Q00CPU, Q01CPU
1)
2)
3)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
4)
When opening the cover, put
your finger here.
10)
11)
12)
122
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
No. Name Application
1) Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN".
Off: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP".
When the error that stops operation is detected
Flash:
When parameters/program is written during STOP and the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is
set from "STOP" to "RUN".
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
2) RUN LED • Move the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "STOP" to "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch. ( Page 182, Section 6.4.1)
• Power on the programmable controller again
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN" after
changing the parameter values, the new values are not reflected on the parameters
related to the intelligent function module, such as the network parameters.)
6
On: When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected.
• When continuation of operation at error detection is set in the parameter.
• When the annunciator (F) is turned on by the SET/OUT instruction.
• When battery low occurs.
3) ERR. LED
Off: Normal
Flash:
When the error that stops operation is detected.
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
4) Serial number display Shows the serial number printed on the rating plate.
Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, and backup power time
6.1.1 Basic model QCPU
6.1 Part Names
5) Battery
function.
6) Battery fixing hook Hook for holding the battery.
For connection of the battery lead wires.
7) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
8) RUN/STOP/RESET switch *2 RESET:
Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or like.
( Page 182, Section 6.4.1)
Connector for RS-232 connection
9) RS-232 connector*1
Can be connected by the RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
10) Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit. (M3 × 12 screw)
11) Module fixing projection Projection used to secure the module to the base unit.
12) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.
123
*1 When a cable is connected to the RS-232 connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor connection, moving,
and disconnection by unintentional pulling.
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 connection disconnection prevention holder is available as a clamp for RS-232 connector.
CPU module
RS-232 cable Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
*2 Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
124
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
6.1.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant
CPU
(1) Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU,
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
1)
Q02HCPU
Q02HCPU
MODE 2) MODE
RUN 9) RUN
ERR. 3) ERR.
USER USER
BAT. 4) BAT.
BOOT BOOT
5) ON SW
1
2
6) 3 13)
4
7) 5
10) STOP RUN
14)
RESET L.CLR
15)
PULL
6
USB 11) *1
RS-232 12)
8)
When opening the cover, put
your finger here.
6.1.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
6.1 Part Names
16)
*1 Not provided for Q02CPU.
17)
20)
19)
18)
125
(2) Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
1)
Q12PRHCPU
Q12PRHCPU
2) MODE BACKUP 21) MODE BACKUP
RUN CONTROL 9) RUN CONTROL
ERR. SYSTEM A ERR. SYSTEM A
3) USER SYSTEM B
22) USER SYSTEM B
BAT. BAT.
4) BOOT 23) BOOT
ON SW
5) 1
24) 2
6) 3 13)
4
TRACKING 5 TRACKING
7) 10) STOP RUN
14)
RESET L.CLR
15)
PULL
25)
USB
11)
12)
8)
When opening the cover, put
your finger here.
16)
17)
20)
19)
18)
126
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
No. Name Application
1) Module fixing hook Hook used to secure the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
2) MODE LED On (green): Q mode
Flash (green): Forced on and off for external I/O registered
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On: The RUN/STOP switch is set to "RUN".
Off: The RUN/STOP switch is set to "STOP".
(The standby system Redundant CPU module in the backup mode does not turn on even
when the RUN/STOP switch is set to "RUN" but the module is stopped.)
When an error is detected and operation must be halted due to the error
Flash:
Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP switch set to "STOP" and then
the RUN/STOP switch is turned from "STOP" to "RUN."
When the operation mode is changed from the backup mode to the separate mode in the
3) RUN LED Redundant CPU system, the RUN LED of the standby system side CPU module flashes.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
• Set the RUN/STOP switch from "RUN" "STOP" "RUN".
• Reset with the RESET/L. CLR switch.
6
• Restart the programmable controller power.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
• Reset with the RESET/L. CLR switch.
• Restart the programmable controller power.
(If the RUN/STOP switch is set from "RUN" "STOP" "RUN" after changing the
parameters, network parameters and intelligent function module parameters will not be
updated.)
On: Detect on of self-diagnosis error which will not stop operation, except battery error.
(When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter setting.)
Off: Normal
6.1.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
6.1 Part Names
4) ERR. LED Flash:
Detection of the error that stops operation.
When automatic write to the standard ROM is completed normally. (The BOOT LED
flashes together.)
On: Error detected by CHK instruction or annunciator (F) turned ON
5) USER LED Off: Normal
Flash: Execution of latch clear
On: Battery error due to reduction in battery voltages of CPU module or memory card.
6) BAT. LED
Off: Normal
On: Start of boot operation
Off: Non-execution of boot operation
7) BOOT LED Flash:
When automatic write to the standard ROM is completed normally. (The ERR. LED
flashes together.)
8) Serial number display Shows the serial number printed on the rating plate.
9) Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module.
10) Memory card installing connector Connector used for installing the memory card to the CPU module.
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral device. (Connector type B)
11) USB connector*1 Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable.
(Not available for Q02CPU.)
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
12) RS-232 connector*1
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
127
No. Name Application
Used to set the items for operation of the CPU module.
For the system protection and the valid parameter drives of the DIP switches, refer to the
following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals)
DIP switches*2
SW1 : Used to set system protection. Inhibits all the writing and control instructions to the CPU
module. (Factory-default is off)
ON SW
Off: No protection
1 On: Protection
2 SW2, SW3 : Used to specify parameter-valid drive.
13)
(Both SW2 and SW3 are preset to off as factory default)
3 SW2 SW3 Parameter Drive
4 OFF OFF Program memory (Drive 0)
5 ON OFF SRAM card (Drive 1)
OFF ON Flash card/ATA card (Drive 2)
ON ON Standard ROM (Drive 4)
(Parameters cannot be stored in standard RAM (Drive 3).)
SW4: Must not be used. Normally off. (Factory default: Off)
SW5: Must not be used. Normally off. (Factory default: Off)
RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
14) RUN/STOP switch*3
STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
RESET:
Used to perform hardware reset, operation fault rest, operation initialization, etc.
(If this switch is left in the RESET position, the whole system will be reset and the system
will not operate properly. After performing reset, always return this switch to the neutral
15) RESET/L. CLR switch*3
position.)
L. CLR:
Used to turn "Off" or clear to "zero" all latch area data set in the parameter.
Used to clear the sampling trace settings.
16) Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit. (M3 × 12 screw)
17) Module fixing projection Projection used to fix the module to the base unit.
For connection of battery lead wires.
18) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
Backup battery for use of program memory, standard RAM, and the backup power time
19) Battery
function.
20) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.
Indicates the backup or separate mode while the system is running normally.
On (green): Backup mode
On (red):The status in which control (RUN) cannot be continued by system switching
On (orange):Separate mode
Off: Debug mode
The LED indication is as listed below when the memory copy from control system to standby
system is executed.
21) *4
BACKUP LED In backup mode In separate mode
Control system Standby system Control system Standby system
Memory copy executing ON (red) Flashing (red) ON (orange) Flashing (orange)
Memory copy normally ON (red) ON (red) ON (orange) ON (orange)
completed
For the memory copy from control system to standby system, refer to the following.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
128
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
No. Name Application
Indicates the CPU module operates as control system or standby system.
On: Control system (The standby system is normal and system switching is available.)
22) CONTROL LED*4
Off: Standby system
Note that this LED turns on in the debug mode.
The LED of the CPU module on the system A side turns on.
On: System A
Flash:
23) SYSTEM A LED*4 When the tracking cable is disconnected while the system runs normally as the system A.
(It lasts until the system A side tracking cable is connected.)
Off: System B (The SYSTEM B LED turns on.)
Note that this LED turns on in the debug mode.
The LED of the CPU module on the system B side turns on.
On: System B
Flash:
24) *4 When the tracking cable is disconnected while the system runs normally as the system B
SYSTEM B LED
(It lasts until the system B side tracking cable is connected.)
Off: System A (The SYSTEM A LED turns on.)
Note that this LED turns off in the debug mode.
6
25) TRACKING connector*4 Connector for connecting system A or B with the tracking cable.
*1 When a cable is connected to the RS-232 connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor connection, moving,
and disconnection by unintentional pulling.
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 connector disconnection prevention holder is available as a clamp for RS-232 connector.
CPU module
RS-232 cable
6.1.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
6.1 Part Names
Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
*2 Because the DIP switches are located out of reach of fingertips, operate it with a tool such as screwdriver. Careful
attention must be paid to prevent the switch part from being damaged.
*3 Operate the RUN/STOP switch and RESET/L. CLR switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
*4 Applicable only to the Redundant CPU.
129
6.1.3 Universal model QCPU
(1) Q00UJCPU
1) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
2)
10) 11) 12)
When opening the cover,
put your finger here.
12) 13)
OUT
3) INPUT
100-240VAC 10) 9)
50/60Hz 105VA
OUTPUT
5VDC3A
14)
INPUT N
100-240VAC
16) L
17)
11) 15) 16)
130
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
No. Name Application
1) Base unit installation hole Pear-shaped hole for installing the unit on a panel such as a control panel. (For M4 screw)
Protective cover for extension cable connector. Remove this cover when connecting an
2) Cover
extension base unit.
Connector for transferring signals to or from the extension base unit. Connect an extension
3) Extension cable connector
cable.
4) POWER LED Power indicator LED for 5VDC. Turns on in green during normal output of 5VDC.
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
On: Q mode
5) MODE LED Flash:
Executional conditioned device test is being executed.
External input/output forced on/off function is being executed.
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN"
Off: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"
When the error that stops operation is detected.
Flash:
When parameters or a program is written during STOP and the RUN/STOP/RESET 6
switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN".
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
6) RUN LED • Shift the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is shifted from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN"
after changing the parameter values, the new values are not reflected on the parameters
related to the intelligent function module, such as the network parameters.)
6.1.3 Universal model QCPU
6.1 Part Names
On: When the self-diagnostic error (other than a battery error) that will not stop operation is
detected.
(When continuation of operation at error detection is set in the parameter)
7) ERR. LED Off: Normal
Flash:
When the error that stops operation is detected.
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
On: Annunciator (F) turned on.
8) USER LED
Off: Normal
Flash (yellow): Battery error due to voltage drop of the CPU module battery.
On (green):
Keeps on for 5 seconds after competing of restoring the data that are backed up by the
9) BAT. LED latch data backup function to the standard ROM.
Flash (green):
When data are backed up to the standard ROM by the latch data backup function
Off: Normal
10) Serial number display Shows the serial number printed on the rating plate.
Connector used for mounting an module or intelligent function module.
11) Module connector (To the connector of the spare space where no module is mounted, fit the accessory connector
cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent dust from entering.)
12) DIN rail adopter mounting holes Holes for mounting a DIN rail adaptor.
13) FG terminal Ground terminal connected with the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
14) LG terminal Power filter ground having a half potential of the input voltage.
15) Power input terminals Power input terminals for connection of a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply.
16) Battery Backup battery for use of the standard RAM and battery power time function.
131
No. Name Application
For connection of the battery lead wires.
17) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral devices. (Connector type miniB)
18) USB connector*1
Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable.
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
19) RS-232 connector*1
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable. (QC30R2)
RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
20) RUN/STOP/RESET switch *2 RESET:
Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or like.
( Page 182, Section 6.4.1)
*1 When leaving a cable connected to a USB connector or RS-232 connector, clamp the cable.
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 connector disconnection prevention holder is available as a clamp for the RS-232
connector.
CPU module
RS-232 cable
Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
*2 Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
132
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
(2) Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
1)
Q00UCPU
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
10)
11)
12)
6
7)
When opening the cover,
put your finger here.
13)
6.1.3 Universal model QCPU
6.1 Part Names
14)
15)
8)
9)
133
No. Name Application
1) Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
On: Q mode
2) MODE LED Flash:
Executional conditioned device test is being executed.
External input/output forced on/off function is being executed.
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN"
Off: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"
When an error that stops operation is detected.
Flash:
Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP",
and then the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is turned from "STOP" to "RUN."
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
3) RUN LED • Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN".
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN" after
changing the parameters, network parameters and intelligent function module
parameters will not be updated.)
On: Detection of self-diagnosis error which will not stop operation, except battery error.
(When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter setting.)
Off: Normal
4) ERR. LED
Flash:
Detection of the error that stops operation.
When reset operation becomes valid with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
On: Annunciator (F) turned on.
5) USER LED
Off: Normal
On (yellow): Battery error due to battery voltage drop of the CPU module.
On (green):
Turned on for 5 seconds after restoring of data backed up to the standard ROM by the
6) BAT. LED latch data backup is completed.
Flash (green):
Flashes when backup of data to the standard ROM by latch data backup is completed.
Off: Normal
7) Serial number display Shows serial number printed on the rating plate.
8) Battery Backup battery for use of the standard RAM and backup power time function.
For connection of battery lead wires.
9) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
RUN: Executes sequence program operation
STOP: Stops sequence program operation
10) RUN/STOP/RESET switch*2 RESET:
Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization, and like.
( Page 182, Section 6.4.1)
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral device. (Connector type miniB)
11) USB connector*1
Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable.
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
12) RS-232 connector*1
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
13) Module fixing holes Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit. (M3 × 12 screw)
134
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
No. Name Application
14) Module fixing projection Projection used to secure the module to the base unit.
15) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.
*1 When leaving a cable connected to a USB connector or RS-232 connector, clamp the cable to prevent a poor
connection, moving, and disconnection by unintentional pulling.
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 connector disconnection prevention holder is available as a clamp for the RS-232
connector.
CPU module
RS-232 cable
Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
*2 Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
6
6.1.3 Universal model QCPU
6.1 Part Names
135
(3) Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU,
Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
1)
2)
9)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7) 10)
13)
11)
12)
8)
When opening the cover, put
your finger here.
14)
15)
18)
17)
16)
136
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
No. Name Application
1) Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
On: Q mode
Flash:
2) MODE LED
Executional conditioned device test is being executed.
External input/output forced on/off function is being executed.
CPU module change function with memory card is being executed.
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN"
Off: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"
When an error that stops operation is detected
Flash: Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP",
and then the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is turned from "STOP" to "RUN."
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
• Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN".
3) RUN LED
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
6
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN" after
changing the parameters, network parameters and intelligent function module parameters will
not be updated.)
On: Detection of self-diagnosis error which will not stop operation, except battery error.
(When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter setting.)
4) ERR. LED Off: Normal
Flash: Detection of the error that stops operation.
When reset operation becomes valid with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
6.1.3 Universal model QCPU
6.1 Part Names
On: Annunciator (F) turned on.
5) USER LED
Off: Normal
On (yellow): Battery error due to battery voltage drop of the memory card.
Flash (yellow): Battery error due to voltage drop of the CPU module battery.
On (green): Turned on for 5 seconds after restoring of data backed up to the standard ROM by
6) BAT. LED the latch data backup is completed.
Flash (green): Flashes when backup of data to the standard ROM by latch data backup is
completed.
Off: Normal
On: Start of boot operation
7) BOOT LED
Off: Non-execution of boot operation
8) Serial number display Shows the serial number printed on the rating plate.
9) Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module.
10) Memory card installing connector Connector used for installing the memory card to the CPU module.
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral device. (Connector type miniB)
11) USB connector*1
Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable.
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
12) RS-232 connector*1
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
13) RUN/STOP/RESET switch*2 RESET: Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or like.
( Page 182, Section 6.4.1)
14) Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to secure to the base unit. (M3 × 12 screw)
15) Module fixing projection Projection used to secure the module to the base unit.
137
No. Name Application
For connection of battery lead wires.
16) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
17) Battery Backup battery for use of standard RAM and backup power time function.
18) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.
*1 When a cable is connected to the USB connector and RS-232 connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor
connection, moving, and disconnection by unintentional pulling. The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 connector disconnection
prevention holder is available as a clamp for RS-232 connector.
CPU module
RS-232 cable
Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
*2 Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips. To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any
tool such as screw driver.
138
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
(4) Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU
1)
2)
*1
3)
4)
5)
6)
7) 10) 11)
8)
12)
13)
15)
16)
14)
6
9)
*1 Do not remove this sticker since it is for Mitsubishi maintenance.
17)
6.1.3 Universal model QCPU
6.1 Part Names
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
139
No. Name Application
1) Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
On: Q mode
Flash:
Executional conditioned device test is being executed.
2) MODE LED
External input/output forced on/off function is being executed.
CPU module change function with memory card is being executed.
CPU module data backup/restoration function is being executed (Automatic restoration is
being executed).
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN"
Off: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"
When an error that stops operation is detected.
Flash: Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP",
and then the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is turned from "STOP" to "RUN."
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
• Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN".
3) RUN LED
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN" after
changing the parameters, network parameters and intelligent function module parameters
will not be updated.)
• On: Detection of self-diagnosis error which will not stop operation, except battery error.
(When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter setting.)
4) ERR. LED • Off: Normal
• Flash: Detection of the error that stops operation.
When reset operation becomes valid with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• On: Annunciator (F) turned on.
5) USER LED
• Off: Normal
Indicates the battery status and latch data backup status of the CPU module.
• Flash (yellow): Battery error due to voltage drop of the CPU module battery.
• On (green): Turned on for 5 seconds after restoring of data backed up to the standard ROM
6) BAT. LED by the latch data backup is completed.
• Flash (green): Flashes when backup of data to the standard ROM by latch data backup is
completed.
• Off: Normal
On: Start of boot operation
7) BOOT LED
Off: Non-execution of boot operation
• On (green): An SD memory card is being used.
• Flash (green): An SD memory card is being prepared or performing stop processing. Or,
8) SD CARD LED
logging processing has completed.
• Off: An SD memory card is not used.
9) Serial number display Shows the serial number printed on the rating plate.
10) SD memory card slot Slot for an SD memory card
Switch to disable access to an SD memory card during installation or removal of the card.
When the switch is pressed for over one second, the SD CARD LED flashes and then turns
11) SD memory card lock switch
on, disabling access to the card.
( Page 100, Section 4.6 (2))
140
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
No. Name Application
• RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
• STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
12) RUN/STOP/RESET switch*2 • RESET: Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or like.
( Page 182, Section 6.4.1)
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral device. (Connector type miniB)
13) USB connector*1
Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable.
14) Ethernet connector Connector for connecting an Ethernet device (RJ45 connector)
On: Connected at 100Mbps.
15) 100M LED
Off: Connected at 10Mbps. Or disconnected.
On: Data being sent/received
16) SD/RD LED
Off: No data being sent/received
17) Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to secure to the base unit. (M3 × 12 screw)
18) Cassette cover Cover for the cassette connector ( Page 101, Section 4.7)
19) Cassette connector Connector for an extended SRAM cassette ( Page 101, Section 4.7)
20) Module fixing projection Projection used to secure the module to the base unit.
21) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.
6
Backup battery for the standard RAM (including an extended SRAM cassette) and the use of
22) Battery
the backup power function
For connection of battery lead wires.
23) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
*1 When a cable is connected to the USB connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor connection, moving, and
disconnection by unintentional pulling.
*2 Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips. To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any
tool such as screw driver.
6.1.3 Universal model QCPU
6.1 Part Names
141
(5) Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU
1)
2)
9)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
10)
13)
11)
20)
19)
21)
8)
When opening the cover, put
your finger here.
14)
15)
18)
17)
16)
142
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
No. Name Application
1) Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
On: Q mode
Flash:
2) MODE LED
Executional conditioned device test is being executed.
External input/output forced on/off function is being executed.
CPU module change function with memory card is being executed.
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN"
Off: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"
When an error that stops operation is detected
Flash:
Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP",
and then the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is turned from "STOP" to "RUN."
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
3) RUN LED • Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN".
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
6
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN" after
changing the parameters, network parameters and intelligent function module
parameters will not be updated.)
On: Detection of self-diagnosis error which will not stop operation, except battery error.
(When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter setting.)
Off: Normal
4) ERR. LED
Flash:
6.1.3 Universal model QCPU
6.1 Part Names
Detection of the error that stops operation.
When reset operation becomes valid with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
On: Annunciator (F) turned on
5) USER LED
Off: Normal
On (yellow):Battery error due to battery voltage drop of the memory card.
Flash (yellow):Battery error due to voltage drop of the CPU module battery.
On (green):
Turned on for 5 seconds after restoring of data backed up to the standard ROM by the
6) BAT. LED
latch data backup is completed.
Flash (green):
Flashes when backup of data to the standard ROM by latch data backup is completed.
Off: Normal
On: Start of boot operation
7) BOOT LED
Off: Non-execution of boot operation
8) Serial number display Shows the serial number printed on the rating plate.
9) Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module.
10) Memory card installing connector Connector used for installing the memory card to the CPU module.
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral device. (Connector type miniB)
11) USB connector*1
Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable.
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
12) RS-232 connector*1
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
143
No. Name Application
RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
13) RUN/STOP/RESET switch *2 RESET:
Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or like.
( Page 182, Section 6.4.1)
14) Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to secure to the base unit. (M3 × 12 screw)
15) Module fixing projection Projection used to secure the module to the base unit.
For connection of battery lead wires.
16) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
17) Battery Backup battery for use of standard RAM and backup power time function.
18) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.
19) Ethernet connector Connector for connecting an Ethernet device (RJ45 connector)
On: Connected at 100Mbps.
20) 100M LED
Off: Connected at 10Mbps. Or disconnected.
On: Data being sent/received
21) SD/RD LED
Off: No data being sent/received
*1 When a cable is connected to the USB connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor connection, moving, and
disconnection by unintentional pulling.
*2 Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips. To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any
tool such as screw driver.
144
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
6.2 Specifications
The following table lists performance specifications of CPU modules.
6.2.1 Basic model QCPU
Basic model QCPU
Item
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU
Control method Stored program cyclic operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode (Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX, DY).)
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L, function block,
Program language and structured text (ST)
language Process control
----
language
6
Processing LD X0 200ns 160ns 100ns
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 700ns 560ns 350ns
instruction)
Processing
Tracking execution
speed
time ----
(redundant
(increased scan time)
function)
Constant scan 1 to 2000ms
(Function for keeping regular scan time) (Setting available in 1ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
6.2.1 Basic model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
Program size*1, *2 8K steps (32K bytes) 14K steps (56K bytes)
Program memory
58K bytes 94K bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card (RAM)
----
(drive 1)
Memory card (ROM)
----
(drive 2)
Memory size*1
Standard RAM
0 128K bytes*3
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
58K bytes 94K bytes
(drive 4)
CPU shared memory
---- 1K byte
*3, *4
*1 The size unit of the files stored in the memory area differs depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the
following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2 The maximum number of executable sequence steps is obtained by the following formula.
(Program size) - (File header size (Default: 34 steps))
For details of the program size and files, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3 The size has been increased by the function upgrade of the CPU module. ( Page 637, Appendix 6)
*4 Data in the CPU shared memory is not latched.
Data in the CPU shared memory is cleared when the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is
reset.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
145
Basic model QCPU
Item
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU
Program memory 6*5
Memory card (RAM) ----
Memory Flash
Max. number ----
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card ----
Standard RAM ---- 1
Standard ROM 6*5
Maximum number of Initial
512
intelligent function setting
module parameters Refresh 256
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times
standard ROM
No. of I/O device points
2048 points (X/Y0 to 7FF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points
256 points
(No. of points accessible to the actual 1024 points (X/Y0 to 3FF)
(X/Y0 to FF)
I/O module.)
Internal relay [M]*6 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L]*6 2048 points by default (L0 to 2047) (changeable)
Link relay [B]*6 2048 points by default (B0 to 7FF) (changeable)
512 points by default (T0 to 511)
(Sharing of low- and high-speed timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T]*6
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
0 point by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST]*6 The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
No. of device points
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
Normal counter: 512 points by default (C0 to 511) (changeable)
*6 Interrupt counter: 128 points max.
Counter [C]
(0 points by default, setting by parameters)
Data register [D]*6 11136 points by default (D0 to 11135) (changeable)
Link register [W]*6 2048 points by default (W0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Annunciator [F]*6 1024 points by default (F0 to 1023) (changeable)
Edge relay [V]*6 1024 points by default (V0 to 1023) (changeable)
R: The following number of device points can be used by
switching blocks (in increments of 32768 points (R0 to
---- 32767)).
File
[R],[ZR] ZR: The following number of device points can be used without
register
switching blocks.
Standard
---- 65536 points (The number of device points is fixed.)
RAM
Link special relay [SB] 1024 points (SB0 to 3FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special register [SW] 1024 points (SW0 to 3FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
146
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Basic model QCPU
Item
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU
Step relay [S]*7 2048 points (S0 to 127/block) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Index register [Z] 10 points (Z0 to 9) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Pointer [P] 300 points (P0 to 299) (The number of device points is fixed.)
128 points (I0 to 127) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device points
The cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I]
(2 to 1000ms, 1ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
Special relay [SM] 1024 points (SM0 to 1023) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 1024 points (SD0 to 1023) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device tracking words ----
Link direct device
Device for accessing the link device of a network module directly
Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, J\B,
6
J\SW, J\SB
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly.
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U\G
L0 to 2047 (default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters.)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 7FF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters.)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second and day of the week
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function Accuracy: -3.2 to +5.27s(TYP.+1.98s)/d at 0°C
6.2.1 Basic model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
Accuracy: -2.57 to +5.27s(TYP.+2.22s)/d at 25°C
Accuracy: -11.68 to +3.65s(TYP.-2.64s)/d at 55°C
Allowable momentary power failure 20ms or less (100VAC or
Varies depending on the power supply module.
time more)
5VDC internal current consumption 0.26A*8 0.25A 0.27A
H 98mm 98mm
External dimensions W 27.4mm
244.4mm*9
D 89.3mm
Weight *9
0.66kg 0.13kg
*5 Each of parameter, intelligent function module parameter, sequence program, SFC program, device comment, and initial
device value files can be stored.
*6 The number of points can be changed within the setting range.
( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*7 The step relay is a device for the SFC function.
*8 The value is for the CPU module and base unit together.
*9 The value includes the CPU module, base unit, and power supply module.
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to Page 117, CHAPTER 5.
147
6.2.2 High Performance model QCPU
High Performance model QCPU
Item
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
Control method Stored program cyclic operation
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
(Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX, DY).)
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L, function block,
Program language and structured text (ST)
language Process control
----
language
Processing LD X0 79ns 34ns
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 237ns 102ns
instruction)
Processing Tracking
speed execution time
----
(redundant (increased scan
function) time)
Constant scan
0.5 to 2000ms
(Function for keeping regular scan
(Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
time)
28K steps 60K steps 124K steps 252K steps
Program size*1, *2
(112K bytes) (240K bytes) (496K bytes) (1008K bytes)
Program memory
112K bytes 240K bytes 496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card
Size of the installed memory card
(RAM)
(4M bytes max.)*11
(drive 1)
Memory card Size of the installed memory card
(ROM) (Flash card: 4M bytes max.,
Memory size*1 (drive 2) ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
Standard RAM
64K bytes 128K bytes*3 256K bytes*3
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
112K bytes 240K bytes 496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 4)
CPU shared
8K bytes
memory*3 , *4
*1 The size unit of the files stored in the memory area differs depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the
following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2 The maximum number of executable sequence steps is obtained by the following formula.
(Program size) - (File header size (Default: 34 steps))
For details of the program size and files, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3 The size has been increased by the function upgrade of the CPU module. ( Page 637, Appendix 6)
*4 Data in the CPU shared memory is not latched.
Data in the CPU shared memory is cleared when the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is
reset.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
*11 For the CPU module whose serial number (first five digits) is "16020" or earlier, the maximum memory card size is 2M
bytes.
148
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
High Performance model QCPU
Item
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
Program memory 28 60 124 252*5
Memory card (RAM) 319 (When the Q3MEM-4MBS is used)*12
Memory Flash
Max. number 288
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card 512
Standard RAM 3*6
Standard ROM 28 60 124 252
Max. number of intelligent Initial
512
function module setting
parameters Refresh 256
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times
standard ROM
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.) 6
No. of I/O points
(No. of points accessible to the actual 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
I/O module.)
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L] 8192 points by default (L0 to 8191) (changeable)
Link relay [B] 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (sharing of low- and high-speed timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
6.2.2 High Performance model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
No. of device points*7
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
0 point by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
Normal counter, 1024 points by default (C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Counter [C]
Interrupt counter: 256 points max. (0 point by default, setting by parameters)
Data register [D] 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Link register [W] 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Annunciator [F] 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Edge relay [V] 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
*5 The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs. Any program exceeding 124 cannot be executed.
*6 The number has been increased by the function upgrade of the CPU module.
( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals))
*7 The number of points can be changed within the setting range.
( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*12 When the Q2MEM-2MBS is used, the maximum number of files stored is 287 for the CPU module whose serial number
(first five digits) is "16020" or earlier.
149
High Performance model QCPU
Item
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
R: The following number of device points can be used by switching blocks (in increments of
32768 points (R0 to 32767)).
ZR: The following number of device points can be used without switching blocks.
Standard
32768 points 65536 points 131072 points
RAM
SRAM card
517120 points
(1M byte)
File [R],
SRAM card
register*8 [ZR] 1041408 points
(2M bytes)
SRAM card
1042432 points
(4M bytes)*13
Flash card
1041408 points
(2M bytes)
Flash card
No. of device points
1042432 points
(4M bytes)
Link special relay [SB] 2048 points (SB0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special register [SW] 2048 points (SW0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Step relay [S]*9 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Index register [Z] 16 points (Z0 to 15) (The number of device points is fixed.)
4096 points (P0 to 4095) (The number of device points is fixed.), The use ranges of the local
Pointer [P]
pointers and common pointers can be set up by parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255) (The number of device points is fixed.)
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 and I49 can be set up by
Interrupt pointer [I] parameters.
(I28 to 31: 0.5 to 1000ms, in 0.5ms unit, I49: 0.2 to 1.0ms, in 0.1ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms, I49: Blank
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SD0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device of a network module directly
Link direct device
Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, J\B, J\SW, J\SB
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly.
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U\G
*8 When a Flash card is used, only reading is possible. ATA cards cannot be used.
*9 The step relay is a device for the SFC function.
*13 The card can be used for the CPU module whose serial number (first five digits) is "16021" or later.
150
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
High Performance model QCPU
Item
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
L0 to 8191 (default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters.)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters.)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function Accuracy: -3.18 to +5.25s(TYP.+2.12s)/d at 0°C
Accuracy: -3.93 to +5.25s(TYP.+1.90s)/d at 25°C
Accuracy: -14.69 to +3.53s(TYP.-3.67s)/d at 55°C
Allowable momentary power failure
Varies depending on the power supply module.
time
5VDC internal current consumption 0.60A 0.64A
H 98mm
External dimensions W 27.4mm
D 89.3mm
Weight 0.20kg 6
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to Page 117, CHAPTER 5.
6.2.2 High Performance model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
151
6.2.3 Process CPU
Process CPU
Item
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Control method Stored program cyclic operation
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
(Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX, DY).)
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC),
Program language MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
language Process control
FBD for process control (Programming by PX Developer)
language
Processing
LD X0 34ns
speed
(sequence
MOV D0 D1 102ns
instruction)
Processing Tracking
speed execution time
----
(redundant (increased scan
function) time)
Constant scan
(Function for keeping regular scan 0.5 to 2000ms (Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters)
time)
28K steps 60K steps 124K steps 252K steps
Program size*1, *2
(112 bytes) (240 bytes) (496 bytes) (1008 bytes)
Program memory
112K bytes 240K bytes 496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card
(RAM) Size of the installed memory card (4M bytes max.)*10
(drive 1)
Memory card
Size of the installed memory card
(ROM)
Memory size*1 (Flash card: 4M bytes max., ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
(drive 2)
Standard RAM
128K bytes 256K bytes
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
112K bytes 240K bytes 496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 4)
CPU shared
8K bytes
memory*3
*1 The size unit of the files stored in the memory area differs depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the
following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2 The maximum number of executable sequence steps is obtained by the following formula.
(Program size) - (File header size (Default: 34 steps))
For details of the program size and files, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3 Data in the CPU shared memory is not latched.
Data in the CPU shared memory is cleared when the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is
reset.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
*10 For the CPU module whose serial number (first five digits) is "16020" or earlier, the maximum memory card size is 2M
bytes.
152
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Process CPU
Item
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Program memory 28 60 124 252*4
Memory card (RAM) 319 (When the Q3MEM-4MBS is used)*11
Memory Flash
Max. number 288
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card 512
Standard RAM 3*5
Standard ROM 28 60 124 252
Max. number of intelligent Initial
512
function module setting
parameters Refresh 256
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times
standard ROM
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.) 6
No. of I/O points
(No. of points accessible to the actual 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
I/O module.)
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L] 8192 points by default (L0 to 8191) (changeable)
Link relay [B] 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (sharing of low- and high-speed timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
6.2.3 Process CPU
6.2 Specifications
No. of device points*6
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
0 point by default (sharing of low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
Normal counter, 1024 points by default (C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Counter [C]
Interrupt counter: 256 points max. (0 points by default, setting by parameters)
Data register [D] 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Link register [W] 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Annunciator [F] 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Edge relay [V] 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
*4 The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs. Any program exceeding 124 cannot be executed.
*5 The number has been increased by the function upgrade of the CPU module.
( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals))
*6 The number of points can be changed within the setting range.
( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals))
*11 When the Q2MEM-2MBS is used, the maximum number of files stored is 287 for the CPU module whose serial number
(first five digits) is "16020" or earlier.
153
Process CPU
Item
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
R: The following number of device points can be used by switching blocks (in increments of
32768 points (R0 to 32767)).
ZR: The following number of device points can be used without switching blocks.
Standard
65536 points 131072 points
RAM
SRAM card
517120 points
(1M byte)
SRAM card
File [R], 1041408 points
(2M bytes)
*7 [ZR]
register
SRAM card
1042432 points
(4M bytes)*12
SRAM card
1041408 points
(2M bytes)
Flash card
1041408 points
No. of device points
(2M bytes)
Flash card
1042432 points
(4M bytes)
Link special relay [SB] 2048 points (SB0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special register [SW] 2048 points (SW0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
*8 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Step relay [S]
Index register [Z] 16 points (Z0 to 15) (The number of device points is fixed.)
4096 points (P0 to 4095) (The number of device points is fixed.), The use ranges of the local
Pointer [P]
pointers and common pointers can be set up by parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255) (The number of device points is fixed.)
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I]
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SD0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device of a network module directly
Link direct device
Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, J\B, J\SW, J\SB
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly.
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U\G
*7 When a Flash card is used, only reading is possible. ATA cards cannot be used.
*8 The step relay is a device for the SFC function.
*12 The card can be used for the CPU module whose serial number (first five digits) is "16021" or later.
154
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Process CPU
Item
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
L0 to 8191 (default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function Accuracy: -3.18 to +5.25s(TYP.+2.12s)/d at 0°C
Accuracy: -3.93 to +5.25s(TYP.+1.90s)/d at 25°C
Accuracy: -14.69 to +3.53s(TYP.-3.67s)/d at 55°C
Allowable momentary power failure
Varies depending on the power supply module.
time
5VDC internal current consumption 0.64A
H 98mm
External dimensions W 27.4mm
D 89.3mm
Weight 0.20kg 6
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to Page 117, CHAPTER 5.
6.2.3 Process CPU
6.2 Specifications
155
6.2.4 Redundant CPU
Redundant CPU
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
Control method Stored program cyclic operation
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
(Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX, DY).)
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC),
Program language MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
language Process control
FBD for process control (Programming by PX Developer)
language
Processing
LD X0 34ns
speed
(sequence
MOV D0 D1 102ns
instruction)
Processing Tracking
Device memory 48k words: 10ms
speed execution time
Device memory 100k words: 15ms
(redundant (increased scan
( QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System))
function) time)
Constant scan
(Function for keeping regular scan 0.5 to 2000ms (Setting available in 0.5ms unit) (Setting by parameters)
time)
124K steps 252K steps
Program size*1, *2
(496 bytes) (1008 bytes)
Program memory
496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card
(RAM) Size of the installed memory card (4M bytes max.)*9
(drive 1)
Memory card
Size of the installed memory card
(ROM)
Memory size *1 (Flash card: 4M bytes max., ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
(drive 2)
Standard RAM
256K bytes
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 4)
CPU shared
----
memory
*1 The size unit of the files stored in the memory area differs depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the
following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2 The maximum number of executable sequence steps is obtained by the following formula.
(Program size) - (File header size (Default: 34 steps))
For details of the program size and files, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*9 For the CPU module whose serial number (first five digits) is "16020" or earlier, the maximum memory card size is 2M
bytes.
156
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Redundant CPU
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
Program memory 124 252*3
Memory card (RAM) 319 (When the Q3MEM-4MBS is used)*10
Memory Flash
Max. number 288
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card 512
Standard RAM 3*4
Standard ROM 124 252
Max. number of intelligent Initial
512
function module setting
parameters Refresh 256
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times
standard ROM
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.) 6
No. of I/O points
(No. of points accessible to the actual 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
I/O module.)
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L] 8192 points by default (L0 to 8191) (changeable)
Link relay [B] 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (sharing of low- and high-speed timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
6.2.4 Redundant CPU
6.2 Specifications
No. of device points*5
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
0 point by default (sharing of low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
Normal counter, 1024 points by default (C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Counter [C]
Interrupt counter: 256 points max. (0 points by default, setting by parameters)
Data register [D] 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Link register [W] 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Annunciator [F] 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Edge relay [V] 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
*3 The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs. Any program exceeding 124 cannot be executed.
*4 The number has been increased by the function upgrade of the CPU module.
( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals))
*5 The number of points can be changed within the setting range.
( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals))
*10 When the Q2MEM-2MBS is used, the maximum number of files stored is 287 for the CPU module whose serial number
(first five digits) is "16020" or earlier.
157
Redundant CPU
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
R: The following number of device points can be used by switching blocks (in increments of
32768 points (R0 to 32767)).
ZR: The following number of device points can be used without switching blocks.
Standard
131072 points
RAM
SRAM card
517120 points
(1M byte)
File [R],
SRAM card
register*6 [ZR] 1041408 points
(2M bytes)
SRAM card
1042432 points
(4M bytes)*11
Flash card
1041408 points
(2M bytes)
Flash card
No. of device points
1042432 points
(4M bytes)
Link special relay [SB] 2048 points (SB0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special register [SW] 2048 points (SW0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Step relay [S]*7 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Index register [Z] 16 points (Z0 to 15) (The number of device points is fixed.)
4096 points (P0 to 4095) (The number of device points is fixed.), The use ranges of the local
Pointer [P]
pointers and common pointers can be set up by parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255) (The number of device points is fixed.)
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I]
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SD0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Max. 100k words
No. of device tracking words
( QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System))
Device for accessing the link device of a network module directly
Link direct device
Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, J\B, J\SW, J\SB
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U\G
*6 When a Flash card is used, only reading is possible. ATA cards cannot be used.
*7 The step relay is a device for the SFC function.
*11 The card can be used for the CPU module whose serial number (first five digits) is "16021" or later.
158
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Redundant CPU
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
L0 to 8191 (default) (Setting by parameters)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function Accuracy: -3.2 to +5.27s (TYP.+2.07s)/d at 0°C
Accuracy: -2.77 to +5.27s (TYP.+2.22s)/d at 25°C
Accuracy: -12.14 to +3.65s (TYP.-2.89s)/d at 55°C
Allowable momentary power failure
Varies depending on the power supply module.
time
5VDC internal current consumption 0.89A
H 98mm
External dimensions W 55.2mm
D 89.3mm
Weight 0.30kg 6
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to Page 117, CHAPTER 5.
6.2.4 Redundant CPU
6.2 Specifications
159
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
(1) Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU
Universal model QCPU
Item
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
Control method Stored program cyclic operation
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
(Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX, DY).)
Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC),
Program Sequence control language
MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
language
Process control language ----
Processing
LD X0 120ns 80ns 60ns 40ns
speed
(sequence
MOV D0 D1 240ns 160ns 120ns 80ns
instruction)
Processing
speed Tracking execution time
----
(redundant (increased scan time)
function)
Constant scan 0.5 to 2000ms
(Function for keeping regular scan time) (Setting available in 0.5ms unit) (Setting by parameters)
10K steps 15K steps 20K steps
Program size*1, *2
(40K bytes) (60K bytes) (80K bytes)
Program memory (drive 0) 40K bytes 60K bytes 80K bytes
Size of the installed
Memory card (RAM) (drive 1) ---- memory card
(8M bytes max.)
Size of the installed
memory card
(Flash card:
Memory card (ROM) (drive 2) ----
*1 4M bytes max.,
Memory size
ATA card:
32M bytes max.)
Standard RAM (drive 3) ---- 128K bytes
Standard ROM (drive 4) 256K bytes 512K bytes
CPU ---- 8K bytes
shared Multiple CPU high
memory speed ----
*3 transmission area
*1 The size unit of the files stored in the memory area differs depending on the CPU module.
For details, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2 The maximum number of executable sequence steps is obtained by the following formula.
(Program size) - (File header size (Default: 34 steps))
For details of the program size and files, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3 Data in the CPU shared memory is not latched.
Data in the CPU shared memory is cleared when the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is
reset.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
160
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Universal model QCPU
Item
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
*7
Program memory 32 64*7
319 (When the
Memory card (RAM) ---- Q3MEM-8MBS is
used)
Max. number
Memory card Flash card ---- 288
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card ---- 511
4 files (each one of the following files: file register file, local device
Standard RAM ----
file, sampling trace file, and module error collection file)
Standard ROM 128
Initial
Max. number of intelligent 512 2048
setting
function module parameters
Refresh 256 1024
No. of times of writing data into the program
Max. 100000 times*4
memory
No. of times of writing data into the standard
6
*5
Max. 100000 times
ROM
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points
256 points 1024 points 2048 points
(No. of points accessible to the actual I/O
(X/Y0 to FF) (X/Y0 to 3FF) (X/Y0 to 7FF)
module.)
Internal relay [M]*6 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L]*6 8192 points by default (L0 to 8191) (changeable)
Link relay [B]*6 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (changeable)
(Sharing of low- and high-speed timers)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T]*6
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.01 to 100ms, 0.01ms unit, 10.00ms by default)
0 points by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
No. of device points
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by
Retentive timer [ST]*6
parameters.
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.01 to 100ms, 0.01ms unit, 10.00ms by default)
*6 Normal counter, 1024 points by default (C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Counter [C]
Data register [D]*6 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Extended data register [D] ---- 0 points by default (changeable)
Link register [W]*6 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Extended link register [W] ---- 0 points by default (changeable)
*6 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Annunciator [F]
Edge relay [V]*6 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
*6 2048 points by default (SB0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Link special relay [SB]
Link special register [SW]*6 2048 points by default (SW0 to 7FF) (changeable)
161
*4 A single write operation may not be counted as one.
The count of writing into the program memory can be checked with the special register (SD682 and SD683).
*5 A single write operation may not be counted as one.
The count of writing into the standard ROM can be checked with the special register (SD687 and SD688).
*6 The number of points can be changed within the setting range. ( QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals))
*7 The number of executable programs differs depending on the CPU module.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU: up to 32 programs
• Q02UCPU: up to 64 programs
162
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Universal model QCPU
Item
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
R: The following number of device points can be used by switching blocks
(in increments of 32768 points (R0 to 32767)).
----
ZR: The following number of device points can be used without switching
blocks.
Standard RAM ---- 65536 points
SRAM card
---- 517120 points
(1M byte)
SRAM card
File [R], ---- 1041408 points
(2M bytes)
*8 [ZR]
register
SRAM card
---- 2087936 points
(4M bytes)
SRAM card
---- 4184064 points
(8M bytes)
Flash card
---- 1041408 points
(2M bytes) 6
Flash card
---- 2087936 points
(4M bytes)
No. of device points
Step relay [S]*9 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)*10, *15
Index register /
max. 20 points (Z0 to 19)
Standard device register [Z]
Index register [Z]
max. 10 points (Z0 to 18)
(32-bit modification specification of ----
(Index register (Z) is used in double words.)
ZR device)
512 points (P0 to 511), The use ranges of the local 4096 points (P0 to 4095), The use
Pointer [P] pointers and common pointers can be set up by ranges of the local pointers and common
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
parameters. pointers can be set up by parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255)
128 points (I0 to 127)
The constant cyclic interval of system
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt
interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up
pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I] by parameters.
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31:
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms,
10ms
I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SD0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device of a network module directly
Link direct device
Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, J\B, J\SW, J\SB
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U\G
*8 When a Flash card is used, only reading is possible. ATA cards cannot be used.
*9 The step relay is a device for the SFC function.
*10 For the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later, the number of device points can
be changed to zero.
*15 For the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "12052" or later, a step relay can be set in
increments of 1k point and up to 8192 points. ( Page 646, Appendix 6.6)
163
Universal model QCPU
Item
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
Data transmission speed ----
Communication mode ----
Transmission method ----
Specifi-
Max. distance between
cations of ----
hub and node
built-in
Ethernet Max.
10BASE-T ----
port CPU number of
connectable 100BASE-
module*11 ----
nodes TX
Number of
----
connections*12
L0 to 8191 (8192 points by default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters)
Year, month, date, hour, minute,
second, and day of the week
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the
(Automatic leap year detection)
week
Accuracy: -2.96 to +3.74s
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function (TYP.+1.42s)/d at 0°C
Accuracy: -2.96 to +3.74s (TYP.+1.24s)/d at 0°C
Accuracy: -3.18 to +3.74s
Accuracy: -2.34 to +3.74s (TYP.+1.63s)/d at 25°C
(TYP.+1.50s)/d at 25°C
Accuracy: -11.48 to +2.12s (TYP.-3.03s)/d at 55°C
Accuracy: -13.20 to +2.12s
(TYP.-3.54s)/d at 55°C
20ms or less
Allowable momentary power failure
(100VAC or Varies depending on the power supply module.
time
more)
5VDC internal current consumption 0.37A*13 0.33A 0.23A
H 98mm 98mm
External dimensions
W 244.4mm*14 27.4mm
D 98mm 89.3mm
Weight 0.70kg *14 0.15kg 0.20kg
*11 For the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
*12 The number is a total of TCP/IP and UDP/IP.
*13 The value is for the CPU module and base unit together.
*14 The value includes the CPU module, power supply module, and base unit.
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to Page 117, CHAPTER 5.
164
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
(2) Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UD(E)HCPU
Universal model QCPU
Item Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU
Control method Stored program cyclic operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode (Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX, DY).)
Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC),
Program Sequence control language
MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
language
Process control language ----
Processing
LD X0 20ns 9.5ns
speed
(sequence
MOV D0 D1 40ns 19ns
instruction)
Processing 6
speed Tracking execution time
----
(redundant (increased scan time)
function)
Constant scan
0.5 to 2000ms (Setting available in 0.5ms unit) (Setting by parameters)
(Function for keeping regular scan time)
30K steps 40K steps 60K steps 100K steps 130K steps
Program size*1, *2
(120K bytes) (160K bytes) (240K bytes) (400K bytes) (520K bytes)
Program memory (drive 0) 120K bytes 160K bytes 240K bytes 400K bytes 520K bytes
Memory card (RAM)
Size of the installed memory card (8M bytes max.)
(drive 1)
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
Memory card (ROM)
Size of the installed memory card (Flash card: 4M bytes max., ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
(drive 2)
Standard RAM
192K bytes 256K bytes 768K bytes 1024K bytes
Memory (drive 3)
size*1 Standard ROM
1024K bytes 2048K steps
(drive 4)
8K bytes
CPU
Multiple
shared
CPU high
memory 32K bytes
speed
*3
transmission area
*1 The size unit of the files stored in the memory area differs depending on the CPU module.
For details, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2 The maximum number of executable sequence steps is obtained by the following formula.
(Program size) - (File header size (Default: 34 steps))
For details of the program size and files, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3 Data in the CPU shared memory is not latched.
Data in the CPU shared memory is cleared when the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is
reset.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
165
Universal model QCPU
Item Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU
Program memory *4 *4
124 252
Memory card (RAM) 319 (When the Q3MEM-8MBS is used)
Memory Flash card 288
Max. number card
of files stored (ROM) ATA card 511
4 files (each one of the following files: file register file, local device file,
Standard RAM
sampling trace file, and module error collection file)
Standard ROM 256
Max. number of intelligent Initial
4096
function module setting
parameters Refresh 2048
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times*5
program memory
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times*6
standard ROM
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points
(No. of points accessible to the actual 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
I/O module.)
Internal relay [M]*7 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable)
*7 8192 points by default (L0 to 8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L]
Link relay [B]*7 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (changeable)
(Sharing of low- and high-speed timers)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T]*7
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.01 to 100ms, 0.01ms unit, 10.00ms by default)
0 points by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
No. of device points
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
*7 The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
Retentive timer [ST]
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.01 to 100ms, 0.01ms unit, 10.00ms by default)
Counter [C]*7 Normal counter, 1024 points by default (C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Data register [D]*7 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Extended data register [D] 0 points by default (changeable)
Link register [W]*7 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Extended link register [W] 0 points by default (changeable)
Annunciator [F]*7 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Edge relay [V]*7 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
Link special relay [SB]*7 2048 points by default (SB0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Link special register [SW]*7 2048 points by default (SW0 to 7FF) (changeable)
166
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
*4 The number of executable programs differs depending on the CPU module.
• Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU: up to 124 programs
• Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU: up to 124 programs (125 or more programs cannot be executed.)
*5 A single write operation may not be counted as one.
The count of writing into the program memory can be checked with the special register (SD682 and SD683).
*6 A single write operation may not be counted as one.
The count of writing into the standard ROM can be checked with the special register (SD687 and SD688).
*7 The number of points can be changed within the setting range. ( QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals))
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
167
Universal model QCPU
Item Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU
R: The following number of device points can be used by switching blocks (in increments of
32768 points (R0 to 32767)).
ZR: The following number of device points can be used without switching blocks.
Standard RAM 98304 points 131072 points 393216 points 524288 points
SRAM card
517120 points
(1M byte)
SRAM card
1041408 points
File [R], (2M bytes)
register*8 [ZR] SRAM card
2087936 points
(4M bytes)
SRAM card
4184064 points
(8M bytes)
Flash card
1041408 points
(2M bytes)
No. of device points
Flash card
2087936 points
(4M bytes)
Step relay [S]*9 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)*10, *16
Index register /
Max. 20 points (Z0 to 19)
Standard device register [Z]
Index register [Z]
Max. 10 points (Z0 to 18)
(32-bit modification specification
(Index register (Z) is used in double words.)
of ZR device)
4096 points (P0 to 4095),
Pointer [P]
The use ranges of the local pointers and common pointers can be set up by parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255)
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I]
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SD0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device of a network module directly
Link direct device Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, J\B,
J\SW, J\SB
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U\G
*8 When a Flash card is used, only reading is possible. ATA cards cannot be used.
*9 The step relay is a device for the SFC function.
*10 For the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later, the number of device points can
be changed to zero.
*16 For the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "12052" or later, a step relay can be set in
increments of 1k point and up to 16384 points. ( Page 637, Appendix 6)
168
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Universal model QCPU
Item Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU
Data transmission
100/10Mbps
speed
Communication mode Full-duplex/Half-duplex
Specifi- Transmission method Base band
cations of Max. distance between
100m
Ethernet hub and node
port built in Max. 10BASE-
the CPU Cascade connection: Up to four bases*17
number of T
module*11 connectable 100BAS
nodes Cascade connection: Up to two bases*17
E-TX
Number of
16 for a total of socket communication, MELSOFT connection, and MC protocol and 1 for FTP
connections*12
L0 to 8191 (8192 points by default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters)
6
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function Accuracy: -2.96 to +3.74s (TYP.+1.42s)/d at 0°C
Accuracy: -3.18 to +3.74s (TYP.+1.50s)/d at 25°C
Accuracy: -13.20 to +2.12s (TYP.-3.54s)/d at 55°C
Allowable momentary power failure
Varies depending on the power supply module.
time
5VDC internal current consumption 0.33A*13 0.39A*14
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
H 98mm
External dimensions W 27.4mm
D 89.3mm*15
Weight 0.20kg*15
*11 For the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
*12 The number is a total of TCP/IP and UDP/IP.
*13 The value is 0.46A for the Q03UDECPU.
*14 The value is 0.49A for the Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q13UDEHCPU.
*15 For Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q13UDEHCPU, the external dimensions and
the weight are as follows.
• External dimensions (D): 115mm
• Weight: 0.22kg
*17 This is the number of connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. For the number of connectable nodes when a
switching hub is used, contact the manufacturer of the switching hub used.
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to Page 117, CHAPTER 5.
169
(3) Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU
Universal model QCPU
Item Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
Control method Stored program cyclic operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode (Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX, DY).)
Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC),
Program Sequence control language
MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
language
Process control language ----
Processing
LD X0 9.5ns
speed
(sequence
MOV D0 D1 19ns
instruction)
Processing
speed Tracking execution time
----
(redundant (increased scan time)
function)
Constant scan
0.5 to 2000ms (Setting available in 0.5ms unit) (Setting by parameters)
(Function for keeping regular scan time)
200K steps 260K steps 500K steps 1000K steps
Program size*1, *2
(800K bytes) (1040K bytes) (2000K bytes) (4000K bytes)
Program memory (drive 0) 800K bytes 1040K bytes 2000K bytes 4000K bytes
Memory card (RAM) (drive 1) Size of the installed memory card (8M bytes max.)
Memory card (ROM) (drive 2) Size of the installed memory card (Flash card: 4M bytes max., ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
Standard RAM (drive 3) 1280K bytes 1536K bytes 1792K bytes
Memory Standard ROM (drive 4) 4096K steps 8192K bytes 16384K bytes
size*1 8K bytes
CPU shared Multiple CPU
*3 high speed
memory 32K bytes
transmission
area
*1 The size unit of the files stored in the memory area differs depending on the CPU module.
For details, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2 The maximum number of executable sequence steps is obtained by the following formula.
(Program size) - (File header size (Default: 34 steps))
For details of the program size and files, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3 Data in the CPU shared memory is not latched.
Data in the CPU shared memory is cleared when the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is
reset.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
170
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Universal model QCPU
Item Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
Program memory 252*4
Memory card (RAM) 319 (When the Q3MEM-8MBS is used)
Memory Flash card 288
Max. number card
of files stored ATA card 511
(ROM)
4 files (each one of the following files: file register file, local device file,
Standard RAM
sampling trace file, and module error collection file)
Standard ROM 256 512
Initial
Max. number of intelligent 4096
setting
function module parameters
Refresh 2048
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times*5
program memory
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times*6
6
standard ROM
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points
(No. of points accessible to the actual I/O 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
module.)
Internal relay [M]*7 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L]*7 8192 points by default (L0 to 8191) (changeable)
Link relay [B]*7 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (changeable)
(Sharing of low- and high-speed timers)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T]*7
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.01 to 100ms, 0.01ms unit, 10.00ms by default)
0 points by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
No. of device points
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
*7 The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
Retentive timer [ST]
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.01 to 100ms, 0.01ms unit, 10.00ms by default)
Counter [C]*7 Normal counter, 1024 points by default (C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Data register [D]*7 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Extended data register [D] 0 points by default (changeable) 131072 points by default (changeable)
Link register [W]*7 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Extended link register [W] 0 points by default (changeable)
*7 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Annunciator [F]
Edge relay [V]*7 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
Link special relay [SB]*7 2048 points by default (SB0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Link special register [SW]*7 2048 points by default (SW0 to 7FF) (changeable)
171
*4 The number of executable programs differs depending on the CPU module.
• Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU: up to 124 programs (125 or more programs cannot be executed.)
• Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU: up to 252 programs
*5 A single write operation may not be counted as one.
The count of writing into the program memory can be checked with the special register (SD682 and SD683).
*6 A single write operation may not be counted as one.
The count of writing into the standard ROM can be checked with the special register (SD687 and SD688).
*7 The number of points can be changed within the setting range. ( QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals))
172
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Universal model QCPU
Item Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
R: The following number of device points can be used by switching blocks (in increments of
32768 points (R0 to 32767)).
ZR: The following number of device points can be used without switching blocks.
Standard RAM 655360 points 786432 points 917504 points
SRAM card
517120 points
(1M byte)
SRAM card
1041408 points
File [R], (2M bytes)
register*8 [ZR] SRAM card
2087936 points
(4M bytes)
SRAM card
4184064 points
(8M bytes)
Flash card
(2M bytes)
1041408 points
6
Flash card
No. of device points
2087936 points
(4M bytes)
Step relay [S]*9 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)*10, *15
Index register/
Max. 20 points (Z0 to 19)
Standard device register [Z]
Index register [Z]
Max. 10 points (Z0 to 18)
(32-bit modification specification of
(Index register (Z) is used in double words.)
ZR device)
4096 points (P0 to 4095), The use ranges of 8192 points (P0 to 8191), The use ranges of
Pointer [P] the local pointers and common pointers can the local pointers and common pointers can
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
be set up by parameters. be set up by parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255)
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I]
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SD0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device of a network module directly
Link direct device Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, J\B,
J\SW, J\SB
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U\G
*8 When a Flash card is used, only reading is possible. ATA cards cannot be used.
*9 The step relay is a device for the SFC function.
*10 For the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later, the number of device points can
be changed to zero.
*15 For the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "12052" or later, a step relay can be set in
increments of 1k point and up to 16384 points. ( Page 637, Appendix 6)
173
Universal model QCPU
Item Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
Data transmission
100/10Mbps
speed
Communication mode Full-duplex/Half-duplex
Transmission method Base band
Specifications Max. distance between
100m
of Ethernet hub and node
port built in the Max. 10BASE-
Cascade connection: Up to four bases*16
CPU module*11 number of T
connectable 100BAS
nodes Cascade connection: Up to two bases*16
E-TX
Number of
16 for a total of socket communication, MELSOFT connection, and MC protocol and 1 for FTP
connections*12
L0 to 8191 (8192 points by default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function Accuracy: -2.96 to +3.74s (TYP.+1.42s)/d at 0°C
Accuracy: -3.18 to +3.74s (TYP.+1.50s)/d at 25°C
Accuracy: -13.20 to +2.12s (TYP.-3.54s)/d at 55°C
Allowable momentary power failure time Varies depending on the power supply module.
5VDC internal current consumption 0.39A*13 0.50A
H 98mm
External dimensions W 27.4mm
D 89.3mm*14 115mm
Weight 0.20kg*14 0.24kg
*11 For the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
*12 The number is a total of TCP/IP and UDP/IP.
*13 The value is 0.49A for the Q20UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU.
*14 For Q20UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU, the external dimensions and the weight are as follows.
• External dimensions (D):115mm
• Weight: 0.22kg
*16 This is the number of connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. For the number of connectable nodes when a
switching hub is used, contact the manufacturer of the switching hub used.
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to Page 117, CHAPTER 5.
174
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
(4) Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU
Universal model QCPU
Item
Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU
Control method Stored program cyclic operation
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
(Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX, DY).)
Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language*10, MELSAP3 (SFC),
Program Sequence control language
MELSAP-L, function block, and structured text (ST)
language
Process control language ----
Processing LD X0 1.9ns
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 3.9ns
instruction)
Processing
speed Tracking execution time
----
(redundant (increased scan time)
function)
6
Constant scan 0.5 to 2000ms
(Function for keeping regular scan time) (Setting available in 0.1ms unit) (Setting by parameters)
30K steps 40K steps 60K steps 130K steps 260K steps
Program size*1, *2
(120K bytes) (160K bytes) (240K bytes) (520K bytes) (1040K bytes)
Program memory (drive 0) 120K bytes 160K bytes 240K bytes 520K bytes 1040K bytes
Memory card (RAM) (drive 1) ----
Memory card (SD) (drive 2) Depends on the SD memory card (SD or SDHC type) used. (Max. 32G bytes)
Without an
extended 192K bytes 256K bytes 768K bytes 1024K bytes 1280K bytes
Standard
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
SRAM cassette
RAM
With an
Memory (drive 3) Capacities of the memory in the module + extended SRAM cassette
extended
size (The maximum capacity of an extended SRAM cassettes is 8M bytes.)
SRAM cassette
Standard ROM (drive 4) 1025.5K bytes 2051K bytes 4102K bytes
8K bytes
CPU Multiple CPU
shared high speed
32K bytes
memory*3 transmission
area
*1 The maximum number of executable sequence steps is obtained by the following formula.
(Program size) - (File header size (Default: 34 steps))
For details of the program size and files, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2 When the QnUD(H)CPU or QnUDE(H)CPU is replaced with the QnUDVCPU, the number of steps in the program may
change (increase or decrease).
• For details of the change, refer to the “Precautions for replacing the QnUD(E)(H)CPU with the QnUDVCPU”
section in the following manual.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
• For the number of steps of each instruction, refer to the “INSTRUCTION TABLES” chapter in the following
manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instruction)
*3 Data in the CPU shared memory cannot be latched.
Data in the CPU shared memory is cleared when the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is
reset.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
*10 Logic symbolic language cannot be used because GX Works2 does not support this language.
175
Universal model QCPU
Item
Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU
Program memory 124*4 252 *4
Root directory: 512 files (maximum)*11
SD
Memory Subdirectory: 65534 files (maximum)*11
card (SD) Root directory: 65535 files (maximum)*11
Max. SDHC
Subdirectory: 65534 files (maximum)*11
number of
Without an
files stored
extended SRAM
Standard
cassette 323
RAM
With an extended
SRAM cassette
Standard ROM 256
Max. number of Initial setting 4096
intelligent function
Refresh 2048
module parameters
No. of times of writing data into the program
Max. 100000 times*5
memory
No. of times of writing data into the standard
Max. 100000 times*5
ROM
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points
(No. of points accessible to the actual I/O 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
module.)
176
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Universal model QCPU
Item
Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU
9216 points by
default 15360 points by default 28672 points by default
Internal relay [M]*6
(M0 to 9215) (M0 to 15359) (changeable) (M0 to 28671) (changeable)
(changeable)
*6 8192 points by default (L0 to 8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L]
Link relay [B]*6 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (changeable)
(Sharing of low- and high-speed timers)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T]*6
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.01 to 100ms, 0.01ms unit, 10.00ms by default)
0 points by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
No. of device points
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST]*6 The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.01 to 100ms, 0.01ms unit, 10.00ms by default)
Counter [C]*6 Normal counter, 1024 points by default (C0 to 1023) (changeable)
6
13312 points
by default 22528 points by default 41984 points by default
Data register [D]*6
(D0 to 13311) (D0 to 22527) (changeable) (D0 to 41983) (changeable)
(changeable)
*6 0 points by default (changeable)
Extended data register [D]
*6 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Link register [W]
Extended link register [W]*6 0 points by default (changeable)
*6 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Annunciator [F]
*6 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
Edge relay [V]
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
Link special relay [SB]*6 2048 points by default (SB0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Link special register [SW]*6 2048 points by default (SW0 to 7FF) (changeable)
177
Universal model QCPU
Item
Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU
R: The following number of device points can be used by switching blocks (in
increments of 32768 points (R0 to 32767)).
ZR: The following number of device points can be used without switching blocks.
Without an
extended SRAM 98304 points 131072 points 393216 points 524288 points 655360 points
cassette
With an extended
1048576 1179648
SRAM cassette 622592 points 655360 points 917504 points
points points
File [R], (1M bytes)
register [ZR] With an extended
Standard 1146880 1179648 1441792 1572864 1703936
SRAM cassette
RAM points points points points points
(2M bytes)
With an extended
2195456 2228224 2490368 2621440 2752512
SRAM cassette
points points points points points
(4M bytes)
With an extended
4292608 4325376 4587520 4718592 4849664
No. of device points
SRAM cassette
points points points points points
(8M bytes)
Step relay [S]*7 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (changeable)
Index register/
Max. 20 points (Z0 to 19)
Standard device register [Z]
Index register [Z] Max. 10 points (Z0 to 18)
(32-bit modification specification of ZR device) (Index register (Z) is used in double words.)
4096 points (P0 to 4095),
Pointer [P] The use ranges of the local pointers and common pointers can be set up by
parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255)
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 and I49
Interrupt pointer [I] can be set up by parameters.
(I28 to 31: 0.5 to 1000ms, in 0.5ms unit, I49: 0.2 to 1.0ms, in 0.1ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms, I49: Blank
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SD0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device of a network module directly
Link direct device Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, J\B,
J\SW, J\SB
*4 The number of executable programs in the CPU module is up to 124.
*5 A single write operation may not be counted as one.
The count of writing to the program memory or standard ROM can be checked with the special register (SD682 and
SD683, or SD687 and SD688, respectively).
*6 The number of points can be changed within the setting range. For the setting range, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*7 The step relay is a device for the SFC function.
*11 The numbers are total numbers of directories that can be created when a file or folder name length is under 13
characters (including an extension). If the file or folder name length is over 13 characters or the name includes lower-
case characters, the maximum number of directories is decreased.
178
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Universal model QCPU
Item
Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly.
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U\G
Data transmission speed 100/10Mbps
Communication mode Full-duplex/Half-duplex
Transmission method Base band
Specifications Max. distance between hub
100m
of Ethernet and node
port built in Max. 10BASE-T Cascade connection: Up to four bases*8
the CPU number of
module connectable 100BASE-
Cascade connection: Up to two bases*8
nodes TX
16 for a total of socket communication, MELSOFT connection, and MC protocol,
Number of connections*9
and 1 for FTP
L0 to 8191 (8192 points by default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters) 6
One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE.
RUN/PAUSE contact
(Setting by parameters)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function Accuracy: -2.97 to +3.75s (TYP.+0.39s)/d at 0°C
Accuracy: -2.97 to +3.75s (TYP.+0.39s)/d at 25°C
Accuracy: -12.77 to +2.13s (TYP.-5.32s)/d at 55°C
Allowable momentary power failure time Varies depending on the power supply module.
5VDC internal current consumption 0.58A (only CPU module), 0.6A (with an extended SRAM cassette)
H 98mm
6.2.5 Universal model QCPU
6.2 Specifications
External dimensions W 27.4mm
D 115mm
Weight 0.20kg
*8 This is the number of connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. For the number of connectable nodes when a
switching hub is used, contact the manufacturer of the switching hub used.
*9 The number is a total of TCP/IP and UDP/IP.
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to Page 117, CHAPTER 5.
179
6.3 Switch Operation at the Time of Writing Program
6.3.1 Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU
This section explains the switch operation after a program is written using programming tool.
(1) When writing program with CPU module set to "STOP"*1
(a) To set to RUN status with device memory data cleared
1. Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RESET position once (Approximately 1 second) and return
it to the STOP position.
2. Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RUN position.
3. The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).
(b) To set to RUN status with device memory data not cleared (held)
1. Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RUN position.
2. The RUN LED flashes.
3. Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the STOP position.
4. Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RUN position again.
5. The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).
(2) When a program is written while CPU module is running (online change)*2
No operation is needed for the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module. At this time, the device memory
data are not cleared.
*1 When a program was written to the program memory during boot operation, also write the program to the boot source
memory. If the program is not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed at the next boot
operation.
*2 When a program is written online in the ladder mode, the changed program is written to the program memory.
When performing boot operation, also write the program to the boot source memory after online change. If the program
is not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.
For details of the boot operation, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
When the CPU module is placed in the STOP status by the remote STOP operation of programming tool, it can be set in the
RUN status by the remote RUN operation of programming tool after program write. In that case, no operation is needed for
the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module. For details of programming tool, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
180
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
6.3.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant
CPU
This section explains the switch operation after a program is written using programming tool.
(1) When writing program with CPU module set to "STOP"*1
(a) To set to RUN status with device memory data cleared
1. Set the RESET/L. CLR switch to the RESET position once and return it to the original neutral
position.
2. Set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN.
3. The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).
(b) To set to RUN status with device memory data not cleared (held)
1. Set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN.
6
2. The RUN LED flashes.
3. Set the RUN/STOP switch to STOP.
4. Set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN again.
5. The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).
(2) When a program is written while CPU module is running
(online change)*2
No operation is needed for the RUN/STOP switch and RESET/L. CLR switch of the CPU module.
6.3.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
6.3 Switch Operation at the Time of Writing Program
At this time, the device memory data are not cleared.
*1 When a program was written to the program memory during boot operation, also write the program to the boot source
memory.
If the program is not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.
*2 When a program is changed online in the ladder mode, the changed program is written to the program memory.
When performing boot operation, also write the program to the boot source memory after online change. If the program
is not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.
For details of the boot operation, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
● Before writing a program to the CPU module, perform the following operation.
• Set the system protect setting switch (DIP switch: SW1) of the CPU module to off (not protected).
• Cancel the registered password on programming tool.
● When the CPU module is placed in the STOP status by the remote STOP operation of programming tool, it can be put in
the RUN status by the remote RUN operation of programming tool after program write. In that case, No operation is
needed for the RUN/STOP switch and RESET/L. CLR switch of the CPU module.
● For details of programming tool, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
181
6.4 Reset Operation
6.4.1 Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU
For the Universal model QCPU, the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module is used to switch between the RUN
status and STOP status and to perform RESET operation.
When using the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to reset the CPU module, setting the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the
reset position will not reset it immediately.
Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the RESET position until reset processing is complete (the flashing ERR. LED turns
off).
If you release your hand from the RUN/STOP/RESET switch during reset processing (the ERR. LED is flashing), the switch
will return to the STOP position and reset processing cannot be completed.
Perform reset operation using the RUN/STOP/RESET switch as shown in the following flowchart.
Start
.......................Reset operation is started using
Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the
the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
"RESET" position (1 second or more).
RESET RUN
RUN/STOP/RESET
STOP switch
.......................Reset is accepted and reset
The ERR. LED flashes several times
processing is performed.
(3 to 4 times).
MODE
RUN flashes.
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
.......................Reset is completed.
The "ERR. LED" goes off.
MODE
RUN Goes off.
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
.......................Reset is canceled.
Return the RUN/STOP/RESET
switch to the "STOP" position.*
RESET RUN
RUN/STOP/RESET *: Releasing your hand from the
STOP switch RUN/STOP/RESET switch returns it
to the STOP position.
Completed
182
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
6.4.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant
CPU
Reset operation is performed by turning the RESET/L. CLR switch of the CPU module to the RESET side for the High
Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and Redundant CPU.
Be sure to return the RESET/L. CLR switch to the neutral position after resetting. When the system is left with the RESET/L.
CLR switch set to the RESET, the entire system is reset, not operated normally.
6.4.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
6.4 Reset Operation
183
6.5 Latch Clear Operation
6.5.1 Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU
To clear latch data, perform either of the following.
• Remote latch clear using a programming tool
• Latch clear by using the special relay and special register areas Note 6.1 Note 6.1
● The latch data cannot be cleared using a switch of the CPU module.
● The valid/invalid for latch clear in the clear range of latch clear operation can be set for each device. The setting can be
made in the device setting of the PLC parameter.
● For details of the latch clear operation, refer to the following.
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) for the CPU module used
6.5.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant
CPU
To perform latch clear, operate the RESET/L. CLR switch in the following procedure.
1. RUN/STOP switch: STOP
2. RESET/L. CLR switch: Set the switch to the L. CLR position several times until the USER LED
flashes.
USER LED: Flash (Ready for latch clear)
3. RESET/L. CLR switch: Set the switch to the L. CLR position one more time.
USER LED: Off (Latch clear complete)
● The valid/invalid for latch clear in the clear range of latch clear operation can be set for each device. The setting can be
configured in the device setting of the PLC parameter.
● In addition to the way of using the RESET/L. CLR switch for latch clear, remote latch clear may be performed from
programming tool.
For details of remote latch clear operation by programming tool, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Note 6.1 Universal
Only the High-speed Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "15043" or later supports this type of latch clear
operation.
184
CHAPTER 6 CPU MODULE
6.6 Automatic Write to the Standard ROM Note 6.1
The High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU allow data in the memory card to be written
into the standard ROM automatically.Note 6.1
For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
(1) Procedures for automatic write to the standard ROM
Automatic write to the standard ROM is performed with the following procedures.
(a) Operation with programming tool (setting automatic write to the standard ROM)
Project window [Parameter] [PLC Parameter] [Boot File]
1. Check the "Auto Download All Data from Memory Card to Standard ROM".
2. Set the parameter and program to be booted in the "Boot File" tab.
(Set the "Transfer from" to "Standard ROM".) 6
Check "Auto Download
All Data from Memory
Card to Standard ROM ".
Set "Transfer from" to
"Standard ROM".
6.6 Automatic Write to the Standard ROM
3. Store the set parameters and programs to be booted in the memory card.
Note 6.1 Basic Universal
For the Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU, automatic write to the standard ROM is not available.
185
(b) Operations on CPU module (automatic write to the standard ROM)
1. Power off the programmable controller.
2. Insert the memory card that contains the parameters and programs to be booted onto the CPU
module.
3. Set the DIP switches on the CPU module so that the valid parameter drive is matched with the
memory card to be installed.
• When a SRAM card is installed: SW2 : On
SW3 : Off
• When a Flash card/ATA card is installed: SW2 : Off
SW3 : On
4. Power on the programmable controller.
Boot the file specified in the memory card into the program memory, and write the program in the memory
to the standard ROM after completion of the boot.
5. The BOOT LED will flash when automatic write to the standard ROM is completed, and the CPU
module will be in the stop error status.
6. Power off the programmable controller.
7. Remove the memory card, and then set the valid parameter drive to the standard ROM with the
CPU module's DIP switches.
• Standard ROM: SW2 : On
SW3 : Off
8. The parameters and programs will be booted from the standard ROM to the program memory
when the programmable controller is powered on.
186
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
This chapter describes the specifications of the power supply modules applicable for the programmable controller
system (The Q Series power supply module, slim type power supply module, redundant power supply module and
AnS/A Series power supply module) and how to select the most suitable module.
187
7.1 Part Names and Settings
This section describes part names of each power supply module.
Q61P-A1 (100 to 120VAC input, 5VDC 6A output)
Q61P-A2 (200 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 6A output)
Q61P (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 6A output)
Q62P (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 3A/24VDC 0.6A output)
Q63P (24VDC input, 5VDC 6A output)
Q64P (100 to 120VAC/200 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 8.5A output)
Q64PN (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 8.5A output)
11) 1), 2)
10) 10)
8) 4) 4)
(Q62P
6) 6)
only)
7) 7)
13), 14), 16)
15), 17)
12) 9) 9)
Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q62P, Q64P, Q64PN Q63P
Q61P-D (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 6A output) Q61SP (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 2A output)
3) 11)
11) 1)
10)
4)
5) 4)
6)
6) 7)
7)
15)
15)
12)
12) 9)
188
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
No. Name Application
On (green): Normal (5VDC output, momentary power failure within 20ms)
Off:
• AC power supply is on but the power supply module is out of order.
1) POWER LED*2
(5VDC error, overload, internal circuit failure, or blown fuse)
• AC power supply is not on.
• Power failure (including an momentary power failure of 20ms or more)
On (green): Normal (5VDC output, momentary power failure within 10ms)
Off:
• DC power supply is on but the power supply module is out of order.
2) POWER LED
(5VDC error, overload, internal circuit failure, or blown fuse)
• DC power supply is not on.
• Power failure (including an momentary power failure of 10ms or more)
On (green): When operation has started
On (orange): Remaining life of the module approx. 50%
Flash (orange):
• On for 5 seconds and off for 1 second:
Module remaining life is approx. 1 year
• At intervals of 0.5 seconds:
Module remaining life is approx. 6 months
3) LIFE LED Off:
• Module life expired 7
• Ambient temperature is out of range (Ambient temperature of the module is exceeding the
specification and also the life detection function is stopped.)
On (red):
Ambient temperature out of range (Ambient temperature of the module is exceeding the
specification)
Flash(red): Function failure (at intervals of 1 second)
• Turns on when the entire system operates normally.
7.1 Part Names and Settings
• Turns off (opens) when the power is not supplied, a stop error (including reset) occurs in the
4) ERR. terminal CPU module, or the fuse is blown.
• In a multiple CPU system, turns off when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules.
Normally off when mounted on an extension base unit.
• Output signal of the terminal turns off (opens) when the life is detected. (Applicable only
when the remaining life is 1 year or less.)
• Flicker-OFF (opens) when the life diagnostics error (including detection error) is detected.*1
5) LIFE OUT terminal • Flicker-OFF (opens) when the ambient temperature is detected out of range.
• Output signal of the terminal turns off (opens) when the watchdog timer error is detected in
the module.
The above operations are available when the module is mounted on an extension base unit.
6) FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
Grounding for the power supply filter. For AC input, it has one-half the potential of the input
7) LG terminal
voltage.
Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the output module
8) +24V, 24G terminals
(using external wiring).
9) Terminal screw M3.5 × 7 screw
10) Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block
Used to secure the module to the base unit.
11) Module fixing screw hole
M3 × 12 screw (user-prepared) (Tightening torque range : 0.36 to 0.48N•m)
12) Module mounting lever Used to mount the module onto the base unit.
13) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q61P-A1 and connected to a 100VAC power supply.
14) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q61P-A2 and connected to a 200VAC power supply.
Power input terminals for Q61P, Q61P-D, Q61SP, Q62P, Q64PN and connected to a power
15) Power input terminals
supply of 100VAC to 200VAC.
189
No. Name Application
16) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q63P and connected to a 24VDC power supply.
17) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q64P and connected to a 100VAC/200VAC power supply.
*1 Flicker-OFF indicates that the output signal of the terminal turns off and on at intervals of one second for three times and
then off (opens).
*2 When using the Q61P-D in the system configured with an extension base unit, the POWER LED of the Q61P-D on the
extension base unit may turn on in dull red when the module is turned off. Note that this does not indicate an error.
● The Q61P-A1 is dedicated for inputting a voltage of 100 VAC.
Do not input a voltage of 200 VAC into it or trouble may occur on the Q61P-A1.
Power supply Supply power voltage
module 100VAC 200VAC
Q61P-A1 Operates normally. Power supply module causes trouble.
Power supply module does not cause trouble.
Q61P-A2 Operates normally.
CPU module cannot be operated.
● Q64P automatically switches the input range 100/200VAC.
Therefore, it cannot be used in the intermediate voltage (133 to 169VAC).
The CPU module may not work normally if the above intermediate voltage is applied.
● Individually ground the LG and FG terminals with a ground resistance of 100 or less.
● When the Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P-D, Q61P, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P or Q64PN is mounted on the extension base unit, a
system error cannot be detected by the ERR. terminal. (The ERR. terminal is always off.)
● Cables for the ERR. contact and LIFE OUT contact must be up to 30m and installed in the control panel.
190
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
7.1 Part Names and Settings
191
No. Name Application
On (green): Normal operation (5V DC output, momentary power failure of 10ms or less)
On (red):
1) POWER LED*1
DC power is input but the Q63RP is faulty. (5V DC error, overload, or internal circuit failure)
Off: DC power not input, blown fuse, power failure (including momentary power failure of 10ms or more)
On (green): Normal (5V DC output, momentary power failure within 20ms)
On (red):
2) POWER LED*1 AC power supply is on but Q64RPN, or Q64RP is out of order.
(5V DC error, overload, or internal circuit failure)
Off: AC power supply is not on, blown fuse, power failure (including momentary power failure of 20ms or more)
<When power supply is mounted on redundant power main base unit (Q3RB)>
• Turns on when the system on the redundant power main base unit operates normally.
• Turns off (open) when the Q63RP fails, the DC power supply is not input, a CPU module stop error (including
a reset) occurs, or the fuse is blown.
3) ERR. terminal • Turns off (open) when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules in a multiple CPU system.
<When power supply is mounted on redundant power extension base unit (Q6RB) or redundant type
extension base unit (Q6WRB)>
• Turns on when the Q63RP operates normally.
• Turns off (open) when the Q63RP fails, the DC power supply is not input, or the fuse is blown.
4) FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
Grounding for the power supply filter. The potential of AC input (Q64RPN, or Q64RP) terminal is 1/2 of the input
5) LG terminal
voltage.
6) Power input terminals Connect direct current of 24 VDC with the power input terminal.
Power input terminals for Q64RPN and connected to a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply.
7) Power input terminals
Power input terminals for Q64RP and connected to a 100VAC/200VAC power supply.
8) Terminal screw M3.5 × 7 screw
9) Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block
Screw hole for securing a module to the base unit.
10) Module fixing screw hole
M3 × 12 screw (user-prepared) (Tightening torque : 0.36 to 0.48N•m)
11) Module mounting lever Used to mount a module on the base unit.
*1 Although the POWER LED turns on in red for a moment immediately after the power supply is turned on or off,
redundant power supply modules is not faulty.
● Q64RP automatically switches the input range 100/200VAC.
Therefore, it cannot be used in the intermediate voltage (133 to 169VAC).
The CPU module may not work normally if the above intermediate voltage is applied.
● Supply power to redundant power supply modules from separate power sources (a redundant power supply system).
● Individually ground the LG and FG terminals with a ground resistance of 100 or less.
192
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P
10) 10) 10)
1) 1) 2)
9) 9) 9)
4) 5) 6) 8) 3) 4) 5) 6) 8) 4) 5) 7) 8)
7
No. Name Application
On (green): Normal (5VDC output, momentary power failure within 20ms)
Off:
• AC power supply is on but the power supply module is out of order.
1) POWER LED
(5VDC error, overload, internal circuit failure, or fuse blown)
• AC power supply is not on
• Power failure (including an momentary power failure of 20ms or more)
7.1 Part Names and Settings
On (green): Normal (5VDC output, momentary power failure within 10ms)
Off:
• DC power supply is on but the power supply module is out of order.
2) POWER LED
(5VDC error, overload, internal circuit failure, or fuse blown)
• DC power supply is not on.
• Power failure (including an momentary power failure of 10ms or more)
3) +24V, 24G terminals Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the output module (using external wiring).
4) FG terminals Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
Grounding for the power supply filter. The potential of A1S61PN or A1S62PN terminal is 1/2 of
5) LG terminals
the input voltage.
6) Power input terminals Used to connect a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply.
7) Power input terminals Used to connect a 24VDC power supply.
8) Terminal screw M3.5 × 7 screw
9) Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block
Used to secure the module to the base unit.
10) Module fixing screw hole
(M4 screw, tightening torque : 0.66 to 0.89N•m)
● Do not wire to those terminals for which NC is stamped on the terminal block.
● Individually ground the LG and FG terminals with a ground resistance of 100 or less.
193
7.1.1 Base unit that can be used in combination with power supply
module
This section describes the base unit that can be used in combination with the power supply module respectively.
For details of the CPU modules and base units, refer to the following.
CPU modules: Page 119, CHAPTER 6
Base units: Page 223, CHAPTER 8
For details on the system configuration, refer to Page 33, CHAPTER 2.
(1) Main base unit
: Combination available, ×: Combination not available
Main base unit
Power Q33B
Q32SB Q35DB
supply Q35B
Q33SB Q38RB Q38DB
module Q38B
Q35SB Q312DB
Q312B
Q61P-A1
Q61P-A2
Q61P
Q61P-D
× ×
Q62P
Q63P
Q64P
Q64PN
Q61SP × × ×
Q63RP
Q64RPN × × ×
Q64RP
194
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
(2) Extension base unit
: Combination available, ×: Combination not available
Extension base unit
Power Q63B
QA1S65B QA65B
supply Q52B Q65B
Q68RB Q65WRB QA1S51B QA1S68B QA68B
module Q55B Q68B
*3 *2
Q612B
Q61P-A1
Q61P-A2
Q61P
Q61P-D
× × × × × ×
Q62P
Q63P
Q64P
Q64PN
Q61SP × × × × × × ×
Q63RP
Q64RPN × × *1 × × ×
Q64RP
7
A1S61PN
A1S62PN × × × × × ×
A1S63P
A61P
A61PN
7.1.1 Base unit that can be used in combination with power supply module
7.1 Part Names and Settings
A62P
× × × × × ×
A63P
A61PEU
A62PEU
*1 When mounting the Q64RP to the Q65WRB, use the Q64RP whose serial number (first six digits) is "081103" or later.
The vibration condition described in the general specifications may not be met if the serial number (first six digits) of the
Q64RP is "081102" or earlier is mounted.
*2 The same specifications are applied to the QA6ADP+A6B.
*3 The same specifications are applied to the QA1S6ADP+A1S6B.
195
7.2 Specifications
7.2.1 Power supply module specifications
The following table lists specifications of power supply modules.
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q61P Q62P
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit Q3B, Q3DB, Q6B
+10% +10% +10%
100 to 120VAC -15% 200 to 240VAC -15% 100 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 132VAC) (170 to 264VAC) (85 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Input voltage distortion
Within 5% ( Page 103, Section 4.8.1)
factor
Max. input apparent
105VA 120VA 105VA
power
Max. input power ----
Inrush current*1 20A within 8ms
Rated output 5VDC 6A 3A
current 24VDC ---- 0.6A
External output voltage ---- 24VDC ±10%
Overcurrent 5VDC 6.6A or more 3.3A or more
*1
protection 24VDC ---- 0.66A or more
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*1 24VDC ----
Efficiency 70% or more 65% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms
power failure time*1
Dielectric withstand 2300VAC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m)
voltage Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output"
10MΩ or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
Insulation resistance Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output", the line input and
LG terminals, the output and FG terminals
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
196
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q61P Q62P
Application ERR. contact ( Page 188, Section 7.1)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max., ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
None
suppressor
Fuse None
Terminal screw size M3.5
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5, thickness 0.8mm or less. Two solderless terminals can be connected to one terminal.
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm
External
W 55.2mm
7
dimensions
D 90mm
Weight 0.31kg 0.40kg 0.39kg
*1 For the descriptions of the specification items, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
7.2.1 Power supply module specifications
7.2 Specifications
197
Performance Specifications
Item
Q63P
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit Q3B, Q3DB, Q6B
+30%
24VDC -35%
Input power supply
(15.6 to 31.2VDC)
Input frequency ----
Input voltage distortion
----
factor
Max. input power 45W
Inrush current 100A within 1ms (at 24VDC input)
Rated output 5VDC 6A
current 24VDC ----
External output voltage ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 6.6A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*1 24VDC ----
Efficiency 70% or more
Allowable momentary Within 10ms
power failure time*1 (at 24VDC input)
510VAC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m)
Dielectric withstand voltage
Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output"
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester
Noise durability By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Application ERR. contact ( Page 188, Section 7.1)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
Contact output section
voltage, current
Minimum switching
5VDC, 1mA
load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge suppressor None
Fuse None
Terminal screw size M3.5
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5, thickness 0.8mm or less. Two solderless terminals can be connected to one
terminal terminal.
Applicable tightening torque 0.66 to 0.89N•m
H 98mm
External
W 55.2mm
dimensions
D 90mm
Weight 0.33kg
*1 For the description of the specifications, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
198
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Performance Specifications
Item
Q64P Q64PN
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit Q3B, Q3DB, Q6B
+10% +10%
100 to 120VAC/200 to 240VAC -15% 100 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 132VAC/170 to 264VAC) (85 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Input voltage distortion
Within 5% ( Page 103, Section 4.8.1)
factor
Max. input apparent
160VA
power
Inrush current*1 20A within 8ms
Rated 5VDC 8.5A
output current 24VDC ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 9.9A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*1 24VDC ----
7
Efficiency 70% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms
power failure time*1
Dielectric withstand 2300VAC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m)
voltage Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output"
10MΩ or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
Insulation resistance Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output", the line input and
7.2.1 Power supply module specifications
7.2 Specifications
LG terminals, the output and FG terminals
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)*2 LED (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Application ERR. contact ( Page 188, Section 7.1)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
None
suppressor
Fuse None
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5, thickness 0.8mm or less. Two solderless terminals can be connected to one
terminal terminal.
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
199
Performance Specifications
Item
Q64P Q64PN
H 98mm
External
W 55.2mm
dimensions
D 115mm
Weight 0.40kg 0.47kg
*1 For the descriptions of the specification items, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
*2 During the operation, do not allow the input voltage to change from 200VAC level (170 to 264VAC) to 100VAC level (85
to 132VAC). (If changed, the POWER LED of the module turns off and the system operation stops.)
200
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61SP
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit Q3SB
+10%
100 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Input voltage distortion
Within 5% ( Page 103, Section 4.8.1)
factor
Max. input apparent
40VA
power
Inrush current*1 40A within 8ms
Rated output 5VDC 2A
current 24VDC ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 2.2A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*1 24VDC ----
7
Efficiency 70% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms (AC100VAC or more)
power failure time*1
Dielectric withstand 2300VAC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m)
voltage Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output"
10MΩ or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
Insulation resistance Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output", the line input and
7.2.1 Power supply module specifications
7.2 Specifications
LG terminals, the output and FG terminals
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Application ERR. contact ( Page 188, Section 7.1)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
None
suppressor
Fuse None
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5, thickness 0.8mm or less. Two solderless terminals can be connected to one terminal.
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
201
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61SP
H 98mm
External
W 27.4mm
dimensions
D 104mm
Weight 0.18kg
*1 For the descriptions of the specification items, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
202
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Performance Specifications
Item
Q63RP
Base unit position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit Q3RB, Q3RB, Q6WRB
Input power supply 24V DC(-35%/+30%) (15.6 to 31.2V DC)
Max. input power 65W
Inrush current 150A within 1ms
Rated output 5VDC 8.5A
current 24VDC ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 9.35A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*1 24VDC ----
Efficiency 65% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 10ms (at 24V DC input)
power failure time*1
Dielectric withstand 510VAC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m)
voltage Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output"
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester 7
By noise simulator of 500Vp-p
Noise durability noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz
noise frequency
Operation indication *2
LED indication (Normal operation: On (green) Error: Off (red)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Application ERR. contact ( Page 188, Section 7.1)
7.2.1 Power supply module specifications
7.2 Specifications
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
Contact output section
voltage, current
Minimum switching
5VDC, 1mA
load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge suppressor None
Fuse None
Terminal screw size M3.5 Screw
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless R1.25-3.5, R2-3.5, RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5, thickness 0.8mm or less. Two solderless terminals can be
terminal connected to one terminal.
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm
External
W 83mm
dimensions
D 115mm
Weight 0.60kg
*1 For the descriptions of the specification items, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
*2 Although the POWER LED momentarily turns on in red immediately after the power supply is turned on or off, the
Q63RP is not faulty.
203
Performance Specifications
Item
Q64RPN Q64RP
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit Q3RB, Q6RB, Q6WRB*3
+10% +10%
100 to 240VAC -15% 100 to 120VAC/200 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 264VAC) (85 to 132VAC/170 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Input voltage distortion
Within 5% ( Page 103, Section 4.8.1)
factor
Max. input apparent
160VA
power
Inrush current*1 20A within 8ms
Rated output 5VDC 8.5A
current 24VDC ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 9.35A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*1 24VDC ----
Efficiency 70% or more 65% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms
power failure time*1
Dielectric withstand 2300VAC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m)
voltage Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output"
10MΩ or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
Insulation resistance Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output", the line input and
LG terminals, the output and FG terminals
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2kV
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: ON (green), Error: ON (red))*2*4
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Application ERR. contact ( Page 188, Section 7.1)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
None
suppressor
Fuse None
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
R1.25-3.5, R2-3.5, RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
204
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Performance Specifications
Item
Q64RPN Q64RP
H 98mm
External
W 83mm
dimensions
D 115mm
Weight 0.49kg 0.47kg
*1 For the descriptions of the specification items, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
*2 Although the POWER LED momentarily turns on in red immediately after the power supply is turned on or off, the
Q64RPN or Q64RP are not faulty.
*3 When mounting the Q64RP to the Q65WRB, use the Q64RP whose first 6 digits of serial No. is "081103" or later. The
vibration condition described in the general specifications may not be met if the serial number (first six digits) of the
Q64RP is "081102" or earlier is mounted.
*4 During the operation for the Q64RP, do not allow the input voltage to change from 200VAC level (170 to 264VAC) to
100VAC level (85 to 132VAC). (If changed, the POWER LED of the module turns red and the system operation stops.)
7.2.1 Power supply module specifications
7.2 Specifications
205
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61P-D
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit Q3B, Q3DB, Q6B
+10%
100 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply*2
(85 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Input voltage distortion
Within 5% ( Page 103, Section 4.8.1)
factor
Max. input apparent
130VA
power
Max. input power ----
*1 20A within 8ms
Inrush current
Rated output 5VDC 6A
current 24VDC ----
External output voltage ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 6.6A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
*1
protection 24VDC ----
Efficiency 70% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms
power failure time*1
Dielectric withstand 2300VAC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m)
voltage Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output"
10MΩ or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
Insulation resistance Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output", the line input and
LG terminals, the output and FG terminals
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED indication (POWER LED, LIFE LED) ( Page 219, Section 7.2.5)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Application ERR. contact, LIFE OUT contact ( Page 188, Section 7.1)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
None
suppressor
Fuse None
Terminal screw size M3.5
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5, thickness 0.8mm or less. Two solderless terminals can be connected to one terminal.
terminal
206
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61P-D
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm
External
W 55.2mm
dimensions
D 90mm
Weight 0.45kg
*1 For the descriptions of the specification items, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
*2 When using the Q61P-D in the system configured with an A/AnS series module, the power supply modules mounted on
the main base unit and extension base unit must be turned on and off simultaneously.
7.2.1 Power supply module specifications
7.2 Specifications
207
Performance Specifications
Item
Q00JCPU (Power supply part) Q00UJCPU (Power supply part)
+10%
100 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Input voltage distortion
Within 5% ( Page 103, Section 4.8.1)
factor
Max. input apparent
105VA
power
Inrush current*1 40A within 8ms
Rated output
5VDC 3A
current
Overcurrent
5VDC 3.3A or more
protection*1
Overvoltage
5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*1
Efficiency 65% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms (100VAC or more)
power failure time*1
Dielectric withstand 2300VAC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m)
voltage Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output"
10MΩ or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
Insulation resistance Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output", the line input and
LG terminals, the output and FG terminals
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED indication (The POWER LED of the CPU part: Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Contact output section None
Terminal screw size M3.5×7
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5, thickness 0.8mm or less. Two solderless terminals can be connected to one terminal.
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
External dimensions
Page 145, Section 6.2
Weight
*1 For the descriptions of the specification items, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
208
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Performance Specifications
Item
A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit QA1S6B
+10% +30%
100 to 240VAC -15% 24VDC -35%
Input power supply
(85 to 264VAC) (15.6 to 31.2VDC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5% ----
Input voltage distortion
Within 5% ( Page 103, Section 4.8.1) ---
factor
Max. input apparent
105VA ----
power
Max. input power ---- 41W
Inrush current *1 81A within 1ms
20A within 8ms
Rated output 5VDC 5A 3A 5A
current 24VDC ---- 0.6A ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 5.5A or more 3.3A or more 5.5A or more
protection*1 24VDC ---- 0.66A or more ----
Overvoltage
protection*1
5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
7
24VDC ----
Efficiency 65% or more
Allowable momentary Within 10ms
Within 20ms
power failure time*1 (at 24VDC input)
510VAC per minute (altitude 0 to
2300VAC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m) 2000m)
Dielectric withstand
Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and Between the combined "line
7.2.1 Power supply module specifications
7.2 Specifications
voltage
the "FG terminal and output" input/LG terminals" and the "FG
terminal and output"
Between inputs and outputs (LG and FG separated), between inputs and
5M or more by insulation
Insulation resistance LG/FG, between outputs and FG/LG 10M or more by 500VDC insulation
resistance tester
resistance tester
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise
Noise durability 60Hz noise frequency voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV 60Hz noise frequency
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Contact output section None
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5, thickness 0.8mm or less. Two solderless terminals can be connected to one terminal.
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 130mm
External
W 55mm
dimensions
D 93.6mm
Weight 0.60kg 0.50kg
*1 For the descriptions of the specification items, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
209
Performance Specifications
Item
A61P A61PN A62P A63P
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit QA6B
+10%
100VAC to 120VAC-15%
(85VAC to 132VAC) 24VDC-35%
+30%
Input power supply
200VAC to 240VAC-15%
+10% (15.6VDC to 31.2VDC)
(170VAC to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5% –
Input voltage distortion Within 5% ( Page 103, Section 4.8.1) –
Max. input apparent
160VA 155VA 65W
power
Inrush current 20A, 8ms or less*1 100A, 1ms or less
Rated output 5VDC 8A 5A 8A
current 24VDC – 0.8A –
Overcurrent 5VDC 8.8A or more 5.5A or more 8.5A or more
protection*1 24VDC – 1.2A or more –
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*1 24VDC –
Efficiency 65% or more
Dielectric withstand Between AC external terminals and ground, 1500V AC, 1 minute
voltage Between DC external terminals and ground, 500V AC, 1 minute
By noise simulator of
By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, noise width 1µs, and 25 to 60Hz 500Vp-p noise voltage,
Noise durability
noise frequency noise width 1µs, and 25 to
60Hz noise frequency
Insulation resistance Between AC external terminals and ground, 5M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
Power indicator LED indication of power supply
Terminal screw size M4 × 0.7 × 6
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless R1.25-4, R2-4
terminal RAV1.25, RAV2-4
Applicable tightening
78 to 118N•cm
torque
H 250mm
External
W 55mm
dimensions
D 121mm
Weight 0.98 kg 0.75 kg 0.94 kg 0.8 kg
Allowable momentary
20ms or less 1ms or less
power failure time
*1 For the descriptions of the specification items, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
210
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Performance specifications
Item
A61PEU A62PEU
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit QA6B
Input power supply 100 to 120/200 to 240VAC +10%/-15%
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Input voltage distortion Within 5% ( Page 103, Section 4.8.1)
Max. input apparent power 130VA 155VA
Inrush current*1 20A, 8ms or less
Rated output 5VDC 8A 5A
current 24VDC – 0.8A
Overcurrent 5VDC 8.8A or more 5.5A or more
protection*1 24VDC – 1.2A or more
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V –
protection*1 24VDC –
Efficiency 65% or more
Between
Dielectric withstand
primary side 2300VAC/1min (at a height of 0 to 2000m above sea level)
voltage
and FG 7
By noise simulator of noise voltage IEC 801-4, 2KV, 1500Vp-p,
Noise durability
noise width 1µs, and noise frequency 25 to 60Hz
Power indicator LED indication of power supply
Terminal screw size M4 × 0.7 × 6
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless terminal RAV1.25-4, RAV2-4
7.2.1 Power supply module specifications
7.2 Specifications
Applicable tightening torque 98 to 137N•cm
H 250mm
External
W 55mm
dimensions
D 121mm
Weight 0.8 kg 0.9 kg
Allowable momentary power failure
20ms or less
time*1
*1 For the descriptions of the specification items, refer to Page 213, Section 7.2.2.
211
Performance Specifications
Item
A68P
Mounting position I/O module slot
Number of occupied points 2 slots occupied, 1 slot 16 points
+10%
100 to 120V AC-15%
(85 to 132V AC)
Input voltage
+10%
200 to 240V AC-15%
(170 to 264V AC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Max. input apparent power 95VA
Inrush current 20A, within 8ms
Rated output +15VDC 1.2A
current -15VDC 0.7A
Overcurrent +15VDC 1.64A or more
protection*1 -15VDC 0.94A or more
Efficiency 65% or more
Power indicator Power LED display (Normal: On (green), error: Off)
Contact output
Switched on if +15V DC output is +14.25V or higher or -15V DC output is -14.25V or lower.
Power ON output
Min. contact switching load: 5V DC, 10mA
Min. contact switching load: 264V AC (R load)
Terminal screw size M3 × 0.5 × 6
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Solderless terminal V1.25 - 4, V2 - YS4A, V2 - S4, V2 - YS4A
Applicable tightening torque 68N•cm
H 250mm
External
W 75.5mm
dimensions
D 121mm
Weight 0.9kg
*1 The overcurrent protection shuts off the +15VDC circuit if a current higher than the specified value flows in the circuit
and:
• Both +15VDC and -15VDC are switched off if overcurrent has occurred at +15V; or
• -15VDC is switched off but +15V remains output if overcurrent has occurred at -15V; and
• The power supply module LED is switched off or dimly lit due to ±15VDC voltage drop.
If this device is activated, turn off the input power supply and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity
or short before restarting the system.
212
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
7.2.2 Specifications
(1) Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5V, 24VDC circuit and stops the system if the current flowing in the
circuit exceeds the specified value. The LED of the power supply module turns off or turns on in dim green when
voltage is lowered. (As for the redundant power supply module, the LED turns off or turns on in red.) If this device
is activated, switch the input power supply off and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or
short. Then, a few minutes later, switch it on to restart the system. The initial start for the system takes place when
the current value becomes normal.
(2) Overvoltage protection
The overvoltage protection device shuts off the 5VDC circuit and stops the system if a voltage of 5.5VDC is
applied to the circuit. When this device is activated, the power supply module LED turns off. If this happens,
switch the input power off, then a few minutes later on. This causes the initial start for the system to take place.
The power supply module must be changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains off (As for the
redundant power supply module, the LED turns on in red).
(3) Allowable momentary power failure time
For AC input power supply
7
• If the momentary power failure time is within 20ms, the system detects an AC down and suspends the
operation processing. However, the system continues operations after the power comes back.
• If the momentary power failure time exceeds 20ms, the system either continues or initially starts the
operations depending on the power supply load. In case that the operation processing is continued, the
system operates the same as when the momentary power failure time is within 20ms.
• Supplying the same amount of AC to both the power supply module and an AC input module (such as the
7.2.2 Specifications
7.2 Specifications
QX10) can prevent a connected sensor from being turned off due to the momentary power failure.
However, if only the power supply module and an AC input module are connected on the AC line, an AC
down detection in the power supply module may be delayed due to the internal capacitor of the AC input
module.
To avoid this delaying, connect a load of approximately 30mA per AC input module on the AC line.
• During the system operation with two redundant power supply modules, the system does not initially start
operations when the momentary power failure of 20ms or longer occurs in one of the AC input power
supplies.
However, the system may initially start operations when the momentary power failure of 20ms or longer
occurs simultaneously in both AC input power supplies.
For DC input power supply
• If the momentary power failure time is within 10ms*1, the system detects a 24VDC down and suspends the
operation processing. However, the system continues operations after the power comes back.
• If the momentary power failure time exceeds 10ms*1, the system either continues or initially starts the
operations depending on the power supply load. In case that the operation processing is continued, the
system operates the same as when the momentary power failure time is within 10ms.
*1 This is the time when 24VDC is input. If the input is less than 24VDC, the time will be less than 10ms.
213
(4) Inrush current
When power is switched on again immediately (within 5 seconds) after power-off, an inrush current of more than
the specified value (2ms or less) may flow. Reapply power 5 or more seconds after power-off. When selecting a
fuse and breaker in the external circuit, take account of the blowout, detection characteristics and above matters.
214
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
7.2.3 Selecting the power supply module
The power supply module is selected according to the total of current consumption of the base units, I/O modules,
intelligent function module, special function module, and peripheral devices supplied by its power supply module.
For the internal current consumption of 5VDC of the base unit, refer to Page 223, CHAPTER 8.
For the internal current consumption of 5VDC of the I/O modules, intelligent function module, special function module,
and peripheral devices, refer to the Manuals of their respective modules.
For the devices obtained by a user, see the manual for the respective device.
(1) When the base unit is Q3B, Q3DB or Q6B:
Q series power supply Base unit (such as
module (such as Q61P and Q35B and Q65B)
Q62P)
CPU module*1 Peripheral, converter, cable
(such as Q02(H)CPU (for connecting a CPU module
and Q06HCPU) with a personal computer)
I/O module (such as
QX10 and QY10)
7
Intelligent function module (such as
Q64AD and QJ71LP21-25)
*1 The CPU module is mounted on the main base unit.
Keep the current consumption of the base unit (Q3B, Q3DB, and Q6B) below the 5VDC rated output
current of the Q series power supply module.
7.2.3 Selecting the power supply module
7.2 Specifications
5VDC rated output current Type
6.0A Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q63P
3.0A Q62P
8.5A Q64P, Q64PN
(a) Precaution on using the extension base unit (Q5B, QA1S5B)
When the Q5B or QA1S5B is used, a power of 5VDC is supplied from the power supply module on the
main base unit through an extension cable.
Therefore, to use the Q5B or QA1S5B, pay attention to the following.
• Select a proper power supply module of 5VDC rated output current to be installed to the main base unit so
that it will cover the current used by the Q5B or QA1S5B.
For example, if current consumption is 3.0A on the main base unit and 1.0A on the Q5B or QA1S5B,
any of the power supply modules shown in a table below must be mounted on the main base unit.
5VDC rated output current Type
6.0A Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q63P
8.5A Q64P, Q64PN
• Because 5VDC is supplied to the Q5B or QA1S5B through an extension cable, voltage is lowered in
the extension cable.
The power supply module and extension cable must be selected so that a voltage of 4.75VDC or higher is
supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5B or QA1S5B.
For details of the voltage drop, refer to Page 88, Section 4.3.4.
215
(b) Methods for reducing voltage drops
The following methods are effective to reduce voltage drops at the extension cables.
1) Changing the module loading positions
Load large current consumption modules on the main base unit.
Load small current consumption modules on the extension base unit (Q5B).
2) Using short extension cables
The shorter the extension cable is, the smaller the resistance and voltage drops will be.
Use the shortest possible extension cables.
(2) When the base unit is Q3SB:
Slim type power supply Slim type main base unit
module (Q61SP) (Q32SB, Q33SB, or Q35SB)
CPU module (such Peripheral, converter, cable
as Q02(H)CPU (for connecting a CPU module
and Q06HCPU) with a personal computer)
I/O module (such as
QX10 and QY10)
Intelligent function module (such
as Q64AD and QJ71LP21-25)
Keep the current consumption of the slim type main base unit (Q3SB) not exceeding the 5VDC rated output
current of the slim type power supply module (Q61SP).
5VDC Rated output current Type
2.0A Q61SP
(3) When the base unit is Q3RB or Q6RB
Two redundant power Redundant power supply base
supply modules unit (Q3RB or Q6RB)
CPU module*2 (such Peripheral, converter, cable
as Q02(H)CPU and (for connecting a CPU module
Q06HCPU) with a personal computer)
I/O module (such as
QX10 and QY10)
Intelligent function module (such
as Q64AD and QJ71LP21-25)
*2 The CPU module is mounted on the main base unit.
5VDC rated output current Type
Q63RP
8.5A Q64RPN
Q64RP
216
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
When a redundant power supply system is configured and one redundant power supply module has failed, the system is
operated using the other redundant power supply module only during replacement of the failed redundant power supply
module.
Therefore, keep the current consumption of the redundant power supply base unit (Q3RB/Q6RB/Q6WRB) within the
5VDC rated output current (8.5A) for one redundant power supply module.
(a) Cautions for using the extension base unit (Q5B)
When Q5B is used, a power of 5VDC is supplied from the redundant power supply module on the redundant
power main base unit (Q3RB) through an extension cable.
Pay attentions to the following to use Q5B.
• Keep the sum of the current consumption on Q3RB and Q5B not exceeding the 5VDC rated output
current for one redundant power supply module.
• Because 5VDC is supplied to Q5B through an extension cable, voltage drop occurs in the extension
cable.
Select an appropriate extension cable so that a voltage of 4.75VDC or more is supplied at the "IN"
connector of Q5B.
For details of the voltage drop, refer to Page 88, Section 4.3.4.
(b) Methods for reducing voltage drops 7
The following methods are effective to reduce voltage drops at the extension cables.
1) Changing the module mounting positions
Mount a module with large current consumption on the redundant power main base unit (Q3RB).
Mount small current consumption modules on the extension base unit (Q5B).
2) Using short extension cables
7.2.3 Selecting the power supply module
7.2 Specifications
The shorter the extension cable is, the smaller the resistance and voltage drops are.
Use the shortest possible extension cables.
(4) When the base unit is QA1S6B:
AnS series power supply Base unit (QA1S65B or
module (A1S61PN, QA1S68B)
A1S62PN, or A1S63P)
I/O module (such as
AX10 and AY10)
Special function module
Peripheral
(such as AD61 and
(AD75TU)
AD75P1-S3)
Select the power supply module also in consideration of the current consumption of the peripheral devices
connected to the special function module.
For example, when the AD75TU is connected to the AD75P1-S3, the current consumption of the AD75TU must
also be taken into account.
217
(5) When the base unit is QA6B:
A series power supply Base unit (QA65B or
module (A61P, A61PN, QA68B)
A62P, or A63P)
I/O module (such as
AX10 and AY10)
Special function module (such Peripheral
as AD61 and AD75P1-S3) (AD75TU)
Select the power supply module also in consideration of the current consumption of the peripheral devices
connected to the special function module.
For example, when the AD75TU is connected to the AD75P1-S3, the current consumption of the AD75TU must
also be taken into account.
7.2.4 Precautions on power supply capacity
Select a power supply having enough power for a power supply module. (For an AC power supply module, the power
capacity should be twice or more as great as the current consumption of the power supply module, and four times or
more for a DC power supply module.)
(1) When the Q64RP or Q64P is used
The Q64RP and Q64P automatically recognize the rated input voltage waveform to switch the input voltage
between 100VAC and 200VAC.
If the power supply of insufficient power capacity is selected, the power supply module might fail when 200VAC
power is supplied.
218
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
7.2.5 Life detection power supply module
The Life detection power supply module estimates its remaining life internally and indicates the life. The remaining life
of the module can be checked by the LIFE LED located on the front of the module and on/off of the LIFE OUT
terminals.
(1) LED indication and module status during operation
The following table lists the LED indication and module status during operation.
LED
LIFE OUT terminal Module
POWER LIFE
• Power supply module failure
• AC power is not input
Off Off Off
• Power failure (including momentary power
failure for 20ms or more)
On (green) On (green) • Normal operation
On • Normal operation (Remaining life approx.
On (green) On (orange)
50%)*1
Flash (orange) • Normal operation (Remaining life approx. 1
7
On (green) (On for 5 sec. and off for year)*1
1 sec.) Replacement of the module is recommended
Flash (orange) Off
• Normal operation (Remaining life approx. 6
On (green) (At intervals of half a
months)*1
sec.)
On (green) Off • Life expired
• Ambient temperature is out of range
7.2.5 Life detection power supply module
7.2 Specifications
On (green) On (red) (Ambient temperature is exceeding the
specification)
• Function failure (Normal processing is not
Flash (red) (At intervals of Turns off and on three
On (green) available due to a failure of the life
1 sec.) times at intervals of 1
diagnostics circuit in the module)
second and then off
• Ambient temperature is out of range
(Ambient temperature is exceeding the
On (green) Off
specification and also the life detection
function has stopped.)
Flash (orange) Off Off • Watchdog timer error in the module
*1 The remaining life of the module varies depending on the ambient temperature.
(If the ambient temperature rose by 10°C, the remaining life of the module will be shortened by half.)
(2) Monitoring module life by using the LIFE OUT terminal
The module life can be monitored in either of the following way by using outputs of the LIFE OUT terminal
• Connecting the terminal to an external display device
• Obtaining the output status into an input module and monitoring it by GOT
219
(a) Connecting the terminal to an external display device
Connecting the LIFE OUT terminal allows indication of the remaining life of the module to an external display,
device such as external LED, by turning it off when the life is one year or less.
When the external display device turned off, the remaining life can be checked by the LIFE LED of the Q61P-D
located in the control panel.
The LIFE LED turns on in orange
Remaining life is 1 year or less
External LED Control panel
LIFE OUT terminal
(b) Obtaining the output status into an input module and monitoring it by GOT
Obtaining the LIFE OUT terminal status into an input module allows monitoring of the module remaining life in
a sequence program.
The following indicates how to monitor the remaining life of the power supply module in the sequence program
by using GOT.
1) System configuration
GOT
Q61P-D
Model name Start XY
Q02HPU -
QX40 0000H
220
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
2) Conditions of a program
The following tables list devices used in a program for monitoring the module life.
Signal Device Function
Monitoring clear command X0F Resets the life monitoring processing
Turns on when the remaining life of the Q61P-D is one
Life warning signal M11
year or less
Turns on when the life detection function of the Q61P-
Error signal M12
D is faulty
Signal Device Function
LIFE OUT signal X00 LIFE OUT terminal status of the Q61P-D
An internal signal for resetting the life monitoring
Monitoring clear request M0
processing
An internal signal for detecting offs of the LIFE OUT
Monitoring start flag M1
terminal
An internal signal for counting on and off of the LIFE
Time monitoring flag M2
OUT terminal
On and off of the LIFE OUT terminal are counted while
ON/OFF monitoring timer T0
this timer is enabled (6 seconds)
ON/OFF counter D100 Counts on and off of the LIFE OUT terminal
7
When the life detection function of the Q61P-D is faulty, the LIFE OUT terminal repeats on and off for three times when the
module is started.
Depending on the system, this behavior (on and off) of the LIFE OUT terminal may not be obtained to the input module due
to delay of the sequence program start after the Q61P-D has started.
In this program example, M11 turns on even though the life detection function is faulty when powered on since the remaining
7.2.5 Life detection power supply module
7.2 Specifications
life is regarded as one year.
221
3) Program example
Monitoring for 6 seconds
The life is 1 year or less
if remains off
Monitoring continues
if turned on
Faulty if repeats off and on
222
CHAPTER 8 BASE UNIT
CHAPTER 8 BASE UNIT
This chapter describes base units that can be used in a programmable controller system.
Base units are to mount CPU modules, power supply modules, I/O modules, and intelligent function modules.
8.1 Part Names
The part names of the base units are described below.
(1) Main base unit (Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B)
5) 4)
1) OUT
5V
SG
2) POWER
FG
CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 IO5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
8
3) 6)
No. Name Application
8.1 Part Names
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the extension
1) Extension cable connector
base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector. Before an extension cable is connected, the
2) Base cover area of the base cover surrounded by the groove under the word "OUT" on the base cover
must be removed with a tool such as nippers.
Connector for installing the Q series power supply module, CPU module, I/O modules, and
intelligent function module.
3) Module connector
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed, attach the
supplied connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
4) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 × 12
5) Base unit installation hole Hole for installing this base unit on a panel such as a control panel (for M4 screw)
6) DIN rail adapter mounting hole Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter
223
(2) Slim type main base unit (Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB)
3) 2)
SG
4) 1)
No. Name Application
Connector for installing the Q series power supply module, CPU module, I/O modules, and
intelligent function module.
1) Module connector
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed, attach the
supplied connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
2) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 × 12
3) Base unit installation hole Hole for installing this base unit on a panel such as a control panel (for M4 screw)
4) DIN rail adapter mounting hole Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter
(3) Redundant power main base unit (Q38RB)
5) 4)
1) OUT
5V 5V
SG SG
2) CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG FG
3) 6)
No. Name Application
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the extension
1) Extension cable connector
base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector. Before an extension cable is connected, the
2) Base cover area surrounded by the groove under the word "OUT" must be removed with a tool such as a
flat head screwdriver.
Connector for connecting a redundant power supply module, CPU module, I/O module and
intelligent function module
3) Module connector
To the connectors unused, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
4) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 × 12
5) Base unit installation hole Hole for installing this base unit on a panel such as a control panel (for M4 screw)
6) DIN rail adapter mounting hole Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter
224
CHAPTER 8 BASE UNIT
(4) Multiple CPU high speed main base unit (Q35DB, Q38DB, Q312DB)
5) 4)
1) OUT
5V
SG
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
2) FG
3) 6)
No. Name Application
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the extension
1) Extension cable connector
base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector. Before an extension cable is connected, the
2) Base cover area of the base cover surrounded by the groove under the word "OUT" on the base cover
must be removed with a tool such as nippers.
Connector for installing the Q series power supply module, CPU module, I/O modules, and
intelligent function module.
3) Module connector
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed, attach the
8
supplied connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
4) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 × 12
5) Base unit installation hole Hole for installing this base unit on a panel such as a control panel (for M4 screw)
8.1 Part Names
6) DIN rail adapter mounting hole Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter
225
(5) Extension base unit (Q5B, Q6B, QA1S5B, QA1S6B, QA6B)
Q52B, Q55B
6) 5)
IN OUT
3)
2)
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
1)
7) 4)
Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
6) 5)
IN OUT
3)
5V
2) SG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
1)
4) 7)
QA1S51B
5)
6)
3)
2)
1)
4)
QA1S65B, QA1S68B
5)
6)
3) IN OUT
5V
2) SG
FG
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
1)
4)
226
CHAPTER 8 BASE UNIT
QA65B, QA68B
3) 8) 5) 4)
6)
1)
2)
8) 5)
No. Name Application
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the main base
1) Extension cable connector
unit or other extension base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector.
2) Base cover Before connecting an extension cable, the part under OUT on the base cover must be 8
removed with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver.
Connector for setting the number of bases of the extension base unit.
3) Base No. setting connector
( Page 78, Section 4.3.1)
8.1 Part Names
Connectors for installing the power supply module, I/O modules, and intelligent function
module/ special function module.
To those connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed, apply
4) Module connector the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module to prevent entry of dirt.
Blank cover module applicable to Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q65B, Q68B and Q612B: QG60
Blank cover module applicable to QA1S51B, QA1S65B and QA1S68B: A1SG60
Blank cover module applicable to QA65B and QA68B: AG60
Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit.
5) Module fixing screw hole Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q65B, Q68B and Q612B............................................Screw size: M3 × 12
QA1S51B, QA1S65B, QA1S68B, QA65B and QA68B................................Screw size: M4 × 12
Hole for installing this base unit on a panel such as a control panel.
6) Base unit installation hole Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q65B, Q68B and Q612B.......................................................For M4 screw
QA1S51B, QA1S65B, QA1S68B, QA65B and QA68B...........................................For M5 screw
7) DIN rail adapter mounting hole DIN rail adapter mounting hole.
8) Module fixing hole Cut out to accept projection and hook at rear of modules.
227
(6) Redundant power extension base unit (Q68RB)
6) 5)
IN OUT
3)
5V 5V
2) SG SG
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG FG
1)
4) 7)
No. Name Application
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the redundant
1) Extension cable connector
power main base unit or other extension base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector.
2) Base cover Before connecting an extension cable, the part under OUT on the base cover must be
removed with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver.
Connector for setting the number of bases of redundant power extension base units.
3) Base No. setting connector
( Page 78, Section 4.3.1)
Connector for installing a redundant power supply module, I/O module and intelligent function
module.
4) Module connector
To the connectors unused, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
5) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 × 12
6) Base unit installation hole Hole for installing this base unit on a panel such as a control panel. (For M4 screw)
7) DIN rail adapter mounting hole DIN rail adapter mounting hole.
228
CHAPTER 8 BASE UNIT
(7) Redundant extension base unit (Q65WRB)
5) 2) 4)
IN1 IN2 OUT
5V 5V
SG SG
POWER 1 POWER 2 I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
1)
3) 6)
No. Name Application
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the main base
1) Extension cable connector
unit or extension base unit of the redundant system)
Protective cover of extension cable connector.
2) Base cover Before connecting an extension cable, the part under OUT on the base cover must be
removed with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver.
Connector for installing a redundant power supply module, I/O module and intelligent function
module.
3) Module connector
To the connectors unused, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
8
4) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 × 12
5) Base unit installation hole Hole for installing this base unit on a panel such as a control panel. (For M4 screw)
6) DIN rail adapter mounting hole DIN rail adapter mounting hole.
8.1 Part Names
229
8.2 Extension Base Units that can be Combined with the
Main Base Unit
This section introduces extension base units that can be combined with the main base unit.
For details of the CPU module and power supply modules, refer to the following.
CPU module: Page 119, CHAPTER 6
Power supply modules: Page 187, CHAPTER 7
For details on the system configuration, refer to Page 33, CHAPTER 2.
: Combination available, ×: Combination not available
Extension base unit
Q63B
Main base QA1S65B QA65B
Q52B Q65B
unit Q68RB Q65WRB*1 QA1S51B QA1S68B QA68B
Q55B Q68B
*7 *2
Q612B
Q00JCPU × × × × ×
Q00UJCPU × × *4 *4 *4
Q33B
Q35B *3 *5 *5 *5
Q38B
Q312B
Q32SB
Q33SB × × × × × × ×
Q35SB
Q38RB × × × ×
Q35DB
Q38DB × × *6 *6 *6
Q312DB
*1 Applicable only in a redundant system.
*2 The same specifications are applied to the QA6ADP+A6B.
*3 Available only for the 2nd extension base unit or later in a redundant system where the Redundant CPU whose serial
number (first five digits) is "09012" or later is used.
*4 Available only when the serial number (first five digits) of the Q00UJCPU is "13102" or later is used.
*5 The High Performance model QCPU and Universal model QCPU can be used. When the Universal model QCPU is
used, available only when the serial number (first five digits) is "13102" or later is used.
*6 Available only when the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "13102" or later is used. Not
available for the High Performance QCPU.
*7 The same specifications are applied to the QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B.
Slim type main base units do not have a connector for extension cable. Therefore, connection of extension base units and
GOT by bus is not available.
230
CHAPTER 8 BASE UNIT
8.3 Specification Table
(1) Main base unit
Type
Item
Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B
Number of I/O modules
3 5 8 12
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5VDC internal current
0.11A 0.12A 0.13A
consumption
Installation hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm
External dimensions W 189mm 245mm 328mm 439mm
D 44.1mm
Weight 0.21kg 0.27kg 0.36kg 0.47kg
Attachment Installation screw M4 × 14, 4 pieces*1 (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1
type
*1 The Q38B and Q312B manufactured in August 2006 or later have five base unit installation holes.
Base unit installation screws equal to the number of holes are provided with the unit. 8
(2) Slim type main base unit
8.3 Specification Table
Type
Item
Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB
Number of I/O modules
2 3 5
installed
Possibility of extension Not extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5VDC internal current
0.09A 0.10A
consumption
Installation hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm
External dimensions W 114mm 142mm 197.5mm
D 18.5mm
Weight 0.12kg 0.15kg 0.21kg
Attachment Installation screw M4 × 14, 4 pieces*1 (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN3
type
231
(3) Redundant power main base unit
Type
Item
Q38RB
Number of I/O modules
8
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5VDC internal current
0.12A
consumption
Installation hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm
External dimensions W 439mm
D 44.1mm
Weight 0.47kg
Attachment Installation screw M4 × 14, 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN1
type
(4) Multiple CPU high speed main base unit
Type
Item
Q35DB Q38DB Q312DB
Number of I/O modules
5 8 12
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5VDC internal current
0.23A 0.23A 0.24A
consumption
Installation hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm
External dimensions W 245mm 328mm 439mm
D 44.1mm
Weight 0.32kg 0.41kg 0.54kg
Installation screw M4 × 14, 4
Installation screw M4 × 14, 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold
Attachment pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter
separately)
is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1
type
232
CHAPTER 8 BASE UNIT
(5) Extension base unit (Type not requiring power supply module)
Type
Item
Q52B Q55B QA1S51B
Number of I/O modules
2 5 1
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable Not extendable
Applicable module Q series modules AnS series modules
5VDC internal current
0.08A 0.10A 0.12A
consumption
M5 screw hole or 5.5 hole (for M5
Installation hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
screw)
H 98mm 130mm
External
W 106mm 189mm 100mm
dimensions
D 44.1mm 50.7mm
Weight 0.14kg 0.23kg 0.23kg
Installation screw M4 × 14, 4 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold Installation screw M5 × 25, 3
Attachment
separately) pieces
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN3 ----
type
(6) Extension base unit (Type requiring power supply module) 8
Type
Item
Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B QA1S65B QA1S68B QA65B QA68B
8.3 Specification Table
Number of I/O
3 5 8 12 5 8 5 8
modules installed
Possibility of
Extendable
extension
Applicable module Q series modules AnS series modules A series module
5VDC internal current
0.11A 0.12A 0.13A 0.12A
consumption
M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole M5 screw hole or 5.5 hole
Installation hole size
(for M4 screw) (for M5 screw)
H 98mm 130mm 250mm
External
W 189mm 245mm 328mm 439mm 315mm 420mm 352mm 466mm
dimensions
D 44.1mm 51.2mm 46.6mm
Weight 0.23kg 0.28kg 0.38kg 0.48kg 0.75kg 1.00kg 1.60kg 2.00kg
*1 Installation screw M5 × 25
Installation screw M4 × 14 , 4 pieces
Attachment ----
(DIN rail mounting adapter sold separately) 4 pieces
DIN rail mounting
Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1 ---- ---- ---- ----
adapter type
*1 The Q68B and Q612B manufactured in August 2006 or later have five base unit installation holes.
Base unit installation screws equal to the number of holes are provided with the unit.
233
(7) Redundant power extension base unit
Type
Item
Q68RB
Number of I/O modules
8
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5VDC internal current
0.12A
consumption
Installation hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm
External dimensions W 439mm
D 44.1mm
Weight 0.49kg
Attachment Installation screw M4 × 14, 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN1
type
(8) Redundant extension base unit
Type
Item
Q65WRB
Number of I/O modules
5
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5VDC internal current
0.16A
consumption
Installation hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm
External dimensions W 439mm
D 44.1mm
Weight 0.52kg
Attachment Installation screw M4 × 14, 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN1
type
234
CHAPTER 9 MEMORY CARD
CHAPTER 9 MEMORY CARD 9
This chapter describes the specifications of memory cards installed to CPU modules and batteries installed to the
memory cards.
A memory card Note 9.1 is used to store programs, file register data, and debug data of the trace function.
A memory card is also used to store file register data exceeding the number of points that can be stored in the
standard RAM. ( Page 145, Section 6.2)
9.1 Part Names
The part names of memory cards are described below.Note 9.1
1)
1)
3)
3)
4)
Write protect ON
9.1 Part Names
"LOCK" Write protect ON
"RELEASE"
"LOCK"
2) "RELEASE" 4)
2)
No. Name Application
1) Connector area An area connected to a CPU module
2) Battery holder Used to set the lithium battery for data backup of the SRAM memory (SRAM card only)
Switch for fixing the battery holder to the memory card. Locked at: LOCK position (write
Battery holder fixing protect switch side)
3)
switch*1 LOCK: Locked, RELEASE: Unlocked
(SRAM card only)
Prevents the data in a memory card from being erased or modified.
(Factory default: Off, SRAM card and Flash card only)
4) Write protect switch
On: Write-protected
Off: Not write-protected (Data can be written to a memory card.)
*1 The battery holder fixing switch is returned automatically from the RELEASE to LOCK position when the battery holder is
disconnected.
Note 9.1 Basic Universal
The Basic model QCPU, Q00U(J)CPU, Q01UCPU, and QnUDVCPU do not support the use of memory cards.
235
9.1.1 List of usable memory cards
Three types of memory cards (SRAM card, Flash card, and ATA card) are available.
Memory cards available for each CPU module are shown in the following table.
: Usable, ×: Not usable
CPU module
Q02UCPU
Q03UD(E)CPU
Q04UD(E)HCPU
Q02CPU
Q02PHCPU Q06UD(E)HCPU
Q00JCPU Q02HCPU Q00UJCPU
Memory card*1 Q06PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q10UD(E)HCPU
Q00CPU Q06HCPU Q00UCPU
Q12PHCPU Q25PRHCPU Q13UD(E)HCPU
Q01CPU Q12HCPU Q01UCPU
Q25PHCPU Q20UD(E)HCPU
Q25HCPU
Q26UD(E)HCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q2MEM-1MBS × ×
Q2MEM-2MBS × ×
SRAM card
Q3MEM-4MBS × *2 *2 *2 ×
Q3MEM-8MBS × × × × ×
Q2MEM-2MBF × ×
Flash card
Q2MEM-4MBF × ×
Q2MEM-8MBA × ×
ATA card Q2MEM-16MBA × ×
Q2MEM-32MBA × ×
*1 Only one memory card can be installed for each CPU module.
*2 CPU modules whose serial number (first five digits) of "16020" or earlier do not support the Q3MEM-4MBS.
Storable data vary depending on the type of memory card.
For the data that can be stored on memory cards, refer to the following.
Manuals for the CPU module used (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
236
CHAPTER 9 MEMORY CARD
9.2 Specifications 9
9.2.1 Memory card specifications
The specifications of memory cards applicable for CPU modules are compliant with those of PCMCIA small PC cards.
(1) SRAM card
Type
Item
Q2MEM-1MBS Q2MEM-2MBS Q3MEM-4MBS Q3MEM-8MBS
Capacity after formatted 1011.5K bytes 2034K bytes 4078K bytes 8172K bytes
Number of storable files 255 287 319
Number of insertions and removals 5000 times
H 45mm 74mm
External dimensions W 42.8mm
D 3.3mm 8.1mm
Weight 15g 30g 31g
(2) Flash card
Type
Item
Q2MEM-2MBF Q2MEM-4MBF
Capacity 2035K bytes 4079K bytes
9.2.1 Memory card specifications
9.2 Specifications
Number of storable files 288
Number of insertions and removals 5000 times
Number of writings 100000 times
H 45mm
External dimensions W 42.8mm
D 3.3mm
Weight 15g
237
(3) ATA card
Type
Item
Q2MEM-8MBA Q2MEM-16MBA*2 Q2MEM-32MBA
Capacity after formatted *1 *1 31854K bytes
7982K bytes 15982K bytes
Number of storable files 512*2
Number of insertions and removals 5000 times
Number of writings 1000000 times
H 45mm
External dimensions W 42.8mm
D 3.3mm
Weight 15g
*1 The size of ATA cards after formatting will be as follows when the manufacturer control number of the card is E or earlier.
Manufacturer control number E: Q2MEM-8MBA: 7948K bytes, Q2MEM-16MBA: 15948K bytes
Manufacturer control number D or earlier: Q2MEM-8MBA: 7940k bytes, Q2MEM-16MBA: 15932K bytes
For the manufacturer control number, refer to "POINT" in this section.
*2 Up to 511 files can be stored in the Universal model QCPU.
When the ATA card is used, the value stored in the special register SD603 differs depending on the manufacturer control
number and CPU module type.
When the CPU module is the Universal model QCPU, the ATA card size is stored in SD603 in units of K bytes.
When the module is not the Universal model QCPU, 8000, 16000, or 32000 is stored in SD603, and the value depends on
the manufacturer control number and CPU module type.
Value stored in special register SD603
Manufacturer control No. Other than the Universal model QCPU
Universal model
and ATA card type Serial No. (first 5 digits) Serial No. (first 5 digits)
QCPU
is 09011 or earlier is 09012 or later
"" and Q2MEM-8MBA 8000 8000
"D" or Q2MEM-16MBA 16000 16000
earlier Q2MEM-32MBA 32000 32000
Q2MEM-8MBA 16000 8000
ATA card size
"E" Q2MEM-16MBA 16000 16000
(K bytes)
Q2MEM-32MBA 32000 32000
Q2MEM-8MBA 32000 16000
"F" or
Q2MEM-16MBA 32000 32000
later
Q2MEM-32MBA 32000 32000
The manufacturer control number (the third digit from the left) of the ATA card is described in the label on the back of the ATA
card. (Refer to the following figure.)
When character string including the manufacturer control number is 4 digits, the third digit from the left is the manufacturer
control number, and when it is 3 digits, the manufacturer control number is "B".
Manufacturer
control number
238
CHAPTER 9 MEMORY CARD
9.2.2 Specifications of the memory card battery
9
This section describes the specifications of the battery used for the memory card (SRAM card).
Type
Item
Q2MEM-BAT Q3MEM-BAT
Classification Graphite fluoride lithium primary battery Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
Initial voltage 3.0V 3.0V
Nominal current 48mAh 550mAh
Battery life when stored Actually 5 years (room temperature)
Battery life when used Page 630, Appendix 4.3
Lithium content 0.014g 0.150g
Power failure backup for SRAM card Power failure backup for SRAM card
Application
(for Q2MEM-1MBS/Q2MEM-2MBS) (for Q3MEM-4MBS/Q3MEM-8MBS)
Remark
• For the life of the memory card battery, refer to Page 630, Appendix 4.3.
• For the battery directive in EU member states, refer to Page 678, Appendix 12.
9.2.2 Specifications of the memory card battery
9.2 Specifications
239
9.3 Handling
(1) Formatting a memory card
An SRAM or ATA card must have been formatted to be installed to the CPU module.
Since the SRAM or ATA card purchased is not yet formatted, format it using a programming tool before use.
(Formatting is not necessary for Flash cards.)
For formatting, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
Do not format an ATA card other than by the programming tool.
(If formatted using format function of Microsoft® Windows® Operating System, the ATA card may not be usable in a CPU
module.)
(2) Installing a battery to an SRAM card
A battery used to backup for power failure is supplied with the SRAM card.
Before using the SRAM card, install the battery.
Note that the SRAM card memory is not backed up by the CPU module battery only.
Also, the program memory, standard RAM, and latch devices of the CPU module are not backed up by the battery installed
on the SRAM card.
(3) Storable files
For the files that can be stored on each memory card, refer to the following.
Manuals for the CPU module used (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
(4) Precautions for installing/removing a memory card during power-on
Note that the data in a memory card may be damaged if the procedures described in Page 97, Section 4.5 (3) and
Page 97, Section 4.5 (4) are not followed. If the operating status of the CPU module at the time of an error is set
to "Stop" in parameter, the CPU module stops its operation upon the occurrence of "ICM.OPE.ERROR".
240
CHAPTER 9 MEMORY CARD
9.3.1 Battery installation into the memory card
9
Installation method of the battery for the memory card (SRAM card)
The battery for the SRAM card is removed from the battery holder when shipping.
Before inserting the SRAM card into the CPU module, set the battery holder as shown in the following flowchart.
(1) For Q2MEM-1MBS and Q2MEM-2MBS
Side with "product name" Battery holder's locking switch
Set the battery holder's locking switch to
the "RELEASE" position. ......
RELEASE position
Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card. ......
' ' sign
Set the battery onto the battery holder
with the "plus" face up. ......
Battery holder
Insert the battery holder with which the
battery is installed firmly, into the SRAM ......
card.
9.3.1 Battery installation into the memory card
9.3 Handling
Confirm that the battery holder's locking
switch is set to the "LOCK" position. ......
"LOCK"
The battery holder's locking switch is set automatically to the
"LOCK" position when the battery holder is removed. In its position,
Completed insert the battery holder firmly.
Insert or remove the battery in the horizontal direction along the battery holder fixing guide.
Failure to do so may damage the latches of the battery holder.
Battery holder latches
Battery fixing guide
Battery holder
241
(2) For Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS
Set the battery holder fixing switch
to the RELEASE position.
Pull out the battery holder of the
SRAM card.
RELEASE
Battery holder position
fixing switch Positive (+) side*1
Set the battery on the holder with
the positive (+) side facing up.
Battery holder
Place the holder back to the SRAM
card.
Set the battery holder fixing switch
to the LOCK position.
LOCK
position
Completed
*1 The following shows the direction of a battery.
Maker name Product number
Model (The number differs depending on the date
of manufacture.)
Polarity
Voltage
Positive (+) side Negative (-) side
242
CHAPTER 10 SD MEMORY CARD
CHAPTER 10 SD MEMORY CARD
This chapter describes the specifications and handling of SD memory cards inserted to the CPU module.
10
Note 10.1 Note 10.1
10.1 Part Names
The part names of an SD memory card are described below.
(1)
No. Name Descriptions
Prevents the data in an SD memory card from being erased or modified by setting this
(1) Write protect switch
switch to the LOCK position.
10.1 Part Names
High
Note 10.1 Basic performance Process Redundant Universal
The Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and Redundant CPU do not support the use of
SD memory cards. For the Universal model QCPU, only the QnUDVCPU supports the use of SD memory cards.
243
10.2 Specifications
This section describes the specifications of SD memory cards.
Item NZ1MEM-2GBSD NZ1MEM-4GBSD NZ1MEM-8GBSD NZ1MEM-16GBSD
Type SD SDHC
Capacity 2G bytes 4G bytes 8G bytes 16G bytes
Number of writings 60000 times 100000 times
H 32mm
External dimensions W 24mm
D 2.1mm
Weight 2g
For the specifications of the L1MEM-GBSD, refer to Page 650, Appendix 7.
● Use an SD memory card manufactured by Mitsubishi (NZ1MEM-GBSD).*1
Using a non-Mitsubishi SD memory card may cause a problem, such as damage of data in the SD memory card and
system stop.
● Do not format an SD memory card using a personal computer.
● SD memory cards manufactured by Mitsubishi conform to IEC 61131-2 when being used in a CPU module.
● SDHC-type cards can be used only with CPU modules that support the use of those cards. (An SDHC logo is shown on
the module or the support is described in the manual.)
● Performing any of the following operations, powering off the system, resetting the CPU module, or removing the SD
memory card, while the SD memory card is being accessed may damage data in the SD memory card. Stop access to
the SD memory card, and then perform these operations. ( Page 100, Section 4.6 (2))
Using SM606 (SD memory card forced disable instruction) and SM607 (SD memory card forced disable status flag) can
disable the SD memory card or check the SD memory card disabled status.
● Regularly back up important data by saving them to other media, such as a CD and DVD.
*1 For commercially available SD memory cards, refer to the following.
Before using a commercially available SD memory card, check that the card does not affect the control of the target
system.
TECHNICAL BULLETIN No. FA-A-0078
10.3 Handling
(1) Formatting an SD memory card
An SD memory card must have been formatted to be installed to the CPU module. Since the SD memory card
purchased is not yet formatted, format it using a programming tool before use.
For formatting, refer to the following.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)
(2) Storable files
For the files that can be stored on SD memory card, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
244
CHAPTER 10 SD MEMORY CARD
10.4 Forcibly Disabling the SD Memory Card
The SD memory card can be disabled before the CPU module is powered off regardless of the status of SD604
(Memory card use conditions). 10
(1) How to disable the SD memory card forcibly
1. Turn on SM606 (SD memory card forced disable instruction). The SD memory card inserted to the
CPU module is disabled regardless of the status of SD604 (Memory card use conditions).
Check the SD memory card disabled status in SM607 (SD memory card forced disable status flag).
2. The SD CARD LED turns off.
(2) How to enable the disabled SD memory card
The SD memory card forcibly disabled status can be canceled by the following operations.
• Powering off and then on the CPU module
• Resetting the CPU module
• Turning off SM606 (SD memory card forced disable instruction)*1
*1 The status of SM606 (SD memory card forced disable instruction) cannot be changed until SM607 (SD memory card
forced disable status flag) turns on after SM606 is turned on.
(SM606 status is valid.) (SM606 status is invalid.) (SM606 status is valid.)
Forced disable
Forced enable
instruction by on status
instruction by off status
ON ON
SM606
(SD memory card OFF
10.4 Forcibly Disabling the SD Memory Card
forced disable instruction)
ON
SM607
(SD memory card forced OFF
disable status flag)
(3) Precautions
• When the SD memory card is accessed after it has been disabled forcibly, the CPU module operates in the
same way when the SD memory card is not inserted. Note, however, that no processing is performed when
the SD memory card is accessed by the FREAD, FWRITE, COMRD(P), or QCDSET(P) instruction.
• When SM606 (SD memory card forced disable instruction) is on and an SD memory card is inserted, turning
off SM606 can enables the SD memory card.
• If the SD memory card is forcibly disabled while a file is written from an external device to the card, the
writing may fail. Cancel the SD memory card disabled status and try the writing again.
245
CHAPTER 11 EXTENDED SRAM CASSETTE
This chapter describes the specifications of extended SRAM cassettes installed to CPU modules. Note 11.1
Note 11.1
11.1 Part Names
The part names of the extended SRAM cassette are described below.
1)
No. Name Application
A part which is held when an extended SRAM cassette is installed or
1) Knob for cassette insertion/removal
removed
High
Note 11.1 Basic performance Process Redundant Universal
The Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and Redundant CPU do not support the use of
extended SRAM cassettes. For the Universal model QCPU, only the QnUDVCPU supports the use of extended SRAM
cassettes.
246
CHAPTER 11 EXTENDED SRAM CASSETTE
11.2 Specifications
This section describes the specifications of extended SRAM cassettes.
Item Q4MCA-1MBS Q4MCA-2MBS Q4MCA-4MBS Q4MCA-8MBS
Capacity 1M bytes 2M bytes 4M bytes 8M bytes
H 49mm 11
External dimensions W 32mm
D 18.5mm
Weight 0.02kg
11.3 Handling
(1) Installing an extended SRAM cassette
• Insert the extended SRAM cassette at power-off. ( Page 101, Section 4.7 (1))
• The data that is stored in a standard RAM before the extended SRAM cassette is installed is retained after
the extended SRAM cassette is installed as well.
(2) Removing an extended SRAM cassette
• Remove the extended SRAM cassette at power-off. ( Page 102, Section 4.7 (2))
• Removing the extended SRAM cassette deletes all the data stored in the standard RAM (including the
extended SRAM cassette).
11.2 Specifications
247
CHAPTER 12 BATTERY
Install a battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, or Q8BAT) Note 12.1 in the CPU module to hold data on the program memory,
standard RAM, and latch devices even if power failure occurs.
12.1 Battery Specifications
This section describes the specifications of the battery used for the CPU module.Note 12.1
Type
Item
Q6BAT Q7BAT(-SET) Q8BAT(-SET)
Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
Classification Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
(assembled battery)
Initial voltage 3.0V
Nominal current 1800mAh 5000mAh 18000mAh (1800mAh × 10 pieces)
Battery life when stored Actually 5 years (room temperature)
Battery life when used Page 603, Appendix 4.2
Lithium content 0.52g 1.55g 5.2g
For data retention of the program memory, standard RAM, and latch device during the power
Application
failure
Accessory ---- Battery holder*1 Q8BAT connection cable*2
*1 Included only when the Q7BAT-SET is purchased.
*2 Included only when the Q8BAT-SET is purchased.
Remark
• For the battery life, refer to Page 603, Appendix 4.2.
• For the battery directive in EU member states, refer to Page 678, Appendix 12.
Note 12.1 Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not support the use of the Q7BAT and Q8BAT.
248
CHAPTER 12 BATTERY
12.2 Battery Installation
(1) Q6BAT battery installation procedure
The battery connector of Q6BAT is disconnected when shipping. Connect the connector as follows.
For the service life of the battery and how to replace the battery, refer to Page 255, Section 13.3.
(a) Basic model QCPU
Open the CPU module front cover. CPU module
12
Confirm that the battery is loaded
correctly.
Insert the battery connector into the
connector pin on the case. Be sure that
the insertion direction is correct.
Connector
Completed
(b) High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU and Universal model
QCPU
Open the CPU module bottom cover.
Connector
12.2 Battery Installation
Confirm that the battery is loaded
correctly. Connector Battery
stopper
Insert the battery connector into the
connector pin on the case. Be sure that
the insertion direction is correct.
CPU module
Completed
Firmly push the connector all the way.
249
(2) Q7BAT-SET battery installation procedure
When changing the battery for the CPU module from the Q6BAT to the Q7BAT, set the battery and connect its
connector in the following procedure.
Open the CPU module bottom cover.
Disconnect the connector connecting the
Q6BAT to the CPU module.
Connector
Remove the Q6BAT and cover from the
CPU module. Connector
stopper
Connect the Q7BAT- SET to the battery
connector of the CPU module and set it
into the connector holder of the battery
holder. CPU module
Battery holder
Set the Q7BAT- SET in the CPU module.
Completed
Firmly push the connector all the way.
250
CHAPTER 12 BATTERY
(3) Q8BAT-SET battery installation procedure
When changing the battery of the CPU module from the Q6BAT to the Q8BAT, install the battery and connect its
connector in the following procedure.
Open the cover of the CPU module's Connector of
bottom. CPU module
Connector of
battery
Disconnect the connector connecting
Q6BAT
12
the Q6BAT to the CPU module.
Remove the Q6BAT and cover from
the CPU module.
CPU module
Connector
of cable
Insert the connector of Q8BAT Q8BAT connection cable
connection cable (included in the
Q8BAT-SET) into the connector of Connector of
CPU module while confirming the CPU module
orientation of each connector. CPU module
12.2 Battery Installation
Q8BAT connection cover
Q8BAT connection cover
Attach the Q8BAT connection cover
to the CPU module.
Q8BAT connection cable
CPU module
(To next page)
251
(From previous page) Control panel
Q8BAT
Mount the CPU module onto the main
base unit, so that the Q8BAT
connection cable connected to the
CPU module will not interfere with the
other devices.
Fix the Q8BAT onto the control panel.
(Screws or DIN rail is applicable.)
R (bending radius)
Attach the connector of Q8BAT 10mm or more
connection cable to the Q8BAT while
confirming the orientation of the
connector.
Completed Q8BAT Q8BAT
connection cable
• Clamp the Q8BAT connection cable.
Failure to do so may damage the Q8BAT connection cover, connector, or the cable due to unintentional swinging
and shifting or accidental pulling of the cable.
• Provide 10mm or more of the bending radius for the Q8BAT connection cable.
If the bending radius is less than 10mm, malfunction may occur due to characteristic deterioration and wire
breakage.
• For details of the module mounting position, refer to the following.
Page 60, Section 4.1.2
• Firmly push the connector all the way.
• When installing the Q8BAT for the Universal model QCPU, use the connection cable with “A” printed.
A Sticker
252
CHAPTER 13 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
CHAPTER 13 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
This chapter describes items that must be maintained or inspected daily or periodically to properly use a
programmable controller in optimal condition at all times.
13.1 Daily Inspection
This section describes items that must be inspected daily.
No. Inspection item Inspection details Criteria Action
1 Installation of base unit
Check that installation screws
are not loose and the cover is The screws and cover must be installed securely. Retighten the screws.
13
not dislocated.
Check that the module is not
dislocated and the module The module fixing hook must be engaged and installed Securely engaged the
2 Installation of I/O module
fixing hook is engaged securely. module fixing hook.
securely.
Check for loose terminal Retighten the terminal
Screws must not be loose.
screws. screws.
Check for distance between The proper clearance must be provided between
Correct.
3 Connecting conditions solderless terminals. solderless terminals.
Retighten the
Check that the cable
Connections must no be loose. connector fixing
connector is not loose.
screws.
Power supply module The LED must be on (green).
Check that the LED is on.
POWER LED*1 (Error if the LED is off or on (red)).
The LED must be on (green or orange) or flashing
13.1 Daily Inspection
Power supply module LIFE
Check that the LED is on. (orange).
LED*2
(Error if the LED is off, on (red), or flashing (red))
The LED must be on (green).
CPU module MODE LED*3 Check that the LED is on.
(Error if the LED is off or flashing.)
Check that the LED is on in
CPU module RUN LED The LED must be on. (Error if the LED is off.)
the RUN status.
Module indication LED
The LED must be off. (Error if the LED is on or
CPU module ERR. LED Check that the LED is off.
flashing.)
4 Page 277,
CPU module BAT. LED*4 Check that the LED is off. The LED must be off. (Error if the LED is on.) Section 15.1
The LED must be on when the input power is turned
on.
Check that the LED turns on The LED must be off when the input power is turned
Input module Input LED
and off. off.
(Error if the LED does not turn on or turn off as
indicated above.)
The LED turns on when the output power is turned on.
The LED must be off when the output power is turned
Check that the LED turns on
Output module Output LED off.
and off.
(Error if the LED does not turn on or turn off as
indicated above.)
*1 For the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU, check the POWER LED on the CPU module side.
*2 When the Life detection power supply module is used, check the LIFE LED.
*3 The Basic model QCPU does not have the MODE LED.
*4 The Basic model QCPU does not have the BAT. LED.
253
13.2 Periodic Inspection
The items that must be inspected one or two times every 6 months to 1 year are listed below.
When the equipment has been relocated or modified, or wiring layout has been changed, perform this inspection.
No. Inspection item Inspection details Criteria Action
Ambient temperature*2 0 to 55°C
Ambient environment
Ambient humidity 5 to 95%RH*1
Measure with a thermometer
Ensure that the ambient
1 and a hygrometer.
environment meets the criteria.
Measure corrosive gas. Corrosive gas must not be
Atmosphere
present.
Measure a voltage between the 85 to 132VAC
2 Power voltage terminals of 100/200VAC and 170 to 264VAC Change the power supply.
24VDC. 15.6 to 31.2VDC
Retighten the screws.
Move the module to check for The module must be installed If the CPU, I/O, or power
Installation
Looseness, rattling
looseness and rattling. securely. supply module is loose, fix it
3
with screws.
Adhesion of dirt and Dirt and foreign matter must
Check visually. Remove and clean.
foreign matter not be present.
Looseness of terminal Try to further tighten screws
Screws must not be loose. Retighten the terminal screws.
screws with a screwdriver.
Connection
Proximity of solderless Solderless terminals must be
4 Check visually. Correct.
terminals to each other positioned at proper intervals.
Looseness of Retighten the connector fixing
Check visually. Connectors must not be loose.
connectors screws.
Check the BAT. LED at the Replace the battery when the
The LED must be off.
front side of the CPU module. BAT. LED is on.
Check the length of term after Must not be used more than 5 Replace the battery if it has
5 Battery purchasing the battery. years. been used more than 5 years.
Check that SM51 or SM52 is
Replace the battery when
turned off using a programming Must be turned off.
SM51 or SM52 is on.
tool in monitor mode.
The Error log must not be
6 PLC diagnostics Check the Error log. Page 282, Section 15.2
updated.
Specify factors that increase
the scan time.
Check the values of SD526 Maximum scan time must be
(Check the operation status of
and SD527 using a within the allowable range
7 Maximum scan time the trigger signal that passes
programming tool in the given in the specification of the
through a loop if loop positions
monitor mode. system.
exist in the sequence
program.)
*1 When an AnS/A Series module is used in the system, the criteria will be from 10 to 90%RH.
*2 The ambient temperature is the temperature inside the control panel where the programmable controller is installed.
254
CHAPTER 13 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
13.3 Replacement Procedure of the Battery
13.3.1 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery
Replace the battery of the CPU module by the following procedures when it comes to the end of its life.
The programmable controller power must be on for 10 minutes or longer before dismounting the battery.
Data in the memory are backed up for a while by a capacitor even after the battery is removed. However, since data in
the memory may be erased if the time for replacement exceeds the backup time, replace the battery quickly.
(1) Replacement procedure for the Basic model QCPU's Q6BAT battery
Backup time 13
3 minutes
Replacing battery
CPU module
Backup the program and the
data.
Turn OFF the programmable controller
power supply.
Open the CPU module front cover.
13.3.1 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery
13.3 Replacement Procedure of the Battery
Remove the old battery from its
holder.
Insert a new battery into the holder
in the correct direction. Connect
the lead to the connector. Connector CPU
module side
Connector
Close the CPU module front cover. battery side
Turn ON the programmable controller
power supply.
Monitor
OFF
SM51 to check
ON/OFF.
ON
Monitor
Bit 0 is OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 0 is
ON.
Bit 0 is ON.
Failure of CPU module battery Completed
255
(2) Replacement procedure of the Q6BAT battery for the High Performance model
QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU
Backup time
3 minutes
Replacing battery
Backup the program and the
data.
Turn off the programmable controller
power supply.
Remove the CPU module from the
base unit.
Connector CPU
module side
Open the CPU module bottom cover.
Connector
Remove the old battery from its battery side
holder. Battery Q6BAT
Insert a new battery into the holder
in the correct direction. Connect the
lead to the connector.
Close the CPU module bottom cover.
Install the CPU module into the CPU module
base unit.
Turn on the programmable controller
power supply.
Monitor
OFF
SM51 to verify
on/off.
ON
Monitor Bit 0 is OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 0 is
ON.
Bit 0 is on.
Failure of CPU module battery Completed
256
CHAPTER 13 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
(3) Replacement procedure of the Q7BAT battery
Backup time
3 minutes
Replacing battery
Backup the program and the data.
Turn off the programmable controller power supply.
Remove the CPU module from the
base unit.
13
Remove the battery holder at the
bottom of the CPU module. Battery holder
Battery
Disconnect the battery connector, and pull *1: When disconnecting the battery Q7BAT
out the Q6BAT/Q7BAT being used.*1 connector, hold the connector part being
careful not to damage the battery cable.
Q7BAT to be
replaced by
Confirm Q7BAT. Disengage the catch on one side of
the type of the old the battery holder to disassemble the holder Latch
battery. into two, and remove the Q7BAT.
Q6BAT to be Battery holder
replaced by Q7BAT. Insert the new Q7BAT into the holder in the
correct direction, and reassemble the battery
13.3.1 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery
13.3 Replacement Procedure of the Battery
Connect the Q7BAT to the battery holder so that the battery cable comes out
connector of the CPU module, and set it into of the hole in the holder connection.
the connector holder of the battery holder. (Push the holder parts in until they click.)
Connector
Set the battery holder to the
CPU module.
Connector
stopper
Install the CPU module into the
base unit.
Turn on the programmable controller power supply.
CPU module
Battery holder
Monitor
OFF
SM51 to verify
on/off.
ON
Monitor Bit 0 is OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 0 is
ON.
Bit 0 is on.
Failure of Q7BAT battery
Completed
257
(4) Replacement procedure of the Q8BAT battery
Backup time
3 minutes
Replacing battery
Backup the program and the data.
Turn off the programmable controller
power supply.
2)
Confirm Remove the Q8BAT from the control
Q8BAT to be replaced by Q8BAT.
the type of the old
panel.
battery.
Q6BAT/Q7BAT to
be replaced by Remove the Q8BAT connection
Q8BAT. cable from the Q8BAT.
Remove the CPU module from the
Connect the Q8BAT connection
base unit.
cable to the new Q8BAT.
Remove the cover/battery holder at Connector Install the new Q8BAT to the control
the bottom of the CPU module. of CPU module
panel.*2 (Fixing with a mounting
Connector screw or fixing with the DIN rail is
of battery
Disconnect the battery connector, and Q6BAT
pull out the Q6BAT/Q7BAT. *1
1)
Connect the Q8BAT connection cable
to the connector of the CPU module.
CPU module
Connector
of cable
Q8BAT
connection
(To next page) cable
Connector
of CPU module
CPU module
Q8BAT
connection
cover
*1 Remove the battery connector with holding the connector part so that the battery cable may not be damaged.
258
CHAPTER 13 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
(From previous page)
Install the Q8BAT connection cover Q8BAT connection cover
to the CPU module.
Q8BAT connection cable
Install the CPU module into the
base unit.
CPU module
Connect the Q8BAT connection cable
to the Q8BAT.
Install the Q8BAT to the control panel. Control panel
*2
(Fixing with a mounting screw or
Q8BAT
fixing with the DIN rail are available.)
13
1)
Fix the Q8BAT connection cable to
the control panel.*3
Turn on the programmable controller
power supply.
R (bending radius)*4
10mm or more
Monitor OFF
SM51 to verify
on/off.
Q8BAT Q8BAT
ON connection cable
Monitor Bit 0 is OFF.
13.3.1 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery
13.3 Replacement Procedure of the Battery
SD52 to check if bit 0 is
ON.
Bit 0 is on.
Failure of Q8BAT Completed
2)
*2 For the module mounting position, refer to the following.
Page 60, Section 4.1.2
*3 Clamp the Q8BAT connection cable. If not being clamped, the Q8BAT connection cover, connector, and cable, may be
damaged by a loose cable connection, shifting, or pulling due to carelessness, etc.
*4 Secure 10mm or more as the minimum cable bend radius.
If it is less than 10mm, malfunction may occur due to characteristic deterioration, open cable or the like.
259
● After replacing a battery, write the date for next battery replacement on the sticker on the back side of the front cover.
Write the proper date by checking the battery life. ( Page 603, Appendix 4.2)
● When replacing the battery of a CPU module, pay attention to the following:
• Back up the data in the CPU module by a programming tool before starting replacement.
• When replacing a battery of a Redundant CPU, back up the memory data such as programs by the memory copy
from the control system to the standby system, and then replace the battery of the CPU module that was changed
into the standby status by the system switching function.
For the memory copy from control system to standby system and system switching function, refer to the manual
below.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
• When the MELSEC-Q series is used as a UL-certified product, the Q7BAT and Q8BAT battery must be replaced
by service personnel.
The service personnel are defined as experienced technicians who have been sufficiently educated and trained,
and are capable of perceiving and avoiding operational hazard.
260
CHAPTER 13 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
13.3.2 SRAM card battery replacement procedure
Replace the SRAM card battery in the following procedure.
(1) Replacing Q2MEM-1MBS and Q2MEM-2MBS
Replacing battery
Backup the program and the
data.
Open the front cover while the
programmable controller power
supply is on.
CPU
13
Release module
direction
With a flat-blade screwdriver, etc.,
remove the battery holder locking Battery holder
switch from the LOCK position. fixing switch
CPU
Battery holder
module
Remove the battery holder
from the SRAM card. Flat blade
screwdriver
Used battery
Battery holder
Remove the old battery from its
holder.
New battery
Insert a new battery into the
13.3.2 SRAM card battery replacement procedure
13.3 Replacement Procedure of the Battery
holder in the correct direction. CPU
Lock module
direction
Check that the battery holder Battery holder
fixing switch*
fixing switch is set to the LOCK
position.
* The battery holder fixing switch is
automatically set to the "LOCK" position
when the battery holder is removed. In its
position, insert the battery holder to the
end.
CPU
module
Deeply insert the SRAM card
into the battery holder.
Monitor OFF
SM52 to verify on/off. Put + toward you.
ON
Monitor Bit 1 and bit 2 are OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 1 and bit
2 are ON.
Clears the error.
Bit 1 and bit 2 are ON. Page 410, Appendix 1.10
Failure of SRAM card battery
Completed
261
(2) Replacing Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS
Replacing battery Remove a cover,
pressing the top and
bottom fixing claws.
Backup the program and the CPU
data. module
Remove a memory card
protective cover of the CPU
module at power-on status of
the programmable controller.
With a flat-blade screwdriver, etc.,
remove the battery holder locking
CPU
switch from the LOCK position. module
Battery holder
Remove the battery holder from
the SRAM card.
Release
direction
Battery holder
fixing switch
Remove the old battery from its
holder.
CPU
module Facing "+ (positive)"
Insert a new battery into the up, install the battery
holder in the correct direction.
Deeply insert the SRAM card
into the battery holder.
LOCK
Battery holder
Set a battery holder fixing switch fixing switch
to the LOCK position
Set the memory card protective
cover on the CPU module.
Monitor OFF
SM52 to verify on/off.
ON
Monitor Bit 1 and bit 2 are OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 1 and bit
2 are ON.
Clears the error.
Page 410, Appendix 1.10
Bit 1 and bit 2 are ON.
Failure of SRAM card battery
Completed
262
CHAPTER 13 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Be careful about the following to replace the SRAM card battery.
● To back up the data, replace the SRAM card battery with the programmable controller power supply on and the SRAM
card installed.
● Start replacement after backing up the CPU module data using a programming tool.
● Since replacement is made with the programmable controller power supply ON, take extreme care not to get an electric
shock.
● When dismounting or mounting the battery holder on the SRAM card, take care so that the battery does not come out of
the battery holder.
● When replacing the battery with the programmable controller power supply off, always back up the data before starting
replacement.
[Battery replacement procedure]
1) Back up the SRAM card data using the programming tool.
2) Replace the battery.
3) Write the backed up data from the programming tool to the memory card. 13
Insert or remove the battery in the horizontal direction along the battery holder fixing guide.
Failure to do so may damage the latches of the battery holder.
Battery holder latches
Battery fixing guide
Battery holder
● If a battery of the SRAM card is hard to replace, use of the following tweezers is recommended.
13.3.2 SRAM card battery replacement procedure
13.3 Replacement Procedure of the Battery
Product Model name
Plastic tweezers NK-2539
263
13.4 Operating the Programmable Controller that Has been
Stored
When the programmable controller that has been stored with a battery removed or the programmable controller that
has been stored with a battery exceeding the guaranteed life installed is operated, data in the following battery-
backed-up-memories may be indefinite.
Battery
Memory Battery built
Battery of a CPU Module*1
in a memory card
Program memory *2 ×
Standard RAM
CPU module (Including an extended ×
*4
SRAM cassette )
Standard ROM ---- (Battery backup not required)
SRAM card ×
Memory card*3 Flash card ---- (Battery backup not required)
ATA card ---- (Battery backup not required)
SD memory card ---- (Battery backup not required)
: Battery backed up, ×: Not battery backed up
*1 There are three batteries available: Q6BAT, Q7BAT, and Q8BAT.
*2 The program memory of the Universal model QCPU does not require battery backup.
*3 The Basic model QCPU and High-speed Universal model QCPU do not support the use of memory cards.
*4 Only the High-speed Universal model QCPU supports the use of extended SRAM cassettes.
Before restarting the operation, format the battery-backed-up-memories listed in above table using a programming
tool. ( Operating manual for the programming tool used)
After formatting the memories, write backup data to each memory.
To format the program memory during boot operation, select the "Clear Program Memory" checkbox in the Boot File
tab of the PLC parameter dialog box.
● Before storing a programmable controller, back up all the data stored in each memory. Write the data with a programming
tool before restarting an operation.
● When the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is reset, the CPU module initializes all of the
following data if an error is detected. Restarting an operation with initialized data may cause an unintended operation.
• Program memory data
• Standard RAM data
• Error history
• Latch data (latch relay (L), devices in latch setting range set in the parameter, special relay SM900 to SM999,
special register SD900 to SD999)
• Sampling trace data
● For the Universal model QCPU, when the latch data backup (to standard ROM) function is used, latch data such as
device data and error history data in the CPU module can be backed up without using a battery. Therefore, when a
programmable controller is stored with a battery removed, the stored data will not be lost.
264
CHAPTER 14 MODULE CHANGE DURING SYSTEM OPERATION
CHAPTER 14 MODULE CHANGE DURING SYSTEM
OPERATION
14.1 Online Module Change Note 14.1
An online module change is a function that allows the Q series module mounted on the main base unit or extension
base unit to be changed during system control executed by the Process CPU or Redundant CPU.Note 14.1
Using an online module change, the module that failed during control can be replaced with the module of the same
model name.
● An online module change cannot add a module or change the current module for another module.
● When executing an online module change for the Process CPU in the multiple CPU system, it is necessary to specify 14
"Enable Online Module Change with Another PLC" in the multiple CPU setting of the PLC parameter dialog box.
Also, there are restrictions on the versions of the CPU modules that comprise the multiple CPU system. For details, refer
to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
● Perform an online module change after confirming that the system outside the programmable controller will not
malfunction.
● To prevent an electric shock, operating module malfunction, etc., provide a switch or similar individually cutting-off means
for the external power supply of the module to be changed online.
● It is recommended to verify that the operations of the unchanged modules will not be affected by executing an online
module change in an actual system beforehand to confirm the following.
• The means and structure that will cut off the connection with the external device are correct.
14.1 Online Module Change
• ON/OFF of switches, etc. has no influence.
● Do not mount/remove the module onto/from base unit or terminal block more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant),
after the first use of the product.
Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector.
High
Note 14.1 Basic performance Universal
The Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, and Universal model QCPU do not support this function.
265
(1) System configuration that allows online module change
An online module change can be performed under the following conditions.
(a) Modules that can be changed online
The following table lists modules that can be changed online.
Module type Restrictions
Input module
Output module No restrictions
I/O combined module
Analog-digital converter module
Digital-analog converter module
Intelligent function
Temperature input module Supported by function version C.*1
module
Temperature control module
Pulse input module
*1 When using Redundant CPU and/or connecting an extension base unit, online module change cannot be performed to
an intelligent function module mounted on the main base unit.
The modules other than listed above cannot be changed online.
For whether the above intelligent function modules can be changed online or not and their changing
procedures, refer to the manual of the used intelligent function module.
(b) Versions of a programming tool that supports online module change
A programming tool is required to perform an online module change.
For versions of a programming tool, refer to the operating manual for the programming tool used.
An online module change can also be performed from a programming tool via a network.
(c) Restrictions on base units
• When the slim type main base unit (Q3SB) is used, an online module change cannot be performed.
• When the extension base unit of the type that requires no power supply module (Q5B) is used, an online
module change cannot be performed for the modules mounted on all base units connected.
• When the redundant type extension base unit (Q6WRB) is used, the online module change cannot be
performed to all modules connected to the main base unit.
266
CHAPTER 14 MODULE CHANGE DURING SYSTEM OPERATION
(d) Control status of CPU module
A module can be changed online when a stop error does not occur.
The following table describes whether a module can be changed online or not depending on the control status
of the CPU module.
Control status RUN status*1 STOP status PAUSE status At stop error
Whether online module
change can be executed Can be executed Can be executed Can be executed Cannot be executed
or not
*1 Including the case where a continue error has occurred in the RUN status.
An online module change can be continued even when the CPU module is set to the STOP or PAUSE status
during the operation. In either of the following cases, however, online module change cannot be continued.
• When the CPU module is reset
• When a stop error occurs
(e) Number of modules that can be changed online 14
The number of modules that can be changed online at one time is one for each CPU module.
Multiple modules cannot be changed simultaneously.
14.1 Online Module Change
267
(2) Restrictions on online module change
The following operations cannot be performed during an online module change.
• Issue an online module change request from multiple programming tools to one CPU module.
• Write parameters to the CPU module during online module change.
The following message appears if an online module change request is issued from another programming tool to the CPU
module during online module change.
After confirming the message, select "Yes" or "No".
● When "Yes" is selected
Online module change operation is switched to "Programming tool 2)" that issued the request later. (Operation is
continued from the pre-switching status.)
"Yes" selected
Online module Online module change
change continued execution canceled
Programming tool 2) Programming tool 1)
● When "No" is selected
The operation of online module change "Programming tool 2)" requested later is suspended. (Online module change
"Programming tool 1)" executed first is continued.)
"No" selected
Online module Online module change
change suspended execution continued
Programming tool 2) Programming tool 1)
268
CHAPTER 14 MODULE CHANGE DURING SYSTEM OPERATION
(3) Special relays and special register related to online module change
Information during online module change is stored into the special relays (SM235, SM236) and special register
(SD235).
• Whether the online module change of the corresponding CPU module is executed or not can be checked by
monitoring SM235, SM236 and SD235.
• SM235: Online module change flag (turns on during online module change)
• SM236: Flag that turns on only one scan after online module change (turns on only one scan after
completion of online module change)
• SD235: Module being changed online (stores the starting I/O number of the module being changed
online10H)
Refer to Page 454, Appendix 2 for details of SM235 and SM236 and to Page 506, Appendix 3 for details of
SD235.
Online module Online module
change start change completed
14
ON
SM235 OFF
Starting I/O number of module being
SD235 changed online 10H
ON
SM236 OFF
14.1 Online Module Change
1 scan
269
(4) Online module change procedure
The following explains the online module change procedure of the I/O module.
For the online module change procedure of the intelligent function module, refer to the manual of the used
intelligent function module.
● It is recommended to turn off the output (Y) from the output module/I/O combined module to be changed online before it
is changed.
● When making an online module change for the Redundant CPU, specify "No settings have been made (Default)",
"System A" or "System B" as the target system in the "transfer setup" by a programming tool.
Do not specify the "Control system" or "Standby system" as the target system.
If the "Control system" or "Standby system" is specified in the transfer setup, the following error dialog appears at
execution of an online module change.
When the following error dialog is displayed, change the target system to "No settings have been made (Default)",
"System A" or "System B", and then perform an online module change.
● When executing online module change for the module mounted on the extension base unit in the Redundant CPU,
access cannot be made to a module mounted on the extension base unit from the standby system. Set [Transfer setup] in
a programming tool, checking that the transfer target Redundant CPU module is the control system.
1. Online module change can be performed by the following operation.
[Diagnostics] [Online Module Change]
270
CHAPTER 14 MODULE CHANGE DURING SYSTEM OPERATION
2. Double-click the module to be changed online. The Online Module Change screen appears.
(The following table lists the communication status with the change-target module while the following
screen is displayed.)
Executed/Not
Target module, item
executed
Input module refresh Executed
Output module refresh Executed
Input refresh Executed
I/O hybrid module
Output refresh Executed
Input refresh Executed
Output refresh Executed
FROM/TO instruction Executed
Instruction using intelligent
Executed
function module device
Intelligent function Intelligent dedicated instruction Executed
module Intelligent automatic refresh Executed
Buffer memory batch monitor Executed
14
3. Click the "Execution" button to enable the online module change operation.
(The following table lists the communication status with the target module for online module change when
the following screen is displayed.)
Executed/Not
Target module, item
executed
Not executed
Input module refresh
(Data held)
Output module refresh Not executed
14.1 Online Module Change
Not executed
Input refresh
I/O hybrid module (Data held)
Output refresh Not executed
Input refresh Not executed
Output refresh Not executed
FROM/TO instruction No processing
Instruction using intelligent
No processing
function module device
Intelligent function Intelligent dedicated instruction No processing
module Intelligent automatic refresh No processing
Communication
Buffer memory batch monitor
error
4. Cut off the connection (I/O signal communication) with the external device using a switch.
5. Turn off the external power supply for the module. Power supply to the module is shut off.
6. Disconnect the terminal block or connector from the module.
7. Remove the module from the base unit. ( Page 71, Section 4.2.3)
8. Mount a new module on the same slot. ( Page 71, Section 4.2.3)
9. Connect the terminal block or connector to the new module.
10. Turn on the external power supply for the module. Power supply to the module is resumed.
11. Establish a connection (I/O signal communication) with the external device using a switch.
271
12. After changing the module, click the "Execution" button.
(The following table lists the communication status with the change-target module while the following
screen is displayed.)
Executed/Not
Target module, item
executed
Not executed
Input module refresh
(Data held)
Output module refresh Not executed
Not executed
Input refresh
I/O hybrid module (Data held)
Output refresh Not executed
Input refresh Executed
Output refresh Executed
FROM/TO instruction No processing
Instruction using intelligent
No processing
Intelligent function function module device
module Intelligent dedicated instruction No processing
Intelligent automatic refresh No processing
Buffer memory batch monitor Executed
When the initial settings of the intelligent function module have been made by GX Configurator, the set data are written to
the intelligent function module.
13. Click the "Execution" button again to start control.
14. The screen that notifies the operation completion appears.
(The following table lists the communication status with the change-target module while the following
screen is displayed.)
Executed/Not
Target module, item
executed
Input module refresh Executed
Output module refresh Executed
Input refresh Executed
I/O hybrid module
Output refresh Executed
Input refresh Executed
Output refresh Executed
FROM/TO instruction Executed
Intelligent function Instruction using intelligent
Executed
module function module device
Intelligent dedicated instruction Executed
Intelligent automatic refresh Executed
Buffer memory batch monitor Executed
272
CHAPTER 14 MODULE CHANGE DURING SYSTEM OPERATION
(5) Operation in case of system switching occurrence during online module
change (When Redundant type extension base unit is used)
The following describes the procedures to be taken when the system switching occurs during online module
change is performed to the module mounted on the extension base unit in the Redundant CPU.
1. Connect GX Developer to the new control system.
2. Check the status of the module being replaced on the System monitor screen.
(The online module change status can be checked with SM235 of the new control system and standby
system.)
14
14.1 Online Module Change
3. Select "Online module change" in the System monitor screen while the online module change is
being performed. The following screen appears.
4. The operation that has been executed before the system was switched continues.
273
● If the "Execution" button is clicked on the condition that GX Developer is connected to the new control system, the
following message may appear.
Click "Yes" and continue the online module change operation.
● When the online module change operation is completed, the following error dialog box may appear. Even though the
operation has been completed successfully.
274
CHAPTER 14 MODULE CHANGE DURING SYSTEM OPERATION
14.2 Change of Redundant Power Supply Module
Following the flowchart shown below, change a faulty redundant power supply module online (with power on).
(It is assumed that the other redundant power supply module is normally operating.)
Start
Check the redundant power supply
module to be changed.
Power OFF the redundant power supply
module to be changed.
Change the redundant power supply
module.
14
Power ON the new redundant power
supply module.
Make sure that the "POWER" LED is
turned on green.
Completed
14.2 Change of Redundant Power Supply Module
● If either redundant power supply module fails, change it for a normal one earlier than usual (within 14 days as a
guideline). If it does not fail, it is recommended to change the redundant power supply module for a new one after five
years have elapsed.
● Change the redundant power supply module with extreme care, referring to Page 71, Section 4.2.3 (1). If the module
fixing projection of the redundant power supply module comes off from the module fixing hole of the redundant base unit,
an error will occur due to connector damage.
● When the redundant power supply system is used, a "continue" error will occur due to a redundant power supply module
failure. Cancel the error after changing the faulty redundant power supply module for a normal one.
Note 14.2, Note 14.3 Note 14.2
● When the redundant power supply system is used, the failure status of the redundant power supply module can be
checked by the system monitor of GX Developer (Version 8.18U or later) or the special relay SM1781/special register
SD1781. Note 14.2, Note 14.3 Note 14.3
For details of the system monitor, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
Note 14.2 Basic
Failure of redundant power supply cannot be detected by the Basic model QCPU.
High
Note 14.3 performance Process
When using the High Performance QCPU or the Process CPU, check the versions of the CPU module and programming
tool used. ( Page 637, Appendix 6)
275
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes errors that may occur during system operation, the error causes, and measures against the
errors.
For a redundant system (when the Redundant CPU is used), refer to the following.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
When the system has trouble, perform troubleshooting in the following order.
• Visual inspection ( Page 277, Section 15.1)
• Error checking and corrective actions ( Page 282, Section 15.2)
Remark
Saving the program and devices at the time of an error helps to analyze the error cause.
( Page 302, Section 15.4)
276
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
15.1 Visual Inspection
Visually check the following.
(1) LED status
Check if there is a hardware failure or not. Check the status of each LED in the following order.
For the module status corresponding to the LED indication, refer to the "Part Names" section.
• CPU module ( Page 119, Section 6.1)
• Power supply module ( Page 188, Section 7.1)
1. Power on the system. Check the POWER LED status of the power supply module.
If the POWER LED does not turn on even when power is supplied, perform the following troubleshooting.
Page 278, Section 15.1.1
2. Check the color of the POWER LED.
When the POWER LED does not turn on in green, perform the following troubleshooting.
Page 278, Section 15.1.2
3. When using the Life detection power supply module, check the LIFE LED status.
When the LIFE LED does not turn on in green or orange, perform the following troubleshooting. 15
Page 279, Section 15.1.3
4. Check the MODE LED status of the CPU module.
When the MODE LED does not turn on, perform the following troubleshooting.
Page 280, Section 15.1.4
5. Check the RUN LED status of the CPU module.
When the RUN LED does not turn on, perform the following troubleshooting.
15.1 Visual Inspection
Page 281, Section 15.1.5
6. When using the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, or Redundant CPU, check the
BOOT LED status.
When the BOOT LED flickers, perform the following troubleshooting.
Page 281, Section 15.1.6
7. Check the ERR. LED status of the CPU module.
When the ERR. LED is on or flickering, an error exists.
Check the error with the programming tool. ( Page 282, Section 15.2)
8. Check the BAT. LED status of the CPU module.
When the BAT. LED is on, the battery voltage is low.
Replace the battery. ( Page 255, Section 13.3)
(2) Communication cable and wiring
Check if any communication cable has a problem or not. Check also that connectors and terminal blocks are
correctly mounted or wired.
Page 103, Section 4.8
277
15.1.1 When the POWER LED does not turn on
Check the following.
Check item Corrective action
The power supply module has failed. Replace the power
The MODE LED of the CPU module is on.
supply module.
Supply power voltage within the specified range.
Power supply voltage is not appropriate.
( Page 196, Section 7.2)
Reexamine the system configuration so that the internal
The internal current consumption for the entire system
current consumption does not exceed the rated output
exceeds the rated output current of the power supply
current.
module.
( Page 674, Appendix 10)
Repeatedly supply power to the system, returning the
The POWER LED turns on when power is supplied again to
modules back to the system one by one.
the system after all modules, except for the power supply
The last module mounted immediately before the POWER
module, were removed.
LED turned off is failed.
If the POWER LED does not turn on even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a hardware failure of
the power supply module or base unit.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
15.1.2 When the POWER LED does not turn on in green
Check the following items according to the POWER LED status.
(1) When the POWER LED turns on in red
Remove the power supply module and mount it to the normal base unit. Resupply power to the system.
If the POWER LED turns on in red after resupplying power, the power supply module is failed.
If the POWER LED does not turn on even after the power is supplied during the above operation, also
check the items described in Page 278, Section 15.1.1.
(2) When the POWER LED flickers in orange
Resupply power to the system. If the POWER LED flickers in orange after resupplying power, the power supply
module is failed.
If the POWER LED does not turn on even after the power is supplied during the above operation, also check the
items described in Page 278, Section 15.1.1.
278
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
15.1.3 When the LIFE LED does not turn on in green or orange
Check the following items according to the LIFE LED status.
(1) When the LIFE LED is off
Resupply power to the system. If the LIFE LED turns on in red for one second, replace the power supply module
as the power supply module has reached its end of life.
If the LIFE LED does not turn on or flicker after resupplying power, the power supply module should be replaced
as the life diagnosis is impossible.
(2) When the LIFE LED turns on in red
Check item Corrective action
The operating ambient temperature is out of the range of 0 to Keep the operating ambient temperature within the range of
55°C. 0 to 55°C.
Stop the operation of the power supply module for a while,
and resupply power to the system after the internal
The LIFE LED turns on in red after power is resupplied. temperature of the module is lowered.
If the LIFE LED does not turn on in green or orange after
resupplying power, replace the power supply module.
15
(3) When the LIFE LED flickers in red
Supply power to the system again. If the LIFE LED does not turn on in green or orange even after the power is
supplied, check the wiring between LG and FG by referring to the following.
• Grounding a programmable controller ( Page 116, Section 4.8.4)
15.1.3 When the LIFE LED does not turn on in green or orange
15.1 Visual Inspection
• Wiring a power cable and a ground wire ( Page 654, Appendix 8.1.2 (2))
• Grounding a power supply part ( Page 662, Appendix 8.1.5)
If the symptom still remains after the check, replace the power supply module.
279
15.1.4 When the MODE LED does not turn on
Check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
The forced ON/OFF is set. Cancel the forced ON/OFF.
When the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, or
Redundant CPU are used, RESET/L.CLR switch is not in the Set the RESET/L.CLR switch to the neutral position.
neutral position.
The MODE LED turns on when power is supplied to the The original power supply module has a problem.
system again after the power supply module was replaced. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
The CPU module or any other module mounted has a
problem.
The MODE LED does not turn on even when power is
Repeatedly supply power to the system, returning the
supplied to the system again after the power supply module
modules back to the system one by one.
was replaced.
The last module mounted immediately before the MODE
LED turned off is failed.
Repeatedly supply power to the system, returning the
The POWER LED turns on when power is supplied again to
modules back to the system one by one.
the system after all modules, except for the power supply
The last module mounted immediately before the POWER
module, were removed.
LED turned off fails.
The connection direction of the extension cable is improper.
Connect the extension cable properly.
(The connection direction is OUT-OUT.)
AC power is not supplied to the power supply module. Supply AC power to the power supply module.
For the module that caused a problem, please consult your local Mitsubishi service representative.
280
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
15.1.5 When the RUN LED does not turn on
Check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
The RUN LED of the CPU module flickers. Reset the CPU module or set it to RUN from STOP.
Check the error details by the programming tool.
The ERR. LED of the CPU module is on or flickering.
( Page 282, Section 15.2)
The module is possibly affected by excessive noise. Take
noise reduction measures. ( Page 651, Appendix 8)
The RUN LED turns on when the CPU module is reset and If the same problem frequently occurs even after the noise
set to RUN again. reduction measures are taken, the programmable controller
possibly has any defective part or poor connection.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
15.1.6 When the BOOT LED flickers
Turn off the programmable controller and remove the memory card. Turn the DIP switches SW2 and SW3 to ON.
When the BOOT LED turns on after power is resupplied, boot operation from the standard ROM starts. 15
If the BOOT LED does not turn on, the possible cause is the hardware failure of the CPU module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
15.1.5 When the RUN LED does not turn on
15.1 Visual Inspection
281
15.2 Checking the Error Details
Error causes and corrective actions can be checked by the programming tool.
If the connection cannot be established, check that the settings in the programming tool are correct.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
When the programming tool and the CPU module are connected via Ethernet, check the error details by Ethernet
diagnostics and remove the error cause. ( Page 284, Section 15.2 (3))
(1) PLC diagnostics
When the ERR. LED turns on or flickers, check the error details in the PLC diagnostics of the programming tool
and remove the error cause.
[Diagnostics] [PLC Diagnostics]
For details on the PLC diagnostics, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
282
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) Module detailed information
When an error occurs in any intelligent function module, check the error details in System monitor of the
programming tool and remove the error cause.
[Diagnostics] [PLC Diagnostics]
1. Select the error module in "Main Base" and click the
button.
2. Detailed information of the selected module is
displayed. 15
15.2 Checking the Error Details
For details on the module detailed information, refer to the following.
User's manual for the intelligent function module used
283
(3) Ethernet diagnostics
Using the diagnostics function of the programming tool, the module status, parameter settings, communication
status, and error history of the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU can be checked.
[Diagnostics] [Ethernet Diagnostics]
For details on the Ethernet diagnostics, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
The MELSOFT connection where User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is used is regarded as one connection in "Status of Each
Connection".
Therefore, even if multiple connections are used, the diagnostics result is displayed as one connection.
284
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors
If the module has a functional problem, check the following items and perform troubleshooting. If the ERR. LED is on
or flickering, remove the error cause by the programming tool. ( Page 282, Section 15.2)
Function Error status Reference
Data cannot be written to the CPU module. Page 286, Section 15.3.1 (1)
Write to PLC
The program is rewritten unintentionally. Page 286, Section 15.3.1 (2)
Read from PLC Data cannot be read from the CPU module. Page 286, Section 15.3.1 (3)
A boot operation cannot be performed from
Boot operation Page 287, Section 15.3.2
a memory card or SD memory card.
UNIT VERIFY ERR. has occurred. Page 288, Section 15.3.3 (1)
Error caused by hardware
CONTROL BUS ERR. has occurred. Page 288, Section 15.3.3 (2)
Direct connection is not possible. Page 289, Section 15.3.4 (1)
Ethernet communication is not possible
when using a method other than direct Page 290, Section 15.3.4 (2)
Ethernet communication connection.
Ethernet communication is not possible with
Page 290, Section 15.3.4 (3)
15
the connected device.
Clock data cannot be set by SNTP. Page 292, Section 15.3.4 (4)
The connected device cannot receive data. Page 294, Section 15.3.5 (1)
Socket communication function Data cannot be received. Page 294, Section 15.3.5 (2)
The open processing is not completed. Page 294, Section 15.3.5 (3)
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors
An error has occurred during MC protocol
MC protocol function Page 295, Section 15.3.6
communication.
"OPERATION ERROR" has occurred at
execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR and Page 298, Section 15.3.10 (1)
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions.
Errors caused by SFC program instruction
Comments cannot be read at execution of
the S(P).SFCSCOMR and Page 298, Section 15.3.10 (2)
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions.
The LEDs of the output module do not turn
Page 299, Section 15.3.11 (1)
on.
I/O module I/O module does not operate normally. Page 299, Section 15.3.11 (2)
Building Block I/O Module User's
Wiring troubles
Manual
The LIFE OUT terminal has turned off
Page 300, Section 15.3.12 (1)
Power supply module (opened).
The ERR. terminal has turned off (opened). Page 300, Section 15.3.12 (2)
An error has occurred while the CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic function Field Network Basic function was being
Reference Manual
used.
285
15.3.1 Write to PLC and Read from PLC
(1) Write to PLC
If data cannot be written from the programming tool to the CPU module, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
When the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, or
Turn the DIP switch SW1 to OFF.
Redundant CPU are used, the DIP switch SW1 is on.
The data is password-protected. Unlock the password with the programming tool.
The write-target memory card or SD memory card is write-
Cancel the protection.
protected.
The write-target memory card or SD memory card has not
Format the card.
been formatted.
The size of data to be written is larger than the memory • Secure sufficient free space in the memory.
capacity. • Organize the target memory.
If data cannot be written to the CPU module even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a hardware
failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
(2) The program is rewritten unintentionally
The CPU module possibly performs boot operation. Perform Read from PLC with the programming tool and
check the boot file setting.
When boot operation is not performed, the possible cause is a hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
For details on the boot operation, refer to the following.
User's manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) for the CPU module used
(3) Read from PLC
If data cannot be read from the CPU module to the programming tool, check if the target memory has been
correctly set.
After making sure that the target memory has been correctly set, reset the CPU module, and then read data from
the CPU module again.
When the RS-232 is used for connection, reduce transmission speed, and read data from the CPU module again.
If data cannot be read from the CPU module even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a
hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
286
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
15.3.2 Boot operation
If boot operation cannot be performed from the memory card or SD memory card, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
An error has occurred in the CPU module. Remove the error cause. ( Page 282, Section 15.2)
When the High performance model QCPU, Process CPU, or
Specify the valid parameter drives with the DIP switches
Redundant CPU are used, the DIP switches do not specify
SW2 and SW3.
the valid parameter drives.
A file is not set with parameter boot file setup.
Set the file.
A file is not set with parameter program setup.
A file to be used has not been stored in the memory card or
Store the file to be used.
SD memory card.
If a boot operation cannot be performed even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
15
15.3.2 Boot operation
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors
287
15.3.3 Errors caused by hardware
(1) UNIT VERIFY ERR. has occurred
If UNIT VERIFY ERR. has occurred, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
The module was attached or detached during operation, or
Mount the module properly and reset the CPU module.
improperly mounted.
When the extension base unit is used, the extension cable is Connect the extension cable properly and reset the CPU
improperly connected. module.
If UNIT VERIFY ERR. occurs even after taking the above actions, perform the following actions sequentially for
recovery to normal operation.
• Check the target slot No. in the common information (SD5) of the error code, and replace the corresponding
module.
• Replace the CPU module.
• Replace the base unit.
If UNIT VERIFY ERR. occurs even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
(2) CONTROL BUS ERR. has occurred
If CONTROL BUS ERR. has occurred, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
The module is improperly mounted. Mount the module properly and reset the CPU module.
When the extension base unit is used, the extension
Connect the extension cable properly and reset the CPU module.
cable is improperly connected.
Noise affects the module. Take noise reduction measures. ( Page 651, Appendix 8)
If CONTROL BUS ERR. occurs even after taking the above actions, perform the following actions sequentially for
recovery to normal operation.
• Check the target slot No. in the common information (SD5) of the error code, and replace the corresponding
module.
• Replace the CPU module.
• Replace the base unit.
If CONTROL BUS ERR. occurs even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
288
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
15.3.4 Ethernet communication
(1) Direct connection is not possible
If Ethernet communication is not possible through direct connection with the programming tool, check the
following items.
Check item Corrective action
The CPU module is not directly connected to the Directly connect the CPU module to the programming tool
programming tool with a single cable. with a single cable.*1
The setting on the connected device (personal computer) is
incorrect.
• Ethernet port setting Correct the setting on the connected device.
• Firewall setting
• Communication setting of security software
In the Transfer Setup setting of the programming tool,
"Ethernet Port Direct Connection" is not selected for the PLC Correct the Transfer setup setting.
side I/F PLC Module.
When parameters are read after switching to USB
connection, "Disable direct connection to MELSOFT" is Correct the parameter.
selected in the Built-in Ethernet port setting. 15
In "Status of Each Connection" of "Ethernet Diagnostics",
MELSOFT Direct Connection is set in forced deactivation Disable the forced deactivation.
status.
In the "Error History" of "Ethernet Diagnostics", an error for
Take corrective actions according to the error code.
direct connection is detected.
• Adjust the value of communication time check period or
Communication can be performed by increasing the value of
number of retries.
15.3.4 Ethernet communication
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors
communication time check period or number of retries in the
• Check the condition of the cables, connected device
detailed host station setting of "Transfer Setup"
(personal computer), and CPU module.
The connected device (personal computer) does not support
Connect a hub.
the direct connection.
If Ethernet communication cannot be performed even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a
hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
*1 When two or more Ethernet ports are enabled in the network connections setting on the personal computer,
communication by direct connection is not possible. In the setting, leave only one Ethernet port enabled for direct
connection and disable other Ethernet ports.
289
(2) Ethernet communication is not possible when using a method other than
direct connection
If Ethernet communication is not possible in a method other than direct connection with the programming tool,
check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
• Check the duplicate IP addresses using the Find CPU
function, and correct the IP addresses.
• Correct the IP address of the programming tool (personal
computer) so that it differs from the address of the CPU
IP addresses are overlapping. module.
• Disconnect the device from the network, and ping the IP
address of the disconnected device. If there is any
response, the same IP address is used. Correct the IP
address.
The specified protocol is incorrect.
"Ethernet Port Direct Connection" is selected. Correct the Transfer Setup setting.
The specified IP address or host name is incorrect.
If Ethernet communication cannot be performed even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a
failure of the connected device.
Check the items described in Page 290, Section 15.3.4 (3).
(3) Ethernet communication is not possible with the connected device
If Ethernet communication is not possible with the connected device, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
An error has occurred in a hub. Remove the error from the hub.*1
The setting on the connected device (personal computer) is
incorrect.
• IP address setting
Correct the setting on the connected device.
• Ethernet port setting
• Firewall setting
• Communication setting of security software
The SD/RD LED of the CPU module is not flickering during
Confirm the wiring.
communication.
• Correct the IP address of the connected device so that it
differs from the address of the CPU module.
• Disconnect the device from the network, and ping the IP
IP addresses are overlapping.
address of the disconnected device. If there is any
response, the same IP address is used. Correct the IP
address.
The ERR. LED turns on or flickers when power is resupplied. Remove the error cause. ( Page 282, Section 15.2)
When parameters are read after switching to USB
Correct the parameter.
connection, the Built-in Ethernet Port Setting is incorrect.
In "Status of Each Connection" of "Ethernet Diagnostics",
MELSOFT Direct Connection is set to the forced deactivation Disable the forced deactivation.
status.
In the "Error History" of "Ethernet Diagnostics", an error for
Take corrective actions according to the error code.
direct connection is detected.
290
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
Check item Corrective action
The number of connections from the connected device
(personal computer) exceeds the number of "MELSOFT Keep the number of connections of the connected device
connection" of the open setting (each number of connections (personal computer) within the number in the open setting.
of TCP and UDP).
The TCP/IP connection is left open.
Perform the following:
• Wait for about one minute, and retry after the connection is
A device was powered off with the TCP/IP connection open.
closed by the alive check function of the CPU module.
• Increase the number of connections in the setting to
reserve a spare connection.
• Adjust the value of communication time check period or
Communication can be performed by increasing the value of
number of retries.
communication time check period or number of retries in the
• Check the condition of the cables, connected device
detailed host station setting of "Transfer Setup".
(personal computer), and CPU module.
Any of the following settings is incorrect on the CPU module
or connected device side.
• Network address
• Default router IP address Correct the setting.
• Subnet mask pattern
• Router IP address
• Subnet mask
When a router is used, an error has occurred in the router. Remove the error from the router. 15
When a router is used, the setting on the router is incorrect. Correct the setting on the router.
Any device on the network such as the CPU module,
connected device (personal computer), hub, or router is
Reset the devices on the network.*2
replaced. (When replaced with the device of the same IP
address)
Communication is possible after replacement of the hub or The hub or router may be faulty.
15.3.4 Ethernet communication
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors
router. Replace the hub or router.
If Ethernet communication cannot be performed even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a
hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
*1 If the switching hub is reconnected to the personal computer or CPU module or is replaced with another, it may take time
to read the MAC addresses. In that case, retry after a little while, or resupply power to the hub. If a dummy UDP
message is sent by the socket communication function, the switching hub may learn the MAC addresses again.
*2 Devices on the Ethernet have the "ARP cache", which is the correspondence table of the IP address and MAC address.
When a device on the network is replaced with the device of the same IP address, their MAC addresses stored in each
"ARP cache" become inconsistent, which may cause abnormal communication.
The "ARP cache" is updated by resetting the device or after a certain period of time. The time required for updating
differs depending on devices.
291
(4) Clock data cannot be set by SNTP
If the clock data cannot be set by SNTP, refer to the following.
Check item Corrective action
Check the following on the time setting function.
• SNTP is set to be used.
The time setting function does not operate. (Check "Ethernet
• Input of the SNTP server IP address is correct.
Diagnostics" or the special register (SD1270).)
• Input of each executing condition is correct.
• Input of a time zone is correct.
The time setting is failed. (Check "Ethernet Diagnostics" or • Make sure the CPU parameter is normal.
the special register (SD1270).) • Make sure the specified SNTP server operates normally.
For the multiple CPU system: CPU module for which the time
Set the time for the CPU module No. 1.
is set is not No. 1.
The CPU module parameter is not normal. Correct the parameter.
The time is overwritten from a program or another device. Remove overwriting from a program or another device.
If the clock data cannot be set by SNTP even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a failure of the
connected device.
Check the items described in Page 290, Section 15.3.4 (3).
292
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
(5) Communication is slow or unstable
If communication is slow or unstable, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
Correct the duplicate IP address. The duplicate IP addresses
are checked in the following way.
• Detect the IP address using the Find CPU function.
IP addresses are duplicate.
• Remove the connected device from the network, and
perform PING with the IP address of the removed device.
If any device responds, IP addresses are duplicate.
The number of connections of UDP exceeds the number set
Keep the number of connections of UDP within the number
to "UDP" of the open setting (each number of connections of
of the open setting.
MELSOFT connection and the MC protocol).
Communication is based on UDP. Perform communication on TCP.
Retry communication.
Communication is not retried.
Increase the number of retries.
The hub, router, or cable has an error. Replace the hub, router, or cable.
• Take noise reduction measures.
Communication of devices other than the CPU module is not
• Check the amount of network traffic. If the traffic causes
stable.
instability, reduce the amount of traffic.
15
To reduce the Ethernet communication load of the CPU
module, increase the service processing time in the service
processing setting of the PC parameter.
Reduce the broadcast data volume on the network.
Many of unnecessary broadcast data are received. • Identify a broadcasting device, and restrict the broadcast
(The broadcast data volume can be checked in "Connection data volume. (Devices such as personal computers or
Status" in Ethernet diagnostics) routers.)
15.3.4 Ethernet communication
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors
• Use filtering of broadcast data with a router to prevent the
CPU module from receiving them.
• Separate the network with frequent broadcasts from the
network of the CPU module.
• Increase the service processing time in the service
processing setting of the PLC parameter.
The Ethernet communication load of the CPU module is
• Reduce the number of connected devices.
high.
• Reduce the communication frequency per connection and
data volume.
Reduce the frequency and process time of the interrupt
The interrupt program is used.
program.
293
15.3.5 Socket communication function
For the details on the socket communication function, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
(1) The connected device cannot receive data
If data is not delivered to the target device, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
The connection has not been opened yet.
Wait until the connection is completed.
(Check the corresponding bit in SD1282.)
An error is detected in Ethernet diagnostics. Remove the error cause.
A parameter or a setting data for SOCOPEN is incorrect. Correct the parameter or setting data.
Correct the execution condition, or remove the error cause
The SOCSND instruction is not executed. (Check the start
that is identified by the error code in the completion status
contact and error completion device.)
area of the SOCSND instruction.
The connected device has an error. Correct the error of the connected device.
(2) Data cannot be received
If the CPU cannot receive data from the connected device, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
The connection has not been opened yet.
Wait until the connection is completed.
(Check the corresponding bit in SD1282.)
An error is detected in Ethernet diagnostics. Remove the error cause.
A parameter or a setting data for SOCOPEN is incorrect. Correct the parameter or setting data.
Correct the execution condition, or remove the error cause
The SOCRCV instruction was not executed. (Check the start
that is identified by the error code in the completion status
contact and error completion device.)
area of the SOCOPEN instruction.
The connected device has an error. Correct the error of the connected device.
(3) The open processing is not completed
If the open processing is not completed, check the following items.
(a) Passive open
Check item Corrective action
The parameter is incorrect. Correct the parameter.
The connected device has an error. Correct the error of the connected device.
(b) Active open
Check item Corrective action
An error is detected in Ethernet diagnostics. Remove the error cause.
A parameter or a setting data for SOCOPEN is incorrect. Correct the parameter or setting data.
Correct the execution condition, or remove the error cause
The SOCRCV instruction was not executed.
that is identified by the error code in the completion status
(Check the start contact and error completion device.)
area of the SOCRCV instruction.
The connected device has an error. Correct the error of the connected device.
294
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
15.3.6 MC protocol function
If an error occurs during MC protocol communication, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
The connected device does not send a command. Send a command to the CPU module.
Make sure the following:
• The communication protocol (TCP/IP) is consistent
between the CPU module and the target device.
• The command is sent to the port number specified in the
open setting of the CPU module.
• The sent command matches with the Communication data
code setting (binary/ASCII).
• The value of the sent sub-header is normal.
No response is returned from the device to which the
• Data of the request data length is sent.
command is sent.
• Requests from the multiple connected devices are
simultaneously sent to the single MC protocol port
specified in the open setting.
If no response is returned from the connected device even
though all items mentioned above are normal,
communication with the connected device is possibly failed.
15
Check the items described in Page 290, Section
15.3.4 (3).
The end code of the response is not "0". According to the end code or error code, repair the error part.
The IP address specified in the command is not correct. Correct the IP address.
Correct the command format.
Command format specifications such as command type,
( MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference
device, or address are not correct.
Manual)
15.3.6 MC protocol function
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors
Provide the processing for receiving remaining data when
the actual data is less than the response data length of the
The length of the data to be received and the volume of receive message.*1
actually received data are not the same when using TCP. When the operation above is already performed, the possible
cause is a hardware failure. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
If an error occurs during MC protocol communication even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a
hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
*1 Two or more receive instructions may need to be executed to read the data sent by one send instruction since TCP does
not have architecture for specifying data boundaries.
For this reason, the received data size must be checked when receiving, and receive the remaining data if received data
size is insufficient.
For details, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
295
15.3.7 Predefined protocol function
(1) Data communication is not possible
If data communication through the predefined protocol function is not possible, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
Perform OPEN processing of the connection with the
The relevant connection has not been opened.
external device.
In "Open Settings" for "Built-in Ethernet port setting" in PLC
parameter, "Predefined protocol" is not selected for "Open Set the "Open system" to "Predefined protocol".
system".
After the protocol setting is written, turn off and on the power,
SM1354 (Predefined protocol ready) is not turned on.
reset, or check the protocol setting.
Check the execution result in the completion status area of
Execution instruction for the predefined protocol is
the predefined protocol execution instruction and eliminate
completed with an error.
the error cause.
In the control data of the predefined protocol execution
Specify the execution protocol number in the control data of
instruction, the execution protocol number is not specified, or
the predefined protocol execution instruction.
the specified protocol number is outside the range.
Communication status of the external device is abnormal. Correct the error of the external device.
(2) Reading or writing of the protocol setting is not possible.
If reading or writing of the protocol setting is not possible, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
Check whether the protocol setting is written to the target
drive.
(Reading) If the value for SD1359 to SD1362 (Predefined protocol
The protocol setting data cannot be read. setting data error information) is 0 and SD1363 (Number of
protocols registered) is 0, protocol setting has not been
written to the target drive.
Check that the written protocol setting is correct.
(Writing) Check SD1359 to SD1362 (Predefined protocol setting data
At power-on, reset or protocol setting check after the protocol error information) and correct the protocol where the protocol
setting is written to the CPU module, the protocol setting setting data error was detected (protocol number, packet
data error (error code) occurs. number, component number). After correction, write the
protocol setting again.
If communication is not possible even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
296
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
15.3.8 Transmission from an external device
If no response is returned from an external device, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
• Adjust the service processing time in parameter.
• Adjust the value of communication time check period or
More than one external device is communicating with the
number of retries.
CPU module.
• Check the condition of the cables, connected device
(personal computer), and CPU module.
Refer to the troubleshooting section of the following manual.
The data logging function is used. QnUDVCPU/LCPU User's Manual (Data Logging
Function)
If communication cannot be performed even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
15.3.9 Operating status of the CPU module
15
If it takes time for the CPU module to switch the operating status, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
Refer to the troubleshooting section of the following manual.
The data logging function is used. QnUDVCPU/LCPU User's Manual (Data Logging
Function)
15.3.8 Transmission from an external device
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors
If communication cannot be performed even after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
297
15.3.10 Errors caused by SFC program instruction
(1) "OPERATION ERROR" has occurred at execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR and
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions
Check that the values of the following instruction devices are within the range.
• n1 (Block No.)
• n2 (Number of reading comments)
• n3 (Number of reading comments per scan)
When the values of the instruction devices shown above are within the range, set the comment file stored in the
memory other than ATA card*1 as "Comment file used in a command".
*1 Program memory, Standard ROM, SRAM card and Flash card.
(2) Comments cannot be read at execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR and
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions
Check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
• Run the SFC program.
The SFC program has not been run. (Check the special relay
• Set the program execution type of the SFC program to
(SM331).)
"SCAN".
• When performing the comment file setting with "Comment
The comment file to be used for instructions is not set with
file used in a command", correct the parameter.
the "Comment file used in a command" setting of the
• When performing the comment file setting with the
parameter or with the QCDSET instruction.
QCDSET instruction, execute the QCDSET instruction.
Though the "Comment file used in a command" setting of the
parameter is set to "Use the same file name as the program", Create a comment file which has the same name as the SFC
the file which has the same name as the SFC program file program file and store it in the target memory.
does not exist in the target memory.
Correct the block specified with the instruction or review the
executing condition of instruction.
The block specified with the S(P).SFCSCOMR and
(The comment of the active step or the comment of transfer
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions is not activated.
condition associating with the active step cannot be read,
since the block specified with the instruction is not activated.)
Review the executing condition of instruction.
(The comment of the active step or the comment of transfer
An activated step does not exist in the block specified with
condition associating with the active step cannot be read,
the S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions.
since no activated step exists in the block specified with the
instruction.)
298
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
15.3.11 I/O module
(1) The LEDs of the output module do not turn on
When the LEDs of the output module or output side of the I/O combined module do not turn on, check the
following items.
Check item Corrective action
The corresponding output is OFF when monitored with the
Reexamine the program.
programming tool.
The output number mismatches the module when checked
Change the output number.
with System monitor of the programming tool.
The LED does not turn on even though the output of another
The CPU module, base unit, or extension cable has a
I/O module is forcibly turned on.
hardware error.
The LED does not turn on even when it is forcibly turned on
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
after the module is replaced with another I/O module.
The LED turns on when it is forcibly turned on after the The module has a hardware failure.
module is replaced with another I/O module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
(2) Output load does not turn on
When the output load of the output module or I/O combined module does not turn on, check the following items.
15
Check item Corrective action
Check the items described in Page 299, Section
The LED corresponding to the module is not on.
15.3.11 (1).
Check the power supply load wiring and recover the power
Voltage for the power supply load is not added.
supply.
15.3.11 I/O module
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors
Voltage among the output COM terminals is 0V. Check the load wire and load, and recover the power supply.
The inrush current has exceeded the specified value when Change the output relay number and keep the load
the maximum number of outputs turns on simultaneously. maximum simultaneous on current within the specified value.
The module normally operates when replaced with another The module has a hardware failure.
I/O module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
299
15.3.12 Power supply module
(1) The LIFE OUT terminal has turned off (opened)
If the LIFE OUT terminal turns off at power-on or during operation of the programmable controller, check the LED
status of the power supply module.
• LED indication and module status during operation ( Page 219, Section 7.2.5)
• Troubleshooting ( Page 277, Section 15.1)
(2) The ERR. terminal has turned off (opened)
If the ERR. terminal turns off at power-on or during operation of the programmable controller, check the following
items.
Check item Corrective action
The ERR. LED of the CPU module flickers. Remove the error cause. ( Page 282, Section 15.2)
Power of proper voltage is not supplied. Supply power of proper voltage.
The POWER LED does not turn on in green even after the
power supply module are removed and mounted to the
The power supply module is failed.
normal base unit.
Replace the power supply module with a normal one.
(Do not mount any modules other than the power supply
module.)
Reexamine the system configuration so that the internal
The internal current consumption for the entire system
current consumption does not exceed the rated output
exceeds the rated output current of the power supply
current.
module.
( Page 674, Appendix 10)
If the ERR. terminal turns off after taking the above actions, the possible cause is a hardware failure.
Check the system operation in the order of size, the smallest system first. For the module that does not operate,
please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
If a CPU module stop error occurs during use of two redundant power supply modules, the error is output from the ERR.
terminals of the two redundant power supply modules.
For details on the ERR. terminals, refer to the following.
• Power supply module specifications ( Page 196, Section 7.2)
• Wiring to power supply module ( Page 103, Section 4.8.1)
300
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
(a) Errors that can be detected by the ERR. terminal
The following shows the errors that can be detected by the ERR. terminal of the power supply module in a
single power supply system/redundant power supply system.
• Single power supply system
CPU module*1
Base unit Basic model QCPU,
Redundant
High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU
CPU
Universal model QCPU
Main base unit (Q3B)
AC power not input, power supply module fuse blown and CPU module stop error (including
Multiple CPU high speed
reset) can be detected.
main base unit (Q3DB)
(Cannot be
Extension base unit (Q6B) Errors cannot be detected (always off).
added)
AC power not input, power supply module fuse blown
Slim type main base unit
and CPU module stop error (including reset) can be (cannot be combined)
(Q3SB)
detected.
*1 Excluding the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU (without ERR. terminal).
• Redundant power supply system 15
CPU module*1
Base unit Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU,
Redundant CPU
Process CPU, Universal model QCPU
Redundant power main AC power not input, power supply module fuse blown, CPU module stop error (including
base unit (Q3RB) reset), and redundant power supply module failure can be detected.
AC power not input, power supply module fuse blown,
Redundant power extension Errors cannot be detected
15.3.12 Power supply module
15.3 Checking for Functional Errors
CPU module stop error (including reset), and redundant
base unit (Q6RB) (always off).*2
power supply module failure can be detected.
Redundant type extension Errors cannot be detected
(cannot be combined)
base unit (Q6WRB) (always off).
*1 Excluding the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU (without ERR. terminal).
*2 Available only for the 2nd extension stage or later in a redundant system where the Redundant CPU whose serial
number (first five digits) is "09012" or later is used.
Remark
In the redundant power supply system, the failure of the redundant power supply module can also be detected by using the
programming tool. Note 15.1, Note 15.2 Note 15.1Note 15.2
• Detection by PLC diagnostics
• Detection by System monitor
For details on the PLC diagnostics and System monitor, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
Note 15.1 Basic
Failure of redundant power supply module cannot be detected by the Basic model QCPU.
High
Note 15.2 performance Process
When using the High Performance QCPU or Process CPU, check the versions of the CPU module and programming tool
used.
High Performance model QCPU ( Page 639, Appendix 6.2)
Process CPU ( Page 644, Appendix 6.4)
301
15.4 Saving Data
By saving the following data immediately after trouble arises, the data can be useful for analyzing the error cause.
• Programs and parameters
• Device data and buffer memory data
• System configuration data
• Error history
(1) Saving programs and parameters
The following describes a procedure for saving data.
[Online] [Read from PLC]
1. Click the button.
2. Click the button to execute Read from
PLC.
302
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) Saving device data and buffer memory data
The following describes a procedure for saving data.
[Online] [Read from PLC]
1. Select "Device Memory".
2. Click the button.
3. Fill in the "Device Data Name" field and select the 15
checkboxes of devices to be saved.
4. Enter the start I/O number in the "Buffer Memory
Start Address" field.
15.4 Saving Data
5. Click the button, and execute Read from
PLC.
When using a file register, also save file register data.
303
(3) Saving system configuration data
The following describes a procedure for saving data.
[Diagnostics] [System Monitor]
1. Click the button.
2. Click the button.
304
CHAPTER 15 TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) Saving error history
The following describes a procedure for saving data.
[Diagnostics] [System Monitor]
1. Click the button.
2. Click the button.
15
15.4 Saving Data
305
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Error Codes
When an error occurs at power-on, at switching from STOP to RUN or during RUN, the CPU module indicates the
error (LED indication and a message on a display device) by the self-diagnostic function and stores the error
information in the special relay (SM) and special register (SD).
When an error occurs at communication request from a programming tool, intelligent function module, or network
system to the CPU module, the CPU module returns the error code (4000H to 4FFFH) to the request source.
This section describes errors that may occur in the CPU module and corrective actions for the errors.
(1) How to read error code lists
The following describes how to read Appendix 1.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999) to Appendix 1.9 Error code list
(7000 to 10000).
Each list contains errors in QCPU and LCPU.
(a) Error code, common information, and individual information
The error code is stored in SD0. The common information is stored in SD5 to SD15. The individual information
is stored in SD16 to SD26.
(b) Corresponding CPU
• QCPU: All the Q series CPU modules
• Q00J/Q00/Q01: Basic model QCPU
• Qn(H): High Performance model QCPU
• QnPH: Process CPU
• QnPRH: Redundant CPU
• QnU: Universal model QCPU
• QnUDV: High-speed Universal model QCPU
• Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U: Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU
• LCPU: All the L series CPU modules
• CPU module model: Only the specified model (Example: Q02UCPU, L26CPU-BT)
306
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.1 Error codes
A
There are two types of errors: errors detected by the self-diagnostic function of the CPU module and errors detected
during communication with the CPU module. The following table shows the relationship between the error detection
pattern, error location, and error code.
Error detection
Error location Error code Reference
pattern
By the self-diagnostic
function of the CPU CPU module 1000 to 10000*1*2 Page 308, Appendix 1.3 to Page 402, Appendix 1.9
module
CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH Page 411, Appendix 1.11
Serial communication
7000H to 7FFFH User's manuals for the serial communication module, etc.
module, etc.
CC-Link (including the built-in
B000H to BFFFH User's manual of the CC-Link system master/local module
CC-Link function)
• Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual
Ethernet (including the built-
During C000H to CFBFH • QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
in Ethernet function)
communication with • MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-in Ethernet Function)
the CPU module CC-Link IE Field Network
CFC0H to CFFFH Page 411, Appendix 1.11
Basic
CC-Link IE Field Network D000H to DFFFH User's manual of the CC-Link IE Field Network module
CC-Link IE Controller
E000H to EFFFH • CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
Network
• Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual
MELSECNET/H F000H to FFFFH
• For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual
*1 Error codes are classified into three levels.
• Minor error: Errors that allow a CPU module to continue its operation, such as a battery error
• Moderate error: Errors that may cause a CPU module to stop its operation, such as a WDT error (Error code:
1300 to 10000)
Appendix 1.1 Error codes
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Major error: Errors that may cause a CPU module to stop its operation, such as a RAM error (Error code: 1000 to
1299)
Whether the CPU module continues or stops its operation can be checked in the CPU Status column of the Error code
list (Page 308, Appendix 1.3 to Page 402, Appendix 1.9).
*2 If an error code that is not described in the list is detected, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
Appendix 1.2 Reading error codes
Error codes can be read using a programming tool. For details on the operating method, refer to the following.
Operating manual for the programming tool used
307
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
The following table shows the error messages, the error contents and causes, and the corrective actions for the error
codes (1000 to 1999).
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information
QCPU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: Failure information
• Take noise reduction measures.
(QnUDVCPU only)
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
■Diagnostic timing
• Always the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1000
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
[CPU UNIT DOWN] module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
Mitsubishi representative.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information LCPU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: Failure information
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Hardware failure
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• The devices outside the range was accessed
the same error code is displayed again, the
even though device checks are prohibited
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
(SM237 is on). (This error occurs only when any
module. Please consult your local
of the BMOV, FMOV, or DFMOV instructions is QCPU
Mitsubishi representative.
executed. (Universal model QCPU only))
• Check the devices specified by BMOV,
■Collateral information
FMOV, and DFMOV instructions and
• Common information: -
correct the device settings. (Universal
• Individual information: Failure information
model QCPU only)
(QnUDVCPU only)
RUN: Off
■Diagnostic timing
• Always ERR.:Flashing
1001
[CPU UNIT DOWN] CPU Status:Stop
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Hardware failure
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• The devices outside the range was accessed
the same error code is displayed again, the
even though device checks are prohibited
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
(SM237 is on). (This error occurs only when any
module. Please consult your local LCPU
of the BMOV, FMOV, or DFMOV instruction is
Mitsubishi representative.
executed.)
• Check the devices specified by BMOV,
■Collateral information
FMOV, and DFMOV instructions and
• Common information: -
correct the device settings.
• Individual information: Failure information
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
308
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MAIN CPU DOWN] A
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information
QCPU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: Failure information
• Take noise reduction measures.
(QnUDVCPU only)
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
■Diagnostic timing
• Always the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1002
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
[CPU UNIT DOWN] module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
Mitsubishi representative.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information LCPU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: Failure information
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information
QCPU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: Failure information
• Take noise reduction measures.
(QnUDVCPU only)
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
■Diagnostic timing
• Always the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1003
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
[CPU UNIT DOWN] module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
Mitsubishi representative.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information LCPU
• Common information: -
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Individual information: Failure information
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
QCPU (except
■Collateral information
QnUDV)
• Common information: -
• Individual information: - • Take noise reduction measures.
■Diagnostic timing • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
• Always the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1004
[CPU UNIT DOWN] cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
Runaway or failure of the CPU module module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes Mitsubishi representative.
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information LCPU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: Failure information
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
309
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• Hardware failure
the same error code is displayed again, the QCPU (except
■Collateral information
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU QnUDV)
• Common information: -
module. Please consult your local
• Individual information: -
Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Boot operation was performed in the transfer
destination without formatting. RUN: Off
Before performing boot operation by the Qn(H)
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1005 parameter, select "Clear program memory" to QnPH
• Common information: -
clear the program memory. QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on
[CPU UNIT DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• Hardware failure
the same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information LCPU
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: -
module. Please consult your local
• Individual information: Failure information
Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information
QCPU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: Failure information
• Take noise reduction measures.
(QnUDVCPU only)
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
■Diagnostic timing
• Always the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1006
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
[CPU UNIT DOWN] module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
Mitsubishi representative.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information LCPU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: Failure information
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
• Hardware failure Qn(H)
the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1007 ■Collateral information QnPH
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: - QnPRH
module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes • Take noise reduction measures.
• Hardware failure • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off Qn(H)
■Collateral information the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing QnPH
1008
• Common information: - cause is a hardware failure of the CPU QnPRH
• Individual information: Failure information module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop QnUDV
(QnUDVCPU only) Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
310
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MAIN CPU DOWN] A
• The voltage waveform that is outside the
specification is applied to the power supply
module, and an error is detected.
• A failure was detected on the power supply • Correct the voltage waveform applied to
module, CPU module, main base unit, extension the power supply module.
base unit or extension cable. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If Q00J/Q00/Q01
• When using the redundant base unit, the the same error code is detected again, the Qn(H)
redundant power supply module failure in both cause is a failure of the power supply QnPH
systems and/or the redundant base unit failure module, CPU module, main base unit, QnPRH
are detected. extension base unit, or extension cable. QnU
■Collateral information Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• Common information: - representative. RUN: Off
• Individual information: Failure information ERR.:Flashing
1009
(QnUDVCPU only)
■Diagnostic timing CPU Status:Stop
• Always
[CPU UNIT DOWN]
• A failure was detected on the power supply
• Correct the voltage waveform applied to
module or CPU module.
the power supply module.
• The voltage waveform that is outside the
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
specification is applied to the power supply
the same error code is displayed again, the
module, and an error is detected. LCPU
cause is a hardware failure of the power
■Collateral information
supply module or CPU module. Please
• Common information: -
consult your local Mitsubishi
• Individual information: Failure information
representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[END NOT EXECUTE]
Entire program was executed without the
execution of an END instruction.
• When the END instruction is executed it is read • Take noise reduction measures.
as another instruction code, e.g. due to noise. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
• The END instruction has been changed to the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing QCPU
1010
another instruction code somehow. cause is a hardware failure of the CPU LCPU
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
■Collateral information module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: - Mitsubishi representative.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed
[SFCP. END ERROR]
The SFC program cannot be normally terminated
due to noise or other reason.
• The SFC program cannot be normally • Take noise reduction measures.
terminated due to noise or any similar cause. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off Q00J/Q00/Q01
• The SFC program cannot be normally the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing QnPH
1020
terminated for any other reason. cause is a hardware failure of the CPU QnU
■Collateral information module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop LCPU
• Common information: - Mitsubishi representative.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When SFC program is executed
311
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information
QnU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: Failure information
• Take noise reduction measures.
(QnUDVCPU only)
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
■Diagnostic timing
• Always the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1035
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
[CPU UNIT DOWN] module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
Mitsubishi representative.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Hardware failure
■Collateral information LCPU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: Failure information
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
• Hardware failure
the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing Q50UDEHCPU,
1036 ■Collateral information
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU Q100UDEHCPU
• Common information: -
module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[CPU UNIT DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module (built-in
I/O) • Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
• Hardware failure the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1040 LCPU
■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: - module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Failure information Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[CPU UNIT DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module (built-in
I/O) • Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
• Hardware failure the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1041 LCPU
■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: - module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Failure information Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[CPU UNIT DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module (built-in
I/O) • Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
• Hardware failure the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1042 LCPU
■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: - module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Failure information Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
• Hardware failure
the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1043 ■Collateral information QnUDV
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: -
module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Failure information
Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
312
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MAIN CPU DOWN] A
Runaway or failure of the CPU module
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
• Hardware failure
the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1044 ■Collateral information QnUDV
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: -
module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Failure information
Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[CPU UNIT DOWN]
(1) The module (built-in I/O or built-in CC-Link)
status differs from that obtained at power-on.
(2) Runaway or failure of the CPU module (built- • Take noise reduction measures.
in I/O, built-in CC-Link) • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1045 LCPU
• Hardware failure cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: - Mitsubishi representative.
• Individual information: Failure information
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[RAM ERROR]
The sequence program storing program memory
• Take noise reduction measures.
in the CPU module is faulty.
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
■Collateral information
the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing QCPU
1101 • Common information: -
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU LCPU
• Individual information: -
module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
Mitsubishi representative.
• At power-on/At reset/When an END instruction
executed
[RAM ERROR]
• The work area RAM in the CPU module is faulty.
• Take noise reduction measures.
• The standard RAM in the CPU module is faulty.
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
■Collateral information
the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing QCPU
1102 • Common information: -
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU LCPU
• Individual information: -
module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/When an END instruction Mitsubishi representative.
executed
[RAM ERROR]
The device memory in the CPU module is faulty.
■Collateral information
• Common information: - QCPU
• Individual information: - LCPU
■Diagnostic timing • Take noise reduction measures.
• At power-on/At reset/When an END instruction • When indexing is performed, check the
executed value of index register to see if it is within
RUN: Off
[RAM ERROR] the device range.
ERR.:Flashing
1103 • The device memory in the CPU module is faulty. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• The device out of range is accessed due to the same error code is displayed again, the
CPU Status:Stop
indexing, and the device for system is cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
overwritten. module. Please consult your local Qn(H)
■Collateral information Mitsubishi representative. QnPH
• Common information: - QnPRH
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/When an END instruction
executed
[RAM ERROR]
• Take noise reduction measures.
The address RAM in the CPU module is faulty.
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off Q00J/Q00/Q01
■Collateral information
the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
1104 • Common information: -
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU QnPH
• Individual information: -
module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop QnPRH
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset Mitsubishi representative.
313
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[RAM ERROR]
The CPU memory in the CPU module is faulty.
■Collateral information
Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Common information: -
QnU
• Individual information: -
• Take noise reduction measures.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1105 [RAM ERROR] cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
The CPU shared memory in the CPU module is
module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
faulty. Qn(H)
Mitsubishi representative.
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common information: - QnPRH
• Individual information: - QnU
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RAM ERROR] • Check the battery to see if it is dead or not.
The program memory was corrupted due to If dead, replace the battery.
battery exhaustion. • Take measures to reduce noise.
RUN: Off
■Collateral information • Format the program memory, write all files Qn(H)
ERR.:Flashing
1106 • Common information: - to the CPU module, and reset the module QnPH
• Individual information: - to run it again. If the same error code is QnPRH
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing displayed again, the cause is a hardware
• STOP RUN/When an END instruction failure of the CPU module. Please consult
executed your local Mitsubishi representative.
[RAM ERROR]
The work area RAM in the CPU module is faulty.
RUN: Off
■Collateral information The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
ERR.:Flashing
1107 • Common information: - module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
• Individual information: - representative.
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RAM ERROR]
The work area RAM in the CPU module is faulty.
RUN: Off
■Collateral information The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU Qn(H)
ERR.:Flashing
1108 • Common information: - module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPH
• Individual information: - representative. QnPRH
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RAM ERROR]
The work area RAM in the CPU module is faulty.
RUN: Off
■Collateral information The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU Qn(H)
ERR.:Flashing
1109 • Common information: - module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPH
• Individual information: - representative. QnPRH
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[TRK. CIR. ERROR]
A fault was detected by the initial check of the
tracking hardware. RUN: Off
The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1110 module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
• Common information: -
representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[TRK. CIR. ERROR]
A tracking hardware fault was detected.
RUN: Off
■Collateral information The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
ERR.:Flashing
1111 • Common information: - module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
• Individual information: - representative.
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
314
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[TRK. CIR. ERROR] A
• A tracking hardware fault was detected during
running.
• The tracking cable was disconnected and • Check that the tracking cable is connected
reinserted without the standby system being and start up the module. If the same error
powered off or reset. code is displayed again, the cause is a
• The tracking cable is not secured by the hardware failure of the tracking cable or RUN: Off
connector fixing screws. CPU module. Please consult your local ERR.:Flashing
1112 QnPRH
• The error occurred at a startup since the Mitsubishi representative.
redundant system startup procedure was not • Confirm the redundant system startup CPU Status:Stop
followed. procedure, and execute a startup again.
■Collateral information For details, refer to the QnPRHCPU User's
• Common information: - Manual (Redundant System).
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• During running
[TRK. CIR. ERROR]
• A tracking hardware fault was detected during
running.
• The tracking cable was disconnected and • Check that the tracking cable is connected
reinserted without the standby system being and start up the module. If the same error
powered off or reset. code is displayed again, the cause is a
• The tracking cable is not secured by the hardware failure of the tracking cable or RUN: Off
connector fixing screws. CPU module. Please consult your local ERR.:Flashing
1113 QnPRH
• The error occurred at a startup since the Mitsubishi representative.
redundant system startup procedure was not • Confirm the redundant system startup CPU Status:Stop
followed. procedure, and execute a startup again.
■Collateral information For details, refer to the QnPRHCPU User's
• Common information: - Manual (Redundant System).
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• During running
[TRK. CIR. ERROR]
A fault was detected by the initial check of the
tracking hardware. RUN: Off
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1115 module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
• Common information: -
representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[TRK. CIR. ERROR]
• A tracking hardware fault was detected during
running.
• The tracking cable was disconnected and • Check that the tracking cable is connected
reinserted without the standby system being and start up the module. If the same error
powered off or reset. code is displayed again, the cause is a
• The tracking cable is not secured by the hardware failure of the tracking cable or RUN: Off
connector fixing screws. CPU module. Please consult your local ERR.:Flashing
1116 QnPRH
• The error occurred at a startup since the Mitsubishi representative.
redundant system startup procedure was not • Confirm the redundant system startup CPU Status:Stop
followed. procedure, and execute a startup again.
■Collateral information For details, refer to the QnPRHCPU User's
• Common information: - Manual (Redundant System).
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• During running
[RAM ERROR]
The memory of the CPU module in the multiple • Take noise reduction measures.
CPU high speed transmission area is faulty. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
■Collateral information the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1150 QnU
• Common information: - cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Individual information: - module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing Mitsubishi representative.
• At power-on/At reset
315
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[RAM ERROR]
• Take noise reduction measures.
The program memory in the CPU module is
• Format the program memory, write all files
overwritten. RUN: Off
to the CPU module, and reset the module
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QnU
1160 to run it again. If the same error code is
• Common information: Program error location*5 LCPU
displayed again, the cause is a hardware
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
failure of the CPU module. Please consult
■Diagnostic timing
your local Mitsubishi representative.
• Always
[RAM ERROR]
The data of the device memory built in the CPU
module is overwritten. Take noise reduction measures. If the same RUN: Off
■Collateral information error code is displayed again, the cause is a ERR.:Flashing QnU
1161
• Common information: Program error location*5 hardware failure of the CPU module. Please LCPU
• Individual information: - consult your local Mitsubishi representative. CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
• Take noise reduction measures.
• For GX Works2, select "Transfer cache
[RAM ERROR] memory to program memory" in the
The program memory in the CPU module is Options window. For GX Developer, select
overwritten. "Online change T/C setting value change
RUN: Off
■Collateral information program memory transfer settings" in the
ERR.:Flashing QnU
1163 • Common information: - Options window.
LCPU
• Individual information: - • Format the program memory, write all files
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing to the CPU module, and reset the module
• When instruction executed ("Always" for to run it again. If the same error code is
QnUDVCPU) displayed again, the cause is a hardware
failure of the CPU module. Please consult
your local Mitsubishi representative.
[RAM ERROR]
The destruction of the data stored in the standard
QnU*6
RAM is detected. Take noise reduction measures. If the same RUN: Off
L26CPU
■Collateral information error code is displayed again, the cause is a ERR.:Flashing
1164 L26CPU-P
• Common information: - hardware failure of the CPU module. Please
L26CPU-BT
• Individual information: - consult your local Mitsubishi representative. CPU Status:Stop
L26CPU-PBT
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[RAM ERROR]
The internal memory in the CPU module is faulty.
Take noise reduction measures. If the same RUN: Off
■Collateral information
error code is displayed again, the cause is a ERR.:Flashing Q50UDEHCPU,
1166 • Common information: -
hardware failure of the CPU module. Please Q100UDEHCPU
• Individual information: -
consult your local Mitsubishi representative. CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[RAM ERROR]
The RAM of the CPU module (built-in I/O) is faulty.
Take noise reduction measures. If the same RUN: Off
■Collateral information
error code is displayed again, the cause is a ERR.:Flashing
1170 • Common information: - LCPU
hardware failure of the CPU module. Please
• Individual information: Failure information
consult your local Mitsubishi representative. CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RAM ERROR]
The RAM of the CPU module (built-in I/O) is faulty.
Take noise reduction measures. If the same RUN: Off
■Collateral information
error code is displayed again, the cause is a ERR.:Flashing
1171 • Common information: - LCPU
hardware failure of the CPU module. Please
• Individual information: Failure information
consult your local Mitsubishi representative. CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[RAM ERROR]
The RAM of the CPU module (built-in I/O) is faulty.
Take noise reduction measures. If the same RUN: Off
■Collateral information
error code is displayed again, the cause is a ERR.:Flashing
1172 • Common information: - LCPU
hardware failure of the CPU module. Please
• Individual information: Failure information
consult your local Mitsubishi representative. CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
316
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.] A
The operation circuit for index modification in the
CPU module does not operate normally. RUN: Off
The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
1200 module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• Common information: - LCPU
representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.]
The hardware (logic) in the CPU module does not
operate normally. RUN: Off
The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
1201 module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• Common information: - LCPU
representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.]
The operation circuit for sequence processing in
the CPU module does not operate normally. RUN: Off
The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
1202 module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• Common information: - LCPU
representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.]
The operation circuit for index modification in the
CPU module does not operate normally. RUN: Off
The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1203 module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
• Common information: -
representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.]
The hardware (logic) in the CPU module does not
operate normally. RUN: Off
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1204 module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
• Common information: -
representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.]
The operation circuit for sequence processing in
the CPU module does not operate normally. RUN: Off
The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1205 module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
• Common information: -
representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed
317
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• Check the FUSE. LED of each output
module, and replace the one whose LED is
on.
[FUSE BREAK OFF] • Read common information of the error
There is an output module with a blown fuse. using the programming tool to identify the
■Collateral information numeric value (module No.). Replace the
Qn(H)
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) fuse of the output module corresponding to
QnPH
[For Remote I/O network] the value. Or, monitor SD1300 to SD1331
QnPRH
Network No./Station No. using the programming tool to identify the
QnU
• Individual information: - module whose data bit is "1". Replace the
■Diagnostic timing fuse of the corresponding module.
• Always • When a GOT is bus-connected to the main
base unit or extension base unit, check the
connection status of the extension cable
and the grounding status of the GOT.
[FUSE BREAK OFF] RUN: Off/On
There is an output module with a blown fuse. ERR.:Flashing/On
Check the ERR. LED of each output module,
1300 ■Collateral information
and replace the one whose LED is on. (A
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) CPU Status:
blown fuse can be identified with the
[For Remote I/O network] Stop/Continue*1 Q00J/Q00/Q01
programming tool. Check SD130 to SD137 to
Network No./Station No.
ensure that the bit for the module with a
• Individual information: -
blown fuse is "1".)
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
• Check the FUSE. LED of each output
module, and replace the one whose LED is
[FUSE BREAK OFF]
on.
There is an output module with a blown fuse on
• Read common information of the error
the LA1S extension base unit.
using the programming tool to identify the
■Collateral information
numeric value (module No.). Replace the LCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
fuse of the output module corresponding to
• Individual information: -
the value. Or, monitor SD1300 to SD1331
■Diagnostic timing
using the programming tool to identify the
• Always
module whose data bit is "1". Replace the
fuse of the corresponding module.
[I/O INT. ERROR]
Although an interrupt request was detected, there
The cause is a hardware failure of any one of
is no interrupt factor. RUN: Off
the mounted modules. Check the mounted
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
modules and replace the faulty module. QCPU
• Common information: -
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• During interrupt
1310 [I/O INT. ERROR]
An interruption occurred although none of the Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
modules can issue an interruption (including an same error code is displayed again, the
RUN: Off
interruption from the built-in I/O). cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
ERR.:Flashing
■Collateral information module, I/O module, intelligent function LCPU
• Common information: - module, END cover, branch module, or
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - extension module. Please consult your local
■Diagnostic timing Mitsubishi representative.
• During interrupt
318
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• Correct the interrupt pointer setting in the A
PLC System tab of "PLC Parameter".
• Take measures not to issue an interruption
from the modules where the interrupt
pointer setting is not configured in the PLC Q00J/Q00/Q01
System tab of "PLC Parameter". QnPRH
• Correct the interrupt setting of the network QnU
parameter.
• Correct the interrupt setting of the
intelligent function module buffer memory.
[I/O INT. ERROR] • Correct the basic program of the QD51.
An interrupt request was detected from the module
• Correct the interrupt pointer setting in the
for which Interrupt Pointer Setting has not been
PLC System tab of "PLC Parameter". RUN: Off
configured in "PLC Parameter".
• Take measures not to issue an interruption ERR.:Flashing
1311 ■Collateral information
• Common information: - from the modules where the interrupt
pointer setting is not configured in the PLC CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing System tab of "PLC Parameter".
• During interrupt • Correct the Interrupt Setting of the network
parameter.
• Correct the interrupt setting of the LCPU
intelligent function module buffer memory.
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
the same error code is displayed again, the
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
module, I/O module, intelligent function
module, END cover, branch module, or
extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
[LAN CTRL. DOWN]
The H/W self-diagnostics detected a LAN
controller failure. RUN: Off
The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QnU*4
1320 module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• Common information: - LCPU*4
representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[LAN CTRL. DOWN]
The H/W self-diagnostics detected a LAN
controller failure. RUN: Off
The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QnU*4
1321 module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• Common information: - LCPU*4
representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
319
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP. UNIT DOWN]
• There was no response from the intelligent
function module/special function module in the
initial processing.
• The size of the buffer memory of the intelligent • Check the power supply.
function module/special function module is • If an unsupported module is mounted,
invalid. remove it. When only supported modules
• The unsupported module is mounted. are mounted, the cause is a hardware
QCPU
• At power-on/reset, momentary power failure has failure of the intelligent function
occurred. module/special function module, CPU
■Collateral information module, or base unit. Please consult your
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) local Mitsubishi representative.
RUN: Off/On
• Individual information: -
ERR.:Flashing/On
■Diagnostic timing
1401 • At power-on/At reset/When intelligent function
CPU Status:
module is accessed
Stop/Continue*3
[SP. UNIT DOWN]
• There was no response from the intelligent If an unsupported module is connected,
function module in the initial processing. disconnect it.
• The buffer memory size of the intelligent When only supported modules are
function module is invalid. connected, reset the CPU module to run it
• An unsupported module is connected. again. If the same error code is displayed
LCPU
■Collateral information again, the cause is a hardware failure of the
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) CPU module, I/O module, intelligent function
• Individual information: - module, END cover, branch module, or
■Diagnostic timing extension module. Please consult your local
• At power-on/At reset/When intelligent function Mitsubishi representative.
module is accessed
[SP. UNIT DOWN]
The intelligent function module/special function
module was accessed in the program, but there
was no response. The cause is a hardware failure of the
■Collateral information intelligent function module/special function
QCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) module, CPU module, or base unit. Please
• Individual information: Program error location consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing RUN: Off/On
• When an intelligent function module access ERR.:Flashing/On
1402 instruction is executed
[SP. UNIT DOWN] CPU Status:
The intelligent function module was accessed by Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the Stop/Continue*3
the program, but there was no response. same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) module, I/O module, intelligent function LCPU
• Individual information: Program error location module, END cover, branch module, or
■Diagnostic timing extension module. Please consult your local
• When an intelligent function module access Mitsubishi representative.
instruction is executed
320
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP. UNIT DOWN] If an unsupported module is mounted, A
• The unsupported module is mounted. remove it. When only supported modules are
■Collateral information mounted, the cause is a hardware failure of
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) the intelligent function module/special
• Individual information: - function module, CPU module, or base unit.
■Diagnostic timing Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• Always representative.
[SP. UNIT DOWN]
• There was no response from the intelligent
function module/special function module when
the END instruction is executed. QCPU
• An error is detected at the intelligent function
module/special function module. The cause is a failure of the CPU module,
• The I/O module (including the intelligent function base unit, or the intelligent function
module/special function module) is nearly module/special function module in the access
disconnected, removed, or mounted while the destination. Please consult your local RUN: Off/On
system is running. Mitsubishi representative. ERR.:Flashing/On
1403 ■Collateral information
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) CPU Status:
• Individual information: -
Stop/Continue*3
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[SP. UNIT DOWN]
• There was no response from the intelligent
function module when the END instruction is
executed.
Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
• An error is detected in the intelligent function
same error code is displayed again, the
module.
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• The I/O module (including the intelligent function
module, I/O module, intelligent function LCPU
module) is nearly disconnected or removed
module, END cover, branch module, or
while the system is running.
extension module. Please consult your local
■Collateral information
Mitsubishi representative.
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Always
[CONTROL-BUS ERR.]
When I/O assignment parameters are set, the
CPU module cannot access the intelligent function
module/special function module during initial
Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
communications. (If an error occurs, the start I/O
same error code is displayed again, the RUN: Off
number of the corresponding intelligent function
cause is a failure of the intelligent function ERR.:Flashing
1411 module/special function module is stored in the QCPU
module/special function module, CPU
common information.)
module, or base unit. Please consult your CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[CONTROL-BUS ERR.]
The FROM/TO instruction is not executable, due
to a control bus error with the intelligent function
Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
module/special function module. (If an error
same error code is displayed again, the RUN: Off
occurs, the program error location is stored in the
cause is a failure of the intelligent function ERR.:Flashing
1412 individual information.) QCPU
module/special function module, CPU
■Collateral information
module, or base unit. Please consult your CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Individual information: Program error location
■Diagnostic timing
• During execution of FROM/TO instruction set
321
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• Remove the CPU module from the main
[CONTROL-BUS ERR.]
base unit if it does not support a multiple
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module
CPU system configuration. Alternatively,
incompatible with the multiple CPU system is
replace the CPU module that does not
mounted. Q00J/Q00/Q01
support a multiple system configuration
■Collateral information Qn(H)
with the one that does.
• Common information: - QnPH
• The cause is a failure of the intelligent
• Individual information: -
function module, CPU module, or base
■Diagnostic timing
• Always unit. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
RUN: Off
[CONTROL-BUS ERR.] ERR.:Flashing
1413 (1) An error is detected on the system bus.
• Self-diagnostic error in the system bus • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If CPU Status:Stop
• Self-diagnostic error in the CPU module the same error code is displayed again, the
(2) In a multiple CPU system, the control CPU cause is a failure of the intelligent function
setting of other CPUs, configured in the I/O module, CPU module, or base unit. Please
Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter", differs consult your local Mitsubishi QCPU
from that of CPU No.1. representative.
■Collateral information • Reconfigure the control CPU setting of
• Common information: - other CPUs so that it can be the same as
• Individual information: - that of CPU No.1.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
• Remove the CPU module from the main
[CONTROL-BUS ERR.] base unit if it does not support a multiple
• Fault of a loaded module was detected. CPU system configuration. Alternatively,
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module replace the CPU module that does not
incompatible with the multiple CPU system is support a multiple system configuration Q00J/Q00/Q01
mounted. with the one that does. Qn(H)
■Collateral information • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If QnPH
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) the same error code is displayed again, the QnU
• Individual information: - cause is a failure of the intelligent function
■Diagnostic timing module, CPU module, or base unit. Please
• Always consult your local Mitsubishi RUN: Off
representative. ERR.:Flashing
1414
• Remove the CPU module from the main
base unit if it does not support a multiple CPU Status:Stop
CPU system configuration. Alternatively,
[CONTROL-BUS ERR.]
replace the CPU module that does not
An error is detected on the system bus. Q00J/Q00/Q01
support a multiple system configuration
■Collateral information Qn(H)
with the one that does.
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) QnPH
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• Individual information: - QnPRH
the same error code is displayed again, the
■Diagnostic timing QnU
cause is a failure of the intelligent function
• Always
module, CPU module, or base unit. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
[CONTROL-BUS ERR.]
Fault of the main or extension base unit was
Q00J/Q00/Q01
detected.
Qn(H)
■Collateral information
QnPH
• Common information: Module No. (Base No.)
QnPRH
• Individual information: -
QnU
■Diagnostic timing Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
• Always RUN: Off
same error code is displayed again, the
ERR.:Flashing
1415 [CONTROL-BUS ERR.] cause is a failure of the intelligent function
Fault of the main or extension base unit was module, CPU module, or base unit. Please
CPU Status:Stop
detected. consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
■Collateral information
Qn(H)*7
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: - QnPH*7
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/When an END instruction
executed
322
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[CONTROL-BUS ERR.] A
An error was detected on the system bus.
■Collateral information Qn(H)
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) QnPH
• Individual information: - QnU
■Diagnostic timing Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
• At power-on/At reset RUN: Off
same error code is displayed again, the
ERR.:Flashing
1416 [CONTROL-BUS ERR.] cause is a failure of the intelligent function
An error was detected on the system bus in the module, CPU module, or base unit. Please
CPU Status:Stop
multiple CPU system. consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
Q00CPU
■Collateral information
Q01CPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
QnU
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[CONTROL-BUS ERR.]
A reset signal error was detected on the system
Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
bus. RUN: Off
same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1417 cause is a failure of the intelligent function QnPRH
• Common information: -
module, CPU module, or base unit. Please
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[CONTROL-BUS ERR.]
• In the debug mode, both the main base unit for • Check that both the main base unit for
system A and the main base unit for system B system A and the main base unit for
are connected to an extension base unit. system B are not connected to an
• In the redundant system, the control system extension base unit in the debug mode. RUN: Off
cannot access the extension base unit because • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If ERR.:Flashing
1418 QnPRH
it has failed to acquire an access right. the same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of the CPU CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: - module, Q6WRB, or extension cable.
• Individual information: - Please consult your local Mitsubishi
■Diagnostic timing representative.
• At power-ON/At reset/At Switching execution
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
The error of host CPU is detected in the multiple
Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
CPU high speed transmission. RUN: Off
same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1430 cause is a hardware failure of the CPU QnU
• Common information: -
module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.] • Take noise reduction measures.
The communication error with other CPU is
• Check the main base unit mounting status
detected in the multiple CPU high speed
of the CPU module. RUN: Off
transmission.
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If ERR.:Flashing
1431 ■Collateral information QnU
the same error code is displayed again, the
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
module. Please consult your local
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset Mitsubishi representative.
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
The communication time out with other CPU is
detected in the multiple CPU high speed Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
RUN: Off
transmission. same error code is displayed again, the
ERR.:Flashing
1432 ■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of the CPU QnU
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
323
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
• Take noise reduction measures.
The communication error with other CPU is
• Check the main base unit mounting status
detected in the multiple CPU high speed
of the CPU module. RUN: Off
transmission.
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If ERR.:Flashing
1433 ■Collateral information QnU
the same error code is displayed again, the
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
module. Please consult your local
■Diagnostic timing
Mitsubishi representative.
• Always
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
• Take noise reduction measures.
The communication error with other CPU is
• Check the main base unit mounting status
detected in the multiple CPU high speed
of the CPU module. RUN: Off
transmission.
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If ERR.:Flashing
1434 ■Collateral information QnU
the same error code is displayed again, the
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
module. Please consult your local
■Diagnostic timing
• Always Mitsubishi representative.
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
• Take noise reduction measures.
The communication error with other CPU is
• Check the main base unit mounting status
detected in the multiple CPU high speed
of the CPU module. RUN: Off
transmission.
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If ERR.:Flashing
1435 ■Collateral information QnU
the same error code is displayed again, the
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
module. Please consult your local
■Diagnostic timing
• Always Mitsubishi representative.
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
The error of the multiple CPU high speed main
base unit is detected. (An error of the multiple Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
RUN: Off
CPU high speed transmission is detected.) same error code is displayed again, the
ERR.:Flashing
1436 ■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of the CPU QnU
• Common information: - module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
• Take noise reduction measures.
The error of the multiple CPU high speed main
• Check the main base unit mounting status
base unit is detected. (An error of the multiple
of the CPU module. RUN: Off
CPU high speed transmission is detected.)
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If ERR.:Flashing
1437 ■Collateral information QnU
the same error code is displayed again, the
• Common information: -
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
module. Please consult your local
■Diagnostic timing
Mitsubishi representative.
• At power-on/At reset
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
The error of the multiple CPU high speed main
• Take noise reduction measures.
base unit is detected. (An error of the multiple
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If RUN: Off
CPU high speed transmission is detected.)
the same error code is displayed again, the ERR.:Flashing
1439 ■Collateral information QnU
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: -
module. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[AC/DC DOWN]
• A momentary power supply interruption has
occurred.
RUN: On
• The power supply went off.
ERR.:Off QCPU
1500 ■Collateral information Check the power supply.
LCPU
• Common information: -
CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
324
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SINGLE PS. DOWN] A
The power supply voltage of either of redundant
power supply modules on the redundant base unit
dropped. RUN: On Qn(H)
Check the power supplied to the redundant
■Collateral information ERR.:On QnPH
1510 power supply modules mounted on the
• Common information: Base No./Power supply QnPRH
redundant base unit.
No. CPU Status:Continue QnU
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[SINGLE PS. ERROR]
On the redundant base unit, the one damaged
redundant power supply module was detected.
RUN: On Qn(H)
■Collateral information The cause is a hardware failure of the
ERR.:On QnPH
1520 • Common information: Base No./Power supply redundant power supply module. Please
QnPRH
No. consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
CPU Status:Continue QnU
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[BATTERY ERROR*2]
• The battery voltage in the CPU module has
dropped below stipulated level.
• Change the battery.
• The lead connector of the CPU module battery
• Engage the battery connector when a
is not connected. RUN: On
program memory, standard RAM, or the
• The lead connector of the CPU module battery ERR.:Off QCPU
1600 back-up power function is used.
is not securely engaged. LCPU
• Check the lead connector of the CPU
■Collateral information CPU Status:Continue
module for looseness. Firmly engage the
• Common information: Drive Name
connector if it is loose.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[BATTERY ERROR*2]
Voltage of the battery on memory card has
Qn(H)
dropped below stipulated level. RUN: On
QnPH
■Collateral information ERR.:Off
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
1601 Change the battery. QnPRH
• Common information: Drive Name
QnU (except
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
QnUDV)
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[FLASH ROM ERROR]
The number of writes to flash ROM (standard
ROM and system securement area) exceeds
100,000 times. (Number of writes > 100,000 RUN: On
times) ERR.:On QnU
1610 Change the CPU module.
■Collateral information LCPU
• Common information: - CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When writing to ROM
[BUS TIMEOUT ERR.]
An error was detected on the system bus. Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
• Self-diagnosis error of the system bus same error code is displayed again, the
RUN: Off
• Self-diagnosis error of the CPU module cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
ERR.:Flashing
1700 ■Collateral information module, I/O module, intelligent function LCPU
• Common information: - module, END cover, branch module, or
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - extension module. Please consult your local
■Diagnostic timing Mitsubishi representative.
• Always
• Disconnect the extension block.
[UNIT BUS ERROR]
• Do not use the LA1S extension base unit.
• An error was detected on the system bus.
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• An error was detected in the connected module. RUN: Off
the same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1710 cause is a hardware failure of the CPU LCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
module, I/O module, intelligent function
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
module, END cover, branch module, or
■Diagnostic timing
extension module. Please consult your
• Always
local Mitsubishi representative.
325
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[UNIT BUS ERROR]
When I/O assignment parameters are set, the
CPU module cannot access the special function
module during initial communications. (If an error
Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
occurs, the start I/O number of the corresponding RUN: Off
same error code is displayed again, the
special function module is stored in the common ERR.:Flashing
1711 cause is a hardware failure of the LA1S LCPU
information.)
extension base unit. Please consult your local
■Collateral information CPU Status:Stop
Mitsubishi representative.
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on
[UNIT BUS ERROR]
The FROM/TO instructions cannot be executed
because of the error in the bus connecting with the
special function module. (If an error occurs, the Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
RUN: Off
program error location is stored in the individual same error code is displayed again, the
ERR.:Flashing
1712 information.) cause is a hardware failure of the LA1S LCPU
■Collateral information extension base unit. Please consult your local
CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) Mitsubishi representative.
• Individual information: Program error location
■Diagnostic timing
• During execution of FROM/TO instruction set
• Securely connect the connector part of an
extension cable to the module. (Insert the
[END COVER ERR.]
connector until it clicks.)
A failure was detected on the END cover.
• Replace the END cover.
■Collateral information RUN: Off
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• Common information: Module No. (Block No.) ERR.:Flashing
1720 the same error code is displayed again, the LCPU
• Individual information: -
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Diagnostic timing CPU Status:Stop
• At power-on/At reset/When an END instruction module, I/O module, intelligent function
executed module, END cover, branch module, or
extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Securely connect the connector part of an
extension cable to the module. (Insert the
[SYSTEM RST ERR.]
connector until it clicks.)
• An extension cable is not securely connected.
• Replace the END cover.
• An error was detected in the system bus. RUN: Off
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1730 the same error code is displayed again, the LCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Block No.)
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
module, I/O module, intelligent function
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset module, END cover, branch module, or
extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Replace the branch module.
[BRANCH UNIT ERR.] • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
An error was detected in the branch module.
the same error code is displayed again, the RUN: Off
■Collateral information
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU ERR.:Flashing
1740 • Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) LCPU
module, I/O module, intelligent function
• Individual information: -
module, END cover, branch module, or CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• Always extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Replace the extension module.
[EXTEND UNIT ERR.] • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
An error was detected in the extension module.
the same error code is displayed again, the RUN: Off
■Collateral information
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU ERR.:Flashing
1750 • Common information: Module No. (Block No.) LCPU
module, I/O module, intelligent function
• Individual information: -
module, END cover, branch module, or CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
326
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[BASE UNIT ERR.] A
An error was detected in the LA1S extension base
Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
unit. RUN: Off
same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
1760 cause is a hardware failure of the LA1S LCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Block No.)
extension base unit. Please consult your local
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
*1 The operating status of the CPU module after an error has occurred can be set in parameter. (LED indication changes
according to the status.)
*2 The BAT.ALM LED turns on or flashes if the BATTERY ERROR occurs.
*3 The operating status of each intelligent function module after an error has occurred can be set in parameter (stop or
continue).
*4 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU and Built-in Ethernet port LCPU
*5 Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "13042" or later.
*6 This applies to the Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, and
Q100UDEHCPU.
*7 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "08032" or later When the CPU module is powered on or reset, the
error information is stored in SD6 (I/O No.).
Appendix 1.3 List of error codes (1000 to 1999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
327
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
The following table shows the error messages, the error contents and causes, and the corrective actions for the error
codes (2000 to 2999).
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[UNIT VERIFY ERR.]
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module
incompatible with the multiple CPU system is
mounted. Replace the CPU module incompatible with
Qn(H)
■Collateral information the multiple CPU system with a CPU module
QnPH
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) compatible with the multiple CPU system.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed
[UNIT VERIFY ERR.]
The I/O module status is different from the I/O
• Read common information of the error
module information at power ON.
using the programming tool to identify the
• The I/O module (including the intelligent function
numeric value (module No.). Check the
module) is nearly disconnected or removed
module corresponding to the value and
while the system is running.
replace it as necessary.
■Collateral information Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Monitor SD150 to SD157 using the RUN: Off/On
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
programming tool to identify the module ERR.:Flashing/On
[For Remote I/O network] and Network
2000 whose data bit is "1". Check the
No./Station No.
corresponding module and replace it as CPU Status:
• Individual information: -
necessary. Stop/Continue*1
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed
[UNIT VERIFY ERR.] • Read common information of the error
The I/O module status is different from the I/O using the programming tool to identify the
module information at power ON. numeric value (module No.). Check the
• The I/O module (including the intelligent function module corresponding to the value and
module/special function module) is nearly replace it as necessary.
disconnected, removed, or mounted while the • Monitor SD1400 to SD1431 using the Qn(H)
system is running. programming tool to identify the module QnPH
■Collateral information whose data bit is "1". Check the QnPRH
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) corresponding module and replace it as QnU
[For Remote I/O network] Network No./Station necessary.
No. • When a GOT is bus-connected to the main
• Individual information: - base unit or extension base unit, check the
■Diagnostic timing connection status of the extension cable
• Always and the grounding status of the GOT.
[UNIT VERIFY ERR.]
During operation, a module was mounted on the
slot where the empty setting of the CPU module RUN: Off/On
was made. During operation, do not mount a module on ERR.:Flashing/On
Q00J/Q00/Q01
2001 ■Collateral information the slot where the empty setting of the CPU
QnU
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) module was made. CPU Status:
• Individual information: - Stop/Continue*2
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[BASE LAY ERROR]
• More than applicable number of extension base
units have been used.
Q00J/Q00/Q01
• When a GOT was bus-connected, the CPU
• Use the allowable number of extension RUN: Off QnPRH
module was reset while the power of the GOT
base units or less. ERR.:Flashing Q00UJ
2010 was OFF.
• Power on the programmable controller and Q00UCPU
■Collateral information
GOT again. CPU Status:Stop Q01UCPU
• Common information: Base No.
Q02UCPU
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
328
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[BASE LAY ERROR] A
The QA1S3B, QA1S5B, QA1S6B,
QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B, QA6B, or
QA6ADP+A5B/A6B was used as the base Do not use the QA1S3B, QA1S5B, RUN: Off Q00J/Q00/Q01
unit. QA1S6B, QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B, ERR.:Flashing QnPH
2011
■Collateral information QA6B, or QA6ADP+A5B/A6B as the QnPRH
• Common information: Base No. base unit. CPU Status:Stop QnU
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[BASE LAY ERROR]
The GOT is bus-connected to the main base unit
of the redundant system.
The following errors were detected in the
redundant system.
• Remove the bus connection cable for the
• The base unit other than the Q6WRB is
GOT connected to the main base unit.
connected to the extension stage No.1.
• Use the Q6WRB (fixed to the extension
• The base unit is connected to any one of the
stage No.1).
extension stages No.2 to No.7, although the
• Use the redundant CPU compatible with
Q6WRB does not exist in the extension stage
the extension base unit for the other
No.1.
system. RUN: Off
• The other system CPU module is incompatible
• Do not use the Q5B, QA1S5B, ERR.:Flashing
2012 with the extension base unit. QnPRH
QA1S6B,
• The Q5B, QA1S5B, QA1S6B,
QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B, QA6B, CPU Status:Stop
QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B, QA6B or
or QA6ADP+A5B/A6B as the base unit.
QA6ADP+A5B/A6B is connected.
• Use the main base unit which has the same
• The number of slots of the main base unit for
number of slots.
both systems is different.
• The cause is a hardware failure of the
• Information of the Q6WRB cannot be read
Q6WRB. Please consult your local
correctly.
Mitsubishi representative.
■Collateral information
• Common information: Base No.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
[BASE LAY ERROR]
Stage number of the Q6WRB is recognized as
other than extension stage No.1 in the redundant
RUN: Off
system. The cause is a hardware failure of the
ERR.:Flashing
2013 ■Collateral information Q6WRB. Please consult your local QnPRH
• Common information: Base No. Mitsubishi representative.
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[BASE LAY ERROR]
The branch module on the block before the
LA1S5B is connected on the left of the END
• Replace the LA1S5B with the LA1S6B. RUN: Off
cover.
• Connect the branch module on the ERR.:Flashing
2014 ■Collateral information LCPU
LA1S5B on the right of the CPU module
• Common information: Module No. (Block No.)
or the extension module. CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[EXT.CABLE ERR.]
The following errors were detected in the
redundant system.
Check to see if the extension cable between
• At power-on/reset, the standby system has
the main base unit and the Q6WRB is
detected the error in the path between the
connected correctly. If not, connect it after
control system and the Q6WRB. RUN: Off
turning OFF the main base unit where the
• The standby system detected an error in the ERR.:Flashing
2020 extension cable will be connected. QnPRH
path to the Q6WRB in the END processing.
If the cable is properly connected, the cause
■Collateral information CPU Status:Stop
is a hardware failure of the CPU module,
• Common information: -
Q6WRB, or extension cable. Please consult
• Individual information: -
your local Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/When an END instruction
executed
329
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• Attach an END cover.
• Check that the modules are properly
[NO END COVER]
connected with referring to the System
• There is no END cover.
Monitor window.
• The LA1S extension base unit is used as an
• Do not use the LA1S extension base unit. RUN: Off
extension base unit.
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If ERR.:Flashing
2030 ■Collateral information LCPU
the same error code is displayed again, the
• Common information: Module No. (Block No.)
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
module, I/O module, intelligent function
■Diagnostic timing
module, END cover, branch module, or
• At power-on/At reset
extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Attach an END cover.
• Check that the modules are properly
connected with referring to the System
[NO END COVER]
Monitor window.
There is no END cover.
• Do not use the LA1S extension base unit. RUN: Off
■Collateral information
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If ERR.:Flashing
2031 • Common information: Module No. (Block No.) LCPU
the same error code is displayed again, the
• Individual information: -
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed module, I/O module, intelligent function
module, END cover, branch module, or
extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Read common information of the error
using the programming tool to identify the
[UNIT BAD CONNECT] numeric value (module No.). Check the
(1) The I/O module status is different from the module corresponding to the value and
I/O module information at power ON. replace it as necessary.
(2) The I/O module (including the intelligent • Monitor SD1400 to SD1431 using the
function module) is nearly disconnected or programming tool to identify the module
removed while the system is running. whose data bit is "1". Check the
(3) An extension cable is not securely corresponding module and replace it as
RUN: Off
connected. necessary.
ERR.:Flashing
2040 (4) Runaway or failure of the CPU module (built- • Securely connect the connector part of an LCPU
in I/O, built-in CC-Link) extension cable to the module. (Insert the
CPU Status:Stop
• Malfunction due to noise or other causes connector until it clicks.)
• Hardware failure • Take noise reduction measures.
■Collateral information • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) the same error code is displayed again, the
• Individual information: - cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Diagnostic timing module, I/O module, intelligent function
• Always module, END cover, branch module, or
extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Connect the extension cable.
[EXT. CABLE ERR.] • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
An extension cable is disconnected.
the same error code is displayed again, the RUN: Off
■Collateral information
cause is a hardware failure of the CPU ERR.:Flashing
2050 • Common information: Module No. (Block No.) LCPU
module, I/O module, intelligent function
• Individual information: -
module, END cover, branch module, or CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
extension module. Please consult your
• When an END instruction executed
local Mitsubishi representative.
330
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] A
The slot where the QI60 is mounted was assigned
as other than an intelligent function module or
interrupt module in the I/O assignment tab of "PLC
Make setting again to match the PLC Qn(H)
Parameter".
parameter I/O assignment with the actual QnPH
■Collateral information
loading status. QnPRH
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter",
"Intelligent" (intelligent function module) is set
for the slot where an I/O module is mounted,
and vice versa.
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter", a
module other than a CPU module or empty is
set for the slot where a CPU module is mounted,
• Set the I/O assignment again so that the
and vice versa.
setting matches with the mounting status of Qn(H)
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter",
the intelligent function module or the CPU QnPH
switch settings are configured for the module
module. QnPRH
that does not support the setting.
• Delete the switch setting in the I/O QnU
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter",
assignment setting tab of "PLC parameter". RUN: Off
the number of points assigned to the intelligent
ERR.:Flashing
2100 function module is less than that of the mounted
module.
CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter",
"Intelligent" (intelligent function module) is set
for the slot where an I/O module is mounted,
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
and vice versa.
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter", a
module other than a CPU module or empty is
set for the slot where a CPU module is mounted, Set the I/O assignment again so that the
and vice versa. setting matches with the mounting status of
Q00J/Q00/Q01
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter", the intelligent function module or the CPU
the number of points assigned to the intelligent module.
function module is less than that of the mounted
module.
■Collateral information
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
331
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter",
"Intelligent" (intelligent function module) or a
branch module is set for the position where an
I/O module is connected.
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter",
"Input" (input module), "Output" (output
module), or a branch module is set for the • Set the I/O assignment again so that the
position where an intelligent function module is setting matches with the mounting status of
connected. the intelligent function module, CPU
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter", module, or branch module.
"Input" (input module), "Output" (output • Delete the switch setting in the I/O
module), or "Intelligent" (intelligent function assignment setting tab of "PLC parameter".
module) is set for the position where a branch • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If LCPU
module is connected. the same error code is displayed again, the
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter", cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
switch settings are configured for the module module, I/O module, intelligent function RUN: Off
that does not support the setting. module, END cover, branch module, or ERR.:Flashing
2100 extension module. Please consult your
• In the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter",
the number of points assigned to the intelligent local Mitsubishi representative. CPU Status:Stop
function module is less than that of the mounted
module.
■Collateral information
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] • Make setting again to match the PLC
In the PLC parameter setting, setting content for parameter adapter type setting with the
the adapter type is different from the ones for the mounted adapter.
mounted adapter. Or no adapter has been set. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
■Collateral information the same error code is displayed again, the LCPU
• Common information: FFFFH (fixed) cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Individual information: - module, RS-232 adapter, and RS-422/485
■Diagnostic timing adapter. Please consult your local
• At power-on/At reset Mitsubishi representative.
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
13 or more A-series special function modules
(except for the A1SI61/AI61(-S1)) that can initiate
an interrupt to the CPU module have been Reduce the number of A series special RUN: Off
installed. function modules (except the A1SI61/AI61(- ERR.:Flashing
2101 Qn(H)
■Collateral information S1)) that can start interrupt programs to the
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) CPU module to 12 or less. CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
Total of 7 or more MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B
local station data link module (A1SJ71AP23Q,
A1SJ71AR23Q, A1SJ71AT23BQ), A/QnA
intelligent communication module (A1SD51, Reduce the total number of MELSECNET,
AD51(H)(-S3)), A/QnA JEMANET(JPCN-1) MELSECNET/B local station data link
RUN: Off
master module (A1SJ71J92-S3, AJ71J92-S3), modules, A/QnA intelligent communication Qn(H)
ERR.:Flashing
2102 A/QnA external failure diagnostics module modules, A/QnA JEMANET(JPCN-1) master QnU
(AD51FD-S3), and A/QnA paging interface modules, A/QnA external failure diagnostics LCPU
CPU Status:Stop
module (A1SD21-S1) have been installed. modules, and A/QnA paging interface
■Collateral information modules in the system to six or less.
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
332
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] A
• Two or more QI60/A1SI61/AI61(-S1) modules
• Mount only one QI60/A1SI61/AI61(-S1)
are mounted in a single CPU system.
module in the single CPU system.
• Two or more QI60/A1SI61/AI61(-S1) modules
• Mount only one A1SI61/AI61(-S1) module
are set to the same control CPU in a multiple
in the single CPU system, and set an
CPU system. Qn(H)
interrupt pointer to the QI60.
• Two or more A1SI61/AI61(-S1) modules are QnPH
• Control only one QI60/A1SI61/AI61(-S1)
loaded in a multiple CPU system. QnU
module by the control CPU module in the
■Collateral information
multiple CPU system.
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Mount only one A1SI61/AI61(-S1) module
• Individual information: -
in the multiple CPU system.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
Two or more QI60, A1SI61 interrupt modules have
been mounted.
■Collateral information Reduce the number of QI60 and A1SI61 Qn(H)
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) modules to one each. QnPRH
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] RUN: Off
Two or more QI60 modules are mounted. ERR.:Flashing
2103
■Collateral information
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) Mount only one QI60 module. CPU Status:Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
Two or more QI60 modules where interrupt pointer
setting has not been made are mounted.
• Mount only one QI60 module.
■Collateral information Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Set an interrupt pointer to the second QI60
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) QnU
module and later.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• An interrupt pointer set in built-in I/O function
setting parameter and the interrupt pointer for
the A1SI61 are overlapping.
• Set interrupt pointers so that they do not
• Two or more A1SI61 modules are mounted.
overlap. LCPU
■Collateral information
• Mount only one A1SI61 module.
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
333
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Two or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE
Controller Network modules in total are
mounted in the entire system. • Mount either MELSECNET/H module or
• Two or more Ethernet modules are mounted in CC-Link IE Controller Network module in
the entire system. the entire system. Q00UJCPU
■Collateral information • Mount only one Ethernet module in the
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) entire system.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Two or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE
Controller Network modules in total are
mounted in the entire system. • Mount either MELSECNET/H module or
• Two or more Ethernet modules are mounted in CC-Link IE Controller Network module in
Q00UCPU
the entire system. the entire system.
Q01UCPU
■Collateral information • Mount only one Ethernet module in the
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) entire system.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Three or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE
Controller Network modules in total are
mounted in the entire system. • Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H and
RUN: Off
• Three or more Ethernet interface modules are CC-Link IE Controller Network modules to
ERR.:Flashing
2106 mounted in the entire system. two or less in the entire system. Q02UCPU
■Collateral information • Reduce the number of Ethernet modules to
CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) two or less in the entire system.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Five or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE
Controller Network modules in total are
mounted in the entire system. • Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H and
• Five or more Ethernet interface modules are CC-Link IE Controller Network modules to
mounted in the entire system. four or less in the entire system. QnU
■Collateral information • Reduce the number of Ethernet modules to
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) four or less in the entire system.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Three or more CC-Link IE Controller Network
modules are mounted in the entire system.
• Reduce the number of CC-Link IE
• Five or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE
Controller Network modules to two or less
Controller Network modules in total are Qn(H)
in the entire system.
mounted in the entire system. QnPH
• Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H and
■Collateral information QnPRH
CC-Link IE Controller Network modules to
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
four or less in the entire system.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
334
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] A
• Five or more MELSECNET/H modules have
been installed.
• Five or more Ethernet interface modules have • Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H
Qn(H)
been installed. modules to four or less.
QnPH
■Collateral information • Reduce the number of Ethernet modules to
QnPRH
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) four or less.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Two or more MELSECNET/H modules were
installed.
• Two or more Ethernet modules were installed. • Mount only one MELSECNET/H module.
• Three or more CC-Link modules were installed. • Mount only one Ethernet module.
Q00J/Q00/Q01
■Collateral information • Reduce the number of CC-Link modules to
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) two or less.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
RUN: Off
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
ERR.:Flashing
2106 The same network number or same station
number is duplicated in the MELSECNET/H
CPU Status:Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
network system.
Check the network number and station Qn(H)
■Collateral information
number. QnPH
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
QnPRH
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
Two or more Ethernet modules were installed.
L02SCPU
■Collateral information
L02SCPU-P
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) Mount only one Ethernet module.
L02CPU
• Individual information: -
L02CPU-P
■Diagnostic timing
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
L06CPU
Three or more Ethernet modules were installed.
L06CPU-P
■Collateral information
Reduce the number of Ethernet modules to L26CPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
two or less. L26CPU-P
• Individual information: -
L26CPU-BT
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset L26CPU-PBT
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
The start X/Y configured in the I/O Assignment tab
of "PLC Parameter" is overlapped with that for Configure the I/O assignment setting of the
another module. PLC parameter again so that it is consistent
■Collateral information with the actual status of the intelligent QCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) function modules, special function modules,
• Individual information: - and I/O modules.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset RUN: Off
• Configure the start X/Y again in the I/O ERR.:Flashing
2107
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter"
The start X/Y configured in the I/O Assignment tab according to the intelligent function module CPU Status:Stop
of "PLC Parameter" is overlapped with that for and I/O modules connected.
another module. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
■Collateral information the same error code is displayed again, the LCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Individual information: - module, I/O module, intelligent function
■Diagnostic timing module, END cover, branch module, or
• At power-on/At reset extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
335
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• The A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71LR21, A1SJ71BR11,
A1SJ71AP21, A1SJ71AR21, or A1SJ71AT21B
network module dedicated for the A2USCPU is
used.
• The A1SJ71QLP21, A1SJ71QLP21S,
A1SJ71QLR21, or A1SJ71QBR11 network
module dedicated for the Q2ASCPU is used.
• The AJ71LP21, AJ71LP21G, AJ71BR11, Replace the network module for the
Qn(H)
AJ71AP21, AJ71AR21, or AJ71AT21B network A2USCPU, Q2ASCPU, A2UCPU, or
QnU
module dedicated for the A2UCPU is used. Q2ACPU with the MELSECNET/H module.
• The AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S, AJ71QLP21G
or AJ71QBR11 network module dedicated for
the Q2ACPU is used.
■Collateral information RUN: Off
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) ERR.:Flashing
2108
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing CPU Status:Stop
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• The A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71LR21, A1SJ71BR11,
A1SJ71AP21, A1SJ71AR21, or A1SJ71AT21B
network module dedicated for the A2USCPU is
used.
• The A1SJ71QLP21, A1SJ71QLP21S, Disconnect the corresponding module. Use
A1SJ71QLR21, or A1SJ71QBR11 network the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local LCPU
module dedicated for the Q2ASCPU is used. module.
■Collateral information
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
• The location designated by the FROM/TO
instruction set is not the intelligent function
module/special function module.
• The module that does not include buffer • Read the individual information of the error
memory has been specified by the FROM/TO using the programming tool to identify the
instruction. numeric value (program error location).
Q00J/Q00/Q01
• The intelligent function module/special function Correct the FROM/TO instruction
Qn(H)
module, Network module being accessed is corresponding to the value as necessary.
QnPH
faulty. • The cause is a hardware fault of the
QnPRH
• Station not loaded was specified using the intelligent function module/special function
QnU
instruction whose target was the CPU share module in the access destination. Please
memory. consult your local Mitsubishi
RUN: Off/On
■Collateral information representative.
ERR.:Flashing/On
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
2110 • Individual information: Program error location
CPU Status:
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed Stop/Continue*1
[SP. UNIT ERROR] • Read the individual information of the error
• A module other than intelligent function modules using the programming tool to identify the
is specified with the FROM/TO instruction. numeric value (program error location).
• The module specified with the FROM/TO Correct the FROM/TO instruction
instruction does not have the buffer memory. corresponding to the value as necessary.
• The intelligent function module being accessed • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
LCPU
is faulty. the same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) module, I/O module, intelligent function
• Individual information: Program error location module, END cover, branch module, or
■Diagnostic timing extension module. Please consult your
• When instruction executed local Mitsubishi representative.
336
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP. UNIT ERROR] A
• The location designated by a link direct device • Read the individual information of the error
(J\) is not a network module. using the programming tool to identify the
• The I/O module (including the intelligent function numeric value (program error location).
module/special function module) is nearly Correct the FROM/TO instruction
disconnected, removed, or mounted while the corresponding to the value as necessary.
QCPU
system is running. • The cause is a hardware fault of the
■Collateral information intelligent function module/special function
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) module in the access destination. Please
• Individual information: Program error location consult your local Mitsubishi
RUN: Off/On
■Diagnostic timing representative.
• When instruction executed ERR.:Flashing/On
2111
• Read the individual information of the error
CPU Status:
using the programming tool to identify the
Stop/Continue*1
[SP. UNIT ERROR] numeric value (program error location).
The location designated by a link direct device Correct the FROM/TO instruction
(J\) is not a network module. corresponding to the value as necessary.
■Collateral information • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
LCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) the same error code is displayed again, the
• Individual information: Program error location cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
■Diagnostic timing module, I/O module, intelligent function
• When instruction executed/STOP RUN module, END cover, branch module, or
extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
• The module other than intelligent function
module/special function module is specified by
the intelligent function module/special function
module dedicated instruction. Or, it is not the Read the individual information of the error
corresponding intelligent function using the programming tool to identify the
module/special function module. numeric value (program error location).
• There is no network No. specified by the Check the intelligent function module/special QCPU
network dedicated instruction. Or the relay function module dedicated instruction
target network does not exit. (instruction for a network) corresponding to
■Collateral information the value and correct it as necessary.
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
RUN: Off/On
• Individual information: Program error location
ERR.:Flashing/On
■Diagnostic timing
2112 • When instruction executed
CPU Status:
[SP. UNIT ERROR] • Read the individual information of the error
Stop/Continue*1
• The module other than intelligent function using the programming tool to identify the
module was specified with an intelligent function numeric value (program error location).
module dedicated instruction. Or there is no Check the intelligent function module
relevant intelligent function module. dedicated instruction corresponding to the
• There is no network No. specified by the value and correct it as necessary.
network dedicated instruction. Or the relay • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If LCPU
target network does not exit. the same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) module, I/O module, intelligent function
• Individual information: Program error location module, END cover, branch module, or
■Diagnostic timing extension module. Please consult your
• When instruction executed/STOP RUN local Mitsubishi representative.
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
Read the individual information of the error
The module other than network module is
using the programming tool to identify the RUN: Off/On
specified by the network dedicated instruction.
numeric value (program error location). ERR.:Flashing/On
■Collateral information Qn(H)
2113 Check the intelligent function module/special
• Common information: FFFFH (fixed) QnPH
function module dedicated instruction CPU Status:
• Individual information: Program error location
(instruction for a network) corresponding to Stop/Continue*1
■Diagnostic timing
the value and correct it as necessary.
• When instruction executed/STOP RUN
337
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
An instruction, which on execution specifies other
stations, has been used for specifying the host
Read individual information of the error using RUN: Off/On
CPU. (An instruction that does not allow the host Q00J/Q00/Q01
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On
CPU to be specified). Qn(H)
2114 value (program error location). Check the
■Collateral information QnPH
error step corresponding to the value and CPU Status:
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) QnU
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue
• Individual information: Program error location
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
An instruction, which on execution specifies the
host CPU, has been used for specifying other
Read individual information of the error using RUN: Off/On
CPUs. (An instruction that does not allow other
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On Q00J/Q00/Q01
stations to be specified).
2115 value (program error location). Check the Qn(H)
■Collateral information
error step corresponding to the value and CPU Status: QnPH
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue
• Individual information: Program error location
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed/STOP RUN
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
• An instruction that does not allow the under the
control of another CPU to be specified is being
used for a similar task. Read individual information of the error using RUN: Off/On
Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Instruction was executed for the A or QnA the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On
Qn(H)
2116 module under control of another CPU. value (program error location). Check the
QnPH
■Collateral information error step corresponding to the value and CPU Status:
QnU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue
• Individual information: Program error location
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
A CPU module that cannot be specified in the
instruction dedicated to the multiple CPU system Read individual information of the error using RUN: Off/On
Q00J/Q00/Q01
was specified. the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On
Qn(H)
2117 ■Collateral information value (program error location). Check the
QnPH
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) error step corresponding to the value and CPU Status:
QnU
• Individual information: Program error location correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
When the online module change setting is set to • When performing the online module
be "enabled" in the PLC parameter in a multiple change in a multiple CPU system, correct
CPU system, intelligent function module controlled the program so that access will not be
RUN: Off/On
by other CPU using the FROM made to the intelligent function module
ERR.:Flashing/On Qn(H)
instruction/intelligent function module device controlled by the other CPU.
2118 QnPH
(U\G) is specified. • When accessing the intelligent function
CPU Status: QnU
■Collateral information module controlled by the other CPU in a
Stop/Continue
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) multiple CPU system, set the online
• Individual information: Program error location module change setting to be "disabled" by
■Diagnostic timing parameter.
• When instruction executed
338
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] A
• The Q5B and Q6B, or the QA1S5B,
QA1S6B, QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B,
QA6B and QA6ADP+A5B/A6B are
connected in the wrong order, or the setting of • Check and correct the connection order of
the extension level setting connector is the base units and the setting of the Q00J/Q00/Q01
incorrect. extension level setting connector. Qn(H)
• I/O numbers for Q series modules and A series • Assign I/O numbers in an order of: Q series QnPH
modules are assigned in the wrong order. modules A series modules or A series QnU
■Collateral information modules Q series modules.
• Common information: -
• Individual information: - RUN: Off
■Diagnostic timing ERR.:Flashing
2120 • At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] CPU Status:Stop
• The LA1S extension base unit is connected in
the wrong position, or the setting of the • Check and correct the connecting position
extension level setting connector is incorrect. of the LA1S extension base unit and the
• I/O numbers for L series modules and setting of the extension level setting
AnS/QnAS series modules are assigned in the connector.
LCPU
wrong order. • Assign I/O numbers in an order of: L series
■Collateral information modules AnS/QnAS series modules or
• Common information: - AnS/QnAS series modules L series
• Individual information: - modules.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
The CPU module is installed to other than the
CPU slot and slots 0 to 2. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Check the loading position of the CPU ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
2121
• Common information: - module and reinstall it at the correct slot. QnPH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
The QA1S3B is used as the main base unit.
RUN: Off Qn(H)
■Collateral information
Replace the main base unit with a usable ERR.:Flashing QnPH
2122 • Common information: -
one. QnPRH
• Individual information: -
CPU Status:Stop QnU
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
339
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• A module is mounted on the 65th slot or later
• Remove the module mounted on the 65th
slot.
slot or later slot.
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
• Remove the module mounted on the slot
is greater than the number of slots specified at
whose number is greater than the number
[Slots] in [Standard setting] of the base setting.
of slots specified at [Slots] in [Standard Qn(H)
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
setting] of the base setting. QnPH
of I/O points exceeds 4096 points.
• Remove the module mounted on the slot QnPRH
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
whose number of I/O points exceeds 4096 QnU
of I/O points strides 4096 points.
points.
■Collateral information
• Replace the last module with the one
• Common information: -
whose number of occupied points is within
• Individual information: -
4096.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• A module is mounted on after the 25th slot (on
after the 17th slot for the Q00UJ).
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number • Remove the module mounted on after the
is later than the one set in the "Base setting" on 25th (on after the 17th slot for the Q00UJ).
the I/O assignment tab of PLC parameter in GX • Remove the module mounted on the slot
Developer. whose number is later than the one set in
• A module is mounted on the slot for which I/O the "Base setting" on the I/O assignment
points greater than 1024 (greater than 256 for tab of PLC parameter in GX Developer.
Q00UJ/Q00U/
the Q00UJ) is assigned. • Remove the module mounted on the slot
Q01U
• A module is mounted on the slot for which I/O for which I/O points greater than 1024
points is assigned from less than 1024 to (greater than 256 for the Q00UJ) is
greater than 1024 (from less than 256 to greater assigned.
than 256 for the Q00UJ). • Replace the last module with the one
■Collateral information whose number of occupied points is within
• Common information: - 1024 (within 256 for the Q00UJ).
• Individual information: - RUN: Off
■Diagnostic timing ERR.:Flashing
2124 • At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] CPU Status:Stop
• A module is mounted on the 37th slot or later
• Remove the module mounted on the 37th
slot.
slot or later slot.
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
• Remove the module mounted on the slot
is greater than the number of slots specified at
whose number is greater than the number
[Slots] in [Standard setting] of the base setting.
of slots specified at [Slots] in [Standard
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
setting] of the base setting.
of I/O points exceeds 2048 points. Q02UCPU
• Remove the module mounted on the slot
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
whose number of I/O points exceeds 2048
of I/O points strides 2048 points.
points.
■Collateral information
• Replace the last module with the one
• Common information: -
whose number of occupied points is within
• Individual information: -
2048.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• A module is mounted on the 25th slot or later
• Remove the module mounted on the 25th
slot. (The 17th slot or later slot for the Q00J.)
slot or later slot. (The 17th slot or later slot
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
for the Q00J.)
is greater than the number of slots specified at
• Remove the module mounted on the slot
[Slots] in [Standard setting] of the base setting.
whose number is greater than the number
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
of slots specified at [Slots] in [Standard
of I/O points exceeds 1024 points. (256 points
setting] of the base setting.
for the Q00J.) Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Remove the module mounted on the slot
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
whose number of I/O points exceeds 1024
of I/O points strides 1024 points. (256 points for
points (greater than or equal to 256 points
the Q00J.)
for the Q00J).
■Collateral information
• Replace the last module with the one
• Common information: -
whose number of occupied points is within
• Individual information: -
1024 (within 256 for the Q00J).
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
340
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• Reduce the number of connectable A
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] modules to 10 or less.
• The number of connectable modules has • Remove the module whose number of
exceeded 10. points exceeds 4096 points.
• A module is installed exceeding the I/O points of • Replace the last module with the one
4096. whose number of occupied points is within
• A module is installed crossing the I/O points of 4096. L26CPU-BT
4096. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If L26CPU-PBT
■Collateral information the same error code is displayed again, the
• Common information: - cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Individual information: - module, I/O module, intelligent function
■Diagnostic timing module, END cover, branch module, or
• At power-on/At reset extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Reduce the number of connectable
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] modules to 40 or less.
• The number of connectable modules has • Remove the module whose number of
exceeded 40. points exceeds 4096 points.
• A module is installed exceeding the I/O points of • Replace the last module with the one L06CPU
4096. whose number of occupied points is within L06CPU-P
• A module is installed crossing the I/O points of 4096. L26CPU
4096. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If L26CPU-P
■Collateral information the same error code is displayed again, the L26CPU-BT
• Common information: - cause is a hardware failure of the CPU L26CPU-PBT
• Individual information: - module, I/O module, intelligent function
■Diagnostic timing module, END cover, branch module, or
• At power-on/At reset extension module. Please consult your RUN: Off
local Mitsubishi representative. ERR.:Flashing
2124
• Reduce the number of connectable
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] modules to 10 or less. CPU Status:Stop
• The number of connectable modules has • Remove the module whose number of
exceeded 10. points exceeds 1024 points.
• A module is installed exceeding the I/O points of • Replace the last module with the one
1024. whose number of occupied points is within
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• A module is installed crossing the I/O points of 1024. L02CPU
1024. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If L02CPU-P
■Collateral information the same error code is displayed again, the
• Common information: - cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Individual information: - module, I/O module, intelligent function
■Diagnostic timing module, END cover, branch module, or
• At power-on/At reset extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Reduce the number of connectable
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.] modules to 30 or less.
• The number of connectable modules has • Remove the module whose number of
exceeded 30. points exceeds 1024 points.
• A module is installed exceeding the I/O points of • Replace the last module with the one
1024. whose number of occupied points is within L02SCPU
• A module is installed crossing the I/O points of 1024. L02SCPU-P
1024. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If L02CPU
■Collateral information the same error code is displayed again, the L02CPU-P
• Common information: - cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
• Individual information: - module, I/O module, intelligent function
■Diagnostic timing module, END cover, branch module, or
• At power-on/At reset extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
341
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• A module which the QCPU cannot recognize
has been installed.
• Install a usable module.
• There was no response from the intelligent
• The intelligent function module/special
function module/special function module.
function module is experiencing a QCPU
■Collateral information
hardware fault. Please consult your local
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
Mitsubishi representative.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing RUN: Off
• At power-on/At reset ERR.:Flashing
2125
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• A module which the LCPU cannot recognize • Connect an applicable module. CPU Status:Stop
has been connected. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• There was no response from the intelligent the same error code is displayed again, the
function module. cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
LCPU
■Collateral information module, I/O module, intelligent function
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) module, END cover, branch module, or
• Individual information: - extension module. Please consult your
■Diagnostic timing local Mitsubishi representative.
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
The CPU module configuration in the multiple
CPU system is either of the following.
• Mount modules on the available slots so
• There are empty slots between the QCPU and
that the empty slots will be located on the
QCPU/motion controller.
right-hand side of the CPU module.
• A module other than the High Performance
• Remove the modules mounted on the left RUN: Off
model QCPU/Process CPU (including the
of the High Performance model QCPU or ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
2126 motion controller) is mounted on the left-hand
Process CPU. Mount a High Performance QnPH
side of the High Performance model
model QCPU or Process CPU on those CPU Status:Stop
QCPU/Process CPU.
slots. Mount the motion CPU on the right-
■Collateral information
hand side of the High Performance model
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
QCPU/Process CPU.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
The unusable module is mounted on the extension
base unit in the redundant system. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Remove the unusable module from the ERR.:Flashing
2128 QnPRH
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) extension base unit.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
An A/QnA series module that cannot be used is
mounted. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Remove the A/QnA series module that ERR.:Flashing QnU (except
2129
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) cannot be used. QnUDV)
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SP. UNIT VER. ERR.]
In a multiple CPU system, the control CPU of the
intelligent function module incompatible with the • Change the intelligent function module for
multiple CPU system is set to other than CPU the one compatible with the multiple CPU RUN: Off
Q00J/Q00/Q01
No.1. system (function version B). ERR.:Flashing
2150 QnPH
■Collateral information • Change the setting of the control CPU of
QnU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) the intelligent function module incompatible CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - with the multiple CPU system to CPU No.1.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
342
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP. UNIT VER. ERR.] A
Either of the following modules incompatible with
the redundant system has been mounted in a
redundant system.
Ensure that the module supports the use in a
• MELSECNET/H modules
redundant system when using any of the RUN: Off
• Ethernet modules
following modules. ERR.:Flashing
2151 • CC-Link IE Controller Network modules QnPRH
• MELSECNET/H modules
■Collateral information
• Ethernet modules CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.)
• CC-Link IE Controller Network modules
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At writing to programmable
controller
• Disconnect the module that cannot be
[SYSTEM LAY ERR.]
recognized.
A module which the LCPU cannot recognize is
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
connected. RUN: Off
the same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
2170 cause is a hardware failure of the CPU LCPU
• Common information: -
module, I/O module, intelligent function
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
module, END cover, branch module, or
■Diagnostic timing
At power-on/At reset extension module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.
[SYSTEM LAY ERR.]
• The branch module is not connected on the right
of the CPU module or the extension module.
• The branch module is not connected on the left • Connect the branch module on the right of RUN: Off
of the END cover. the CPU module or the extension module. ERR.:Flashing
2171 LCPU
■Collateral information • Connect the branch module on the left of
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) the END cover. CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SYSTEM LAY ERR.]
More than one branch module is connected on the
same block. RUN: Off
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
■Collateral information Disconnect branch modules other than the ERR.:Flashing
2172 LCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) first one.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SYSTEM LAY ERR.]
• The number of modules connected in the main
block exceeds 10.
• The number of modules connected in the • Reduce the number of modules connected RUN: Off
extension blocks exceeds 11. in the main block to 10 or less. ERR.:Flashing
2173 LCPU
■Collateral information • Reduce the number of modules connected
• Common information: Module No. (Block No.) in the extension blocks to 11 or less. CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SYSTEM LAY ERR.]
L06CPU
The number of extension blocks exceeds 3.
L06CPU-P
■Collateral information
Reduce the number of extension blocks to 3 L26CPU
• Common information: Module No. (Block No.)
or less. L26CPU-P
• Individual information: -
L26CPU-BT
■Diagnostic timing RUN: Off
L26CPU-PBT
• At power-on/At reset ERR.:Flashing
2174
[SYSTEM LAY ERR.]
The number of extension blocks exceeds 2. CPU Status:Stop
L02SCPU
■Collateral information
Reduce the number of extension blocks to 2 L02SCPU-P
• Common information: Module No. (Block No.)
or less. L02CPU
• Individual information: -
L02CPU-P
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
343
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SYSTEM LAY ERR.]
An END cover that does not support an extension
system is connected in an extension system. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Replace the END cover with one that ERR.:Flashing
2175 LCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Block No.) supports an extension system.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[SYSTEM LAY ERR.]
An extension cable is connected to the branch
module during operation. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Disconnect the extension cable connected ERR.:Flashing
2176 LCPU
• Common information: Module No. (Block No.) during operation.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MISSING PARA.]
There is no parameter file in the drive specified as
• Check and correct the valid parameter
valid parameter drive by the DIP switches.
drive settings made by the DIP switches. Qn(H)
■Collateral information
• Set the parameter file to the drive specified QnPH
• Common information: Drive Name
as valid parameter drive by the DIP QnPRH
• Individual information: -
switches.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[MISSING PARA.]
There is no parameter file at the program memory.
■Collateral information
Set the parameter file to the program
• Common information: Drive Name Q00J/Q00/Q01
memory.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[MISSING PARA.]
Parameter file does not exist in all drives where
parameters will be valid.
■Collateral information
Set a parameter file in a drive to be valid. QnU
• Common information: Drive Name
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN RUN: Off
[MISSING PARA.] ERR.:Flashing
2200
• When using a parameter file in an SD memory
card, the SD memory card is being disabled by CPU Status:Stop
SM606 (SD memory card forced disable
instruction).
• When using a parameter file in an SD memory • Cancel the SD memory card forced disable
card, the SD memory card cannot be used instruction.
QnUDV
because the CPU module is locked. • Set a parameter file in a drive other than an
■Collateral information SD memory card.
• Common information: Drive Name
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At writing to programmable
controller
[MISSING PARA.]
• There is no parameter file in any drive.
• When using a parameter file in an SD memory
card, the SD memory card is being disabled by
SM606 (SD memory card forced disable • Set a parameter file in a drive to be valid.
instruction). • Cancel the SD memory card forced disable LCPU
■Collateral information instruction.
• Common information: Drive Name
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
344
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[BOOT ERROR]
Q00J/Q00/Q01
A
The contents of the boot file are incorrect.
RUN: Off Qn(H)
■Collateral information
ERR.:Flashing QnPH
2210 • Common information: Drive Name Check the boot setting.
QnPRH
• Individual information: -
CPU Status:Stop QnU
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset LCPU
[BOOT ERROR]
File formatting is failed at a boot.
• Reboot. RUN: Off Qn(H)
■Collateral information
• The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU ERR.:Flashing QnPRH
2211 • Common information: Drive Name
module. Please consult your local QnU
• Individual information: -
Mitsubishi representative. CPU Status:Stop LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[BOOT ERROR]
The file was booted from the SD memory card to
the program memory or standard ROM but it was
not booted to the CPU module due to either of the
following reasons.
• The passwords for the password 32 do not
match between transfer source file and • Check the setting of the password 32 for RUN: Off
destination file. the transfer source file and destination files. ERR.:Flashing QnUDV
2213
• The password 32 is not configured for the • Delete the boot setting from the parameter LCPU
transfer source file while it is configured for the file of the SD memory card. CPU Status:Stop
destination file.
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[BOOT ERROR]
The CPU module is locked.
RUN: Off
■Collateral information When using the CPU module change function
ERR.:Flashing
2214 • Common information: - with SD memory card, do not lock the CPU QnUDV
• Individual information: - module.
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
The device information (number of points) backed
up by the device data backup function is different
from that configured in "PLC Parameter".
• Set the number of device points at the time
Perform a restoration per power-on and reset until
of backup to be identical to the device point RUN: Off
the number of device points is identical to the
value set in "PLC Parameter". Then turn off ERR.:Flashing QnU
2220 value set in "PLC Parameter" or until the backup
and on or reset the power supply. LCPU
data are deleted.
• Delete the backed up data, turn the power CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information
supply from off to on, and reset.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
The device information backed up by the device
data backup function is incomplete. (The power
may have been off or the CPU module may have
been reset during performing the backup.)
RUN: Off
Do not return the data when this error occurs.
ERR.:Flashing QnU
2221 Also, delete the incomplete device information at Reset the CPU module and run it again.
LCPU
the time of this error occurrence.
CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
345
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[RESTORE ERROR]
The model name of the restoration destination
CPU module is different from the one of the
RUN: Off
backup source CPU module. Execute a restore for the CPU module whose
ERR.:Flashing QnU
2225 ■Collateral information name is same as the backup source CPU
LCPU
• Common information: - module.
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
• The backup data file is corrupted. (The backup
data file does not match the check code.)
• Reading the backup data from the SRAM card
did not end successfully.
• Since the backup data may have been
• Since the write protect switch of the SRAM card
corrupted, execute a restoration using
is set to on (write inhibited), the checked QnU (except
other backup data.
"Restore for the first time only" setting cannot be QnUDV)
• Set the write protect switch of the SRAM
performed.
card to off (write enabled).
■Collateral information
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing RUN: Off
• At power-on/At reset ERR.:Flashing
2226
[RESTORE ERROR]
• The backup data file is corrupted. (The backup CPU Status:Stop
data file does not match the check code.)
• Reading the backup data from the SD memory
card did not end successfully.
• Since the backup data may have been
• The "Restore for the first time only" setting
corrupted, execute a restoration using
cannot be enabled because the write protect QnUDV
other backup data.
switch of the SD memory card has been set to LCPU
• Set the write protect switch of the SD
on (write-prohibited).
memory card to off (write-enabled).
■Collateral information
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
Writing the backup data to the restoration
destination drive did not end successfully. RUN: Off
The possible cause is a failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QnU
2227 module. Execute data restoration to another
• Common information: File name/Drive name LCPU
CPU module.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
Standard RAM capacity of the restoration-target
CPU module is insufficient. RUN: Off
• Install an extended SRAM cassette.
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
2228 • Replace the extended SRAM cassette with QnUDV
• Common information: -
the one with larger capacity.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
The CPU module is locked.
When using the CPU module change function RUN: Off
■Collateral information
with memory card or the CPU module data ERR.:Flashing
2229 • Common information: - QnUDV
backup/restoration function, do not lock the
• Individual information: -
CPU module. CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
346
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[RESTORE ERROR] A
• The system file does not exist in the backup
data to be restored.
• File(s) in the system file information does not RUN: Off
exist in the folder of the backed up data. Restore with any other backup data because ERR.:Flashing
2230 QnUDV
■Collateral information the backup data may have been corrupted.
• Common information: - CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
The data which is same as the one set the file
password 32 is restored to the restoration
To use the CPU module data RUN: Off
destination CPU module.
backup/restoration function, delete the file ERR.:Flashing
2231 ■Collateral information QnUDV
password 32 setting and then execute the
• Common information: -
function. CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
• The folder with the setting values of SD919 to
SD921 (Restoration target folder) does not exist • Check and correct the setting value of
in the SD memory card. SD919 to SD921 (Restoration target
RUN: Off
• The setting value of SD917 (Restoration target folder), and then execute the processing
ERR.:Flashing
2232 data setting) is out of range. again. QnUDV
■Collateral information • Check and correct the setting value of
CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: - SD917 (Restoration target data setting)
• Individual information: - and execute the processing again.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
Automatic restoration is executed while no SD
memory card is inserted. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Insert or re-insert the SD memory card and ERR.:Flashing
2233 QnUDV
• Common information: - then execute the processing again.
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
• Automatic restoration is executed while the
memory size exceeds the maximum capacity of
• Check the size of restoration target data so
the CPU module.
that it will not be larger than the memory
• Automatic restoration is executed while the RUN: Off
capacity, and execute the processing
number of files exceeds the number of storable ERR.:Flashing
2234 again. QnUDV
files of the CPU module.
• Check the number of files so that it will not
■Collateral information CPU Status:Stop
exceed the number of storable files, and
• Common information: -
execute the processing again.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
The CPU module status (such as programs,
parameters, and file structure) of restoration
• Restore the data with the CPU module
destination is different from the status at the time RUN: Off
status at the time of backup.
of backup. ERR.:Flashing
2235 • Set SD917 (Restoration target data setting) QnUDV
■Collateral information
to all the target data of backup and
• Common information: - CPU Status:Stop
restoration and then restore the data.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[LOAD ERROR]
The model of the load-destination CPU module is
different from that of the load-source CPU module. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Execute auto loading using the same model ERR.:Flashing
2240 LCPU
• Common information: - as that of the load-source CPU module.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
347
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[LOAD ERROR]
Reading of batch-save/load target data from the
SD memory card failed. RUN: Off
Execute auto loading using any other data
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
2241 because the batch-save/load target data may LCPU
• Common information: -
be corrupted.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[LOAD ERROR]
A system file (SVLDINF.QSL) does not exist in the
load-target folder. RUN: Off
Specify a folder where a system file
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
2242 (SVLDINF.QSL) is stored, and execute auto LCPU
• Common information: -
loading.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[LOAD ERROR]
The file password 32 of the load-destination file is
different from that of the load-source file. Or, a file
password 32 is not set to the load-source file while RUN: Off
Set the same file password 32 to the load-
the load-destination file has a password. ERR.:Flashing
2243 destination file and the load-source file, and LCPU
■Collateral information
execute auto loading.
• Common information: - CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[LOAD ERROR]
• When the folder number (1 to 99) is set in
SD909 (Auto loading target folder number), a
folder with the corresponding number does not
• Check that a folder with the number
exist in the SD memory card.
corresponding to the one set in SD909 RUN: Off
• The folder number out of the setting range
exists in the SD memory card, and execute ERR.:Flashing
2244 (other than 0 to 99) is set in SD909 (Auto LCPU
auto loading.
loading target folder number).
• Set the number in SD909 within the setting CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information
range, and execute auto loading.
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[LOAD ERROR]
Loading data to the load-destination drive has
failed. RUN: Off
The possible cause is a failure of the CPU
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
2245 module. Execute auto loading to another LCPU
• Common information: -
CPU module.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[LOAD ERROR]
• When the folder number (1 to 99) is set in
SD909 (Auto loading target folder number), an
SD memory card is not inserted.
• When the folder number (1 to 99) is set in
• Insert an SD memory card, and execute RUN: Off
SD909 (Auto loading target folder number), the
auto loading. ERR.:Flashing
2246 SD memory card access control switch of the LCPU
• Slide up the SD memory card access
CPU module is not slid down.
control switch, and execute auto loading. CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
348
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[LOAD ERROR] A
• After auto loading, the memory size exceeds the
capacity of the CPU module or SD memory
card. • Check the size of load-target data so that it
• After auto loading, the number of stored files will not be larger than the memory capacity, RUN: Off
exceeds the number of files that can be stored and execute auto loading. ERR.:Flashing
2247 LCPU
in the CPU module or SD memory card. • Check the number of files so that it will not
■Collateral information exceed the number of storable files, and CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: - execute auto loading.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[LOAD ERROR]
Auto loading was executed to a write-protected SD
memory card. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Cancel the write protection and execute the ERR.:Flashing
2248 LCPU
• Common information: - auto loading.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[INIT.TIME OVER]
Since an initial processing takes time, the host
CPU module cannot respond to communication
requests from other CPU modules in initial
Shorten the initial processing time.
communications at a system configuration of a RUN: Off
• Check the restoration setting or reconsider
multiple CPU system and other CPU modules ERR.:Flashing
2290 the number of files to be restored if the QnUDV
cannot be started up.
automatic restoration function of CPU
■Collateral information CPU Status:Stop
module is executed.
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[ICM. OPE. ERROR]
• A memory card was removed without turning on
SM609 (Memory card remove/insert enable
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Turn on SM609 (Memory card
flag). Qn(H)
remove/insert enable flag) and then
• A memory card was removed while SM600 QnPH
remove the memory card.
(Memory card usable flags) is on. QnPRH
• Check that SM600 (Memory card usable
■Collateral information QnU (except
flags) is off and then remove the memory
• Common information: Drive Name RUN: Off/On QnUDV)
card.
• Individual information: - ERR.:Flashing/On
2300 ■Diagnostic timing
• When memory card is inserted or removed CPU Status:
[ICM. OPE. ERROR] Stop/Continue*1
An SD memory card was removed without the
card being disabled.
■Collateral information QnUDV
Disable the card, and then remove it.
• Common information: Drive Name LCPU
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When SD memory card is inserted or removed
349
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• Format the memory card or SD memory
card.
• Reformat the memory card or SD memory
card.
[ICM. OPE. ERROR]
If the memory card is a flash card, write data
• The memory card or SD memory card has not
to the flash card in any of the following
been formatted.
methods. Qn(H)
• The formatting status of the memory card or SD
1) Write program memory to the ROM. QnPH
memory card is incorrect.
2) Write data to the CPU module (flash QnPRH
■Collateral information
ROM). QnU
• Common information: Drive Name
3) Back up data to the flash card. LCPU
• Individual information: -
4) Write image data to an external device,
■Diagnostic timing
• When memory card is inserted or removed such as a memory card writer.
If the same error code is displayed again, the
cause is a failure of the memory card or SD
memory card. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
[ICM. OPE. ERROR]
• Formatting an SD memory card is failed. RUN: Off/On
• Format the SD memory card. ERR.:Flashing/On
• SD memory card failure is detected.
• Reformat the SD memory card.
2301 ■Collateral information
• QnUDVCPU: Remove the SD memory card CPU Status: QnUDV
• Common information: Drive Name
and insert it again.
• Individual information: - Stop/Continue*1
• Replace the SD memory card.
■Diagnostic timing
• When memory card is inserted or removed
[ICM. OPE. ERROR]
The QCPU file does not exist in the Flash card.
Qn(H)
■Collateral information
QnPH
• Common information: Drive Name Write the QCPU file the Flash card
QnPRH
• Individual information: -
QnU
■Diagnostic timing
• When memory card is inserted or removed
[ICM. OPE. ERROR]
• SRAM card failure is detected. (It occurs when
automatic format is not set.)
• Writing parameters was performed during • Format SRAM card after changing battery
setting file registers. of SRAM card.
QnU (except
■Collateral information • Before operation, set the parameter for the
QnUDV)
• Common information: Drive Name file register to "Not available" and write it to
• Individual information: - the CPU module.
■Diagnostic timing
• When memory card is inserted or
removed/When writing to the memory card
[ICM. OPE. ERROR]
A memory card or SD memory card that cannot be • Format the memory card or SD memory
RUN: Off/On Qn(H)
used with a CPU module has been inserted. card.
ERR.:Flashing/On QnPH
■Collateral information • Reformat the memory card or SD memory
2302 QnPRH
• Common information: Drive Name card.
CPU Status: QnU
• Individual information: - • Check the memory card or SD memory
Stop/Continue*1 LCPU
■Diagnostic timing card.
• When memory card is inserted or removed
[CASSETTE ERROR] • Do not insert or remove an extended
An extended SRAM cassette is inserted or SRAM cassette during operation.
removed while the CPU module is powered on. • Check that the extended SRAM cassette is RUN: Off
■Collateral information securely installed to the CPU module. ERR.:Flashing
2350 QnUDV
• Common information: - • If the same error code is displayed again,
• Individual information: - the cause is a failure of the extended CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing SRAM cassette. Please consult your local
• Always Mitsubishi representative.
350
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[CASSETTE ERROR] A
A failure was detected in the inserted extended • Check that the extended SRAM cassette is
SRAM cassette. securely installed to the CPU module. RUN: Off
■Collateral information • If the same error code is displayed again, ERR.:Flashing
2351 QnUDV
• Common information: - the cause is a failure of the extended
• Individual information: - SRAM cassette. Please consult your local CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing Mitsubishi representative.
• Always
[CASSETTE ERROR]
An unsupported extended SRAM cassette is
inserted. RUN: Off
Replace the extended SRAM cassette with
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
2352 the one which is applicable for the QnUDV
• Common information: -
QnUDVCPU.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[FILE SET ERROR]
Automatic write to the standard ROM was
• Execute automatic write to the standard
performed on the CPU module that is incompatible
ROM on the CPU module which is
with automatic write to the standard ROM.
compatible with automatic write to the
(Memory card where automatic write to the
standard ROM
standard ROM was selected in the boot file was Qn(H)
• Write parameters and programs to the
fitted and the parameter enable drive was set to QnPH
standard ROM using the programming tool.
the memory card.) QnPRH
• Change the memory card for the one
■Collateral information
where automatic write to the standard ROM
• Common information: File name/Drive name
has not been set, and perform boot
• Individual information: -
operation from the memory card.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[FILE SET ERROR] Read the individual information of the error
The file specified with a parameter does not exist.
using the programming tool to identify the RUN: Off
■Collateral information
numeric value (parameter No.). Check the ERR.:Flashing
2400 • Common information: File name/Drive name QCPU (except
drive name and file name of the parameter
• Individual information: Parameter number QnUDV)
corresponding to the value, and correct it as CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
necessary. Create the specified file and write
• At power-on/At reset/At writing to programmable
controller/STOP RUN it to the CPU module.
[FILE SET ERROR]
• The file specified with a parameter does not
• Read the individual information of the error
exist.
using the programming tool to identify the
• When using a file in an SD memory card, the SD
numeric value (parameter No.). Check the
memory card is being disabled by SM606 (SD
drive name and file name of the parameter
memory card forced disable instruction). QnUDV
corresponding to the value, and correct it
■Collateral information LCPU
as necessary. Create the specified file and
• Common information: File name/Drive name
write it to the CPU module.
• Individual information: Parameter number
• Cancel the SD memory card forced disable
■Diagnostic timing
instruction.
• At power-on/At reset/At writing to programmable
controller/STOP RUN
351
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[FILE SET ERROR]
Program memory capacity was exceeded by
• Check and correct the parameters (boot
performing boot operation or automatic write to the
setting).
standard ROM.
• Delete unnecessary files in the program Qn(H)
■Collateral information
memory. QnPH
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Choose "Clear program memory" for boot QnPRH
• Individual information: Parameter number
in the parameter so that boot is started after
■Diagnostic timing
the program memory is cleared.
• At power-on/At reset/At writing to programmable
controller
[FILE SET ERROR]
• Check and correct the parameters (boot
Program memory capacity was exceeded by
setting).
performing boot operation.
• Delete unnecessary files in the program
■Collateral information
memory.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Choose "Clear program memory" for boot
• Individual information: Parameter number
in the parameter so that boot is started after
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset the program memory is cleared.
• Read the individual information of the error
[FILE SET ERROR]
using the programming tool to identify the
The file specified by parameters cannot be made.
numeric value (parameter No.). Check the
■Collateral information
drive name, file name, and size of the
• Common information: File name/Drive name
parameter corresponding to the value, and
• Individual information: Parameter number
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At writing to programmable • Format the drive.
controller/STOP RUN • Delete unnecessary files on the drive to
RUN: Off
increase free space.
ERR.:Flashing
2401 [FILE SET ERROR]
• Although setting is made to use the device data CPU Status:Stop
storage file, there is no empty capacity required
for creating the device data storage file in the
standard ROM. QnU
• When the latch data backup function (to LCPU
standard ROM) is used, there is no empty
capacity required for storing backup data in
Secure the empty capacity of the standard
standard ROM. (The parameter number
ROM.
"FFFFH" is displayed for the individual
information of the error.)
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At writing to programmable
controller/STOP RUN
[FILE SET ERROR]
• Standard RAM capacity is insufficient that error
history of the module cannot be stored.
• Standard RAM capacity is insufficient that the
file register data cannot be stored.
■Collateral information Secure sufficient space in the standard RAM.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At writing to programmable
controller/STOP RUN
[FILE SET ERROR]
When the extended data register and extended
link register are configured in the File Register
Extended Setting in the Device tab of "PLC • Correct the size for the file register file in
RUN: Off
Parameter", the size of the file register file is the PLC File tab of "PLC Parameter".
ERR.:Flashing QnU
2406 smaller than that specified in the PLC File tab. • Correct the setting for the "File Register
LCPU
■Collateral information Extended Setting" in the Device tab of
CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: File name/Drive name "PLC Parameter".
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• STOP RUN
352
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[FILE OPE. ERROR] A
• The specified program does not exist in the • Read individual information of the error
program memory. using the programming tool to identify the
• This error may occur when the ECALL, numeric value (program error location).
EFCALL, PSTOP, PSCAN, POFF or PLOW Check the error step corresponding to the
RUN: Off/On Qn(H)
instruction is executed. value and correct it as necessary. Create
ERR.:Flashing/On QnPH
• The specified file does not exist. the specified file and write it to the CPU
2410 QnPRH
• A required file is not set in the PLC File tab of module.
CPU Status: QnU
"PLC Parameter". • If the specified file does not exist, write the
Stop/Continue*1 LCPU
■Collateral information file to the target memory. Or correct the file
• Common information: File name/Drive name specification by a instruction.
• Individual information: Program error location • Set the required file in the PLC File tab of
■Diagnostic timing "PLC Parameter".
• When instruction executed
[FILE OPE. ERROR]
• The file cannot be specified by the program,
such as comment file.
• The specified program exists in the program
memory, but has not been registered in the
Read individual information of the error using RUN: Off/On Qn(H)
program setting of "PLC Parameter". This error
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On QnPH
may occur when the ECALL, EFCALL, PSTOP,
2411 value (program error location). Check the QnPRH
PSCAN, POFF or PLOW instruction is
error step corresponding to the value and CPU Status: QnU
executed.
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue*1 LCPU
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Program error location
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[FILE OPE. ERROR]
This SFC program file cannot be specified with the
Read individual information of the error using RUN: Off/On Qn(H)
program.
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On QnPH
■Collateral information
2412 value (program error location). Check the QnPRH
• Common information: File name/Drive name
error step corresponding to the value and CPU Status: QnU
• Individual information: Program error location
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue*1 LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• When instruction executed
[FILE OPE. ERROR] Read individual information of the error using
The file specified in the program was not written. the programming tool to identify the numeric RUN: Off/On
■Collateral information value (program error location). Check the ERR.:Flashing/On Qn(H)
2413 • Common information: File name/Drive name error step corresponding to the value and QnPH
• Individual information: Program error location correct it as necessary. CPU Status: QnPRH
■Diagnostic timing Check to ensure that the designated file has Stop/Continue*1
• When instruction executed not been write protected.
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
• Any of the program files are using a device that
• Read the common information of the error
is out of the range configured in the Device tab
using the programming tool to identify the
of "PLC Parameter".
numeric value (file name). Verify the device
• After changing the device setting in "PLC
assignments of the program file
Parameter", only the parameters were written to
corresponding to the value with its RUN: Off
the CPU module.
parameter setting, and correct them as ERR.:Flashing QCPU
• Although an SFC program exists, the number of
necessary. LCPU
step relay points is insufficient in the Device tab
• Whenever a device setting is changed, CPU Status:Stop
of "PLC Parameter".
write both the parameter and program file
■Collateral information
to the CPU module.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
2500 • To use the SFC program, set the number of
• Individual information: -
step relay points to appropriate value.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
• After changing the index modification setting in
"PLC Parameter", only the parameters were
• Whenever an index modification setting is RUN: Off
written to the CPU module.
changed in "PLC Parameter", batch-write ERR.:Flashing QnU
■Collateral information
the parameter and program file to the CPU LCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name
module. CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
353
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
More than one program files exist although no
program name is entered in the Program tab of Qn(H)
"PLC Parameter". Enter the program names in the Program tab QnPH
■Collateral information of "PLC Parameter". QnPRH
• Common information: File name/Drive name Or delete unnecessary programs. QnU
• Individual information: - LCPU
■Diagnostic timing RUN: Off
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN ERR.:Flashing
2501
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
• There are three or more program files. CPU Status:Stop
• The program name differs from the program
contents. • Delete unnecessary program files.
■Collateral information • Match the program name with the program Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Common information: File name/Drive name contents.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
The program file is incorrect.
Or the contents of the file are not programs.
■Collateral information Ensure that the program version is ***.QPG QCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name and the file contents are programs. LCPU
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing RUN: Off
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN ERR.:Flashing
2502
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
The program file is not the one for the redundant CPU Status:Stop
CPU. Create a program with GX Developer or PX
■Collateral information Developer specifying the redundant CPU
QnPRH
• Common information: File name/Drive name (Q12PRH/Q25PRH) as the PLC type, and
• Individual information: - write it to the CPU module.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
There are no program files at all.
RUN: Off
■Collateral information • Check program configuration.
ERR.:Flashing QCPU
2503 • Common information: File name/Drive name • Check parameters and program
LCPU
• Individual information: - configuration.
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
Two or more SFC normal programs or control
programs have been designated. Qn(H)
■Collateral information • Check program configuration. QnPH
• Common information: File name/Drive name • Check parameters and program QnPRH
• Individual information: - configuration. QnU
■Diagnostic timing RUN: Off LCPU
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/When SFC ERR.:Flashing
2504 program is executed
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.] CPU Status:Stop
There are two or more SFC programs.
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name Reduce the SFC programs to one. Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
354
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
Check for illegal accesses. If any illegal A
access is identified, take actions such as
disabling communication of the connection.
If it was identified not illegal, clear the error
[REMOTE PASS.FAIL]
and perform the following. (Clearing the error
The count of remote password mismatches
also clears the remote password mismatch
reached the upper limit. RUN: On
counts.)
■Collateral information ERR.:On QnU*3
2700 • Check if the remote password sent is
• Common information: - LCPU*3
correct.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
• Check if the remote password has been
■Diagnostic timing
• Always locked.
• Check if concurrent access was made from
multiple devices to one connection by UDP.
• Check if the upper limit of the remote
password mismatch count is too low.
[SNTP OPE.ERROR]
Time setting failed when the programmable • Check if the time setting function is set up
RUN: Off/On
controller was powered ON or reset. correctly.
ERR.:Flashing/On
■Collateral information • Check if the specified SNTP server is QnU*3
2710
• Common information: - operating normally, or if any failure has LCPU*3
CPU Status:
• Individual information: - occurred on the network connected to the
Stop/Continue*1
■Diagnostic timing specified SNTP server computer.
• When time setting function is executed
[KEY AUTHEN. ERR.]
• The security key set to the file is corrupted and
does not match the one set to the CPU module.
• The security key set to the CPU module is
• Rewrite the file to the CPU module. RUN: Off
corrupted and does not match the one set to the
• The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU ERR.:Flashing
2720 file. QnUDV
module. Please consult your local
■Collateral information
Mitsubishi representative. CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
• Do not detach the display unit during
Appendix 1.4 List of error codes (2000 to 2999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
[DISPLAY ERROR]
operation.
The display unit was attached or detached while
• Ensure that the display unit is securely
the CPU module is on. RUN: On
attached to the CPU module.
■Collateral information ERR.:On
2900 • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If LCPU
• Common information: -
the same error is displayed again, the CPU
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
module or display unit is faulty. Please
■Diagnostic timing
• Always consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
[DISPLAY ERROR]
• Ensure that the display unit is securely
A failure was detected in the display unit. (in a
attached to the CPU module.
initial processing) RUN: On
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
■Collateral information ERR.:On
2901 the same error is displayed again, the CPU LCPU
• Common information: -
module or display unit is faulty. Please
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
consult your local Mitsubishi
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset representative.
[DISPLAY ERROR]
• Ensure that the display unit is securely
A failure was detected in the display unit. (during
attached to the CPU module.
operation) RUN: On
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
■Collateral information ERR.:On
2902 the same error is displayed again, the CPU LCPU
• Common information: -
module or display unit is faulty. Please
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
consult your local Mitsubishi
■Diagnostic timing
• Always representative.
[CAN'T ACTIVATE]
A device required for the license authentication
does not exist. RUN:Off
■Collateral information Please consult your local Mitsubishi ERR.:Flashing
2998 LCPU
• Common information: - representative.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
355
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[CAN'T ACTIVATE]
The specified license key is incorrect.
RUN:Off
■Collateral information
Check the license key and specify correct ERR.:Flashing
2999 • Common information: - LCPU
one.
• Individual information: -
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
*1 The operating status of the CPU module after an error has occurred can be set in parameter. (LED indication changes
according to the status.)
*2 The operating status of each intelligent function module after an error has occurred can be set in parameter (stop or
continue).
*3 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU and Built-in Ethernet port LCPU
356
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999)
A
The following table shows the error messages, the error contents and causes, and the corrective actions for the error
codes (3000 to 3999).
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[PARAMETER ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the intelligent function
module under control of another CPU is specified
• Specify the start I/O number of the
in the interrupt pointer setting of the PLC
intelligent function module under control of Qn(H)
parameter.
the host CPU. QnPH
■Collateral information
• Delete the interrupt pointer setting of the QnU
• Common information: File name/Drive name
parameter.
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The PLC parameter settings for timer time limit
setting, the RUN-PAUSE contact, the common
pointer number, general data processing, number
of empty slots, system interrupt settings, baud rate
setting, and service processing setting are outside
the range for the CPU module. QCPU
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
In a program memory check, the check capacity
has not been set within the range applicable for • Check that the I/O assignment setting of RUN: Off
the CPU module. the PLC parameter and the ERR.:Flashing
3000
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
■Collateral information mounted/connected modules match. QnPH
• Common information: File name/Drive name • Read the individual information of the error CPU Status:Stop QnPRH
• Individual information: Parameter number using the programming tool to identify the
■Diagnostic timing numeric value (parameter No.). Check the
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to parameters corresponding to the value,
programmable controller and correct them as necessary.
[PARAMETER ERROR] • Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU
The parameter setting in the individual information module, reload the CPU power supply
of the error (SD16) is invalid. and/or reset the module.
■Collateral information • If the same error occurs, the cause is a
QCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name hardware failure. Please consult your local
LCPU
• Individual information: Parameter number Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The ATA card is set to the memory card slot when
the specified drive for the file register is set to
"memory card (ROM)" and [Use the following file]
or [Use the same file name as the program] (either
one is allowed) is set in the PLC file setting. QnU (except
■Collateral information QnUDV)
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
357
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[PARAMETER ERROR]
Any of the values for the Timer Limit Setting, RUN- • Read the individual information of the error
PAUSE Contacts, Common Pointer No., Points using the programming tool to identify the
Occupied by Empty Slot, System Interrupt Setting, numeric value (parameter No.). Check the
or Service Processing Setting option configured in parameters corresponding to the value,
RUN: Off
"PLC Parameter" are outside the range of the CPU and correct them as necessary.
ERR.:Flashing
3000 module. • If the error occurs even after the LCPU
■Collateral information parameters are corrected, the cause is a
CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: File name/Drive name failure of the program memory or standard
• Individual information: Parameter number RAM of the CPU module, or SD memory
■Diagnostic timing card. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to representative.
programmable controller
• Check that the I/O assignment setting of
the PLC parameter and the
mounted/connected modules match.
[PARAMETER ERROR] • Read the individual information of the error
The parameter settings are corrupted. using the programming tool to identify the
■Collateral information numeric value (parameter No.). Check the RUN: Off
• Common information: File name/Drive name parameters corresponding to the value, ERR.:Flashing QCPU
3001
• Individual information: Parameter number and correct them as necessary. LCPU
■Diagnostic timing • Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU CPU Status:Stop
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to module, reload the CPU power supply
programmable controller and/or reset the module.
• If the same error occurs, the cause is a
hardware failure. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
[PARAMETER ERROR]
When "Use the following file" is selected for the file
register in the PLC file setting of "PLC Parameter",
the specified file does not exist although the file
register capacity has been set. Qn(H)
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common information: File name/Drive name QnPRH
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller • Check that the I/O assignment setting of
[PARAMETER ERROR] the PLC parameter and the
When "Use the following file" is selected for File mounted/connected modules match.
Register in the PLC File tab of "PLC Parameter" • Read the individual information of the error
and "Capacity" is not set, the file register file does using the programming tool to identify the
not exist in the specified memory. numeric value (parameter No.). Check the RUN: Off
■Collateral information parameters corresponding to the value, ERR.:Flashing
3002
• Common information: File name/Drive name and correct them as necessary.
• Individual information: Parameter number • Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing module, reload the CPU power supply
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to and/or reset the module.
programmable controller • If the same error occurs, the cause is a
QnU
[PARAMETER ERROR] hardware failure. Please consult your local
LCPU
When "Use the following file" is selected for a Mitsubishi representative.
device data storage file in the PLC File tab of "PLC
Parameter" and "Capacity" is not set, the device
data storage file does not exist in the specified
memory.
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
358
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[PARAMETER ERROR] A
The automatic refresh range of the multiple CPU
system exceeded the file register capacity.
■Collateral information Qn(H)
Change the file register file for the one that
• Common information: File name/Drive name QnPH
the entire target range can be refreshed.
• Individual information: Parameter number QnU
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction or a COM instruction
executed
• Read the individual information of the error
[PARAMETER ERROR]
using the programming tool to identify the
The number of device points set in the Device tab
numeric value (parameter No.). Check the
of "PLC Parameter" is outside the range of the
parameters corresponding to the value,
specifications of the CPU module.
and correct them as necessary.
■Collateral information QCPU
• If the error occurs even after the
• Common information: File name/Drive name LCPU
parameters are corrected, the cause is a
• Individual information: Parameter number
failure of the program memory, memory
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to card, or SD memory card of the CPU
programmable controller module. Please consult your local
RUN: Off
Mitsubishi representative.
ERR.:Flashing
3003 [PARAMETER ERROR]
The setting of the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic CPU Status:Stop
refresh range crosses over the boundary between
the internal user device and the extended data
Set the refresh range so that it does not cross
register (D) or extended link register (W).
over the boundary between the internal user QnUDV
■Collateral information
device and the extended data register (D) or LCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name
extended link register (W).
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic refresh range
exceeded the file register capacity.
■Collateral information • Change the file register file for the one that
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Common information: File name/Drive name the entire target range can be refreshed. QnUDV
• Individual information: Parameter number • Increase the file register capacity, or LCPU
■Diagnostic timing change the refresh settings.
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller/When an END
instruction or a COM instruction executed
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The parameter file is incorrect.
Alternatively, the contents of the file are not
parameters. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Ensure that the parameter file version is ERR.:Flashing QCPU
3004
• Common information: File name/Drive name ***.QPA and the file contents are parameters. LCPU
• Individual information: Parameter number CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
• Read the individual information of the error
using the programming tool to identify the
numeric value (parameter No.). Check the
[PARAMETER ERROR]
parameters corresponding to the value,
The contents of the parameter are broken.
and correct them as necessary. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Qn(H)
• Write the modified parameter items to the ERR.:Flashing
3005 • Common information: File name/Drive name QnPH
CPU module again, and power-on the
• Individual information: Parameter number QnPRH
programmable controller or reset the CPU CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN module.
• If the same error occurred, the cause is a
hardware failure. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
359
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• Delete the setting of the Q02CPU' s high
[PARAMETER ERROR]
speed interrupt. To use high speed
• The high speed interrupt is set in a Q02CPU.
interrupts, change the CPU module to one
• The high speed interrupt is set in a multiple CPU
of the Q02H/Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU.
system.
• To use a multiple CPU system, delete the
• The high speed interrupt is set when a
setting of the high-speed interrupt. To use
QA1S6B or QA6B is used.
high speed interrupts, change the system
• No module is installed at the I/O address
to a single CPU system. Qn(H)
designated by the high speed interrupt.
• To use either the QA1S6B or QA6B,
■Collateral information
delete the setting of the high speed
• Common information: File name/Drive name
interrupt.
• Individual information: Parameter number
• To use high speed interrupts, do not use
■Diagnostic timing RUN: Off
the QA1S6B/QA6B.
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to ERR.:Flashing
3006 programmable controller • Re-examine the I/O address designated by
the high speed interrupt setting.
CPU Status:Stop
[PARAMETER ERROR]
• No module is installed at the I/O address
designated by the high speed interrupt or the I/O
address is outside the range.
• The CPU device setting for high speed buffer • Re-examine the I/O address designated by
transfer is outside the range. the high speed interrupt setting.
QnUDV
■Collateral information • Re-examine the buffer range designated by
• Common information: File name/Drive name the high speed interrupt setting.
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The parameter file in the drive specified as valid
parameter drive by the DIP switches is
inapplicable for the CPU module. RUN: Off
Create parameters using the programming
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
3007 tool and write them to the drive specified as a QnPRH
• Common information: File name/Drive name
parameter-valid drive by the DIP switches.
• Individual information: Parameter number CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the modules for AnS, A,
Q2AS and QnA have been set to multiple control
Re-set the parameter I/O assignment to RUN: Off
CPUs.
control them under one CPU module. ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
3009 ■Collateral information
(Change the parameters of all CPUs in the QnU
• Common information: File name/Drive name
multiple CPU system.) CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The parameter-set number of CPU modules differs
The number of CPU modules in the multiple
from the actual number in a multiple CPU system.
CPU system must be the same as the value RUN: Off
■Collateral information
derived as follows: (the number of CPU ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
3010 • Common information: File name/Drive name
modules set in the multiple CPU setting) - QnPH
• Individual information: Parameter number
(the number of PLC (empty) slots set in the CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to I/O assignment).
programmable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
Multiple CPU setting or control CPU setting differs
from that of the reference CPU settings in a
multiple CPU system. RUN: Off
Match the multiple CPU setting or control Q00/Q01
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
3012 CPU setting in the PLC parameter with that of Qn(H)
• Common information: File name/Drive name
the reference CPU (CPU No.1) settings. QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
360
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[PARAMETER ERROR] A
Multiple CPU auto refresh setting is any of the
following in a multiple CPU system.
Check the following in the refresh setting in
• When a bit device is specified as a refresh
the multiple CPU settings window, and
device, a number other than a multiple of 16 is
correct the setting.
specified for the refresh-starting device.
• When specifying the bit device, specify a
• The device specified is other than the one that
multiple of 16 for the refresh starting Qn(H)
may be specified.
device. QnPH
• The number of send points is an odd number.
• Specify the device that may be specified for
■Collateral information
the refresh device.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Set the number of send points to an even
• Individual information: Parameter number
number.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
Multiple CPU auto refresh setting is any of the
following in a multiple CPU system.
• The total number of transmission points is Check the following in the refresh setting in
greater than the maximum number of refresh the multiple CPU settings window, and
points. correct the setting.
Q00/Q01
■Collateral information • The total number of transmission points is RUN: Off
• Common information: File name/Drive name within the maximum number of refresh ERR.:Flashing
3013
• Individual information: Parameter number points.
■Diagnostic timing CPU Status:Stop
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
Check the following in the refresh setting in
Multiple CPU auto refresh setting is any of the
the multiple CPU settings window, and
following in a multiple CPU system.
correct the setting.
• The device specified is other than the one that
• Specify the device that may be specified for
may be specified.
the refresh device.
• The number of send points is an odd number.
• Set the number of send points to an even
• The total number of send points is greater than
number.
the maximum number of refresh points.
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Set the total number of send points within
• The setting of the refresh range crosses over
the range of the maximum number of
the boundary between the internal user device QnU
refresh points.
and the extended data register (D) or extended
• Set the refresh range so that it does not
link register (W).
cross over the boundary between the
• No device is set in the host CPU send range.
internal user device and the extended data
■Collateral information
register (D) or extended link register (W).
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• For the send range of the host CPU,
• Individual information: Parameter number
refresh target device must be specified. If a
■Diagnostic timing
send range is not necessary, delete the
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller applicable send range.
[PARAMETER ERROR]
• In a multiple CPU system, the online module
change parameter (multiple CPU system
parameter) settings differ from those of the
reference CPU.
• In a multiple CPU system, the online module
change setting is enabled although the CPU • Match the online module change parameter
module mounted does not support online with that of the reference CPU. RUN: Off
Qn(H)
module change parameter. • If the CPU module that does not support ERR.:Flashing
3014 QnPH
• In a multiple CPU system, online module online module change is mounted, replace
QnU
change parameter was corrected and then it it with the CPU module that supports online CPU Status:Stop
was written to the CPU module. module change.
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At writing to programmable
controller
361
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[PARAMETER ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system configuration, the CPU
verified is different from the one set in the
Read the individual information of the error
parameter setting.
using the programming tool to identify the RUN: Off
■Collateral information
numeric value (parameter No./CPU No.). ERR.:Flashing
3015 • Common information: File name/Drive name QnU
Check the parameters and its configuration
• Individual information: Parameter number/CPU
corresponding to the value, and correct them CPU Status:Stop
No.
as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The CPU module incompatible with multiple CPU
synchronized boot-up is set as the target for the
synchronized boot-up in the [Multiple CPU
RUN: Off
synchronous startup setting]. Delete the CPU module incompatible with
ERR.:Flashing
3016 ■Collateral information multiple CPU synchronized boot-up from the QnU
• Common information: File name/Drive name setting.
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Parameter number/CPU
No.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
Write the parameters configured in "PLC
[PARAMETER ERROR]
parameter" and "Network parameter" and
The parameter file is damaged.
remote password to a parameter-valid drive, RUN: Off
■Collateral information Qn(H)
and power on the system again or reset the ERR.:Flashing
3040 • Common information: - QnPH
CPU module.
• Individual information: - QnPRH
If the same error occurs, the cause is a CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset hardware failure. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
[PARAMETER ERROR]
Write the intelligent function module
Parameter file of intelligent function module is
parameter to the parameter-valid drive, and
damaged. RUN: Off
power on the system again or reset the CPU Qn(H)
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
3041 module. QnPH
• Common information: -
If the same error occurs, the cause is a QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
hardware failure. Please consult your local
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset Mitsubishi representative.
• Write the parameters configured in "PLC
parameter" and "Network parameter" and
remote password to a parameter-valid
drive, and power on the system again or
reset the CPU module. If the same error
occurs, the cause is a hardware failure.
[PARAMETER ERROR] Please consult your local Mitsubishi
The system file that have stored the remote representative.
password setting information is damaged. • When a valid drive for parameter is set to RUN: Off
Qn(H)
■Collateral information other than [program memory], set the ERR.:Flashing
3042 QnPH
• Common information: - parameter file (PARAM) at the boot file
QnPRH
• Individual information: - setting to be able to transmit to the program CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing memory. Write the parameters configured
• At power-on/At reset in "PLC parameter" and "Network
parameter" and remote password to a
parameter-valid drive, and power on the
system again or reset the CPU module. If
the same error occurs, the cause is a
hardware failure. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
362
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[LINK PARA. ERROR] A
In a multiple CPU system, the CC-Link IE module
controlled by another CPU is specified as the start • Delete the network parameter of the CC-
I/O number of the CC-Link IE module. Link IE module controlled by another CPU. Qn(H)
■Collateral information • Change the setting to the start I/O number QnPRH
• Common information: File name/Drive name of the CC-Link IE module controlled by host QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number CPU.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The network parameter of the CC-Link IE
operating as the normal station is overwritten to
the control station. Alternatively, the network
parameter for the CC-Link IE module that is
operating as a normal station has been changed
to the control station. (The network parameter is Reset the CPU module.
updated on the module by resetting.)
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
Qn(H)
• Check the network parameters and actual
[LINK PARA. ERROR] QnPH
mounting status, and if they differ, make
• The number of modules actually mounted is QnPRH
them matched. If any of the network
different from that is set in Network parameter QnU
parameters is corrected, write it to the CPU
for the CC-Link IE module. LCPU
module. RUN: Off
• The start I/O number of the actually mounted
• Check the set number of extension base ERR.:Flashing
3100 module is different from the one set in the
units.
network parameter of the CC-Link IE.
• Check the connection status of the CPU Status:Stop
• Parameter-set data cannot be used.
extension base units and extension cables.
• The network type of CC-Link IE is overwritten
Check the connection of the GOT if it is
during power-on. (When changing the network
bus-connected to the main base unit or
type, switch RESET to RUN.)
extension base unit.
■Collateral information
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Common information: File name/Drive name
If an error occurs even after taking the above
• Individual information: Parameter number
measures, the cause is a hardware failure.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
• Check the network parameters and actual
mounting status, and if they differ, make
them matched. If any of the network
[LINK PARA. ERROR] parameters is corrected, write it to the CPU
• The CC-Link IE module is specified for the start
module.
I/O number of network parameter in the
• Check the set number of extension base
MELSECNET/H.
units.
• The MELSECNET/H module is specified for the Qn(H)
• Check the connection status of the
start I/O number of network parameter in the QnPH
extension base units and extension cables.
CC-Link IE. QnPRH
Check the connection of the GOT if it is
■Collateral information QnU
bus-connected to the main base unit or
• Common information: File name/Drive name
extension base unit.
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN If an error occurs even after taking the above
measures, the cause is a hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
363
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• Check the network parameters and actual
mounting status, and if they differ, make
them matched. If any of the network
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
parameters is corrected, write it to the CPU
• Although the CC-Link IE module is mounted,
module.
network parameter for the CC-Link IE module is
• Check the set number of extension base
not set.
units.
• Although the CC-Link IE and MELSECNET/H Qn(H)
• Check the connection status of the
modules are mounted, network parameter for QnPH
extension base units and extension cables.
the MELSECNET/H module is not set. QnPRH
Check the connection of the GOT if it is
■Collateral information QnU
bus-connected to the main base unit or
• Common information: File name/Drive name
extension base unit.
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN If an error occurs even after taking the above
measures, the cause is a hardware failure.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
• Check the network parameters and actual
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
mounting status, and if they differ, make
• Although the CC-Link IE module is mounted,
them matched. If any of the network
network parameter for the CC-Link IE module is
parameters is corrected, write it to the CPU
not set.
module.
■Collateral information LCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name
If an error occurs even after taking the above RUN: Off
• Individual information: Parameter number
measures, the cause is a hardware failure. ERR.:Flashing
3100 ■Diagnostic timing
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
representative. CPU Status:Stop
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the MELSECNET/H
under control of another CPU is specified as the • Delete the MELSECNET/H network
start I/O number in the network setting parameter parameter of the MELSECNET/H under Q00/Q01
of the MELSECNET/H. control of another CPU. Qn(H)
■Collateral information • Change the setting to the start I/O number QnPH
• Common information: File name/Drive name of the MELSECNET/H under control of the QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number host CPU.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The network parameter of the MELSECNET/H
operating as the normal station is overwritten to
the control station. Or, the network parameter of
the MELSECNET/H operating as the control
Qn(H)
station is overwritten to the normal station. (The
QnPH
network parameter is updated on the module by Reset the CPU module.
QnPRH
resetting.)
QnU
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
364
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• Check the network parameters and actual A
[LINK PARA. ERROR] mounting status, and if they differ, make
• The number of modules actually mounted is
them matched. If any of the network
different from that is set in Network parameter
parameters is corrected, write it to the CPU
for MELSECNET/H.
module.
• The start I/O number of actually installed
• Check the set number of extension base
modules is different from that designated in the
units.
network parameter of MELSECNET/H.
• Check the connection status of the
• Parameter-set data cannot be used.
extension base units and extension cables.
• The network type of MELSECNET/H is
Check the connection of the GOT if it is QCPU
overwritten during power-on. (When changing
bus-connected to the main base unit or
the network type, switch RESET to RUN.)
extension base unit.
• The mode switch of MELSECNET/H module is
• Set the mode switch of MELSECNET/H RUN: Off
outside the range.
module within the range. ERR.:Flashing
3100 ■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
If an error occurs even after taking the above CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Parameter number
measures, the cause is a hardware failure.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• Read the individual information of the error
A CC-Link IE module with a version that does not
using the programming tool to identify the
support items set in the network parameter is
numeric value (parameter No.). Check the
mounted/connected.
parameters corresponding to the value, QnU
■Collateral information
and correct them as necessary. LCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Mount/connect a CC-Link IE module with a
• Individual information: Parameter number
version that supports items set in the
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN network parameter.
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The link refresh range exceeded the file register
capacity. Qn(H)
• Change the file register file for the one that
■Collateral information QnPH
the entire target range can be refreshed.
• Common information: File name/Drive name QnPRH
• Increase the capacity of the file register, or
• Individual information: Parameter number QnU
reduce the link refresh range.
■Diagnostic timing LCPU
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• When an END instruction or a COM instruction
executed
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• When the station number of the MELSECNET/H
module is 0, the PLC-to-PLC network parameter
has been set.
RUN: Off
• When the station number of the MELSECNET/H Qn(H)
Correct the type or station number of the ERR.:Flashing
3101 module is other than 0, the remote master QnPH
MELSECNET/H module in the network
parameter setting has been made. QnPRH
parameter to meet the used system. CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information QnU
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The refresh parameter for the CC-Link IE module
Qn(H)
is outside the range.
QnPH
■Collateral information Set the refresh parameter within the range of
QnPRH
• Common information: File name/Drive name device setting.
QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number
LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
365
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• The refresh parameter of MELSECNET/H and
MELSECNET/10 is outside the setting range.
• Set the refresh parameter within the range
• The setting of the network refresh range
of device setting.
crosses over the boundary between the internal
• Set the network refresh range so that it
user device and the extended data register (D)
does not cross over the boundary between QCPU
or extended link register (W).
the internal user device and the extended
■Collateral information
data register (D) or extended link register
• Common information: File name/Drive name
(W).
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
A multi-remote I/O network was configured using a
module that does not support the MELSECNET/H
multi-remote I/O network.
Use a module that supports the
■Collateral information QnPH
MELSECNET/H multi-remote I/O network.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• The system A of the MELSECNET/H remote
master station has been set to other than
Station No. 0. • Set the system A of the MELSECNET/H
• The system B of the MELSECNET/H remote remote master station to Station No. 0.
master station has been set to Station No. 0. • Set the system B of the MELSECNET/H QnPRH
■Collateral information remote master station to any of Station No.
• Common information: File name/Drive name 1 to 64.
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN RUN: Off
ERR.:Flashing
3101 [LINK PARA. ERROR]
Since the number of points of the B/W device set
in [Device] of the PLC parameter is lower than the CPU Status:Stop
number of B/W refresh device points shown in the
following table when parameters of the
MELSECNET/H are not set, the refresh between
the CPU module and the MELSECNET/H cannot
be performed.
No. of refresh device No. of refresh device
Refresh device
points of B device points of W device Set the refresh parameter of the Qn(H)
1
8192 points 8192 points MELSECNET/H in accordance with the QnPH
(8192 points×1 module) (8192 points×1 module)
number of points of B/W devices set in QnPRH
No. of 2
8192 points 8192 points [Device] of the PLC parameter. QnU
(4096 points×2 modules) (4096 points×2 modules)
mounted
network
modules 6144 points 6144 points
3
(2048 points×3 modules) (2048 points×3 modules)
8192 points 8192 points
4
(2048 points×4 modules) (2048 points×4 modules)
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The setting of the network refresh range crosses
over the boundary between the internal user
device and the extended data register (D) or Set the network refresh range so that it does
extended link register (W). not cross over the boundary between the QnU
■Collateral information internal user device and the extended data LCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name register (D) or extended link register (W).
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
366
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[LINK PARA. ERROR] A
A CC-Link IE module parameter error was
Qn(H)
detected.
QnPH
■Collateral information
QnPRH
• Common information: File name/Drive name
QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number
LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN • Correct and write the network parameters.
• If an error occurs again even after it is
[LINK PARA. ERROR] corrected, the cause is a hardware failure.
• The network module detected a network
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
parameter error.
representative.
• A MELSECNET/H network parameter error was
detected.
QCPU
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The station No. specified in pairing setting are not
correct.
• The stations are not numbered consecutively.
Refer to the troubleshooting of the network
• Pairing setting has not been made for the CPU
module, and if the error is due to incorrect
module at the normal station. QnPRH
pairing setting, reexamine the pairing setting
■Collateral information
of the network parameter.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The CC-Link IE Controller Network module whose
RUN: Off
first 5 digits of serial No. is "09041" or earlier is
ERR.:Flashing
3102 mounted. Mount the CC-Link IE Controller Network
■Collateral information module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is
CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: File name/Drive name "09042" or later.
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• Different network types are set between the
control station and the normal station (CC IE
Control Ext. Mode/Normal Mode).
• Set the same network type (CC IE Control
• The parameter in which "CC IE Control Ext.
Ext. Mode/Normal Mode) for the control
Mode" is set for "Network Type" was transferred
station and the normal station.
to the CPU module that does not support the
• Do not use the parameter in which "CC IE
send points expansion function.
Control Ext. Mode" is set for "Network
• The parameter in which "CC IE Control Ext.
Type" for the CPU module that does not QnU
Mode" is set was backed up to a memory card
support the send points expansion function.
or GOT and then restored to the CPU module
Or, use the CPU module and the CC-Link
that does not support the send points expansion
IE Controller Network module that support
function.
the send points expansion function in the
■Collateral information
same network.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
Group cyclic function in CC-Link IE Controller
Network that does not correspond to group cyclic
function is set.
Set group cyclic function in function version D
■Collateral information
or later of CC-Link IE Controller Network.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
367
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
Pairing setting in CC-Link IE Controller Network
modules installed in CPUs except for redundant
RUN: Off Q00J/Q00/Q01
CPUs was performed.
Examine the pairing setting for the network ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
■Collateral information
parameter in the control station. QnPH
• Common information: File name/Drive name
CPU Status:Stop QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
A CC-Link IE module with a version that does not
support items set in the network parameter is
• Correct and write the network parameters. RUN: Off
mounted/connected.
• Mount/connect a CC-Link IE module with a ERR.:Flashing
3102 ■Collateral information QnU
version that supports items set in the
• Common information: File name/Drive name
network parameter. CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• LB/LW own station send range at LB/LW4000 or
later was set.
RUN: Off
• LB/LW setting (2) was performed.
Correct the network range assignments of the ERR.:Flashing
■Collateral information Q00J/Q00/Q01
network parameter for the control station.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, Ethernet interface
module under control of another station is • Delete the Ethernet network parameter of
specified to the start I/O number of the Ethernet Ethernet interface module under control of Q00/Q01
network parameter. another station. Qn(H)
■Collateral information • Change the setting to the start I/O number QnPH
• Common information: File name/Drive name of Ethernet interface module under control QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number of the host station.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• Although the number of modules has been set
to one or greater number in the Ethernet module
count parameter setting, the number of actually
mounted module is zero.
• The start I/O No. of the Ethernet network
QCPU
parameter differs from the I/O No. of the actually
RUN: Off LCPU
mounted module.
ERR.:Flashing
3103 ■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing • Correct and write the network parameters.
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN • If an error occurs again even after it is
[LINK PARA. ERROR] corrected, the cause is a hardware failure.
• In the redundant system, although "Ethernet Please consult your local Mitsubishi
(Main base)" is selected for Network type, the representative.
Ethernet module is mounted on the extension
base unit.
• In the redundant system, although "Ethernet
(Extension base)" is selected for Network type,
QnPRH
the Ethernet module is mounted on the main
base unit.
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
368
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[LINK PARA. ERROR] A
• The Ethernet, MELSECNET/H and
MELSECNET/10 use the same network
number.
• The network number, station number or group
number set in the network parameter is out of
range.
• The specified I/O number is outside the range of QCPU
the used CPU module.
• The Ethernet parameter settings are incorrect.
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name • Correct and write the network parameters.
RUN: Off
• Individual information: Parameter number • If an error occurs again even after it is
ERR.:Flashing
3104 ■Diagnostic timing corrected, the cause is a hardware failure.
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN Please consult your local Mitsubishi
CPU Status:Stop
[LINK PARA. ERROR] representative.
• The network number, station number or group
number of the Ethernet module set in the
network parameter is out of range.
• The start I/O number of the Ethernet module set
in the network parameter is out of range.
LCPU
• The Ethernet parameter settings are incorrect.
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the CC-Link module
under control of another station is specified as the • Delete the CC-Link network parameter of
start I/O number of the CC-Link network the CC-Link module under control of Q00/Q01
parameter. another station. Qn(H)
■Collateral information • Change the setting to the start I/O number QnPH
• Common information: File name/Drive name of the CC-Link module under control of the QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number host station.
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• Although one or more CC-Link modules were
configured in "Network Parameter", no CC-Link
modules are installed in the system. The start
L02SCPU
I/O number in the common parameters is
L02SCPU-P
different from that of the actually mounted • Correct and write the network parameters.
L02CPU
module. • If an error occurs again even after it is
L02CPU-P
• The station type of the CC-Link module count corrected, the cause is a hardware failure.
L06CPU
setting parameters is different from that of the Please consult your local Mitsubishi RUN: Off
L06CPU-P
actually mounted station. representative. ERR.:Flashing
3105 L26CPU
■Collateral information
L26CPU-P
• Common information: File name/Drive name CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• Although two or more CC-Link modules were
configured in "Network Parameter", only one
CC-Link modules are installed in the system.
The start I/O number of the common parameter
specified in "Network Parameter" does not
correspond to the system.
L26CPU-BT
• The station type specified in the Network
L26CPU-PBT
Parameter dialog box for CC-Link does not
correspond to the system.
■Collateral information
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
369
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• CC-Link module whose station type is set to
"master station (compatible with redundant
function)" is mounted on the extension base unit
in the redundant system. • Correct and write the network parameters.
RUN: Off
• CC-Link module whose station type is set to • If an error occurs again even after it is
ERR.:Flashing
3105 "master station (extension base)" is mounted on corrected, the cause is a hardware failure. QnPRH
the main base unit in the redundant system. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information representative.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The CC-Link link refresh range exceeded the file
register capacity. Qn(H)
■Collateral information QnPH
Change the file register file for the one that
• Common information: File name/Drive name QnPRH
the entire target range can be refreshed.
• Individual information: Parameter number QnU
■Diagnostic timing LCPU
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/When an
END instruction or a COM instruction executed
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The network refresh parameter for CC-Link is out
of range.
■Collateral information RUN: Off
QCPU
• Common information: File name Check the parameter setting. ERR.:Flashing
3106 LCPU
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing CPU Status:Stop
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/When an
END instruction or a COM instruction executed
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The setting of the network refresh range crosses
over the boundary between the internal user
device and the extended data register (D) or Set the network refresh range so that it does
extended link register (W). not cross over the boundary between the QnU
■Collateral information internal user device and the extended data LCPU
• Common information: File name register (D) or extended link register (W).
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• The CC-Link parameter setting is incorrect.
• The set mode is not allowed for the version of
RUN: Off
the mounted CC-Link module.
ERR.:Flashing QCPU
3107 ■Collateral information Check the parameter setting.
LCPU
• Common information: File name
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• When the CC-Link IE Field Network is used, the
network number set in "Network Parameter" and
"Switch Setting" is duplicated.
• No "Network Parameter" and "Switch Setting" • Check the parameter setting.
RUN: Off
are configured, or the CC-Link IE Field Network • Configure "Network Parameter" and
ERR.:Flashing QnU
3150 module with an incorrect switch setting is "Switch Setting", and then write network
LCPU
mounted. parameters and the switch setting to the
CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information module.
• Common information: File name/Drive name
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
370
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SFC PARA. ERROR] A
• The parameter setting is illegal.
• The block 0 does not exist although "Autostart Q00J/Q00/Q01
Read the individual information of the error
Block 0" was selected in the SFC tab in "PLC RUN: Off Qn(H)
using the programming tool to identify the
Parameter". ERR.:Flashing QnPH
3200 numeric value (parameter No.). Check the
■Collateral information QnPRH
parameters corresponding to the value, and
• Common information: File name/Drive name CPU Status:Stop QnU
correct them as necessary.
• Individual information: Parameter number LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• STOP RUN
[SFC PARA. ERROR]
The block parameter setting is illegal. Read the individual information of the error
RUN: Off
■Collateral information using the programming tool to identify the Qn(H)
ERR.:Flashing
3201 • Common information: File name numeric value (parameter No.). Check the QnPH
• Individual information: Parameter number parameters corresponding to the value, and QnPRH
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing correct them as necessary.
• STOP RUN
[SFC PARA. ERROR]
The number of step relays specified in the device
setting of "PLC Parameter" is less than that used Read the individual information of the error
RUN: Off
in the program. using the programming tool to identify the Qn(H)
ERR.:Flashing
3202 ■Collateral information numeric value (parameter No.). Check the QnPH
• Common information: File name parameters corresponding to the value, and QnPRH
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Parameter number correct them as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• STOP RUN
[SFC PARA. ERROR]
Other than "Scan" and "Wait" is set for "Execute
Read the individual information of the error Qn(H)
Type" in the Program tab of "PLC Parameter". RUN: Off
using the programming tool to identify the QnPH
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
3203 numeric value (parameter No.). Check the QnPRH
• Common information: File name/Drive name
parameters corresponding to the value, and QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number CPU Status:Stop
correct them as necessary. LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN*2
[SP. PARA ERROR]
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
The start I/O number in the intelligent function
module parameter set on GX Configurator differs
RUN: Off
from the actual I/O number.
ERR.:Flashing QCPU
3300 ■Collateral information Check the parameter setting.
LCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: Parameter number*1
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
371
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SP. PARA ERROR]
• The refresh setting of the intelligent function
module exceeded the file register capacity.
• The intelligent function module set in GX Q00J/Q00/Q01
Configurator differs from the actually mounted • Change the file register file for the one that Qn(H)
module. the entire target range can be refreshed. QnPH
■Collateral information • Check the parameter setting. QnPRH
• Common information: File name/Drive name • Check the auto refresh setting. QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number*1 LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction or a COM instruction
executed
[SP. PARA ERROR]
The intelligent function module's refresh
parameter setting is outside the available range. RUN: Off
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
3301 • Check the parameter setting. QCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name
*1 • Check the auto refresh setting. LCPU
• Individual information: Parameter number CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction or a COM instruction
executed
[SP. PARA ERROR]
The setting of the refresh parameter range
crosses over the boundary between the internal
user device and the extended data register (D) or
Set the refresh parameter range so that it
extended link register (W).
does not cross over the boundary between QnU
■Collateral information
the internal user device and the extended LCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name
data register (D) or extended link register (W).
• Individual information: Parameter number*1
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction or a COM instruction
executed
[SP. PARA ERROR]
The intelligent function module's refresh
parameter are abnormal. RUN: Off
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
3302 Check the parameter setting.
• Common information: File name/Drive name LCPU
• Individual information: Parameter number*1 CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[SP. PARA ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the automatic refresh • Delete the automatic refresh setting or
setting or other parameter setting was made to the other parameter setting of the intelligent
intelligent function module under control of function module under control of another RUN: Off Q00/Q01
another station. CPU. ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
3303
■Collateral information • Change the setting to the automatic refresh QnPH
• Common information: File name/Drive name setting or other parameter setting of the CPU Status:Stop QnU
• Individual information: Parameter number intelligent function module under control of
■Diagnostic timing the host CPU.
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
372
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.] A
The start I/O number of the remote password
target module is set to other than 0H to 0FF0H Qn(H)
■Collateral information Set the start I/O number within the range, 0H QnPH
• Common information: - to 0FF0H. QnPRH
• Individual information: - QnU
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
The start I/O number of the remote password
target module is set to other than 0H to 07E0H.
■Collateral information Set the start I/O number within the range, 0H
Q02UCPU
• Common information: - to 07E0H.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN RUN: Off
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.] ERR.:Flashing
3400
The start I/O number of the remote password
target module is not in the following range. CPU Status:Stop
• Q00JCPU: 0H to 1E0H Set the start I/O number within the following
• Q00CPU/Q01CPU: 0H to 3E0H range.
Q00J/Q00/Q01
■Collateral information • Q00JCPU: 0H to 1E0H
• Common information: - • Q00CPU/Q01CPU: 0H to 3E0H
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
The start I/O number of the remote password
target module is out of range.
■Collateral information
Correct the start I/O number. LCPU
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
Appendix 1.5 List of error codes (3000 to 3999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
There is a problem in the slot specified by the start
I/O number of the remote password target module:
• No module is mounted.
• A module (such as I/O module) other than
intelligent function modules is mounted.
Mount the following modules in the slot
• An intelligent function module other than a serial
specified by the start I/O number of the
communication module or Ethernet module is Qn(H)
remote password target module.
mounted. QnPH
• Serial communication module whose
• The function version of a serial communication QnPRH
function version B or later
module or Ethernet module mounted is A. QnU
• Ethernet module whose function version B
• An intelligent function module that does not
or later
support the use of remote password is mounted.
■Collateral information RUN: Off
• Common information: - ERR.:Flashing
3401
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing CPU Status:Stop
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
There is a problem in the slot specified by the start
I/O number of the remote password target module:
• No module is mounted.
• An intelligent function module other than a serial
Mount an intelligent function module that
communication module or Ethernet module is
supports the use of remote password in the LCPU
mounted.
specified slot.
■Collateral information
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
373
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
Any of the following modules is not mounted in the
slot specified by the start I/O number of the remote
password target module. Mount the following modules in the slot
• Serial communication module whose function specified by the start I/O number of the
version B or later remote password target module.
• Ethernet module whose function version B or • Serial communication module whose Q00J/Q00/Q01
later function version B or later
■Collateral information • Ethernet module whose function version B
• Common information: - or later RUN: Off
• Individual information: - ERR.:Flashing
3401
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN CPU Status:Stop
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
Serial communication module or Ethernet module
of function version B or later controlled by another
• Change it for the Ethernet module of
CPU was specified in a multiple CPU system. Qn(H)
function version B or later connected by the
■Collateral information QnPH
host CPU.
• Common information: - QnU
• Delete the remote password setting.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
*1 The parameter No. will be the number obtained by the formula: "start I/O number of the intelligent function module set in
parameter using GX Configurator" 10H.
*2 The diagnostic timing of CPU modules other than the Universal model QCPU and LCPU is only when the status of the
CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN.
374
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.6 List of error codes (4000 to 4999)
A
The following table shows the error messages, the error contents and causes, and the corrective actions for the error
codes (4000 to 4999).
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR]
• The program contains an instruction code that
cannot be decoded.
• An unusable instruction is included in the
program.
■Collateral information
QCPU
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/When
instruction executed
• When instruction executed (SFC program) Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR] ERR.:Flashing
4000 value (program error location). Check the
• The program contains an instruction code that
error step corresponding to the value, and
cannot be decoded. CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
• An unusable instruction is included in the
program.
• The number of pointers used exceeds the
number of pointers set by the parameter.
LCPU
■Collateral information
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/When
instruction executed
• When instruction executed (SFC program)
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR]
Appendix 1.6 List of error codes (4000 to 4999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
The program contains a dedicated instruction for
Q00J/Q00/Q01
SFC although it is not an SFC program. Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off Qn(H)
■Collateral information the programming tool to identify the numeric
ERR.:Flashing QnPH
4001 • Common information: Program error location value (program error location). Check the
QnPRH
• Individual information: - error step corresponding to the value, and
CPU Status:Stop QnU
■Diagnostic timing correct it as necessary.
LCPU
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/When
instruction executed
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR]
• The name of dedicated instruction specified by
the program is incorrect.
• The dedicated instruction specified by the
program cannot be executed by the specified Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off
module. the programming tool to identify the numeric
ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4002 ■Collateral information value (program error location). Check the
LCPU
• Common information: Program error location error step corresponding to the value, and
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/When
instruction executed
• When instruction executed (SFC program)
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR]
The number of devices for the dedicated
instruction specified by the program is incorrect.
Read common information of the error using
■Collateral information RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
• Common information: Program error location ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4003 value (program error location). Check the
• Individual information: - LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
■Diagnostic timing CPU Status:Stop
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/When correct it as necessary.
instruction executed
• When instruction executed (SFC program)
375
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR]
The device which cannot be used by the dedicated
instruction specified by the program is specified.
Read common information of the error using
■Collateral information RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
• Common information: Program error location ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4004 value (program error location). Check the
• Individual information: - LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
■Diagnostic timing CPU Status:Stop
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/When correct it as necessary.
instruction executed
• When instruction executed (SFC program)
[MISSING END INS.]
There is no END (FEND) instruction in the
Read common information of the error using
program. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4010 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(P)]
• The total points of the pointers used in the
program exceeded 4096 points.
• The total points of the local pointers used in the Qn(H)
program exceeded the start number of the QnPH
common pointer. QnPRH
■Collateral information QnU
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
• Individual information: -
Read common information of the error using
■Diagnostic timing RUN: Off
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN the programming tool to identify the numeric
ERR.:Flashing
4020 value (program error location). Check the
[CAN'T SET(P)] error step corresponding to the value, and
• The total points of the pointers used in the CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
program exceeded 512 points.
• The total points of the local pointers used in the
program exceeded the start number of the
Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01
common pointer.
U
■Collateral information
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(P)]
The same pointer number is assigned to common
Read common information of the error using
pointers or local pointers assigned to each file. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4021 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(I)]
The allocation pointer Nos. assigned by files
Read common information of the error using
overlap. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4030 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
376
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[OPERATION ERROR] A
The instruction cannot process the contained data. Read common information of the error using
■Collateral information the programming tool to identify the numeric
QCPU
• Common information: Program error location value (program error location). Check the
LCPU
• Individual information: - error step corresponding to the value, and
■Diagnostic timing correct it as necessary.
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
An error has occurred in access to the ATA or SD • Take noise reduction measures.
Qn(H)
memory card using an instruction. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
QnPH
■Collateral information the same error code is displayed again, the RUN: Off/On
QnPRH
• Common information: Program error location cause is a hardware failure of the ATA card ERR.:Flashing/On
QnU
4100 • Individual information: - or SD memory card. Please consult your
LCPU
■Diagnostic timing local Mitsubishi representative. CPU Status:
• When instruction executed Stop/Continue*1
[OPERATION ERROR]
• The file being accessed was accessed with the
SP.FWRITE instruction. • Do not execute the SP.FWRITE instruction
• Writing was attempted to the write-protected SD to the file being accessed.
memory card with the SP.FWRITE instruction. • Do not execute any other function and the QnU
■Collateral information SP.FWRITE instruction at the same time. LCPU
• Common information: Program error location • Disable the write protect switch of the SD
• Individual information: - memory card.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
Appendix 1.6 List of error codes (4000 to 4999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
377
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[OPERATION ERROR]
• The number of setting data dealt with the
instruction exceeds the applicable range.
• The storage data and constant of the device
specified by the instruction exceeds the
applicable range.
• When writing to the host CPU shared memory,
the write prohibited area is specified for the write
destination address.
• The range of storage data of the device
specified by the instruction is duplicated.
• The device specified by the instruction exceeds
the range of the number of device points.
QCPU
• The interrupt pointer No. specified by the
LCPU
instruction exceeds the applicable range.
• A link direct device, intelligent function module
device, and cyclic transmission area device are Read common information of the error using
specified for both (S) and (D) with the BMOV the programming tool to identify the numeric
instruction. value (program error location). Check the
• The target station's network No. specified by the error step corresponding to the value, and
network dedicated instruction does not exist. correct it as necessary.
• There are no link direct devices (J\)
■Collateral information RUN: Off/On
• Common information: Program error location ERR.:Flashing/On
4101 • Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing CPU Status:
• When instruction executed Stop/Continue*1
[OPERATION ERROR]
• Data stored in the file register specified by an
instruction exceeds the applicable range.
• A file register has not been set. Or the set file
register does not store a file.
■Collateral information
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR] QnU
• The block data that crosses over the boundary LCPU
between the internal user device and the
extended data register (D) or extended link
Read common information of the error using
register is specified (including 32-bit binary, real
the programming tool to identify the numeric
number (single precision, double precision),
value (program error location). Check the
indirect address, and control data).
error step corresponding to the value, and
■Collateral information
correct it as necessary.
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
378
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[OPERATION ERROR] A
In a multiple CPU system, the link direct device
• Delete from the program the link direct
(J\) was specified for the network module
device which specifies the network module Q00/Q01
under control of another station.
under control of another CPU. Qn(H)
■Collateral information
• Using the link direct device, specify the QnPH
• Common information: Program error location
network module controlled by the own QnU
• Individual information: -
station.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
• The module No./network No. /station No.
specified for the dedicated instruction is wrong.
• The link direct device (J\) setting is
RUN: Off/On
incorrect.
ERR.:Flashing/On
• The module No./network No./number of
4102 QCPU
character strings exceeds the range that can be
CPU Status: LCPU
specified.
Stop/Continue*1
■Collateral information Read common information of the error using
• Common information: Program error location the programming tool to identify the numeric
• Individual information: - value (program error location). Check the
■Diagnostic timing error step corresponding to the value, and
• When instruction executed correct it as necessary.
[OPERATION ERROR]
The character string (" ") specified by a dedicated
instruction cannot be used for the character string.
■Collateral information QnU
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
The configuration of the PID dedicated instruction
Read common information of the error using RUN: Off/On Q00J/Q00/Q01
is incorrect.
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On Qn(H)
■Collateral information
4103 value (program error location). Check the QnPRH
• Common information: Program error location
CPU Status:
Appendix 1.6 List of error codes (4000 to 4999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
error step corresponding to the value, and QnU
• Individual information: -
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue*1 LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
PLOADP/PUNLOADP/PSWAPP instructions were
• Delete the setting for the program memory RUN: Off/On
executed while setting program memory check.
check. ERR.:Flashing/On
■Collateral information
4105 • When using the program memory check, QnPH
• Common information: Program error location
delete PLOADP/PUNLOADP/PSWAPP CPU Status:
• Individual information: -
instructions. Stop/Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR] Q00/Q01
33 or more multiple CPU dedicated instructions
RUN: Off/On Qn(H)
were executed from one CPU module. Using the multiple CPU dedicated instruction
ERR.:Flashing/On QnPH
■Collateral information completion bit, provide interlocks to prevent
4107 Q00UCPU
• Common information: Program error location one CPU module from executing 33 or more
CPU Status: Q01UCPU
• Individual information: - multiple CPU dedicated instructions.
Stop/Continue*1 Q02UCPU
■Diagnostic timing
QnUDV
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
With high speed interrupt setting PR, PRC,
UDCNT1, UDCNT2, PLSY or PWM instruction is RUN: Off/On
Delete the high-speed interrupt setting.
executed. ERR.:Flashing/On
When using high-speed interrupt, delete the
4109 ■Collateral information Qn(H)*2
PR, PRC, UDCNT1, UDCNT2, PLSY and
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:
PWM instructions.
• Individual information: - Stop/Continue*1
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
379
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[OPERATION ERROR]
An attempt was made to perform write/read
to/from the CPU shared memory write/read
Read common information of the error using RUN: Off/On
disable area of the own station CPU module with
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On
the instruction. Q00/Q01
4111 value (program error location). Check the
■Collateral information QnU
error step corresponding to the value, and CPU Status:
• Common information: Program error location
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue*1
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
The CPU module that cannot be specified with the
Read common information of the error using RUN: Off/On
multiple CPU dedicated instruction was specified.
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On
■Collateral information Q00/Q01
4112 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location QnU
error step corresponding to the value, and CPU Status:
• Individual information: -
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue*1
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
• When the SP.DEVST instruction is executed,
the number of writing to the standard ROM of • Check that the number of execution of the
the day exceeds the value specified by SD695. SP.DEVST instruction is proper. RUN: Off/On
• The value outside the specified range is set to • Execute the SP.DEVST instruction again ERR.:Flashing/On
QnU
4113 SD695. on or after the following day. Or change the
LCPU
■Collateral information value in SD695. CPU Status:
• Common information: Program error location • Correct the value of SD695 so that it does Stop/Continue
• Individual information: - not exceed the range.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
A built-in I/O instruction that is disabled with a
• Enable the built-in I/O function with RUN: Off/On
parameter was executed.
parameters. ERR.:Flashing/On
■Collateral information
4116 • Prohibit executions of a built-in I/O LCPU
• Common information: Program error location
instruction that is disabled with a CPU Status:
• Individual information: -
parameter. Stop/Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
Since the manual system switching enable flag
(SM1592) is off, a manual system switching
RUN: Off/On
cannot be executed by the control system
To execute control system switching by the ERR.:Flashing/On
switching instruction (SP. CONTSW).
4120 SP. CONTSW instruction, turn on the manual QnPRH
■Collateral information
system switching enable flag (SM1592). CPU Status:
• Common information: Program error location
Stop/Continue*1
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
• Reexamine the interlock signal for the SP.
[OPERATION ERROR]
CONTSW instruction, and make sure that
• In the separate mode, the control system
the SP. CONTSW instruction is executed in
switching instruction (SP. CONTSW) was
the control system only. (Since the SP.
executed in the standby system CPU module. RUN: Off/On
CONTSW instruction cannot be executed
• In the debug mode, the control system switching ERR.:Flashing/On
in the standby system, it is recommended
4121 instruction (SP. CONTSW) was executed. QnPRH
to provide an interlock using the operation
■Collateral information CPU Status:
mode signal or like.)
• Common information: Program error location Stop/Continue*1
• As the SP. CONTSW instruction cannot be
• Individual information: -
executed in the debug mode, reexamine
■Diagnostic timing
the interlock signal related to the operation
• When instruction executed
mode.
380
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[OPERATION ERROR] A
• The dedicated instruction was executed to the
module mounted on the extension base unit in
the redundant system. • Delete the dedicated instruction for the
• The instruction for accessing the intelligent module mounted on the extension base RUN: Off/On
function module mounted on the extension base unit. ERR.:Flashing/On
4122 unit from the standby system at separate mode • Delete the instruction for accessing the QnPRH
was executed. intelligent function module mounted on the CPU Status:
■Collateral information extension base unit from the standby Stop/Continue
• Common information: Program error location system.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
Instructions to read SFC step comment
(S(P).SFCSCOMR) and SFC transition condition
comment (S(P).SFCTCOMR) are executed for the RUN: Off/On
Qn(H)
comment file in the ATA card or SD memory card. Set the comment file used in the instructions ERR.:Flashing/On
QnPH
4130 ■Collateral information to the one not in the ATA card or SD memory
QnPRH
• Common information: Program error location card. CPU Status:
QnU
• Individual information: - Stop/Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed/When an END
instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
The SFC program is started up by the instruction
while the other SFC program has not yet been RUN: Off/On
completed. Check the SFC program specified by the ERR.:Flashing/On
QnU
4131 ■Collateral information instruction. Or, check the executing status of
LCPU
• Common information: Program error location the SFC program. CPU Status:
• Individual information: - Stop/Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
An Operation was performed with special values
Appendix 1.6 List of error codes (4000 to 4999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
of input data (-0, subnormal number, NaN (not a Read common information of the error using RUN: Off/On
number), ) is performed. the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On
QnU
4140 ■Collateral information value (program error location). Check the
LCPU
• Common information: Program error location error step corresponding to the value, and CPU Status:
• Individual information: - correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
• An overflow occurs during operation.
Read common information of the error using RUN: Off/On
• An error occurs during operation.
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On
■Collateral information QnU
4141 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and CPU Status:
• Individual information: -
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
• The start I/O number of the module on the
station that cannot be specified using an
instruction has been specified.
• Specify the start I/O number of the module RUN: Off/On
• A start I/O number not set in the network
on the master station. ERR.:Flashing/On
parameter has been specified using an QnU
4150 • Specify the start I/O number set in the
instruction. LCPU
network parameter. CPU Status:
■Collateral information
• Change the network parameter setting. Stop/Continue
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
381
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[OPERATION ERROR]
• The refresh device of the module specified
using an instruction is not assigned in the
network parameter. • Read common information of the error
RUN: Off/On
• The number of device points specified using an using the programming tool to identify the
ERR.:Flashing/On
instruction exceeds the range for one transfer numeric value (program error location). QnU
4151
setting assigned in the network parameter. Check the error step corresponding to the LCPU
CPU Status:
■Collateral information value, and correct it as necessary.
Stop/Continue
• Common information: Program error location • Change the network parameter setting.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
A built-in Ethernet function instruction cannot be
RUN: Off/On
executed. • Check and correct the built-in Ethernet port
ERR.:Flashing/On
■Collateral information setting parameters.
4160 LCPU
• Common information: Program error location • Do not execute any unsupported built-in
CPU Status:
• Individual information: - Ethernet function instruction.
Stop/Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
The SP.SLMPSND instruction was executed when
the simple PLC communication function was set in RUN: Off/On
• Do not use the simple PLC communication
"PLC Parameter". ERR.:Flashing/On
function.
4161 ■Collateral information LCPU
• Do not execute the SP.SLMPSND
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:
instruction.
• Individual information: - Stop/Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[FOR-NEXT ERROR]
The NEXT instruction was not executed although
a FOR instruction has been executed.
Read common information of the error using
Alternatively, there are fewer NEXT instructions RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
than FOR instructions. ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4200 value (program error location). Check the
■Collateral information LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[FOR-NEXT ERROR]
The NEXT instruction was executed although no
FOR instruction has been executed.
Read common information of the error using
Alternatively, there are more NEXT instructions RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
than FOR instructions. ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4201 value (program error location). Check the
■Collateral information LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[FOR-NEXT ERROR]
More than 16 nesting levels of the FOR instruction
are programmed. RUN: Off
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4202 Keep nesting levels at 16 or under.
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[FOR-NEXT ERROR]
A BREAK instruction was executed although no
Read common information of the error using
FOR instruction has been executed prior to that. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4203 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
382
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[CAN'T EXECUTE(P)] A
The pointer specified in the instruction does not
Read common information of the error using
exist. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4210 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXECUTE(P)]
There was no RET instruction in the executed
Read common information of the error using
subroutine program. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4211 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXECUTE(P)]
• The RET instruction exists before the FEND
instruction of the main routine program.
• The RET instruction is executed before the Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off
NEXT instruction is executed in the executed the programming tool to identify the numeric
ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4212 subroutine program. value (program error location). Check the
LCPU
■Collateral information error step corresponding to the value, and
CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: Program error location correct it as necessary.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXECUTE(P)]
More than 16 nesting levels of the CALL
instruction are programmed. RUN: Off
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4213 Keep nesting levels at 16 or under.
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
Appendix 1.6 List of error codes (4000 to 4999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
[CAN'T EXECUTE(I)]
Though an interrupt input occurred, the
corresponding interrupt pointer does not exist. RUN: Off
■Collateral information Check that the interrupt pointer No. set in ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4220
• Common information: - parameter exists in the program. LCPU
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXECUTE(I)]
An IRET instruction does not exist in the executed
Read common information of the error using
interrupt program. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QCPU
4221 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
383
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[CAN'T EXECUTE(I)]
The IRET instruction exists before the FEND
instruction of the main routine program.
■Collateral information QCPU
• Common information: Program error location LCPU
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
[CAN'T EXECUTE(I)] ERR.:Flashing
4223 value (program error location). Check the
• The IRET instruction was executed in the fixed
error step corresponding to the value, and
scan execution type program. CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
• The STOP instruction was executed in the fixed
scan execution type program. QnU
■Collateral information LCPU
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXECUTE(I)]
The interrupt pointer for the module mounted on
the extension base unit is set in the redundant
RUN: Off
system. Delete the setting of interrupt pointer for the
ERR.:Flashing
4225 ■Collateral information module mounted on the extension base unit, QnPRH
• Common information: - since it cannot be used.
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[INST. FORMAT ERR.]
The number of CHK and CHKEND instructions is
Read common information of the error using
not equal. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
4230 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location QnPH
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[INST. FORMAT ERR.]
The number of IX and IXEND instructions is not
Read common information of the error using
equal. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric Qn(H)
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
4231 value (program error location). Check the QnPH
• Common information: Program error location
error step corresponding to the value, and QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[INST. FORMAT ERR.]
The configuration of the check conditions for the
CHK instruction is incorrect.
Read common information of the error using
Alternatively, a CHK instruction has been used in a RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
low speed execution type program. ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
4235 value (program error location). Check the
■Collateral information QnPH
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
384
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MULTI-COM. ERROR] A
• The multiple CPU high-speed transmission
dedicated instruction used in the program
specifies the wrong CPU module. Or, the setting
in the CPU module is incompatible with the
multiple CPU high-speed transmission
dedicated instruction.
• The reserved CPU is specified.
• The uninstalled CPU is specified.
• The start I/O number of the target CPU 16 (n1) Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off
is outside the range of 3E0H to 3E3H. the programming tool to identify the numeric
ERR.:Flashing
4350 • The CPU module where the instruction cannot value (program error location). Check the QnU
be executed is specified. error step corresponding to the value, and
CPU Status:Stop
• The instruction is executed in a single CPU correct it as necessary.
system.
• The host CPU is specified.
• The instruction is executed without setting the
"Use multiple CPU high speed communication".
■Collateral information
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[MULTI-COM. ERROR]
• The multiple CPU high-speed transmission
dedicated instruction specified by the program
cannot be executed to the specified target CPU
module. Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off
• The instruction name is wrong. the programming tool to identify the numeric
ERR.:Flashing
4351 • The instruction unsupported by the target CPU value (program error location). Check the QnU
module is specified. error step corresponding to the value, and
CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information correct it as necessary.
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
Appendix 1.6 List of error codes (4000 to 4999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• When instruction executed
[MULTI-COM. ERROR]
The number of devices for the multiple CPU high-
speed transmission dedicated instruction specified Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off
by the program is wrong. the programming tool to identify the numeric
ERR.:Flashing
4352 ■Collateral information value (program error location). Check the QnU
• Common information: Program error location error step corresponding to the value, and
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[MULTI-COM. ERROR]
The device which cannot be used for the multiple
CPU high-speed transmission dedicated Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off
instruction specified by the program is specified. the programming tool to identify the numeric
ERR.:Flashing
4353 ■Collateral information value (program error location). Check the QnU
• Common information: Program error location error step corresponding to the value, and
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[MULTI-COM. ERROR]
The character string which cannot be handled by
the multiple CPU high-speed transmission Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off
dedicated instruction is specified. the programming tool to identify the numeric
ERR.:Flashing
4354 ■Collateral information value (program error location). Check the QnU
• Common information: Program error location error step corresponding to the value, and
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
385
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MULTI-COM. ERROR]
The number of read/write data (number of
request/receive data) for the multiple CPU high-
Read common information of the error using
speed transmission dedicated instruction specified RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric
by the program is not valid. ERR.:Flashing
4355 value (program error location). Check the QnU
■Collateral information
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[SFCP. CODE ERROR]
No SFCP or SFCPEND instruction in SFC
program. RUN: Off
Qn(H)
■Collateral information Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing
4400 QnPH
• Common information: Program error location using the programming tool.
QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(BL)]
The block number designated by the SFC program Q00J/Q00/Q01
exceeds the range. RUN: Off Qn(H)
■Collateral information Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing QnPH
4410
• Common information: Program error location using the programming tool. QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop QnU
■Diagnostic timing LCPU
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(BL)]
Block number designations overlap in SFC Q00J/Q00/Q01
program. RUN: Off Qn(H)
■Collateral information Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing QnPH
4411
• Common information: Program error location using the programming tool. QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop QnU
■Diagnostic timing LCPU
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(S)]
A step number designated in an SFC program Q00J/Q00/Q01
exceeds the range. RUN: Off Qn(H)
■Collateral information Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing QnPH
4420
• Common information: Program error location using the programming tool. QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop QnU
■Diagnostic timing LCPU
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(S)] Q00J/Q00/Q01
The number of steps in the SFC program exceeds Qn(H)
Correct the program so that the number of
the total number of step relays. RUN: Off QnPH
steps in the SFC program may not exceed
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QnPRH
4421 the total number of step relays.
• Common information: Program error location QnU
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop LCPU
■Diagnostic timing Increase the total number of step relays in the
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN QnU
Device tab of "PLC Parameter".
[CAN'T SET(S)]
Step number designations overlap in SFC Q00J/Q00/Q01
program. RUN: Off Qn(H)
■Collateral information Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing QnPH
4422
• Common information: Program error location using the programming tool. QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop QnU
■Diagnostic timing LCPU
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(S)] Correct the total number of step relays so that Q00J/Q00/Q01
The total number of (maximum step No.+1) of it does not exceed the total number of QnU
each block exceeds the total number of step (maximum step No.+1) of each block. LCPU
RUN: Off
relays.
ERR.:Flashing
4423 ■Collateral information
• Common information: Program error location Increase the total number of step relays in the CPU Status:Stop QnU
• Individual information: - Device tab of "PLC Parameter".
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
386
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SFC EXE. ERROR] A
The SFC program cannot be executed.
• The data of the block data setting is illegal.
• Write the program to the CPU module
• The SFC data device of the block data setting is
again using the programming tool.
beyond the device setting range set in "PLC RUN: Off
• After correcting the setting of the SFC data Q00J/Q00/Q01
Parameter". ERR.:Flashing
4430 device, write it to the CPU module. QnU
■Collateral information
• Correct the device setting range in "PLC LCPU
• Common information: File name/Drive name CPU Status:Stop
Parameter", and write it to the CPU
• Individual information: -
module.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/When SFC
program is executed
[SFC EXE. ERROR]
The SFC program cannot be executed.
• The block parameter setting is abnormal. RUN: Off
Q00J/Q00/Q01
■Collateral information Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing
4431 QnU
• Common information: File name/Drive name using the programming tool.
LCPU
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[SFC EXE. ERROR]
The SFC program cannot be executed.
• The structure of the SFC program is illegal. RUN: Off
Q00J/Q00/Q01
■Collateral information Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing
4432 QnU
• Common information: File name/Drive name using the programming tool.
LCPU
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The numbers of BLOCK and BEND instructions in
an SFC program are not equal. RUN: Off
Qn(H)
■Collateral information Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing
4500 QnPH
• Common information: Program error location using the programming tool.
QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
Appendix 1.6 List of error codes (4000 to 4999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• STOP RUN
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The configuration of the STEP* to TRAN* to TSET
to SEND instructions in the SFC program is
RUN: Off
incorrect. Qn(H)
Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing
4501 ■Collateral information QnPH
using the programming tool.
• Common information: Program error location QnPRH
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• STOP RUN
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
Q00J/Q00/Q01
• STEPI* instruction does not exist in the block of
RUN: Off Qn(H)
the SFC program.
Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing QnPH
4502 ■Collateral information
using the programming tool. QnPRH
• Common information: Program error location
CPU Status:Stop QnU
• Individual information: -
LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN
387
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
• The step specified in the TSET instruction does
not exist. Qn(H)
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common information: Program error location QnPRH
• Individual information: -
• Write the program to the CPU module
■Diagnostic timing
• STOP RUN again using the programming tool.
RUN: Off
• Read common information of the error
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.] ERR.:Flashing
4503 using the programming tool to identify the
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
numeric value (program error location).
• The step specified in the TSET instruction does CPU Status:Stop
Check the error step corresponding to the
not exist.
value, and correct it as necessary.
• In jump transition, the host step number was Q00J/Q00/Q01
specified as the destination step number. QnU
■Collateral information LCPU
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When SFC program is executed
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
Q00J/Q00/Q01
• The step specified in the TAND instruction does
RUN: Off Qn(H)
not exist.
Write the program to the CPU module again ERR.:Flashing QnPH
4504 ■Collateral information
using the programming tool. QnPRH
• Common information: Program error location
CPU Status:Stop QnU
• Individual information: -
LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• When SFC program is executed
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
• In the operation output of a step, the SET
Read common information of the error using
Sn/BLmSn or RST Sn/BLmSn instruction was RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric Q00J/Q00/Q01
specified for the host step. ERR.:Flashing
4505 value (program error location). Check the QnU
■Collateral information
error step corresponding to the value, and LCPU
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
• In a reset step, the host step number was Read common information of the error using
RUN: Off
specified as the destination step. the programming tool to identify the numeric Q00J/Q00/Q01
ERR.:Flashing
4506 ■Collateral information value (program error location). Check the QnU
• Common information: Program error location error step corresponding to the value, and LCPU
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[SFCP. OPE. ERROR]
The SFC program contains data that cannot be
Read common information of the error using RUN: Off/On
processed.
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On Qn(H)
■Collateral information
4600 value (program error location). Check the QnPH
• Common information: Program error location
error step corresponding to the value, and CPU Status: QnPRH
• Individual information: -
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue*1
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[SFCP. OPE. ERROR]
Exceeds device range that can be designated by
Read common information of the error using RUN: Off/On
the SFC program.
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On Qn(H)
■Collateral information
4601 value (program error location). Check the QnPH
• Common information: Program error location
error step corresponding to the value, and CPU Status: QnPRH
• Individual information: -
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue*1
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
388
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[SFCP. OPE. ERROR] A
The START instruction in an SFC program is
Read common information of the error using RUN: Off/On
preceded by an END instruction.
the programming tool to identify the numeric ERR.:Flashing/On Qn(H)
■Collateral information
4602 value (program error location). Check the QnPH
• Common information: Program error location
error step corresponding to the value, and CPU Status: QnPRH
• Individual information: -
correct it as necessary. Stop/Continue*1
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[SFCP. EXE. ERROR]
Read common information of the error using
The active step information at presumptive start of
the programming tool to identify the numeric
the SFC program is incorrect. RUN: On
value (program error location). Check the Qn(H)
■Collateral information ERR.:On
4610 error step corresponding to the value, and QnPH
• Common information: Program error location
correct it as necessary. QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
The program is automatically subjected to an
■Diagnostic timing
initial start.
• STOP RUN
[SFCP. EXE. ERROR]
Key-switch was reset during RUN when Read common information of the error using
presumptive start was designated for SFC the programming tool to identify the numeric
RUN: On
program. value (program error location). Check the Qn(H)
ERR.:On
4611 ■Collateral information error step corresponding to the value, and QnPH
• Common information: Program error location correct it as necessary. QnPRH
CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: - The program is automatically subjected to an
■Diagnostic timing initial start.
• STOP RUN
[BLOCK EXE. ERROR]
Startup was executed at a block in the SFC
Read common information of the error using
program that was already started up. RUN: Off Qn(H)
the programming tool to identify the numeric
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing QnPH
4620 value (program error location). Check the
• Common information: Program error location QnPRH
error step corresponding to the value, and
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop QnU
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[BLOCK EXE. ERROR]
Startup was attempted at a block that does not • Read common information of the error Q00J/Q00/Q01
Appendix 1.6 List of error codes (4000 to 4999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
exist in the SFC program. using the programming tool to identify the RUN: Off Qn(H)
■Collateral information numeric value (program error location). ERR.:Flashing QnPH
4621
• Common information: Program error location Check the error step corresponding to the QnPRH
• Individual information: - value, and correct it as necessary. CPU Status:Stop QnU
■Diagnostic timing • Turn on SM321 if it is off. LCPU
• When instruction executed
[STEP EXE. ERROR]
The step specified in the SFC program is already
Read common information of the error using
activated. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric Qn(H)
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
4630 value (program error location). Check the QnPH
• Common information: Program error location
error step corresponding to the value, and QnPRH
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[STEP EXE. ERROR]
• Startup was attempted at the step that does not
exist in the SFC program. Or, the step that does
not exist in the SFC program was specified for
end.
• Read common information of the error Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Forced transition was executed based on the
using the programming tool to identify the RUN: Off Qn(H)
transition condition that does not exit in the SFC
numeric value (program error location). ERR.:Flashing QnPH
4631 program. Or, the transition condition for forced
Check the error step corresponding to the QnPRH
transition that does not exit in the SFC program
value, and correct it as necessary. CPU Status:Stop QnU
was canceled.
• Turn on SM321 if it is off. LCPU
■Collateral information
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
389
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[STEP EXE. ERROR]
There were too many simultaneous active steps in
blocks that can be designated by the SFC Read common information of the error using Qn(H)
RUN: Off
program. the programming tool to identify the numeric QnPH
ERR.:Flashing
4632 ■Collateral information value (program error location). Check the QnPRH
• Common information: Program error location error step corresponding to the value, and QnU
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - correct it as necessary. LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[STEP EXE. ERROR]
There were too many simultaneous active steps in
Read common information of the error using Qn(H)
all blocks that can be designated. RUN: Off
the programming tool to identify the numeric QnPH
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
4633 value (program error location). Check the QnPRH
• Common information: Program error location
error step corresponding to the value, and QnU
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
correct it as necessary. LCPU
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
*1 The operating status of the CPU module after an error has occurred can be set in parameter. (LED indication changes
according to the status.)
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "04012" or later
390
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.7 List of error codes (5000 to 5999)
A
The following table shows the error messages, the error contents and causes, and the corrective actions for the error
codes (5000 to 5999).
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• Read the individual information of the error
using the programming tool to identify the
[WDT ERROR] numeric value (time). Check the value and
The scan time of the initial execution type program shorten the scan time.
exceeded the initial execution monitoring time • Change the initial execution monitoring
Qn(H)
specified in the PLC RAS tab of "PLC Parameter". time or the WDT value in the PLC RAS tab
QnPH
■Collateral information of "PLC Parameter".
QnPRH
• Common information: Time (value set) • Resolve the endless loop caused by jump
QnU
• Individual information: Time (value actually transition.
LCPU
measured) • If the error persists even after the actions
■Diagnostic timing mentioned above are taken, the possible
• Always cause is a hardware failure of the system.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi RUN: Off
representative. ERR.:Flashing
5000
[WDT ERROR]
• The power supply of the standby system is • Since power-off of the standby system CPU Status:Stop
turned OFF. increases the control system scan time,
• The tracking cable is disconnected or connected reset the WDT value, taking the increase of
without turning off or resetting the standby the control system scan time into
system. consideration.
• The tracking cable is not secured by the • If the tracking cable was disconnected
QnPRH
connector fixing screws. during operation, securely connect it and
■Collateral information restart the CPU module. If the same error
• Common information: Time (value set) code is displayed again, the cause is a
• Individual information: Time (value actually hardware failure of the tracking cable or
measured) CPU module. Please consult your local
■Diagnostic timing Mitsubishi representative.
Appendix 1.7 List of error codes (5000 to 5999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Always
• Read the individual information of the error
using the programming tool to identify the
numeric value (time). Check the value and
shorten the scan time.
[WDT ERROR]
• Change the initial execution monitoring
The scan time of the program exceeded the WDT
time or the WDT value in the PLC RAS tab
value specified in the PLC RAS tab of "PLC
of "PLC Parameter".
Parameter".
• Resolve the infinite loop caused by jump
■Collateral information QCPU
sequence.
• Common information: Time (value set) LCPU
• Check the execution number of the
• Individual information: Time (value actually
interrupt program, and reduce the
measured)
occurrence number of interruption.
■Diagnostic timing
• If the error persists even after the actions
• Always
mentioned above are taken, the possible
RUN: Off
cause is a hardware failure of the system.
ERR.:Flashing
5001 Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
CPU Status:Stop
[WDT ERROR]
• The power supply of the standby system is • Since power-off of the standby system
turned OFF. increases the control system scan time,
• The tracking cable is disconnected or connected reset the WDT value, taking the increase of
without turning off or resetting the standby the control system scan time into
system. consideration.
• The tracking cable is not secured by the • If the tracking cable was disconnected
QnPRH
connector fixing screws. during operation, securely connect it and
■Collateral information restart the CPU module. If the same error
• Common information: Time (value set) code is displayed again, the cause is a
• Individual information: Time (value actually hardware failure of the tracking cable or
measured) CPU module. Please consult your local
■Diagnostic timing Mitsubishi representative.
• Always
391
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[WDT ERROR]
The execution time of one high-speed interrupt • If the processing time of the high-speed
exceeded 100ms. interrupt program is long, review the
RUN: Off
■Collateral information program.
ERR.:Flashing
5002 • Common information: Time (value set) • Cancel sampling trace, data logging, scan QnUDV
• Individual information: Time (value actually time measurement, and step specification
CPU Status:Stop
measured) for executional conditional device test in
■Diagnostic timing the interrupt program.
• Always
[PRG. TIME OVER]
The program scan time exceeded the constant
scan time specified in the PLC RAS tab of "PLC
Qn(H)
Parameter".
QnPH
■Collateral information
Review the constant scan setting time. QnPRH
• Common information: Time (value set)
QnU
• Individual information: Time (value actually
LCPU
measured)
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[PRG. TIME OVER]
The low speed program execution time set in the
PLC RAS tab of "PLC parameter" exceeded the
• Review the constant scan setting time.
excess time of the constant scan. RUN: On
• To secure sufficient excess time, correct Qn(H)
■Collateral information ERR.:On
5010 the value for "Constant scanning" and "Low QnPH
• Common information: Time (value set)
Speed Program Execution Time" in "PLC QnPRH
• Individual information: Time (value actually CPU Status:Continue
Parameter".
measured)
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[PRG. TIME OVER]
The program scan time exceeded the constant
scan setting time specified in the PLC RAS tab of
"PLC parameter".
Review the constant scan setting time in
■Collateral information
"PLC parameter" so that the excess time of Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Common information: Time (value set)
constant scan can be fully secured.
• Individual information: Time (value actually
measured)
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[PRG. TIME OVER]
The scan time of the low speed execution type
program exceeded the low speed execution watch
Read the individual information of the error
time specified in the PLC RAS tab of "PLC
using the programming tool to identify the RUN: On
parameter".
numeric value (time). Check the value and ERR.:On Qn(H)
5011 ■Collateral information
shorten the scan time. QnPH
• Common information: Time (value set)
Change the low speed execution watch time CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: Time (value actually
in the PLC RAS setting of "PLC Parameter".
measured)
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
392
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.8 List of error codes (6000 to 6999)
A
The following table shows the error messages, the error contents and causes, and the corrective actions for the error
codes (6000 to 6999).
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[FILE DIFF.]
In a redundant system, the control system and • Match the programs and parameters of the
standby system do not have the same programs control system and standby system.
and parameters. • Verify the CPU module by either of the
The file type detected as different between the two following procedures 1) or 2) to clarify the
systems can be checked by the file name of the differences between the files of both
error common information. systems. Correct wrong files and write
• The program is different. (File name = them to the CPU module again.
********.QPG) 1) Read the programs and parameters of
• The PLC parameters/network System A using GX Works2, GX
parameters/redundant parameters are different. Developer, or PX Developer, and verify
(File name = PARAM.QPA) them with those of System B.
• The remote password is different. (File name = 2) Verify the programs and parameters
PARAM.QPA) saved in GX Works2, GX Developer, or
• The intelligent function module parameters are PX Developer (offline environment) with RUN: Off
different. (File name = IPARAM.QPA) those written to the CPU modules of ERR.:Flashing
6000 QnPRH
• The device initial values are different. (File both systems.
name = ********.QDI) • When the size of the area, which is used CPU Status:Stop
• The size of the area, which is used for enabling for enabling writing multiple program blocks
writing multiple program blocks to the CPU to the CPU module during running, do not
module during running, do not match. (File match, perform either of corrective actions
name = MBOC.QMB) (This can be detected 1) or 2).
from the standby system of the redundant 1) Using the memory copy function, copy
system.) the program memory from the control
■Collateral information system to the standby system.
• Common information: File name 2) Format the CPU module program
• Individual information: - memories of both systems. (For both
■Diagnostic timing systems, specify the same values for
Appendix 1.8 List of error codes (6000 to 6999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• At power-on/At reset/At tracking cable the size of the area, which is used for
connection/At changing to backup mode/At enabling writing multiple program blocks
completion of write during RUN/At system to the CPU module during running.)
switching/At switching both systems into RUN
[FILE DIFF.]
In the redundant system, the valid-parameter drive
setting (SW2, SW3) set by the DIP switches differs
between the control system and standby system. RUN: Off
Match the valid-parameter drive settings
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
6001 (SW2, SW3) for both the control and standby QnPRH
• Common information: -
systems using the DIP switches.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At tracking cable
connection/At operation mode change
[OPE. MODE DIFF.]
The operational status of the control system and
standby system in the redundant system is not the
same. (This can be detected from the standby RUN: On
system of the redundant system.) Synchronize the operation statuses of the ERR.:On
6010 QnPRH
■Collateral information control system and standby system.
• Common information: - CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
393
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[OPE. MODE DIFF.]
At power-on/reset, the RUN/STOP switch settings
of the control system and standby system are not
the same in a redundant system. (This can be
RUN: Off
detected from the control system or standby Set the RUN/STOP switches of the control
ERR.:Flashing
6020 system of the redundant system.) system and standby system to the same QnPRH
■Collateral information setting.
CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[UNIT LAY. DIFF.]
• In a redundant system, the module configuration
differs between the control system and standby
system.
• The network module mode setting differs
• Match the module configurations of the
between the two systems. (This can be detected RUN: Off
control system and standby system.
from the control system or standby system of ERR.:Flashing
6030 • In the redundant setting of "Network QnPRH
the redundant system.)
parameter", match the mode setting of
■Collateral information CPU Status:Stop
System B to that of System A.
• Common information: Module No.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At tracking cable
connection/At operation mode change
[UNIT LAY. DIFF.]
In a redundant system, the CPU module model
name differs between the control system and
standby system. (This can be detected from the
RUN: Off
standby system of the redundant system.)
Match the model names of the control system ERR.:Flashing
6035 ■Collateral information QnPRH
and standby system.
• Common information: -
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At tracking cable
connection/At operation mode change
[UNIT LAY. DIFF.]
A difference in the remote I/O configuration of the
MELSECNET/H multiplexed remote I/O network
between the control system and standby system of
a redundant system was detected. (This can be RUN: Off
Check the network cables of the
detected from the control system or standby ERR.:Flashing
6036 MELSECNET/H multiplexed remote I/O QnPRH
system of the redundant system.)
network for disconnection.
■Collateral information CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: Module No.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[CARD TYPE DIFF.]
In the redundant system, the memory card
insertion status (inserted/not inserted) differs
RUN: Off
between the control system and standby system. Match the memory card insertion status
ERR.:Flashing
6040 ■Collateral information (inserted/not inserted) of the control system QnPRH
• Common information: - and standby system.
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[CARD TYPE DIFF.]
In the redundant system, the memory card type
differs between the control system and standby
RUN: Off
system.
Match the memory card types of the control ERR.:Flashing
6041 ■Collateral information QnPRH
system and standby system.
• Common information: -
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
394
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[CAN'T EXE. MODE] A
The function inexecutable in the debug mode or
operation mode (backup/separate mode) was
executed. (This can be detected from the control
RUN: On
system or standby system of the redundant Execute the function executable in the debug
ERR.:On
6050 system.) mode or operation mode (backup/separate QnPRH
■Collateral information mode).
CPU Status:Continue
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[CPU MODE DIFF.]
In a redundant system, the operation mode
(backup/separate) differs between the control
system and standby system. (This can be
detected from the standby system of the RUN: Off
redundant system.) Match the operation modes of the control ERR.:Flashing
6060 QnPRH
■Collateral information system and standby system.
• Common information: - CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At tracking cable
connection
[CPU MODE DIFF.]
In a redundant system, the operation mode
(backup/separate) differs between the control
system and standby system. (This can be
RUN: Off
detected from the standby system of the
Match the operation modes of the control ERR.:Flashing
6061 redundant system.) QnPRH
system and standby system.
■Collateral information
CPU Status:Stop
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed
[CPU MODE DIFF.]
Appendix 1.8 List of error codes (6000 to 6999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
Both System A and B are in the same system
status (control system). (This can be detected
from the system B of the redundant system.) RUN: Off
■Collateral information Power the CPU module (System B) which ERR.:Flashing
6062 QnPRH
• Common information: - resulted in a stop error, OFF and then ON.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset/At tracking cable
connection
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
• An error (e.g. retry limit exceeded) occurred in
tracking (data transmission). (This error may be
caused by tracking cable removal or other
• Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If
system power-off (including reset).)
the same error occurs, the cause is a
• The error occurred at a startup since the RUN: On
failure of the CPU module or tracking cable.
redundant system startup procedure was not ERR.:On
6100 Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
followed.
representative.
■Collateral information CPU Status:Continue
• Confirm the redundant system startup
• Common information: Tracking transmission
procedure, and execute a startup again.
data classification
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
395
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
• A timeout error occurred in tracking (data
transmission). (This error may be caused by
tracking cable removal or other system power-
off (including reset).)
• Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If
• The error occurred at a startup since the
the same error occurs, the cause is a
redundant system startup procedure was not RUN: On
failure of the CPU module or tracking cable.
followed. ERR.:On
6101 Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
(This can be detected from the control system or
representative.
standby system of the redundant system.) CPU Status:Continue
• Confirm the redundant system startup
■Collateral information
procedure, and execute a startup again.
• Common information: Tracking transmission
data classification
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
A data sum value error occurred in tracking (data
• Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If
reception). (This can be detected from the control
the same error occurs, the cause is a
system or standby system of the redundant RUN: On
failure of the CPU module or tracking cable.
system.) ERR.:On
6102 Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
■Collateral information
representative.
• Common information: - CPU Status:Continue
• Confirm the redundant system startup
• Individual information: -
procedure, and execute a startup again.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
• A data error (other than sum value error)
occurred in tracking (data reception). (This error
may be caused by tracking cable removal or
other system power-off (including reset).) • Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If
• The error occurred at a startup since the the same error occurs, the cause is a
RUN: On
redundant system startup procedure was not failure of the CPU module or tracking cable.
ERR.:On
6103 followed. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
(This can be detected from the control system or representative.
CPU Status:Continue
standby system of the redundant system.) • Confirm the redundant system startup
■Collateral information procedure, and execute a startup again.
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
• An error (e.g. retry limit exceeded) occurred in
tracking (data transmission). (This error may be
caused by tracking cable removal or other
system power-off (including reset).)
• Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If
• The error occurred at a startup since the
the same error occurs, the cause is a
redundant system startup procedure was not RUN: On
failure of the CPU module or tracking cable.
followed. ERR.:On
6105 Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
(This can be detected from the control system or
representative.
standby system of the redundant system.) CPU Status:Continue
• Confirm the redundant system startup
■Collateral information
procedure, and execute a startup again.
• Common information: Tracking transmission
data classification
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
396
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.] A
• A timeout error occurred in tracking (data
transmission). (This error may be caused by
tracking cable removal or other system power-
off (including reset).)
• Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If
• The error occurred at a startup since the
the same error occurs, the cause is a
redundant system startup procedure was not RUN: On
failure of the CPU module or tracking cable.
followed. ERR.:On
6106 Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
(This can be detected from the control system or
representative.
standby system of the redundant system.) CPU Status:Continue
• Confirm the redundant system startup
■Collateral information
procedure, and execute a startup again.
• Common information: Tracking transmission
data classification
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
A data sum value error occurred in tracking (data
• Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If
reception). (This can be detected from the control
the same error occurs, the cause is a
system or standby system of the redundant RUN: On
failure of the CPU module or tracking cable.
system.) ERR.:On
6107 Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
■Collateral information
representative.
• Common information: - CPU Status:Continue
• Confirm the redundant system startup
• Individual information: -
procedure, and execute a startup again.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
• A data error (other than sum value error)
occurred in tracking (data reception). (This error
may be caused by tracking cable removal or
other system power-off (including reset).) • Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If
• The error occurred at a startup since the the same error occurs, the cause is a
RUN: On
redundant system startup procedure was not failure of the CPU module or tracking cable.
ERR.:On
6108 followed. Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
(This can be detected from the control system or representative.
Appendix 1.8 List of error codes (6000 to 6999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
CPU Status:Continue
standby system of the redundant system.) • Confirm the redundant system startup
■Collateral information procedure, and execute a startup again.
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[TRK. SIZE ERROR]
The tracking capacity exceeded the allowed
range. (This can be detected from the control
system or standby system of the redundant
RUN: On
system.)
ERR.:On
6110 ■Collateral information Reexamine the tracking capacity. QnPRH
• Common information: Reason(s) for tracking
CPU Status:Continue
size excess error
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed
[TRK. SIZE ERROR]
The control system does not have enough file
register capacity for the file registers specified in
the tracking settings. (This can be detected from
RUN: On
the control system or standby system of the Switch to the file registers of which capacity is
ERR.:On
6111 redundant system.) greater than the file registers specified in the QnPRH
■Collateral information tracking settings.
CPU Status:Continue
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed
397
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[TRK. SIZE ERROR]
File registers greater than those of the standby
system were tracked and transmitted from the
control system. (This can be detected from the RUN: On
Switch to the file registers of which capacity is
standby system of the redundant system.) ERR.:On
6112 greater than the file registers specified in the QnPRH
■Collateral information
tracking settings.
• Common information: - CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When an END instruction executed
[TRK. CABLE ERR.]
• A start was made without the tracking cable
being connected.
• A start was made with the tracking cable faulty.
• As the tracking communication hardware of the
Connect a tracking cable and start up the
CPU module was faulty, the CPU module could
module. If the same error occurs, the cause is RUN: Off
not communicate with the other system through
a failure of the tracking cable or the tracking ERR.:Flashing
6120 the tracking cable. QnPRH
communication hardware of the CPU module.
(This can be detected from the control system or
Please consult your local Mitsubishi CPU Status:Stop
standby system of the redundant system.)
representative.
■Collateral information
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[TRK. DISCONNECT]
• The tracking cable was removed.
• The tracking cable became faulty while the CPU • If the tracking cable was removed, connect
module is running. the tracking cable to the connectors of the
• The tracking communication hardware of the CPU modules of the two systems.
RUN: On
CPU module became faulty. • If the error remains even after the above
ERR.:On
6130 (This can be detected from the control system or action is taken, the cause is a failure of the QnPRH
standby system of the redundant system.) tracking cable or the tracking
CPU Status:Continue
■Collateral information communication hardware of the CPU
• Common information: - module. Please consult your local
• Individual information: - Mitsubishi representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[TRK.INIT. ERROR]
• The other system did not respond during initial
communication at power-on/reset.
• The error occurred at a startup since the • Power off and on or reset the CPU module
redundant system startup procedure was not that detects the error. If the same error
RUN: Off
followed. occurs, the cause is a hardware failure of
ERR.:Flashing
6140 (This can be detected from the control system or the CPU module. Please consult your local QnPRH
standby system of the redundant system.) Mitsubishi representative.
CPU Status:Stop
■Collateral information • Confirm the redundant system startup
• Common information: - procedure, and execute a startup again.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
398
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[CONTROL EXE.] A
The standby system has been switched to the
control system in a redundant system. (Detected
by the CPU that was switched from the standby
system to the control system.)
Since this error code does not indicate the error
information of the CPU module but indicates its
status, the error code and error information are not RUN: On
stored into SD0 to 26, but are stored into the error ERR.:Off
6200 QnPRH
log every system switching. (To check the error
information, obtain the error log using the CPU Status:No error
programming tool.)
■Collateral information
• Common information: Reason(s) for system
switching
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[STANDBY]
The control system has been switched to the
standby system in a redundant system. (Detected
by the CPU that was switched from the control
system to the standby system.)
Since this error code does not indicate the error
information of the CPU module but indicates its
status, the error code and error information are not RUN: On
stored into SD0 to 26, but are stored into the error ERR.:Off
6210 QnPRH
log every system switching. (To check the error
information, obtain the error log using the CPU Status:No error
programming tool.)
■Collateral information
• Common information: Reason(s) for system
switching
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
Appendix 1.8 List of error codes (6000 to 6999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Always
[CAN'T SWITCH]
The system cannot be switched due to a standby
system error, tracking cable failure, or online
module change being executed in the separate
mode. Causes for switching system at control
system are as follows:
RUN: On
• System switching by SP.CONTSW instruction • Check the status of the standby system
ERR.:On
6220 • System switching request from network module and resolve the error. QnPRH
■Collateral information • Complete the online module change.
CPU Status:Continue
• Common information: Reason(s) for system
switching
• Individual information: Reason(s) for system
switching failure
■Diagnostic timing
• At switching execution
[STANDBY SYS. DOWN]
Any of the following errors was detected in the • Check whether the standby system is on or
backup mode. not, and if it is not on, power it on.
• The standby system has not started up in the • Check whether the standby system has
redundant system. been reset or not, and if it has been reset,
• The standby system has developed a stop error unreset it.
in the redundant system. • Check whether the standby system has RUN: On
• The CPU module in the debug mode was developed a stop error or not, and if it has ERR.:On
6300 QnPRH
connected to the operating control system. developed the error, remove the error
(This can be detected from the control system of factor and restart it. CPU Status:Continue
the redundant system.) • When the CPU module in the debug mode
■Collateral information was connected to the control system
• Common information: - operating in the backup mode, make
• Individual information: - connection so that the control system and
■Diagnostic timing standby system are combined correctly.
• Always
399
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
• The standby system exists but the control
[CONTROL SYS. DOWN] system does not exist.
Any of the following errors was detected in the • Check whether the system other than the
backup mode. standby system is on or not, and if it is not
• The control system has not started up in the on, power it on.
redundant system. • Check whether the system other than the
• The control system has developed a stop error standby system has been reset or not, and
in the redundant system. if it is has been reset, unreset it.
• The CPU module in the debug mode was • Check whether the system other than the
RUN: Off
connected to the operating standby system. standby system has developed a stop error
ERR.:Flashing
6310 • The error occurred at a startup since the or not, and if has developed the error, QnPRH
redundant system startup procedure was not remove the error factor, set the control
CPU Status:Stop
followed. system and standby system to the same
(This can be detected from the standby system of operating status, and restart.
the redundant system.) • When the CPU module in the debug mode
■Collateral information was connected to the control system
• Common information: - operating in the backup mode, make
• Individual information: - connection so that the control system and
■Diagnostic timing control system are combined correctly.
• Always • Confirm the redundant system startup
procedure, and execute a startup again.
[CONTROL SYS. DOWN]
• As consistency check data has not transmitted
from the control system in a redundant system,
the other system cannot start as a standby
system.
• Replace the tracking cable. If the same
• The error occurred at a startup since the
error occurs, the cause is a hardware RUN: Off
redundant system startup procedure was not
failure of the CPU module. Please consult ERR.:Flashing
6311 followed. QnPRH
your local Mitsubishi representative.
(This can be detected from the standby system of
• Confirm the redundant system startup CPU Status:Stop
the redundant system.)
procedure, and execute a startup again.
■Collateral information
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[CONTROL SYS. DOWN]
• As consistency check data has not transmitted
from the control system in a redundant system,
the other system cannot start as a standby
system.
• Replace the tracking cable. If the same
• The error occurred at a startup since the
error occurs, the cause is a hardware RUN: Off
redundant system startup procedure was not
failure of the CPU module. Please consult ERR.:Flashing
6312 followed. QnPRH
your local Mitsubishi representative.
(This can be detected from the standby system of
• Confirm the redundant system startup CPU Status:Stop
the redundant system.)
procedure, and execute a startup again.
■Collateral information
• Common information: -
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[CONTROL SYS. DOWN]
The control system detected the error of the
system configuration and informed it to the
standby system (host system) in the redundant Restart the system after checking that the RUN: Off
system. connection between base unit and the system ERR.:Flashing
6313 QnPRH
■Collateral information configuration (type/number/parameter of
• Common information: - module) are correct. CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
400
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[PRG. MEM. CLEAR] A
The memory copy from control system to standby
system was executed, and the program memory
was cleared. RUN: Off
After the memory copy from the control
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing
6400 system to the standby system is completed, QnPRH
• Common information: -
turn off and then on or reset the system.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At execution of the memory copy from control
system to standby system
[MEM. COPY EXE.]
The memory copy from control system to standby
system was executed. (This can be detected from
the control system of the redundant system.) RUN: On
■Collateral information ERR.:On
6410 QnPRH
• Common information: -
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• At execution of the memory copy from control
system to standby system
[TRK. PARA. ERROR]
The file register file specified in the tracking setting
of "PLC Parameter" does not exist. Read the individual information of the error RUN: Off
■Collateral information using the programming tool. Check the drive ERR.:Flashing
6500 QnPRH
• Common information: File name/Drive name name and file name and correct them, or
• Individual information: Parameter number create the specified file register file. CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[TRK. PARA. ERROR]
The file register range specified in the device
detail setting of the tracking setting of "PLC
Parameter" exceeded the specified file register file RUN: Off
Read the individual information of the error
capacity. ERR.:Flashing
6501 using the programming tool, and increase the QnPRH
■Collateral information
file register capacity.
• Common information: File name/Drive name CPU Status:Stop
Appendix 1.8 List of error codes (6000 to 6999)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Individual information: Parameter number
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
401
Appendix 1.9 List of error codes (7000 to 10000)
The following table shows the error messages, the error contents and causes, and the corrective actions for the error
codes (7000 to 10000).
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MULTI CPU DOWN]
• In the operating mode of a multiple CPU
system, a CPU error occurred at the CPU where
• Read the common information of the error
"All station stop by stop error of CPU " was
using the programming tool. Check the
selected.
error in the CPU module, and eliminate the
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module
error cause.
incompatible with the multiple CPU system was
• Remove the CPU module from the main
mounted.
base unit if it does not support the multiple RUN: Off Q00/Q01
• Any CPU module other than CPU No.1 was
CPU system configuration. ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
disconnected from the base unit during
• Check the mounting status of CPU QnPH
operation. Or any CPU module other than CPU
modules other than CPU No.1 and whether CPU Status:Stop QnU
No.1 was reset.
the CPU modules were reset.
• At power-on/reset, momentary power failure has
• Check the power supply.
occurred.
• The cause is a hardware failure of the
7000 ■Collateral information
power supply module. Please consult your
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
local Mitsubishi representative.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[MULTI CPU DOWN]
In a multiple CPU system, CPU other than CPU
No.1 cannot be started up due to stop error of the
CPU No.1 at power-on, which occurs to CPU No.2 Read the common information of the error RUN: Off Q00/Q01
to No.4. using the programming tool. Check the error ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
■Collateral information in the CPU module, and eliminate the error QnPH
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) cause. CPU Status:Stop QnU
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[MULTI CPU DOWN]
• Reset the CPU module and run it again. If
• There is no response from the target CPU
the same error code is displayed again, the
module in a multiple CPU system during initial
cause is a hardware failure of any of the
communication.
CPU modules. Please consult your local
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module
Mitsubishi representative. Q00/Q01
incompatible with the multiple CPU system was
• Remove the CPU module from the main Qn(H)
mounted.
base unit if it does not support a multiple QnPH
■Collateral information
CPU system configuration. Alternatively,
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
replace the CPU module that does not RUN: Off
• Individual information: -
support a multiple system configuration ERR.:Flashing
7002 ■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset with the one that does.
CPU Status:Stop
[MULTI CPU DOWN]
There is no response from the target CPU module
in a multiple CPU system during initial Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
communication. same error code is displayed again, the
■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of any of the CPU QnU
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) modules. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• Individual information: - representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[MULTI CPU DOWN]
There is no response from the target CPU module
in a multiple CPU system at initial communication Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
RUN: Off Q00/Q01
stage. same error code is displayed again, the
ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
7003 ■Collateral information cause is a hardware failure of any of the CPU
QnPH
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) modules. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
CPU Status:Stop QnU
• Individual information: - representative.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
402
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MULTI CPU DOWN]
• Check the system configuration to see if
A
In a multiple CPU system, a data error occurred in
modules are mounted in excess of the
communication between the CPU modules. RUN: Off
number of I/O points.
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing Q00/Q01
7004 • If there is no problem in the system
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) QnU
configuration, the cause is a hardware
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
failure of the CPU module. Please consult
■Diagnostic timing
• Always your local Mitsubishi representative.
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
• In a multiple CPU system, a faulty CPU module
was mounted.
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module
incompatible with the multiple CPU system was • Read the common information of the error
mounted. (The CPU module compatible with the using the programming tool and replace the
multiple CPU system was used to detect an faulty CPU module.
Q00/Q01
error.) • Replace the CPU module with the one
Qn(H)
• In a multiple CPU system, any of the CPU No. 2 compatible with the multiple CPU system.
QnPH
to 4 was reset with power ON. (The CPU whose • Do not reset any of the No. 2 to 4 CPU
QnU
reset state was cancelled was used to detect an modules.
error.) • Reset CPU No. 1 and restart the multiple
■Collateral information CPU system.
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the version of the
software package (PPC-DRV-01)*2 for the PC
CPU module is 1.06 or earlier. Change the software package (PPC-DRV-
RUN: Off
■Collateral information 01)*2 for the PC CPU module to the version Q00/Q01
ERR.:Flashing
7010 • Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) 1.07 or later.
• Individual information: -
CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
Appendix 1.9 List of error codes (7000 to 10000)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
The Q172(H)CPU(N) or Q173(H)CPU(N) is
mounted on the multiple CPU high-speed main
base unit (Q3DB). (This may result in a module Replace the Q172(H)CPU(N) and
failure.) Q173(H)CPU(N) with the Motion CPU
■Collateral information compatible with the multiple CPU high-speed
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) main base unit.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset Qn(H)
QnPH
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
The Universal model QCPU (except Q02UCPU)
and Q172(H)CPU(N) are mounted on the same
base unit. (This may result in a module failure.) Check the QCPU and Motion CPU that can
■Collateral information be used in a multiple CPU system, and
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) change the system configuration.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
403
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
Either of the following settings was made in a
multiple CPU system.
• Multiple CPU automatic refresh setting was
made for the inapplicable CPU module. • Correct the multiple CPU automatic refresh
• "I/O sharing when using multiple CPUs" setting setting. Q00/Q01
was made for the inapplicable CPU module. • Correct the "I/O sharing when using QnU
■Collateral information multiple CPUs" setting.
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
The system configuration for using the multiple
CPU high speed transmission function is not met. RUN: Off
• The Universal model QCPU (except Q00UCPU, ERR.:Flashing
7011
Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU) is not used for the CPU
No.1. CPU Status:Stop
• The multiple CPU high speed main base unit • Change the system configuration to meet
(Q3DB) is not used. the conditions for using the multiple CPU
• Points other than 0 is set to the send range for high speed transmission function.
the CPU module incompatible with the multiple • When auto refresh is performed for the
QnU
CPU high speed transmission function. multiple CPU high-speed transmission
• Points other than 0 are set to the auto refresh area, set 0 point to the auto refresh send
send range for the multiple CPU high-speed range of the CPU module that does not
transmission area even though the CPU module support the use of this area.
does not support the use of this area.
■Collateral information
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
The Q172(H)CPU(N) or Q173(H)CPU(N) is
mounted to the CPU slot or slots 0 to 2. (This may • Check the QCPU and Motion CPU that can
RUN: Off
result in a module failure.) be used in a multiple CPU system, and
ERR.:Flashing
7013 ■Collateral information change the system configuration. QnU
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) • Remove the Motion CPU incompatible with
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - the multiple CPU system.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[MULTI CPU ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, an error occurred in the
CPU module where "All station stop by stop error
of CPU" was not selected in the operating mode
Read the common information of the error RUN: On Q00/Q01
setting. (The CPU module where no error occurred
using the programming tool. Check the error ERR.:On Qn(H)
7020 was used to detect an error.)
in the CPU module, and eliminate the error QnPH
■Collateral information
cause. CPU Status:Continue QnU
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
[CPU LAY ERROR] • Set the same value to the number of CPU
An assignment error occurred in the CPU-
modules specified in the multiple CPU
mountable slot (CPU slot, I/O slot 0, 1) in excess
setting of "PLC Parameter" and the number
of the number of CPU modules specified in the RUN: Off
of mounted CPU modules (including CPU
multiple CPU setting of "PLC Parameter". ERR.:Flashing Q00J/Q00/Q01
7030 (empty)).
■Collateral information QnU
• Make the type specified in the I/O
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) CPU Status:Stop
assignment setting of "PLC Parameter"
• Individual information: -
consistent with the CPU module
■Diagnostic timing
configuration.
• At power-on/At reset
404
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[CPU LAY ERROR] • Set the same value to the number of CPU A
An assignment error occurred within the range of modules specified in the multiple CPU
the number of CPUs specified in the multiple CPU setting of "PLC Parameter" and the number
RUN: Off
setting of "PLC Parameter". of mounted CPU modules (including CPU
ERR.:Flashing Q00J/Q00/Q01
7031 ■Collateral information (empty)).
QnU
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) • Make the type specified in the I/O
CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: - assignment setting of "PLC Parameter"
■Diagnostic timing consistent with the CPU module
• At power-on/At reset configuration.
[CPU LAY ERROR]
The number of CPU modules mounted in a
Configure a system so that the number of
multiple CPU system is wrong. RUN: Off
mountable modules of each CPU module
■Collateral information ERR.:Flashing Q00J/Q00/Q01
7032 does not exceed the maximum number of
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.) QnU
mountable modules specified in the
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Stop
specification.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[CPU LAY ERROR]
The CPU module has been mounted on the
inapplicable slot. • Mount the CPU module on the applicable RUN: Off
Q00J/Q00/Q01
■Collateral information slot. ERR.:Flashing
7035 QnPRH
• Common information: Module No. (Slot No.) • Remove the CPU module from the slot
QnU
• Individual information: - where a CPU module cannot be mounted. CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[CPU LAY ERROR]
The host CPU No. set by the multiple CPU setting
• Mount the mounting slot of the CPU
and the host CPU No. determined by the mounting
module correctly. RUN: Off
position of the CPU module are not the same.
• Correct the host CPU No. set by the ERR.:Flashing
7036 ■Collateral information QnU
multiple CPU setting to the CPU No.
• Common information: Module No. (CPU No.)
determined by the mounting position of the CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
CPU module.
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
Appendix 1.9 List of error codes (7000 to 10000)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
[INCORRECT FILE]
The error of stored file (enabled parameter file) is Write the files shown in SD17 to SD22
detected. (individual information) to the drive shown in
■Collateral information SD16 (L) (individual information). Turn off and RUN: Off
• Common information: - then on or reset the CPU module. ERR.:Flashing QnU
8031
• Individual information: File diagnostic If the same error code is displayed again, the LCPU
information cause is a hardware failure of the CPU CPU Status:Stop
■Diagnostic timing module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
• At power-on/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to representative.
programmable controller
[F**** ]
Annunciator (F) turned on. (The "****" portion of
the error message indicates an annunciator RUN: On
Read the individual information of the error
number.) ERR.:On/Off*1
using the programming tool to identify the QCPU
9000 ■Collateral information USER:On*3
numeric value (annunciator number). Check LCPU
• Common information: Program error location
the program corresponding to the value.
• Individual information: Annunciator number CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
405
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[<CHK>ERR ***-***]
Error detected by the CHK instruction. (The "***"
portion of the error message indicates the
RUN: On
numbers of contact and coil that have been Read the individual information of the error
ERR.:Off Qn(H)
detected.) using the programming tool to identify the
9010 USER:On QnPH
■Collateral information numeric value (error number). Check the
QnPRH
• Common information: Program error location program corresponding to the value.
CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: Failure No.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[BOOT OK]
Storage of data onto ROM was completed
normally in automatic write to the standard ROM.
Use the DIP switches to set the valid RUN: Off
(The BOOT LED also flashes.) Qn(H)
parameter drive to the standard ROM. Then, ERR.:Flashing
9020 ■Collateral information QnPH
switch power on again, and perform boot
• Common information: - QnPRH
operation from the standard ROM. CPU Status:Stop
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• At power-on/At reset
[PID ERROR]
A data error has occurred in control parameter
because the sampling time (TS) setting is out of
the range (TS0). Or, an error has occurred during RUN: On
PID operation. Check and correct the control parameter ERR.:On LCPU
9100
■Collateral information setting. QnUDV
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
A data error has occurred in control parameter or
during PID operation because the input filter
constant () setting is out of the range (<0 or RUN: On
100). Check and correct the control parameter ERR.:On LCPU
9101
■Collateral information setting. QnUDV
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
A data error has occurred in control parameter or
during PID operation because the proportional
RUN: On
gain (KP) setting is out of the range (KP<0).
Check and correct the control parameter ERR.:On LCPU
9102 ■Collateral information
setting. QnUDV
• Common information: Program error location
CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
A data error has occurred in control parameter or
during PID operation because the integral time (TI)
RUN: On
setting is out of the range (TI<0).
Check and correct the control parameter ERR.:On LCPU
9103 ■Collateral information setting. QnUDV
• Common information: Program error location
CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
A data error has occurred in control parameter or
during PID operation because the derivative gain
RUN: On
(KD) setting is out of the range (KD<0 or 201KD).
Check and correct the control parameter ERR.:On LCPU
9104 ■Collateral information
setting. QnUDV
• Common information: Program error location
CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
406
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[PID ERROR] A
A data error has occurred in control parameter or
during PID operation because the derivative time
RUN: On
(TD) setting is out of the range (TD<0).
Check and correct the control parameter ERR.:On LCPU
9105 ■Collateral information
setting. QnUDV
• Common information: Program error location
CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The sampling time (TS) setting is shorter than the
operation cycle. RUN: On
■Collateral information Set the sampling time (TS) so that it will be ERR.:On LCPU
9106
• Common information: Program error location longer than the operation cycle. QnUDV
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The change rate of process value (PV) is out of
the range, -32768 to 32767. RUN: On
■Collateral information ERR.:On LCPU
9107 Check the process value.
• Common information: Program error location QnUDV
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The error (EV) is out of the range, -32768 to
32767. RUN: On
■Collateral information ERR.:On LCPU
9108 Check the process value.
• Common information: Program error location QnUDV
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The integral result is out of the range, -32768 to
Appendix 1.9 List of error codes (7000 to 10000)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
32767. RUN: On
• Check the process value.
■Collateral information ERR.:On LCPU
9109 • Check and correct the control parameter
• Common information: Program error location QnUDV
setting.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The derivative value has exceeded the limit
because of the derivative gain (KD). RUN: On
• Check the process value.
■Collateral information ERR.:On LCPU
9110 • Check and correct the control parameter
• Common information: Program error location QnUDV
setting.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The derivative result is out of the range, -32768 to
32767. RUN: On
• Check the process value.
■Collateral information ERR.:On LCPU
9111 • Check and correct the control parameter
• Common information: Program error location QnUDV
setting.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The PID operation result is out of the range, -
32768 to 32767. RUN: On
• Check the process value.
■Collateral information ERR.:On LCPU
9112 • Check and correct the control parameter
• Common information: Program error location QnUDV
setting.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
407
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[PID ERROR]
The output upper limit setting value is smaller than
the output lower limit setting value. RUN: On
Set the values so that the output upper limit
■Collateral information ERR.:On LCPU
9113 setting value becomes larger than the output
• Common information: Program error location QnUDV
lower limit setting value.
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The input or output change rate alarm setting
value is smaller than 0. RUN: On
■Collateral information Set 0 or larger to the input or output change ERR.:On LCPU
9114
• Common information: Program error location rate alarm setting value. QnUDV
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
• The error at the start of auto tuning (step
response method) is 150 or less.
• The error at the end of auto tuning (step
RUN: On
response method) is 1/3 or more of the error at
Check the process value and set value, and ERR.:On LCPU
9115 the start of auto tuning.
execute auto tuning again. QnUDV
■Collateral information
CPU Status:Continue
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The operating direction estimated from the
process value at the start of auto tuning (step
response method) does not match the actual
Correct the relationship among the set value, RUN: On
operating direction output by auto tuning (step
manipulated value for auto tuning (step ERR.:On LCPU
9116 response method).
response method), and process value, and QnUDV
■Collateral information
execute auto tuning again. CPU Status:Continue
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
Auto tuning (step response method) does not
Set the sampling time so that it will be longer
operate properly. RUN: On
than the operation cycle, or set a larger value
■Collateral information ERR.:On LCPU
9117 for the input filter constant.
• Common information: Program error location QnUDV
Change the settings, and execute auto tuning
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
again.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The output upper limit (ULV) for auto tuning (limit
cycle method) is smaller than the output lower limit
RUN: On
(LLV). Set the values so that the output upper limit
ERR.:On LCPU
9118 ■Collateral information (ULV) becomes larger than the output lower
QnUDV
• Common information: Program error location limit (LLV).
CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The PV threshold (hysteresis) setting value for
auto tuning (limit cycle method) is smaller than 0. RUN: On
■Collateral information Set 0 or larger to the PV threshold ERR.:On LCPU
9119
• Common information: Program error location (hysteresis) setting value. QnUDV
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
408
APPENDICES
Error LED status, Corresponding
Error and cause Corrective action
code CPU status CPU
[PID ERROR] A
Data in the system area used for auto tuning (limit
cycle method) have been overwritten. RUN: On
■Collateral information Check that data in the system area occupied ERR.:On LCPU
9120
• Common information: Program error location by the PID instructions are not overwritten. QnUDV
• Individual information: - CPU Status:Continue
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
The operation result is abnormal because the auto
tuning (limit cycle method) measurement time has Increase the difference between the output
RUN: On
exceeded. (ON>, ON<0, <0) upper limit and lower limit (ULV-LLV) for auto
ERR.:On LCPU
9121 ■Collateral information tuning, or set a smaller value to the input filter
QnUDV
• Common information: Program error location constant () or the PV threshold (SHPV).
CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: - Then, check the result again.
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
• The proportional gain (KP) resulted from auto
tuning (limit cycle method) is out of the range, 0
to 32767.
RUN: On
• The rate of change in the process value (PV) is Multiply the process value (PV) by ten so that
ERR.:On LCPU
9122 smaller compared with that in the output value. the rate of change in the PV increases during
QnUDV
■Collateral information auto tuning.
CPU Status:Continue
• Common information: Program error location
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
• The integral time (TI) resulted from auto tuning
(limit cycle method) is out of the range, 0 to Increase the difference between the output
32767. RUN: On
upper limit and lower limit (ULV-LLV) for auto
• The auto tuning time is longer than necessary. ERR.:On LCPU
9123 tuning, or set a smaller value to the input filter
■Collateral information QnUDV
constant () or the PV threshold (SHPV).
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:Continue
Appendix 1.9 List of error codes (7000 to 10000)
Appendix 1 Error Codes
Then, check the result again.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[PID ERROR]
• The derivative time (TD) resulted from auto
tuning (limit cycle method) is out of the range, 0 Increase the difference between the output
to 32767. RUN: On
upper limit and lower limit (ULV-LLV) for auto
• The auto tuning time is longer than necessary. ERR.:On LCPU
9124 tuning, or set a smaller value to the input filter
■Collateral information QnUDV
constant () or the PV threshold (SHPV).
• Common information: Program error location CPU Status:Continue
Then, check the result again.
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• When instruction executed
[CONT. UNIT ERROR]
In the multiple CPU system, an error occurred in
the CPU module other than the Process CPU and
RUN: Off
High Performance model QCPU. To check the details of the error, connect a
ERR.:Flashing Qn(H)
10000 ■Collateral information programming tool to the corresponding CPU
QnPH
• Common information: - module.
CPU Status:Continue
• Individual information: -
■Diagnostic timing
• Always
*1 For the Basic model QCPU, this LED can be turned on/off using the LED control function. (For the High Performance
model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, Universal model QCPU, and LCPU, the LED can only be turned off.)
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) for the CPU module used
*2 The product name is the MELSEC- Q series compatible PC CPU module bus interface driver software package.
*3 The Basic model QCPU does not have the USER LED.
409
Appendix 1.10 Clearing an error
An error can be cleared as far as the CPU module continues its operation regardless of the error.
1. Remove the error cause.
2. Store the error code to be cleared in SD50.
3. Turn on SM50.
4. The error is cleared.
When the error in the CPU module is cleared, the special relay and special register or LEDs relating to the error return
to the status before the error. If the same error occurs after clearing the error, the error will be registered to the error
history again.
When multiple annunciators are detected, only the first annunciator detected can be cleared. For details on clearing
errors, refer to the following.
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) for the CPU module used
410
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during
A
communication with CPU module
If an error occurs at communication request from a programming tool, intelligent function module, or network system,
the CPU module returns the error code to the request source.
This error code is not stored in SD0 because the error is not the one detected by the self-diagnostic function of the
CPU module.
When the request source is a programming tool, a message and an error code are displayed on the programming tool.
When the request source is an intelligent function module or network system, the CPU module returns an error code to
the request source.
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check the command data of the MC protocol,
etc.
MC protocol A code different from the one specified is set to QCPU
0050H • Execute again. If the same error code is
related error the command/response type of the subheader. LCPU
displayed, please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
• Connect the serial communication cable
QCPU
4000H Common error Serial communication sum check error correctly.
LCPU
• Take measures to reduce noise.
• Check the command data of the MC protocol,
etc. QCPU
4001H Common error Unsupported request was executed.
• Check the CPU module model name selected in LCPU
the programming tool.
• Check the command data of the MC protocol,
etc.
• Check the CPU module model name selected in
QCPU
4002H Common error Unsupported request was executed. the programming tool.
LCPU
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, please consult your local Mitsubishi
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
representative.
Command for which a global request cannot be QCPU
4003H Common error Check the command data of the MC protocol, etc.
performed was executed. LCPU
Any operation for the CPU module is prohibited
• Set the system protect switch of the CPU
by the system protect function provided against
module to OFF. QCPU
4004H Common error the following events.
• Perform operation again after the CPU module LCPU
• The system protect switch is ON.
has completed starting.
• The CPU module is starting.
The volume of data handled according to the QCPU
4005H Common error Check the command data of the MC protocol, etc.
specified request is too large. LCPU
• When using serial communication, inquire of the
external device manufacturer for support
conditions.
• When using serial communication, check the QCPU
4006H Common error Initial communication failed.
CPU module model name selected in the LCPU
programming tool.
• When using Ethernet communication, change
the start timing of the communication.
The CPU module is BUSY. (The buffer is not After the free time has passed, re-execute the
4008H Common error QCPU
vacant). request.
CPU mode Since the CPU module is running, the request Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP QCPU
4010H
error contents cannot be executed. status. LCPU
CPU mode Since the CPU module is not in a STOP status, Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP QCPU
4013H
error the request contents cannot be executed. status. LCPU
• Check the specified drive memory status.
CPU file related The specified drive memory does not exist or QCPU
4021H • After backing up the data in the CPU module,
error there is an error. LCPU
format the CPU memory.
CPU file related The file with the specified file name or file No. QCPU
4022H Check the specified file name and file No.
error does not exist. LCPU
411
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
CPU file related The file name and file No. of the specified file do QCPU
4023H Delete the file and then recreate the file.
error not match. LCPU
CPU file related QCPU
4024H The specified file cannot be handled by a user. Do not access the specified file.
error LCPU
CPU file related The specified file is processing the request from Forcibly execute the request, or send the request QCPU
4025H
error another programming tool. again after the processing being performed ends. LCPU
CPU file related The file password set in advance to the target Specify the file password set in advance, and then QCPU
4026H
error drive (memory) must be specified. access to the drive (memory). LCPU
CPU file related The specified range is larger than the file size Check the specified range and access within that QCPU
4027H
error range. range. LCPU
CPU file related Forcibly execute the request, or change the file QCPU
4028H The same file already exists.
error name and execute the request again. LCPU
Review the specified file capacity, or clean up the
CPU file related QCPU
4029H The specified file capacity cannot be obtained. specified drive (memory) and execute the request
error LCPU
again.
CPU file related After backing up the data in the CPU module, QCPU
402AH The specified file is abnormal.
error format the CPU memory. LCPU
Execute again after setting the CPU module to the
STOP status.
CPU file related The request contents cannot be executed in the QCPU
402BH Execute programmable controller memory
error specified drive memory. LCPU
arrangement to increase the continuous free
space of the drive (memory).
CPU file related The requested operation cannot be executed QCPU
402CH Execute again after a while.
error currently. LCPU
• The specified device name cannot be handled.
• The device number of 65536 or greater is • Check the specified device name.
CPU device QCPU
4030H specified for the CPU module that does not • Use a CPU module that supports extended data
specified error LCPU
support extended data register (D) and register (D) and extended link register (W).
extended link register (W).
• Check the specified device No.
• The specified device No. is outside the range.
CPU device • Check the device assignment parameters of the QCPU
4031H • The CPU module cannot handle the specified
specified error CPU module. LCPU
device.
• Check the specified device name.
There is a mistake in the specified device
qualification. The unusable device name must be
CPU device • Check the specified device qualification method. QCPU
4032H specified in MC protocol random reading,
specified error • Check the specified device name. LCPU
random writing (word), monitor registration, and
monitor command.
CPU device Writing cannot be done because the specified Do not write the data in the specified device, and
4033H QCPU
specified error device is for system use. do not turn on or off.
Since the completion device for the target station
Cannot be executed since the completion device CPU module cannot be turned ON by the SREAD
CPU device QCPU
4034H for the dedicated instruction cannot be turned instruction/SWRITE instruction, execute again
specified error LCPU
ON. after setting the operating status of the target
station CPU module to the RUN status.
Intelligent
function Check whether the specified module is the
The request contents cannot be executed in the QCPU
4040H module intelligent function module having the buffer
specified intelligent function module. LCPU
specification memory.
error
Intelligent
function Check the header address and access number of
The access range exceeds the buffer memory QCPU
4041H module points and access using a range that exists in the
range of the specified intelligent function module. LCPU
specification intelligent function module.
error
Intelligent
function • Check that the specified intelligent function
The specified intelligent function module cannot QCPU
4042H module module is operating normally.
be accessed. LCPU
specification • Check the specified module for a hardware fault.
error
412
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
Intelligent A
function
The intelligent function module does not exist in Check the I/O No. of the specified intelligent QCPU
4043H module
the specified position. function module. LCPU
specification
error
Check that the specified intelligent function
Intelligent A control bus error occurred during access to the
module, other modules, and base units have no QCPU
function intelligent function module.
hardware failure.
4044H module
specification Check that the specified special function module,
A system bus error occurred during access to the
error other modules, and LA1S extension base unit LCPU
special function module.
have no hardware failure.
An error occurred when the buffer memory of the Do not access the buffer memory of the
Intelligent MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B local station data MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B local station data QCPU
function link module was accessed. link module since the access is prohibited.
4048H module
specification An error occurred when the buffer memory of the
Do not access the buffer memory of the
error MELSECNET()/B local station module was LCPU
MELSECNET()/B local station module.
accessed.
The request contents cannot be executed
because the write protect switch on the memory Turn off the write protect switch or the protect QCPU
4050H Protect error
card or the protect switch on the SD memory switch. LCPU
card is on.
Check the following and make it countermeasures.
The specified device memory cannot be • Is the memory one that can be used? QCPU
4051H Protect error
accessed. • Is the specified drive memory correctly LCPU
installed?
The specified file attribute is read only so the Do not write data in the specified file. Or change QCPU
4052H Protect error
data cannot be written. the file attribute. LCPU
Check the specified drive memory. Or reexecute
An error occurred when writing data to the QCPU
4053H Protect error write after changing the corresponding drive
specified drive memory. LCPU
memory.
An error occurred when deleting the data in the Check the specified drive memory. Or re-erase QCPU
4054H Protect error
specified drive memory. after replacing the corresponding drive memory. LCPU
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• Finish the operation of another programming
The online debug function (such as online
tool and then execute the function.
Online change, sampling trace, and monitoring
• If the operation of another programming tool is QCPU
4060H registration condition setting) and the data logging function
on hold, resume with that programming tool to LCPU
error are being executed with another programming
complete the operation, and then execute the
tool.
function again.
• Register an online debug function (such as
online change, sampling trace, and monitoring
Online
Communication of the online debug function was condition setting) and then establish a QCPU
4061H registration
unsuccessful. communication. LCPU
error
• Execute again after checking the communication
route such as the communication cable.
Online
The registered number of locked files exceeded Finish the file access from another programming QCPU
4063H registration
the maximum value. tool, and then execute again. LCPU
error
• Check the set data of the online debug function
Set data of the online debug function (such as (such as the online change/sampling
Online
the online change/sampling trace/settings of trace/settings of monitor condition), data logging QCPU
4064H registration
monitor condition), data logging function, or function, and realtime monitor function. LCPU
error
realtime monitor function are incorrect. • Execute again after checking the communication
route such as the communication cable.
Online Check the device assignment parameters of the
The device allocation information differs from the
4065H registration CPU module or the device assignment of the QCPU
parameter.
error request data.
Online
QCPU
4066H registration The specified file password is incorrect. Check and specify the correct file password.
LCPU
error
413
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check the system area capacity of the user
Online setting specified when "format PLC memory" is
QCPU
4067H registration Monitor communication was unsuccessful. executed.
LCPU
error • Execute again after checking the communication
route such as the communication cable.
Online
Operation is disabled because it is being Finish the operation of another programming tool QCPU
4068H registration
performed with another programming tool. and then execute again. LCPU
error
Online
The drive (memory) number that cannot be Check the specified drive and specify the correct QCPU
406AH registration
handled (other than 0 to 4) was specified. drive. LCPU
error
Check the status of the CPU module with the PLC
Online
Online operation was interrupted due to a CPU diagnostics function, identify the error, and take a
406BH registration QnUDV
module error. corrective action referring to the troubleshooting
error
section.
The program not yet corrected and the one Read the program from the CPU module to match
Circuit inquiry QCPU
4070H corrected by online program change are it with that of the programming tool, and then
error LCPU
different. execute online change again.
QCPU
4080H Other error Request data error Check the request data that has been specified.
LCPU
QCPU
4081H Other error The sort subject cannot be detected. Check the data to be searched.
LCPU
Complete the processing for a request from
The specified command is executing and QCPU
4082H Other error another programming tool and then execute the
therefore cannot be executed. LCPU
command again.
An attempt was made to perform operation for QCPU
4083H Other error Register the program to the parameters.
the program not registered to the parameters. LCPU
Check if the specified pointer (P or I) exists in the QCPU
4084H Other error The specified pointer (P or I) does not exist.
data. LCPU
The pointer (P or I) cannot be specified because Register the program to be executed in parameter
4085H Other error QCPU
the program is not specified in parameter. first, and specify the pointer (P or I).
The specified pointer (P or I) has already been Check and correct the pointer number to be QCPU
4086H Other error
added. added. LCPU
QCPU
4087H Other error The number of pointers (P or I) exceeds its limit. Check and correct the specified pointer (P or I).
LCPU
• The specified step number is not at the head • Check and correct the specified step No.
of the instruction. • Read the program from the CPU module to QCPU
4088H Other error
• The program differs from that stored in the match it with that of the programming tool, and LCPU
CPU module. then execute online change again.
• Check the specified program file contents.
An attempt was made to insert/delete the END QCPU
4089H Other error • Write the program after setting the CPU module
instruction by online program change. LCPU
to the STOP status.
• Check the capacity of the specified program file.
The file capacity exceeded after the online QCPU
408AH Other error • Write the program after setting the CPU module
change was executed. LCPU
to the STOP status.
• Re-execute after the CPU module is in a status
where the mode request can be executed. QCPU
408BH Other error The remote request cannot be executed.
• For remote operation, set the parameter to LCPU
"Enable remote reset".
An attempt was made to remote-start the The program including the CHK instruction cannot Qn(H)
408CH Other error program, which uses the CHK instruction, as a be executed at low speed. Execute again after QnPH
low speed program. checking the program. QnPRH
• Check whether the model of the used CPU
module is correct or not.
• The program where online change was
The instruction code that cannot be handled QCPU
408DH Other error attempted includes the instruction that cannot be
exists. LCPU
handled by the CPU module specified for the
project. Check the program and delete the
instruction.
414
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Write the program after setting the CPU module A
to the STOP status.
• The starting position of online program change
is not specified with the correct program step
• The write step is illegal.
No. Check whether the programming tool QCPU
408EH Other error • The program differs from that stored in the
supports the model and version of the CPU LCPU
CPU module.
module that is specified for the project.
• Read the program from the CPU module to
match it with that of the programming tool, and
then execute online change again.
SFC device
QCPU
40A0H specification A block No. outside the range was specified. Check the setting contents and make a correction.
LCPU
error
SFC device
A number of blocks that exceeds the range was Check the number of settings and make a QCPU
40A1H specification
specified. correction. LCPU
error
SFC device
A step No. that is outside the range was QCPU
40A2H specification Check the setting contents and make a correction.
specified. LCPU
error
SFC device
Check the number of settings and make a QCPU
40A3H specification Step range limit exceeded
correction. LCPU
error
SFC device Qn(H)
The specified sequence step No. is outside the
40A4H specification Check the setting contents and make a correction. QnPH
range.
error QnPRH
SFC device Qn(H)
Check the number of settings and make a
40A5H specification The specified device is outside the range. QnPH
correction.
error QnPRH
SFC device Qn(H)
The block specification pattern and step
40A6H specification Check the setting contents and make a correction. QnPH
specification pattern were wrong.
error QnPRH
SFC file related The drive (memory) specified in SFC file QCPU
40B0H Check the setting contents and make a correction.
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
error operation is wrong. LCPU
SFC file related The SFC program specified in SFC file operation Check the specified file name and make a QCPU
40B1H
error does not exist. correction. LCPU
SFC file related The program specified in SFC file operation is Check the specified file name and make a QCPU
40B2H
error not an SFC program. correction. LCPU
Using online program change of SFC, an attempt
was made to execute rewrite operation of the
Qn(H)
SFC file related "SFC dedicated instruction", such as the "STEP Switch the CPU module to the STOP status, and
40B3H QnPH
error start instruction or transition start instruction", write the program.
QnPRH
that shows an SFC chart. (SFC dedicated
instruction cannot be written during RUN.)
SFC file related After inactivating the target block, change or delete QCPU
40B4H Active blocks cannot be changed or deleted.
error the block by executing the online change. LCPU
SFC file related The number of SFC steps after the program Reduce the number of SFC steps to be added by QCPU
40B5H
error modification exceeds the maximum number. executing the online change. LCPU
• Execute the verify with PLC function for the
unedited SFC program and the SFC program in
the CPU module to check for the consistency.
SFC file related Then edit the SFC program and execute the QCPU
40B6H The specified block does not exist.
error online change. LCPU
• Edit the SFC program read from the CPU
module by executing the read from PLC
function, and execute the online change.
SFC file related The online change cannot be executed for the Execute the online change (SFC inactive block) for QCPU
40B7H
error standby type SFC program. the scan type SFC program. LCPU
SFC file related The device number of the SFC data device is QCPU
40B8H Review the block data setting.
error outside the range. LCPU
SFC file related Review the communication route (such as the QCPU
40B9H The modified SFC program is incorrect.
error cable connection status). LCPU
415
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• When executing the online change for each
block, set the number of sequence steps of the
The online change for each block cannot be
SFC file related target SFC block to 32K or less. QCPU
40BAH executed for a SFC block whose number of
error • Switch the CPU module to the STOP status, and LCPU
sequence steps exceeds 32K.
write the SFC program by executing the write to
PLC function.
• Execute the online change (SFC inactive block)
after switching the CPU module from STOP to
RUN. (To change the program during STOP,
The online change cannot be executed because write the program by executing the write to PLC
SFC file related QCPU
40BBH the data has just written or a program execution function.)
error LCPU
error exists. • If a program execution error (error code: 2504)
exists, set the parameters so that the number of
SFC programs to be set as the scan execution
type program is one or none.
QCPU
4100H Other error CPU module hardware fault Change the CPU module.
LCPU
Serial communication connection was executed QCPU
4101H Other error Check the CPU module series.
for a different CPU module series. LCPU
An attempt was made to erase the Flash ROM Execute again after setting the CPU module to the QCPU
4102H Other error
during use of the file register. STOP status. LCPU
Execute online program change again, or write the
The instruction written during RUN is wrong or QCPU
4103H Other error program after setting the CPU module to the STOP
illegal. LCPU
status.
Qn(H)
4105H Other error CPU module internal memory hardware fault Change the CPU module. QnPH
QnPRH
The command cannot be executed since the Qn(H)
Execute the operation again after the CPU module
4106H Other error CPU module is performing system initialization QnPH
has started.
processing. QnPRH
An attempt was made to perform the operation of Qn(H)
Do not execute the function unsupported by the
4107H Other error the function unavailable for the target CPU QnPH
target CPU module.
module model name. QnPRH
The CPU module detected that data was QCPU
4108H Other error Overwrite the device data and read the data again.
overwritten while device data was being read. LCPU
The specified operation cannot be executed
Execute the request again after deregistering the QCPU
4109H Other error since the monitoring, set the condition for other
monitoring condition on the same screen. LCPU
application in same computer, is in execution.
The specified command cannot be executed Execute the request again after the online program QCPU
410AH Other error
because of online program change. change. LCPU
The registration of monitoring condition was Execute the registration of monitoring condition QCPU
410BH Other error
canceled because of online program change. again after the online program change. LCPU
• Check that the version of the programming tool
410CH Other error Writing to the specified data is not supported. used is correct. QCPU
• Check the settings and make a correction.
• Write the file containing the overwritten data to
When the program cache memory was read, it the program cache memory again.
QCPU
410DH Other error was detected that the program memory data had • Turn off and then on or reset the system, and
LCPU
been overwritten. transfer the program memory data to the
program cache memory.
Qn(H)
CPU module Since the CPU module is in a stop error status, it Execute the request again after resetting the CPU
4110H QnPH
error cannot execute the request. module.
QnPRH
The requested operation cannot be performed Qn(H)
CPU module Execute the request again after the other CPU
4111H since the other CPU modules have not yet QnPH
error modules have started.
started in the multiple CPU system. QnPRH
File-related The specified drive (memory) or file does not Execute again after checking the specified drive QCPU
4121H
error exist. (memory) or file. LCPU
File-related The specified drive (memory) or file does not Execute again after checking the specified drive QCPU
4122H
error exist. (memory) or file. LCPU
416
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
Execute programmable controller memory format A
File-related to make the drive (memory) normal. In the case of QCPU
4123H The specified drive (memory) is abnormal.
error the Flash ROM, check the data to be written to the LCPU
Flash ROM, and write them to the Flash ROM.
Execute programmable controller memory format
File-related to make the drive (memory) normal. In the case of QCPU
4124H The specified drive (memory) is abnormal.
error the Flash ROM, check the data to be written to the LCPU
Flash ROM, and write them to the Flash ROM.
File-related The specified drive (memory) or file is performing QCPU
4125H Execute again after a while.
error processing. LCPU
File-related The specified drive (memory) or file is performing QCPU
4126H Execute again after a while.
error processing. LCPU
File-related QCPU
4127H File password mismatch Execute again after checking the file password.
error LCPU
File-related QCPU
4128H File password mismatch with copy destination Execute again after checking the file password.
error LCPU
File-related Cannot be executed since the specified drive Execute again after changing the target drive QCPU
4129H
error (memory) is ROM. (memory). LCPU
File-related Cannot be executed since the specified drive Execute again after changing the target drive QCPU
412AH
error (memory) is ROM. (memory). LCPU
File-related Execute again after changing the write inhibit QCPU
412BH The specified drive (memory) is write-inhibited.
error condition or drive (memory). LCPU
File-related Execute again after changing the write inhibit QCPU
412CH The specified drive (memory) is write-inhibited.
error condition or drive (memory). LCPU
File-related The specified drive (memory) does not have Execute again after increasing the free space of QCPU
412DH
error enough free space. the drive (memory). LCPU
File-related The specified drive (memory) does not have Execute again after increasing the free space of QCPU
412EH
error enough free space. the drive (memory). LCPU
The drive (memory) capacity differs between the
File-related Execute again after checking the drive (memory) QCPU
412FH drive (memory) copy destination and copy
error copy destination and copy source. LCPU
source.
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
The drive (memory) type differs between the
File-related Execute again after checking the drive (memory) QCPU
4130H drive (memory) copy destination and copy
error copy destination and copy source. LCPU
source.
File-related The file name of the file copy destination is the QCPU
4131H Execute again after checking the file names.
error same as that of the copy source. LCPU
File-related QCPU
4132H The specified number of files does not exist. Execute again after checking the specified data.
error LCPU
File-related Execute again after increasing the free space of QCPU
4133H The specified drive (memory) has no free space.
error the drive (memory). LCPU
File-related The attribute specification data of the file is QCPU
4134H Execute again after checking the specified data.
error wrong. LCPU
File-related The date/time data of the peripheral device Execute again after checking the clock setting of QCPU
4135H
error (personal computer) is beyond the range. the peripheral device (personal computer). LCPU
File-related Execute again after checking the specified file QCPU
4136H The specified file already exists.
error name. LCPU
File-related Execute again after changing the condition of the QCPU
4137H The specified file is read-only.
error specified file. LCPU
File-related Simultaneously accessible files exceeded the QCPU
4138H Execute again after decreasing file operations.
error maximum. LCPU
File-related The size of the specified file has exceeded that Execute again after checking the size of the QCPU
4139H
error of the existing file. specified file. LCPU
File-related The specified file has exceeded the already Execute again after checking the size of the QCPU
413AH
error existing file size. specified file. LCPU
File-related The same file was simultaneously accessed from QCPU
413BH Execute again after a while.
error different programming tools. LCPU
File-related QCPU
413CH The specified file is write-inhibited. Execute again after changing the file condition.
error LCPU
417
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
File-related Execute again after increasing the capacity of the QCPU
413DH The specified file capacity cannot be secured.
error specified drive (memory). LCPU
File-related Operation is disabled for the specified drive Execute again after changing the target drive QCPU
413EH
error (memory). (memory). LCPU
File-related The file is inhibited from write to the standard Execute again after changing the specified drive QCPU
413FH
error RAM. (memory). LCPU
Intelligent
function Operation was executed for the intelligent
Execute the operation again from the control CPU
414AH module function module of the non-control group in the QCPU
of the target module.
specification multiple CPU system.
error
Intelligent
function
The I/O address of the specified CPU module is Execute again after checking the I/O address of QCPU
414CH module
wrong. the specified CPU module. LCPU
specification
error
File-related An attempt was made to format the drive Do not format the target drive (memory) as it QCPU
4150H
error protected by the system. cannot be formatted. LCPU
File-related An attempt was made to delete the file protected QCPU
4151H Do not delete the target file as it cannot be deleted.
error by the system. LCPU
Online
The registered number of forced inputs/outputs QCPU
4160H registration Deregister the unused forced inputs/outputs.
exceeded the maximum value. LCPU
error
Online Execute again after securing the area that enables
The multiple-block online change system file
4165H registration multiple-block online change at the time of QCPU
does not exist.
error programmable controller memory format.
Due to unsuccessful online change (files)
Online previously occurred for some reason (example: Qn(H)
Online change (files) is disabled because it is
4166H registration communication failure), the processing is kept QnPH
being executed from the same source.
error incomplete. QnPRH
Forcibly perform another online change (files).
Due to unsuccessful online change (files) from
another source previously occurred for some
Online reason (example: communication failure), the Qn(H)
Online change (files) is disabled because it is
4167H registration processing is kept incomplete. QnPH
being performed from another source.
error If online change (files) is not being performed by QnPRH
any other programming tool, forcibly perform
another online change (files).
Disable the executional conditioned device test
Online
The number of registered executional settings registered in the CPU module, or QCPU
4168H registration
conditioned device test settings exceeds 32. decrease the number of test settings registered for LCPU
error
the same step number.
Online Check the number of executional conditioned
No executional conditioned device test settings QCPU
4169H registration device test settings registered in the CPU module,
are registered. LCPU
error and disable the settings.
Check whether the specified executing conditions
Online
The specified executing condition does not exist. (program, step No. operation timing, device name) QCPU
416AH registration
(Executional conditioned device test) specified when the settings were disabled are LCPU
error
registered.
Online Change the program specified when the
The specified program is SFC program. QCPU
416BH registration executional conditioned device test settings are
(Executional conditioned device test) LCPU
error registered or disabled.
Check the specified remote password, then
Ethernet I/F QCPU
4170H The password is wrong. execute the lock/unlock processing of the remote
Error LCPU
password again.
Ethernet I/F The port for communication use is at remote Execute communication after unlocking the remote QCPU
4171H
Error password locking status. password processing. LCPU
418
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Stop transmitting from several modules A
simultaneously when setting a remote password
and using User Datagram Protocol (UDP) in
Ethernet I/F Requested for a wrong module to unlock remote QCPU
4174H MELSOFT connection.
Error password. LCPU
• The MELSOFT connection can be used with
Transmission Control protocol (TCP) when
setting a remote password.
• Do not specify the direct connection when using
other connection setting.
Ethernet I/F Communication error occurred in direct QCPU
4176H • Do not turn off the CPU power during
Error connection. LCPU
communication, reset the power, and plug out
the cable in direct connection.
• File operation is disabled because the File
Transfer Protocol (FTP) function is in
operation.
Ethernet I/F Retry after the operation for FTP function is QCPU
4178H • Online operation requiring a file access is
Error completed. LCPU
performed with a programming tool while the
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) function is in
operation.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error. (The setting data in OS is • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
4180H
Error abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check the external device operation.
• Check the status of devices (such as cables,
hubs, and routers) on the line to the external
devices.
• Some line packets may be engaged. Retry to
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
communicate a little while later.
• The receiving module may have no free space in
receive area (TCP window size is small). Check
Ethernet I/F Transmission to the receiving modules is whether the receiving module processes receive QnU*2
4181H
Error unsuccessful. data, or whether the CPU module does not send LCPU*2
unnecessary data.
• Check whether the settings of the subnet mask
pattern and the default router IP address of the
CPU module and the receiving modules are
correct, or whether the class of the IP address is
correct.
• Check whether the IP address specified as
target is correct.
• Check the external device operation.
• Check the status of devices (such as cables,
hubs, and routers) on the line to the external
Ethernet I/F Communication with receiving modules caused a devices. QnU*2
4182H
Error time-out error. • Some line packets may be engaged. Retry to LCPU*2
communicate a little while later.
• Check whether the target device supports the
function executed.
• Check the external device operation.
• Check the status of devices (such as cables,
hubs, and routers) on the line to the external
Ethernet I/F Communication with receiving modules was devices. QnU*2
4183H
Error interrupted. • This error may occur when Forced connection LCPU*2
invalidation is executed to the connection under
communication. In this case, clear the error
because the error is not problematic.
419
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Communication processing buffer has run out
of space due to consecutive reception of
• For MC protocol, send a request after receiving
request messages using the MC protocol.
a response to the previous request.
• Communication processing buffer has run out
Ethernet I/F • For socket communication, enable received data QnU*2
4184H of space because received data read is not
Error read. LCPU*2
performed or cannot keep up with the volume.
• For socket communication, decrease the
• Communication processing is disabled due to
number of data sent from the target device.
insufficient space in the communication
processing buffer.
• For MC protocol, keep the connection until a
• Connection to the target device is response is sent.
disconnected before sending a response using • Keep the connection until a sequence of
Ethernet I/F QnU*2
4185H the MC protocol. communication is completed.
Error LCPU*2
• Connection to the target device is • Other error such as 4184H may be the cause. If
disconnected during communication. any other error has occurred, take corrective
action of that error.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The argument data in OS is • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
4186H
Error abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The wait processing in OS is • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
4187H
Error abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The data length in OS is • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
4188H
Error abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The protocol information in OS is • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
4189H
Error abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The address data of • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
418AH
Error communicating module in OS is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
420
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check that the power supply module and the A
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The protocol information in OS is • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
418BH
Error abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The protocol specification • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
418CH
Error processing in OS is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The typed data in OS is • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
418DH
Error abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
Ethernet I/F System error (The expedited data processing in • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
418EH
Error OS is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The protocol information in OS is • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
418FH, 4190H
Error abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The address data of • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
4191H
Error communicating module in OS is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
421
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The host module address • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
4192H
Error processing in OS is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The transmission processing in • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
4193H to 4196H
Error OS is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The connection processing in OS • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
4197H, 4198H
Error is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The connection termination • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
4199H
Error processing is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The connection processing in OS • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
419AH
Error is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The connection termination • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
419BH
Error processing is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
422
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check that the power supply module and the A
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The processing order in OS is • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
419CH, 419DH
Error abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check the external device operation.
• Check the status of devices (such as cables,
Ethernet I/F Connection to the module was unsuccessful or hubs, and routers) on the line to the external QnU*2
419EH
Error interrupted. devices. LCPU*2
• Retry to connect a little while later, if the error
occurred in communication.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
Ethernet I/F System error (The I/O control processing is • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnU*2
419FH
Error abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module. LCPU*2
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Send the data again a little while later.
• Check the external device operation.
• Check whether the external device processes
receive data.
Data cannot be sent because the receive area of • Check whether the CPU module does not send
Ethernet I/F QnU*2
41A0H the external device does not have enough free unnecessary data.
Error LCPU*2
space. • Check the size and frequency of sent data and
reduce the amount of send data.
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
• To send data again, close the connection and
discard data. Then, re-open the connection and
send data.
Ethernet I/F The port number setting for the CPU module is QnU*2
41A1H Correct the port number.
Error incorrect. LCPU*2
Ethernet I/F The port number setting for the target device is QnU*2
41A2H Correct the port number.
Error invalid. LCPU*2
• The own station port number same as that of
the MC protocol has been specified in TCP/IP. • Specify a port number different from that used in
Ethernet I/F • In TCP/IP, connection with the same own the MC protocol. QnU*2
41A3H
Error station port number and same communication • Change the port number of the CPU module or LCPU*2
destination port number has been used for the external device.
same communication destination.
• For UDP/IP, the same Host station port No. is • Specify a port number that is not duplicated with
Ethernet I/F specified as MC protocol. that of MC protocol. QnU*2
41A4H
Error • For UDP/IP, the specified host station No. is • Correct the port number of the CPU module to LCPU*2
duplicated. avoid duplication.
Ethernet I/F The IP address setting of the target device for Correct the IP address. Specify A, B, or C for the QnU*2
41A5H
Error OPEN processing is invalid. class. LCPU*2
• Check the external device operation.
• Check OPEN processing of the target device.
• Correct the port number of the CPU module and
Ethernet I/F Connection was not established in OPEN QnU*2
41A6H the IP address, port number, and open
Error processing for TCP connection. LCPU*2
processing method of the target device.
• Check whether the cables are securely
connected.
423
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Correct the data length.
Data length is out of permissible range. (For the
• If the data is longer than the range, split the data
Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, the length should
Ethernet I/F and send them. QnU*2
41A8H be 2046 bytes if the serial number (first five
Error • When the data length is 2047 to 10238 bytes, LCPU*2
digits) is "12051" or earlier and 10238 bytes if the
use the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU whose
serial number is "12052" or later.)
serial number (first five digits) is "12052" or later.
• Review the IP address and Ethernet address of
the target device.
• Check whether the target device has the ARP
function. If not, communicate with the one that
has the ARP function.
• Check the external device operation.
• The line may be congested with packets.
Resend data after a while.
Ethernet I/F Transmission failed due to timeout of QnU*2
41ABH • Check the status of devices (such as cables,
Error retransmission. LCPU*2
hubs, and routers) on the line to the external
devices.
• Check that the target device completes initial
processing and open processing.
• Check that a binary code is set for the
communication data code of the target device.
• Review the latency time setting if the simple
PLC communication function is used.
• The target device cannot be found. • Check the external device operation.
• The TCP connection is disconnected by the • Check whether the cables are securely
Ethernet I/F target device. connected. QnU*2
41ACH
Error • The Fullpassive device rejects the • Check whether the target IP address setting of LCPU*2
communication and the TCP connection is the Fullpassive device and the IP address of the
disconnected. Active device are matched.
• Check whether the cables are securely
connected.
• Check the line status by PING test from the
Ethernet I/F Data cannot be send due to no connection or QnU*2
41ADH target device.
Error disconnection of the cable. LCPU*2
• Check the CPU module for error by conducting a
self-diagnostic test (resetting the CPU module).
• Send data again.
• Correct "IP address" in the Built-in Ethernet port
tab.
Ethernet I/F Connection of the control port to the FTP server • Correct "FTP server name" in the "FTP setting" QnU*2
41AEH
Error failed. window. LCPU*2
• Check connection with the FTP server.
• Disconnect the user session on the FTP server.
Ethernet I/F Disconnection of the control port to the FTP • Correct the settings in the "FTP setting" window. QnU*2
41AFH
Error server failed. • Check connection with the FTP server. LCPU*2
• Correct "Login user name" and "Login
password" in the "FTP setting" window.
Ethernet I/F • Check the FTP server software settings (login QnU*2
41B0H Login to the FTP server failed.
Error user name and login password). LCPU*2
• Check communication logs of the FTP server
software.
• Correct "Directory path" and "Data transfer
mode" in the "FTP setting" window.
• Check that user has the write permission for the
destination FTP server.
Ethernet I/F Execution of the FTP command to the FTP QnU*2
41B1H • Check that the directory path set in the "FTP
Error server failed. LCPU*2
setting" window exists.
• Correct the FTP server software settings.
• Check communication logs of the FTP server
software.
• Check connection with the FTP server.
• Correct "Data transfer mode" in the "FTP
Ethernet I/F Connection of the data transfer port to the FTP setting" window. QnU*2
41B2H
Error server failed. • When a firewall is active or the proxy server is LCPU*2
on the connection path, consult the network
administrator about the settings.
424
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check connection with the FTP server. A
• Correct "Data transfer mode" in the "FTP
Ethernet I/F Disconnection of the data transfer port to the setting" window. QnU*2
41B3H
Error FTP server failed. • When a firewall is active or the proxy server is LCPU*2
on the connection path, consult the network
administrator about the settings.
• Specify the connection No. within 1 to 16.
• When using socket communication, check
whether "Socket communication" is selected for
Ethernet I/F QnU*2
41B4H The connection number setting is invalid. "Open system" parameter.
Error LCPU*2
• When using predefined protocol function, check
whether "Predefined protocol" is selected for
"Open system" parameter.
Ethernet I/F The specified connection has already completed Perform CLOSE processing and then OPEN QnU*2
41B6H
Error OPEN processing. processing. LCPU*2
Ethernet I/F The specified connection has not completed QnU*2
41B7H Re-execute after OPEN processing is completed.
Error OPEN processing. LCPU*2
When "MELSEC-A (Ethernet Module)/MELSEC-
FX3 (Ethernet Block/Adapter)" was specified in
• Turn on CPU exchange timing setting (SW7) of
"Destination" of the simple PLC communication
Ethernet I/F the destination.
41B8H function, the function was executed while CPU LCPU*2
Error • Set the CPU module on the destination to STOP
exchange timing setting (SW7) of the Ethernet
and execute the function again.
module is off and the CPU module on the
destination is in the RUN status.
• Contents of control data is not correct. • Correct the contents of the control data.
Ethernet I/F • Open instruction was executed through open • Configure the open settings parameters or QnU*2
41B9H
Error settings parameter even though parameters execute the OPEN instruction through control LCPU*2
are not set for "Open settings". data.
• Delete unnecessary files on the FTP server to
Ethernet I/F An error occurred during file transfer to the FTP QnU*2
41BAH increase free space.
Error server. LCPU*2
• Check the connection status of the FTP server.
After the processing of the file transfer function
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
Ethernet I/F Multiple file transfer function (FTP client) (FTP client) instruction being executed ends,
41BBH QnU*2
Error instructions are executed simultaneously. execute another file transfer function (FTP client)
instruction.
When "MELSEC-A (Ethernet Module)/MELSEC-
• Ensure that the operating environment for the
FX3 (Ethernet Block/Adapter)" was specified in
system meets the general specifications of the
"Destination" of the simple PLC communication
CPU module.
function, communications between the CPU
Ethernet I/F • Reset the CPU module.
41BCH module and the Ethernet module failed. (After LCPU*2
Error • Execute again. If the same error code is
the Ethernet module normally receives a request
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
from another node, communications between the
CPU module. Please consult your local
CPU module and the Ethernet module ailed due
Mitsubishi representative.
to a noise or other causes.)
When "MELSEC-A (Ethernet Module)/MELSEC- • Check the specified device name.
Ethernet I/F FX3 (Ethernet Block/Adapter)" is specified in • Check the specified device No.
41BDH LCPU*2
Error "Destination" of the simple PLC communication • Check the device assignment parameters of the
function, an incorrect device is specified. CPU module (destination).
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Ensure that the operating environment for the
When "MELSEC-A (Ethernet Module)/MELSEC-
system meets the general specifications of the
FX3 (Ethernet Block/Adapter)" was specified in
CPU module.
Ethernet I/F "Destination" of the simple PLC communication
41BEH • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. LCPU*2
Error function, a system error occurred. (The possible
• Reset the CPU module.
cause is malfunction due to noise or other
• Execute again. If the same error code is
causes or hardware failure).
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
425
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Ensure that the operating environment for the
When "MELSEC-A (Ethernet Module)/MELSEC-
system meets the general specifications of the
FX3 (Ethernet Block/Adapter)" was specified in
CPU module.
Ethernet I/F "Destination" of the simple PLC communication
41BFH • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. LCPU*2
Error function, a system error occurred. (The possible
• Reset the CPU module.
cause is malfunction due to noise or other
• Execute again. If the same error code is
causes or hardware failure).
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
The file information data may be corrupted.
File-related The format information data of the specified drive QCPU
41C1H After backing up the data in the CPU module,
error (memory) is abnormal. LCPU
format the CPU memory.
File-related File open specification data for file access is Execute again after checking the specification QCPU
41C2H
error wrong. data. LCPU
File-related Simultaneously accessible files exceeded the QCPU
41C3H Execute again after decreasing file operations.
error maximum. LCPU
File-related Simultaneously accessible files exceeded the QCPU
41C4H Execute again after decreasing file operations.
error maximum. LCPU
• Execute again after checking the file.
File-related • The specified file does not exist. QCPU
41C5H • Execute again after checking that the file exists
error • The file does not exist in the valid drive. LCPU
in the valid drive.
File-related The specified file or drive (memory) does not Execute again after checking the file or drive QCPU
41C7H
error exist. (memory). LCPU
Execute again after checking the size of the
specified file.
File-related The size of the specified file has exceeded that If the error recurs after re-execution, the file QCPU
41C8H
error of the existing file. information data may be corrupted. LCPU
After backing up the data in the CPU module,
format the CPU memory.
Access to the file sector was unsuccessful.
File-related After backing up the data in the CPU module, QCPU
41C9H The format information data of the target drive
error format the CPU memory. LCPU
(memory) is abnormal.
Access to the file sector was unsuccessful.
File-related After backing up the data in the CPU module, QCPU
41CAH The format information data of the target drive
error format the CPU memory. LCPU
(memory) is abnormal.
File-related QCPU
41CBH The file name is specified in a wrong method. Execute again after checking the file name.
error LCPU
File-related Execute again after checking the name of the file QCPU
41CCH The specified file or subdirectory does not exist.
error and subdirectory. LCPU
An access inhibited with the attribute was made
File-related to the file. QCPU
41CDH Check the attribute and open mode of the file.
error Or the file attribute was attempted to be changed LCPU
to the inhibited one.
File-related The file cannot be written because the specified The specified file is write-protected. Execute again QCPU
41CEH
error file is read-only. after checking the attribute. LCPU
File-related The specified drive (memory) has been used Execute again after checking the drive (memory) QCPU
41CFH
error exceeding the capacity. capacity. LCPU
The specified drive (memory) has no free space. • Execute again after increasing the free space of
File-related Or the number of files in the directory of the the drive (memory). QCPU
41D0H
error specified drive (memory) has exceeded the • Execute again after deleting file(s) in the drive LCPU
maximum. (memory).
• Execute again after checking the file name. If
the error recurs after re-execution, the file
• The file name is specified in a wrong method.
information data may be corrupted. After
File-related • The SD memory card is being disabled by QCPU
41D1H backing up the data in the CPU module, format
error SM606 (SD memory card forced disable LCPU
the CPU memory.
instruction).
• Cancel the SD memory card forced disable
instruction.
426
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check if the SD memory card is inserted, and A
execute the processing again.
File-related • Replace the SD memory card, and execute the
41D3H Access into the SD memory card has failed. QnUDV
error processing again.
• Execute the data backup, and format the PLC
memory.
Execute again after checking the size of the
specified file.
File-related The size of the specified file has exceeded that If the error recurs after re-execution, the file QCPU
41D4H
error of the existing file. information data may be corrupted. LCPU
After backing up the data in the CPU module,
format the CPU memory.
File-related Forcibly execute the request, or execute after QCPU
41D5H The file of the same name exists.
error changing the file name. LCPU
The file information data may be corrupted.
File-related The format information data of the specified drive QCPU
41D6H After backing up the data in the CPU module,
error (memory) is abnormal. LCPU
format the CPU memory.
The file information data may be corrupted.
File-related The format information data of the specified drive QCPU
41D7H After backing up the data in the CPU module,
error (memory) is abnormal. LCPU
format the CPU memory.
File-related QCPU
41D8H The specified file is being accessed. Execute again after a while.
error LCPU
File-related Execute again after canceling the write protect of QCPU
41DFH The specified drive (memory) is write-protected.
error the specified drive (memory). LCPU
• Execute the operation again after checking that
the memory card or SD memory card has been
File-related The specified drive (memory) is abnormal or QCPU
41E0H inserted.
error does not exist. LCPU
• After backing up the data, execute
programmable controller memory format.
• After backing up the data, execute write to PLC
(Flash ROM).
File-related • Execute the operation again after checking that QCPU
41E1H Access to the flash ROM was unsuccessful.
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
error the specified drive is a flash ROM and that the LCPU
size of the memory card or SD memory card is
correct.
• Execute the operation again after checking that
the memory card or SD memory card has been
inserted.
File-related Access to the memory card or SD memory card QCPU
41E4H • Execute the operation again after replacing the
error was unsuccessful. LCPU
memory card or SD memory card.
• After backing up the data, execute
programmable controller memory format.
The file information data may be corrupted.
File-related The format information data of the specified drive QCPU
41E7H After backing up the data in the CPU module,
error (memory) is abnormal. LCPU
format the CPU memory.
The file information data may be corrupted.
File-related The format information data of the specified drive QCPU
41E8H After backing up the data in the CPU module,
error (memory) is abnormal. LCPU
format the CPU memory.
File-related QCPU
41E9H The specified file is being accessed. Execute again after a while.
error LCPU
File-related QCPU
41EBH The file name is specified in a wrong method. Execute again after checking the file name.
error LCPU
The file information data may have been
File-related The file system of the specified drive (memory) is corrupted. QCPU
41ECH
error logically corrupted. After backing up the data in the CPU module, LCPU
format the CPU memory.
The specified drive (memory) does not have
Execute again after deleting unnecessary files or
File-related continuous free space. (The free space for file is QCPU
41EDH executing programmable controller memory
error sufficient but the continuous free space is LCPU
arrangement.
insufficient.)
427
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
Execute the operation again after checking that the
File-related Creation of power failure backup for the specified QCPU
41EFH memory card or SD memory card has been
error drive (memory) was unsuccessful. LCPU
inserted.
Execute the operation again after checking that the
File-related The power failure backup data of the specified QCPU
41F0H memory card or SD memory card has been
error drive (memory) are corrupted. LCPU
inserted.
Execute the operation again after checking that the
File-related The power failure backup for the specified drive QCPU
41F1H memory card or SD memory card has been
error (memory) has a repair command. LCPU
inserted.
Execute again after checking the specified drive
File-related Operation cannot be performed since the (memory). QCPU
41F2H
error specified drive (memory) is Flash ROM. When performing operation for the Flash ROM, LCPU
use write to PLC (Flash ROM).
Specify a smaller value for the file size when
The file size is larger than the following:
File-related creating a file or changing the file size. QnUDV
41F3H The value to be acquired when 2byte is
error Alternatively, divide the file so that each file size is LCPU
subtracted from 4Gbyte
smaller.
Since the operation prohibited by the system is
File-related Since the operation is prohibited by the system, QCPU
41F4H performed, the requested processing cannot be
error the file operation is not performed. LCPU
performed.
PLC write to the program memory or transfer to the
File-related The data is being accessed from another backup memory is in execution. QCPU
41F8H
error programming tool. Access the data again after checking that the LCPU
above-mentioned function has been completed.
Another device data saving was executed during
File-related The data is being accessed from another execution. QCPU
41F9H
error programming tool. Access the data again after the current one is LCPU
completed.
File-related Program was written beyond the area where the Execute again after reducing either the already QCPU
41FAH
error program can be executed. written program or newly written program. LCPU
File-related The specified file is already being manipulated Execute again after the currently performed QCPU
41FBH
error from the programming tool. operation is completed. LCPU
File-related An attempt was made to erase the drive The specified drive (memory) is being used and QCPU
41FCH
error (memory) being used. cannot be erased. LCPU
File-related QCPU
41FDH There are no data written to the Flash ROM. Write a file by executing write to PLC (Flash ROM).
error LCPU
• The memory card or SD memory card has not
• Insert or re-insert the memory card or SD
been inserted.
memory card.
• QnUDVCPU: The SD memory card is being
• QnUDVCPU: Remove the SD memory card and
disabled.
File-related insert it again. QCPU
41FEH • LCPU: The SD memory card access control
error • LCPU: Slide the SD memory card access LCPU
switch is not slid down.
control switch down.
• The SD memory card is being disabled by
• Cancel the SD memory card forced disable
SM606 (SD memory card forced disable
instruction.
instruction).
File-related The type of the memory card or SD memory card Check the type of the memory card or SD memory QCPU
41FFH
error differs. card. LCPU
Online module The requested processing cannot be performed Do not send the request where this error occurred.
4200H change-related because online module change is disabled by Alternatively, enable online module change by QCPU
error parameter setting. parameter setting and send the request again.
Online module The requested processing cannot be performed Do not send the request where this error occurred.
4201H change-related because online module change is enabled by Alternatively, disable online module change by QCPU
error parameter setting. parameter setting and send the request again.
Online module The requested processing cannot be performed
Make a request again after completion of the
4202H change-related since an online module change is being QCPU
online module change.
error performed.
Take following procedures to replace the module
mounted on the main base unit.
Online module The module mounted on the main base unit
• Switch the system where the target module to
4203H change-related cannot be replaced online since the extension QnPH
be replaced is mounted to the standby system.
error base unit is mounted.
• Turn OFF power supply of the standby system.
• Replace the target module.
428
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
Online module The specified module of the extension base unit Change the connection destination to the control A
4204H change-related cannot be replaced online since it is connected system and perform the online module change QnPH
error to the standby system. again.
Online module
The specified start I/O number is outside the When making a request, specify the start I/O
4210H change-related QnPH
range. number of the module that will be changed online.
error
Online module
4211H change-related An online module change request is abnormal. Check the command used to make a request. QnPH
error
Online module Make a request again after completion of the
An online module change is already being made
4212H change-related online module change, or continue after changing QnPH
for other equipment.
error the connection path.
Online module
The specified start I/O number differs from the When making a request, specify the start I/O
4213H change-related QnPH
one registered for online module change. number of the module being changed online.
error
Online module
The specified module differs from the one Make a request again after mounting the module
4214H change-related QnPH
changed online. that is the same as the one changed online.
error
When making a request, specify the start I/O
Online module
number of the module that will be changed online,
4215H change-related The specified module does not exist. QnPH
or make a request again after mounting the
error
module.
Online module
4216H change-related The specified module is faulty. Make a request again after changing the module. QnPH
error
Online module
4217H change-related There is no response from the specified module. Continue the online module changing operation. QnPH
error
Online module Do not make a request where an error occurred, or
The specified module is incompatible with online
4218H change-related make a request again to the module compatible QnPH
module change.
error with online module change.
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
Online module The specified module is mounted on the Do not make a request to any modules mounted
4219H change-related extension base unit of the type that requires no on the extension base unit of the type that requires QnPH
error power supply module. no power supply module and the main base unit.
Online module
Make a request to the CPU module that controls
421AH change-related The specified module is not in a control group. QnPH
the specified module.
error
Online module An error occurred in the setting of the initial
Resume processing after checking the contents of
421BH change-related setting parameter of the intelligent function QnPH
the intelligent function module buffer memory.
error module.
Online module
Cannot be executed as the parameter file has Operation cannot be performed. Operation is
421CH change-related QnPH
been rewritten. interrupted.
error
Connect the programming tool to the new control
Online module
System switching occurs during the online system to check the status of the online module
421DH change-related QnPH
module change. change. According to the status of online module
error
change, take procedures for it.
The tracking cable may be faulty or the standby
The information of the online module change system may have an error.
Online module cannot be sent to the standby system. When the • Check the mounting status of the tracking cable
421EH change-related system switching occurs during the online or replace the tracking cable. QnPH
error module change, the online module change may • Check the status of the standby system. When a
not be continued. stop error was detected by the standby system,
perform troubleshooting.
• Set the connection destination of a programming
The module mounted on the extension base unit
Online module tool to the present control system.
cannot be replaced online when the connection
421FH change-related • Perform the online module change to the QnPH
destination is set to the standby system in the
error module mounted on the extension base unit
separate mode.
again.
The number of characters exceeded the valid
E-mail related Reduce the number of e-mail addresses to be
4220H range when registering the e-mail addresses by LCPU
error registered.
using the SP.MLOPEADR instruction.
429
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
An unsupported character is used in the e-mail
E-mail related Do not use any unsupported character in the e-
4221H address to be registered by using the LCPU
error mail address.
SP.MLOPEADR instruction.
The e-mail address to be deleted by using the
E-mail related Check that the deletion target e-mail address is
4222H SP.MLOPEADR instruction has not been LCPU
error correct.
registered.
The number of characters in the e-mail address
E-mail related
4223H read by using the SP.MLGETADR instruction Check and correct the data length setting. LCPU
error
exceeded the specified data length.
• Execute the instruction again.
• If the same error code is displayed even after
E-mail related The e-mail address backup by using the
4224H executing the instruction again, the cause is a LCPU
error SP.MLOPEADR instruction has failed.
hardware failure of the CPU module. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
• Power off and on the CPU module. Or reset the
CPU module.
• If the same error code is displayed again after
E-mail related The e-mail address backup file was not restored
4225H powering off and on or reset the CPU module, LCPU
error when the CPU module was powered on.
the cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
E-mail related • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient.
4226H System error (Reference error) LCPU
error • Reset the CPU module.
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
E-mail related • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient.
4227H System error (Failed to read the port number) LCPU
error • Reset the CPU module.
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
E-mail related • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient.
4228H System error (Failed to create the command) LCPU
error • Reset the CPU module.
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted/connected properly.
• Check that the system is operating within the
general specifications of the CPU module.
E-mail related • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient.
4229H System error (State transition error) LCPU
error • Reset the CPU module.
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
File transfer
A file cannot be transferred because a file with Check that there is no file with the same name on
4230H function (FTP LCPU
the same name exists on the FTP server. the FTP server.
client) error
430
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• The number of files to be transferred A
exceeded the valid range when the wild card
File transfer was used in the file transfer function (FTP
4232H function (FTP client) instruction. Check and correct the wild card specification. LCPU
client) error • There is no corresponding file when the wild
card is used in the file transfer function (FTP
client) instruction.
• Check the DNS server address setting.
• Check that the communications with the DNS
File transfer
server is enabled by using the PING command.
4233H function (FTP DNS client response timeout error LCPU
• Check that the own station IP address and the
client) error
DNS server IP address are in the same class. (If
not, check the router setting.)
• Check that the FTP server name is registered in
the DNS.
File transfer
• Change the FTP server name to the IP address,
4234H function (FTP FTP response timeout error LCPU
and check the operation.
client) error
• Check that the communications with the FTP
server is enabled by using the PING command.
Any of the following unsupported operations was
executed for the standby system.
Redundant
• Operation mode change Execute the operation again after changing the
4240H system-related QnPRH
• System switching transfer setup to the control system.
error
• Memory copy from control system to standby
system
Communication cannot be made since the
Redundant Request communication after powering on the
standby system has been powered off or reset or
4241H system-related standby system or setting its Reset switch to the QnPRH
is in a user watchdog timer error or CPU module
error neutral position.
hardware fault status.
Cannot be executed since the tracking cable is
Redundant Communication with the standby system cannot
disconnected or faulty. Execute again after
4242H system-related be made since the tracking cable is faulty or QnPRH
checking the tracking cable for disconnection or
error disconnected.
changing it for a normal one.
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
Redundant
The command cannot be executed since the Execute again after removing the stop error of the
4243H system-related QnPRH
standby system is in stop error. standby system.
error
Redundant The command cannot be executed since the Execute again after placing the standby system in
4244H system-related operation status differs from that of the standby the same operation status (RUN/STOP) as the QnPRH
error system. control system.
Redundant Check that the other system CPU module has
4245H system-related Other system CPU module status error normally started up and that the tracking cable is QnPRH
error connected.
The command cannot be executed since
Redundant
operation mode (separate/backup) change or Execute again after the operation mode change or
4246H system-related QnPRH
system (control/standby system) switching is system switching being executed is completed.
error
being executed.
Execute again after memory copy from control
system to standby system is completed.
Check the following and take corrective action.
• Is SM1596 of the control system or standby
Redundant system ON? (ON: Memory copy being
Memory copy from control system to standby
4247H system-related executed) Execute again after SM1596 has QnPRH
system is already being executed.
error turned OFF since it is turned OFF by the system
on completion of memory copy.
• Is SM1597 of the control system ON? (ON:
Memory copy completed) Execute again after
turning OFF SM1597 of the control system.
Communication was made during system
Redundant switching. • Execute again after system switching.
4248H system-related The system specified in the transfer setup • After checking whether the specified system QnPRH
error (request destination module I/O number) does exists or not, restart communication.
not exist.
431
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Normally start the system as the redundant
system. (Make communication again after
Redundant The redundant system is not established.
establishing the system.)
4249H system-related (Control system/standby system or System QnPRH
• Execute again after changing the transfer setup
error A/System B not yet definite)
(request destination module I/O number) to "No
settings have been made" (03FFH).
A command that cannot be processed was Execute the operation again after changing the
Redundant
executed when the control system or standby transfer setup (request destination module I/O
424AH system-related QnPRH
system is specified in the transfer setup (request number) to No settings have been made
error
destination module I/O number). (03FFH)/system A/system B.
Redundant The command cannot be executed since system Manual system switching is inhibited by the
424BH system-related switching is inhibited by the manual system manual system switching enable flag (SM1592). QnPRH
error switching enable flag (SM1592). Execute again after turning ON SM1592.
Redundant
The specified command cannot be executed Execute again after the online program change
424CH system-related QnPRH
during online program change operation. operation is finished.
error
• Execute again after changing to the backup
Redundant mode.
The transfer setup or function unavailable for the
424DH system-related • Execute again after changing the transfer setup QnPRH
debug mode was used.
error (request destination module I/O number) to
System A or control system.
Redundant
The control system/standby system specifying This function cannot be executed since it is not
424EH system-related QnPRH
method is not supported. supported.
error
Although system switching was executed from the
Redundant System switching was executed by the other programming tool, system switching was executed
424FH system-related condition during execution of system switching first by the other condition. Check the system for QnPRH
error by the programming tool. any problem and execute the operation again as
necessary.
Execute communication again after changing the
tracking cable.
Redundant
Sum check error occurred in tracking If the same error occurs even after the tracking
4250H system-related QnPRH
communication. cable is changed, the cause is a hardware failure
error
of the CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
Redundant
The command cannot be executed in the
4251H system-related Execute again after changing to the backup mode. QnPRH
separate mode.
error
By monitoring SD1690 (other system network
System switching was not executed since an
Redundant module No. that issued system switching request),
error occurred in the redundant system
4252H system-related identify the faulty redundant-compatible intelligent QnPRH
compatible network module of the standby
error module of the standby system, then remove the
system.
module fault, and execute again.
Since a communication error or system switching
occurred during execution of online program
change to the control system CPU module, online
program change redundant tracking was
suspended.
Since a communication error or system switching Execute online program change again after
Redundant occurred during online program change to the confirming that communication with the control
4253H system-related control system CPU module, online program system CPU module and standby system CPU QnPRH
error change to the standby CPU module cannot be module can be normally made.
executed. If it takes time for the communication between the
programming tool and either the control system
CPU module or standby system CPU module,
change the value in SD1710 (standby system
online start waiting time) so that errors may be
avoided.
432
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
The tracking cable may not be connected correctly, A
or the tracking communication hardware of the
Redundant The command cannot be executed since an CPU module may be faulty. Check the connection
4254H system-related error was detected in the tracking status of the tracking cable. QnPRH
error communication hardware. If the condition is not restored to normal after the
cable connection status is corrected, the possible
cause is the hardware fault of the CPU module.
Redundant Tracking communication is being prepared when it
The command cannot be executed since
4255H system-related is connected. Execute the operation again after a QnPRH
tracking communication is being prepared.
error while (about 1 second).
The tracking cable may not be connected correctly,
or the tracking communication hardware of the
Redundant CPU module may be faulty. Check the connection
The command cannot be executed since a time-
4256H system-related status of the tracking cable. QnPRH
out error occurred in tracking communication.
error If the condition is not restored to normal after the
cable connection status is corrected, the possible
cause is the hardware fault of the CPU module.
The command cannot be executed since the host
Redundant The command cannot be executed since the
system is in a watchdog timer error or CPU module
4257H system-related host system CPU module is in a watchdog timer QnPRH
hardware fault status. Execute again after
error error or CPU module hardware fault status.
checking the host system status.
Change the operating status of the CPU module
Redundant from STOP to RUN with the RUN/STOP switch of
Operation mode being changed (from backup
4258H system-related the module whose RUN LED is flashing or by QnPRH
mode to separate mode)
error remote operation, and end the operation mode
change. Then, execute the command again.
Redundant Operation mode is being changed with another Execute again in the same communication route
4259H system-related programming tool in the communication route as the one where the operation mode change was QnPRH
error different from the one currently used. executed.
Although the communication was made via the
intelligent function module mounted on the
Redundant Change the combination of the connection
extension base unit, the combination of the
425BH system-related destination specification and the command to the QnPRH
connection destination specification (Redundant
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
error supported combination.
CPU specification) and the command is
unsupported.
Redundant System switching cannot be made since the
Switch systems after the online module change
425CH system-related module mounted on the extension base unit is QnPRH
has been completed.
error being replaced online.
Redundant Operation mode cannot be changed since the
Change the operation mode after the online
425DH system-related module mounted on the extension base unit is QnPRH
module change has been completed.
error being replaced online.
Register the data logging to the memory where a
Data logging is being performed (logging, saving
data logging is being performed. Alternatively, stop QnUDV
4270H Data logging*1 the logging data, completing, on hold, or in error)
the data logging being performed and register LCPU
with a different memory.
again.
The specified data logging is already being Stop the data logging. Alternatively, write, delete,
QnUDV
4271H Data logging*1 performed (logging, saving the logging data, or register to the setting number where no data
LCPU
completing, on hold, or in error). logging is being performed.
Change the trigger condition. Alternatively, stop
The trigger logging with "Device" specified as a
the trigger logging being performed (logging,
trigger condition is being performed (logging, QnUDV
4272H Data logging*1 saving the logging data, completing, on hold, or in
saving the logging data, completing, on hold, or LCPU
error) with "Device" specified as the trigger
in error).
condition, and then register.
The data logging function cannot be executed
Hold the sampling trace to register the data QnUDV
4273H Data logging*1 because the sampling trace function is being
logging. LCPU
performed.
Trigger loggings have registered exceeding the • Increase the capacity of the data logging buffer.
QnUDV
4274H Data logging*1 number of trigger loggings collectable in the data • Reduce the number of records set for the trigger
LCPU
logging buffer. logging.
After the auto logging, replace the SD memory QnUDV
4275H Data logging*1 Auto logging is being performed.
card and execute again. LCPU
433
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
The specified command cannot be executed
*1
because the data logging function is being Stop the data logging and then execute the QnUDV
4276H Data logging
performed (i.e. logging, saving the logging data, command. LCPU
completing, on hold, or in error).
The number of files stored in the storage
*1
The number of stored files has exceeded the destination memory has exceeded the setting QnUDV
4277H Data logging
value set in advance. value. Delete files or change the storage LCPU
destination and then register.
The number of stored files has reached to the
The number of stored files has reached to the QnUDV
4278H Data logging*1 maximum of FFFFFFFF. Delete files or change the
maximum. LCPU
storage destination and then register.
• Write the common settings to the target memory.
QnUDV
427AH Data logging*1 Common setting file does not exist. • Register the data logging to the memory where
LCPU
the common settings are stored.
A data logging is being performed (logging in Stop the data logging destined for the same
execution, logging data are being saved, storage and then register. QnUDV
427BH Data logging*1
completing, on hold, or in error) in the same file Alternatively, change the storage destination of the LCPU
storage destination. file and then register.
• Check settings of the data logging file transfer
• Data logging file transfer function settings are
function. QnUDV
427CH Data logging*1 mistaken.
• Write the settings using the CPU Module LCPU
• A data logging setting file is corrupt.
Logging Configuration Tool.
• Correct "File switching timing" and "Number of
saved files" in the "Save" screen.
• Check that data logging files are not deleted
• A data logging file to be transferred was
using the CPU Module Logging Configuration
deleted during transfer by file switching.
Tool.
File-related • Reading of a data logging file failed. QnUDV
427DH • Check that an SD memory card is inserted.
error • A data logging file was accessed while the SD LCPU
• When the SD memory card access control
memory card has been forcibly set to be
switch is on the upper position, slide it down,
disabled.
and check that the SD LED turns on.
• If the SD memory card has been forcibly
disabled, cancel the setting.
• Correct "File switching timing" in the "Save"
screen to reduce the frequency of file switching.
• Since a file was switched before file transfer, a • Correct the number of sampled data and
File-related new data logging file is saved. "Sampling interval" in the "Sampling" screen to QnUDV
427EH
error • Since a file was switched during a retry, a new reduce the number of sampled data. LCPU
data logging file is saved. • Correct the settings in the "CSV output" screen
to reduce the file size.
• Check connection with the FTP server.
Check that data logging is not started from the
File-related File transfer failed due to the stop operation of QnUDV
427FH CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool before file
error file transfer. LCPU
transfer is completed.
A file transfer test was executed from another
File-related Execute the file transfer test again after the QnUDV
4280H CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool during
error ongoing test is completed. LCPU
execution of a file transfer test.
File-related The data logging setting for different Set the data logging for the programmable
4281H QnUDV
error programmable controller series was registered. controller series used.
• Correct the buffer capacity so that the total
capacity for data logging and realtime monitor
does not exceed the maximum limit. To change
the buffer capacity for data logging, write the
Realtime The total buffer capacity for realtime monitor and changed data (common setting) to the CPU
4290H LCPU
monitor data logging exceeds the maximum limit. module and start data logging again, or power
off and on or reset the CPU module to restore
the data logging function to the initial state.
• Stop the realtime monitor function, and restart
data logging.
Online change was executed during execution of
After the online change processing has completed,
Realtime realtime monitor where a step number is
4291H check the step number, and execute the realtime LCPU
monitor specified as a timing condition or trigger
monitor again.
condition.
434
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
Realtime
During the execution of realtime monitor, an
Stop the realtime monitor being executed, and
A
4292H attempt was made to start another realtime LCPU
monitor start another realtime monitor.
monitor.
The CPU module change function Check that the CPU module change function
QCPU
4330H Maintenance (backup/restoration) with memory card is being (backup/restoration) with memory card is not being
LCPU
executed from the same source. executed, and communicate again.
Disable the user authentication function, and
4331H Maintenance User authentication is required. QCPU
communicate again.
The specified command cannot be executed
After the CPU module change processing
because the CPU module change function QCPU
4332H Maintenance (backup/restoration) is completed, execute the
(backup/restoration) with SD memory card is LCPU
command again.
being executed.
Complete the preparation for backup and then QCPU
4333H Maintenance Not ready for backup.
execute again. LCPU
Insert a memory card or SD memory card with a
4334H Maintenance Backup file does not exist. QCPU
backup file and then execute again.
The specified function cannot be executed Complete the latch data backup function and then QCPU
4335H Maintenance
because latch data are being backed up. execute again. LCPU
The specified function cannot be executed
Disconnect all FTP connections to the CPU QCPU
4336H Maintenance because a FTP client is being FTP-connected to
module and then execute again. LCPU
the CPU module via the built-in Ethernet port.
Power off and then on or reset the CPU module QCPU
4337H Maintenance Module error collection file does not exist.
and then execute again. LCPU
Readout of module error collection data has • Retry the operation.
QCPU
4338H Maintenance been failed when opening the screen to display • Increase the number of module error collections
LCPU
the data or when updating the data. to be stored.
Readout of module error collection data was
Enable the module error collection function by QCPU
4339H Maintenance failed because the function is disabled by
parameter settings and then execute again. LCPU
parameter settings.
The specified command cannot be executed
After the batch save/load processing is completed,
433AH Maintenance because the project data batch save/load LCPU
execute the command again.
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
function is being executed.
The CPU module change function Execute the CPU module change function
433BH Maintenance (backup/restoration) with memory card was (backup/restoration) with memory card to the QnUDV
executed to the locked CPU module. unlocked CPU module.
The specified command cannot be executed
Wait until the file transfer processing (FTP client)
433DH Maintenance because the file transfer function (FTP client) is LCPU
completes, and execute the command again.
being executed.
A file protected by a password has been opened Enter a correct password and perform password QnUDV
4400H Security
without unlocking the password. authentication. LCPU
• Read password authorization has failed when • Set a correct read password and perform
QnUDV
4401H Security required. password authentication.
LCPU
• The password format is incorrect. • Access the file with the correct method.
• Write password authorization has failed when • Set a correct write password and perform
QnUDV
4402H Security required. password authentication.
LCPU
• The password format is incorrect. • Access the file with the correct method.
Both passwords for reading and for writing that
Configure a correct password for both reading and QnUDV
4403H Security are set upon Create, Change, Delete, or Disable
for writing, authorize them, and then access. LCPU
do not match the previous ones.
• Format the drive including the target file by
formatting the CPU module memory.
A file error was detected before or after QnUDV
4404H Security • Write the target file to the CPU module again,
performing Create, Change, or Delete. LCPU
and then register or cancel the file password
again.
435
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
(1) Register the security key which locks the
CPU module to the programming tool.
(2) When the project is opened, lock the project
with the security key which locks the CPU
module.
The file of the locked CPU module is accessed (3) When the CPU module is locked, the access
4410H Security QnUDV
without the security key authentication. control target file cannot be accessed using
the following functions or external devices.
• FTP server function
• MC protocol
• GOT
• EZSocket
The security key cannot be registered to the
CPU module due to the failure of the internal The cause is a hardware failure of the CPU
4412H Security memory where the security key is registered. Or module. QnUDV
the security key of the CPU module cannot be Replace the CPU module.
deleted.
Since the CPU module is locked and 32
Wait until the number of programming tools which
programming tools are reading and writing
4413H Security are reading and writing programs decreases to 31 QnUDV
programs simultaneously, another programming
or less.
tool cannot read or write programs.
Since the CPU module is locked, the requested Do not request any processing since the requested
4414H Security QnUDV
processing cannot be performed. processing cannot be performed in this state.
Since the CPU module is not locked, the Do not request any processing since the requested
4415H Security QnUDV
requested processing cannot be performed. processing cannot be performed in this state.
Since the CPU module is in locking or unlocking
Request the processing after the locking or
4416H Security operation, the requested processing cannot be QnUDV
unlocking operation ends.
performed.
The prohibited operation was executed when
QnUDV
4426H Security "Execution Program Protection Setting" was Unlock the block password and correct the setting.
LCPU
enabled with a block password.
iQ Sensor The specified command cannot be executed
Execute the command again after the iQ Sensor QnUDV
4800H Solution related because the iQ Sensor Solution function (data
Solution function (data backup/restoration) ends. LCPU
error backup/restoration) is being executed.
• When the iQ Sensor Solution function (data
backup/restoration) is executed, the target
module does not exist.
iQ Sensor • When the iQ Sensor Solution function (data
Correct the setting value in the special register QnUDV
4801H Solution related backup/restoration) is executed, the specified
(SD), and execute the function again. LCPU
error backup folder does not exist.
• The setting value in the special register (SD)
related to the iQ Sensor Solution function
(data backup/restoration) is out of range.
• Delete the existing backup folders, and execute
iQ Sensor The number of iQ Sensor Solution function (data the function again.
QnUDV
4802H Solution related backup/restoration) backup folders is the • Set "Automatic specification (folder deletion
LCPU
error maximum. supported)" in the folder number setting so that
the oldest folder is automatically deleted.
iQ Sensor
The system file does not exist in the specified QnUDV
4803H Solution related Specify other backup data.
backup data, or the system file is broken. LCPU
error
iQ Sensor
The backup file does not exist in the specified QnUDV
4804H Solution related Specify other backup data.
backup data, or the system file is broken. LCPU
error
iQ Sensor When the backup function of the iQ Sensor
Correct the setting value in the special register QnUDV
4805H Solution related Solution function (data backup/restoration) is
(SD), and execute the function again. LCPU
error executed, no backup target device exists.
iQ Sensor
The SD memory card was removed while the Do not remove the memory card while the function QnUDV
4806H Solution related
function was being executed. is being executed. LCPU
error
436
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check the external device operation. A
• Check the status of devices (such as cables,
iQ Sensor Data cannot be communicated with external
hubs, and routers) on the line to the external QnUDV
4807H Solution related devices when the iQ Sensor Solution function
devices. LCPU
error (data backup/restoration) is executed.
• The line may be congested. Resend data after a
while.
• When the restoration of the iQ Sensor Solution • Check the manufacturers, models, and versions
function (data backup/restoration) is of the specified backup source device
performed, the backup source device supporting iQ Sensor Solution and the
iQ Sensor
supporting iQ Sensor Solution and the restoration target device supporting iQ Sensor QnUDV
4808H Solution related
restoration target device supporting iQ Sensor Solution. LCPU
error
Solution do not match. • Replace the CPU module with a CPU module
• The CPU module is not compatible with the that is compatible with the CC-Link-
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module. AnyWireASLINK bridge module.
• Replace the module to the one which supports
the iQ Sensor Solution function (data
iQ Sensor The function was executed to the module which
backup/restoration). QnUDV
4809H Solution related does not support the iQ Sensor Solution function
• Execute the function to the module which LCPU
error (data backup/restoration).
supports the iQ Sensor Solution function (data
backup/restoration).
The function was executed to the CC-Link
iQ Sensor Turn off and on the power supply for the master
module whose operating status has been QnUDV
480AH Solution related station and the standby master station, and
switched from the standby master station to the LCPU
error execute the function again.
master station.
The function was executed to the CC-Link
iQ Sensor Check the "Read the model name of slave station"
module for which the "Read the model name of QnUDV
480BH Solution related checkbox for the auto detect setting in parameter,
slave station" checkbox is not checked in LCPU
error and execute the function again.
parameter.
The specified command cannot be executed
iQ Sensor Execute the command again after the iQ Sensor
because the iQ Sensor Solution function QnUDV
480CH Solution related Solution function (automatic detection of
(automatic detection of connected device) is LCPU
error connected device) ends.
being executed.
The specified command cannot be executed
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
iQ Sensor Execute the command again after the iQ Sensor
because the iQ Sensor Solution function QnUDV
480DH Solution related Solution function (communication setting
(communication setting reflection) is being LCPU
error reflection) ends.
executed.
• The specified command cannot be executed
because the iQ Sensor Solution function
• Execute the command again after a while.
iQ Sensor (monitoring) is being executed.
• Execute the command again after the iQ Sensor QnUDV
480EH Solution related • The specified command cannot be executed
Solution function (sensor parameter read/write) LCPU
error because the iQ Sensor Solution function
ends.
(sensor parameter read/write) is being
executed.
After the values in "Device" of "PLC Parameter"
of the CPU module, where the simple PLC
Power off and on the CPU module. Or reset the
4900H Other error communication function had been set, were LCPU
CPU module.
changed, the parameters were written to the
CPU module from the "Write to PLC" window.
The file register used for the simple PLC
Correct the device number of the file register. And
communication function became out of range
4901H Other error power off and on the CPU module or reset the LCPU
due to the block number change of the file
module.
register.
The communication was stopped because an
error occurred at the other setting No., for which
4902H Other error Remove the error cause. LCPU
the same destination device of the
corresponding setting No. had been set.
The communication was stopped because a stop
error occurred in the CPU module where the Power off and on the CPU module. Or reset the
4903H Other error LCPU
simple PLC communication function had been CPU module.
set.
The specified command cannot be executed
After the delete processing is completed, execute
4904H Other error because a file or folder is being deleted using a LCPU
the command again.
display unit.
437
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Access to the specified station cannot be
made since the routing parameters are not set
• Set to the related stations the routing
to the start source CPU module and/or relay
parameters for access to the specified station.
CPU module.
• Retry after a while, or start communication after
• For routing via a multiple CPU system, the
confirming that the system for data routing has
control CPU of the network module for data
started.
routing has not started.
• In a redundant system configuration, connect
• When System A/System B is not yet identified QCPU
the tracking cable, start System A/System B
in a redundant system configuration, LCPU
normally, and then restart communication.
communication was made with the other
Link-related • Set the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU or the Built-
4A00H station via the network module.
error in Ethernet port LCPU that performs IP packet
• The Built-in Ethernet port QCPU or the Built-in
transfer as the control CPU of the CC-Link IE
Ethernet port LCPU that performs IP packet
module, which is on the path that an IP packet
transfer is not the control CPU of the CC-Link
takes.
IE module, which is on the path that an IP
packet takes.
• The network of the No. set to the routing
• Check and correct the routing parameters set to
parameters does not exist.
the related stations.
• The specified CPU module cannot be QnUDV
• Set communication through the network that is
communicated through the network that is not
supported by the specified CPU module.
supported by the CPU module.
• The network of the No. set to the routing
• Check and correct the routing parameters set to
parameters does not exist.
Link-related the related stations. QCPU
4A01H • The specified CPU module cannot be
error • Set communication through the network that is LCPU
communicated through the network that is not
supported by the specified CPU module.
supported by the CPU module.
• Check the network module and the data link
module for error or check that the modules are
Link-related QCPU
4A02H Access to the specified station cannot be made. not in offline.
error LCPU
• Check to see if the network number/PC number
setting has no mistake.
Link-related QCPU
4A03H A request for network test was issued. Check the request data of the MC protocol, etc.
error LCPU
• Replace the CPU module to the one which
Link-related A request is executed to the CPU module which supports all stations specification.
4A04H QnUDV
error does not support all stations specification. • Execute the request to the CPU module which
supports all stations specification.
• The upper 2 bytes of the IP addresses do not
match between a CPU module and the
request destination device on the same path
that an IP packet takes.
• Check and correct the IP address settings of the
• The upper 2 bytes of the IP addresses do not
built-in Ethernet ports of the CPU module.
match between a CPU module and a CC-Link
IP • Check and correct the IP address of the request
IE module on the same path that an IP packet
communication destination device. QCPU
4A20H takes.
test related • Check and correct the IP address of the CC-Link LCPU
• The upper 2 bytes of the IP addresses do not
error IE module.
match between CC-Link IE modules on the
• Check and correct the IP address of the request
same path that an IP packet takes.
source device.
• The upper 2 bytes of the IP addresses do not
match between the request source device and
the CPU module connected to the request
destination device by Ethernet.
• The 3rd byte (Network No.) or 4th byte (Station
No.) of the IP address of the CPU module is
IP • Check and correct the IP address settings of the
the number that is not available for CC-Link IE.
communication built-in Ethernet ports of the CPU module. QCPU
4A21H • The 3rd byte (Network No.) or 4th byte (Station
test related • Check and correct the IP address of the request LCPU
No.) of the IP address of the request
error destination device.
destination device is the number that is not
available for CC-Link IE.
438
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Set the IP address to the control station or A
master station of the CC-Link IE module.
• Check the communication status with the control
station or master station if the CC-Link IE
module is used as a normal station or local
IP
station.
communication The IP address is not set for a CC-Link IE QCPU
4A22H • Replace the control station or master station
test related module on the path that an IP packet takes. LCPU
with the one supporting the IP packet transfer
error
function.
• Conduct the IP communication test again after
the CC-Link IE module is started up.
• Check and correct the IP address of the request
destination device.
• Replace the CPU module with the one
• The CPU module on the path that an IP packet
supporting the IP packet transfer function.
IP takes does not support the IP packet transfer
• Correct Routing Parameters so that an IP packet
communication function. QCPU
4A23H is routed to the CPU module that supports the IP
test related • Routing Parameters are set so that an IP LCPU
packet transfer function.
error packet is routed to the CPU module that does
• Check and correct the IP address of the request
not support the IP packet transfer function.
destination device.
• Replace the CC-Link IE module with the one
• A network module on the path that an IP
supporting the IP packet transfer function.
packet takes does not support the IP packet
• Correct Routing Parameters so that an IP packet
transfer function.
is routed to the CC-Link IE module that supports
• Routing Parameters are set so that an IP
the IP packet transfer function.
packet is routed to the network module that
• Check and correct the settings so that the 3rd
does not support the IP packet transfer
byte (Network No.) of the IP address of the
function.
device on the path that an IP packet takes does
IP • The 3rd byte (Network No.) of the IP address
not overlap with the network No. of the module
communication of the device on the path that an IP packet QCPU
4A24H that is mounted with the CPU module and does
test related takes overlapped with the network No. of the LCPU
not support the IP packet transfer function.
error module that is mounted with the CPU module
• Check and correct the settings so that the 3rd
and does not support the IP packet transfer
byte (Network No.) of the IP address of the
function.
request destination device does not overlap with
• The 3rd byte (Network No.) of the IP address
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
the network No. of the module that is mounted
of the request destination device overlapped
with the CPU module and does not support the
with the network No. of the module that is
IP packet transfer function.
mounted with the CPU module and does not
• Check and correct the IP address of the request
support the IP packet transfer function.
destination device.
• Select "Use" for IP packet transfer function in "IP
packet transfer setting" in Built-in Ethernet Port
• "IP packet transfer setting" in Built-in Ethernet
IP Setting tab of "PLC parameter".
Port Setting tab of "PLC parameter" is not set.
communication • Correct Routing Parameters so that an IP packet QCPU
4A25H • Routing Parameters are set so that an IP
test related is routed to the CPU module where IP packet LCPU
packet is routed to the CPU module where IP
error transfer setting is set.
packet transfer setting is not set.
• Check and correct the IP address of the request
destination device.
IP
The IP communication test was started from the
communication Correct the setting so that the IP communication
4A26H CPU module other than the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
test related test starts from the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
QCPU.
error
IP The Built-in Ethernet port QCPU that performs IP Set the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU that performs
communication packet transfer is not the control CPU of the CC- IP packet transfer as the control CPU of the CC-
4A27H QCPU
test related Link IE module, which is on the path that an IP Link IE module, which is on the path that an IP
error packet takes. packet takes.
439
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• In the system where the CPU module is
• Correct the routing parameter setting so that IP
connected to the request destination device
packets use the same path for both request and
over Ethernet, the request path and the
response transmission.
response path of IP packets differ.
• When multiple CC-Link IE modules with the
• When multiple CC-Link IE modules with the
same network number are connected in a
same network number are connected in a
IP multiple CPU system, set the module mounted
multiple CPU system, the module mounted on
communication on the lowest slot number as a controlled QCPU
4A28H the lowest slot number is not set as a
test related module that transfers IP packets. LCPU
controlled module that transfers IP packets.
error • When multiple CC-Link IE modules with the
• When multiple CC-Link IE modules with the
same network number are connected in a single
same network number are connected in a
or multiple CPU system, set the station number
single or multiple CPU system, the station
of the module mounted on the lowest slot
number of the module mounted on the lowest
number as a relay station number in routing
slot number is not set as a relay station
parameter.
number in routing parameter.
The 3rd byte (Network No.) of the IP address of
IP • Check and correct the IP address settings of the
the request destination device overlapped with
communication built-in Ethernet ports of the CPU module. QCPU
4A29H the 3rd byte of the IP address of the CPU module
test related • Check and correct the IP address of the request LCPU
connected to the request source device by
error destination device.
Ethernet.
IP
The IP address of a device on the CC-Link IE Specify the IP address of a device on the CC-Link
communication QCPU
4A2AH network, the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, or the IE network, the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, or the
test related LCPU
Built-in Ethernet port LCPU is not specified. Built-in Ethernet port LCPU.
error
• Take corrective action after checking the error
that occurred at the specified access destination
or the relay station to the accessed station.
• An error occurred in the access destination or
• Check the transfer setup (request destination
Target-related relay station. QCPU
4B00H module I/O number or programmable controller
error • The specified transfer setup (request LCPU
number) in the request data of the MC protocol,
destination module I/O number) is illegal.
etc.
• Check the occurring stop error and take the
action.
Target-related The target is not the No. 1 CPU of the multiple Execute the request for the No. 1 CPU of the
4B01H QCPU
error CPU system. multiple CPU system.
Target-related The request is not addressed to the CPU Perform operation for the module that can execute QCPU
4B02H
error module. the specified function. LCPU
• Check whether the specified route is supported
• The specified route is not supported by the or not.
Target-related specified CPU module version. • Check whether the CPU module is QCPU
4B03H
error • The communication target CPU module is not mounted/connected or not. LCPU
mounted. • Check the occurring stop error and take the
action.
Target-related The specified transfer setup (request destination In the target setup, an illegal value is set as the
4B04H QCPU
error module I/O number) is not supported. start I/O number of the target module.
Multiple CPU- The specified device is unavailable for the
4C00H Check the request data contents. QCPU
related error motion CPU or outside the device range.
Execute again after reducing the number of DDWR
Multiple CPU- There are a total of 33 or more DDWR and
4C08H and DDRD requests to be executed QCPU
related error DDRD requests.
simultaneously.
Multiple CPU- The specification of the requested CPU module
4C09H Check the request data contents. QCPU
related error No. is illegal.
• Increase the free space of the SD memory card
CPU module • Maximum storable capacity is exceeded. and CPU module, and then execute the
data • Maximum number of storable files is processing again.
4C10H backup/restorat exceeded. • Delete files in the SD memory card and CPU QnUDV
ion function • Storable upper limit of the backup folder module, and then execute the processing again.
error number is exceeded. • Delete backup data in the SD memory card, and
then execute the processing again.
440
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• No SD memory card is inserted. • Insert or re-insert the SD memory card, and then A
CPU module • Removal and insertion of the SD memory card execute the processing again.
data is being enabled by SM609 (Memory card • Disable the removal and insertion of the SD
4C11H backup/restorat remove/insert enable flag). memory card, and then execute the processing QnUDV
ion function • The SD memory card is being disabled by again.
error SM606 (SD memory card forced disable • Enable the SD memory card operation and then
instruction). execute the processing again.
• Check if the SD memory card is inserted, and
CPU module
execute the processing again.
data
Writing/reading of backup data to/from the SD • Replace the SD memory card, and execute the
4C12H backup/restorat QnUDV
memory card failed. processing again.
ion function
• Restore with any other backup data because the
error
backup data may have been corrupted.
• Back up data in the CPU built-in memory, format
CPU module the CPU memory, and write the data back to the
data original memory. Then, execute the data
Reading/writing of data from/to the CPU built-in
4C13H backup/restorat backup/restoration function. QnUDV
memory completed with an error.
ion function • The possible cause is a failure of the CPU
error module. Execute data restoration to another
CPU module.
CPU module • The function cannot be executed because the
data file password 32 is set to the data. When using the CPU module data
4C14H backup/restorat • The data which is same as the one set the file backup/restoration function, delete the file QnUDV
ion function password 32 is restored to the restoration password 32 setting and then execute the function.
error destination CPU module.
CPU module The functions that cannot be executed
data simultaneously such as the file transfer function
4C15H backup/restorat (FTP), data backup/restoration function (iQ Execute again after a while. QnUDV
ion function Sensor Solution function), and IP address
error change function are executed.
• The automatic backup setting by specification
• Review the setting value (automatic backup date
of day and time is turned on while the setting
CPU module and time) and turn on the automatic backup
value (automatic backup date and time) are
data setting by specification of day and time.
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
out of range.
4C16H backup/restorat • Review the setting value (automatic backup time QnUDV
• The automatic backup setting by specification
ion function and day of the week) and turn on the automatic
of time and day of the week is turned on while
error backup setting by specification of time and day
the setting value (automatic backup time and
of the week.
day of the week) are out of range.
CPU module
data A restoration is executed while the model names Execute a restoration again for the CPU module
4C17H backup/restorat of the CPU module differs between the backup whose name is same as the backup source CPU QnUDV
ion function source and the restoration target. module.
error
CPU module
data A restoration is executed while the operating Change the operating status of the CPU module to
4C18H backup/restorat status of the CPU module is in RUN or PAUSE STOP state and then execute the restoration QnUDV
ion function state. again.
error
• A restoration is executed while the system files
(BKUPINF.QSL and BKUPDAT.QBK) are not
CPU module structured properly.
data • File(s) in the system file information
Restore with any other backup data because the
4C19H backup/restorat (BKUPINF.QSL) does not exist in the folder of QnUDV
backup data may have been corrupted.
ion function backed up data.
error • A restoration is executed with the folder of
backed up data in which the system files
(BKUPINF.QSL, BKUPDAT.QBK) do not exist.
• The folder with the setting values of SD919 to
CPU module SD921 (Restoration target folder) does not
• Check and correct the setting value of SD919 to
data exist in the SD memory card.
SD921 and then execute the processing again.
4C1AH backup/restorat • The setting value of SD917 (Restoration target QnUDV
• Check and correct the setting value of SD917
ion function data setting) is out of range.
and then execute the processing again.
error • The value outside the specified range is set to
SD919 to SD921.
441
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
CPU module Check and correct the CPU module status to the
A restoration is executed while the CPU module
data one at the time of backup and then execute the
status (such as programs, parameters, and file
4C1BH backup/restorat restoration again. Change SD917 to all the target QnUDV
structure) of restoration destination is different
ion function data of backup and restoration, and then execute
from the status at the time of backup.
error the restoration again.
• Insert or re-insert the SD memory card, and then
• No SD memory card is inserted.
execute the processing again.
• Removal and insertion of the SD memory card
CPU module • Disable the removal and insertion of the SD
is being enabled by SM609 (Memory card
data memory card, and then execute the processing
remove/insert enable flag).
4C1CH backup/restorat again. QnUDV
• The SD memory card is being disabled by
ion function • Enable the SD memory card operation and then
SM606 (SD memory card forced disable
error execute the processing again.
instruction).
• Cancel the write protection and then execute the
• The SD memory card is write-protected.
processing again.
CPU module
data When using the CPU module data
4C1DH backup/restorat The CPU module is locked. backup/restoration function, unlock the CPU QnUDV
ion function module and then execute the function.
error
CPU module
data The specified command cannot be executed After the CPU module data backup/restoration
4C1FH backup/restorat because the CPU module data function is completed, execute the command QnUDV
ion function backup/restoration function is being executed. again.
error
CPU module • Delete backup data in the SD memory card, and
data execute the function again.
The number of backup data stored in an SD
4C21H backup/restorat • Check and correct the settings of the upper limit QnUDV
memory card exceeds the upper limit value.
ion function value of the number of backup data, and
error execute the function again.
CPU module
data
Bit5 of SD910 is turned on while the set value of After check and correct the set value of SD1928,
4C22H backup/restorat QnUDV
SD1928 is out of the allowable range. turn on bit5 of SD910.
ion function
error
CPU module
data Upper limit value of the number of the backup After deleting the backup data folder in the SD
4C23H backup/restorat data cannot be changed because a backup data memory card and turning off bit5 of SD910 QnUDV
ion function folder already exists. temporarily, turn on bit5 of SD910 again.
error
CPU module
The data cannot be backed up because more • Delete the backup data exceeding the upper
data
backup data than the upper limit value of the limit value, and execute the function again.
4C24H backup/restorat QnUDV
number of backup data exists in the SD memory • Check and correct the settings of the upper limit
ion function
card. value, and execute the function again.
error
CPU module
The data cannot be backed up because a
data Clear "Execution Program Protection Setting" of
program with a block password for which
4C25H backup/restorat the block password and execute the function QnUDV
"Execution Program Protection Setting" has
ion function again.
been enabled exists.
error
Execution of the MC protocol command has
failed because of the following error.
E-mail related • Format error Check and correct the contents of the MC protocol
4D00H LCPU
error • Data size error command mail.
• Data count error
• Unsupported command error
E-mail related Execution of MC protocol command is disabled
4D01H Check and correct the parameter setting. LCPU
error in parameter.
• Correct the execution/error completion type
setting in control data, and execute the
SLMP frame instruction again.
The execution/error completion type setting of QnUDV
4D20H send • If an error still exists even after taking the above
the dedicated instruction is incorrect. LCPU
instruction error action, the possible cause is a hardware failure
of the module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
442
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
SLMP frame
The external device IP address setting of the Correct the IP address of the external device, and QnUDV
A
4D21H send
dedicated instruction is incorrect. execute the instruction again. LCPU
instruction error
SLMP frame
QnUDV
4D22H send The port number setting is incorrect. Check and correct the port number.
LCPU
instruction error
SLMP frame
QnUDV
4D23H send The number of resends is specified incorrectly. Check and correct the number of resends.
LCPU
instruction error
SLMP frame
Set the arrival monitoring time within the allowable QnUDV
4D24H send The arrival monitoring time setting is incorrect.
range. LCPU
instruction error
• Check the operation of the external device or
switching hub.
• The line may be congested with packets.
Resend data after a while.
• Check whether the cables are securely
connected.
SLMP frame • Check that there is no connection failure with the
Sending messages by using the SP.SLMPSND QnUDV
4D25H send switching hub.
instruction has failed. LCPU
instruction error • Execute a communication status test. If the test
completes with an error, take an action to correct
the error.
• Check the module for error by conducting the
module communication test.
• Check whether the IP address specified as
target is correct.
• Check and correct the response waiting time.
SLMP frame
The CPU module was not able to receive a • Check the external device operation. QnUDV
4D26H send
response to the request. • Check whether the external device supports the LCPU
instruction error
function executed.
• Correct the request data so that the response
data length will be within the specified range,
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
SLMP frame The CPU module received a response with the
and execute the instruction again. QnUDV
4D27H send data length out of the range, which was sent by
• If the same error code is displayed again even LCPU
instruction error the SP.SLMPSND instruction.
after taking an action, please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
Predefined
protocol related
Setting value of protocol No. is out of range in
7D00H error (built- Check the setting value of protocol No. LCPU
the control data of S(P).CPRTCL instruction.
in/adapter
serial)
• Execute the S(P).CPRTCL instruction after
SM1332 is turned on.
• Protocol was executed while SM1332 is off. • Write the protocol setting data after turning the
Predefined • S(P).CPRTCL instruction was executed while CPU to STOP so that S(P).CPRTCL instruction
protocol related the protocol setting data was checking. is not concurrently executed.
7D02H error (built- • S(P).CPRTCL instruction was executed while • Execute the S(P).CPRTCL instruction after LCPU
in/adapter error occurred in the protocol setting data. rewriting protocol setting data to CPU.
serial) • Protocol setting file has not been written to • If the same error is displayed again after
valid drive. rewriting, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check whether the specified protocol No. is
• Protocol No. which was not registered to CPU
Predefined correct.
was specified at S(P).CPRTCL instruction
protocol related • Check whether the specified protocol No. has
control data.
7D10H error (built- been registered by the value for the with/without LCPU
• S(P).CPRTCL instruction was executed
in/adapter protocol registration (SD1342 to SD1349).
though the protocol setting data have not been
serial) • Execute the S(P).CPRTCL instruction again
written to CPU.
after rewriting the protocol setting data.
443
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
Predefined
protocol related • Transmission monitoring time was up.
7D12H error (built- • Failed to send though the system retried to Check whether the cable is connected. LCPU
in/adapter send for the maximum number of retries.
serial)
• Check whether the cable is connected.
• Check whether any errors are found in the target
Predefined device.
protocol related • Check whether the sending data from the target
7D13H error (built- Receive wait time was up. device has not been interrupted. LCPU
in/adapter • Check whether any of data were lost because of
serial) receive error.
• Check whether the send data (packet) from the
target device is correct.
• S(P).CPRTCL instruction ended abnormally
• Check the canceled protocol in S(P).CPRTCL
Predefined because the cancel request was accepted
instruction control data (Number of executions),
protocol related during protocol execution.
remove the cause of cancel operation.
7D16H error (built- • S(P).CPRTCL instruction ended abnormally LCPU
• Write the protocol setting data after turning the
in/adapter because checking protocol setting data was
CPU to STOP so that S(P).CPRTCL instruction
serial) executed during S(P).CPRTCL instruction
is not concurrently executed.
execution.
Predefined
• Check the send data from external devices.
protocol related
Received the packet of the data length over 2048 • If the data send from external devices exceed
7D17H error (built- LCPU
bytes. 2048 bytes, split it into several files and send
in/adapter
them separately.
serial)
Predefined The data (digit) corresponding to the conversion
• Check the send data from external devices.
protocol related variables (variable number of data) was not
• If protocol has been edited, check whether any
7D18H error (built- enough when data was received in the protocol LCPU
errors found for the digit setting value in the
in/adapter including the packet of conversion variables
packet format of the target device.
serial) (variable number of data).
The data corresponding to the conversion
Predefined variables (fixed number of data and variable
• Check the send data from external devices.
protocol related number of digits) was 0-bite or exceeded the
• If protocol has been edited, check whether any
7D19H error (built- maximum number of digits when data was LCPU
errors found for the digit setting value in the
in/adapter received in the protocol including the packet of
packet format of the target device.
serial) conversion variables (fixed number of data and
variable number of digits).
• Check the send data from external devices.
Predefined (1) Check whether the length value is correct.
Data length does not match between the data
protocol related (2) Check whether any of data were lost in
length shown by length and the one of
7D1AH error (built- conversion variables. LCPU
conversion variables in the received data from
in/adapter • If protocol has been edited, check whether any
external devices.
serial) errors found for the conversion variables in the
packet format of the target device.
• Check the send data from external devices.
• If protocol has been edited, check whether any
errors found for the conversion size setting in
Predefined
The data corresponding to the conversion the packet format of the target device.
protocol related
variables exceeded the CPU capable range (1) If the value exceeds the word size, change
7D1BH error (built- LCPU
when data was received in the protocol including the conversion size to the one of double
in/adapter
the packet of conversion variables. word.
serial)
(2) If the value exceeds the double word size,
change the elements to the non-conversion
variables.
Predefined • Check the maximum data length for Data Length
protocol related Storage Area, reset a value within the range.
Setting value in Data Length Storage Area, Data
7D20H error (built- • Check the maximum number of data for Data LCPU
Quantity Storage Area is out of range.
in/adapter Quantity Storage Area, reset a value within the
serial) range.
Predefined
• Decimal point position for variable point is out • Check the decimal point position.
protocol related
of range. • Check the number of digits, set the decimal
7D21H error (built- LCPU
• Number of decimals is bigger than the one of point position to the one less than the number of
in/adapter
Number of digits per data. digits.
serial)
444
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Unable to convert the data to the binary one
• Communicate again after checking the send A
message, changing it.
when data was received in the protocol
Predefined • If protocol has been edited, check whether any
including the packet of conversion variables.
protocol related errors found for the setting value of the contents,
• Unable to convert the data corresponding to
7F20H error (built- sign character, number of decimals, delimiter or LCPU
check code to the binary one when data was
in/adapter digit in the packet format of the target device.
received in the protocol including the packet of
serial) • If protocol has been edited, check whether any
check code (ASCII Hexadecimal or ASCII
errors found for the type of check code or data
Decimal).
length in the packet format of the target device.
• Check the sum check of the target device.
• Check the horizontal parity code of the target
• Calculated sumcheck does not match the device.
Predefined
received one. • Check the check code (sum check, horizontal
protocol related
• Calculated horizontal parity code does not parity code, CRC-16) of the target device.
7F24H error (built- LCPU
match the received one. • If protocol has been edited, check whether any
in/adapter
• Calculated check code does not match the errors found for the process method of check
serial)
received one. code, code type, data length, data order,
complement calculation and calculation range in
the packet format of the target device.
• Communicate again after slowing the
Predefined communication speed.
protocol related • Check whether momentary power failure has not
CPU received the next data before completing
7F67H error (built- occurred at the station connected to CPU. (Able LCPU
receiving process.
in/adapter to check by SD1005 of special register) Remove
serial) the cause if momentary power failure has
occurred.
• Setting for stop bit is not correct. • Match the setting between CPU and the target
Predefined
• Line could not establish a secure connection device.
protocol related
by the ON/OFF operation of the Target Station. • Take noise reduction measures.
7F68H error (built- LCPU
• Noise is generated in line. • Provide interlocks so that data are not
in/adapter
• In multi-drop connection, data were simultaneously sent from multiple devices in
serial)
simultaneously sent from multiple devices. multi-drop connection.
• Setting for parity bit is not correct. • Match the setting between CPU and the target
Predefined
• Line could not establish a secure connection device.
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
protocol related
by the ON/OFF operation of the Target Station. • Take noise reduction measures.
7F69H error (built- LCPU
• Noise is generated in line. • Provide interlocks so that data are not
in/adapter
• In multi-drop connection, data were simultaneously sent from multiple devices in
serial)
simultaneously sent from multiple devices. multi-drop connection.
Predefined
protocol related
Skipped the receive data because of the Clear the receive buffer by executing the
7F6AH error (built- LCPU
overflow of receive buffer. Predefined protocol with data receiving.
in/adapter
serial)
• Invalid setting was found in edited protocol.
Predefined
• Unsupported function is included in the
protocol related
protocol setting data written to the CPU Check the protocol setting data and register it
7FC8H error (built- LCPU
module. again.
in/adapter
• The protocol setting data written to the CPU
serial)
module is corrupted.
Predefined
protocol related
In executable instruction under the current
7FF2H error (built- Check the predefined protocol setting. LCPU
predefined protocol setting.
in/adapter
serial)
445
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
C055H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
C056H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
iQ Sensor
The function not supported by the target device Check the version of the device supporting iQ QnUDV
C059H Solution related
supporting iQ Sensor Solution was executed. Sensor Solution. LCPU
error
• The communication setting value is out of the
range.
iQ Sensor • The communication setting item not supported
Review the settings, and execute the function QnUDV
C05CH Solution related by the target device supporting iQ Sensor
again. LCPU
error Solution is set.
• The setting item required for the target device
supporting iQ Sensor Solution is not set.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
C061H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
MELSOFT
connection
The target IP address is not obtained in Set the station number <-> IP information to the
C080H extended QnUDV
MELSOFT connection extended setting. CPU module.
setting related
error
MELSOFT
connection
Correct the size of the send message of request
C086H extended A received message exceeds the receptible size. QnUDV
source.
setting related
error
446
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Take countermeasures such as network A
isolation, reduction the number of data sends
and the like, so that it reduces the load of
Ethernet.
Predefined • Contact to network administrator to reduce the
QnUDV
C0C7H protocol related System error. load of Ethernet line.
LCPU
error (Ethernet) • Check the line status by PING test from the
target device.
• Execute again. If the same error code is
displayed, please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
MELSOFT
connection
Check and correct the specified value of the data
C0D0H extended The data length is specified incorrectly. QnUDV
length.
setting related
error
MELSOFT • Check the specified value of the communication
Number of relay stations of communications
connection destination.
relayed thorough Ethernet, CC-Link IE Controller
C0D3H, C0D4H extended • Check and correct the setting value of station QnUDV
Network, CC-Link IE Field Network and
setting related No. <-> IP Information between host station and
MELSECNET/H exceeds the allowable number.
error target of the communications.
MELSOFT
• Check and correct the specification detail of the
connection
Network number and station number are communication destination.
C0D6H extended QnUDV
specified incorrectly. • Check and correct the specified value of the
setting related
communication destination.
error
• Check that the power supply module and the
CPU module are mounted on the base unit
properly.
MELSOFT • Check that the system is operating within the
connection general specifications of the CPU module.
C0DCH extended System error (OS has detected some error.) • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient. QnUDV
setting related • Reset the CPU module.
error • Execute again. If the same error code is
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
displayed, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Check the DNS server address setting.
• Check that the communications with the DNS
E-mail related server is enabled by using the PING command.
C101H DNS client response timeout error LCPU
error • Check that the own station IP address and the
DNS server IP address are in the same class. (If
not, check the router setting.)
• Check the connection status of each cable and
E-mail related the hub.
C111H DNS client response timeout error LCPU
error • Check that the communications with the DNS
server is enabled by using the PING command.
E-mail related Check SM1662 if there is any incoming mail on the
C119H There is no incoming mail. LCPU
error server.
• Receive e-mail with unknown destination or
unknown destination server from the SMTP
server. (Received mail is stored.)
• Check that the e-mail address (local part or
E-mail related After e-mail was sent, an error mail was returned
C11BH domain name) set in parameter or e-mail LCPU
error from the destination mail server.
address table is correct.
• Check that the mail address (local part or
domain name) is set to the destination mail
server.
• Check the port number of the SMTP server.
E-mail related Connection to the SMTP server cannot be
C120H • Check that the communications with the SMTP LCPU
error opened. (TCP connection timeout error)
server is enabled by using the PING command.
The CPU module cannot communicate with the
E-mail related
C121H SMTP server. (Error response) (TCP connection Check that the SMTP server is not busy. LCPU
error
error)
447
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check that the SMTP server is operating
E-mail related The response from the SMTP server timed out.
C124H correctly. LCPU
error (SMTP state transition timeout error)
• Check that there is no load on the network.
• Check that the SMTP server is operating
E-mail related Connection to the SMTP server cannot be
C126H correctly. LCPU
error closed. (Failed-to-close-connection error)
• Check that there is no load on the network.
• Check that the account name and password of
E-mail related
C13DH SMTP server authentication error the SMTP server are correctly set. LCPU
error
• Check the operating status of the SMTP server.
• Check that the SMTP server supports SMTP
Authentication.
E-mail related
C13EH SMTP server authentication unsupported error • Change the authentication setting in parameter. LCPU
error
(Deselect the "Authenticate" checkbox, or select
"Use POP before SMTP").
• Check the port number of the POP3 server.
E-mail related Connection to the POP3 server cannot be
C140H • Check that the communications with the POP3 LCPU
error opened. (TCP connection timeout error)
server is enabled by using the PING command.
The CPU module cannot communicate with the
E-mail related
C141H POP3 server. (Error response) (TCP connection Check that the POP3 server is not busy. LCPU
error
error)
The CPU module was not able to receive a • Check that the POP3 server is operating
E-mail related
C144H response from the POP3 server. (POP3 state correctly. LCPU
error
transition timeout error) • Check that there is no load on the network.
• Check that the POP3 server is operating
E-mail related Connection to the POP3 server cannot be
C146H correctly. LCPU
error closed. (Failed-to-close-connection error)
• Check that there is no load on the network.
The e-mail address set to the CPU module in E-
Correct the e-mail address set to the CPU module
E-mail related mail Setting parameter differs from the account
C151H so that the account name matches the one set to LCPU
error name set to the mailbox on the server side.
the server.
(User mailbox specification error)
The password set to the CPU module in E-mail
E-mail related Correct the password set to the CPU module so
C152H Setting parameter differs from the one set on the LCPU
error that it matches the one set to the server.
server side. (Password setting error)
• Check that the IP address of the DNS server is
set correctly.
E-mail related • Check that the mail server name (SMTP server
C170H An error is returned from the DNS server. LCPU
error name, POP server name) is set correctly.
• Check with a network manager if the server set
as a DNS server is operating correctly.
• Check and correct the destination number
E-mail related The destination number setting is incorrect. setting.
C1B6H LCPU
error (Destination number setting error) • Check and correct the e-mail address setting in
parameter or e-mail address table.
• Execute the SP.ECPRTCL instruction after the
Predefined protocol ready (SM1354) is turned
• SP.ECPRTCL instruction was executed before ON.
Predefined the Predefined protocol ready (SM1354) is • Execute the SP.ECPRTCL instruction after
QnUDV
C400H protocol related turned ON. rewriting protocol setting data to CPU.
LCPU
error (Ethernet) • SP.ECPRTCL instruction was executed while • If the same error code is displayed again after
error occurred in the protocol setting data. rewriting, the cause is a hardware failure of the
CPU module. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
• Execute the protocol again after checking the
Predefined
specified protocol No. QnUDV
C401H protocol related Executed protocol No. has not been registered.
• Register the corresponding protocol to the LCPU
error (Ethernet)
specified protocol No.
Predefined
Check the protocol setting data and register it QnUDV
C402H protocol related Protocol setting data is invalid.
again. LCPU
error (Ethernet)
Predefined SP.ECPRTCL instruction ended abnormally Check the canceled protocol in SP.ECPRTCL
QnUDV
C404H protocol related because the cancel request was accepted during instruction control data (number of executions) and
LCPU
error (Ethernet) protocol execution. remove the cause of cancel operation.
448
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
Predefined
Setting value of protocol No. specified when Execute the protocol again after checking the QnUDV
A
C405H protocol related
protocol was executed is out of range. specified protocol No. LCPU
error (Ethernet)
• Check whether the cable is connected.
• Check the setting of specified connection No.,
execute protocol again if there aren't any
problem found.
• Check whether any errors are found in the target
Predefined
device. QnUDV
C410H protocol related Receive wait time was up.
• Check whether the sending data from the target LCPU
error (Ethernet)
device has not been interrupted.
• Check whether any of data were lost because of
receive error.
• Check whether the send data (packet) from the
target device is correct.
• Check the maximum data length for Data Length
Predefined Storage Area, reset a value within the range.
Setting value in Data Length Storage Area, Data QnUDV
C417H protocol related • Check the maximum number of data for Data
Quantity Storage Area is out of range. LCPU
error (Ethernet) Quantity Storage Area, reset a value within the
range.
Predefined • Cancel the instruction and check the protocol
Protocol setting data check occurred while QnUDV
C430H protocol related setting data while SP.ECPRTCL is being
SP.ECPRTCL instruction is executed. LCPU
error (Ethernet) executed.
• Check the behavior of the target device.
Predefined • Check the connection open status with the
Connection close occurred while SP.ECPRTCL QnUDV
C431H protocol related target device.
instruction is executed. LCPU
error (Ethernet) • Execute the instruction after opening the
connection again with the target device.
While the automatic detection is being
iQ Sensor
performed, the automatic detection or another iQ Execute the function after the automatic detection QnUDV
CEE0H Solution related
Sensor Solution function was executed by that is currently being performed ends. LCPU
error
another peripheral.
• Check the operating status and connection
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
CEE1H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
CEE2H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
449
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
CF10H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• The communication setting value is out of the
range.
iQ Sensor • The communication setting item not supported
Review the settings, and execute the function QnUDV
CF20H Solution related by the target device supporting iQ Sensor
again. LCPU
error Solution is set.
• The setting item required for the target device
supporting iQ Sensor Solution is not set.
iQ Sensor
A parameter not supported by the target device Check the version of the device supporting iQ QnUDV
CF30H Solution related
supporting iQ Sensor Solution was specified. Sensor Solution. LCPU
error
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
iQ Sensor
cable and the hub. QnUDV
CF31H Solution related System error
• Check the line status of Ethernet. LCPU
error
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
iQ Sensor The information required for monitoring cannot • Reset the devices supporting iQ Sensor
QnUDV
CF41H Solution related be read from the device supporting iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function again.
LCPU
error Solution. • If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
CF50H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
iQ Sensor The function cannot be executed because the
QnUDV
CF51H Solution related function from another peripheral is being Execute the function again after a while.
LCPU
error executed.
450
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check the operating status and connection A
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
iQ Sensor The information required for monitoring cannot • Reset the devices supporting iQ Sensor
QnUDV
CF52H Solution related be read from the device supporting iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function again.
LCPU
error Solution. • If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
CF53H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
CF54H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
CF55H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
iQ Sensor • Check the line status of Ethernet.
QnUDV
CF56H Solution related System error • Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
LCPU
error iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function
again.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
451
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
iQ Sensor The backup processing does not start when the
iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function QnUDV
CF60H Solution related iQ Sensor Solution function (data backup) is
again. LCPU
error executed.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
iQ Sensor The backup processing does not start when the
iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function QnUDV
CF61H Solution related iQ Sensor Solution function (data backup) is
again. LCPU
error executed.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
iQ Sensor The backup processing does not stop after the
iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function QnUDV
CF62H Solution related iQ Sensor Solution function (data backup) is
again. LCPU
error executed.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the manufacturers, models, and versions
When the restoration of the iQ Sensor Solution
iQ Sensor of the specified backup source device
function (data backup/restoration) is performed, QnUDV
CF63H Solution related supporting iQ Sensor Solution and the
the backup source device and the restoration LCPU
error restoration target device supporting iQ Sensor
target device do not match.
Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
iQ Sensor The restoration processing does not start when
iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function QnUDV
CF64H Solution related the iQ Sensor Solution function (data restoration)
again. LCPU
error is executed.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
Solution.
• Reset the CPU module and devices supporting
iQ Sensor The restoration processing does not stop when
iQ Sensor Solution, and execute the function QnUDV
CF65H Solution related the iQ Sensor Solution function (data restoration)
again. LCPU
error is executed.
• If the same error code is displayed again even
after the above actions are taken, please consult
the manufacturer of the device supporting iQ
Sensor Solution.
• Check the operating status and connection
iQ Sensor status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
An error has occurred on the Ethernet QnUDV
CF70H Solution related Solution.
communication route. LCPU
error • Check the connection status of each Ethernet
cable and the hub.
• Check the operating status and connection
iQ Sensor status of each device supporting iQ Sensor
QnUDV
CF71H Solution related Timeout error Solution.
LCPU
error • The line may be busy. Execute the function after
a while.
452
APPENDICES
Error code Corresponding
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal) CPU
Cyclic
Cyclic transmission cannot be executed because
A
transmission Check the existence of master stations on the QnUDV
CFC0H multiple master stations exist in the same
error (master network. LCPU
network address.
station)
Cyclic • Take measures to reduce noise.
transmission Cyclic transmission cannot be executed because • Execute again. If the same error code is QnUDV
CFC1H
error (master an error has occurred during cyclic transmission. displayed again, please consult your local LCPU
station) Mitsubishi representative.
Cyclic • Check the existence of master stations on the
Cyclic transmission cannot be executed because
transmission network. QnUDV
CFC8H a slave station controlled by another master
error (master • Check the slave station where the error has LCPU
station exists.
station) occurred.
Cyclic • Check the existence of slave stations on the
Cyclic transmission cannot be executed because
transmission network. QnUDV
CFC9H slave stations having the same IP address exist
error (master • Check the slave station where the error has LCPU
in the same network address.
station) occurred.
Master station The port number (61450) used in CC-Link IE Check and correct the port number used in the QnUDV
CFD0H
error Field Network Basic has already been used. Ethernet function. LCPU
Master station QnUDV
CFD1H An invalid value has been set in subnet mask. Check and correct the parameter setting.
error LCPU
Cyclic transmission cannot be executed because
Master station QnUDV
CFD2H any PLC parameter setting has been changed Reset the CPU module.
error LCPU
during cyclic transmission.
Cyclic • Check the existence of master stations on the
The cyclic transmission was executed for the
transmission network. QnUDV
CFE0H slave station controlled by another master
error (slave • Check the slave station where the error has LCPU
station.
station) occurred.
Cyclic
Check the number of occupied stations setting in
transmission The unusable number of occupied stations has QnUDV
CFE1H master station parameter (Network Configuration
error (slave been specified from master station. LCPU
Settings).
station)
• Check the slave station disconnection detection
Appendix 1.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
Appendix 1 Error Codes
setting in master station parameter (Network
Cyclic
Configuration Settings).
transmission QnUDV
CFE8H There is no response from a slave station. • Check the existence of slave stations on the
error (slave LCPU
network.
station)
• Check the disconnected slave station.
• Take measures to reduce noise.
Cyclic
transmission Slave stations having the same IP address exist Check the slave station where the error has QnUDV
CFE9H
error (slave in the same network address. occurred. LCPU
station)
Slave station Check the slave station where the error has QnUDV
CFF0H An error has occurred in a slave station.
error occurred. LCPU
*1 To check the logging status, use the CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool. For how to use the CPU Module Logging
Configuration Tool, refer to the following.
QnUDVCPU/LCPU User's Manual (Data Logging Function)
*2 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU and Built-in Ethernet port LCPU
453
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
The special relay (SM) is an internal relay whose application is fixed in the programmable controller. For this reason,
the special relay cannot be used in the same way as other internal relays are used in sequence programs. However,
the bit of the special relay can be turned on or off as needed to control the CPU module.
The following table shows how to read the special relay list.
Item Description
Number Special relay number
Name Special relay name
Meaning Contents of special relay
Explanation Detailed description of special relay
Set side and set timing of special relay
<Set by>
• S: Set by system
• U: Set by user (using a program, programming tool, GOT, or test operation from other external devices)
• S/U: Set by both system and user
<When Set>
The following shows the set timing when the special relay is set by system.
• Every END processing: Set during every END processing
Set by (When Set)
• Initial: Set during initial processing (after power-on or status change from STOP to RUN)
• Status change: Set when the operating status is changed
• Error: Set if an error occurs
• Instruction execution: Set when an instruction is executed
• Request: Set when requested by a user (using the special relay)
• When system is switched: Set when the system is switched (between the control system and the standby system)
• At write: Set when data are written to the CPU module by a user
• During END processing: Set during END processing
CPU module supporting the special relay
• QCPU: All the Q series CPU modules
• Q00J/Q00/Q01: Basic model QCPU
• Qn(H): High Performance model QCPU
• QnPH: Process CPU
Corresponding CPU • QnPRH: Redundant CPU
• QnU: Universal model QCPU
• QnUDV: High-speed Universal model QCPU
• Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U: Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU
• LCPU: All the L series CPU modules
• CPU module model: Only the specified model (Example: Q02UCPU, L26CPU-BT)
Corresponding • Special relay (M9) supported by the ACPU ("M9 format change" indicates the one whose application has been changed.
ACPU Incompatible with the Q00J/Q00/Q01 and QnPRH.)
M9 • "New" indicates the one added for the QCPU or LCPU.
For details on the following items, refer to the following.
• For network related items: Manuals for each network module
• For SFC programs: MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC)
Do not change the values of special relay set by system using a program or by test operation. Doing so may result in system
down or communication failure.
454
APPENDICES
(1) Diagnostic information A
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
• This relay turns on if an error is
detected by diagnostics. (Also turns on
Qn(H)
if an error is detected by an
QnPH
annunciator or the CHK instruction.)
QnPRH
• This relay remains on even after the
OFF: No error system returns to normal.
SM0 Diagnostic errors S (Error) New
ON: Error • This relay turns on if an error is
detected by diagnostics. (Also turns on
Q00J/Q00/Q01
if an error is detected by an
QnU
annunciator.)
LCPU
• This relay remains on even after the
system returns to normal.
• This relay turns on if an error is
detected by self-diagnostics. (Remains
Qn(H)
off if an error is detected by an
M9008 QnPH
annunciator or the CHK instruction.)
QnPRH
• This relay remains on even after the
Self-diagnostic OFF: No error system returns to normal.
SM1 S (Error)
error ON: Error • This relay turns on if an error is
detected by self-diagnostics. (Remains
Q00J/Q00/Q01
off if an error is detected by an
New QnU
annunciator.)
LCPU
• This relay remains on even after the
system returns to normal.
OFF: No error common
This relay turns on if error common
Error common information QCPU
SM5 information data exists when SM0 turns S (Error) New
information ON: Error common LCPU
on.
information
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
OFF: No error
individual This relay turns on if error individual
Error individual QCPU
SM16 information information data exists when SM0 turns S (Error) New
information LCPU
ON: Error individual on.
information
QCPU
SM50 Error reset OFF ON:Error clear Conducts error reset operation U New
LCPU
• This relay turns on if the battery voltage
of the CPU module or the memory card Qn(H)
drops below the rated value. QnPH
• This relay remains on even after the M9007 QnPRH
battery voltage returns to normal. QnU (except
• The on/off timing is synchronized with QnUDV)
that of the BAT. LED.
• This relay turns on if the battery voltage
of the CPU module drops below the
rated value.
OFF: Normal QnUDV
SM51 Battery low latch • This relay remains on even after the S (Error) New
ON: Battery low LCPU
battery voltage returns to normal.
• The on/off timing is synchronized with
that of the BAT. LED.
• This relay turns on if the battery voltage
of the CPU module drops below the
rated value.
• This relay remains on even after the New Q00J/Q00/Q01
battery voltage returns to normal.
• The on/off timing is synchronized with
that of the ERR. LED.
This relay has the same specifications as
OFF: Normal those of SM51 except that this relay turns QCPU
SM52 Battery low S (Error) M9006
ON: Battery low off after the battery voltage returns to LCPU
normal.
455
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
This relay turns on if a momentary power
failure within 20ms occurs during use of
an AC power supply module. This relay is QCPU
reset when the CPU module is powered
off and then on.
This relay turns on if a momentary power
OFF: AC/DC DOWN
failure within 10ms occurs during use of
AC/DC DOWN not detected
SM53 an AC power supply module. This relay is S (Error) M9005 LCPU
detection ON: AC/DC DOWN
reset when the CPU module is powered
detected
off and then on.
This relay turns on if a momentary power
failure within 10ms occurs during use of a
QCPU
DC power supply module. This relay is
LCPU
reset when the CPU module is powered
off and then on.
• This relay turns on if an operation error
OFF: Normal occurs. QCPU
SM56 Operation error S (Error) M9011
ON: Operation error • This relay remains on even after the LCPU
system returns to normal.
• This relay turns on if there is at least
one output module whose fuse has
OFF: Normal blown.
Blown fuse QCPU
SM60 ON: Module with • This relay remains on even after the S (Error) M9000
detection LCPU*4
blown fuse system returns to normal.
• Output modules on remote I/O stations
are also checked.
• This relay turns on if the status of the
I/O module differs from that registered
at power-on.
I/O module verify OFF: Normal QCPU
SM61 • This relay remains on even after the S (Error) M9002
error ON: Error LCPU
system returns to normal.
• I/O modules on remote I/O stations are
also checked.
S
Annunciator OFF: Not detected This relay turns on if at least one QCPU
SM62 (Instruction M9009
detection ON: Detected annunciator (F) turns on. LCPU
execution)
• This relay turns on if an error is
S Qn(H)
OFF: Not detected detected by the CHK instruction.
SM80 CHK detection (Instruction New QnPH
ON: Detected • This relay remains on even after the
execution) QnPRH
system returns to normal.
This relay is turned on to clear an error QnUDV
SM84 Error clear OFF ON:Error clear U New
set to SD84 and SD85. LCPU
456
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
Corresponds to
SM90 M9108
SD90
Corresponds to
SM91 M9109
SD91
Corresponds to
SM92 M9110
SD92
Corresponds to • Goes ON when
SM93 M9111
SD93 measurement of
Startup of OFF: Not started
Corresponds to step transition
SM94 monitoring timer for (monitoring timer M9112
SD94 monitoring timer is Qn(H)
step transition reset)
commenced. U QnPH
(Enabled only ON: Started Corresponds to
SM95 • Resets step M9113 QnPRH
when SFC (monitoring timer SD95 transition monitoring
program exists) started)
Corresponds to timer when it goes
SM96 M9114
SD96 OFF.
Corresponds to
SM97 New
SD97
Corresponds to
SM98 New
SD98
Corresponds to
SM99 New
SD99
Serial This relay stores whether the serial Q00/Q01
OFF: Not to be used S (Power-on
SM100 communication communication function is set to be used New QnU*2
ON: To be used or reset)
function using flag or not in PLC parameter. LCPU*3
OFF: Other than MC
protocol S (Being
communication This relay stores whether the communicat Q00/Q01
Communication
SM101 devices communication-target device is an MC ed via RS- New QnU*2
protocol status flag
ON: MC protocol protocol communication device or not. 232 or RS- LCPU*3
communication 422/485)
device
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
• Turns on if a failed protocol was used
to make communication in the serial Q00/Q01
OFF: Normal
SM110 Protocol error communication function. S (Error) New QnU*2
ON: Error
• This relay remains on even after the LCPU*3
protocol returns to normal.
• Turns on if the mode used to make
communication was different from the Q00/Q01
Communication OFF: Normal mode set in the serial communication
SM111 S (Error) New QnU*2
status ON: Error function.
• This relay remains on even after the LCPU*3
system returns to normal.
This relay is turned on to clear error Q00/Q01
Error information codes stored in SM110, SM111, SD110,
SM112 ON: Cleared U New QnU*2
clear and SD111. The error codes are cleared
when this relay is turned on. LCPU*3
This relay turns on if an overrun error Q00/Q01
OFF: Normal
SM113 Overrun error occurs in communication using the serial S (Error) New QnU*2
ON: Error
communication function. LCPU*3
This relay turns on if a parity error occurs Q00/Q01
OFF: Normal
SM114 Parity error in communication using the serial S (Error) New QnU*2
ON: Error
communication function. LCPU*3
This relay turns on if a flaming error Q00/Q01
OFF: Normal
SM115 Framing error occurs in communication using the serial S (Error) New QnU*2
ON: Error
communication function. LCPU*3
457
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
• This relay turns on when data are
written to the program cache memory.
OFF: Completed • This relay turns off when program
Program memory
ON: Not being memory batch transfer is completed. S (Status QnU*1
SM165 batch transfer New
executed or Not • This relay remains on when data change) LCPU
execution status
completed written to the program cache memory
are not batch-transferred to the
program memory.
*1 The following modules support this area:
• Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10012" or later
• Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
*2 The following modules having an RS-232 connector support these areas:
• Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "13062" or later (For the Q02UCPU, the serial
number (first five digits) must be "10102" or later.)
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
*3 The LCPU, except the L02SCPU and L02SCPU-P, whose serial number (first five digits) is "15102" or later
*4 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "16112" or later
458
APPENDICES
(2) System information A
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
Qn(H)
When this relay turns on from off, the QnPH
LED OFF
SM202 OFF ON: LED OFF LED corresponding to each bit in SD202 U New QnPRH
command
turns off. QnU
LCPU
This relay is on when the module is in the S (Status QCPU
SM203 STOP contact STOP status M9042
STOP status. change) LCPU
This relay is on when the module is in the S (Status QCPU
SM204 PAUSE contact PAUSE status M9041
PAUSE status. change) LCPU
OFF: PAUSE disabled The status changes to PAUSE if this relay QCPU
SM206 PAUSE enable coil U M9040
ON: PAUSE enabled is on when the PAUSE contact turns on. LCPU
Clock data stored in SD210 to SD213 are
Clock data set OFF: Ignored written to the CPU module after the END QCPU
SM210 U M9025
request ON: Set request instruction execution in the scan where LCPU
this relay is turned on.
This relay turns on if an error occurs in
OFF: No error QCPU
SM211 Clock data error the clock data (SD210 to SD213), and is S (Request) M9026
ON: Error LCPU
off while there is no error.
This relay is turned on to read clock data
Clock data read OFF: Ignored QCPU
SM213 and store them as BCD values into U M9028
request ON: Read request LCPU
SD210 to SD213.
Turns on when an access to CPU No.1
OFF: CPU No.1
from another CPU becomes possible
preparation
CPU No.1 after power-on or reset operation. This
uncompleted S (Status
SM220 preparation relay is used as an interlock for accessing New QCPU
ON: CPU No.1 change)
completed CPU No.1 when the multiple CPU
preparation
synchronous setting is set to
completed
asynchronous.
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
Turns on when an access to CPU No.2
OFF: CPU No.2
from another CPU becomes possible
preparation
CPU No.2 after power-on or reset operation. This
uncompleted S (Status
SM221 preparation relay is used as an interlock for accessing New QnU*7
ON: CPU No.2 change)
completed CPU No.2 when the multiple CPU
preparation
synchronous setting is set to
completed
asynchronous.
Turns on when an access to CPU No.3
OFF: CPU No.3
from another CPU becomes possible
preparation
CPU No.3 after power-on or reset operation. This
uncompleted S (Status
SM222 preparation relay is used as an interlock for accessing New QnU*7
ON: CPU No.3 change)
completed CPU No.3 when the multiple CPU
preparation
synchronous setting is set to
completed
asynchronous.
Turns on when an access to CPU No.4
OFF: CPU No.4
from another CPU becomes possible
preparation
CPU No.4 after power-on or reset operation. This
uncompleted S (Status
SM223 preparation relay is used as an interlock for accessing New QnU*5
ON: CPU No.4 change)
completed CPU No.4 when the multiple CPU
preparation
synchronous setting is set to
completed
asynchronous.
OFF: Online module
change is not in S (During
Online module progress This relay is on during online module online
SM235 New QnPH
change flag ON: Online module change. (for host CPU) module
change in change)
progress
459
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
OFF: Online module S (When
• This relay is on only for one scan after
Online module change online
completion of online module change.
SM236 change complete incomplete module New QnPH
• This relay can be used only in the scan
flag ON: Online module change is
execution type program. (for host CPU)
change complete complete)
Selects whether to check a device range
OFF: Device range
during execution of the BMOV, FMOV or
Device range checked QnU*6
SM237 DFMOV instruction (only when the U New
check inhibit flag ON: Device range not LCPU
conditions for subset processing are
checked
established).
• Turns off when CPU No.1 is reset.
OFF: No. 1 CPU reset • Turns on while CPU No.1 is being reset Q00/Q01*1
cancel (including the case where the CPU S (Status Qn(H)*1
New
No. 1 CPU reset ON: No. 1 CPU module is removed from the base unit). change) QnPH
SM240 resetting The other CPUs are also put in reset
flag QnU*7
status.
S (Status
Reset status This relay is always off. (reset status) New LCPU
change)
• Turns off when CPU No.2 is reset.
OFF: No. 2 CPU reset • Turns on while CPU No.2 is being reset Q00/Q01*1
No. 2 CPU reset cancel (including the case where the CPU S (Status Qn(H)*1
SM241 New
flag ON: No. 2 CPU module is removed from the base unit). change) QnPH
resetting "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error code: QnU*7
7000) is detected on the other CPUs.
• Turns off when CPU No.3 is reset.
OFF: No. 3 CPU reset • Turns on while CPU No.3 is being reset Q00/Q01*1
No. 3 CPU reset cancel (including the case where the CPU S (Status Qn(H)*1
SM242 New
flag ON: No. 3 CPU module is removed from the base unit). change) QnPH
resetting "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error code: QnU*7
7000) is detected on the other CPUs.
• Turns off when CPU No.4 is reset.
OFF: No. 4 CPU reset • Turns on while CPU No.4 is being reset
Qn(H)*1
No. 4 CPU reset cancel (including the case where the CPU S (Status
SM243 New QnPH
flag ON: No. 4 CPU module is removed from the base unit). change)
resetting "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error code: QnU*5
7000) is detected on the other CPUs.
• This relay is off when CPU No.1 is Q00/Q01*1
OFF: No. 1 CPU
normal (including the case where a Qn(H)*1
No. 1 CPU error normal S (Status
SM244 continuation error has occurred). New QnPH
flag ON: No. 1 CPU during change)
• This relay is on when CPU No.1 has a QnU*7
stop error
stop error. LCPU
• This relay is on when CPU No.2 is
OFF: No. 2 CPU Q00/Q01*1
normal (including the case where a
No. 2 CPU error normal S (Status Qn(H)*1
SM245 continuation error has occurred). New
flag ON: No. 2 CPU during change) QnPH
• This relay is on when CPU No.2 has a
stop error QnU*7
stop error.
• This relay is off when CPU No.3 is
OFF: No. 3 CPU Q00/Q01*1
normal (including the case where a
No. 3 CPU error normal S (Status Qn(H)*1
SM246 continuation error has occurred). New
flag ON: No. 3 CPU during change) QnPH
• This relay is on when CPU No.3 has a
stop error QnU*7
stop error.
• This relay is off when CPU No.4 is
OFF: No. 4 CPU
normal (including the case where a Qn(H)*1
No. 4 CPU error normal S (Status
SM247 continuation error has occurred). New QnPH
flag ON: No. 4 CPU during change)
• This relay is on when CPU No.4 has a QnU*5
stop error
stop error.
When this relay turns on from off, the Qn(H)
Max. loaded I/O OFF: Ignored
SM250 largest I/O number among those of the U New QnPH
read ON: Read
mounted modules is read into SD250. QnPRH
460
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
• Effective for the batch refresh (also
effective for the low speed cyclic) Qn(H)
• Designate whether to receive arrival QnPH
stations only or to receive all slave QnPRH
stations in the MELSECNET/H.
• Effective for the batch refresh (also
effective for the low speed cyclic)
OFF: Refresh arrival Qn(H)*2
• Designate whether to receive arrival
All stations refresh station QnPH
SM254 stations only or to receive all slave U New
command ON: Refresh all QnPRH
stations in the CC-Link IE Controller
stations
Network.
• Effective for the batch refresh (also
effective for the low speed cyclic)
• Specify whether to receive only arrival
QnU
station or all stations in the
MELSECNET/H or CC-Link IE
Controller Network.
OFF: Operative Turns on when it belongs to the standby
SM255 network network. (If no specification has been S (Initial)
ON: Standby network made, it is set to the operative network.)
For refresh from the network module to
MELSECNET/10,
OFF: Reads the CPU module, set whether to read Qn(H)
SM256 MELSECNET/H
ON: Does not read data from the network module to a device New QnPH
module 1
(such as B and W) or not. QnPRH
information U
For refresh from the CPU module to the
OFF: Writes network module, set whether to write
SM257
ON: Does not write data in a device (such as B and W) to the
network module or not.
OFF: Operative Turns on when it belongs to the standby
SM260 network network. (If no specification has been S (Initial)
ON: Standby network made, it is set to the operative network.)
For refresh from the network module to
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
MELSECNET/10,
OFF: Reads the CPU module, set whether to read Qn(H)
SM261 MELSECNET/H
ON: Does not read data from the network module to a device New QnPH
module 2
(such as B and W) or not. QnPRH
information U
For refresh from the CPU module to the
OFF: Writes network module, set whether to write
SM262
ON: Does not write data in a device (such as B and W) to the
network module or not.
OFF: Operative Turns on when it belongs to the standby
SM265 network network. (If no specification has been S (Initial)
ON: Standby network made, it is set to the operative network.)
For refresh from the network module to
MELSECNET/10,
OFF: Reads the CPU module, set whether to read Qn(H)
SM266 MELSECNET/H
ON: Does not read data from the network module to a device New QnPH
module 3
(such as B and W) or not. QnPRH
information U
For refresh from the CPU module to the
OFF: Writes network module, set whether to write
SM267
ON: Does not write data in a device (such as B and W) to the
network module or not.
OFF: Operative Turns on when it belongs to the standby
SM270 network network. (If no specification has been S (Initial)
ON: Standby network made, it is set to the operative network.)
For refresh from the network module to
MELSECNET/10,
OFF: Reads the CPU module, set whether to read Qn(H)
SM271 MELSECNET/H
ON: Does not read data from the network module to a device New QnPH
module 4
(such as B and W) or not. QnPRH
information U
For refresh from the CPU module to the
OFF: Writes network module, set whether to write
SM272
ON: Does not write data in a device (such as B and W) to the
network module or not.
461
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
This relay turns on if a CC-Link error is
Qn(H)
OFF: Normal detected in any of the CC-Link modules S (Status
SM280 CC-Link error New QnPH
ON: Error mounted, and turns off when the change)
QnPRH
condition returns to normal.
This relay stores whether the RS-232 or
RS-422/485 adapter is mounted or not.
OFF: No adapter The mounting status of the RS-232 or
Mounting status of mounted RS-422/485 adapter is checked during
SM310 RS-232, RS- ON: RS-232 or RS- the initial processing, and if it is mounted, S (Initial) New LCPU
442/485 adapter 422/485 adapter this relay turns on.
mounted The on/off status set during the initial
processing is held until the CPU module
is powered off and on again or is reset.
• This flag is enabled when the time
reserved for communication
processing is set in SD315.
• Turns ON to delay the END processing
by the time set in SD315 in order to
Communication
perform communication processing.
reserved time OFF: Without delay
SM315 (The scan time increases by the period U New Q00J/Q00/Q01
delay ON: With delay
set in SD315.)
enable/disable flag
• Turns OFF to perform the END
processing without a delay of the time
set in SD315 when there is no
communication processing. (Defaults
to OFF)
• This relay indicates whether the CC-
Link module is started and all the data
are refreshed by the automatic CC-
Link start function.
• This relay is on when all the data are
refreshed by the automatic CC-Link S (Initial
Automatic CC-Link OFF: Not activated start function. processing
SM319 New LCPU
start ON: Activated • Then the automatic CC-Link start and status
function is not activated, or when the change)
refresh device range is insufficient, this
relay is turned off. (If the refresh device
range set for the automatic CC-Link
start function is insufficient, all of the
refresh is stopped.)
Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
OFF: SFC program • This relay is on if an SFC program is Qn(H)
Presence/absence absent registered. QnPH
SM320 S (Initial) M9100
of SFC program ON: SFC program • This relay turns off if no SFC program QnPRH
present is registered. QnU
LCPU
• The same value as in SM320 is set as
Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
the initial value. (This relay turns on
OFF: SFC program not Qn(H)
when an SFC program is registered.)
Start/stop SFC executed (stop) M9101 format QnPH
SM321 • Turning off this relay stops SFC S (Initial)/U
program ON: SFC program change QnPRH
program execution.
executed (start) QnU
• Turning on this relay restarts SFC
LCPU
program execution.
Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
In the SFC tab of "PLC Parameter",
Qn(H)
"Initial start" is set for "SFC program start
SFC program start OFF: Initial start M9102 format QnPH
SM322 mode". S (Initial)/U
status ON: Resume start change QnPRH
• At initial start:OFF
QnU
• At continued start:ON
LCPU
462
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
OFF: Continuous *1
Q00J/Q00/Q01
Presence/absence transition not Set the presence/absence of continuous Qn(H)
of continuous effective transition for the block where QnPH
SM323 U M9103
transition for entire ON: Continuous "Continuous transition bit" of the SFC QnPRH
block transition data device has not been set. QnU
effective LCPU
Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
Qn(H)
• This relay is off while the module is in S
QnPH
the continuous transition mode or (Instruction M9104
QnPRH
OFF: When transition is during continuous transition, and is on execution)
Continuous QnU
executed when continuous transition is not LCPU
SM324 transition
ON: When no executed.
prevention flag
transition • This relay is always on while the CPU Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
module is operating not in the Qn(H)
S (Status
continuous transition mode. New QnPH
change)
QnPRH
QnU
Select whether the coil outputs of the
active steps are held or not at the time of
a block stop.
• The initial value is set to off when the Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
output mode at a block stop is off in the Qn(H)
Output mode at OFF: OFF parameter setting, and it is set to on QnPH
SM325 S (Initial)/U M9196
block stop ON: Preserves when the coil outputs are set to be QnPRH
held. QnU
• When this relay is turned off, all coil LCPU
outputs are turned off.
• When this relay is turned on, the coil
output state is held.
Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
Select the device status at the time of Qn(H)
SFC device clear OFF: Clear device switching from STOP to program write, QnPH
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
SM326 U New
mode ON: Preserves device and then to RUN. (All devices except the QnPRH
step relay) QnU
LCPU
Qn(H)
OFF: Hold step output QnPH
turned OFF If this relay is off, the coil output turns off S (Initial)/U QnPRH
Output during end
SM327 (cleared) when the step held after transition (SC, New QnU
step execution
ON: Hold step output SE, or ST) reaches the end step. LCPU
held
U Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
Select whether clear processing will be
performed or not if active steps other than
the ones being held exist in the block
when the end step is reached.
• When this relay turns OFF, all active
OFF: Clear processing
Clear processing steps are forcibly terminated to Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
is performed.
SM328 mode when end terminate the block. U New QnU
ON: Clear processing
step is reached • When this relay is ON, the execution of LCPU
is not performed.
the block is continued as-is.
• If active steps other than the ones
being held do not exist when the end
step is reached, the steps being held
are terminated to terminate the block.
Online change QnU*8
OFF: Not executed This relay is on while online change S (Status
SM329 (inactive block) New L06/L26/L26CPU-
ON: Being executed (inactive block) is executed. change)
status flag BT*11
463
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
Select whether the low speed execution
type program will be executed in the
asynchronous mode or in the
synchronous mode.
• Asynchronous mode (this relay is
turned off.) The operation of the low-
Operation mode for OFF: Asynchronous
speed execution type program is
low speed mode Qn(H)
SM330 performed continuously within an U New
execution type ON: Synchronous QnPH
excess time.
program mode
• Synchronous mode (this relay is turned
on.) The operation of the low-speed
execution type program is not
performed continuously, but performed
from the next scan, even if there is
excess time.
• This relay stores the information on
Normal SFC whether the normal SFC program is in Qn(H)*3
OFF: Not executed S (Status
SM331 program execution execution or not. New QnPH*4
ON: Being executed change)
status • Used as an interlock for execution of QnPRH
the SFC control instruction.
• This relay stores the information on
Program execution whether the SFC program for program
Qn(H)*3
management SFC OFF: Not executed execution management is in execution S (Status
SM332 New QnPH*4
program execution ON: Being executed or not. change)
status • Used as an interlock for execution of QnPRH
the SFC control instruction.
OFF ON:Latch clear
The latch data is cleared while this relay
Latch clear executed
is turned on in the STOP status. When QnUDV*10
SM339 execution Except OFF ON: U New
5A01H is set to SD339, this relay will be LCPU*9
command Latch clear not
valid.
executed
• This relay stores the status information
on the intelligent function module
access instruction that was just
ON indicates Qn(H)
Access execution executed. (This data is overwritten if S (Status
SM390 completion of intelligent New QnPH
flag the intelligent function module access change)
function module access QnPRH
instruction is executed again.)
• Used by the user in a program as a
completion bit.
Stores the execution status of the
S(P).GINT instruction. Q00/Q01
GINT instruction OFF: Not executed S
• Turns off before execution of the Qn(H)*1
SM391 execution ON: Execution (Instruction New
instruction. QnPH
completion flag completed execution)
• Turns on after completion of the QnU*7
instruction.
*1 Modules whose function version B or later
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "09012" or later
*3 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "04122" or later
*4 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "07032" or later
*5 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU
*6 The following modules support this area:
• Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10012" or later
• Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
*7 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU
*8 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "12052" or later
*9 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "15042" or later
*10 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "15043" or later
*11 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "15102" or later
464
APPENDICES
(3) System clock/counter
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by
Corresponding
ACPU
Corresponding A
(When Set) CPU
M9
S (Every
ON QCPU
SM400 Always ON This relay is always on. END M9036
OFF LCPU
processing)
S (Every
ON QCPU
SM401 Always OFF This relay is always off. END M9037
OFF LCPU
processing)
• This relay turns on for one scan after
ON 1 scan the CPU module enters the RUN
OFF status.
• This relay can be used only in a scan
execution type program.
• When an initial execution type program Qn(H)
is used, this relay turns off at the END QnPH
processing of the scan execution type S (Every M9038 QnPRH
After RUN, ON for QnU
SM402 program in the first scan after the CPU END
1 scan only LCPU
module enters the RUN status. processing)
ON
Initial 1 scan of scan
OFF
execution execution type
type program program
This relay turns on for one scan after the
New Q00J/Q00/Q01
CPU module enters the RUN status.
• This relay turns off for one scan after
ON the CPU module enters the RUN
1 scan
OFF status.
• This relay can be used only in a scan
execution type program.
• When an initial execution type program Qn(H)
is used, this relay turns on at the END QnPH
processing of the scan execution type S (Every M9039 QnPRH
After RUN, OFF for
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
SM403 program in the first scan after the CPU END QnU
1 scan only module enters the RUN status. LCPU
processing)
ON
OFF
Initial 1 scan of scan
execution execution type
type program program
This relay turns off for one scan after the
New Q00J/Q00/Q01
CPU module enters the RUN status.
Low speed • This relay turns on for one scan after
execution type ON
1 scan the CPU module enters the RUN S (Every
Qn(H)
SM404 program ON for 1 OFF status. END New
QnPH
scan only after • This relay can be used only in a low- processing)
RUN speed execution type program.
Low speed • This relay turns off for one scan after
execution type ON the CPU module enters the RUN S (Every
1 scan Qn(H)
SM405 program OFF for 1 OFF status. END New
QnPH
scan only after • This relay can be used only in a low- processing)
RUN speed execution type program.
• This relay repeatedly turns on and off
0.005s
0.005s at 5-ms interval. Qn(H)
• This relay starts with off at power-on or QnPH
S (Status
SM409 0.01 second clock reset of the CPU module. (Note if the New QnPRH
change)
specified time has elapsed, on/off QnU
status will change even during program LCPU
execution.)
465
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
• This relay repeatedly turns on and off
SM410 0.1 second clock 0.05s at the specified interval. M9030
0.05s
• This relay starts with off at power-on or
S (Status QCPU
reset of the CPU module. (Note if the
0.1s change) LCPU
0.1s specified time has elapsed, on/off
SM411 0.2 second clock M9031
status will change even during program
execution.)
• This relay repeatedly turns on and off
SM412 1 second clock 0.5s
at the specified interval. M9032
0.5s
• This relay starts with off at power-on or
S (Status QCPU
reset of the CPU module. (Note if the
1s change) LCPU
1s specified time has elapsed, on/off
SM413 2 second clock M9033
status will change even during program
execution.)
• This relay repeatedly turns on and off
ns
ns at the interval specified in SD414 (unit:
second). (If the value of SD414 is
changed, the time that has passed
after the previous ON/OFF interval of
SM414 is counted as the next interval,
and the ON/OFF status is changed at
the next interval that is newly
specified.)
Example: When the value of SD414 is
changed from 3 to 10.
S (Status M9034 format QCPU
SM414 2n second clock The time that has passed after
the previous ON/OFF interval change) change LCPU
of SM414 is counted as the
next interval.
3 10
seconds ON seconds
SM414 OFF 3 10
seconds seconds
SD414 3 10
Change of the value
• This relay starts with off at power-on or
reset of the CPU module. (Note if the
specified time has elapsed, on/off
status will change even during program
execution.)
• This relay repeatedly turns on and off
n ms
n ms at the interval specified in SD415 (unit:
ms). (If the value of SD415 is changed,
the time that has passed after the
previous ON/OFF interval of SM415 is
Qn(H)
counted as the next interval, and the
QnPH
ON/OFF status is changed at the next S (Status
SM415 2n (ms) clock New QnPRH
interval that is newly specified. SM415 change)
QnU
operates in the same way as SM414.)
LCPU
• This relay starts with off at power-on or
reset of the CPU module. (Note if the
specified time has elapsed, on/off
status will change even during program
execution.)
466
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
User timing clock • This relay repeatedly turns on and off
SM420 n2 scan n2 scan M9020
No.0 at the specified scan intervals.
• This relay starts with off at power-on or
User timing clock
SM421 n1 scan
reset of the CPU module. (For the M9021
No.1
redundant CPU, however, this relay will
User timing clock become always off after system
SM422 M9022
No.2 switching.) QCPU
• The on/off scan intervals are set by the LCPU
User timing clock
SM423 M9023
No.3 DUTY instruction.
DUTY n1 n2 SM420
User timing clock
SM424 S (Every M9024
No.4 n1: On scan interval
n2: Off scan interval END
processing)
User timing clock
SM430
No.5
User timing clock
SM431
No.6
User timing clock For use with SM420 to SM424 low speed Qn(H)
SM432 New
No.7 programs QnPH
User timing clock
SM433
No.8
User timing clock
SM434
No.9
(4) Scan information
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
Low speed OFF: Completed or not This relay is on while a low-speed S (Every
Qn(H)
SM510 program execution executed execution type program is being END New
QnPH
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
flag ON: Being executed executed. processing)
When this relay is turned on, the service Qn(H)
Reads module OFF: Ignored
SM551 interval of the module specified by SD550 U New QnPH
service interval ON: Read
is read to SD551 and SD552. QnPRH
(5) I/O refresh
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
When this relay is turned on, I/O refresh
is performed after execution of the first
program, and then the next program is
Program to
OFF: Not refreshed executed. When a sequence program
SM580 program I/O U New Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
ON: Refreshed and a SFC program are to be executed,
refresh
the sequence program is executed, I/O
refresh is performed, and then the SFC
program is executed.
*1 Modules whose function version B or later
467
(6) Drive information
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
Qn(H)
QnPH
This relay turns on when the memory
QnPRH
card becomes ready for use.
QnU*1 (except
Memory card OFF: Unusable S (Status
SM600 New QnUDV)
usable flags ON: Usable change)
This relay turns on when the SD memory
card becomes ready for use. (This relay QnUDV
turns on when a compatible SD memory LCPU
card is inserted and set to be enabled.)
Qn(H)
This relay is on while the write-protect QnPH
Memory card OFF: Not protected S (Status
SM601 switch of the memory card or SD memory New QnPRH
protect flag ON: Protected change)
card is on. QnU*1
LCPU
This relay is on while a RAM is being Qn(H)
OFF: No drive 1 inserted. S (Status QnPH
SM602 Drive 1 flag New
ON: Drive 1 present This relay is always off when the change) QnPRH
QnUDVCPU is used. QnU*1
Qn(H)
QnPH
This relay is on while a ROM is being
QnPRH
inserted.
QnU*1 (except
OFF: No drive 2 S (Status QnUDV)
SM603 Drive 2 flag New
ON: Drive 2 present This relay is on while a SD memory card change)
is being inserted. (This relay is on while a
QnUDV
SD memory card is being inserted,
LCPU
regardless of the availability and the type
of the card.)
Qn(H)
QnPH
Memory card in- OFF: Not used This relay is on while a memory card or S (Status
SM604 New QnPRH
use flag ON: In use SD memory card is being used. change)
QnU*1
LCPU
Qn(H)
QnPH
This relay is turned on to disable the
U QnPRH
insertion and removal of a memory card.
QnU*1 (except
QnUDV)
• This relay is turned on to disable the
insertion and removal of an SD
memory card.
OFF: Remove/insert
Memory card • When this relay is turned on, the U/S QnUDV
enabled
SM605 remove/insert system turns on SM607 (SD memory New
ON: Remove/insert
prohibit flag card forced disable status flag), and
prohibited
then turns off this relay.
This relay is turned on to disable the
insertion and removal of a memory card.
(This relay turns on when a compatible
S (Status
SD memory card is inserted and set to be LCPU
change)
enabled with the SD memory card lock
switch. This relay does not turn on while
"ICM.OPE.ERROR" occurs.)
• This relay is turned on to execute the
SD memory card forced disable
OFF: SD memory card
instruction. When there are any
forced disable
SD memory card functions accessing to an SD memory
cancel instruction QnUDV
SM606 forced disable card, the process of disablement is U New
ON: SD memory card LCPU
instruction held until it is completed.
forced disable
• This relay is turned off to cancel the SD
instruction
memory card forced disable
instruction.
468
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
OFF: Not being • This relay turns on when an SD
disabled by the memory card is disabled by turning on
SD memory card SM606 (SD memory card forced
SD memory card forced disable disable instruction).
S (Status QnUDV
SM607 forced disable instruction • This relay turns off when the forced New
change) LCPU
status flag ON: Being disabled by disable status of SD memory card is
the SD memory canceled by turning off SM606 (SD
card forced memory card forced disable
disable instruction instruction).
• This relay is turned on to enable the
insertion and removal of a memory
OFF: Remove/insert Qn(H)
Memory card card.
prohibited QnPH
SM609 remove/insert • Turned OFF by the system after the S/U New
ON: Remove/insert QnPRH
enable flag memory card is removed.
enabled QnU*1
• This relay can be used while both
SM604 and SM605 are off.
Drives 3 and 4 OFF: Unusable QCPU
SM620 This relay is always on. S (Initial) New
usable flags ON: Usable LCPU
Drives 3 and 4 OFF: Not protected QCPU
SM621 This relay is always off. S (Initial) New
protection flag ON: Protected LCPU
Q00J/Q00/Q01
Qn(H)
OFF: No drive 3 QnPH
SM622 Drive 3 flag This relay is always on. S (Initial) New
ON: Drive 3 present QnPRH
QnU*2
LCPU
OFF: No drive 4 QCPU
SM623 Drive 4 flag This relay is always on. S (Initial) New
ON: Drive 4 present LCPU
Qn(H)
This relay is on while a file stored in the QnPH
Drive 3/4 in-use OFF: Not used S (Status
SM624 drive 3 (standard RAM) or the drive 4 New QnPRH
flag ON: In use change)
(standard ROM) is being used. QnU
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
LCPU
Extended SRAM
OFF: Not inserted This relay is on while an extended SRAM S (Status
SM626 cassette insertion New QnUDV
ON: Inserted cassette is inserted. change)
flag
Project data batch
OFF: Not completed This relay turns on upon completion of S (Status
SM634 save completion New LCPU*4
ON: Completed the batch save processing. change)
flag
Project data batch
OFF: Not completed This relay turns on upon completion of S (Status
SM636 load completion New LCPU*4
ON: Completed the batch load processing. change)
flag
ON: Batch delete
This relay is on while the directory batch
Directory batch being executed
SM638 delete processing is being executed, and S (Writing) New QnUDV
delete flag OFF: Batch delete not
turns off when the processing ends.
executed
Q00J/Q00/Q01
OFF: File register not Qn(H)
used This relay is on while a file register is S (Status QnPH
SM640 File register use New
ON: File register in being used. change) QnPRH
use QnU*2
LCPU
Qn(H)
OFF: File register not
QnPH
used This relay is on while a comment file is S (Status
SM650 Comment use New QnPRH
ON: File register in being used. change)
QnU
use
LCPU
469
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
OFF: Internal memory
• This relay is on during boot operation. Qn(H)
execution
• This relay turns off when the boot QnPH
ON: Boot operation in
specification switch is turned off. QnPRH
progress S (Status
SM660 Boot operation New
OFF: Program memory change)
Q00J/Q00/Q01
execution
This relay is on during boot operation. QnU*3
ON: Boot operation in
LCPU
progress
• This relay turns on when latch data
Latch data backup backup to the standard ROM is
OFF: Not completed S (Status QnU
SM671 to standard ROM completed. New
ON: Completed change) LCPU
completion flag • Time when the backup is completed is
stored in SD672 or later.
• This relay turns on when an area
OFF: Within access
Memory card file outside a file register range in a Qn(H)
range
SM672 register access memory card is accessed. (This relay S/U New QnPH
ON: Outside access
range flag is set at END processing.) QnPRH
range
• This relay is reset from a program.
• This relay turns on if latch data backup
Error completion of
OFF: No error to the standard ROM is not completed. QnU
SM675 latch data backup S New
ON: Error • This relay turns off when the backup is LCPU
to standard ROM
completed.
• When latch data are backed up while
this relay is on, the backup data will be
restored at every power-on of the CPU
Specification of
OFF: Not specified module. QnU
SM676 restoration U New
ON: Specified • The backup data will be restored at LCPU
repeated execution
every power-on until the latch data are
deleted or the latch data are backed up
again.
This relay turns on if a write error is
ON: Write error
Program memory detected during writing to the program QnU
SM680 OFF: Write not S (At write) New
write error memory (flash ROM). This relay turns off LCPU
executed/normal
when a write command is given.
ON: During writing This relay is on during writing to the
Program memory QnU
SM681 OFF: Write not program memory (flash ROM) and turns S (At write) New
writing flag LCPU
executed off when the writing is completed.
ON: Overwrite count is This relay turns on when overwrite count
Program memory
100,000 or more of the program memory (flash ROM) QnU
SM682 overwrite count S (At write) New
OFF: Overwrite count is reaches to 100,000. (It is necessary to LCPU
error flag
less than 100,000 change CPU module.)
This relay turns on if a write error is
ON: Write error
Standard ROM detected during writing to the standard QnU
SM685 OFF: Write not S (At write) New
write error ROM (flash ROM). This relay turns off LCPU
executed/normal
when a write command is given.
ON: During
This relay is on during writing to the
Standard ROM overwriting QnU
SM686 standard ROM (flash ROM) and turns off S (At write) New
writing flag OFF: Overwrite not LCPU
when the writing is completed.
executed
ON: Overwrite count is This relay turns on when overwrite count
Standard ROM
100,000 or more of the standard ROM (flash ROM) QnU
SM687 overwrite count S (At write) New
OFF: Overwrite count is reaches to 100,000. (The CPU module LCPU
error flag
less than 100,000 requires to be replaced.)
OFF: Backup start
preparation not
Backup start
completed Turns on when the backup preparation is S (Status QnU*1
SM691 preparation status New
ON: Backup start completed. change) LCPU
flag
preparation
completed
470
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
OFF: Restoration not
This relay turns on when restoration of
Restoration completed S (Status QnU*1
SM692 backup data in a memory card or SD New
complete flag ON: Restoration change) LCPU
memory card is completed.
completed
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later (except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU)
*2 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU
*3 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU
*4 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "14042" or later
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
471
(7) Instruction-related relay
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
S
OFF: Carry OFF QCPU
SM700 Carry flag Carry flag used in application instruction (Instruction M9012
ON: Carry ON LCPU
execution)
Qn(H)
OFF: Output until NULL
Number of output Used for the PR, PRC, BINDA, DBINDA, QnPH
code encountered
SM701 characters BINHA, DBINHA, BCDDA, DBCDDA, or U M9049 QnPRH
ON: 16 characters
selection COMRD instruction QnU
output
LCPU
• Designates method to be used by
OFF: Search next search instruction. QCPU
SM702 Search method U New
ON: 2-part search • Data must be arranged for 2-part LCPU
search.
The sort instruction is used to designate
OFF: Ascending order QCPU
SM703 Sort order whether data should be sorted in U New
ON: Descending order LCPU
ascending order or in descending order.
This relay turns on when all data
QCPU
conditions are met for the BKCMP
S LCPU
OFF: Mismatch found instruction.
SM704 Block comparison (Instruction New
ON: All match This relay turns on when all data execution) QnU*2
conditions are met for the DBKCMP
LCPU
instruction.
This relay turns on when the data to be
OFF: Improper data not compared by the DT or TM instruction
DT/TM instruction S
detected cannot be recognized as date or time QnU*2
SM709 improper data (Instruction New
ON: Improper data data, when the device (three words) to be LCPU
detection flag execution)/U
detected compared is exceeding the specified
device range.
• Remains as originally set when OFF. S Qn(H)
CHK instruction OFF: Conditions priority
SM710 • Priority for the CHK instruction is (Instruction New QnPH
priority ranking flag ON: Pattern priority
changed when on. execution) QnPRH
S
OFF: During DI This relay is on while the EI instruction is QCPU
SM715 EI flag (Instruction New
ON: During EI being executed. LCPU
execution)
This relay turns on when all data
conditions are met for the DBKCMP
Block comparison instruction. (Initial execution type S
OFF: Mismatch found QnU*2
SM716 (Except an program and scan execution type (Instruction New
ON: No mismatch LCPU
interrupt program) program or standby type program execution)
executed from initial execution type
program or scan execution type program)
This relay turns on when all data
conditions are met for the DBKCMP
S
Block comparison OFF: Mismatch found instruction. (Interrupt program, fixed scan QnU*2
SM717 (Instruction New
(Interrupt program) ON: No mismatch execution type program, or standby type LCPU
execution)
program executed from interrupt program
or fixed scan execution type program)
This relay turns on when all data
Block comparison conditions are met for the DBKCMP S
OFF: Mismatch found
SM718 (Interrupt program instruction. (Interrupt program (I45) or (Instruction New QnU*3
ON: No mismatch
(I45)) standby type program that was executed execution)
from interrupt program (I45))
OFF: BCD conversion
SMOV instruction This relay switches to on when disabling
enabled QnUDV*16
SM719 BCD conversion conversion from BIN data to BCD data U New
ON: BCD conversion LCPU*15
prohibit flag with the SMOV instruction.
disabled
472
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
This relay turns on only during first scan
Qn(H)
OFF: Comment read after the processing of the COMRD or
QnPH
Comment read not completed PRC instruction is completed. S (Status
SM720 New
completion flag ON: Comment read This relay turns on only during first scan change) QnPRH
completed after the processing of the COMRD QnU
instruction is completed. LCPU
This relay is on while a file is being
accessed by the SP.FWRITE, Qn(H)
SP.FREAD, COMRD, PRC, or LEDC QnPH
instruction.
This relay is on while a file is being
Qn(H)
accessed by the SP.FWRITE,
QnPH
SP.FREAD, COMRD, or LEDC
QnPRH
instruction.
This relay is on while a file is being
accessed by the SP.FWRITE,
QnU
SP.FREAD, COMRD, or SP.DEVST
instruction.
• This relay is on while a file is being
accessed by the SP.FWRITE,
SP.FREAD, COMRD, or SP.DEVST
instruction.
• This relay is on while the standard
QnUDV
ROM is being accessed.
• This relay is on while the
OFF: File not accessed S(P).SFCSCOMR or
File being S(P).SFCTCOMR instruction is being S (Status
SM721 ON: File being New
accessed executed. change)
accessed
• This relay is on while a file is being
accessed by the SP.FWRITE,
SP.FREAD, COMRD, or SP.DEVST
instruction.
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
• This relay is on while a SD memory
card or the standard ROM is being LCPU
accessed.
• This relay is on while the
S(P).SFCSCOMR or
S(P).SFCTCOMR instruction is being
executed.
This relay is on while an ATA card or the
QnU*4
standard ROM is being accessed.
This relay is on while the
S(P).SFCSCOMR or S(P).SFCTCOMR QnU*11
instruction is being executed.
This relay is on while the SP.FTPPUT or
SP.FTPGET instruction is being LCPU*17
executed.
OFF: Error detection
BIN/DBIN Turned ON when "OPERATION ERROR"
performed QCPU
SM722 instruction error is suppressed for BIN or DBIN U New
ON: Error detection LCPU
disabling flag instruction.
not performed
OFF: Not executed by • During OFF, XCALL instructions will
execution not be executed even if execution
XCALL instruction
condition risen condition is risen.
SM734 execution condition U New Qn(H)*4
ON: Executed by • During ON, XCALL instructions will be
designation
execution executed when execution condition is
condition risen risen.
473
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
Qn(H)*5
This relay turns on while a SFC step S
OFF: Instruction not QnPH*6
SFC comment comment readout instruction (Instruction
executed QnPRH*6
SM735 readout instruction (S(P).SFCSCOMR) or SFC transmission execution/Ev New
ON: Instruction being QnU*11
in execution flag condition comment readout instruction ery END
executed L06/L26/L26CPU-
(S(P).SFCTCOMR) is being executed. processing)
BT*14
OFF: Instruction not
S
MSG instruction executed This relay turns on when the MSG Qn(H)
SM738 (Instruction New
reception flag ON: Instruction instruction is executed. QnPRH
execution)
executed
This relay is on while a refresh device
writing/reading instruction S
Refresh device OFF: Instruction not
(S(P).REFDVWRB, S(P).REFDVWRW, (Instruction
write/read executed QnU*13
SM739 S(P).REFDVRDB, or S(P).REFDVRDW) execution/Ev New
instruction in ON: Instruction being LCPU*12
is being executed. This relay turns off ery END
execution flag executed
when the instruction is completed at END processing)
processing.
S
Display unit OFF: Unusable This relay is on while the display unit can
SM740 (Initial/Status New LCPU
availability flag ON: Usable be used.
change)
Scaling instruction
OFF: Search next Specify a search method for the scaling QnU*2
SM750 search method U New
ON: 2-part search instruction. LCPU
setting
Bit conversion OFF: 16-bit conversion Specify the bit conversion mode for the
mode for the CCD mode CCD and CRC instructions. Turn off to QnUDV*17
SM772 U New
and CRC ON: 8-bit conversion specify 16-bit conversion mode and turn LCPU*17
instructions mode on to specify 8-bit conversion mode.
Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
PID bumpless
Specify whether to match the set value Qn(H)
processing (for OFF: Matched
SM774 (SV) with the process value (PV) or not in U New QnPRH
complete ON: Not matched
manual mode. QnU
derivative)
LCPU
Select whether link refresh processing
OFF: Performs link
will be performed or not when only Q00J/Q00/Q01
refresh
communication with the CPU module is Qn(H)
ON: Performs no link
made at the execution of the COM QnPH
Selection of refresh refresh
instruction.
processing during
SM775 COM/CCOM OFF: Performs refresh U New Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
instruction processes other Select whether to perform refresh Qn(H)*7
execution than an I/O processes other than an I/O refresh set QnPH*4
refresh by SD778 when the COM or CCOM QnPRH
ON: Performs refresh instruction is executed. QnU
set by SD778 LCPU
Qn(H)
OFF: Local device
Enable/disable Set whether the local device of the QnPH
disabled
SM776 local device at subroutine program called at execution of U New QnPRH
ON: Local device
CALL the CALL instruction is valid or invalid. QnU*10
enabled
LCPU
Qn(H)
OFF: Local device
Enable/disable QnPH
disabled Set whether the local device at execution
SM777 local device in U New QnPRH
ON: Local device of the interrupt program is valid or invalid.
interrupt program QnU*10
enabled
LCPU
Q00J/Q00/Q01
PID bumpless *1
Specify whether to match the set value
processing(for OFF: Matched Qn(H)*8
SM794 (SV) with the process value (PV) or not in U New
incomplete ON: Not matched QnPRH
manual mode.
derivative) QnU
LCPU
474
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
This relay turns on when the number of
the remaining blocks in the dedicated
Block information
instruction transmission area used for the
using the multiple S
OFF: Block is secured multiple CPU high-speed transmission
CPU high-speed (Instruction
ON: Block set by dedicated instruction (target CPU= CPU
SM796 transmission execution/ New QnU*9
SD796 cannot be No.1) is less than the number of blocks
dedicated Every END
secured specified in SD796. This relay is on when
instruction (for processing)
an instruction is executed, and is off while
CPU No.1)
an END processing is being executed or
when free space is available in the area.
This relay turns on when the number of
the remaining blocks in the dedicated
Block information
instruction transmission area used for the
using the multiple S
OFF: Block is secured multiple CPU high-speed transmission
CPU high-speed (Instruction
ON: Block set by dedicated instruction (target CPU= CPU
SM797 transmission execution/ New QnU*9
SD797 cannot be No.2) is less than the number of blocks
dedicated Every END
secured specified in SD797. This relay is on when
instruction (for processing)
an instruction is executed, and is off while
CPU No.2)
an END processing is being executed or
when free space is available in the area.
This relay turns on when the number of
the remaining blocks in the dedicated
Block information
instruction transmission area used for the
using the multiple S
OFF: Block is secured multiple CPU high-speed transmission
CPU high-speed (Instruction
ON: Block set by dedicated instruction (target CPU= CPU
SM798 transmission execution/ New QnU*9
SD796 cannot be No.3) is less than the number of blocks
dedicated Every END
secured specified in SD798. This relay is on when
instruction (for processing)
an instruction is executed, and is off while
CPU No.3)
an END processing is being executed or
when free space is available in the area.
This relay turns on when the number of
the remaining blocks in the dedicated
Block information
instruction transmission area used for the
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
using the multiple S
OFF: Block is secured multiple CPU high-speed transmission
CPU high-speed (Instruction
ON: Block set by dedicated instruction (target CPU= CPU
SM799 transmission execution/ New QnU*9
SD799 cannot be No.) is less than the number of blocks
dedicated Every END
secured specified in SD799. This relay is on when
instruction (for processing)
an instruction is executed, and is off while
CPU No.4)
an END processing is being executed or
when free space is available in the area.
*1 Modules whose function version B or later
*2 The following modules support these areas:
• Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
*3 The following modules support this area:
• Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later
• Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
*4 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "07032" or later
*5 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "06082" or later
*6 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "07012" or later
*7 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "04012" or later
*8 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "05032" or later
*9 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU
*10 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU
*11 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "12052" or later
*12 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "14072" or later
*13 Following modules except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
• Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "14072" or later other than the High-speed Universal model
QCPU
• High-speed Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "16043" or later
*14 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "15102" or later
*15 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "16042" or later
*16 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "16043" or later
*17 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "16112" or later
475
(8) Debugging
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
Qn(H)
QnPH
OFF: Not ready Turns on when the trace preparation is S (Status
SM800 Trace preparation New QnPRH
ON: Ready completed. change)
QnU*1
LCPU
• When this relay is turned on while the
Qn(H)
CPU module is set to RUN, a trace will
QnPH
OFF: Suspend be started. S (Status
SM801 Trace start M9047 QnPRH
ON: Start • When this relay is turned off, a trace is change)/U
QnU*1
stopped. (The related special relays
LCPU
will all turn off)
Qn(H)
QnPH
Trace execution in OFF: Suspend This relay is on while a trace is being S (Status
SM802 M9046 QnPRH
progress ON: Start executed. change)
QnU*1
LCPU
Qn(H)
• This relay turns on when the specified
QnPH
trigger condition is met. S (Status
SM803 Trace trigger OFF ON:Start New QnPRH
• This relay is turned on to meet the change)/U
QnU*1
trigger condition.
LCPU
Qn(H)
QnPH
OFF: Not after trigger S (Status
SM804 After trace trigger Turns on after trace is triggered. New QnPRH
ON: After trigger change)
QnU*1
LCPU
Qn(H)
QnPH
OFF: Not completed This relay turns on when a trace is S (Status
SM805 Trace completed M9043 QnPRH
ON: Completed completed. change)
QnU*1
LCPU
Qn(H)
QnPH
OFF: Normal This relay turns on if an error occurs S (Status
SM826 Trace error New QnPRH
ON: Errors during trace. change)
QnU*1
LCPU
ON: Forced When this relay is turned on and a
registration sampling trace setting is registered using
Forced registration
enabled a programming tool, the sampling trace QnU*1
SM829 specification of U New
OFF: Forced setting can be registered with the CPU LCPU
trace setting
registration module even when the trigger condition
disabled has been met.
Real-time monitor ON : Being executed Turns on during real-time monitor in S (Status
SM830 New LCPU*2
in progress OFF : Not executed progress change)
This relay is on while the auto logging is
being executed.
This relay turns off when auto logging is
completed and the SD memory card lock QnUDV
switch is pressed and held for 1 second
or longer to stop access to the SD
OFF: Not executed memory card. S (Status
SM841 Auto logging New
ON: Being executed change)
This relay is on while auto logging is
being executed.
This relay turns off when auto logging is
LCPU
completed and the SD memory card lock
switch is slid toward the module top to
stop access to the SD memory card.
476
APPENDICES
*1 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU
*2 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "16072" or later
A
(9) Latch area
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
This relay turns on if an error occurs at
Backup error check OFF: No error the execution of backup of the CPU S (Status
SM916 New QnUDV*1
flag ON: Error module. This relay turns off at the start of change)
backup.
This relay turns on if an error occurs at
Restoration error OFF: No error the execution of restoration of the CPU S (Status
SM922 New QnUDV*1
check flag ON: Error module. This relay turns off at the start of change)
backup.
This relay specifies the operation of
backup when the number of backup data
reaches the upper limit. (Valid only when
bit5 of SD944 is on)
Upper limit setting
OFF: Backup continued OFF: After deleting the oldest date stamp
SM923 flag for the number U New QnUDV*3
ON: Backup stopped folder, the backup is continued.
of backup data
ON: The backup is not continued if the
upper limit of the number of backup data
is exceeded. (In this case, the backup is
completed with an error.)
This relay turns on when the retry of the
OFF: Retry not automatic backup is failed even after the
Automatic backup executed/Retry specified number of retries are S (Status
SM924 New QnUDV*3
retry failure flag being executed attempted, and turns off at the start of the change)
ON: Retry failed automatic backup. (This relay does not
turn off when SM1926 is on.)
This relay turns on if an error occurs
during the execution of data logging. This
relay turns off when the data logging is
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
Data logging error OFF: No error QnUDV*1
SM960 restarted by turning on SM1938 (Data S (Error) New
check flag ON: Error LCPU*2
logging restart flag at error stop) or is
started or stopped by using the CPU
Module Logging Configuration Tool.
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "17103" or later
*2 The LCPU, except the L02SCPU and L02SCPU-P, whose serial number (first five digits) is "17102" or later
*3 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "18052" or later
(10)Conversion from A series to Q or L series
The special relay (M9000 to M9255) for ACPU corresponds to the special relay (SM1000 to SM1255) for QCPU
or LCPU after the A to Q/L conversion. (Note that the Basic model QCPU and Redundant CPU do not support the
A to Q/L conversion.) All bits in this area of the special relay are turned on or off by system (cannot be turned on
or off by user using a program). To turn on or off the bit by user, correct the program using the special relay for
QCPU or LCPU. The special relay (M9084, M9200 to M9255), however, includes the areas that can be turned on
or off by user. For those areas, the bit can be turned on or off by user in the converted special relay (SM1084,
SM1200 to SM1255) as well. For details on the special relay for ACPU, refer to the following.
User's manual for the CPU module used
Type MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B Data Link System Reference Manual
477
To use the converted special relay in the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Universal model QCPU, or LCPU,
check "Use special relay/special register from SM/SD1000" under "A-PLC Compatibility Setting".
Project window [Parameter] [PLC Parameter] [PLC System]
Note that the processing time will increase when the converted special relay is used.
[How to read the Special Relay for Modification column]
• If the special relay number for QCPU or LCPU is provided, correct the program using it.
• means that the converted special relay can be used.
• means that the special relay cannot be used in QCPU or LCPU.
ACPU Special Special
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay after Name Meaning Details
CPU
Relay Conversion Modification
• This relay turns on if there is at least one
output module whose fuse has blown. Qn(H)
OFF: Normal QnPH
• This relay remains on even after the
M9000 SM1000 Fuse blown ON: Module with blown
system returns to normal. QnU*1
fuse
• Output modules on remote I/O stations LCPU*4
are also checked.
• This relay turns on if the status of the I/O
module differs from that registered at
power-on.
Qn(H)
• This relay remains on even after the
I/O module OFF: Normal QnPH
M9002 SM1002 system returns to normal.
verify error ON: Error QnU*1
• I/O modules on remote I/O stations are
LCPU
also checked.
• This relay is reset only when SD1116 to
SD1123 are reset.
• This relay turns on if a momentary power
failure within 20ms occurs during use of Qn(H)
an AC power supply module. QnPH
• This relay is reset when the CPU module QnU*1
is powered off and then on.
• This relay turns on if a momentary power
OFF: AC DOWN not failure within 10ms occurs when using an
AC DOWN
M9005 SM1005 detected AC power supply module. LCPU
detection
ON: AC DOWN detected • This relay is reset when the CPU module
is powered off and then on.
• This relay turns on if a momentary power
Qn(H)
failure within 10ms occurs during use of
QnPH
a DC power supply module.
QnU*1
• This relay is reset when the CPU module
LCPU
is powered off and then on.
• This relay turns on when the battery Qn(H)
OFF: Normal voltage drops to or below the specified. QnPH
M9006 SM1006 Battery low
ON: Battery low • It turns off when the battery voltage QnU*1
returns to normal. LCPU
• This relay turns on when the battery Qn(H)
OFF: Normal voltage drops to or below the specified. QnPH
M9007 SM1007 Battery low latch
ON: Battery low • This relay remains on even after the QnU*1
battery voltage returns to normal. LCPU
Qn(H)
Self-diagnostic OFF: No error This relay turns on if an error is detected by QnPH
M9008 SM1008 SM1
error ON: Error self-diagnostics. QnU*1
LCPU
• This relay turns on when the OUT F or Qn(H)
OFF: No F number
Annunciator SET F instruction is executed. QnPH
M9009 SM1009 SM62 detected
detection • It turns off when the SD1124 value is QnU*1
ON: F number detected
cleared to zero. LCPU
478
APPENDICES
ACPU Special Special
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay after Name Meaning Details
Relay Conversion Modification
CPU
A
• This relay turns on when an operation
error occurs during execution of an Qn(H)
Operation error OFF: No error
M9011 SM1011 SM56 application instruction. QnPH
flag ON: Error
• This relay remains on even after the QnU*1
system returns to normal.
OFF: Carry OFF Qn(H)
M9012 SM1012 SM700 Carry flag Carry flag used in application instruction
ON: Carry ON QnPH
When SM1016 turns on and remote RUN
mode is activated from a computer, all the
Data memory OFF: Ignored Qn(H)
M9016 SM1016 data memory including the latch range
clear flag ON: Output cleared QnPH
(except for the special relay and special
register) is cleared.
When SM1017 turns on and remote RUN
mode is activated from a computer, all the
Data memory OFF: Ignored Qn(H)
M9017 SM1017 data memory that is not latched (except for
clear flag ON: Output cleared QnPH
the special relay and special register) is
cleared.
User timing • This relay repeatedly turns on and off at
M9020 SM1020 n2 scan n2 scan
clock No.0 the specified scan intervals.
• When the CPU module is powered on or
User timing
M9021 SM1021 n1 scan
reset, this relay is set to on from off to
clock No.1
start the clock. Set the intervals of on/off
User timing by DUTY instruction.
M9022 SM1022
clock No.2
User timing DUTY n1 n2 SM1020
M9023 SM1023
clock No.3 n1: On scan interval Qn(H)
n2: Off scan interval QnPH
QnU*1
• When SM1020 to SM1024 are specified LCPU
for the DUTY instruction in programs, if
the CPU type is changed from the High
User timing
M9024 SM1024 Performance model QCPU or Process
clock No.4
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
CPU to the Universal model QCPU or
LCPU, they are replaced with SM420 to
SM424. (For the Universal model QCPU
and LCPU, SM1020 to SM1024 cannot
be specified.)
Clock data stored in SD1025 to SD1028 Qn(H)
Clock data set OFF: Ignored are written to the CPU module after the QnPH
M9025 SM1025
request ON: Set request END instruction execution in the scan QnU*1
where SM1025 is turned on. LCPU
Qn(H)
This relay turns on if an error occurs in the
OFF: No error QnPH
M9026 SM1026 Clock data error clock data (SD1025 to SD1028), and is off
ON: Error QnU*1
while there is no error.
LCPU
Qn(H)
This relay is turned on to read clock data
Clock data read OFF: Ignored QnPH
M9028 SM1028 and store them as BCD values into
request ON: Read request QnU*1
SD1025 to SD1028.
LCPU
• When this relay is turned on in the
program, all the data communication
requests accepted during one scan are
processed in the END processing of that
Batch
OFF: Batch processing scan.
processing of
not conducted • The batch processing of data Qn(H)
M9029 SM1029 data
ON: Batch processing communication requests can be turned QnPH
communications
conducted on or off during running.
requests
• The default is OFF (processed one at a
time for each END processing in the
order in which data communication
requests are accepted).
479
ACPU Special Special
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay after Name Meaning Details
CPU
Relay Conversion Modification
0.1 second
M9030 SM1030 0.05s
clock 0.05s
• 0.1-, 0.2-, 1-, and 2-second clocks are
generated.
0.2 second
M9031 SM1031 0.1s • The relay turns on or off not for each Qn(H)
clock 0.1s
scan, but also during a scan if the time QnPH
has elapsed. QnU*1
M9032 SM1032 1 second clock 0.5s • When the CPU module is powered on or LCPU
0.5s
reset, this relay is set to on from off to
start the clock.
M9033 SM1033 2 second clock 1s
1s
• This relay repeatedly turns on and off
ns according to the number of seconds
ns
specified in SD414. (Default: n = 30) (If
the value of SD414 is changed, the time
that has passed after the previous
ON/OFF interval of SM1034 is counted
as the next interval, and the ON/OFF
status is changed at the next interval that
is newly specified.)
Example: When the value of SD414 is
changed from 3 to 10.
Qn(H)
2n minute
The time that has passed after QnPH
M9034 SM1034 clock(1 minute the previous ON/OFF interval
of SM1034 is counted as the QnU*1
clock)*2 next interval.
3
seconds ON
10 LCPU
seconds
SM1034 OFF 3 10
seconds seconds
SD414 3 10
Change of the value
• The relay turns on or off not for each
scan, but also during a scan if the time
has elapsed.
• When the CPU module is powered on or
reset, this relay is set to on from off to
start the clock.
M9036 SM1036 Always ON ON • This relay is used for initialization or as a
OFF dummy contact of application
instructions in the program.
• SM1036 and SM1037 are turned on or
M9037 SM1037 Always OFF ON Qn(H)
off regardless of the switch setting on the
OFF QnPH
front face of the CPU module. The states
of SM1038 and SM1039 change QnU*1
ON for 1 scan ON depending on the switch setting. When it LCPU
M9038 SM1038 1 scan
only after RUN OFF is set to STOP, the relay is off. When it is
set to other than STOP, SM1038 is on for
RUN flag(After one scan only and SM1039 is off for one
M9039 SM1039 RUN, OFF for 1 ON
1 scan scan only.
scan only) OFF
PAUSE enable OFF: PAUSE disabled Qn(H)
M9040 SM1040 SM206
coil ON: PAUSE enabled QnPH
This relay is on when the CPU module is in
Qn(H)
PAUSE status or when the PAUSE contact
PAUSE status OFF: PAUSE not in effect QnPH
M9041 SM1041 SM204 is on.
contact ON: PAUSE in effect QnU*1
LCPU
Qn(H)
STOP status OFF: STOP not in effect This relay turns on when the RUN/STOP QnPH
M9042 SM1042 SM203
contact ON: STOP in effect switch is set to STOP. QnU*1
LCPU
480
APPENDICES
ACPU Special Special
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay after Name Meaning Details
Relay Conversion Modification
CPU
A
This relay turns on after execution of the
OFF: Sampling trace in Qn(H)
TRACE instruction and upon completion of
Sampling trace progress QnPH
M9043 SM1043 SM805 sampling trace performed the number of
completed ON: Sampling trace QnU*1
times preset by the parameter. Reset when
completed LCPU
TRACER instruction is executed.
If SM1045 is turned on, the watchdog timer
is reset when the ZCOM instruction and
Watchdog timer OFF: Does not reset WDT Qn(H)
M9045 SM1045 batch processing of data communication
(WDT) reset ON: Resets WDT QnPH
requests are executed. (Use this when
scan time exceeds 200ms.)
Qn(H)
OFF: Trace not in
This relay is on during execution of QnPH
M9046 SM1046 SM802 Sampling trace progress
sampling trace. QnU*1
ON: Trace in progress
LCPU
OFF: Sampling trace
Sampling trace is not executed unless
Sampling trace suspended Qn(H)
M9047 SM1047 SM801 SM1047 is turned ON. Sampling trace is
preparations ON: Sampling trace QnPH
cancelled when SM1047 turns off.
started
Number of • When SM1049 is off, characters up to
OFF: Output until NULL
output NULL (00H) code are output. Qn(H)
M9049 SM1049 SM701 code encountered
characters • When SM1049 is ON, ASCII codes of 16 QnPH
ON: 16 characters output
selection characters are output.
• Switched ON to disable the CHG
CHG instruction instruction.
OFF: Enabled Qn(H)
M9051 SM1051 execution • Turn this on when requesting program
ON: Disable QnPH
disable transfer. It is automatically turned off
upon completion of the transfer.
When SM1052 is on, the SEG instruction is
OFF: 7-SEG segment
SEG instruction used as an I/O part refresh instruction. Qn(H)
M9052 SM1052 display
switch When SM1052 is off, the SEG instruction is QnPH
ON: I/O partial refresh
used as a 7-SEG display instruction.
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
OFF: Other than when P, I
Main side P, I set being requested While a program is running, upon
M9056 SM1056
set request ON: P, I set being completion of transfer of another program
requested (for example, a subprogram when the main Qn(H)
OFF: Other than when P, I program is running), a P and I set request QnPH
Sub side P, I set set being requested is turned on. This relay automatically turns
M9057 SM1057 off upon completion of P and I setting.
request ON: P, I set being
requested
Main side P, I Momentarily ON at P, I set
M9058 SM1058 This relay turns on for a moment upon
set completion completion Qn(H)
completion of P and I setting, and
Sub program P, I Momentarily ON at P, I set QnPH
M9059 SM1059 immediately turns off.
set completion completion
OFF: Other than when P, I
Sub program 2 set being requested While a program is running, upon
M9060 SM1060
P, I set request ON: P, I set being completion of transfer of another program
requested (for example, a subprogram when the main Qn(H)
OFF: Other than when P, I program is running), a P and I set request QnPH
Sub program 3 set being requested is turned on. This relay automatically turns
M9061 SM1061 off upon completion of P and I setting.
P, I set request ON: P, I set being
requested
OFF: Read time not When this is turned on, the search time in
A8UPU/A8PUJ
shortened the A8UPU/A8PUJ can be shortened. (In Qn(H)
M9070 SM1070 required search
*3
ON: Read time this case, the scan time is extended by QnPH
time
shortened 10%.)
This relay sets whether or not to check the
following errors at the time of the END
OFF: Error check instruction processing (for setting of the
Qn(H)
M9084 SM1084 Error check executed END instruction processing time).
QnPH
ON: No error check • Check for fuse blown
• Check of battery
• Collation check of I/O module
481
ACPU Special Special
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay after Name Meaning Details
CPU
Relay Conversion Modification
• This relay turns on when the detail factor
of the operation error is stored into
Operation error OFF: No error Qn(H)
M9091 SM1091 SD1091.
details flag ON: Error QnPH
• This relay remains on even after the
condition returns to normal.
OFF: SFC program
Presence/absen This relay is on when an SFC program has
absent Qn(H)
M9100 SM1100 SM320 ce of SFC been registered, and is off when no
ON: SFC program QnPH
program program is registered.
present
• The same value as in SM1100 is set as
the initial value. (This relay turns on
when an SFC program is registered.)
Start/stop SFC OFF: SFC programs stop Qn(H)
M9101 SM1101 SM321 • This relay is turned off to stop SFC
program ON: SFC programs start QnPH
program execution.
• This relay is turned on to resume the
SFC program execution.
In the SFC tab of "PLC parameter", "Initial
SFC program OFF: Initial start start" is set for "SFC program start mode". Qn(H)
M9102 SM1102 SM322
start status ON: Resume start • At initial start:OFF QnPH
• At continued start:ON
OFF: Continuous
Set whether to enable or disable
Presence/absen transition not
continuous transition for the blocks where Qn(H)
M9103 SM1103 SM323 ce of continuous effective
"continuous transition bit" of the SFC QnPH
transition ON: Continuous
information device is not set.
transition effective
• This relay is off while the module is in the
continuous transition mode or during
Continuous OFF: When transition is continuous transition, and is on when
Qn(H)
M9104 SM1104 SM324 transition executed continuous transition is not executed.
QnPH
prevention flag ON: When no transition • This relay is always on while the CPU
module is operating not in the continuous
transition mode.
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9108 SM1108 SM90
start (equivalent
of SD90)
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9109 SM1109 SM91
start (equivalent
of SD91)
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9110 SM1110 SM92
start (equivalent
of SD92)
Step transition OFF: Monitoring timer The relay turns on when measurement by
monitoring timer reset the step transition monitoring timer is Qn(H)
M9111 SM1111 SM93
start (equivalent ON: Monitoring timer started. The step transition monitoring timer QnPH
of SD93) reset start is reset when the relay turns off.
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9112 SM1112 SM94
start (equivalent
of SD94)
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9113 SM1113 SM95
start (equivalent
of SD95)
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9114 SM1114 SM96
start (equivalent
of SD96)
482
APPENDICES
ACPU Special Special
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay after Name Meaning Details
Relay Conversion Modification
CPU
A
Selects the operation output when block
stop is executed.
• On: Retains the on or off status of the coil
used in the operation output of the step,
Operation
OFF: Coil output OFF which was being executed at the time of Qn(H)
M9196 SM1196 SM325 output at block
ON: Coil output ON block stop. QnPH
stop
• Off: Turns off all the coil outputs.
(Operation output by the SET instruction
is retained regardless of the on/off status
of SM1196.)
M9197 SM1197
Switches I/O numbers between the fuse-
Switch between I/O numbers
SM1197 SM1198 to be displayed blown module registers (SD1100 to
blown fuse and
OFF OFF X/Y0 to 7F0 SD1107) and I/O module verify error Qn(H)
I/O module
M9198 SM1198 ON OFF X/Y800 to FF0 registers (SD1116 to SD1123) according to QnPH
verification error
OFF ON X/Y1000 to 17F0 the on/off combination of SM1197 and
display
ON ON X/Y1800 to 1FF0 SM1198.
• Recovers the setting data stored in the
CPU module at restart when sampling
Data recovery of OFF: Data recovery
trace/status latch is executed.
online sampling disabled Qn(H)
M9199 SM1199 • Turn this on to re-execute the sampling
trace/status ON: Data recovery QnPH
trace or status latch. (Rewriting data
latch enabled
using the programming tool is not
required.)
*1 The following modules support these areas:
• Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
*2 The name, 1 minute clock, is for the special relay (M9034) of the ACPU.
*3 The QCPU and LCPU do not support the use of the A8UPU/A8PUJ.
*4 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "16112" or later
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
483
(11)Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, built-in Ethernet port LCPU, and built-in Ethernet
function
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
MELSOFT This relay turns on when the network
connection number and station number of built-in
extended setting OFF: Invalid Ethernet port set in the MELSOFT
SM1258 S (Initial) New QnUDV*5
network number, ON: Valid connection extended setting. (Only when
station number the MELSOFT connection extended setting
enable flag is set to "Use".)
OFF: No time setting
This relay is turned on to perform the time
function (SNTP
Time setting setting function (SNTP client). (Turns on
client) execution QnU*1
SM1270 function (SNTP only when "Use" has been set for the time U New
ON: Time setting LCPU*1
client) execution setting function in the time setting
function (SNTP
parameter.)
client) execution
Remote This relay is turned on to clear the
password OFF: Normal accumulated number of mismatched QnU*1
SM1273 U New
mismatch count ON: Clear remote password entries (SD979 to LCPU*1
clear SD999).
The IP address setting stored in SD1292 to
SD1297 are written to the IP address
IP address
storage area (flash ROM) of the CPU QnU*2
SM1292 storage area OFF ON:Write request U New
module when the END instruction is LCPU*3
write request
executed in the scan where this relay is
turned on.
• This relay turns on when writing to the IP
address storage area (flash ROM) is
IP address
OFF: Not completed completed. S (Status QnU*2
SM1293 storage area New
ON: Completed • This relay turns off when the END change) LCPU*3
write completion
instruction is executed in the scan where
SM1292 is turned off.
• This relay turns on when writing to the IP
IP address address storage area (flash ROM) fails.
OFF: Normal S (Status QnU*2
SM1294 storage area • This relay turns off when the END New
ON: Errors change) LCPU*3
write error instruction is executed in the scan where
SM1292 is turned off.
The IP address storage area (flash ROM)
IP address
is cleared when the END instruction is QnU*2
SM1295 storage area OFF ON:Clear request U New
executed in the scan where this relay is LCPU*3
clear request
turned on.
• This relay turns on when clearing the IP
address storage area (flash ROM) is
IP address
OFF: Not completed completed. S (Status QnU*2
SM1296 storage area New
ON: Completed • This relay turns off when the END change) LCPU*3
clear completion
instruction is executed in the scan where
SM1295 is turned off.
• This relay turns on when clearing the IP
IP address address storage area (flash ROM) fails.
OFF: Normal S (Status QnU*2
SM1297 storage area • This relay turns off when the END New
ON: Errors change) LCPU*3
clear error instruction is executed in the scan where
SM1295 is turned off.
This relay turns on when the connection S (Status
OFF: Not connected
FTP client with the FTP server is established. This change,
SM1298 (Disconnected) New LCPU*4
connection status relay turns off when the connection with the END
ON: Connected
FTP server is cut off. processing)
*1 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU and Built-in Ethernet port LCPU
*2 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "11082" or later
*3 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "15102" or later
*4 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "16112" or later
*5 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "17052" or later
484
APPENDICES
(12)Predefined protocol function A
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
Predefined
The protocol setting file is checked when
protocol ready
OFF: Not ready the CPU module is powered on or reset, or S (Status
SM1332 (for built- New LCPU*1
ON: Ready the check is requested. This relay turns on change)
in/adapter serial
when the file is normal.
communications)
Predefined
protocol setting The protocol setting file is checked when
check request OFF: Not requested this relay turns on. S (Status
SM1333 New LCPU*1
(for built- ON: Requested The relay turns off when the check is change)/U
in/adapter serial completed.
communications)
RS-422/485 echo When the RS-422/485 adapter is used,
back whether to receive an echo back of the
specification (for OFF: Enabled data that has been sent can be specified.
SM1334 U New LCPU*1
built-in/adapter ON: Disabled Echo back data are received when this
serial relay is off, and are not received
communications) (discarded) when this relay is on.
Predefined
The protocol setting file is checked when
protocol ready
OFF: Not ready the CPU module is powered on or reset, or S (Status QnUDV*2
SM1354 (for built-in New
ON: Ready the check is requested. This relay turns on change) LCPU*1
Ethernet
when the file is normal.
communications)
Predefined
protocol setting The protocol setting file is checked when
check request OFF: Not requested this relay turns on. S (Status QnUDV*2
SM1355 New
(for built-in ON: Requested The relay turns off when the check is change)/U LCPU*1
Ethernet completed.
communications)
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
*1 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "15102" or later
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "15103" or later
485
(13)iQ Sensor Solution
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
Backup/restoration is enabled when this
iQ Sensor relay turns on.
Solution (Enabled only when SD1446 = 3H
S (Status QnUDV*1
SM1435 backup/restoratio OFF ON:Enabled (completed), 11H (suspend (no error)), FEH New
change)/U LCPU*2
n execution (suspend (error)), FFH (error)).
enable • This relay turns off when
backup/restoration can be executed.
Backup is executed for the target model set
when this relay turns on. (Enabled only
iQ Sensor
OFF ON:Backup when SD1446 = 1H (in preparation)) S (Status QnUDV*1
SM1436 Solution backup New
request • This relay turns off when the use change)/U LCPU*2
request
authority is reserved or when
backup/restoration can be executed.
iQ Sensor OFF: Backup not This relay turns on when backup is
Solution backup completed completed normally. S (Status QnUDV*1
SM1437 New
normal ON: Backup normally • This relay turns off when the use change) LCPU*2
completion completed authority is reserved.
This relay turns on when backup is
OFF: Backup not completed with an error.
iQ Sensor
completed • This relay turns off when the use S (Status QnUDV*1
SM1438 Solution backup New
ON: Backup completed authority is reserved. change) LCPU*2
error completion
with an error The error code is stored into SD1452 or
SD1453.
Restoration is executed for the target
iQ Sensor model set when this relay turns on.
Solution OFF ON:Restoration (Enabled only when SD1446 = 1H (in S (Status QnUDV*1
SM1439 New
restoration request preparation)) change)/U LCPU*2
request • This relay turns off when the use
authority is reserved.
iQ Sensor
OFF: Restoration not This relay turns on when restoration is
Solution
completed completed normally. S (Status QnUDV*1
SM1440 restoration New
ON: Restored normally • This relay turns off when the use change) LCPU*2
normal
completed authority is reserved.
completion
This relay turns on when restoration is
OFF: Restoration not
iQ Sensor completed with an error.
completed
Solution • This relay turns off when the use S (Status QnUDV*1
SM1441 ON: Restoration New
restoration error authority is reserved. change) LCPU*2
completed with an
completion The error code is stored into SD1452 or
error
SD1453.
Backup/restoration is suspended when this
iQ Sensor
relay turns on. (Enabled only for
Solution OFF ON:
SD1446=2H (execution)) S (Status QnUDV*1
SM1442 backup/restoratio Backup/Restoratio New
• This relay turns off when the use change) LCPU*2
n suspend n suspend request
authority is reserved or when
request
backup/restoration can be executed.
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "17012" or later
*2 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "14112" or later
486
APPENDICES
(14)Process control instruction A
Correspondi
Set by (When Correspondi
Number Name Meaning Explanation ng ACPU
Set) ng CPU
M9
Specifies whether or not to hold the
SM1500 output value when a range over occurs
OFF: No-hold for the S.IN instruction range check. QnPH
Hold mode U New
ON: Hold Specifies whether or not the output value QnPRH
SM1501 is held when a range over occurs for the
S.OUT instruction range check.
(15)Redundant system (host system CPU information*1)
The special relay (SM1510 to SM1599) is valid only for redundant systems. All bits are set to off for stand-alone
systems.
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
OFF: Redundant
system backup
mode, stand- S (Every
This relay is on while the system is operating
SM1510 Operation mode alone system END New QnPRH
in the separate mode.
ON: Redundant processing)
system separate
mode
System A • Distinguishes between system A and system B.
SM1511
identification flag • The flag status does not change even if the tracking cable is
disconnected.
S (Initial) New QnPRH
System B If TRK. CABLE ERR.
System A System B
SM1512 (error code: 6210) occurred (Unknown)
identification flag
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
SM1511 ON OFF OFF
SM1512 OFF ON OFF
OFF: Not in debug
Debug mode This relay is on while the system is operating
SM1513 mode S (Initial) New QnPRH
status flag in the debug mode.
ON: Debug mode
Control system • Indicates operation system status.
SM1515
judgment flag • The flag status does not change even if the tracking cable is
disconnected.
S (Status
New QnPRH
Standby system Control Standby If TRK. CABLE ERR. change)
SM1516 system system (error code: 6210) occurred (Unknown)
judgment flag
SM1515 ON OFF OFF
SM1516 OFF ON OFF
Turns on when the CPU module is started up
OFF: Power supply on by the system switching (switching from the
CPU module startup standby system to the control system). S (Status
SM1517 New QnPRH
startup status ON: Operation system Remains OFF when the standby system is change)
switch start up switched to the control system by a power-
ON startup.
• This relay turns on during one scan after
Standby system
ON 1 scan the standby system was switched to the S (Every
to control system
SM1518 OFF control system. END New QnPRH
switching status
• This relay can be used only in a scan processing)
flag
execution type program.
When the previous control system is System
Previous Control
ON 1 scan B, this relay turns on during one scan in S (Every
System
SM1519 OFF System A, following the RUN state after both END New QnPRH
Identification
Systems A and B were simultaneously turned processing)
Flag
on or were reset.
487
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
SM1520 SM1520 Block 1
SM1521 SM1521 Block 2
SM1522 SM1522 Block 3
SM1523 SM1523 Block 4
SM1524 SM1524 Block 5
SM1525 SM1525 Block 6
SM1526 SM1526 Block 7
SM1527 SM1527 Block 8
SM1528 SM1528 Block 9
SM1529 SM1529 Block 10
SM1530 SM1530 Block 11
SM1531 SM1531 Block 12
SM1532 SM1532 Block 13 • When data is
SM1533 SM1533 Block 14 transferred based
on the tracking
SM1534 SM1534 Block 15
setting of the
SM1535 SM1535 Block 16 Redundant
SM1536 SM1536 Block 17 parameter window,
the target block is
SM1537 SM1537 Block 18
specified as
SM1538 SM1538 Block 19 trigger.
SM1539 SM1539 Block 20 • When "Do auto
forward Tracking
SM1540 Data tracking SM1540 Block 21 block No.1" is
OFF: No trigger
SM1541 transfer trigger SM1541 Block 22 selected for the S (Initial)/U New QnPRH
ON: Trigger
specification tracking setting,
SM1542 SM1542 Block 23
SM1520 is turned
SM1543 SM1543 Block 24 on by the system
SM1544 SM1544 Block 25 at power-on or
when the system
SM1545 SM1545 Block 26
is switched from
SM1546 SM1546 Block 27 STOP to RUN. In
SM1547 SM1547 Block 28 other cases,
SM1520 to
SM1548 SM1548 Block 29
SM1583 are
SM1549 SM1549 Block 30 turned on by the
SM1550 SM1550 Block 31 user.
SM1551 SM1551 Block 32
SM1552 SM1552 Block 33
SM1553 SM1553 Block 34
SM1554 SM1554 Block 35
SM1555 SM1555 Block 36
SM1556 SM1556 Block 37
SM1557 SM1557 Block 38
SM1558 SM1558 Block 39
SM1559 SM1559 Block 40
SM1560 SM1560 Block 41
SM1561 SM1561 Block 42
SM1562 SM1562 Block 43
488
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
SM1563 SM1563 Block 44
SM1564 SM1564 Block 45 • When data is
SM1565 SM1565 Block 46 transferred based
on the tracking
SM1566 SM1566 Block 47
setting of the
SM1567 SM1567 Block 48 Redundant
SM1568 SM1568 Block 49 parameter window,
the target block is
SM1569 SM1569 Block 50
specified as
SM1570 SM1570 Block 51 trigger.
SM1571 SM1571 Block 52 • When "Do auto
forward Tracking
SM1572 Data tracking SM1572 Block 53 block No.1" is
OFF: No trigger
SM1573 transfer trigger SM1573 Block 54 selected for the S (Initial)/U New QnPRH
ON: Trigger
specification tracking setting,
SM1574 SM1574 Block 55
SM1520 is turned
SM1575 SM1575 Block 56 on by the system
SM1576 SM1576 Block 57 at power-on or
when the system
SM1577 SM1577 Block 58
is switched from
SM1578 SM1578 Block 59 STOP to RUN. In
SM1579 SM1579 Block 60 other cases,
SM1520 to
SM1580 SM1580 Block 61
SM1583 are
SM1581 SM1581 Block 62 turned on by the
SM1582 SM1582 Block 63 user.
SM1583 SM1583 Block 64
OFF: System switching
Turns on when a system switching request is
System switching request issuing
issued from the network module. The module S (Every
enable/disable module absent
SM1590 that issued the request can be checked in END New QnPRH
flag from network ON: System switching
SD1590. processing)
module request issuing
Turns off when all bits of SD1590 are off.
module present
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
This flag is used when switching the system
ON: Error is not
in any of the following sources to determine
detected by new
whether to detect "STANDBY" (error code
standby system
Standby system 6210) in the new standby system:
at system
error detection [Reason(s) for system switching]
SM1591 switching U New QnPRH
disable flag at • System switching with a programming tool
OFF: Error is detected
system switching • System switching using dedicated
by new standby
instruction
system at system
• System switching by the intelligent function
switching
module
OFF: Disable user
Enable/disable This relay stores whether to enable manual
system switching
SM1592 user system switching using a programming tool or the U New QnPRH
ON: Enable user
switching system switching instruction (SP.CONTSW).
system switching
This relay sets the behavior of the system
after the standby CPU in the separate mode
Setting to access accessed the buffer memory of an intelligent
extension base OFF: Error function module mounted on an extension
SM1593 U New QnPRH
unit of standby ON: Ignored base unit.
system CPU • OFF: "OPERATION ERROR" (error code:
4112) is returned.
• ON: No processing
When SM1595 is turned on from off, memory
copying from the control system to the
OFF: Start memory
Memory copy to standby system starts. Note that memory
copy
SM1595 other system copy does not start even after SM1595 was U New QnPRH
ON: No memory copy
start flag turned on from off if the I/O No. of the copy
initiated
destination (standby system CPU module:
3D1H) is not stored in SD1595.
489
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
OFF: Memory copy not • This relay is on during memory copy from
Memory copy to
executed the control system to the standby system. S (Starting to
SM1596 other system New QnPRH
ON: Memory copy • This relay turns off when memory copy is copy/finish)
status flag
executed complete.
OFF: Memory copy not
Memory copy to • This relay turns upon completion of
completed
SM1597 other system memory copy from the control system to S (finish)/U New QnPRH
ON: Memory copy
completion flag the standby system.
completed
Copy contents of OFF: Copy standard
• If set to on by user, the standard ROM data
standard ROM ROM data
SM1598 is not copied to the other system while U New QnPRH
during memory ON: Standard ROM
memory copy is executing.
copy data is not copied
*1 The information of the host CPU module is stored.
490
APPENDICES
(16)Redundant system (other system CPU information*1) A
The special relay (SM1600 to SM1649) is valid when the redundant system is in backup mode and is invalid in
separate mode. All bits are set to off for stand-alone systems.
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation Host
(When Set) *2
CPU
SM
• This relay turns on if an error is detected
by error check for redundant system. (This
S (Every
Other system OFF: No error relay turns on when any of the SD1600 bits
SM1600 END QnPRH
error flag ON: Error turns on.)
processing)
• This relay turns off when an error is
cleared.
• This relay turns on if a diagnostic error
occurs in the CPU module in the other
system. (Also turns off when an S (Every
Other system OFF: No error
SM1610 annunciator turns on and when an error is END SM0 QnPRH
diagnostics error ON: Error
detected by the CHK instruction.) processing)
• The SM0 status for the CPU module in the
other system is reflected.
• This relay turns on if a self-diagnostics
error occurred in the CPU module in the
Other systems S (Every
OFF: No error other system. (Excluding error detection by
SM1611 self diagnostics END SM1 QnPRH
ON: Error an annunciator and the CHK instruction.)
error. processing)
• The SM1 status for the CPU module in the
other system is reflected.
OFF: No common error • This relay turns on when there is error
information common information data for an error
Other system S (Every
present occurred in the CPU module in the other
SM1615 common error END SM5 QnPRH
ON: Common error system.
information processing)
information • The SM5 status for the CPU module in the
present other system is reflected.
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
OFF: No individual
• This relay turns on when there is error
error information
Error individual individual information for an error occurred S (Every
present
SM1626 information for in the CPU module in the other system. END SM16 QnPRH
ON: Individual error
other systems • The SM16 status for the CPU module in processing)
information
the other system is reflected.
present
This relay is turned on from off to clear a
OFF ON:Cancels
Standby system continuation error occurred in the standby
SM1649 error of standby U QnPRH
cancel error flag system. Use SD1649 to specify the error
system
code of the error to be canceled.
*1 Diagnostic information of the CPU module in the other system is stored.
*2 Special relay areas (SM) for the CPU module in the host system
491
(17)E-mail send/receive function
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
• This relay turns on while the MC protocol
command is being processed.
MC protocol OFF: Not being • If the received mail is an MC protocol
S (Status
SM1659 command being processed command mail, the relay turns off during New LCPU*1
change)
processed flag ON: Being processed the END processing of the scan where the
command is processed and the return mail
is sent.
• This relay turns on when an MC protocol
command error is detected. The relay also
MC protocol Turns on when an MC
turns on when execution of MC protocol
SM1660 command error protocol command error S (Error) New LCPU*1
command is disabled in parameter.
flag is detected.
• The relay turns off upon execution of the e-
mail receive instruction.
• This relay turns on when the e-mail
E-mail address address backup processing starts.
OFF: Not executed S (Status
SM1661 backup • The relay turns off during the END New LCPU*1
ON: Being executed change)
processing flag processing of the scan where the
processing completes.
• This relay turns on when there is incoming
mail on the server when checked.
Incoming mail OFF: No incoming mail S (Status
SM1662 • The relay turns off during the END New LCPU*1
check flag ON: Mail arrived change)
processing of the scan where the e-mail
receive instruction processing completes.
*1 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "16112" or later
(18)Redundant system (tracking information)
The special relay (SM1700 to SM1799) is valid when the redundant system is in backup mode or in separate
mode. All bits are set to off for stand-alone systems.
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
OFF: Transfer
This relay remains on for one scan upon
Transfer trigger uncompleted S (Status
SM1700 completion of a transfer for any of the blocks New QnPRH
completion flag ON: Transfer change)
1 to 64.
completed
(1) This relay is turned from off to on to
enable the user to switch a system
during online program change for
redundancy. After the manual system
switching disable status is canceled, the
system automatically turns off SM1709.
(2) A system can be switched even a online
Manual system program change for redundancy is
ON: Manual system
switching being performed and regardless of the
switching enabled
disable/enable status of this relay, if the reason for the
(Disable
setting during switching is any of the following: S
SM1709 canceled) New QnPRH
online program • Power-off (Request)/U
OFF: Manual system
change • Reset
switching
redundant • Hardware failure
disabled
tracking • CPU stop error
(3) The system switching disable status
can also be canceled by this relay
during the following states.
• Multiple-block online program change
redundant tracking execution status
• File batch online program change
redundant tracking execution status
492
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
(1) This relay specifies whether to execute
a tracking transfer for the following
control data during online program
change for redundancy.
• Device memory (Including SMs and SDs
that automatically execute a tracking
transfer)
Transfer tracking
OFF: No device • PIDINIT information, S.PIDINIT
data during
tracking information, SFC information
SM1710 online program U New QnPRH
ON: Transfer device (2) SM1710 can be also used to specify
change enable
memory whether to enable a tracking transfer
flag
whole multiple-block online program
change redundant tracking and while
file batch online program change
redundant tracking.
(3) SM1710 is transferred from the control
system to the standby system by
tracking transfer.
SM1712 SM1712 Block 1
SM1713 SM1713 Block 2
SM1714 SM1714 Block 3
SM1715 SM1715 Block 4
SM1716 SM1716 Block 5
SM1717 SM1717 Block 6
SM1718 SM1718 Block 7
This relay turns on
SM1719 SM1719 Block 8
OFF: Transfer only during one
SM1720 Transfer trigger uncompleted SM1720 Block 9 scan upon S (Status
New QnPRH
SM1721 completion flag ON: Transfer SM1721 Block 10 completion of a change)
completed transfer for the
SM1722 SM1722 Block 11
relevant block.
SM1723 SM1723 Block 12
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
SM1724 SM1724 Block 13
SM1725 SM1725 Block 14
SM1726 SM1726 Block 15
SM1727 SM1727 Block 16
SM1728 SM1728 Block 17
SM1729 SM1729 Block 18
493
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
SM1730 SM1730 Block 19
SM1731 SM1731 Block 20
SM1732 SM1732 Block 21
SM1733 SM1733 Block 22
SM1734 SM1734 Block 23
SM1735 SM1735 Block 24
SM1736 SM1736 Block 25
SM1737 SM1737 Block 26
SM1738 SM1738 Block 27
SM1739 SM1739 Block 28
SM1740 SM1740 Block 29
SM1741 SM1741 Block 30
SM1742 SM1742 Block 31
SM1743 SM1743 Block 32
SM1744 SM1744 Block 33
SM1745 SM1745 Block 34
SM1746 SM1746 Block 35
SM1747 SM1747 Block 36
SM1748 SM1748 Block 37
SM1749 SM1749 Block 38
SM1750 SM1750 Block 39
This relay turns on
SM1751 SM1751 Block 40
OFF: Transfer only during one
SM1752 Transfer trigger uncompleted SM1752 Block 41 scan upon S (Status
New QnPRH
SM1753 completion flag ON: Transfer SM1753 Block 42 completion of a change)
completed transfer for the
SM1754 SM1754 Block 43
relevant block.
SM1755 SM1755 Block 44
SM1756 SM1756 Block 45
SM1757 SM1757 Block 46
SM1758 SM1758 Block 47
SM1759 SM1759 Block 48
SM1760 SM1760 Block 49
SM1761 SM1761 Block 50
SM1762 SM1762 Block 51
SM1763 SM1763 Block 52
SM1764 SM1764 Block 53
SM1765 SM1765 Block 54
SM1766 SM1766 Block 55
SM1767 SM1767 Block 56
SM1768 SM1768 Block 57
SM1769 SM1769 Block 58
SM1770 SM1770 Block 59
SM1771 SM1771 Block 60
SM1772 SM1772 Block 61
SM1773 SM1773 Block 62
SM1774 SM1774 Block 63
SM1775 SM1775 Block 64
494
APPENDICES
(19)Redundant power supply module information A
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
• Turns on when one or more redundant
OFF: No redundant power supply modules with input power
power supply off are detected.
module with input • Turns on if any of SD1780 bits is on.
Qn(H)*3
power OFF • Turns off if all bits of SD1780 are off. S (Every
Power supply off QnPH*3
SM1780 detected • This relay turns off when the main base END New
detection flag QnPRH
ON: Redundant power unit is not the redundant main base unit processing)
supply module (Q38RB). QnU*4
with input power • When the multiple CPU system is
OFF detected configured, the flags are stored only to the
CPU No.1.
• Turns on when one or more faulty
redundant power supply modules are
OFF: No faulty detected.
redundant power • Turns on if any of SD1781 bits is on.
Qn(H)*3
Power supply supply module • Turns off if all bits of SD1781 are off. S (Every
QnPH*3
SM1781 failure detection detected • This relay turns off when the main base END New
QnPRH
flag ON: Faulty redundant unit is not the redundant main base unit processing)
power supply (Q38RB). QnU*4
module detected • When the multiple CPU system is
configured, the flags are stored only to the
CPU No.1.
Momentary • Turns on when a momentary power failure
power failure of the input power supply to the power
SM1782
detection flag for supply 1 or 2 is detected one or more
power supply 1*1 times. After turning on, this relay remains
on even if the power supply recovers from
the momentary power failure.
• Turns off the flags (SM1782 and SM1783)
OFF: No momentary
of the power supply 1 and 2 when the Qn(H)*3
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
power failure S (Every
CPU module starts. QnPH*3
detected END New
Momentary • When the input power to one of the QnPRH
ON: Momentary power processing)
power failure redundant power supply modules turns QnU*4
SM1783 failure detected
detection flag for off, the corresponding flag turns off.
• This relay turns off when the main base
power supply 2*2
unit is not the redundant main base unit
(Q38RB).
• When the multiple CPU system is
configured, the flags are stored only to the
CPU No.1.
*1 The "power supply 1" indicates the redundant power supply module mounted on the POWER 1 slot of the redundant
base unit (Q38RB/Q68RB/Q65WRB).
*2 The "power supply 2" indicates the redundant power supply module mounted on the POWER 2 slot of the redundant
base unit (Q38RB/68RB/Q65WRB).
*3 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "07032" or later
In a multiple CPU system, the serial number (first five digits) of all the CPU modules must be "07032" or later.
*4 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later
495
(20)CC-Link IE Field Network Basic function
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
• This relay turns on when the cyclic
Cyclic S (Every
Off: Not performed transmission starts. QnUDV*1
SM1700 transmission END New
On: Being performed • This relay turns off when the cyclic LCPU*2
status processing)
transmission stops.
Off: All stations • This relay turns on when an error exists
S (Every
normal even in one slave station. QnUDV*1
SM1704 Data link status END New
On: One or more • The status of each slave station can be LCPU*2
processing)
faulty stations checked in SD1540.
• This relay turns on when even one slave
station is specified as a reserved station
Reserved station
Off: Not specified in parameter. QnUDV*1
SM1718 specification S (Initial) New
On: Specified • The station number that is specified as a LCPU*2
status
reserved station can be checked in
SD1718.
• After the END instruction of the scan
where the relay turns on, the diagnostic
Diagnostic OffOn:Request information of the slave station specified U/S (During
QnUDV*1
SM1741 information issued in SD1741 is read to SD1742 to SD1773. END New
display request OnOff:Completed • This relay turns off when reading of the processing) LCPU*2
diagnostic information has completed at
END processing.
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "18112" or later
*2 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "18112" or later
(21)Built-in I/O function
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
• This relay turns on when positioning
control, OPR control, JOG operation, or
absolute position restoration is started.
This relay turns off when each control is
completed. In positioning control, this
S (Every
OFF: Not busy relay turns off when the axis 1 decelerates
SM1840 Axis 1 busy END New LCPU
ON: Busy and stops, and then "dwell time" elapsed.
processing)
(This relay remains on while positioning
control is being performed.)
• This relay turns off when each control is
ended due to such as an error or stop
operation.
• This relay turns on when OPR control,
position control, or absolute position
restoration is completed.
S
• This relay turns off when OPR control,
Axis 1 (Instruction
OFF: Not completed positioning control, absolute position
SM1841 positioning execution/ New LCPU
ON: Completed restoration, or JOG operation is started.
completion Status
• This relay remains off when JOG
change)
operation is completed.
• This relay remains off when position
control is stopped.
• This relay turns on when the CPU module
is powered on, is reset, or is set from
OFF: Machine OPR
STOP to RUN; or the drive unit ready S (Every
Axis 1 OPR control completed
SM1842 signal turns off; or machine OPR control is END New LCPU
request ON: Machine OPR
started. processing)
control started
• This relay turns off when machine OPR
control is completed.
496
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
• This relay turns on when machine OPR
control is completed.
S
• This relay turns off when OPR control,
(Instruction
Axis 1 OPR OFF: Not completed positioning control, absolute position
SM1843 execution/ New LCPU
completion ON: Completed restoration, or JOG operation is started;
Status
or the CPU module is set from STOP to
change)
RUN; or the drive unit ready signal turns
off.
• This relay turns on when JOG operation
or speed control in speed/position
switching control set at a speed of "0" is
OFF: Operating at started.
S (Every
speed other than 0 • This relay turns on when speed is
SM1844 Axis 1 speed 0 END New LCPU
ON: Operating at changed with a new speed value of "0",
processing)
speed 0 and turns off when speed is changed with
a new speed value other than "0".
• This relay turns off when SM1840 turns
off.
• This relay turns on if an error occurs.
• The present error can be checked by S (Every
OFF: No error
SM1845 Axis 1 error SD1845. END New LCPU
ON: Error
• This relay is turned off by turning on processing)
SM1850.
• This relay turns on if a warning occurs.
• The present warning can be checked by S (Every
OFF: No warning
SM1846 Axis 1 warning SD1846. END New LCPU
ON: Warning
• This relay is turned off by turning on processing)
SM1850.
• This relay turns on when positioning
OFF: No start attempted control, OPR control, JOG operation, or
S
Axis 1 start in in busy status absolute position restoration is attempted
SM1847 (Instruction New LCPU
busy status ON: Start attempted in while the axis 1 is in the busy status. The
execution)/U
busy status executed start instruction will be ignored.
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
• This relay is reset by the user.
• This relay turns on when positioning
control by the start instruction
(IPPSTRT1(P), IPDSTRT1(P),
S
IPSIMUL(P), IPABRST1), JOG operation
(Instruction
Axis 1 start OFF: Not executed by the JOG start instruction (IPJOG1), or
SM1848 execution/ New LCPU
instruction ON: Being executed OPR control by the OPR start instruction
Status
(IPOPR1(P)) is started.
change)
• This relay turns off when positioning
control, OPR control, or JOG operation is
completed.
• Turning on this relay will turn off SM1845
and SM1846 and will clear the SD1845
OFF ON:Resets the
and SD1846 values to "0".
Axis 1 error Axis 1 error.
SM1850 • Even if this relay is turned on, SM1845 U New LCPU
reset OFF: Clears the reset
will not turn off and the SD1845 value will
status.
not be cleared to "0" until SM1840 turns
off.
OFF ON:Axis 1 OPR
Axis 1 OPR Turning on this relay will forcibly turn off
SM1851 request U New LCPU
request off SM1842.
OFF: Cleared
Axis 1 This relay stores whether to enable
OFF: Disabled
SM1852 speed/position switching from speed control to position U New LCPU
ON: Enabled
switching control in speed/position switching control.
497
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
• This relay turns on when positioning
control, OPR control, JOG operation, or
absolute position restoration is started.
This relay turns off when each control is
completed. In positioning control, this
S (Every
OFF: Not busy relay turns off when the axis 1 decelerates
SM1860 Axis 2 busy END New LCPU
ON: Busy and stops, and then "dwell time" elapsed.
processing)
(This relay remains on while positioning
control is being performed.)
• This relay turns off when each control is
ended due to such as an error or stop
operation.
• This relay turns on when OPR control,
position control, or absolute position
restoration is completed.
S
• This relay turns off when OPR control,
Axis 2 (Instruction
OFF: Not completed positioning control, absolute position
SM1861 positioning execution/ New LCPU
ON: Completed restoration, or JOG operation is started.
completion Status
• This relay remains off when JOG
change)
operation is completed.
• This relay remains off when position
control is stopped.
• This relay turns on when the CPU module
is powered on, is reset, or is set from
OFF: Machine OPR
STOP to RUN; or the drive unit ready S (Every
Axis 2 OPR control completed
SM1862 signal turns off; or machine OPR control is END New LCPU
request ON: Machine OPR
started. processing)
control started
• This relay turns off when machine OPR
control is completed.
• This relay turns on when machine OPR
control is completed.
S
• This relay turns off when OPR control,
(Instruction
Axis 2 OPR OFF: Not completed positioning control, absolute position
SM1863 execution/ New LCPU
completion ON: Completed restoration, or JOG operation is started;
Status
or the CPU module is set from STOP to
change)
RUN; or the drive unit ready signal turns
off.
• This relay turns on when JOG operation
or speed control in speed/position
switching control set at a speed of "0" is
OFF: Operating at started.
S (Every
speed other than 0 • This relay turns on when speed is
SM1864 Axis 2 speed 0 END New LCPU
ON: Operating at changed with a new speed value of "0",
processing)
speed 0 and turns off when speed is changed with
a new speed value other than "0".
• This relay turns off when SM1860 turns
off.
• This relay turns on if an error occurs.
• The present error can be checked by S (Every
OFF: No error
SM1865 Axis 2 error SD1865. END New LCPU
ON: Error
• This relay is turned off by turning on processing)
SM1870.
• This relay turns on if a warning occurs.
• The present warning can be checked by S (Every
OFF: No warning
SM1866 Axis 2 warning SD1866. END New LCPU
ON: Warning
• This relay is turned off by turning on processing)
SM1870.
• This relay turns on when positioning
OFF: No start attempted control, OPR control, JOG operation, or
S
Axis 2 start in in busy status absolute position restoration is attempted
SM1867 (Instruction New LCPU
busy status ON: Start attempted in while the axis 2 is in the busy status. The
execution)/U
busy status executed start instruction will be ignored.
• This relay is reset by the user.
498
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
• This relay turns on when positioning
control by the start instruction
(IPPSTRT2(P), IPDSTRT2(P),
S
IPSIMUL(P), IPABRST2), JOG operation
(Instruction
Axis 2 start OFF: Not executed by the JOG start instruction (IPJOG2), or
SM1868 execution/ New LCPU
instruction ON: Being executed OPR control by the OPR start instruction
Status
(IPOPR2(P)) is started.
change)
• This relay turns off when positioning
control, OPR control, or JOG operation is
completed.
• Turning on this relay will turn off SM1865
and SM1866 and will clear the SD1865
OFF ON:Resets the
and SD1866 values to "0".
Axis 2 error Axis 2 error.
SM1870 • Even if this relay is turned on, SM1865 U New LCPU
reset OFF: Clears the reset
will not turn off and the SD1865 value will
status.
not be cleared to "0" until SM1860 turns
off.
OFF ON:Axis 2 OPR
Axis 2 OPR Turning on this relay will forcibly turn off
SM1871 request U New LCPU
request off SM1862.
OFF: Cleared
Axis 2 This relay stores whether to enable
OFF: Disabled
SM1872 speed/position switching from speed control to position U New LCPU
ON: Enabled
switching control in speed/position switching control.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
OFF: Coincidence point
CH1 > coincidence output No.1 point
CH1 counter (No.1) or smaller S (Every
setting value" is met.
SM1880 value greater ON: Greater than END New LCPU
• This relay turns off when "current value of
(No.1) coincidence point processing)
CH1 coincidence output No.1 point
(No.1)
setting value" is met.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
CH1 counter S (Status
CH1 = coincidence output No.1 point
value OFF: Not detected change/
SM1881 setting value" is met. New LCPU
coincidence ON: Detected Every END
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
• This relay is turned off by turning on CH1
(No.1) processing)
coincidence signal No.1 reset command.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
OFF: Coincidence point
CH1 < coincidence output No.1 point
CH1 counter (No.1) or greater S (Every
setting value" is met.
SM1882 value smaller ON: Smaller than END New LCPU
• This relay turns off when "current value of
(No.1) coincidence point processing)
CH1 coincidence output No.1 point
(No.1)
setting value" is met.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
OFF: Coincidence point
CH1 > coincidence output No.2 point
CH1 counter (No.2) or smaller S (Every
setting value" is met.
SM1883 value greater ON: Greater than END New LCPU
• This relay turns off when "current value of
(No.2) coincidence point processing)
CH1 coincidence output No.2 point
(No.2)
setting value" is met.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
CH1 counter S (Status
CH1 = coincidence output No.2 point
value OFF: Not detected change/
SM1884 setting value" is met. New LCPU
coincidence ON: Detected Every END
• This relay is turned off by turning on CH1
(No.2) processing)
coincidence signal No.2 reset command.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
OFF: Coincidence point
CH1 < coincidence output No.2 point
CH1 counter (No.2) or greater S (Every
setting value" is met.
SM1885 value smaller ON: Smaller than END New LCPU
• This relay turns off when "current value of
(No.2) coincidence point processing)
CH1 coincidence output No.2 point
(No.2)
setting value" is met.
• This relay turns on when a preset request
CH1 external by phase Z (preset) terminal of CH1 is
S (Every
preset (phase Z) OFF: Not detected detected.
SM1886 END New LCPU
request ON: Detected • This relay is turned off by turning on CH1
processing)
detection external preset (phase Z) request
detection clear command.
499
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
• This relay turns on if the CH1 error
occurs. S (Every
OFF: No error
SM1887 CH1 error • This relay turns off when an error cause is END New LCPU
ON: Error
removed and CH1 error reset command is processing)
turned on.
• This relay turns on if a warning occurs in
CH1. S (Every
OFF: No warning
SM1888 CH1 warning • This relay turns off when a warning cause END New LCPU
ON: Warning
is removed and CH1 error reset command processing)
is turned on.
• This relay is turned on to reset CH1
CH1
counter value coincidence No.1.
coincidence Resets CH1 counter
SM1890 • The command is valid while this relay is U New LCPU
signal No.1 value coincidence No.1.
on.
reset command
• The on time must be held for at least 2ms.
• This relay is turned on to reset CH1
CH1
counter value coincidence No.2.
coincidence Resets CH1 counter
SM1891 • The command is valid while this relay is U New LCPU
signal No.2 value coincidence No.2.
on.
reset command
• The on time must be held for at least 2ms.
• This relay is turned on to perform
CH1 coincidence output from CH1 coincidence
Controls outputs from
coincidence output No.1 and CH1 coincidence output
SM1892 CH1 coincidence output U New LCPU
output enable No.2 terminals.
No.1 and No.2 terminals.
command • The command is valid while this relay is
on.
• This relay is turned on to preset the
counter value.
CH1 preset Presets the counter • The command is valid at the rise of this
SM1893 U New LCPU
command value. relay (off on).
• The on and off time must be held for at
least 2ms.
• This relay is turned on to count down
pulses.
• The command is valid while the Pulse
CH1 count down
SM1894 Counts down pulses. input mode is either 1-phase multiple of n U New LCPU
command
or 1-phase multiple of n (A phase only).
• The command is valid while this relay is
on.
CH1 count • This relay is turned on to start counting.
SM1895 enable Starts counting. • The command is valid while this relay is U New LCPU
command on.
• This relay is turned on to start the
selected counter function.
• When the count disabling function is
selected, the command is valid while this
relay is on.
CH1 counter
• When the latch counter function or the
function Starts the selected
SM1896 sampling counter function is selected, the U New LCPU
selection start counter function.
command is valid at the rise of this relay
command
(off on). The on time must be held for
at least 2ms.
• When the count disabling/preset function
or the latch counter/preset function is
selected, the command is invalid.
• This relay is turned on to reset CH1
CH1 external external preset (phase Z) request
preset (phase Z) Resets CH1 external detection.
SM1897 request preset (phase Z) request • The command is valid at the rise of this U New LCPU
detection reset detection. relay (off on).
command • The on and off time must be held for at
least 2ms.
500
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
CH1 pulse • This relay is turned on to measure pulses.
Starts pulse
SM1898 measurement • The command is valid while this relay is U New LCPU
measurement.
start command on.
• This relay is turned on to reset the CH1
error.
CH1 error reset • The command is valid at the rise of this
SM1899 Resets the CH1 error. U New LCPU
command relay (off on).
• The on and off time must be held for at
least 2ms.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
OFF: Coincidence point
CH2 > coincidence output No.1 point
CH2 counter (No.1) or smaller S (Every
setting value" is met.
SM1900 value greater ON: Greater than END New LCPU
• This relay turns off when "current value of
(No.1) coincidence point processing)
CH2 coincidence output No.1 point
(No.1)
setting value" is met.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
CH2 counter S (Status
CH2 = coincidence output No.1 point
value OFF: Not detected change/
SM1901 setting value" is met. New LCPU
coincidence ON: Detected Every END
• This relay is turned off by turning on CH2
(No.1) processing)
coincidence signal No.1 reset command.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
OFF: Coincidence point
CH2 < coincidence output No.1 point
CH2 counter (No.1) or greater S (Every
setting value" is met.
SM1902 value smaller ON: Smaller than END New LCPU
• This relay turns off when "current value of
(No.1) coincidence point processing)
CH2 coincidence output No.1 point
(No.1)
setting value" is met.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
OFF: Coincidence point
CH2 > coincidence output No.2 point
CH2 counter (No.2) or smaller S (Every
setting value" is met.
SM1903 value greater ON: Greater than END New LCPU
• This relay turns off when "current value of
(No.2) coincidence point processing)
CH2 coincidence output No.2 point
(No.2)
setting value" is met.
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
• This relay turns on when "current value of
CH2 counter S (Status
CH2 = coincidence output No.2 point
value OFF: Not detected change/
SM1904 setting value" is met. New LCPU
coincidence ON: Detected Every END
• This relay is turned off by turning on CH2
(No.2) processing)
coincidence signal No.2 reset command.
• This relay turns on when "current value of
OFF: Coincidence point
CH2 < coincidence output No.2 point
CH2 counter (No.2) or greater S (Every
setting value" is met.
SM1905 value smaller ON: Smaller than END New LCPU
• This relay turns off when "current value of
(No.2) coincidence point processing)
CH2 coincidence output No.2 point
(No.2)
setting value" is met.
• This relay turns on when a preset request
CH2 external by phase Z (preset) terminal of CH2 is
S (Every
preset (phase Z) OFF: Not detected detected.
SM1906 END New LCPU
request ON: Detected • This relay is turned off by turning on CH2
processing)
detection external preset (phase Z) request
detection clear command.
• This relay turns on if the CH2 error
occurs. S (Every
OFF: No error
SM1907 CH2 Error • This relay turns off when an error cause is END New LCPU
ON: Error
removed and CH2 error reset command is processing)
turned on.
• This relay turns on if a warning occurs in
CH2. S (Every
OFF: No warning
SM1908 CH2 warning • This relay turns off when a warning cause END New LCPU
ON: Warning
is removed and CH2 error reset command processing)
is turned on.
501
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
• This relay is turned on to reset CH2
CH2
counter value coincidence No.1.
coincidence Resets CH2 counter
SM1910 • The command is valid while this relay is U New LCPU
signal No.1 value coincidence No.1.
on.
reset command
• The on time must be held for at least 2ms.
• This relay is turned on to reset CH2
CH2
counter value coincidence No.2.
coincidence Resets CH2 counter
SM1911 • The command is valid while this relay is U New LCPU
signal No.2 value coincidence No.2.
on.
reset command
• The on time must be held for at least 2ms.
• This relay is turned on to perform
CH2 coincidence output from CH2 coincidence
Controls outputs from
coincidence output No.1 and CH2 coincidence output
SM1912 CH2 coincidence output U New LCPU
output enable No.2 terminals.
No.1 and No.2 terminals.
command • The command is valid while this relay is
on.
• This relay is turned on to preset the
counter value.
CH2 preset Presets the counter • The command is valid at the rise of this
SM1913 U New LCPU
command value. relay (off on).
• The on and off time must be held for at
least 2ms.
• This relay is turned on to count down
pulses.
• The command is valid while the Pulse
CH2 count down
SM1914 Counts down pulses. input mode is either 1-phase multiple of n U New LCPU
command
or 1-phase multiple of n (A phase only).
• The command is valid while this relay is
on.
CH2 count • This relay is turned on to start counting.
SM1915 enable Starts counting. • The command is valid while this relay is U New LCPU
command on.
• This relay is turned on to start the
selected counter function.
• When the count disabling function is
selected, the command is valid while this
relay is on.
CH2 counter
• When the latch counter function or the
function Starts the selected
SM1916 sampling counter function is selected, the U New LCPU
selection start counter function.
command is valid at the rise of this relay
command
(off on). The on time must be held for
at least 2ms.
• When the count disabling/preset function
or the latch counter/preset function is
selected, the command is invalid.
• This relay is turned on to reset CH2
CH2 external external preset (phase Z) request
preset (phase Z) Resets CH2 external detection.
SM1917 request preset (phase Z) request • The command is valid at the rise of this U New LCPU
detection reset detection. relay (off on).
command • The on and off time must be held for at
least 2ms.
CH2 pulse • This relay is turned on to measure pulses.
Starts pulse
SM1918 measurement • The command is valid while this relay is U New LCPU
measurement.
start command on.
• This relay is turned on to reset the CH2
error.
CH2 error reset • The command is valid at the rise of this
SM1919 Resets the CH2 error. U New LCPU
command relay (off on).
• The on and off time must be held for at
least 2ms.
502
APPENDICES
(22)CPU module data backup/restoration function A
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
OFF: Not being
Backup status This relay turns on during execution of S (Status
SM1925 executed New QnUDV*1
flag backup. change)
ON: Being executed
If this relay is turned off and then on, backup
Backup execution request is issued when the END
OFF: Not requested S (Status
SM1926 execution processing of the scan is executed. This New QnUDV*1
ON: Requested change)/U
request relay is turned off by the system after the
backup is completed.
OFF: Not being
Restoration This relay turns on during execution of S (Status
SM1928 executed New QnUDV*1
status flag restoration change)
ON: Being executed
If this relay is turned off and then on when the
Restoration CPU module is in STOP state, restoration
OFF: Not requested S (Status
SM1929 execution execution request is issued. This relay is New QnUDV*1
ON: Requested change)/U
request turned off by the system after the restoration
is completed.
This relay turns on during the retry of the
automatic backup. (This relay turns on at the
Retry status flag OFF: Not being start of the retry, and turns off when the
S (Status
SM1931 for automatic executed automatic backup is triggered by the retry New QnUDV*2
change)
backup ON: Being executed while the exclusive functions are not
executed, or when the specified number of
retries are attempted.)
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "17103" or later
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "18052" or later
(23)Data logging
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
When SM960 (Data logging error check flag)
Data logging is ON, the data logging is restarted by turning
OFF: Not restarted QnUDV*2
SM1938 restart flag at off and then on this relay. This relay is turned U New
ON: Restarted LCPU*3
error stop off when the CPU module is powered off and
then on or is reset.
This relay turns on when the system is ready
Data logging
for data logging.
setting No.1 OFF: Not ready QnUDV
SM1940 This relay remains on even after data logging S (Initial) New
Data logging ON: Ready LCPU
is suspended. However, this relay turns off
preparation
when data logging is stopped.
This relay is turned on to start data logging
while the CPU module is set to RUN and is
Data logging turned off to suspend data logging. (The
OFF: Pause S (Status QnUDV
SM1941 setting No.1 related special relays will all turn off.) New
ON: Start change)/U LCPU
Data logging start Even if this relay is turned on while the CPU
module is set to STOP, data logging will not
be started.
Data logging
OFF: Not being
setting No.1 This relay is on while data logging is being S (Status QnUDV
SM1942 collected New
Data logging collected. change) LCPU
ON: Being collected
collection
503
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
M9
This relay turns on when data logging is
ended.
[Continuous is set for Logging type]
The corresponding bit turns on when data
logging is ended after data have been written
by the number of storable files (Stop is set for
Operation occurring when number of saved
Data logging files is exceeded).
OFF: Not ended S (Status QnUDV
SM1943 setting No.1 [Trigger is set for Logging type] New
ON: Ended change) LCPU
Data logging end The corresponding bit turns on when the
trigger condition is met, data are collected by
the number of set times, and then the data
are written to the SD memory card.
This relay also turns on if an error occurs
during data logging (except data logging
error occurred by the execution of online
change).
Data logging • This relay turns on when the specified
setting No.1 trigger condition is met. S (Status QnUDV
SM1944 OFF ON:Triggered New
Data logging • This relay is turned on to meet the trigger change)/U LCPU
trigger condition.
This relay turns on after trigger logging is
Data logging
triggered. This relay remains on even after
setting No.1 OFF: Not after trigger S (Status QnUDV
SM1945 data logging is completed. This relay turns off New
After data logging ON: After trigger change) LCPU
when trigger logging is suspended or
trigger
stopped.
This relay turns on if a data logging error
Data logging
occurs.
setting No.1 OFF: No error QnUDV
SM1946 This relay is turned off by the registration of S (Error) New
Data logging ON: Error LCPU
the setting or a stop command from the CPU
error
Module Logging Configuration Tool.
Data logging
This relay is on while buffer memory data are
setting No.1 OFF: Not stored S (Status QnUDV
SM1947 being stored to a SD memory card by data New
Data storage in ON: Being stored change) LCPU
logging.
SD memory card
Data logging
setting No.1 • This relay turns on when the data logging
Data logging file OFF: Not executed file transfer function is started. S (Status QnUDV
SM1948 New
transfer ON: Being executed • This relay turns off when the data logging change) LCPU*1
execution status file transfer function is stopped.
flag
504
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
M9
CPU
A
SM1950
Data logging
to
setting No.2
SM1958
SM1960
Data logging
to
setting No.3
SM1968
SM1970
Data logging
to
setting No.4
SM1978
SM1980
Data logging
to
setting No.5
SM1988
SM1990 Same as in
Data logging Same as in data logging Same as in data logging setting No.1 QnUDV
to data logging New
setting No.6 setting No.1 (SM1940 to SM1948) LCPU*1
SM1998 setting No.1
SM2000
Data logging
to
setting No.7
SM2008
SM2010
Data logging
to
setting No.8
SM2018
SM2020
Data logging
to
setting No.9
SM2028
SM2030
Data logging
to
setting No.10
SM2038
*1 For the data logging file transfer execution status flag, modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "12112" or later
support these areas.
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "17103" or later
*3 The LCPU, except the L02SCPU and L02SCPU-P, whose serial number (first five digits) is "17102" or later
Appendix 2 List of Special Relay Areas
505
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
The special register (SD) is an internal register whose application is fixed in the programmable controller. For this
reason, the special register cannot be used in the same way as other internal registers are used in sequence
programs. However, data can be written to the special register to control the CPU module as needed. Data is stored in
binary format if not specified.
The following table shows how to read the special register list.
Item Description
Number Special register number
Name Special register name
Meaning Contents of special register
Explanation Detailed description of special register
Set side and set timing of special register
<Set by>
• S: Set by system
• U: Set by user (using a program, programming tool, GOT, or test operation from other external devices)
• S/U: Set by both system and user
<When Set>
The following shows the set timing when the special register is set by system.
• Every END processing: Set during every END processing
• Initial: Set during initial processing (after power-on or status change from STOP to RUN)
Set by (When Set) • Status change: Set when the operating status is changed
• Error: Set if an error occurs
• Instruction execution: Set when an instruction is executed
• Request: Set when requested by a user (using the special relay)
• When condition occurs: Set when the condition is triggered
• When system is switched: Set when the system is switched (between the control system and the standby system)
• When RUN/STOP/RESET switch changed: Set when the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is changed
• Card removal: Set when a memory card is inserted or removed
• At write: Set when data are written to the CPU module by a user
• During END processing: Set during END processing
CPU module supporting the special register
• QCPU: All the Q series CPU modules
• Q00J/Q00/Q01: Basic model QCPU
• Qn(H): High Performance model QCPU
• QnPH: Process CPU
Corresponding CPU • QnPRH: Redundant CPU
• QnU: Universal model QCPU
• QnUDV: High-speed Universal model QCPU
• Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U: Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU
• LCPU: All the L series CPU modules
• CPU module model: Only the specified model (Example: Q02UCPU, L26CPU-BT)
Corresponding • Special register (D9) supported by the ACPU ("D9 format change" indicates the one whose application has been
ACPU changed. Incompatible with the Q00J/Q00/Q01 and QnPRH.)
D9 • "New" indicates the one added for the QCPU or LCPU.
For details on the following items, refer to the following.
• For network related items: Manuals for each network module
• For SFC programs: MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC)
Do not change the values of special register set by system using a program or by test operation. Doing so may result in
system down or communication failure.
506
APPENDICES
(1) Diagnostic information A
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
• This register stores the error code of an error detected by
Diagnostic Diagnosis D9008 format QCPU
SD0 diagnostics. S (Error)
errors error code change LCPU
• Contents identical to latest error history information.
This register stores the year (last two digits) and the month
when the SD0 data is updated in 4-digit BCD.
SD1
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 (Example) October, 1995
Year (0 to 99) Month (1 to 12) 9510H
This register stores the day and the hour when the SD0 data
Clock time Clock time for
is updated in 4-digit BCD.
for diagnosis diagnosis QCPU
SD2 S (Error) New
error error (Example) 10 a.m. on 25th LCPU
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
occurrence occurrence Day (1 to 31) Hour (0 to 23) 2510H
This register stores the minute and the second when the SD0
data is updated in 4-digit BCD.
SD3
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 (Example) 35 min. 48 sec.
Minutes (0 to 59) Seconds (0 to 59) 3548H
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
507
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
• This register stores a category code indicating a type of the
error information which is stored in the common information
(SD5 to SD15) and the individual information (SD16 to
SD26).
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Individual information category codes Common information category codes
• The common information category codes store the
following codes:
0: No error
1: Module No. (QCPU: Slot No./CPU No./base No., LCPU:
Slot No./Block No.)*1
2: File name/drive name
3: Time (value set)
4: Program error location
5: Reason(s) for system switching (for the Redundant
CPU)
6: Reason(s) for tracking size excess error (for the
Redundant CPU)
7: Base No./power supply No. (This does not apply to the
Universal model QCPU and the LCPU with a serial
number (first five digits) of "10041" or earlier.)
Error 8: Tracking transmission data classification (for the
Error
information Redundant CPU) QCPU
SD4 information S (Error) New
category LCPU
categories
code *1 For a multiple CPU system, the module No. or CPU No.
(CPU No.1: 1, CPU No.2: 2, CPU No.3: 3, CPU No.4: 4)
is stored according to an error. (For details, refer to
each error code.)
• The individual information category codes store the
following codes:
0: No error
1: (Empty)
2: File name/drive name
3: Time (value actually measured)
4: Program error location
5: Parameter number
6: Annunciator (F) No.
7: CHK instruction failure No. (Except for the Basic model
QCPU, Universal model QCPU, and LCPU.)
8: Reason(s) for system switching failure (for the
Redundant CPU)
9: Failure information (for the QnUDVCPU and LCPU)
12: File diagnostic information (for the Universal model
QCPU and the LCPU)
13: Parameter No./CPU No. (for the Universal model
QCPU)
508
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
• This register stores common information corresponding to
the error code stored in SD0.
• The following ten types of information are stored here:
• The error common information type can be determined by
"common information category code" stored in SD4.
(Values stored in "common information category code"
correspond to the following 1) to 8).)
1) Module No.
Number Meaning
SD5 Slot No./CPU No./Base No./Block No. *1, *2, *3, *4, *5
SD6 I/O No. *6, *11
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11 (Empty)
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
*1 For a multiple CPU system, the module No. or CPU No.
(CPU No.1: 1, CPU No.2: 2, CPU No.3: 3, CPU No.4: 4)
is stored according to an error. (For details, refer to
each error code.)
*2 If a fuse has been blown or an I/O module verify error
occurs in a module on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O
station, the network No. is stored in the upper 8 bits and
the station No. is stored in the lower 8 bits. To
determine a fuse-blown module or a module where an
I/O module verify error occurs, check the I/O No.
*3 If an instruction is executed from the Basic model
Error Error
SD5 to QCPU to a module mounted on the slot where no QCPU
common common S (Error) New
SD15 module should be mounted, "255" is stored in SD5. LCPU
information information
*4 The definitions of the base No., slot No., and block No.
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
are as follows:
[Base No.]
This number indicates a base unit on which the CPU module
is mounted.
Base No. Definition
0 Indicates the main base unit where a CPU module
is mounted.
1 to 7 Indicates the extension base unit. The stage number
setting made by the stage number setting connector
on the extension base unit is the base No.
When stage number setting is extension 1: Base No. = 1
When stage number setting is extension 7: Base No. = 7
[Slot No.]
This number is used to identify the slot of each base unit and
a module mounted on the slot.
The "0" I/O slot (slot on the right of the CPU slot) on the main
base unit is defined as "Slot No. = 0". The slot Nos. are
assigned in sequence numbers in order of the main base unit
and then the first extension base unit to 7th extension base
unit. When the number of slots on base units has been set in
the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC Parameter", the slot Nos. are
assigned by the number of set slots.
[Block No.]
Block No. Definition
0 Indicates the number of main block where a CPU
module is mounted.
1 to 3 Indicates the main block where a CPU module is
mounted.
Extension block 1: Block No. = 1
Extension block 2: Block No. = 2
Extension block 3: Block No. = 3
509
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
*5 If a module is not mounted on any slots as set, FFH is
stored.
*6 If FFFFH is stored in SD6 (I/O No.), this indicates that
the I/O No. cannot be identified due to an error such as
overlap of an I/O No. in the I/O Assignment tab of "PLC
Parameter". In this case, identify the error location
using SD5. FFFFH is also stored in SD6 for the branch
module.
*11 The number found by dividing the start I/O number by
16 is stored.
2) File name/drive name
Number Meaning (Example) File name =
SD5 Drive ABCDEFGH. IJK
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD6
42H(B) 41H(A)
SD7 File name 44H(D) 43H(C)
SD8 (ASCII code: 8 characters) 46H(F) 45H(E)
SD9
48H(H) 47H(G)
SD10 Extension 7 2EH(.)
49H(I) 2EH(.)
SD11 (ASCII code: 3 characters)
4BH(K) 4AH(J)
SD12
SD13
(Empty)
SD14
SD15
3) Time (value set)
Number Meaning
SD5 Time : 1 s units (0 to 999 s)
SD6 Time : 1ms units (0 to 65535ms)
Error Error
SD5 to SD7 QCPU
common common SD8 S (Error) New
SD15 LCPU
information information SD9
SD10
SD11 (Empty)
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
4) Program error location
Number Meaning
SD5
SD6 File name
SD7 (ASCII code: 8 characters)
SD8
SD9 Extension 7 2EH(.)
SD10 (ASCII code: 3 characters)
SD11 Pattern 8
SD12 Block No.
SD13 Step No./transition condition
SD14 Sequence step No. (L)
SD15 Sequence step No. (H)
*7 For extension names, refer to the table on Page 511,
Appendix 3 (1) (a).
*8 The description of the bit pattern is as follows:
15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 (Bit number)
0 0 to 0 0
(Not used) SFC block designation present (1)/absent (0)
SFC step designation present (1)/absent (0)
SFC transition designation present (1)/absent (0)
510
APPENDICES
(a) Extension name
SDn SDn+1
A
Extension File type
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits
51H 50H 41H QPA Parameter
51H 50H 47H QPG Program
51H 43H 44H QCD Device comment
51H 44H 49H QDI Initial device value
51H 44H 52H QDR File register
Local device (for the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant
51H 44H 4CH QDL
CPU, Universal model QCPU, and LCPU)
Sampling trace data (for the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU,
51H 54H 44H QTD
Redundant CPU, Universal model QCPU, and LCPU)
Error history data (for the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and
51H 46H 44H QFD
Redundant CPU)
51H 53H 54H QST SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD instruction file (for the Universal model QCPU and the LCPU)
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
5) Reason(s) for system switching
Number Meaning
SD5 System switching cause 9
SD6 Control system switching instruction argument
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11 (Empty)
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
*9 The following shows the description.
0 : No system switching condition (default)
1 : Power-OFF, reset, hardware failure,
watchdog timer error
Error Error 2 : Stop error
SD5 to (except watchdog timer error)
common common S (Error) New QnPRH
SD15 3 : System switching request by network
information information module
16 : Control system switching instruction
17 : Control system switching request from
a programming tool
6) Reason(s) for tracking size excess error
The following shows block Nos. when data size that can be
tracked (100K) is exceeded in the bit pattern of the
corresponding special relay.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 1 1
SD5 (SM1535) 0 0 0 0 0 0 (SM1528) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (SM1520)
(Block16) (Block9) (Block1)
SD6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1
SD8 (SM1583) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (SM1568)
(Block64) (Block49)
SD9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
511
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
7) Base No./power supply No.
Number Meaning
SD5 Base No.
SD6 Power supply No.
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11 (Empty) Qn(H)*1
SD12
SD13
QnPH*1
SD14 QnPRH
SD15
QnU*2
1: Power supply 1 fault
2: Power supply 2 fault
"Power Redundant power supply module
supply mounted on POWER 1 slot of redundant
module 1": base unit (Q38RB, Q68RB, Q65WRB)
"Power Redundant power supply module
supply mounted on POWER 2 slot of redundant
module 2": base unit (Q38RB, Q68RB, Q65WRB)
8) Tracking transmission data classification
This register stores a data type during tracking.
Error Error
SD5 to Number Meaning
common common SD5 Data type 10 S (Error) New
SD15
information information SD6
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10 (Empty)
SD11
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
*10 The description of the data type is as follows: QnPRH
b15 b14 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Each bit
0 0: Not sent
1: Being sent
Device data
Signal flow
PIDINIT/S. PIDINIT
instruction data
SFC execution data
System switching
request
Operation mode
change request
System data
512
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
• This register stores individual information corresponding to
the error code stored in SD0.
• There are the following eight different types of information
are stored.
• The error individual information type can be determined by
"individual information category code" stored in SD4.
(Values stored in "individual information category code"
correspond to the following 1) to 9), 12), and 13).)
1) (Empty)
2) File name/drive name
(Example) File name =
Number Meaning ABCDEFGH. IJK
SD16 Drive b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD17 42H(B) 41H(A)
SD18 File name 44H(D) 43H(C)
SD19 (ASCII code: 8 characters) 46H(F) 45H(E)
SD20 48H(H) 47H(G)
SD21 Extension 6 2EH(.) 49H(I) 2EH(.)
SD22 (ASCII code: 3 characters) 4BH(K) 4AH(J)
SD23
SD24
(Empty)
SD25
SD26
3) Time (value actually measured)
Number Meaning
SD16 Time : 1 s units (0 to 999 s)
SD17 Time : 1ms units (0 to 65535ms)
Error Error SD18
SD16 to SD19 QCPU
individual individual S (Error) New
SD26 SD20 LCPU
information information SD21
SD22 (Empty)
SD23
SD24
SD25
SD26
4) Program error location
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
Number Meaning
SD16
SD17 File name
SD18 (ASCII code: 8 characters)
SD19
SD20 Extension 6 2EH(.)
SD21 (ASCII code: 3 characters)
SD22 Pattern 7
SD23 Block No.
SD24 Step No./transition No.
SD25 Sequence step No. (L)
SD26 Sequence step No. (H)
*6 For extension names, refer to the table on Page 511,
Appendix 3 (1) (a).
*7 The description of the bit pattern is as follows:
15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 (Bit number)
0 0 to 0 0
(Not used) SFC block designation present (1)/absent (0)
SFC step designation present (1)/absent (0)
SFC transition designation present (1)/absent (0)
513
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
5) Parameter No. 6) Annunciator number /
7) CHK instruction
malfunction number
Number Meaning Number Meaning
SD16 Parameter No. 8 SD16 No.
SD17 SD17
SD18 SD18
SD19 SD19 QCPU
SD20 SD20
SD21
(Empty)
SD21
(Empty)
LCPU
SD22 SD22
SD23 SD23
SD24 SD24
SD25 SD25
SD26 SD26
*8 For details on the parameter No., refer to the following:
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals) for the CPU module used
8) Reason(s) for system switching failure
Number Meaning
SD16 System switching prohibition condition 9
SD17
SD18
SD19
SD20
SD21
Error Error SD22 (Empty)
SD16 to
individual individual SD23 S (Error) New
SD26 SD24
information information
SD25
SD26
*9 The following shows the description.
0 : Normal switching completion (default) QnPRH
1 : Tracking cable fault (cable
removal, cable fault, internal
circuit fault, hardware fault)
2 : Hardware failure, power OFF,
reset or watchdog timer error
occurring in standby system
3 : Hardware failure, power OFF,
reset or watchdog timer error
occurring in control system
4 : Preparing for tracking
5 : Time limit exceeded
6 : Standby system is in stop error
(except watchdog timer error)
7 : Operation differs between two
systems (in backup mode only)
8 : During memory copy from control
system to standby system
9 : Online program change
10 : Error detected by network
module of standby system
11 : System switching being executed
12 : Online module change in progress
514
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
9) Failure information
Number Meaning
SD16 Failure information 1
SD17 Failure information 2
SD18 Failure information 3
SD19 Failure information 4 QnUDV
Failure information 5 S (Error)
SD20 LCPU
SD21 Failure information 6
SD22 Failure information 7
SD23 Failure information 8
SD24 Failure information 9
SD25 Failure information 10
SD26 Failure information 11
12) File diagnostic information
Number Meaning
SD16 Failure information 1 (H) drive No. (L)
SD17
SD18 File name
SD19 (ASCII: 8 characters)
SD20 QnU
SD21 Extension*6 2EH(.)
Error Error LCPU
SD22 (ASCII: 3 characters)
SD16 to
individual individual SD23 Failure information 2 New
SD26 SD24 (CRC value that is read)
information information
SD25 Failure information 3
SD26 (CRC value that is calculated)
*6 For extension names, refer to the table on Page 511,
Appendix 3 (1) (a).
13) Parameter No./CPU No. S (Error)
Number Meaning
SD16 Parameter No.*16
SD17 CPU No. (1 to 4)
SD18
SD19
SD20
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
SD21
QnU
SD22 (Empty)
SD23
SD24
SD25
SD26
*16 For details on the parameter No., refer to the following:
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals) for the CPU module used
Error number
This register stores the error code where the error reset is QCPU
SD50 Error reset that performs U New
performed. LCPU
error reset
• If a battery voltage drops, the corresponding bit stores "1"
(turns on).
• This register remains on even after the battery voltage
returns to normal.
Bit pattern b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0
indicating 0
Battery low where Battery error for CPU module QCPU
SD51 S (Error) New
latch battery SRAM card battery alarm LCPU
*1
voltage drop SRAM card battery error
occurred
*1 These bits are not available for the Basic model QCPU,
High-speed Universal model QCPU, and LCPU. If an
alarm occurs, data can be held within the time specified
for battery low. The error indicates full discharge of a
battery.
515
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Bit pattern • This register has the same bit pattern as that of SD51.
indicating • After an alarm is detected (the alarm bit turns on), the alarm
where bit turns off if an error is detected (the error bit turns on). QCPU
SD52 Battery low S (Error) New
battery (Universal model QCPU only, except the QnUDVCPU) LCPU
voltage drop • This register stores "0" (turns off) when the battery voltage
occurred returns to normal.
Number of • A value stored in this register is incremented by 1 whenever
AC/DC times for the input voltage falls to or below 85% (AC power)/65% (DC
QCPU
SD53 DOWN AC/DC power) of the rating during operation of the CPU module. S (Error) D9005
LCPU
detection DOWN • The counter repeats increment and decrement of the value;
detection 0 32767 -32768 0
Number of Number of
This register stores the lowest I/O number of the module with QCPU
SD60 module with module with S (Error) D9000
a blown fuse. LCPU*9
blown fuse blown fuse
I/O module
I/O module
verify error This register stores the lowest I/O number of the module QCPU
SD61 verify error S (Error) D9002
module where the I/O module verify error has occurred. LCPU
number
number
S
Annunciator Annunciator This register stores the number of the annunciator (F number) QCPU
SD62 (Instruction D9009
number number detected first. LCPU
execution)
S
Number of Number of QCPU
SD63 This register stores the number of detected annunciators. (Instruction D9124
annunciators annunciators LCPU
execution)
SD64 When an annunciator (F) is turned on by the OUT F or SET F D9125
instruction, the F numbers are stored from SD64 to SD79 in
SD65 D9126
chronological order.
SD66 The number of an annunciator (F) turned off by the RST F D9127
SD67 instruction is deleted from SD64 to SD79, and F numbers D9128
stored later than the register where the deleted F number was
SD68 D9129
stored are shifted upward.
SD69 When the LEDR instruction is executed, the contents of SD64 D9130
SD70 to SD79 are shifted upward by 1. After 16 annunciators have D9131
been detected, detection of the 17th will not be stored from
SD71 D9132
SD64 through SD79.
SD72
SET SET SET RST SET SET SET
SD73 F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 LEDR
Table of
Annunciator S
SD74 detected SD62 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 (Number QCPU
detection detected) (Instruction
SD75 annunciator LCPU
number SD63 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 4 (Number of execution)
numbers annunciators
SD76 SD64 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 detected)
SD65 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 15
SD77 SD66 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 70
SD78 SD67 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 65
SD68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 0 New
SD69 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Number
detected)
SD72 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD73 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD79 SD74 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD76 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD77 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD78 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD79 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
S Qn(H)
Error codes detected by the CHK instruction are stored as
SD80 CHK number CHK number (Instruction New QnPH
BCD code.
execution) QnPRH
516
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register stores a continuation error cause.
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
SD81
SP.UNIT DOWN
AC/DC DOWN
BATTERY ERROR
FLASH ROM ERROR
SP.UNIT ERROR
ICM.OPE.ERROR
Continuation Continuation FILE OPE.ERROR QnUDV
SD81 REMOTE PASS.FAIL S (Error) New
error cause error cause LCPU
SNTP OPE.ERROR
DISPLAY ERROR
OPERATION ERROR
PRG.TIME OVER
F***(Annunciator)
FUSE BREAK OFF
SINGLE PS.DOWN
SINGLE PS.ERROR
• QnUDVCPU: The b9 is fixed to 0.
• LCPU: The b14 and b15 are fixed to 0.
This register stores a continuation error cause.
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
SD82
(2) (1)
QnUDV*10
(3)
LCPU*10
(1)UNIT VERIFY ERR.
(2)MULTI CPU ERROR
(3)Fixed to 0
• LCPU: All bits are fixed to 0.
Continuation Continuation
SD82 This register stores a continuation error cause. S (Error) New
error cause error cause
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
SD82
(3) (2) (1)
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
(4) QnUDV*9
(1)UNIT VERIFY ERR. LCPU*9
(2)MULTI CPU ERROR
(3)PID ERROR
(4)Fixed to 0
• LCPU: The b0 and b1 are fixed to 0.
SD84 This register stores a continuation error to be cleared in bit
Continuation Continuation QnUDV
pattern. U New
SD85 error clear error clear LCPU
For the LCPU, all bits are empty.
Corresponds to
SD90 D9108
SM90
Corresponds to • This register stores a value set for step
SD91 D9109
SM91 transition monitoring timer and the
number of an annunciator (F) that
Corresponds to
SD92 turns on if the monitoring timer times D9110
SM92
out.
Step Corresponds to
SD93 D9111
transition SM93 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
monitoring F number for Corresponds to
SD94 timer setting timer set D9112 Qn(H)
SM94
value value and F number setting Timer time limit U QnPH
(Enabled time over Corresponds to (0 to 255) setting QnPRH
SD95 (1 to 255s: D9113
only when error SM95
(1s units))
SFC program Corresponds to
SD96 • Turning on any of SM90 to SM99 while D9114
exists) SM96
a step is running will start the timer,
Corresponds to
SD97 and if the transition condition for the
SM97
step next to the active step is not met
Corresponds to within the timer limit, the set
SD98 New
SM98 annunciator (F) turns on.
Corresponds to
SD99
SM99
517
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores the transmission speed set in parameter Q00/Q01
Transmission Transmission S (Power-
when the serial communication function is used.
SD100 speed speed set in ON or New QnU*4
12: 1200bps, 24: 2400bps, 48: 4800bps, 96: 9600bps, 192:
storage area parameter reset) LCPU*7
19200bps, 384: 38400bps, 576: 57600bps, 1152: 115200bps
This register stores the communication setting set in
parameter when the serial communication function is used.
b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 to b0
Communicati Communicati S (Power- Q00/Q01
SD101 on setting on setting set ON or New QnU*4
storage area in parameter Since this area is reserved for Since this area is reset) LCPU*7
a system, storage data are variable. reserved for a system,
storage data are variable.
Write during RUN setting Sumcheck presence
0: Disabled 0: Absent
1: Enabled 1: Present
This register stores the transmission wait time set in
parameter when the serial communication function is used. Q00/Q01
Transmission Transmission S (Power-
0: No waiting time
SD102 wait time wait time set ON or New QnU*4
10 to 150: Waiting time (unit: ms)
storage area in parameter reset) LCPU*7
Default: 0
This register stores a transmission speed. (If no external
Qn(H)
device is connected, the default value, 1152, is stored.)
S New QnPH
96: 9600bps, 192: 19200bps, 384: 38400bps, 576: 57600bps,
QnPRH
1152: 115200bps
This register stores a transmission speed. (If no external
device is connected, the default value, 1152, is stored.)
This register stores a transmission speed set in parameter
CH1 S New QnU*3
Transmission when the serial communication function is used*8.
transmission
SD105 speed (RS- 96: 9600bps, 192: 19200bps, 384: 38400bps, 576: 57600bps,
speed setting
232) 1152: 115200bps
(RS-232)
This register stores a transmission speed. (When the
L02SCPU, L02SCPU-P, or RS-232 adapter is used, the
default value, 1152, is stored.)
This register stores a transmission speed set in parameter S New LCPU
when the serial communication function is used.
96: 9600bps, 192: 19200bps, 384: 38400bps, 576: 57600bps,
1152: 115200bps
Data sending This register stores the error code if an error occurs during Q00/Q01
Data sending
SD110 result storage data transmission when the serial communication function is S (Error) New QnU*4
result
area used. LCPU*7
Data Q00/Q01
Data This register stores the error code if an error occurs during
receiving
SD111 receiving data reception when the serial communication function is S (Error) New QnU*4
result storage
result used. LCPU*7
area
This register stores a battery consumption rate.
[Value range]
• 1 or 2: Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU,
Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, L02SCPU, L02SCPU-P,
Amount of Amount of QnU (except
L02CPU, L02CPU-P S (Status
SD118 battery battery New QnUDV)
• 1 to 3: Q06UD(E)HCPU, L06CPU, L06CPU-P, L26CPU, change)
consumption consumption LCPU
L26CPU-P, L26CPU-BT, L26CPU-PBT
• 1 to 4: Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU
• 1 to 5: Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU
518
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register stores a value indicating a cause that has the
battery life-prolonging function enabled. While this register is
other than "0", the battery life-prolonging function is enabled.
Battery life- Battery life- QnU (except
0:No factor S (Status
SD119 prolonging prolonging b15 to b2 b1 b0 1:Foctor New QnUDV)
change)
factor factor Fixed to 0 LCPU
b0: CPU switch setting
b1: Backup in execution by
latch data backup function
(to standard ROM)
• This register stores the number of a fuse-blown output
module (in units of 16 points) in the following bit pattern. (If
the module numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-
set numbers are stored.)
Bit pattern in
units of 16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
points, SD130 0
1 1
0 0 (YC0) 0 0 0 (Y80) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
indicating the 1 1
SD131 (Y1F0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
modules (Y1A0)
SD130 whose fuses 1 1
Fuse blown SD137 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
to have blown (Y7B0) (Y730)
S (Error) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
module
SD137 0: No Indicates a fuse blown state.
blown
fuse For a module whose number of output points exceeds 16
1: Blown points, only the bit corresponding to the output module
fuse number within the number of output points occupied by the
present module (in increments of 16 points) turns on.
Example: When a 64-point module is mounted on the slot 0,
only b0 turns on when the fuse has blown.
• Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new
one. The storage value is cleared by clearing the error.
• If the status of the I/O module changes from that obtained at
power-on, the module No. (unit: 16 points) is stored in the
following bit pattern. (When I/O module numbers have been
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
set by the parameter, the parameter-set numbers are
stored.)
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Bit pattern, in 1
units of 16 SD150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (X Y)
0
1
points, SD151 0 0 0 0 0 0 (X Y) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
190
SD150 I/O module indicating the
1
to verification modules with SD157 0 ( X Y ) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S (Error) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
7E0
SD157 error verify errors.
Indicates an I/O module verify error.
0: No
error For a module whose number of I/O points exceeds 16 points,
1: Error only the bit corresponding to the I/O module number within the
number of I/O points occupied by the module (in increments of
16 points) turns on.
Example: When a 64-point module is mounted on the slot 0,
only b0 turns on when an error is detected.
• Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new
one. The storage value is cleared by clearing the error.
Latest
volume of IP
packet
SD180
transferred
Latest data (lower
volume of IP The latest value of total IP packet size (byte), which was
digits) S (Status QnU*5
packet transferred per unit time (1 second), is stored. New
Latest change) LCPU*6
transferred Range: 0 to 4294967295 (FFFFFFFFH)
data volume of IP
packet
SD181
transferred
data (upper
digits)
519
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Maximum
volume of IP
packet
SD182
transferred
Maximum data (lower
volume of IP The maximum value of total IP packet size (byte), which was
digits) S (Status QnU*5
packet transferred per unit time (1 second), is stored. New
Maximum change) LCPU*6
transferred Range: 0 to 4294967295 (FFFFFFFFH)
data volume of IP
packet
SD183
transferred
data (upper
digits)
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "07032" or later
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later
*3 Modules having an RS-232 connector (excluding the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU)
*4 The following modules having an RS-232 connector support these areas:
• Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "13062" or later (For the Q02UCPU, the serial
number (first five digits) must be "10102" or later.)
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
*5 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "14022" or later
*6 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "14112" or later
*7 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "15102" or later
*8 The following modules having an RS-232 connector support these areas:
• Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "13062" or later (For the Q02UCPU, the serial
number (first five digits) must be "10102" or later.)
*9 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "16112" or later
*10 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "16111" or earlier
520
APPENDICES
(2) System information
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by
Corresponding
ACPU
Corresponding A
(When Set) CPU
D9
• This register stores the status of the CPU module switches
in the following bit pattern.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
3) Empty 2) 1)
Qn(H)
0: RUN QnPH
1): CPU switch status 1: STOP QnPRH
2: L.CLR
2): Memory card
Always OFF
switch
b8 through b12 correspond to SW1 S (Every
through SW5 of system setting switch 1. END
3): DIP switch
0: OFF, 1: ON. processing)
b13 through b15 are empty.
This register stores the status of the CPU module switches in
the following bit pattern.
b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Empty 2) 1) Q00J/Q00/Q01
1): CPU switch status 0: RUN
1: STOP
2): Memory card switch Always OFF
This register stores the status of the CPU module switches in
the following bit pattern.
Status of Status of
SD200 b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 New
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
switch CPU switch
QnU (except
Empty 2) 1)
QnUDV)
1): CPU switch status 0: RUN
1: STOP
2): Memory card switch Always OFF
This register stores the status of the CPU module switches in
the following bit pattern.
b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 to b0
S (when
RUN/STOP
Empty 2) 1) QnUDV
/RESET
1): CPU switch status 0: RUN switch
1: STOP changed)
2): SD memory card 0: OFF
lock switch 1: ON
This register stores the status of the CPU module switches in
the following bit pattern.
b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 to b0
Empty 2) 1)
LCPU
1): CPU switch status 0: RUN
1: STOP
2): SD memory card 0: Not usable
switch *1 1: Usable
*1 For the L02SCPU and L02SCPU-P, 2) is fixed at "0".
521
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
• This register stores the LED status information on the CPU
module in the following bit pattern.
• 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flashing.
b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Q00J/Q00/Q01
Qn(H)
8) 7) 6) 5) 4) 3) 2) 1) QnPH
QnPRH
1): RUN, 2): ERR., 3): USER*1, 4): BAT.*1, 5): BOOT*1, 6):
Empty*1, 7): Empty*1, 8): MODE*1 (0: Off, 1: Green, 2: Orange)
*1 For the Basic model QCPU, 3) to 8) are left empty.
• This register stores the LED status information on the CPU
module in the following bit pattern.
• 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flashing.
b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Status of S (Status
SD201 LED status 8) 7) 6) 5) 4) 3) 2) 1) New
CPU-LED change)
QnU
1): RUN, 2): ERR., 3): USER, 4): BAT., 5): BOOT*1, 6): SD
CARD*2, 7): Empty, 8): MODE
*1 For the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU, 5) is left
empty.
*2 For the CPU module other than the QnUDVCPU, 6) is left
empty.
• This register stores the LED status information on the CPU
module in the following bit pattern.
• 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flashing.
b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
LCPU
8) 7) 6) 5) 4) 3) 2) 1)
1): RUN, 2): ERR., 3): USER, 4): BAT., 5): Empty, 6): Empty,
7): I/O ERR., 8): MODE
• By specifying the LEDs in this register and turning SM202
from off to on, the LEDs can be turned off. The USER and
BOOT*1 LEDs can be specified.
• The LED to be turned off can be specified in the following bit
pattern. (Setting "1" turns off the LED and setting "0" does
not turn off the LED.) Qn(H)
QnPH
b15 b8 b4 b0 QnPRH
Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 QnU
USER LED
BOOT LED
Bit pattern of
LED off
SD202 LED that is *1 For the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU, the U New
command
turned off BOOT LED cannot be specified.
• By specifying the LEDs in this register and turning SM202
from off to on, the LEDs can be turned off. The USER LED
can be specified.
• The LED to be turned off can be specified in the following bit
pattern. (Setting "1" turns off the LED and setting "0" does
not turn off the LED.) LCPU
b15 b8 b4 b0
Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0
USER LED
522
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register stores the operating status of the CPU module in
the following bit pattern.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
2) 1)
Operating 1): Operating status 0: RUN S (Every
Operating of CPU 2: STOP D9015 format QCPU
SD203 status of END
status of CPU 3: PAUSE change LCPU
CPU processing)
2): STOP/PAUSE 0: Switch
cause 1: Remote contact
*1 2: Remote operation from programming tool/
serial communication, etc.
3: Internal program instruction
4: Error
*1 The item detected first is stored. (However, for the
Universal model QCPU and LCPU, the latest cause after
operation status change is stored.)
The LED display color of the LED status shown in SD201 1) to
8).
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
1)RUN LED
0: OFF
1: Green
2)ERR. LED
0: OFF
1: Red
3)USER LED
0: OFF
1: Red
LED
CPU-LED 4)BAT. LED S (Status
SD204 display 0: OFF New QnU
display color change)
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
color 1: Yellow
2: Green
5)BOOT LED *1
0: OFF
1: Green
6)SD CARD LED *2
0: OFF
1: Green
7)Empty
8)MODE LED
0: OFF
1: Green
*1 For the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU, 5) is left
empty.
*2 For the CPU module other than the QnUDVCPU, 6) is left
empty.
523
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
The LED display color of the LED status shown in SD201 1) to
8).
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
1)RUN LED
0: OFF
1: Green
2)ERROR LED
0: OFF
1: Red
LED 3)USER LED
CPU-LED 0: OFF S (Status
SD204 display 1: Red New LCPU
display color change)
color
4)BAT. LED
0: OFF
1: Yellow
2: Green
5)Empty
6)Empty
7)I/O ERR. LED
0: OFF
1: Red
8)MODE LED
0: OFF
1: Green
Priorities 1 to • The priority of the LED indication in the case of an error is
SD207 D9038
4 set by a cause number. (For the Basic model QCPU, only
Priorities 5 to the annunciator (cause number 7) is available.) D9039
SD208 • For the Universal model QCPU and LCPU, specify whether
8 format change
to enable or disable LED indication of the error that has
priority when an error occurs.
• The setting areas for priorities are as follows:
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
SD207 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1
SD208 Priority 8 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5
SD209 Priority 12 Priority 11 Priority 10 Priority 9
(Priority 11 is valid when Redundant CPU is used.)
(Priority 12 is valid when LCPU is used.) Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
LED Qn(H)
[Default value]
display QnPH
SD207 = 4321H (0000H for Basic model QCPU) SD208 = U
priority QnPRH
ranking 8765H (0700H for Basic model QCPU) (0765H for Redundant
Priorities 9 to QnU
SD209 CPU) New LCPU
12
SD209 = 00A9H (0000H for Basic model QCPU) (0B09H for
Redundant CPU, CBA9H for LCPU)
• No indication if "0" is stored.
• For the Basic model QCPU, the ERR. LED lights up upon
turn-on of the annunciator, if "7" is stored in any of Priorities
1 to 11.
• For the Basic model QCPU, the ERR. LED does not light up
upon turn-on of the annunciator, if "7" is not stored in any of
Priorities 1 to 11. However, even if "7" is stored, the error,
which makes CPU module operation stop (including the
error that is specified with a parameter), will be indicated
with the LED without condition.
This register stores the year (last two digits) and month in BCD
as shown below.
S
Clock data b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example: QCPU
SD210 Clock data (Request)/ D9025
(year, month) July, 1993 LCPU
U
9307H
Year Month
524
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register stores the day and hour in BCD as shown below.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example: S
Clock data QCPU
SD211 Clock data 31st, 10 a.m. (Request)/ D9026
(day, hour) LCPU
3110H U
Day Hour
This register stores the minute and the second in BCD as
shown below.
Clock data S
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example: QCPU
SD212 Clock data (minute, (Request)/ D9027
35 min, 48 s LCPU
second) U
3548H
Minute Second
This register stores the year (first two digits) and day of week
in BCD as shown below.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
1993, Friday
Clock data 1905H
S
(higher digits QCPU
SD213 Clock data Day of the week (Request)/ D9028
of year, day LCPU
0 Sunday U
of week) Higher digits of year (19 or 20) 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
SD220 • LED display ASCII data (16 characters) stored here. For the
Basic model QCPU, an error message (up to 16 ASCII
SD221
characters) is stored. (Including a message for the case the
SD222 annunciator is on)
SD223
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD224
SD220 15th character from the right 16th character from the right
SD225 SD221 13th character from the right 14th character from the right
LED
LED display S (When QCPU
SD226 display SD222 11th character from the right 12th character from the right New
data SD223 9th character from the right 10th character from the right changed) LCPU
data
SD224 7th character from the right 8th character from the right
SD225 5th character from the right 6th character from the right
SD226 3rd character from the right 4th character from the right
SD227 SD227 1st character from the right 2nd character from the right
• For the Basic model QCPU, Universal model QCPU or
LCPU, HMI data at the time of CHK instruction execution
are not stored.
Module to
Start I/O
which
number of the S (During
online
module that This register stores the value obtained by dividing the start I/O online QnPH
SD235 module New
is being number of the module that is being changed online with 10H. module QnPRH
change is
changed change)
being
online 10H
performed
0:
Automat
SD240 Base mode ic mode This register stores the base mode. S (Initial) New QCPU
1: Detail
mode
525
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
0: Main
base
only
Extension 1 to 7:
This register stores the maximum number of extension base
stage Number QCPU
units installed.
number of
extensio
n base
SD241 units S (Initial) New
0: Main
only
Number of 1 to 3:
This register stores the maximum number of connected
extension Number LCPU*9
extension blocks.
blocks of
extensio
n blocks
Base type
differentiation b7 b2 b1 b0
0: QA**B Fixed to 0 to
is Main base unit
installed 1st extension base Qn(H)
A/Q base Fixed to 0
(A 2nd extension base QnPH
differentiation when the
mode) to base is not QnPRH
1: Q**B is installed.
7th extension base
installed
(Q
mode)
Base type b4 b2 b1 b0
differentiation Fixed to 0 to
Installed Q
0: Base Main base unit
base
not 1st extension base Q00J/Q00/Q01
presence/a
installed 2nd extension base
bsence
1: Q**B is
to
installed
4th extension base
SD242 S (Initial) New
Base type
differentiation b7 b2 b1 b0
0: Fixed to 0 to
QA1S** Main base unit
B, 1st extension base
QA1S6 Fixed to 0
2nd extension base when the
ADP+A to base is not
1S*B, installed.
7th extension base
QA**B,
A/Q base
and • For the Q00UJCPU, the bits for the third to seventh QnU
differentiation
QA6AD extension bases are fixed to "0".
P+ A**B • For the Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU, the bits for
are the fifth to seventh extension bases are fixed to "0".
installed
/ Base
not
installed
1: Q**B is
installed
526
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
SD243 • The number of base unit slots set in parameter is stored.
When the number is not set in parameter, the number of
base unit slots used is stored.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Qn(H)
No. of base SD243 Extension 3 Extension 2 Extension 1 Main QnPH
SD244 slots SD244 Extension 7 Extension 6 Extension 5 Extension 4 QnPRH
QnU
• For the Q00UJCPU, the bits for the third to seventh
extension bases are fixed to "0".
• For the Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU, the bits for
the fifth to seventh extension bases are fixed to "0".
SD243 The number of slots used is stored in the area corresponding
No. of base
to each base unit as shown below. (The number of slots set in S (Initial) New
No. of base slots
the parameter setting.)
slots
Q00J/Q00/Q01
SD244 (Operation b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
status) SD243 Extension 3 Extension 2 Extension 1 Main
SD244 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 Extension 4
SD245 The number of slots where modules are actually mounted is
stored in the area corresponding to each base unit as shown
No. of base
below.
slots
Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
SD246 (Mounting b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
status) SD245 Extension 3 Extension 2 Extension 1 Main
SD246 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 Extension 4
When SM250 is turned on from off, the first two digits of the Qn(H)
S (Request
number, which is the last I/O number of the mounted modules QnPH
END)
Loaded Loaded plus 1, are stored. QnPRH
SD250 maximum maximum I/O The value obtained by adding 1 to the end I/O number of a New
I/O No Q00J/Q00/Q01
mounted module and dividing by 16 is stored.
S (Initial) QnU
Example 1:End I/O number 010F SD250 = 0011H
LCPU
Example 2:End I/O number 0FFF SD250 = 0100H
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
Number of
Indicates the number of mounted MELSECNET/10 modules or
SD254 mounted
MELSECNET/H modules.
modules
Indicates the I/O number of mounted MELSECNET/10 module
SD255 I/O No.
or MELSECNET/H module.
Network Indicates the network No. of mounted MELSECNET/10 QCPU
SD256
No. module or MELSECNET/H module.
Information from 1st module
Group Indicates the group No. of mounted MELSECNET/10 module
SD257
number or MELSECNET/H module.
MELSECN Station Indicates the station No. of mounted MELSECNET/10 module
SD258
ET/10, No. or MELSECNET/H module.
MELSECN Standby S (Initial) New
ET/H In the case of standby stations, the module number of the
SD259 informatio Qn(H)
information standby station is stored. (1 to 4)
n QnPH
SD260 Information QnPRH
Data configuration is the same as that of the 1st module
to from 2nd QnU*2
(SD255 to SD259).
SD264 module
SD265 Information
Data configuration is the same as that of the 1st module
to from 3rd Qn(H)
(SD255 to SD259).
SD269 module QnPH
SD270 Information QnPRH
Data configuration is the same as that of the 1st module
to from 4th QnU*3
(SD255 to SD259).
SD274 module
527
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores error detection status in the following bit
pattern.
Information Information Information
of 3) of 2) of 1)
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Empty
1st
module
2nd
module
3rd
module Qn(H)
SD280 4th QnPH
module QnPRH
1): When Xn0 of a mounted CC-Link module turns on, the
corresponding bit is set to 1 (on).
2): When either Xn1 or XnF of a mounted CC-Link module
turns off, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on).
3): When a mounted CC-Link module is not able to
communicate with the CPU module, the corresponding
bit is set to 1 (on).
The above modules are numbered in order of the start I/O
numbers. (However, the one where no start I/O number is set
Error in parameter is not counted.)
CC-Link
detection S (Error) New
error This register stores error detection status in the following bit
status
pattern.
Information Information Information
of 3) of 2) of 1)
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Empty
5th
module
6th
module
7th Qn(H)*4
module
SD281
8th QnPH*4
module QnPRH*5
1): When Xn0 of a mounted CC-Link module turns on, the
corresponding bit is set to 1 (on).
2): When either Xn1 or XnF of a mounted CC-Link module
turns off, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on).
3): When a mounted CC-Link module is not able to
communicate with the CPU module, the corresponding
bit is set to 1 (on).
The above modules are numbered in order of the start I/O
numbers. (However, the one where no start I/O number is set
in parameter is not counted.)
SD282 Points
assigned to D • The number of points assigned to D is stored with 32 bits.
(for internal (except the number of extended data registers)
SD283 device • The number of 32k or less points can be assigned to D.
extension)
Device
SD284 Points S (Initial) New QnUDV
assignment
assigned to
• The number of points assigned to W is stored with 32 bits.
W (for
(except the number of extended link registers)
SD285 internal
• The number of 32k or less points can be assigned to W.
device
extension)
528
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
SD286 Points
assigned to • The number of points assigned to M is stored with 32 bits.
SD287 M (for • The number of 32k or less points can be assigned to M.
Device extension) QnU*6
S (Initial) New
SD288 assignment Points LCPU
assigned to B • The number of points assigned to B is stored with 32 bits.
SD289 (for • The number of 32k or less points can be assigned to B.
extension)
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
529
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Number of
points
SD290 Stores the number of points currently set for X devices.
assigned for
X
Number of
points
SD291 Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices.
assigned for
Y
Number of
Stores the number of points currently set for M devices.
points
SD292 When 32769 or more points are assigned to M, 32768 (8000H)
assigned for
is stored.
M
Number of
points
SD293 Stores the number of points currently set for L devices.
assigned for
L
Number of
Stores the number of points currently set for B devices.
points
SD294 When 32769 or more points are assigned to B, 32768 (8000H)
assigned for
is stored.
B
Number of
points
SD295 Stores the number of points currently set for F devices.
assigned for
F
Number of
points
SD296 Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices.
assigned for
SB
Device
Number of
assignment
points QCPU
SD297 (Same as Stores the number of points currently set for V devices. S (Initial) New
assigned for LCPU
parameter
V
contents)
Number of
points
SD298 Stores the number of points currently set for S devices.
assigned for
S
Number of
points
SD299 Stores the number of points currently set for T devices.
assigned for
T
Number of
points
SD300 Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices.
assigned for
ST
Number of
points
SD301 Stores the number of points currently set for C devices.
assigned for
C
Number of Stores the number of points currently set for D devices. (The
points number of extended data register points is not included.)
SD302
assigned for When 32769 or more points are assigned to D, 32768 (8000H)
D is stored.
Number of Stores the number of points currently set for W devices. (The
points number of extended link register points is not included.)
SD303
assigned for When 32769 or more points are assigned to W, 32768 (8000H)
W is stored.
Number of
points
SD304 Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices.
assigned for
SW
530
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
16 bit
• Stores the number of points of index register (Z) used for the
Device modification
16-bit modification area. (Depending on the index
assignment of Number of QnU
SD305 modification setting for ZR in the parameter setting.) S (Initial) New
(Index points LCPU
• When "Use ZZ" is selected for "Indexing Setting for Device"
register) assigned for
in the Device tab of "PLC parameter", FFFFH is stored.
Z
SD306 Device Number of The number of points for ZR is stored (except the number of
assignment points points of extended data register (D) and extended link register
QnU*7
(Same as assigned for (W)). The number of points assigned to ZR is stored into this S (Initial) New
SD307 LCPU
parameter ZR (for register only when 1k point or more is set for the extended
contents) extension) data register (D) or extended link register (W).
SD308 Device Number of
assignment points
The total points of the data register (D) in the internal device
(assignmen assigned for
memory area and the extended data register (D) are stored as
SD309 t including D (for inside
a 32-bit binary value.
the number + for
of points extension)
SD310 set to the QnU*7
S (Initial) New
extended Number of LCPU
data points
register (D) The total points of the link register (W) in the internal device
assigned for
and memory area and the extended link register (W) are stored as
SD311 W (for inside
extended a 32-bit binary value.
+ for
link register extension)
(W))
• This register specifies the amount of processing time for
Time communication with a programming tool or another module.
Time
reserved • The greater the value specified is, the shorter the response Q00J/Q00/Q01
reserved for
for time for communication with another (such as a Qn(H)
SD315 communicati U New
communica programming tool or serial communication module) is. QnPH
on
tion However, scan time will increase by the specified time. QnPRH
processing
processing • Setting range: 1 to 100ms
A setting outside the above range is regarded as no setting.
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
Online
change
• While online change (inactive block) is executed (SM329 is
(inactive SFC block S (Status QnU*8
SD329 on.), this register stores the target SFC block number. New
block) number change) LCPU*13
• In other than the above status, this register stores FFFFH.
target block
number
Latch clear Latch clear
When 5A01H is set to SD339, SM339 will be valid. After the S (Status QnUDV*12
SD339 operation operation New
latch clear processing ends, this register is cleared to 0. change)/U LCPU*11
setting setting
531
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Number of
SD340 mounted Indicates the number of mounted Ethernet modules.
modules
SD341 I/O No. Indicates I/O No. of mounted Ethernet module.
Network QCPU
SD342 Indicates network No. of mounted Ethernet module.
No. LCPU*10
Group
SD343 Indicates group No. of the mounted Ethernet module.
No.
Information of 1st module
Station
SD344 Indicates station No. of mounted Ethernet module.
No.
SD345 Empty (The IP address of the 1st Ethernet module is stored in
Ethernet Empty
the buffer memory.) S (Initial) New Qn(H)
SD346 information
QnPH
Empty (An error code of the 1st Ethernet module is read with
SD347 Empty QnPRH
the ERRRD instruction.)
QnU*2
SD348 Information
Data configuration is the same as that of the 1st module LCPU*10
to from 2nd
(SD341 to SD347).
SD354 module
SD355 Information
Data configuration is the same as that of the 1st module
to from 3rd Qn(H)
(SD341 to SD347).
SD361 module QnPH
SD362 Information QnPRH
Data configuration is the same as that of the 1st module
to from 4th QnU*3
(SD341 to SD347).
SD368 module
b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
Not used Instruction reception
status of channel 1
Instruction reception
status of channel 2
Instruction reception
Ethernet Instruction status of channel 3
S
instruction reception Instruction reception
SD380 status of channel 4 (Instruction New QnPRH
reception status of 1st
Instruction reception execution)
status module status of channel 5
Instruction reception
status of channel 6
Instruction reception
status of channel 7
Instruction reception
status of channel 8
ON: Received (Channel is being used.)
OFF: Not received (Channel is not used.)
Instruction
reception Data configuration is the same as that of the 1st module
SD381
status of 2nd (SD380).
module
Ethernet Instruction
S
instruction reception Data configuration is the same as that of the 1st module
SD382 (Instruction New QnPRH
reception status of 3rd (SD380).
execution)
status module
Instruction
reception Data configuration is the same as that of the 1st module
SD383
status of 4th (SD380).
module
532
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
Number of
The number of CPU modules that comprise the multiple CPU Q00/Q01*1
SD393 multiple
system is stored. (1 to 4, Empty also included) QnU
CPUs
This register stores information on the CPU module types of
CPU No.1 to No.3 and whether or not the CPU modules are
mounted.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
SD394 Empty (0) CPU No.3 CPU No.2 CPU No.1
CPU
SD394 mounting Q00/Q01*1
information S (Initial)
CPU module mounted or CPU module type
not mounted 0: Programmable
0: Not mounted controller CPU
1: Mounted 1: Motion CPU
2: PC CPU module
Multiple
4: C Controller
CPU module New
system
information Q00/Q01*1
In a multiple CPU system configuration, the CPU number of
Multiple CPU Qn(H)*1
SD395 the host CPU is stored.
number QnPH
CPU No. 1: 1, CPU No. 2: 2, CPU No. 3: 3, CPU No. 4: 4
QnU
No. 1 CPU The operation information of each CPU No. is stored. (The
Q00/Q01*1
SD396 operation information on the number of multiple CPUs indicated in
QnU
status SD393 is stored.)
No. 2 CPU
b15 b14 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
SD397 operation Empty Classification Operation status
status S (END Q00/Q01*1
mounted
processing
No. 3 CPU 0: Not mounted QnU*7
1: Mounted error)
SD398 operation
status 0: Normal 0: RUN
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
1: Minor fault 2: STOP
No. 4 CPU 2: Medium fault 3: PAUSE
SD399 operation 3: Major fault 4: Initial QnU*3
status FH: Reset FH: Reset
*1 Modules whose function version B or later
*2 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU
*3 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU
*4 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "08032" or later
*5 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "09102" or later
*6 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later
*7 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU
*8 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "12052" or later
*9 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "13072" or later
*10 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "14112" or later
*11 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "15042" or later
*12 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "15043" or later
*13 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "15102" or later (excluding the L02CPU, L02SCPU, L02CPU-P, and
L02SCPU-P)
533
(3) System clock/counter
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Number of • This register is incremented by 1 for each second after the
1 second S (Status QCPU
SD412 counts in 1- CPU module is set to RUN. D9022
counter change) LCPU
second units • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0.
2n second 2n second • Stores value n of 2n second clock (Default is 30). QCPU
SD414 U New
clock setting clock units • Setting can be made between 1 and 32767. LCPU
Qn(H)
QnPH
2nms clock 2nms clock • Stores value n of 2nms clock (Default is 30).
SD415 U New QnPRH
setting units • Setting can be made between 1 and 32767.
QnU
LCPU
• This register is incremented by 1 for each scan of a scan Qn(H)
execution type program after the CPU module is set to QnPH
RUN. (Not incremented for each scan of an initial execution QnPRH
Number of type program.) S (Every QnU
Scan
SD420 counts in • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0. END New LCPU
counter
each scan processing)
• This register is incremented by 1 for each scan after the
CPU module is set to RUN. Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0.
• This register is incremented by 1 for each scan of a low-
Number of speed execution type program after the CPU module is set S (Every
Low speed Qn(H)
SD430 counts in to RUN. END New
scan counter QnPH
each scan • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0. processing)
• Used only for low speed execution type programs.
534
APPENDICES
(4) Scan information A
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Qn(H)
QnPH
Execution Program No. in Program number of program currently being executed is S (Status
SD500 New QnPRH
program No. execution stored as BIN value. change)
QnU
LCPU
Low speed Low speed
• Program number of low speed execution type program No. S (Every
execution execution type Qn(H)
SD510 currently being executed is stored as BIN value. END New
type program No. in QnPH
• Enabled only when SM510 is ON. processing)
program No. execution
Current scan This register stores the current scan time. (The time is D9018 format
SD520
time (ms value) measured in increments of 100s.) (in increments of 1s for change
the Universal model QCPU and LCPU).)
• SD520: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535).
• SD521: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900 (0 to
999 for the Universal model QCPU and LCPU)). S (Every
Current QCPU
END
scan time Current scan LCPU
SD521 Example: When the current scan time is 23.6ms, the processing) New
time (s value) following values are stored:
• SD520 = 23
• SD521 = 600
A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
module is set to STOP.
Initial scan time This register stores the scan time of an initial execution type
SD522
(ms value) program. (The time is measured in increments of 100s.) (in
increments of 1s for the Universal model QCPU and Qn(H)
LCPU).) S (First QnPH
Initial scan
• SD522: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535). END New QnPRH
time Initial scan time
SD523 • SD523: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900 (0 to processing) QnU
(s value) 999 for the Universal model QCPU and LCPU)). LCPU
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
module is switched from STOP to RUN.
Minimum scan This register stores the minimum scan time. (The time is
SD524
time (ms value) measured in increments of 100s.)
S (Every
Minimum • SD524: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535).
END New Q00J/Q00/Q01
scan time Minimum scan • SD525: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900)
SD525 processing)
time (s value) A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
module is switched from STOP to RUN.
Maximum scan This register stores the maximum scan time. (The time is
SD526
time (ms value) measured in increments of 100s.)
S (Every
Maximum • SD526: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535).
END New Q00J/Q00/Q01
scan time Maximum scan • SD527: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900)
SD527 processing)
time (s value) A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
module is switched from STOP to RUN.
Minimum scan This register stores the minimum scan time except that of an D9017 format
SD524
time (ms value) initial execution type program. (The time is measured in change
increments of 100s.) (in increments of 1s for the Universal Qn(H)
model QCPU and LCPU).) S (Every QnPH
Minimum
• SD524: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535). END QnPRH
scan time Minimum scan
SD525 • SD525: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900 (0 to processing) New QnU
time (s value) 999 for the Universal model QCPU and LCPU)). LCPU
A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
module is switched from STOP to RUN.
Maximum scan This register stores the maximum scan time excluding the D9019 format
SD526
time (ms value) scan time of an initial execution type program. (The time is change
measured in increments of 100s.) (in increments of 1s for Qn(H)
the Universal model QCPU and LCPU).) S (Every QnPH
Maximum
• SD526: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535). END QnPRH
scan time Maximum scan
SD527 • SD527: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900 (0 to processing) New QnU
time (s value) 999 for the Universal model QCPU and LCPU)). LCPU
A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
module is switched from STOP to RUN.
535
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Current Current scan This register stores the current scan time of a low-speed
SD528
scan time time (ms value) execution type program. (The time is measured in
for low increments of 100s.) S (Every
Qn(H)
speed • SD528: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535) END New
Current scan QnPH
SD529 execution • SD529: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900) processing)
type time (s value) A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
programs module is set to STOP.
Minimum Minimum scan This register stores the minimum scan time of a low-speed
SD532
scan time time (ms value) execution type program. (The time is measured in
for low increments of 100s.) S (Every
Qn(H)
speed • SD532: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535) END New
Minimum scan QnPH
SD533 execution • SD533: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900) processing)
type time (s value) A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
programs module is switched from STOP to RUN.
Maximum Maximum scan This register stores the maximum scan time excluding the
SD534
scan time time (ms value) time taken to the first scan of a low-speed execution type
for low program. (The time is measured in increments of 100s.) S (Every
Qn(H)
speed • SD534: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535) END New
Maximum scan QnPH
SD535 execution • SD535: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900) processing)
type time (s value) A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
programs module is switched from STOP to RUN.
END Stores the time from the end of a scan program to the start of
SD540 processing the next scan. (The time is measured in increments of
END time (ms value) 100s.) S (Every
processing • SD540: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535) END New Q00J/Q00/Q01
time END • SD541: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900) processing)
SD541 processing A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
time (s value) module is switched from STOP to RUN.
END Stores the time from the end of a scan execution type
SD540 processing program to the start of the next scan. (The time is measured
time (ms value) in increments of 100s.) (in increments of 1s for the Qn(H)
END Universal model QCPU and LCPU).) S (Every QnPH
processing • SD540: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535) END New QnPRH
time END • SD541: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900 (0 to processing) QnU
SD541 processing 999 for the Universal model QCPU and LCPU)). LCPU
time (s value) A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
module is switched from STOP to RUN.
Constant scan This register stores wait time for constant scan. (The time is
SD542 wait time (ms measured in increments of 100s.) (in increments of 1s for
value) the Universal model QCPU and LCPU).)
Constant S (Every
• SD542: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535) QCPU
scan wait END New
Constant scan • SD543: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900 (0 to LCPU
time processing)
SD543 wait time (s 999 for the Universal model QCPU and LCPU)).
value) A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
module is switched from STOP to RUN.
Cumulative
execution time
for low speed Stores the cumulative execution time of a low-speed
SD544 Cumulative execution type program. (The time is measured in
execution type
execution programs (ms increments of 100s.)
time for low value) • SD544: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535) S (Every
Qn(H)
speed • SD545: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900) END New
Cumulative QnPH
execution Cleared to 0 after the end of one scan of a low-speed processing)
type execution time execution type program.
programs for low speed A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
SD545
execution type module is switched from STOP to RUN.
programs (s
value)
536
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
Execution time
for low speed Stores the execution time of a low-speed execution type
SD546 Execution execution type program in one scan. (The time is measured in increments of
time for low programs (ms 100s.)
value) S (Every
speed • SD546: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535) Qn(H)
END New
execution Execution time • SD547: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900) QnPH
processing)
type for low speed Stored every scan.
SD547 programs execution type A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
programs (s module is switched from STOP to RUN.
value)
Scan program Stores the execution time of a scan program in one scan.
SD548 execution time (The time is measured in increments of 100s.) (in
(ms value) increments of 1s for the Universal model QCPU and
Scan LCPU).)
S (Every Q00J/Q00/Q01
program • SD548: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535)
END New QnU
execution Scan program • SD549: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900 (0 to
processing) LCPU
SD549 time execution time 999 for the Universal model QCPU and LCPU)).
(s value) Stored every scan.
A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
module is switched from STOP to RUN.
Scan execution
type program Stores the execution time of a scan execution type program
SD548 Scan
execution time in one scan. (The time is measured in increments of 100s.)
execution
(ms value) • SD548: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535) S (Every Qn(H)
type
• SD549: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900) END New QnPH
program Scan execution Stored every scan. processing) QnPRH
execution type program
SD549 A value in this register is cleared to "0" when the CPU
time execution time module is switched from STOP to RUN.
(s value)
Service
Qn(H)
interval
SD550 Module No. Sets I/O number for module that measures service interval. U New QnPH
measureme
QnPRH
nt module
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
Module service
SD551 interval (ms This register stores the service interval of a module specified
value) by SD550 when SM551 is turned on. (The time is measured Qn(H)
Service S
in increments of 100s.) New QnPH
interval time Module service (Request)
• SD551: Stores a ms value (storage range: 0 to 65535) QnPRH
SD552 interval (s • SD552: Stores a s value (storage range: 0 to 900)
value)
(5) Display unit information
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores a value corresponding to the language
Displayed Language
used on a display unit. Either of the following is stored: S (Status
SD581 language used on a New LCPU*1
• 1: English change)
information display unit
• 2: Japanese
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "12112" or later
537
(6) Drive information
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores a value indicating the type of used
memory card in the following bit pattern.
b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
0
Qn(H)
Drive 1 0: Does not exist
(RAM) type *1 QnPH
Memory card 1: SRAM card
QnPRH
types 0: Does not exist
QnU (except
Drive 2 (1: SRAM)
(ROM) type *1 2: ATA card
QnUDV)
3: Flash card
S (Initial
Memory *1 For the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU, the
SD600 and card New
card types drive 1 (RAM) type and drive 2 (ROM) type are fixed at removal)
"0".
This register stores a value indicating the type of used
memory card in the following bit pattern.
b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
0
SD memory QnUDV
card types LCPU
Drive 1 0: Does not exist
(RAM) type
(Fixed to 0)
Drive 2 0: Does not exist
(SD) type 4: SD memory card
Qn(H)
Drive 1
S (Initial QnPH
(Memory Drive 1 This register stores the drive 1 storage capacity (unit: 1K
SD602 and card New QnPRH
card RAM) capacity byte). (Free space value after formatting is stored.)
removal) QnU*2 (except
capacity
QnUDV)
This register stores the drive 2 storage capacity (unit: 1K
byte).*1 Qn(H)
Drive 2
QnPH
(Memory *1 For the Q2MEM-8MBA, a value stored to this register QnPRH
card ROM) depends on the product control number of the ATA card.
S (Initial QnU*2 (except
capacity Drive 2 For details, refer to the following.
SD603 and card New QnUDV)
capacity User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
removal)
Inspection) for the CPU module used
Drive 2 This register stores the drive 2 storage capacity (unit: 1K
(Memory byte). (Free space value after formatting is stored.)
QnUDV
card SD) If the capacity is 32768K bytes or more, the stored value will
capacity be 32767K bytes.
This register stores the usage status of a memory card in the
following bit pattern. (Each bit is on while the memory card is
being used.)
b0 : Boot operation (QBT) b8 : Not used
Memory Memory card Qn(H)
b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : Error history (QFD) S (Status
SD604 card use use New QnPH
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used change)
conditions conditions QnPRH
b3 : Device initial value (QDI) b11 : Local device (QDL)
b4 : File register (QDR) b12 : Not used
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) b13 : Not used
b6 : Not used b14 : Not used
b7 : Not used b15 : Not used
538
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register stores the usage status of a memory card in the
following bit pattern. (Each bit is on while the memory card is
being used.)
b0 : Boot operation (QBT) *1 b8 : Not used
b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : Not used
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used
b3 : Device initial value (QDI) *2 b11 : Local device (QDL) *4
b4 : File register (QDR) *4 b12 : Not used
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) b13 :Data logging setting (QLG) *5
Memory card b6 : Not used b14 : Not used
use b7 : Backup data (QBP) *3 b15 : Not used QnU*2
conditions
*1 This bit turns on at boot start and turns off at the
completion.
*2 This bit turns on when the writing of initial device values
is started and turns off at the completion.
*3 This bit can be used when the first five digits of the serial
No. is "10102" or later.
*4 For the QnUDVCPU, this bit is fixed at OFF.
*5 This bit is used only for the QnUDVCPU. This bit turns
on when data logging setting is registered and turns off
at the completion or stop of data logging.
This register stores the usage status of a memory card in the
Memory
following bit pattern. (Each bit is on while the memory card is S (Status
SD604 card use New
being used.) change)
conditions
b0 : Boot operation (QBT)*1 b8 : Not used
b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : Not used
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used
b3 : Device initial value (QDI)*2 b11 : Not used
b12 : Predefined protocol setting
b4 : Not used
(QPT)*5
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) b13 : Data logging setting (QLG)*3
b6 : Not used b14 : Project batch save/load and
b7 : Backup data (QBP) iQ Sensor Solution supporting
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
backup/restoring*4
SD memory b15 : Not used QnUDV
card use
*1 This bit turns on at boot start and turns off at the LCPU
conditions
completion.
*2 This bit turns on when the writing of initial device values
is started and turns off at the completion.
*3 This bit turns on when data logging setting is registered
and turns off at the completion or stop of data logging.
*4 This bit turns on while;
• The batch save function or the batch load function is being
executed.
• The iQ Sensor Solution data backup or restoration function
is being executed.
*5 This bit turns on while checking the predefined protocol
setting data and turns off at the completion.
Drive 2
storage
SD606
Drive 2 capacity
(lower bits) S (Initial
(Memory This register stores the drive 2 storage capacity (unit: 1M QnUDV
and card New
card SD) Drive 2 byte). (Free space value after formatting is stored.) LCPU
removal)
capacity storage
SD607
capacity
(upper bits)
Free space in
SD616 Free space drive 2 (lower
in drive 2 bits) This register stores free space value in the drive 2 (unit: 1M S (Status QnUDV
New
(Memory Free space in byte). change) LCPU
SD617 card SD) drive 2 (upper
bits)
539
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores the usage status of drives 3 and 4 in the
following bit pattern.
b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
0
Drive 3 Q00J/Q00/Q01
0: Absent
(Standard
RAM) type 1: Present
Drive 4
(Standard "3 (FLASH ROM)"
ROM) type
Drive 3/4 Drive 3/4 This register stores the usage status of drives 3 and 4 in the
SD620 S (Initial) New
types types following bit pattern.
b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
0
Qn(H)
Drive 3 QnPH
(Standard Fixed to 1 *1 QnPRH
RAM) type
QnU
Drive 4 LCPU
(Standard Fixed to 3
ROM) type
*1 For the Q00UJCPU, the drive 3 (Standard RAM) type is
fixed at "0".
This register stores the drive 3 storage capacity (unit: 1K
Q00J/Q00/Q01
byte).
Drive 3
(Standard Drive 3 Qn(H)
SD622 S (Initial) New QnPH
RAM) capacity This register stores the drive 3 storage capacity (unit: 1K
capacity QnPRH
byte). (Free space value after formatting is stored.)
QnU
LCPU
This register stores the drive 4 storage capacity (unit: 1K
Q00J/Q00/Q01
byte).
Drive 4
(Standard Drive 4 Qn(H)
SD623 S (Initial) New QnPH
ROM) capacity This register stores the drive 4 storage capacity (unit: 1K
capacity QnPRH
byte). (Free space value after formatting is stored.)
QnU
LCPU
This register stores the usage status of the drives 3 and 4 in
the following bit pattern.
b15 to b5 b4 to b0
0 0 0 0 0 0
Q00J/Q00/Q01
Boot operation (QBT)
0: Not used 1: In use
File register (QDR)
0: Not used 1: In use
Drive 3/4 This register stores the usage status of the drives 3 and 4 in
Drive 3/4 use S (Status
SD624 use the following bit pattern. (Each bit is on while the New
conditions change)
conditions corresponding drive is being used.)
b0 : Boot operation (QBT) b8 : Not used
Qn(H)
b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : Error history (QFD)
QnPH
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : SFC trace (QTS)
QnPRH
b3 : Device initial value (QDI) b11 : Local device (QDL)
b4 : File register (QDR) b12 : Not used
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) b13 : Not used
b6 : Not used b14 : Not used
b7 : Not used b15 : Not used
540
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register stores the usage status of the drives 3 and 4 in
the following bit pattern. (Each bit is on while the
corresponding drive is being used.)
b0 : Not used b8 : Module error log *2
b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : Not used
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used
b3 : Device initial value (QDI) *1 b11 : Local device (QDL)
b4 : File register (QDR) b12 : Not used
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) b13 : Data logging setting (QLG)*3
QnU
b6 : Not used b14 : Not used
b7 : Not used b15 : Not used
*1 This bit turns on when the writing of initial device values
is started and turns off at the completion.
*2 This bit can be used when the first five digits of the serial
No. is "11043" or later.
*3 This bit is used only for the QnUDVCPU. This bit turns
on when data logging setting is registered and turns off
at the completion or stop of data logging.
Drive 3/4
Drive 3/4 use S (Status
SD624 use This register stores the usage status of the drives 3 and 4 in New
conditions change)
conditions the following bit pattern. (Each bit is on while the
corresponding drive is being used.)
b0 : Not used b8 : Module error log
b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : Not used
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used
b3 : Device initial value (QDI)*1 b11 : Local device (QDL)
b4 : File register (QDR) b12 : Predefined protocol setting
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) (QPT)*4
b6 : Not used
b13 : Data logging setting (QLG)*2*3 QnUDV
b7 : Not used
b14 : Not used LCPU
b15 : Not used
*1 This bit turns on when the writing of initial device values
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
is started and turns off at the completion.
*2 This bit turns on when data logging setting is registered
and turns off at the completion or stop of data logging.
*3 For the L02SCPU and L02SCPU-P, this bit is fixed at
OFF.
*4 This bit turns on while checking the predefined protocol
setting data and turns off at the completion.
541
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores the cause of an error occurred when the
batch save function is executed.
• 0H: No error
• 100H: SD memory card not inserted
• 101H: Use of SD memory card stopped
• 200H: Save-target data size exceeded the capacity of
memory card
• 201H: Number of save files out-of-range
• 202H: Number of save folders out-of-range
• 300H: Write protection set to SD memory card
• 400H: SD memory card write error
• 401H: SD memory card removed
• 500H: Save-target data read error (program memory)
• 503H: Save-target data read error (standard RAM)
• 504H: Save-target data read error (standard ROM)
• 505H: Save-target data read error (SD memory card)
Project data Project data • 510H: Save-target data read error (system data)
SD634 batch save batch save S (Error) New LCPU*5
• 600H: The batch save function was executed during the
error cause error cause
latch data backup to the standard ROM.
• 601H: The batch save function was executed during online
change.
• 602H: The batch save function was executed with an FTP
client connected to and communicated with the CPU
module.
• 604H: The batch save function was executed while the CPU
module change function with SD memory card was being
executed.
• 607H: The batch save function was executed while the iQ
Sensor Solution function (data backup/restoration) was
being executed.
• 608H: The batch save function was executed while the file
transfer function (FTP client) was being executed.
• 701H: The batch save function was executed to the
program where "Execution Program Protection Setting"
was enabled with a block password.
This register stores the current status of the batch save
function.
Project data Project data • 0H: Not executed S (Status
SD635 batch save batch save
• 1H: Being executed
New LCPU*5
change)
status status
• 2H: Completed
• FFH: Error
542
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register stores the cause of an error occurred when the
batch load function is executed.
• 0H: No error
• 800H: Mismatch of CPU module models
• 801H: Batch-save/load-target data read error (SD memory
card)
• 802H: SD memory card removed
• 803H: No system file (SVLDINF.QSL) existed
• 804H: Mismatch of file password 32
• 805H: No specified folder existed or specified number out-
of-range
• 810H: Load-destination drive write error
• 820H: Load error of a file in use
• 821H: Format was executed while a file that is being used
existed.
• 900H: SD memory card not inserted
• 901H: Use of SD memory card stopped
Project data Project data
• A00H: Load-target data size exceeded the capacity of drive
SD636 batch load batch load S (Error) New LCPU*5
error cause error cause or memory card
• B00H: Write protection set to SD memory card
• C00H: The batch load function was executed during the
latch data backup to the standard ROM.
• C01H: The batch load function was executed during online
change.
• C02H: The batch load function was executed with an FTP
client connected to and communicated with the CPU
module.
• C04H: The batch load function was executed while the CPU
module change function with SD memory card was being
executed.
• C07H: The batch load function was executed while the iQ
Sensor Solution function (data backup/restoration) was
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
being executed.
• C08H: The batch save function was executed while the file
transfer function (FTP client) was being executed.
• C10H: CPU module in RUN or PAUSE status
This register stores the current status of the batch load
function.
Project data Project data • 0H: Not executed S (Status
SD637 batch load batch load
• 1H: Being executed
New LCPU*5
change)
status status
• 2H: Completed
• FFH: Error
This register stores the completion status of the directory
Directory Directory batch delete processing.
batch delete batch delete 0: Normally completed
SD638 S (Writing) New QnUDV
completion completion Other than 0: Error code
status status
When the delete processing is instructed, "0" is set.
Directory Directory
The status of the directory batch delete processing is
batch batch
SD639 indicated in percentage (0 or 100 %). S (Writing) New QnUDV
deletion deletion
• When the delete processing is instructed, "0" is set.
status status
Q00J/Q00/Q01
This register stores the number of a drive storing a file
Qn(H)
*1
register. QnPH
File register S (Status
SD640 Drive number New
drive change) QnPRH
*1 For the QnUDVCPU or LCPU, this register is fixed at
QnU*3
drive 3.
LCPU
543
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
SD641 This register stores the file name of a file register
(MAIN.QDR) in ASCII code.
SD642
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD641 2nd character (A) 1st character (M)
SD642 4th character (N) 3rd character (I)
S (Initial) Q00J/Q00/Q01
SD643 6th character ( ) 5th character ( )
SD643 SD644 8th character ( ) 7th character ( )
1st character of
SD645 2EH(.)
the extension (Q)
3rd character of 2nd character of
SD646
the extension (R) the extension (D)
This register stores the file name of the file register selected
by the parameter or the QDRSET instruction in ASCII code
(with an extension).
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Qn(H)
File register File register SD641 2nd character 1st character QnPH
SD644 SD642 4th character 3rd character New
file name file name QnPRH
SD643 6th character 5th character
QnU*3
SD644 8th character 7th character
SD645 1st character of 2EH(.)
extension
SD646 3rd character of 2nd character of
the extension the extension S (Status
change)
SD645 This register stores the file name of the file register selected
by the parameter in ASCII code (with an extension).
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD641 2nd character 1st character
SD642 4th character 3rd character
LCPU
SD646 SD643 6th character 5th character
SD644 8th character 7th character
SD645 1st character of 2EH(.)
extension
SD646 3rd character of 2nd character of
the extension the extension
Qn(H)
QnPH
S (Status
File register File register This register stores the data size of the selected file register QnPRH
SD647 change) New
capacity capacity (unit: 1K word). QnU*3
LCPU
S (Initial) Q00J/Q00/Q01
Q00J/Q00/Q01
Qn(H)
File register
File register This register stores the block number of the selected file S (Status QnPH
SD648 block D9035
block number register. change)*4 QnPRH
number
QnU*3
LCPU
Qn(H)
QnPH
Comment Comment This register stores the drive number of the comment selected S (Status
SD650 New QnPRH
drive drive number by the parameter or the QCDSET instruction. change)
QnU
LCPU
544
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
SD651 This register stores the file name of the comment selected by
SD652 the parameter or the QCDSET instruction in ASCII code (with
an extension).
SD653
SD654 b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Qn(H)
SD651 2nd character 1st character QnPH
SD655 Comment Comment file S (Status
SD652 4th character 3rd character New QnPRH
file name name change)
SD653 6th character 5th character QnU
SD654 8th character 7th character LCPU
1st character of
SD656 SD655 2EH(.)
the extension
3rd character of 2nd character of
SD656
the extension the extension
Boot
designation This register stores the number of a drive where the boot
SD660
file drive designation file (*.QBT) has been stored.
number
SD661 This register stores the name of a boot designation file
(*.QBT) in ASCII code (with an extension). Qn(H)
SD662
Boot
QnPH
SD663 operation b15 to b8 b7 to b0
S (Initial) New QnPRH
SD664 designation File name of SD661 2nd character 1st character
QnU*2
file boot SD662 4th character 3rd character
SD665 LCPU
designation SD663 6th character 5th character
file SD664 8th character 7th character
1st character of
SD665 2EH(.)
SD666 the extension
SD666 3rd character of 2nd character of
the extension the extension
This register stores the number of a drive where valid
parameters have been stored.*1
■CPU modules other than the QnUDVCPU
• 0: Drive 0 (program memory)
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
• 1: Drive 1 (SRAM card)
• 2: Drive 2 (Flash card/ATA card)
• 4: Drive 4 (standard ROM)
QnU
■QnUDVCPU
• 0: Drive 0 (program memory)
Parameter Parameter • 2: Drive 2 (SD memory card)
SD670 enable drive enable drive • 3: Drive 3 (standard RAM) S (Initial) New
information No. • 4: Drive 4 (standard ROM)
*1 For the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU, only
drives 0 and 4 are parameter-valid drives.
This register stores the number of a drive where valid
parameters have been stored.*1
• 0: Drive 0 (program memory)
• 2: Drive 2 (SD memory card) LCPU
• 4: Drive 4 (standard ROM)
*1 For the L02SCPU and L02SCPU-P, only drives 0 and 4
are parameter-valid drives.
545
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores the execution status of latch data backup
in the following bit pattern.
Presence/ Restoration at turning
Status absence of ON power supply in and
backup data after the next time
0 No backup data Absent Restoring not executed
Restoring executed in
Restore ready
1 the next time power
Status of completion
supply is turned ON
latch data S (Status QnU
SD671 Status display Restore execution
Restoring not executed New
backup 2 completion *1 Present change) LCPU
function 3 Backup execution wait*2 Restoring not executed
Restore repeated Restoring executed
4 execution ready whenever power supply
completion is turned ON
*1 Indicates status immediately after restoration.
*2 Indicates status after the CPU module is powered off
and then on while the CPU module is in the "2: Restore
execution completion" status.
This register stores the year (last two digits) and the month
when data were backed up in 2-digit BCD.
Backup time
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
SD672 (Year and
July, 1993
month)
9307H
Year Month
This register stores the day and the hour when data were
backed up in 2-digit BCD.
Backup time
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
SD673 (Day and
31st, 10 a.m.
hour) 3110H
Day Hour
This register stores the minute and the second when data
were backed up in 2-digit BCD.
Backup Backup time QnU
b0 Example:
S (At write) New
SD674 information (Minute and
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to LCPU
35 min., 48 sec.
second) 3548H
Minute Second
This register stores the year (first two digits) and the day of
the week when data were backed up in BCD.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
1993, Friday
1905H
Backup time
SD675 (Year and day Day of the week
of week) 0 Sunday
Higher digits of year (0 to 99) 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
546
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register stores the year (last two digits) and the month
when data were restored in 2-digit BCD.
Restore time
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
SD676 (Year and
July, 1993
month) 9307H
Year Month
This register stores the day and the hour when data were
restored in 2-digit BCD.
Restore time
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
SD677 (Day and
31st, 10 a.m.
time) 3110H
Day Hour
This register stores the minute and the second when data
were restored in 2-digit BCD.
Backup data
Restore time QnU
restoration b0 Example:
S (Initial) New
SD678 (Minute and
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to LCPU
information 35 min., 48 sec.
second)
3548H
Minute Second
This register stores the year (first two digits) and the day of
the week when data were restored in BCD.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
1993, Friday
1905H
Restore time
SD679 (Year and day Day of the week
of week) 0 Sunday
Higher digits of year (0 to 99) 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
Program
Write This register stores the progress of writing (transfer) to the
memory
(transfer) program memory (flash ROM) in percentage (0 to 100%). QnU
SD681 write S (At write) New
status display When a write (transfer) command is given, "0" is stored in this LCPU
(transfer)
(percentage) register.
status
SD682 This register stores the index value of write count of the
program memory (flash ROM)*1 up to the present in 32-bit
binary. When the index value exceeds 100 thousand times,
Program "FLASH ROM ERROR" (error code: 1610) occurs. (The index
Write count
memory value will be counted even after it exceeds 100 thousand.) QnU
index up to S (At write) New
SD683 write count LCPU
present
index *1 The write count does not equal to the index value.
(Since the maximum write count of the flash ROM has
been increased by the system, 1 is added about every
two writing operations.)
Standard Write This register stores the progress of writing (transfer) to the
ROM write (transfer) standard ROM (flash ROM) in percentage (0 to 100%). When QnU
SD686 S (At write) New
(transfer) status display a write (transfer) command is given, "0" is stored in this LCPU
status (percentage) register.
547
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
SD687 This register stores the index value of write count of the
standard ROM (flash ROM)*1 up to the present in 32-bit
binary. When the index value exceeds 100 thousand times,
"FLASH ROM ERROR" (error code: 1610) occurs. (The index
Standard Write count value will be counted even after it exceeds 100 thousand.)
QnU
ROM write index up to S (At write) New
SD688 LCPU
count index present *1 The write count does not equal to the index value.
(Since the maximum write count of the flash ROM has
been increased by the system, 1 is added to the index
value when the total write data size after the previous
count-up reaches about 1M byte.)
This register stores the cause of an error that occurred during
backup.
• 0H: No error
• 100H: Memory card or SD memory card not inserted
• 200H: Backup data size exceeded
• 300H: Write protection set to memory card or SD memory
card
• 400H: Memory card or SD memory card write error
• 500H: Backup data read error (program memory)
• 503H: Backup data read error (standard RAM)
• 504H: Backup data read error (standard ROM)
• 510H: Backup data read error (system data)
• 600H: Backup preparation was performed while latch data
was being backed up to the standard ROM.
• 601H: Backup preparation was performed during online
change.
• 602H: Backup preparation was performed with an FTP
client connected to and communicated with the CPU
Backup error Backup error module. QnU*1
SD689 S (Error) New
factor factor • 603H: Backup preparation was performed while the data LCPU
logging function was being executed.
• 605H: Backup preparation was performed while the project
data batch save/load function was being executed.
• 606H: Backup preparation was performed while any
specified file or folder was being deleted using a display
unit.
• 607H: Backup preparation was performed while the iQ
Sensor Solution function (data backup/restoration) was
being executed.
• 608H: Backup preparation was performed while the file
transfer function (FTP client) was being executed.
• 609H: Backup preparation was performed while the CPU
module data backup/restoration function was being
executed.
• 700H: A security key is set to the CPU module.
• 701H: Backup preparation was performed when "Execution
Program Protection Setting" was enabled with a block
password.
Stores the current backup status.
• 0: Before backup
• 1: Being prepared
Backup Backup S (Status QnU*1
SD690 • 2: Ready New
status status change) LCPU
• 3: Being executed
• 4: Completed
• FF: Backup error
Backup
Backup • This register stores the progress of backup to the memory
execution S (Status QnU*1
SD691 execution card or SD memory card in percentage (0 to 100%). New
status display change) LCPU
status • "0" is stored at the start of backup.
(percentage)
548
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
Stores the cause of an error that occurred in restoration.
• 800H: The CPU module model name does not match.
• 801H: The backup data file does not match or reading of
Factor of backup data from the memory card or SD memory card was
Restoration error not completed. QnU*1
SD692 S (Error) New
error factor occurred in • 810H: Writing backup data to the restoration drive is not LCPU
restoration completed.
• 811H: The standard RAM capacity for the restoration is
insufficient.
• 900H: A security key is set to the CPU module.
Stores the current restoration status.
• 0: Before restoration
Current
Restoration • 1: Being executed S (Status QnU*1
SD693 restoration New
status • 2: Completed change) LCPU
status
• FF: Restoration error (In automatic restoration, "0: Before
restoration" is stored at the completion of restoration.)
• This register stores the progress of restoration to the CPU
Restoration
Restoration module in percentage (0 to 100%).
execution S (Status QnU*1
SD694 execution • "0" is stored at the start of restoration. In automatic New
status display change) LCPU
status restoration, "0: Before restoration" is stored at the
(Percentage)
completion of restoration.
• This register stores the maximum number of executions of
the writing to standard ROM instruction (SP.DEVST) per
Specification Specification day.
of writing to of writing to • When the number of executions of the writing to standard
standard standard ROM instruction exceeds the number of times set by QnU
SD695 U New
ROM ROM SD695, "OPERATION ERROR" (error code: 4113) occurs. LCPU
instruction instruction • The setting range of this register is 1 to 32767. If "0" or a
count count value outside the range has been set, "OPERATION
ERROR" (error code: 4113) occurs at execution of the
writing to standard ROM instruction.
SD696 Available
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
Available S (Backup
memory in This register stores a free space value in a memory card in QnU (except
memory in in New
SD697 memory 32-bit binary. QnUDV)*1
memory card operation)
card
Free memory
card space at
SD696
Free backup This register stores a free space value in a SD memory card if
(lower bits) S (Backup
memory the free space is insufficient for storing the backup data and QnUDV
in New
card space Free memory resulting in a backup error. (unit: byte) This register is cleared LCPU
operation)
at backup card space at to "0" when backup is completed.
SD697
backup
(upper bits)
Backup data
SD698 size (lower
bits) S (Backup
Backup data QnU*1
This register stores backup data size in 32-bit binary. in New
capacity Backup data LCPU
operation)
SD699 size (upper
bits)
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later (except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU)
*2 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU
*3 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU
*4 On the Basic model QCPU, data is set at STOP to RUN or the RESET instruction execution after parameter execution.
*5 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "14042" or later
549
(7) Instruction-related register
Set by Corresponding
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation (When ACPU
CPU
Set) D9
SD705 Turning SM705 during a block operation enables all data Q00J/Q00/Q01
in the block to be processed to masked values according Qn(H)
Mask pattern Mask pattern U New
SD706 to the mask patterns stored in SD705 (in SD705 and QnPH
SD706 for double word data). QnPRH
SD715 The mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction are
SD716 stored as follows.
IMASK b15 b1 b0 S (During QCPU
instruction Mask pattern New
SD715 l15 to l1 l0 execution) LCPU
SD717 mask pattern
SD716 l31 to l17 l16
SD717 l47 to l33 l32
SD718 For use as replacement for accumulators used in A series QCPU
Accumulator Accumulator S/U New
SD719 programs. LCPU
Program No. Program No.
This register stores the program number of the program to
designation designation for Qn(H)
SD720 read it with the PLOADP instruction. (Specified range: 1 to U New
for PLOADP PLOADP QnPH
124)
instruction instruction
This register stores the message specified by the MSG
instruction.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD738 2nd character 1st character
SD739 4th character 3rd character
SD740 6th character 5th character
SD741 8th character 7th character
SD742 10th character 9th character
SD743 12th character 11th character
SD744 14th character 13th character
SD745 16th character 15th character
SD746 18th character 17th character
SD747 20th character 19th character
SD748 22nd character 21st character
SD749 24th character 23rd character
SD750 26th character 25th character
SD738 SD751 28th character 27th character
Message S (During
to Message storage SD752 30th character 29th character New Qn(H)
storage execution)
SD769 SD753 32nd character 31st character
SD754 34th character 33rd character
SD755 36th character 35th character
SD756 38th character 37th character
SD757 40th character 39th character
SD758 42nd character 41st character
SD759 44th character 43rd character
SD760 46th character 45th character
SD761 48th character 47th character
SD762 50th character 49th character
SD763 52nd character 51st character
SD764 54th character 53rd character
SD765 56th character 55th character
SD766 58th character 57th character
SD767 60th character 59th character
SD768 62nd character 61st character
SD769 64th character 63rd character
550
APPENDICES
Set by Corresponding
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation (When ACPU
Set) D9
CPU
A
This register stores the limit of each PID loop as shown
below.
Q00J/Q00
SD774
b15 to b8 b7 to b1 b0 /Q01*1
SD774 Loop8 to Loop2 Loop1
PID limit
0: With limit
setting (for
1: Without This register stores the limit of each PID loop as shown U New
complete
limit below. Qn(H)
SD774 derivative)
QnPRH
to b15 to b1 b0
QnU
SD775 SD774 Loop16 to Loop2 Loop1
LCPU
SD775 Loop32 to Loop18 Loop17
• Selects whether or not the data is refreshed when the
COM instruction is executed.
• Designation of SD778 is made valid when SM775 turns
ON.
b15 b14 to b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b0 to b14
SD778 0
0: Refresh not
performed I/O refresh
CC-Link refresh
Refresh 1: Refresh
MELSECNET/H
processing performed refresh
selection b15 Automatic refresh of Q00J/Q00/Q01*
intelligent function
when the 0: Service modules U New 1
COM/CCOM processing Automatic refresh of
Qn(H)*2
CPU shared memory
instruction is performed (Fixed to "0" for
executed 1: Service Redundant CPU)
Execution/non-execution
processing of communication with
programming tool
not
performed • Refresh between multiple CPUs by the COM instruction
is performed under the following conditions.
Data reception from another CPU: When b4 of SD778 is
"1"
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
Data transmission from host CPU: When b15 of SD778 is
"0"
• Select whether or not each processing is performed
when the COM instruction is executed.
SD778 • Designation of SD778 is made valid when SM775 turns
ON.
b15 b14 to b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD778 0
I/O refresh
b0 to b14 CC-Link refresh
0: Refresh not Refresh of CC-Link
IE Controller Network
performed and MELSECNET/H
Refresh 1: Refresh
Automatic refresh of
processing performed intelligent function
modules
selection b15 Qn(H)*4
Automatic refresh of
when the 0: Service CPU shared memory U New QnPH*3
(Fixed to "0" for
COM/CCOM processing Redundant CPU) QnPRH
instruction is performed Execution/non-execution
executed 1: Service of communication with
programming tool
processing
not • Refresh between multiple CPUs by the COM instruction
performed is performed under the following conditions.
Data reception from another CPU: When b4 of SD778 is
"1"
Data transmission from host CPU: When b15 of SD778 is
"0"
• When b2 of SD778 is 1, both the CC-Link IE Controller
Network and MELSECNET/H perform a refresh.
Therefore, when refresh point is large, processing time
for the COM instruction is extended.
551
Set by Corresponding
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation (When ACPU
CPU
Set) D9
• Select whether to perform each processing or not when
the COM/CCOM instruction is executed.
• The specification in this register is effective when
SM775 is on.
b0 to b6, b13 b15 b14 b13 b12 ... b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0: Refresh not 1/0 0 1/0 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0
performed
Refresh 1: Refresh (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)
processing performed
(1)I/O refresh
selection b15
(2)CC-Link refresh
when the 0: Service U New QnU
(3)CC-Link IE Controller Network and MELSECNET/H
COM/CCOM processing
refresh
instruction is performed
(4)Intelligent function module refresh
executed 1: Service
(5)Auto refresh using the QCPU standard area and I/O
processing
sharing of the multiple CPU system
not
(6)Auto refresh using the multiple CPU high speed
performed
transmission area of the multiple CPU system
(7)CC-Link IE Field Network refresh
(8)CC-Link IE Field Network Basic refresh
(9)Service processing (data communications with the
programming tool, GOT, or other external devices)
b0, b1, b3, b6,
b13 (Default: 0)
SD778 0: Refresh not
performed
1: Refresh
performed • Select whether to perform each processing or not when
b14 the COM/CCOM instruction is executed.
0: Data • The specification in this register is effective when
communica SM775 is on.
tions with
Refresh the display b15 b14 b13 b12 ... b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1/0 1/0 1/0 0 1/0 0 0 1/0 0 1/0 1/0
processing unit not
selection performed
(7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)
when the 1: Data U New LCPU
COM/CCOM communica (1)I/O refresh
instruction is tions with (2)CC-Link refresh
executed the display (3)Intelligent function module refresh
unit (4)CC-Link IE Field Network refresh
performed (5)CC-Link IE Field Network Basic refresh
b15 (6)Data communications with the display unit
0: Service (7)Service processing (data communications with the
processing programming tool, GOT, or other external devices)
performed
1: Service
processing
not
performed
552
APPENDICES
Set by Corresponding
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation (When ACPU
Set) D9
CPU
A
The mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction are
stored as follows.
b15 b1 b0
SD781 SD781 l63 to l49 l48
to Q00J/Q00/Q01
SD785 SD782 l79 to l65 l64
to to
SD785 l127 to l113 l112
Mask pattern
The mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction are S (During
of IMASK Mask pattern New
stored as follows. *1 execution)
instruction
b15 b1 b0
SD781 l63 to l49 l48 Qn(H)
SD781 QnPH
to SD782 l79 to l65 l64 QnPRH
SD793 QnU
to
LCPU
SD793 l255 to l241 l240
*1: The Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU cannot
use SD786 to SD793.
This register stores the limit of each PID loop as shown
below.
Q00J/Q00
SD794
b15 to b8 b7 to b1 b0 /Q01*1
SD794 Loop8 to Loop2 Loop1
PID limit
0: With limit
setting (for
1: Without This register stores the limit of each PID loop as shown U New
incomplete
limit below.
derivative) Qn(H)*4
SD794
QnPRH
to b15 to b1 b0
QnU
SD795 SD794 Loop16 to Loop2 Loop1
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
LCPU
SD795 Loop32 to Loop18 Loop17
553
Set by Corresponding
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation (When ACPU
CPU
Set) D9
Maximum
Specifies the maximum number of blocks used for the
number of
multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedicated
blocks used
instruction (target CPU=CPU No.1). When the multiple
for the
CPU high-speed transmission dedicated instruction is
multiple CPU
executed to the CPU No.1, and the number of empty
SD796 high-speed
blocks of the dedicated instruction transmission area is
transmission
less than the setting value of this register, SM796 is
dedicated
turned ON, which is used as the interlock signal for
instruction
consecutive execution of the multiple CPU high-speed
(for CPU
transmission dedicated instruction.
No.1)
Maximum
Specifies the maximum number of blocks used for the
number of
multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedicated
blocks used
instruction (target CPU=CPU No.2). When the multiple
for the
CPU high-speed transmission dedicated instruction is
multiple CPU
executed to the CPU No.2, and the number of empty
SD797 high-speed
Range of the blocks of the dedicated instruction transmission area is
transmission
maximum less than the setting value of this register, SM797 is
dedicated
number of turned ON, which is used as the interlock signal for
instruction
blocks: consecutive execution of the multiple CPU high-speed
(for CPU U (At 1
1 to 7 (default: 2) transmission dedicated instruction.
No.2) scan after New QnU*5
Maximum RUN)
If the number out Specifies the maximum number of blocks used for the
number of of the range is multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedicated
blocks used set, the number instruction (target CPU=CPU No.3). When the multiple
for the
7 is set.*6 CPU high-speed transmission dedicated instruction is
multiple CPU
executed to the CPU No.3, and the number of empty
SD798 high-speed
blocks of the dedicated instruction transmission area is
transmission
less than the setting value of this register, SM798 is
dedicated
turned ON, which is used as the interlock signal for
instruction
consecutive execution of the multiple CPU high-speed
(for CPU
transmission dedicated instruction.
No.3)
Maximum Specifies the maximum number of blocks used for the
number of multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedicated
blocks used instruction (target CPU=CPU No.4). When the multiple
for the CPU high-speed transmission dedicated instruction is
multiple CPU executed to the CPU No.4, and the number of empty
SD799
high-speed blocks of the dedicated instruction transmission area is
transmission less than the setting value of this register, SM799 is
dedicated turned ON, which is used as the interlock signal for
instruction for consecutive execution of the multiple CPU high-speed
CPU No.4) transmission dedicated instruction.
*1 Modules whose function version B or later
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "04012" or later
*3 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "07032" or later
*4 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "09012" or later
*5 Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU
*6 The range is 1 to 9 (default: 2) for the Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, and Q06UDHCPU whose serial number (first five
digits) is "10012" or earlier. If the number out of the range is set, the number 9 is set.
554
APPENDICES
(8) Debugging A
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Real-time
Real-time
monitor free The free buffer capacity of realtime monitor is stored in units
monitor free S (Status
SD830 buffer of K bytes. A smaller value leads to a higher probability of the New LCPU*2
buffer change)
capacity (K occurrence of processing overflow.
capacity
bytes)
This register indicates the status of the debug function usage
as shown below.
0: Forced on/off for external I/O
1: Executional conditioned device test
2 to 15: Empty (fixed at 0)
Debug Debug
S (Status QnU*1
SD840 function function b15 to b2 b1 b0 New
change) LCPU
usage usage 0
Forced ON/OFF for
external I/O
Executional conditioned
device test
(0: Not used, 1: Used)
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later
*2 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "16072" or later
(9) Latch area
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register is used to specify the number of the folder
targeted for auto loading. S (When
Auto loading Auto loading 0 (default):"AutoLoad" folder auto
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
SD909 target folder target folder 1 to 99:"AutoLoad**" folder (The folder number can be loading is New LCPU*3
number number specified at ** (01 to 99).) completed)/
The value 0 is stored upon successful completion of auto U
loading.
555
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Set the execution timing of automatic backup with bit pattern.
(OFF: Invalid, ON: Valid)
b15 b10 b5 b1 b0
b0: Automatic backup setting by specification of day and
time
Backup b1: Automatic backup setting by specification of time and
SD910
function setting day of the week
b5: Upper limit status setting for the number of backup
data*5
b10: Retry execution for the automatic backup*5
b15: Setting for the automatic backup at occurrence of the
CPU stop error
(Multiple execution timings can be set.)
Set the day when an automatic backup by specification of
day and time is operated in BCD.
b15 … b12 b11 … b8 b7 … b4 b3 … b0
Day and time
setting for
SD912
automatic
backup [day] (1) (2)
(1) Fixed to 00
(2) Day (1 to 31)
Example:On the 15th of each month, SD912 = 0015H
Set the hour and minute when an automatic backup by
specification of the day and time is operated in BCD.
CPU module U
data Day and time b15 … b12 b11 … b8 b7 … b4 b3 … b0
backup/rest setting for
SD913 oration automatic New QnUDV*4
function backup [hour (1) (2)
(backup and minute]
(1) Hour (0 to 23)
function)
(2) Minute (0 to 59)
Example:For 8:30, SD913 = 0830H
Set the hour and minute when an automatic backup by
specification of the time and day of the week is operated in
BCD.
Time and day
of the week b15 … b12 b11 … b8 b7 … b4 b3 … b0
setting for
SD914
automatic
backup [hour (1) (2)
and minute]
(1) Hour (0 to 23)
(2) Minute (0 to 59)
Example:For 8:30, SD914 = 0830H
Set the day of the week when an automatic backup by
specification of the time and day of the week is operated in
Time and day
the following bit pattern. (OFF: Invalid, ON: Valid)
of the week
setting for
SD915 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
automatic
backup [day of
b0: Sunday, b1: Monday, b2: Tuesday, b3: Wednesday, b4:
the week]
Thursday, b5: Friday, b6: Saturday
(Multiple setting can be set simultaneously)
This register stores the cause of an error that occurred
Cause of error during backup.
SD916 occurred at 0H: No error S (Error)
backup Other than 0H: Error code (Page 411, Appendix 1.11)
("0" is stored at start of a backup of the CPU module.)
556
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
Set the data to be restored.
Restoration
0: Whole target data
SD917 target data
1: Device data only
setting
2: Whole target data except for device data
Set the restoration method with bit pattern. (OFF: Invalid,
ON: Valid)
b15b14b13 b1 b0
Restoration b0: Automatic restoration setting
SD918
function setting b1: Setting for the format at the automatic restoration
b13: Restoration setting for the latest data
b14: Restoration setting for the special relay and special
register
b15: Setting for the continuous operation from the state at
backup
U
Restoration Set the date stamp folder to be restored in BCD.
SD919 CPU module target folder
data [year] b15 … b8 b7 … b0 New QnUDV*4
backup/rest SD919 (1) (2)
oration b15 … b8 b7 … b0
function SD920 (3) (4)
(restoration Restoration
function) 1) Year (first two digits) (0 to 99)
target folder
SD920 2) Year (last two digits) (0 to 99)
[month and
3) Month (1 to 12)
day]
4) Day (1 to 31)
Example:For the date stamp folder "20150615", SD919 =
2015H, SD920 = 0615H.
Restoration Set the target folder to be restored.
SD921 target folder 1 to 32767:Serial number of the backup folder in the date
[Number] stamp folder (00001 to 32767)
Cause of error Store an error code of the error occurred during restoration.
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
occurred 0H: No error
SD922 S (Error)
during Other than 0H: Error code (Page 411, Appendix 1.11)
restoration ("0" is stored at start of a restoration of the CPU module.)
Upper limit
value status for This register stores the value (1 to 100) that is set to S (Status
SD923 New QnUDV*5
the number SD1928. If bit5 of SD910 is off, 0 is stored. change)
backup data
557
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores the device name that detected device
memory data change.
Value Device name Value Device name Value Device name
0 undetected 8 L 16 C (contact, coil)
1 Device used 9 B 17 T (current value)
SD927 Device name by system
2 10 F 18 ST (current value)
3 SM 11 SB 19 C (current value)
4 SD 12 V 20 D
5 X 13 S 21 W
6 Y 14 T (contact, coil) 22 SW
7 M 15 ST (contact, coil) -1 unidentified
This register stores the device number that detected device
memory data change (lower word)
1) Word devices (SD, T (current value), ST (current
value), C (current value), D, W, SW)
The device number that detected an error is stored.
Example: When SD927 stores 20 and SD928 stores 10,
Device "RAM ERROR" (error code: 1161) is detected at D10.
information
during "RAM 2) Bit devices (SM, X, Y, M, L, B, F, SB, V, S) QnU*1
S (Error) New
ERROR" The device number that detected an error is stored in units of LCPU*2
(error code: 16 points.
1161) Example: When SD927 stores 9 and SD928 stores 48, "RAM
ERROR" (error code: 1161) is detected at any of B30 to B3F.
Device number stored in SD928
SD928 Device number B3F B30
An error is detected at any of them.
3) T (contact, coil), ST (contact, coil), C (contact, coil)
The device number that detected an error is stored in units of
8 points.
Example: When SD927 stores 14 and SD928 stores 48,
"RAM ERROR" (error code: 1161) is detected at any of T48
to T55.
Device number stored in SD928
T55 T48
An error is detected at any of them.
4) When the device number cannot be determined
"0" (fixed value) is stored.
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "13022" or later
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "13102" or later
*3 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "14042" or later
*4 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "17103" or later
*5 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "18052" or later
558
APPENDICES
(10)Redundant CPU information (host system CPU information*1) A
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores a value indicating the completion status
of the latest memory data copy from the control system to
Latest status the standby system.
History of
of memory 1) The value same as the SD1596 value is stored at
memory copy
copy from completion or abend of the memory data copy from the
from control S (Status
SD952 control control system to the standby system. New QnPRH
system to change)
system to 2) Since data have been backed up in case of power
standby
standby failure, this register holds the value indicating the
system
system latest memory data copy status from the control
system to the standby system.
3) This register is cleared to 0 by latch clear.
*1 The information of the host CPU module is stored.
(11)Remote password count
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Direct
SD979 MELSOFT
connection
SD980
Connection 1
to
to 16
SD995
Count of
MELSOFT This register stores the number of mismatched password
unlock S (Status QnU*1
SD997 connection entries. New
processing change) LCPU*1
using UDP port Range: 0 to 0FFFEH (0FFFFH when the range is exceeded)
failures
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
MELSOFT
SD998 connection
using TCP port
FTP
SD999 communication
port
*1 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU and Built-in Ethernet port LCPU
559
(12)Conversion from A series to Q or L series
The special register (D9000 to D9255) for ACPU corresponds to the special register (SD1000 to SD1255) for
QCPU or LCPU after the A to Q/L conversion. (Note that the Basic model QCPU and Redundant CPU do not
support the A to Q/L conversion.)
All data in this area of the special register are set by system (cannot be set by user using a program). To set data
by user, correct the program using the special register for QCPU or LCPU. The special register (D9200 to
D9255), however, includes the areas that can be set by user. For those areas, data can be set by user in the
converted special register (SD1200 to SD1255) as well. For details on the special register for ACPU, refer to the
following.
User's manual for the CPU module used
Type MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B Data Link System Reference Manual
To use the converted special register in the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Universal model QCPU, or
LCPU, check "Use special relay/special register from SM/SD1000" under "A-PLC Compatibility Setting".
Project window [Parameter] [PLC Parameter] [PLC System]
Note that the processing time will increase when the converted special register is used.
[How to read the Special Register for Modification column]
• If the special register number for QCPU or LCPU is provided, correct the program using it.
• means that the converted special register can be used.
• means that the special register cannot be used in QCPU or LCPU.
Special Special
ACPU
register register Corresponding
special Name Meaning Explanation
after after CPU
register
conversion modification
• If a module with blown fuse is detected, the lowest first
I/O number of the module is stored in hexadecimal.
(Example: If a fuse blown is occurred in the output Qn(H)
module with output number Y50 to Y6F, "50" is stored in QnPH
Number of module
D9000 SD1000 Fuse blown hexadecimal.) To monitor the number by a programming
with blown fuse QnU*1
tool, monitor in hexadecimal. (This register is cleared
when contents in SD1100 to SD1107 are all reset to "0".) LCPU*2
• Output modules on remote I/O stations are also checked
for blown fuse.
• If any fuse is blown, this register stores a number
corresponding to each setting switch number or to slot
number of the base unit.
AJ02 I/O module Extension base unit
Setting Stored Base unit Stored
switch data slot No. data
0 0 0 4
Number of module Qn(H)
D9001 SD1001 Fuse blown 1 1 1 5
with blown fuse 2 QnPH
2 2 6
3 3 3 7
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
• For the remote I/O station, the value of (module I/O
No./10H) + 1 is stored.
560
APPENDICES
Special Special
ACPU
register register Corresponding
special
register
after after
Name Meaning Explanation
CPU A
conversion modification
• If the status of the I/O modules changes from that
obtained at power-on, the lowest first I/O number of the
module is stored in hexadecimal. (Example: If a module
verification error is occurred on the output module with Qn(H)
I/O module verify
I/O module output numbers Y50 to Y6F, "50" is stored in QnPH
D9002 SD1002 error module
verify error hexadecimal.) To monitor the number by a programming QnU*1
number
tool, monitor in hexadecimal. (This register is cleared LCPU
when contents in SD1116 to SD1123 are all reset to "0".)
• I/O module verification is conducted on I/O modules on
remote I/O stations.
• A value stored in this register is incremented by one
whenever the input voltage falls to or below 85% (AC
Qn(H)
power) or 65% (DC power) of the rating during operation
AC DOWN Number of times QnPH
D9005 SD1005 - of the CPU module.
counter for AC DOWN QnU*1
• The counter starts the routine: counts up from 0 to 32767,
LCPU
then counts down to -32768 and then again counts up to
0.
Self-
Self-diagnostic This register stores the error code of an error detected by
D9008 SD1008 SD0 diagnostic
error number self-diagnostics.
error
• When any of F0 to F2047 (default device setting) is Qn(H)
turned on by the OUT F or SET F instruction, the F QnPH
F number at which number that has been detected earliest among the F QnU*1
Annunciator
D9009 SD1009 SD62 external failure has numbers that have turned on is stored in BIN code. LCPU
detection
occurred • SD1009 can be cleared by RST F or LEDR instruction. If
another F number has been detected, the clearing of
SD1009 causes the next number to be stored in SD1009.
If an operation error occurred during execution of an
Step number at
application instruction, the number of the step having the
D9010 SD1010 which operation
error is stored. The contents of SD1010 are updated upon
error has occurred.
every operation error.
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
If an operation error occurred during execution of an Qn(H)
Error step
application instruction, the number of the step having the QnPH
Step number at
error is stored. Because the step number is stored in
D9011 SD1011 which operation
SD1011 when SM1011 turns from off to on, the data in
error has occurred.
SD1011 are not updated unless SM1011 is cleared by a
user program
The I/O control mode that has been set is returned in any of
the following numbers.
I/O control I/O control mode Qn(H)
D9014 SD1014 • 0:Both input and output in direct mode
mode number QnPH
• 1:Input in refresh mode, output in direct mode
• 3:Both input and output in refresh mode
Operation status of a CPU module is stored as shown
below.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Remote RUN/STOP CPU module switch
by computer
0 RUN
0 RUN
STOP
1 STOP Qn(H)
Operating 1
2 PAUSE *1 QnPH
Operating status of 2 PAUSE *1
D9015 SD1015 SD203 status of 3 STEP RUN
CPU QnU*1
CPU Remains the same in
remote RUN/STOP LCPU
mode.
Status in program Remote RUN/STOP
by parameter setting
0 Except below
0 RUN
STOP
1 1 STOP
Instruction execution
2 PAUSE *1
*1 For the High Performance model QCPU and Process
CPU, if the CPU module is running and SM1040 is off,
the CPU module remains in the RUN status even
though it is set to the PAUSE status.
561
Special Special
ACPU
register register Corresponding
special Name Meaning Explanation
after after CPU
register
conversion modification
0: Main program
(ROM)
1: Main program
(RAM)
2: Subprogram
1 (RAM)
3: Subprogram
2 (RAM)
4: Subprogram
3 (RAM)
5: Subprogram
1 (ROM)
Program This register stores any of the values from 0 to B, indicating Qn(H)
D9016 SD1016 6: Subprogram
number which program is currently running. QnPH
2 (ROM)
7: Subprogram
3 (ROM)
8: Main program
(E2PROM)
9: Subprogram
1 (E2PROM)
A: Subprogram
2 (E2PROM)
B: Subprogram
3 (E2PROM)
If a scan time value is smaller than the value in SD1017, the
Minimum scan
D9017 SD1017 SD524 SD1017 value is updated in the END processing. Therefore
time (10ms units)
the minimum value of scan time is stored in SD1017. Qn(H)
Scan time (10ms QnPH
D9018 SD1018 SD520 Scan time This register stores a scan time in every END processing.
units) QnU*1
If a scan time value is greater than the value in SD1019, the LCPU
Maximum scan
D9019 SD1019 SD526 SD1019 value is updated in END processing. Therefore the
time (10ms units)
maximum value of scan time is stored in SD1019.
This register stores an interval value in units of 10ms to run
Constant scan time a program at regular intervals.
Constant Qn(H)
D9020 SD1020 (User sets in 10ms • 0: No constant scan function
scan QnPH
units) • 1 to 200: Constant scan function available (executing at
an interval of setting value 10ms)
Qn(H)
Scan time (1ms QnPH
D9021 SD1021 Scan time This register stores scan time in every END processing.
units) QnU*1
LCPU
• The value is incremented by one every second after
Qn(H)
RUN.
1 second Count in units of QnPH
D9022 SD1022 SD412 • The counter starts the routine: counts up from 0 to 32767,
counter 1s. QnU*1
then counts down to -32768 and then again counts up to
LCPU
0.
This register stores the year (last two digits) and month in
BCD as shown below.
Qn(H)
Clock data (year, QnPH
D9025 SD1025 Clock data b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
month) 1987, July QnU*1
H8707 LCPU
Year Month
This register stores the day and hour in BCD as shown
below.
Qn(H)
Clock data (day, b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example: QnPH
D9026 SD1026 Clock data
hour) 31st, 10 a.m. QnU*1
H3110 LCPU
Day Hour
562
APPENDICES
Special Special
ACPU
register register Corresponding
special
register
after after
Name Meaning Explanation
CPU A
conversion modification
This register stores the minute and the second in BCD as
shown below.
Qn(H)
Clock data (minute, QnPH
D9027 SD1027 Clock data b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
second) 35 min, 48 sec. QnU*1
H3548 LCPU
Minute Second
This register stores the day of the week in BCD as shown
below.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
Friday
Qn(H)
H0005
Clock data (day of QnPH
D9028 SD1028 Clock data
QnU*1
Day of the week
week)
0 Sunday
Always set "0" 1 Monday LCPU
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
Qn(H)
Extension Stores the block No. of the extension file register being QnPH
D9035 SD1035 SD648 Use block No.
file register used in BCD code. QnU*1
LCPU
D9036 SD1036 Designate the device number for the extension file register
for direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036 and SD1037
in BIN data. Use consecutive numbers beginning with R0 of
block No. 1 to designate device numbers.
Extension Device number
file register when individual Extension file register
for devices from 0
Block No.1
Qn(H)
to
D9037 SD1037 designation extension file 16383 area QnPH
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
of device register are directly
16384 Block No.2
number accessed to area
SD1037,SD1036
Device No. (BIN data)
to
D9038 SD1038 SD207 Priorities 1 to 4 • This register stores priority of errors to be indicated by the
ERROR LED (on or flashing).
• Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown
below.
LED display b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Qn(H)
priority SD207 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1
D9039 SD1039 SD208 Priorities 5 to 7 QnPH
ranking SD208 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5
• For details, refer to the following.
User's manual of the CPU module used
Type ACPU/QCPU-A (A Mode) Programming Manual
(Fundamentals)
To operate the STRA or STRAR instruction of a sampling
trace by turning on or off SM803 with a programming tool,
For
Step or time during use the value stored in SD1044 as the sampling trace Qn(H)
D9044 SD1044 sampling
sampling trace condition. QnPH
trace
• When "Each scan" is selected: 0
• When a timing is specified: setting value (Unit: 10ms)
• This register stores the block No. of the extended file
register used as a work area for executing the SFC
Block number of program.
Work area Qn(H)
D9049 SD1049 extension file • This register stores "0" when SM320 is off and when
for SFC QnPH
register empty area of 16K bytes or smaller is used (16K byte or
less is too small to be used as block No.1 for an extended
file register).
563
Special Special
ACPU
register register Corresponding
special Name Meaning Explanation
after after CPU
register
conversion modification
This register stores an error code of the error occurred in
the SFC program.
SFC • 0: No error
Error code
program • 80: SFC program parameter error Qn(H)
D9050 SD1050 generated by SFC
error • 81: SFC code error QnPH
program
number • 82: Number of steps of simultaneous execution exceeded
• 83: Block start error
• 84: SFC program operation error
Block number This register stores the number of the block in the SFC
Qn(H)
D9051 SD1051 Error block where error program where an error occurred. For error 83, the number
QnPH
occurred of the block where the program was started is stored.
• This register stores the number of the step in the SFC
Step number
program where error 83 occurred. Qn(H)
D9052 SD1052 Error step where error
• For error 80, 81, and 82, "0" is stored. QnPH
occurred
• For error 83, the block starting step number is stored.
Transition
This register stores the number of the transition condition in
Error condition number Qn(H)
D9053 SD1053 the SFC program where error code 84 occurred. For error
transition where error QnPH
codes 80, 81, 82, and 83, "0" is stored.
occurred
Error Sequence step This register stores the sequence step number of transfer
Qn(H)
D9054 SD1054 sequence number where condition and operation output in the SFC program where
QnPH
step error occurred error 84 occurred.
• This register stores the number of the step where a status
latch was executed.
• When a status latch was executed in a main sequence
Status latch program, the step No. is stored.
Status latch • When a status latch was executed in a SFC program, the
execution Qn(H)
D9055 SD1055 SD812 execution step block number and step number are stored.
step QnPH
number
number
Block No. Step No.
(BIN) (BIN)
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits
Data check of
PLC The serial communication module automatically reads and
serial Qn(H)
D9072 SD1072 communicat writes data in a single loopback test to perform
communication QnPH
ion check communication check.
module
Sets the time check time of the data link instructions
Register for (ZNRD, ZNWR) for the MELSECNET/10.
Qn(H)
D9085 SD1085 setting time 1s to 65535s • Setting range: 1s to 65535s (1 to 65535)
QnPH
check value • Unit: second
• Default: 10s (If 0 has been set)
Microcompu
ter
subroutine Depends on
For details, refer to the following. Qn(H)
D9090 SD1090 input data microcomputer
Manual for respective microcomputer package QnPH
area start package.
device
number
Qn(H)
Detailed Self-diagnosis This register stores description of the error cause of an QnPH
D9091 SD1091
error code detailed error code instruction error. QnU*1
LCPU
Start I/O
This register stores the first two digits of the start I/O
number of Start I/O number of
number of an I/O module, which is to be removed and Qn(H)
D9094 SD1094 SD251 I/O module I/O module to be
mounted online (with power on). QnPH
to be replaced
Example) Input module with I/O No. X2F0 H2F
replaced
564
APPENDICES
Special Special
ACPU
register register Corresponding
special
register
after after
Name Meaning Explanation
CPU A
conversion modification
This register stores a status of the DIP switch of the CPU
module in the following format.
• 0: OFF
• 1: ON
DIP switch DIP switch b15 to b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Qn(H)
D9095 SD1095 SD200
information information D9095 0 QnPH
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
D9100 SD1100 • The number of an output module whose fuse has blown
is stored in the following bit pattern (in units of 16 points).
D9101 SD1101
(If the module numbers are set by parameter, the
D9102 SD1102 parameter-set numbers are stored.)
D9103 SD1103
b15 b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D9104 SD1104
SD1100 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(YC0) (Y80)
D9105 SD1105
SD1101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9106 SD1106
Bit pattern in units 1 1
Qn(H)
SD1107 0 0 0 0 Y7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y7 0 0 0
of 16 points, B0 30
QnPH
Fuse blown
indicating the
module Indicates a fuse blown state. QnU*1
modules whose
fuses have blown For a module whose number of output points exceeds 16 LCPU*2
points, all bits corresponding to output module numbers
within the number of output points occupied by the module
D9107 SD1107 (in increments of 16 points) turn on.
Example: When a 64-point module is mounted on the slot 0,
b0 to b3 turn on when the fuse has blown.
• Output modules on remote I/O stations are also checked
for blown fuse. (This register must be cleared by a
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
program because the bit status remains unchanged even
after clearing the error.)
D9108 SD1108 • This register stores a value set for step transition
D9109 SD1109 monitoring timer and the number of an annunciator (F
number) that turns on if the monitoring timer times out.
D9110 SD1110
D9111 SD1111 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Step
D9112 SD1112 Timer setting valve
transfer Qn(H)
and the F number
D9113 SD1113 monitoring F number setting Timer time limit setting QnPH
at time out
timer setting (02 to 255) (1 to 255s (1s units))
• Turning on any of registers SM1108 to SM1114 activates
D9114 SD1114 a monitoring timer. If the transition condition for the step
is not established before the time-out time, the
annunciator (F) turns on.
565
Special Special
ACPU
register register Corresponding
special Name Meaning Explanation
after after CPU
register
conversion modification
D9116 SD1116 • If the status of the I/O module changes from that obtained
at power-on, the module No. (unit: 16 points) is stored in
D9117 SD1117
the following bit pattern. (When I/O module numbers
D9118 SD1118 have been set by the parameter, the parameter-set
D9119 SD1119 numbers are stored.)
D9120 SD1120 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
D9121 SD1121 SD1116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY
0
1
D9122 SD1122 SD1117 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY
190
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit pattern, in units
SD1123 0 0 0 0
1
XY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Qn(H)
I/O module of 16 points, 7B0
QnPH
verification indicating the Indicates an I/O module verify error
QnU*1
error modules with
For a module whose number of I/O points exceeds 16 LCPU
verification errors
points, all bits corresponding to I/O module numbers within
the number of I/O points occupied by the module (in
D9123 SD1123 increments of 16 points) turn on.
Example: When a 64-point module is mounted on the slot 0,
b0 to b3 turn on when an error is detected.
• I/O module verification is conducted on I/O modules on
remote I/O stations. (If normal status is restored, clear is
not performed. Therefore, it is required to perform clear
by user program.)
When any of F0 to F2047 (default device setting) is turned
Qn(H)
Number of Number of on by the SET F instruction, a value in SD1124 is
QnPH
D9124 SD1124 SD63 annunciator annunciator incremented by one (up to a maximum of 16). When the
QnU*1
detections detections RST F or LEDR instruction is executed, it is decremented
LCPU
by one.
D9125 SD1125 SD64 When any of F0 to F2047 (default device setting) are turned
D9126 SD1126 SD65 on by the SET F instruction, the annunciator numbers (F
numbers) that are turned on are stored in SD1125 to
D9127 SD1127 SD66 SD1132 in order.
D9128 SD1128 SD67 The F numbers turned off by the RST F instruction is
deleted from this register, and the F numbers stored after
D9129 SD1129 SD68
the deleted F numbers are shifted to the previous registers.
D9130 SD1130 SD69 When the LEDR instruction is executed, the contents of
D9131 SD1131 SD70 SD1125 to SD1132 are shifted upward by 1.
When there are eight annunciator detections, the next one Qn(H)
Annunciator
Annunciator is not stored in SD1125 to SD1132. QnPH
detection
detection number QnU*1
number SET SET SET RST SET SET SET
F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 LEDR LCPU
SD1009 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 (Number
detected)
SD1124 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 4 (Number of
D9132 SD1132 SD71 annunciators
SD1125 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 detected)
SD1126 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 15
SD1127 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 70
(Number
SD1128 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 65
detected)
SD1129 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 0
SD1130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD1131 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD1132 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
*1 The following modules support these areas:
• Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "16112" or later
566
APPENDICES
(13)Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, built-in Ethernet port LCPU, and built-in Ethernet A
function
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Total number
of files to be
Total number This register stores the total number of files to be processed
processed by S (END
SD1256 of files to be by the file transfer function (FTP client). New LCPU*7
the file processing)
processed The data is stored at the start of the transfer processing.
transfer
function
Number of
This register stores the number of files processed by the file
files
transfer function (FTP client).
Number of processed by S (END
SD1257 The data is cleared to 0 at the start of the transfer New LCPU*7
files processed the file processing)
processing. The data is incremented by one every time
transfer
processing of a file is completed.
function
MELSOFT
Stores Network numbers of the built-in Ethernet port set in
connection
network MELSOFT connection extended setting. (Valid when
extended
SD1258 numbers of SM1258 is ON) S (Initial) New QnUDV*8
setting
the built-in • 0: Not set
network
Ethernet port • 1 to 239: Network numbers
number
MELSOFT Stores Station numbers of the built-in Ethernet port set in
connection station MELSOFT connection extended setting. (Valid only when
SD1259 extended numbers of SM1258 is ON) S (Initial) New QnUDV*8
setting station the built-in • 0: Not set
number Ethernet port • 1 to 64: Station numbers
IP address
SD1260
(lower digits) This register stores an IP address of the built-in Ethernet
IP address port.
SD1261
(upper digits)
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
Subnet mask
SD1262 pattern
(lower digits) • This register stores a subnet mask pattern of the built-in
Ethernet port.
Subnet mask • When a subnet mask pattern is not set, "0" is stored.
SD1263 IP address in- pattern QnU*3
S (Initial) New
use (upper digits) LCPU*6
Default
router IP
SD1264
address • This register stores a default router IP address of the built-
(lower digits) in Ethernet port.
Default • When a default router IP address is not stored, "0" is
router IP stored.
SD1265
address
(upper digits)
MAC
address (5th
SD1266
and 6th
bytes)
MAC
address (3rd This register stores the MAC address of the built-in Ethernet QnU*5
SD1267 MAC address S (Initial) New
and 4th ports. LCPU*6
bytes)
MAC
address (1st
SD1268
and 2nd
bytes)
567
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores the operation result of the time setting
Stores function.
Operation
SD1270 operation • 0: Not executed
result
result. • 1: Success
0FFFFH: Failure
This register stores the year (last two digits) and the month
that the time setting function was executed in 2-digit BCD.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
SD1271 July, 1993
9307H
Year Month
This register stores the day and the hour that the time setting
function was executed in a 2-digit BCD.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
SD1272 31st, 10 a.m.
3110H
Day Hour
This register stores the minute and the second that the time
Stores time setting function was executed in a 2-digit BCD.
Execution acquired with
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example: S (Status QnU*1
SD1273 time time setting New
35 min., 48 sec. change) LCPU*1
function.
3548H
Minute Second
This register stores the year (first two digits) and the day of
the week that the time setting was executed in 2-digit BCD.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
1993, Friday
1905H
SD1274 Day of the week
0 Sunday
Higher digits of year (0 to 99) 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
Time setting function
This register stores the time required for a clock value to be
Stores time set on the CPU after being sent to the SNTP server.
Required
required for • Range: A0 to 0FFFEH (Unit: ms)
SD1275 response
clock time 0FFFFH when the above limit is exceeded.
time
acquisition. This register stores a value only when the operation is
succeeded. (When failed, a previous value remains.)
568
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
SD1276 This register is specified to forcibly invalidate a connection
by a program. After being specified invalid, the connection
stops communication and does not respond. (When a
remote password is used and frequent unlock processing
errors occur on a connection, this register is useful for
temporarily disabling access.)
b15b14 to b1 b0
SD1276
Connection 1
Specifies Connection 2
Forced
forced to
QnU*2
connection Connection 15 U New
SD1277 connection Connection 16 LCPU*1
invalidation
invalidation. b15b14b13b12 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD1277 0 0 0 0
MELSOFT
communication port
(UDP/IP)
MELSOFT
communication port
(TCP/IP)
FTP
communication port
Direct connection to
MELSOFT
• 0: Valid (default)
• 1: Disabled
This register stores the open completion status of a socket
communication or predefined protocol connection ("Open
System" parameter: "Socket Communication" or "Predefined
Protocol"). Bits for connections other than that of socket
communication or predefined protocol are always "0".
Open Stores open
b15b14 to b1 b0 S (Status QnU*2
SD1282 completion completion SD1282 New
change) LCPU*1
signal status Connection 1
Connection 2
to
Connection 15
Connection 16
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
• 0: Open processing is not completed.
• 1: Open processing is completed.
This register stores the open request status of a socket
communication or predefined protocol connection. Bits for
connections other than that of socket communication or
predefined protocol are always "0".
Stores open b15b14 to b1 b0
Open request SD1284 S (Status QnU*2
SD1284 request New
signal Connection 1 change) LCPU*1
status Connection 2
to
Connection 15
Connection 16
• 0: No open request
• 1: In open request
569
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores the receive status of a socket
communication connection. Bits for connections other than
that of socket communication are always "0".
b15b14 to b1 b0
SD1286
Connection 1
Connection 2
to
Connection 15
Stores Connection 16
Reception S (Status QnU*2
SD1286 reception New
status signal ■TCP (standard receive mode) change) LCPU*1
status • 0: Data not received
• 1: Data received
■TCP (fixed-length receive mode)
• 0: Data not received or received data size is not the size of
receive buffer.
• 1: Received data size reached to the receive buffer size.
■UDP
• 0: Data not received
• 1: Data received
This register stores a connection status of the built-in
Ethernet port.
Stores
Built-in
connection b15 to b11 b10 b9 to b0
Ethernet port SD1288 1/0 S (Status QnU*2
SD1288 status of New
connection change) LCPU*1
built-in
status
Ethernet port Connection status
0 : Not connected to or disconnected
from a hub or device
1 : Connected to a hub or device
Basic time-
Specify the basic time-out time to be used for APR
out time
Ethernet basic Response Wait in Ethernet processing. QnU*1
SD1289 setting for U New
time-out time • 0: 500ms (default) LCPU*1
Ethernet
• 1 to 65535: 1 to 65535ms
processing
IP address • Specify an IP address to be stored in the IP address
SD1292
(lower digits) storage area (flash ROM).
Range: 00000001H to DFFFFFFEH (0.0.0.1 to
223.255.255.254)
IP address • When writing to or clearing the IP address storage area
SD1293
(upper digits) (flash ROM) is completed, the values of the IP address
stored in the IP address storage area (flash ROM) are
stored.
Subnet mask • Specify a subnet mask pattern to be stored in the IP
SD1294 pattern address storage area (flash ROM).
(lower digits) Range: C0000000H to FFFFFFFCH (192.0.0.0 to
IP address 255.255.255.252), 00000000H (blank) S (Status QnU*3
New
setting Subnet mask • When writing to or clearing the IP address storage area change)/U LCPU*6
SD1295 pattern (flash ROM) is completed, the values of the subnet mask
(upper digits) pattern stored in the IP address storage area (flash ROM)
are stored.
Default • Specify a default router IP address to be stored in the IP
router IP address storage area (flash ROM).
SD1296
address Range: 00000001H to DFFFFFFEH (0.0.0.1 to
(lower digits) 223.255.255.254), 00000000H (blank)
Default • When writing to or clearing the IP address storage area
router IP (flash ROM) is completed, the values of the default router
SD1297
address IP address stored in the IP address storage area (flash
(upper digits) ROM) are stored.
570
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register stores an error factor occurred when writing to
the IP address storage area (flash ROM). (Links with
SM1294.)
Stores error • 0H: No error
IP address factor when • 100H: The values of SD1292 to SD1297 are out of the
storage area failing to S (Status QnU*3
SD1298 setting range. New
write error write to IP change) LCPU*6
• 200H: Write error
factor address
• 300H: Writing is not available because other function is
storage area
being executed.
• 400H: Writing is not available because the IP address
storage area is being cleared
This register stores an error factor occurred when clearing
the IP address storage area (flash ROM). (Links with
Stores error SM1297.)
IP address factor when • 0H: No error
storage area failing to S (Status QnU*3
SD1299 • 200H: Clear error New
clear error clear IP change) LCPU*6
• 300H: Clearing is not available because other function is
factor address
being executed.
storage area
• 400H: Clearing is not available because the IP address
storage area is being written.
Number of
times that
Built-in This register stores the number of times that packet data are
data are not S (Status
SD1395 Ethernet port not read due to receive buffer full. New QnU*4
read due to change)
counter Range: 0 to 65535 (0000H to FFFFH)
receive
buffer full
*1 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU and Built-in Ethernet port LCPU
*2 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later
*3 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "11082" or later
*4 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "12072" or later
*5 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "12112" or later
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
*6 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "15102" or later
*7 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "16112" or later
*8 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "17052" or later
571
(14)Predefined protocol function
Set by Corresponding
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation (When ACPU
CPU
Set) D9
The protocol number where an error has been detected
is stored.
• 0: No error
• 1 to 128: Protocol number
• 65535: Unidentifiable
SD1337
If the value 65535 is stored, the following reasons are
considered.
• The setting that the current version of LCPU does not
support is written.
• The protocol setting data is collapsed.
The setting type of the protocol setting data where an
error has been detected is stored. (The value will be
stored only when the written protocol number is within
the range of 1 to 128.)
• 0: Packet setting or component setting
• 1: Protocol detailed setting
SD1338
• 65535: Unidentifiable
If the value 65535 is stored, the following reasons are
Predefined Stores considered.
protocol setting information for • The setting that the current version of LCPU does not
data error identifying the support is written.
information (for error location • The protocol setting data is collapsed. S (Error) New LCPU*1
built-in/adapter of predefined The packet number where an error has been detected is
serial protocol stored. (The value is stored only when the setting type is
communications) setting data. 0 (packet setting or component setting).)
• 0: Transmitted packet
• 1 to 16: Received packet number
SD1339 • 65535: Unidentifiable
If the value 65535 is stored, the following reasons are
considered.
• The setting that the current version of LCPU does not
support is written.
• The protocol setting data is collapsed.
The component number where an error has been
detected is stored. (The value is stored only when the
setting type is 0 (packet setting or component setting).)
• 1 to 32: Component number
• 65535: Unidentifiable
SD1340
If the value 65535 is stored, the following reasons are
considered.
• The setting that the current version of LCPU does not
support is written.
• The protocol setting data is collapsed.
Number of
Stores the This register stores the number of protocols in the
protocols
number of protocol setting data registered through the predefined
registered (for S (Status
SD1341 protocols in protocol support function New LCPU*1
built-in/adapter change)
the protocol 0: No registration
serial
setting data. 1 to 128: Number of protocols
communications)
572
APPENDICES
Set by Corresponding
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation (When ACPU
Set) D9
CPU
A
This register stores the presence or absence of protocols
in the protocol setting data registered through the
predefined protocol support function.
No. = Protocol number
Protocol b15 b1 b0
Stores the
SD1342 registration SD1342 No.16 to No.2 No.1
protocol S (Status
to status (for built- SD1343 No.32 to No.18 No.17 New LCPU*1
registration change)
SD1349 in/adapter serial
status.
communications)
SD1349 No.128 to No.114 No.113
If the check result of protocol setting data is abnormal, 0
is stored in all bits.
Predefined Stores the
protocol function error code of
error code (for the predefined This register stores the error code of the predefined
SD1351 S (Error) New LCPU*1
built-in/adapter protocol protocol support function.
serial support
communications) function.
The protocol number where an error has been detected
is stored.
• 0: No error
• 1 to 128: Protocol number
• 65535: Unidentifiable
SD1359
If the value 65535 is stored, the following reasons are
considered.
• The setting that the current version of LCPU does not
support is written.
• The protocol setting data is collapsed.
The setting type of the protocol setting data where an
error has been detected is stored. (The value will be
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
stored only when the written protocol number is within
the range of 1 to 128.)
• 0: Packet setting or component setting
• 1: Protocol detailed setting
SD1360
• 65535: Unidentifiable
If the value 65535 is stored, the following reasons are
considered.
Predefined Stores • The setting that the current version of LCPU does not
protocol setting information for support is written.
data error identifying the • The protocol setting data is collapsed. QnUDV*2
S (Error) New
information (for error location LCPU*3
built-in Ethernet of protocol The packet number where an error has been detected is
communications) setting data. stored. (The value is stored only when the setting type is
0 (packet setting or component setting).)
• 0: Transmitted packet
• 1 to 16: Received packet number
SD1361 • 65535: Unidentifiable
If the value 65535 is stored, the following reasons are
considered.
• The setting that the current version of LCPU does not
support is written.
• The protocol setting data is collapsed.
The component number where an error has been
detected is stored. (The value is stored only when the
setting type is 0 (packet setting or component setting).)
• 1 to 32: Component number
• 65535: Unidentifiable
SD1362
If the value 65535 is stored, the following reasons are
considered.
• The setting that the current version of LCPU does not
support is written.
• The protocol setting data is collapsed.
573
Set by Corresponding
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation (When ACPU
CPU
Set) D9
Number of Stores the This register stores the number of protocols in the
protocols number of protocol setting data registered through the predefined
QnUDV*2
SD1363 registered (for protocols in protocol support function S (Initial) New
built-in Ethernet the protocol • 0: No registration LCPU*3
communications setting data. • 1 to 128: Number of protocols
This register stores the presence or absence of protocols
in the protocol setting data registered through the
predefined protocol support function.
No. = Protocol number
Protocol b15 b1 b0
Stores the
SD1365 registration SD1365 No.16 to No.2 No.1
protocol QnUDV*2
to status (for built-in S (Initial) New
registration SD1366 No.32 to No.18 No.17 LCPU*3
SD1372 Ethernet
status.
communications)
SD1372 No.128 to No.114 No.113
If the check result of protocol setting data is abnormal, 0
is stored in all bits.
Stores the
Predefined
error code of
protocol function
the predefined This register stores the error code of the predefined QnUDV*2
SD1381 error code (for S (Error) New
protocol protocol support function. LCPU*3
built-in Ethernet
support
communications)
function.
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "15102" or later
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "15103" or later
*3 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "15102" or later
574
APPENDICES
(15)Fuse blown module A
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
SD1300 • The number of an output module whose fuse has blown is D9100
SD1301 stored in the following bit pattern (in units of 16 points). (If D9101
the module numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-
SD1302 set numbers are stored.) D9102
SD1303 • The status of the blown fuse of an output module on a D9103
Bit pattern in remote station is also detected.
SD1304 D9104
units of 16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD1305 D9105
points, 1 1
SD1300 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD1306 indicating the
(YC0) (Y80)
D9106 Qn(H)
1 1
SD1307 Fuse modules whose SD1301 (Y1F0) 0 0 0 0 (Y1A0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9107 QnPH
blown fuses have 1 1 S (Error) QnPRH
SD1308 SD1331 0 0 0 0 Y1F
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y1F
0 0 0
module blown B0 30 QnU
SD1309 0: No blown Indicates a fuse blown state. LCPU*1
to fuse For a module whose number of output points exceeds 16
SD1330 1: Blown fuse points, all bits corresponding to output module numbers
present within the number of output points occupied by the module (in New
units of 16 points) turn on.
Example: When a 64-point module is mounted on the slot 0,
SD1331
b0 to b3 turn on when the fuse has blown.
• Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new
one. The storage value is cleared by clearing the error.
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "16112" or later
(16)I/O module verification
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
SD1400 • If the status of the I/O module changes from that obtained D9116
at power-on, the module No. is stored in the following bit
SD1401 D9117
pattern. (If the I/O numbers are set by parameter, the
SD1402 parameter-set numbers are stored.) D9118
SD1403 • The status of the I/O module on a remote station is also D9119
detected.
SD1404 D9120
SD1405 Bit pattern, in
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 D9121
1
SD1400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X0Y
SD1406 units of 16 D9122
1 Qn(H)
points, SD1401 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD1407 I/O module 190
D9123 QnPH
indicating the
SD1408 verification 1 S (Error) QnPRH
modules with SD1431 0 XY
1FE0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
error QnU
SD1409 verify errors.
Indicates an I/O module verification error LCPU
to 0: No error
SD1430 1: Error For a module whose number of I/O points exceeds 16 points,
all bits corresponding to I/O module numbers within the
number of I/O points occupied by the module (in increments of New
16 points) turn on.
SD1431 Example: When a 64-point module is mounted on the slot 0,
b0 to b3 turn on when an error is detected.
• Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new
one. This flag is cleared by error resetting operation.
575
(17)iQ Sensor Solution
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register is used to acquire a right to use the
backup/restoration function before its execution.
A four-digit number (other than request number
0000H) shall be set.
Requests the use The number is determined according to the
Use request (iQ request source.
of the S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1435 Sensor Solution 1***H: when requested using a ladder program New
backup/restoration change)/U LCPU*2
backup/restoration)
function. D***H: when requested from MELSOFT
Navigator
E***H: when requested from GOT
F***H: when requested from GX Works2
• A value is cleared to "0" when the right is lost.
Stores the request
Right acquisition source that has This register stores the request source that has
status (iQ Sensor acquired a right to acquired a right to use the backup/restoration S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1436 New
Solution use the function. change) LCPU*2
backup/restoration) backup/restoration • A value is cleared to "0" when the right is lost.
function.
This register is used to set the target module
and execution unit for backup/restoration.
Lower 8 bits (target module)
1H: AnyWireASLINK
2H: CC-Link
3H: Ethernet
4H: CC-Link IE Field Network
Target Upper 8 bits (execution unit)
Sets the target
module/execution [AnyWireASLINK]
module and QnUDV*1
SD1437 unit setting (iQ 1H: Module U New
execution unit for LCPU*2
Sensor Solution
backup/restoration. 2H: ID
backup/restoration)
[CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network]
1H: Module
2H: Station
3H: Station sub-ID
[Ethernet]
1H: Module
2H: IP address
This register is used to set a number of a folder
in which backup data is to be stored or a folder
Folder number
Sets the folder that contains data for restoration.
setting (iQ Sensor QnUDV*1
SD1438 number for 0 to 99: Folder number specification U New
Solution LCPU*2
backup/restoration. FFFEH: Automatic specification (folder deletion
backup/restoration)
supported)
FFFFH (default): Automatic specification
This register is used to set a module targeted for
Target module
Sets a module backup/restoration.
setting (iQ Sensor QnUDV*1
SD1439 targeted for I/O No.: Module (Enter the value obtained by U New
Solution LCPU*2
backup/restoration. dividing the start I/O number by 16.)
backup/restoration)
3FFH: Built-in Ethernet
This register is used to set a device targeted for
backup/restoration.
[AnyWireASLINK]
ID number
Target device 1
Sets devices [CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network]
setting (iQ Sensor QnUDV*1
SD1440 targeted for Station number U New
Solution LCPU*2
backup/restoration. [Ethernet]
backup/restoration)
IP address (lower 16 bits)
(Example) If the IP address is 192.168.3.40, 3
equals to 3H and 40 equals to 28H.
The stored value will be 0328H, that is, 808.
576
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register is used to set a device targeted for
backup/restoration.
[AnyWireASLINK]
0 (Not used)
Target device 2
Sets devices [CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network]
setting (iQ Sensor QnUDV*1
SD1441 targeted for Station sub-ID number U New
Solution LCPU*2
backup/restoration. [Ethernet]
backup/restoration)
IP address (upper 16 bits)
(Example) If the IP address is 192.168.3.40, 192
equals to C0H and 168 equals to A8H.
The stored value will be C0A8H, that is, 49320.
This register stores the operation status of the
Sets the operation
Operation setting CPU module when a backup/restoration error
status when a QnUDV*1
SD1444 (iQ Sensor Solution occurs. U New
backup/restoration LCPU*2
backup/restoration) 0: Continue
error occurs
1: Stop
This register stores the backup/restoration
execution status.
0H: Not executed
1H: In preparation
Execution status Stores the 2H: Being executed S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1446 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration New
3H: Completed change) LCPU*2
backup/restoration) execution status.
10H: Wait
11H: Cancelled (no error)
FEH: Cancelled (error)
FFH: Error
This register stores the total number of devices
Total number of Stores the total
targeted for backup/restoration for each
target devices (iQ number of devices S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1447 execution unit. New
Sensor Solution targeted for change) LCPU*2
• A value is cleared to "0" when the right is
backup/restoration) backup/restoration.
acquired.
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
Stores the number This register stores the number of devices, for
Number of normally
of devices where each execution unit, where data have been
completed devices S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1448 data are backed up backed up or restored successfully. New
(iQ Sensor Solution change) LCPU*2
or restored • A value is cleared to "0" when the right is
backup/restoration)
successfully. acquired.
Stores the number
Number of devices This register stores the number of devices, for
of devices where
completed with an each execution unit, where data have not been
data are not S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1449 error (iQ Sensor backed up or restored successfully. New
backed up or change) LCPU*2
Solution • A value is cleared to "0" when the right is
restored
backup/restoration) acquired.
successfully.
Stores the This register stores the progress of the
Progress per
progress of the backup/restoration processing per device in
device (iQ Sensor S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1450 backup/restoration percentage (0 to 100%). New
Solution change) LCPU*2
processing per • A value is cleared to "0" when the right is
backup/restoration)
device. acquired.
This register stores the number of a folder in
Stores the number
Folder number (iQ which backup data is stored.
of a folder in which S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1451 Sensor Solution 0 to 99: Folder number New
backup data is change) LCPU*2
backup) FFFFH: Backup data not stored
stored.
• FFFFH is stored when the right is acquired.
This register stores the cause of the
backup/restoration error detected in a module.
• When errors are detected in multiple devices,
Stores the cause of the error detected first is stored.
Error cause in a
the • A value is cleared to "0" when the right is S
module (iQ Sensor QnUDV*1
SD1452 backup/restoration acquired. (Error/Status New
Solution LCPU*2
error detected in a For details on the cause of the error that is change)
backup/restoration)
module. stored, refer to the following.
Page 411, Appendix 1.11
User's manual of the module that is targeted
for data backup/restoration
577
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores the cause of the
backup/restoration error detected in a device.
Stores the cause of • When errors are detected in multiple devices,
Error cause in a
the the error detected first is stored. S
device (iQ Sensor QnUDV*1
SD1453 backup/restoration • A value is cleared to "0" when the right is (Error/Status New
Solution LCPU*2
error detected in a acquired. change)
backup/restoration)
device. For details on the cause of the error that is
stored, refer to the following.
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
This register stores the module and execution
unit information when a backup/restoration error
occurs.
Lower 8 bits (target module)
1H: AnyWireASLINK
2H: CC-Link
3H: Ethernet
4H: CC-Link IE Field Network
Upper 8 bits (execution unit)
1H: AnyWireASLINK
Error Stores the module 2H: CC-Link
module/execution and execution unit 3H: Ethernet S
QnUDV*1
SD1454 unit information (iQ information when a 4H: CC-Link IE Field Network (Error/Status New
Sensor Solution backup/restoration change) LCPU*2
[AnyWireASLINK]
backup/restoration) error occurs. 1H: Module
2H: ID
[CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network]
1H: Module
2H: Station
3H: Station sub-ID
[Ethernet]
1H: Module
2H: IP address
• A value is cleared to "0" when the right is
acquired.
This register stores the target folder number (0
Stores the target
Error folder number to 99) when a backup/restoration error occurs.
folder number S
information (iQ • When the folder number cannot be identified, QnUDV*1
SD1455 when a (Error/Status New
Sensor Solution FFFFH is stored. LCPU*2
backup/restoration change)
backup/restoration) • A value is cleared to "0" when the right is
error occurs.
acquired.
This register stores the information of a module
where a backup/restoration error occurs.
Stores the I/O No.: Module (Enter the value obtained by
Error module information of a dividing the start I/O number by 16.)
S
information (iQ module where a 3FFH: Built-in Ethernet QnUDV*1
SD1456 (Error/Status New
Sensor Solution backup/restoration • When errors are detected in multiple devices, LCPU*2
change)
backup/restoration) error is detected the information of a module where the error
first. detected first is stored.
• A value is cleared to "0" when the right is
acquired.
578
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
This register stores the information of a device
(device 1) where a backup/restoration error
occurs.
[AnyWireASLINK]
ID number
[CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network]
Error device Station number
Information (device [Ethernet]
SD1457 1) (iQ Sensor IP address (lower 16 bits)
Solution (Example) If the IP address is 192.168.3.40, 3
backup/restoration) equals to 3H and 40 equals to 28H.
The stored value will be 0328H, that is, 808.
• When errors are detected in multiple devices,
the information of a device (device 1) where
Stores the the error detected first is stored.
information of a • A value is cleared to "0" when the right is
acquired. S
device where a QnUDV*1
(Error/Status New
backup/restoration This register stores the target-device (device 2) LCPU*2
change)
error is detected information for which a backup/restoration error
first. occurs.
[AnyWireASLINK]
0 (Not used)
[CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network]
Error device Station sub-ID number
Information (device [Ethernet]
SD1458 2) (iQ Sensor IP address (upper 16 bits)
Solution (Example) If the IP address is 192.168.3.40, 192
backup/restoration) equals to C0H and 168 equals to A8H.
The stored value will be C0A8H, that is, 49320.
• When errors are detected in multiple devices,
the information of a device (device 2) where
the error detected first is stored.
• A value is cleared to "0" when the right is
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
acquired.
*1 The QnUDVCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "17012" or later supports the backup/restoration function for
AnyWireASLINK and CC-Link.
The QnUDVCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "17052" or later supports the backup/restoration function for
CC-Link IE Field Network.
The QnUDVCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "18072" or later supports the backup/restoration function for
built-in Ethernet.
*2 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "14112" or later
579
(18)Process control instruction
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Set the basic period (1 second units) use for the process
SD1500, Basic Basic period control instruction using floating point data.
U New QnPH
SD1501 period time
Floating points data = SD1501 SD1500
Process Process
control control
This register indicates the details of an error occurred by
SD1502 instruction instruction S (Error) New QnPH
executing a process control instruction.
detail error detail error
code code
Process
Process
control
control
instruction Shows the error process block that occurred in the process
SD1503 instruction S (Error) New QnPH
generated control instruction.
generated
error
error location
location
SD1506, Dummy Dummy Used to specify dummy devices by a process control QnPH
U New
SD1507 device device instruction. QnPRH
b0
Bumpless This register stores whether to enable functions for process
Function function control instructions.
availability availability
selection for setting for the b15 b14 to b2 b1 b0 QnPH
SD1508 SD1508 0 0 0 1/0 U New
process S.PIDP QnPRH
Bumpless
control instruction function availability
instruction 0: Enabled for the S.PIDP
instruction
1: Disabled
(Default: 0)
(19)Redundant system (host system CPU information*1)
The special register (SD1510 to SD1599) is valid only for redundant systems. All bits are set to "0" for stand-
alone systems.
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
The LED status of BACKUP, CONTROL, SYSTEM A, or
SYSTEM B is stored in the following format:
b15 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 to b0
0 0
4 LED states
Redundant • BACKUP BACKUP S (Status
SD1585 system LED • CONTROL SYSTEM B 0: Off New QnPRH
1: On (red) 5: On (orange) change)
status • SYSTEM A 0: Off
1: On 2: Flicker(red) 6: Flicker(orange)
• SYSTEM B 2: Flicker 3: On(green)
4: Flicker(green)
SYSTEM A
0: Off CONTROL
1: On 0: Off
2: Flicker 1: On
580
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
The reason(s) for system switching on the host system is
stored. The following values are stored corresponding to the
methods for system switching: This register is initialized with
Reason(s) for zero (0) stored when the system is powered on from off or is
Reason(s) system reset. S (when
SD1588 for system switching that 0: Initial value (control system has never been switched) condition QnPRH
switching occurred in 1: Power off, Reset, H/W failure, WDT error occurs)
host station 2: CPU stop error (except WDT)
3: System switching request from network module
16: Control system switching instruction
17: System switching request from a programming tool
• When a system switching has failed, a value
corresponding to the system switching failure cause is
stored.
0: System switching complete (default)
1: Tracking cable is not connected, tracking cable failure,
or internal circuit failure
2: H/W failure, power-off, reset, watchdog timer error on
the standby system
3: H/W failure, power-off, reset, WDT error on the control
system
4: Preparing tracking communication
Reason(s)
Reason(s) for 5: Communication timeout
for system S (when
system 6: Stop error on the standby system (except for watchdog
SD1589 switching system is QnPRH
switching timer error)
failure switched)
failure No 7: Operation differs between both systems (detected only
conditions
in the back up mode)
8: During memory copy from control system to standby
system
9: Performing program online change
10: Detecting a failure of network module on the standby
system
11: System is being switched
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
• The value is reset to "0" when host system is powered on.
• Zero is stored in this register upon completion of system
switching.
• When system switching is requested from a network
module in the host system, the bit corresponding to the
module that received the request turns on.
Network
Network
module b11 b1 b0
module head
head
address, S
address,
SD1590 which b1 to b11: Slot No.1 to slot No.11 (Slot No.0 (b0) is invalid (Error/Status New QnPRH
which
requested because the CPU module occupies two slots.) change)
requested
system • The system turns off the bit after the error is removed by a
system
switching user.
switching
• For the number for modules where system switching is
requested from a network module in other system, refer to
SD1690.
Memory Memory copy • Before SM1595 is turned from off to on, the I/O No. of the
SD1595 copy target target I/O memory copy destination (Standby system CPU module: U New QnPRH
I/O number number 3D1H) is stored.
• The execution result of the memory copy function is stored.
0: Memory copy is complete
Memory Memory copy 4241H: Standby system power supply off S (Status
SD1596 New QnPRH
copy status status 4242H: Tracking cable is disconnected or is damaged change)
4247H: Memory copy is being executed
4248H: Unsupported memory copy destination I/O number
*1 The information of the host CPU module is stored.
581
(20)Redundant system (other system CPU information*1)
The special register (SD1600 to SD1650) is valid when the redundant system is in backup mode and is invalid in
separate mode. The special register (SD1651 to SD1690) is valid when the redundant system is in backup mode
or in separate mode. All bits in SD1600 to SD1690 are set to "0" for stand-alone systems.
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation host CPU
(When Set) CPU
SD*2
• When an error is detected by the redundant system error
check, the bit corresponding to the error turns on. The bit
turns off when the error is cleared.
Each bit
b15 b2 b1 b0 0: OFF
SD1600 Fixed to 0 1: ON
Tracking cable is not
connected or damaged
Power-OFF, reset,
watchdog timer error or
hardware failure occurred S (Every
System error System error in other system
SD1600 Other system stop error END QnPRH
information information
(except watchdog timer processing)
error)
Bit turns on when failing to
connect with other system.
The following causes are
shown below:
Tracking H/W failure
Host system WDT error
Cannot recognize other
system therefore causing
error
• If any of b0, b1, b2 and b15 is on, the other bits are off.
• In the debug mode, b0, b1, b2 and b15 are all off.
Reason(s) for system switching is stored.
• When a system is switched, the reason for system switching
is stored in SD1601 of both systems.
• This register is initialized with zero (0) stored when the
system is powered on from off or is reset.
• The following shows the values stored in this register.
0: Initial value (control system has never been switched)
System System S (when
1: Power-off, reset, H/W failure, or watchdog timer error *1
SD1601 switching switching system is QnPRH
2: Stop error (except for watchdog timer error)
results results switched)
3: A system switching request from network module
16: Control system switching instruction
17: System switching request from a programming tool
*1 When the system is switched upon the power-off or
reset of the control system, "1" is not stored in SD1601
of the new standby system.
• When a system is switched by the SP.CONTSW instruction,
System System
the argument of the instruction is stored. (The argument is
switching switching S (when
stored in SD1602 of both systems at the system switching.)
SD1602 dedicated dedicated system is QnPRH
• SD1602 is only valid when "16" is stored in SD1601.
instruction instruction switched)
• SD1602 is updated only when a system is switched by the
parameter parameter
control system switching instruction.
Other
• The code of the error occurred in the other system is stored. S (Every
system Diagnostic
SD1610 • The value in SD0 of the CPU module on the other system is END SD0 QnPRH
diagnostic error code
reflected. processing)
error
Other
• The date and time of the diagnostics error occurred in the
system Diagnostic
SD1611 other system are stored. S (Every
diagnostic error
to • Data format is the same as SD1 to SD3. END SD1 to SD3 QnPRH
error occurrence
SD1613 • The values in SD1 to SD03 of the CPU module on the other processing)
occurrence time
system are reflected.
time
582
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation host CPU
(When Set)
SD*2
CPU
A
• The error information category codes for individual
Other Error information and common information of the error occurred in
S (Every
system error information the other system are stored.
SD1614 END SD4 QnPRH
information category • Data format is the same as SD4.
processing)
category code • The value in SD4 of the CPU module on the other system is
reflected.
• Stores the common information corresponding to the error
Other
SD1615 Error code stored in this system CPU. S (Every
system error
to common • Data composition is the same as SD5 to SD15. END SD5 to SD15 QnPRH
common
SD1625 information • The values in SD5 to SD15 of the CPU module on the other processing)
information
system are reflected.
• The individual information of the error occurred in the other
Other
SD1626 Error system is stored. S (Every
system error
to individual • Data composition is the same as SD16 to SD26. END SD16 to SD26 QnPRH
individual
SD1636 information • The values in SD16 to SD26 of the CPU module on the processing)
information
other system are reflected.
• The code of the error to be cleared by the standby system
error cancel command is stored.
Standby • The standby system error is cleared by turning SM1649
Error code of S (Every
system error from off to on after storing the error code of the error to clear.
SD1649 the error to END QnPRH
cancel • The least significant digit (ones place) of the error code in
be cleared processing)
command this register is ignored. (The errors corresponding to error
codes 4100 to 4109 are cleared by storing 4100 in this
register.)
The operating information of the CPU module on the other
system is stored in the following bit pattern.
When communications with other systems are disabled or the
system is in the debug mode, "00FFH" is stored.
b15 to b8 b7tob4 b3to b0
SD1650 0
0:No error
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
1:Continue error
2:Stop error
F:Communication with
other system
Other Other disabled 1
S (Every
system system 0:RUN
SD1650 1 Communication END QnPRH
operating operating 2:STOP with other system processing)
information information 3:PAUSE disabled, debug
F:Communication with mode
other system
disabled 1
Note:
Communications are disabled in the following states.
• The other system is powered off or is being reset.
• A hardware failure has occurred on the host or the other
system.
• A watchdog timer error has occurred on the host or the other
system.
• Tracking cable is not connected. Tracking cable is broken or
failed.
• When system switching is requested from a network module
Network Network in the other system, the bit corresponding to the module that
module module received the request turns on.
head head
address, address, b11 b1 b0
which which S (Every
SD1690 requested requested b1 to b11: Slot No.1 to slot No.11 (Slot No.0 (b0) is invalid END QnPRH
system system because the CPU module occupies two slots.) processing)
switching on switching on • The system turns off the bit after the error in the
host host corresponding module is removed by a user.
(control) (control) • To find the number for the module where system switching is
system system requested from a network module in the host system, refer
to SD1590.
583
*1 Diagnostic information of the CPU module in the other system is stored.
*2 Special register areas (SD) for the CPU module in the host system
(21)E-mail send/receive function
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
This register stores language information of e-mail.
Language Language
SD1659 • 0 or other than below: English/Japanese (default) U New LCPU*1
information information
• 2: Chinese (simplified Chinese characters)
Error code • This register stores the error code when an MC protocol
when an MC command error is detected. The error code is also stored
MC protocol
protocol when execution of MC protocol command is disabled in
SD1660 command S (Error) New LCPU*1
command parameter.
error code
error is • A value, 0, is set at execution of the e-mail receive
detected instruction.
*1 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "16112" or later
(22)Redundant system (tracking information)
The special register (SD1700 to SD1779) is valid only for redundant systems. All bits are set to "0" for stand-
alone systems.
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
• A value in this register is incremented by one upon
Tracking error tracking error.
Tracking error
SD1700 detection • The counter starts the routine: counts up from 0 to S (Error) New QnPRH
detection count
count 32767, then counts down to -32767 and then again
counts up to 0.
• This register stores the waiting time required for starting
the online program change in the standby system after
completion of that in the control system. The value is
specified in units of seconds.
• If online program change is not requested even after it is
completed in the control system, the CPU modules in
both of the system determine that it is a failure of an
online program change for redundancy. In this case,
both system CPU modules resume the consistency
check for the systems that have been on hold during the
Waiting time Waiting time
online program change. Also, the control system is set to
for online for online
accept another request of online program change for
program program
SD1710 redundancy. S (Initial)/U New QnPRH
change change
• When both systems are powered on, 90 seconds are set
(standby (standby
to SD1710 as the default value.
system) system)
• Set the value within the range 90 to 3600 seconds.
When the setting is 0 to 89 seconds, it is regarded as 90
seconds for operation. If the setting is outside the
allowed range, it is regarded other than 0 to 3600
seconds for operation.
• The waiting time for a start of online program change to
the standby system CPU module is checked according
to the SD1710 setting during online change of multiple
blocks and online change of batch of files for
redundancy.
584
APPENDICES
(23)Redundant power supply module information A
The special register (SD1780 to SD1789) is valid only for redundant power supply systems. All bits are set to "0"
for stand-alone power supply systems.
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
• This register stores the status of the redundant power
supply module (Q63RP, Q64RPN, or Q64RP) with input
power off, in the following bit pattern.
Input power OFF Input power OFF
detection status of detection status of
1 Each bit
power supply 2 power supply 1 1
0: Input power ON status/
No redundant power
b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b1 b0
supply module
SD1780 to to 1: Input power OFF status
Qn(H)*3
Power supply Power supply Main base unit S (Every
1st extension base QnPH*3
SD1780 off detection off detection END New
: QnPRH
status status 7th extension base
processing)
QnU*4
Main base unit
1st extension base
:
7th extension base
• When the main base unit is not the redundant power main
base unit (Q38RB), "0" is stored.
• In a multiple CPU system, the status is stored only to CPU
module No.1.
• This register stores the failure detection status of the
redundant power supply module (Q63RP, Q64RPN, or
Q64RP) in the following bit pattern. (After a failure is
detected, the bit corresponding to the failed module is set
to "0" upon powering off the module.)
Failure detection Failure detection Each bit
status of power status of power 0: Redundant power
supply module failure
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
supply 2 1 supply 1 1 not detected/
No redundant power
b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b1 b0 supply module
Power supply Power supply SD1781 to to 1: Redundant power Qn(H)*3
supply module failure S (Every
failure failure detected (Detectable QnPH*3
SD1781 for redundant power END New
detection detection supply module only) QnPRH
processing)
status status Main base unit
QnU*4
1st extension base
:
7th extension base
Main base unit
1st extension base
:
7th extension base
• When the main base unit is not the redundant power main
base unit (Q38RB), "0" is stored.
• In a multiple CPU system, the status is stored only to CPU
module No.1.
585
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Momentary Momentary • This register counts the number of times of momentary
power failure power failure power failure of the power supply 1/2.
detection detection • This register monitors the status of the power supply 1/2
SD1782
counter for count for mounted on the redundant power main base unit (Q38RB)
power supply power supply and counts the number of momentary power failures. The
1*1 1 status of the power supply 1/2 mounted on the extension
base unit for redundant power supply system and the
redundant type extension base unit is not monitored.
• When the CPU module starts, the counter of the power
supply 1/ 2 is cleared to 0.
Qn(H)*3
• If the input power to one of the redundant power supply S (Every
QnPH*3
modules is turned off, the corresponding counter is cleared END New
Momentary Momentary QnPRH
to "0". processing)
power failure power failure • The counter is incremented by one upon momentary QnU*4
detection detection power failure on the power supply 1 or 2. (The counter
SD1783
counter for count for repeats increment and decrement of the value; 0 32767
power supply power supply -32768 0. (The value is displayed within the range of
2*2 2 0 to 65535 in the system monitor screen of programming
tool.))
• When the main base unit is not the redundant power main
base unit (Q38RB), "0" is stored.
• In a multiple CPU system, the status is stored only to CPU
module No.1.
*1 The "power supply 1" indicates the redundant power supply module mounted on the POWER 1 slot of the redundant
base unit (Q38RB/68RB/Q65WRB).
*2 The "power supply 2" indicates the redundant power supply module mounted on the POWER 2 slot of the redundant
base unit (Q38RB/68RB/Q65WRB).
*3 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "07032" or later. In a multiple CPU system, the serial number (first five
digits) of all the CPU modules must be "07032" or later.
*4 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later
(24)CC-Link IE Field Network Basic function
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
The cyclic transmission status of each station is stored in the
following bit pattern. (Off: Not performed, On: Being
performed)
■QnUDV
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
■LCPU
Cyclic Cyclic
S (Every
transmission transmission b15 ... b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 QnUDV*1
SD1700 END New
status of status of each 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LCPU*2
processing)
each station station
The numbers in the figure indicate station numbers.
(Condition)
• Only the bit of the start station number turns on.
• The status is not stored for the reserved stations and the
station numbers after the maximum station number.
Use this register as an interlock for cyclic transmission. For
details on the interlock program, refer to the following.
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual
586
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
The data link status of each station is stored in the following
bit pattern. (Off: Normally operating station, On: Faulty
station)
■QnUDV
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
■LCPU
Data link Data link S (Every
QnUDV*1
SD1704 status of status of each b15 ... b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 END New
each station station 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 processing) LCPU*2
The numbers in the figure indicate station numbers.
(Condition)
• Only the bit of the start station number turns on.
• The status is not stored for the reserved stations and the
station numbers after the maximum station number.
This register can be used to monitor errors in slave stations,
connected cables, and connected hubs.
The total number of connected stations set in parameter is
stored.
Total number Total number
■QnUDV QnUDV*1
SD1716 of connected of connected S (Initial) New
Range: 1 to 16 LCPU*2
stations stations
■LCPU
Range: 1 to 8
The reserved station specification status is stored in the
following bit pattern. (Off: Other than the reserved station,
On: Reserved station)
■QnUDV
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Reserved Reserved 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
station station
■LCPU QnUDV*1
SD1718 specification specification S (Initial) New
status of status of each b15 ... b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
LCPU*2
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
each station station 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
The numbers in the figure indicate station numbers.
(Condition)
• Only the bit of the start station number turns on.
• The status is not stored for the station numbers after the
maximum station number.
Maximum link
The maximum link scan time value during cyclic transmission S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1722 scan of group New
is stored. (Unit: ms) change) LCPU*2
No.1
Minimum link
Link scan The minimum link scan time value during cyclic transmission S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1723 scan of group New
information is stored. (Unit: ms) change) LCPU*2
No.1
Current link
The current link scan time value during cyclic transmission is S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1724 scan of group New
stored. (Unit: ms) change) LCPU*2
No.1
The diagnostic information display target slave station is
specified.
Diagnostic Diagnostic
■QnUDV QnUDV*1
SD1741 request request U New
Range: 1 to 16 LCPU*2
information information
■LCPU
Range: 1 to 8
587
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
• After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns
on is executed, the status (valid or invalid) of diagnostic
information (Diagnostic information 1, Diagnostic
information 2) of the slave station specified in SD1741 is
stored.
• If the station number of the slave station specified in
SD1741 is the start station number of the occupied
stations, 1 is stored in Diagnostic information 1 (b0 to b7)
and Diagnostic information 2 (b8 to b15). (If the station is a
reserved station, 0 is stored in Diagnostic information 2 (b8
to b15).)
• If parameters have not been set to the slave station
specified in SD1741 or the station number of the slave
station specified in SD1741 is not the start station number
of the occupied stations, 0 is stored in Diagnostic
information 0 (b0 to b7) and Diagnostic information 2 (b8 to
Diagnostic Diagnostic b15). S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1742 information information New
change) LCPU*2
status flag status flag b15 … b8 b7 … b0
b0 to b7: Diagnostic information 1 (0: Invalid, 1: Valid)
b8 to b15: Diagnostic information 2 (0: Invalid, 1: Valid)
• When b0 to b7 are 1 (valid), the number of occupied
stations, group number, IP address, the accumulated
number of timeouts, and the accumulated number of
disconnection detections are stored in SD1743 to SD1754.
• When b0 to b7 are 0 (invalid), 0 is stored in SD1743 to
SD1754.
• When b8 to b15 are 1 (valid), the manufacturer code,
model code, device version, module information, error
code, and detailed module information are stored in
SD1758 to SD1767.
• When b8 to b15 are 0 (invalid), 0 is stored in SD1758 to
SD1767.
Number of After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns on
SD1743 occupied is executed, the number of occupied stations of the slave
stations station specified in SD1741 is stored.
After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns on
SD1744 Group No. is executed, the group number of the slave station specified
in SD1741 is stored.
IP address • After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns
SD1745
(lower digits) on is executed, the IP address of the slave station
specified in SD1741 is stored.
• When the IP address has not been set in parameter, 0 is
stored.
IP address b15 ... b8 b7 ... b0
SD1746
(upper digits)
SD1745 3 4
Diagnostic S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1746 1 2 New
information 1 change) LCPU*2
1 to 4: First to fourth bytes
• After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns
on is executed, the accumulated number of timeouts
Accumulated
occurred in the slave station specified in SD1741 is stored.
SD1753 number of
0: No timeouts
timeouts
1 to 65535: Number of timeouts (When the count exceeds
65535, counting is continued from 1 again.)
• After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns
Accumulated on is executed, the accumulated number of disconnections
number of detected in the slave station specified in SD1741 is stored.
SD1754
disconnection 0: No disconnections
detections 1 to 65535: Number of disconnection detections (When the
count exceeds 65535, counting is continued from 1 again.)
588
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns on
Manufacturer
SD1758 is executed, the manufacturer code of the slave station
code
specified in SD1741 is stored.
Model code
SD1760 After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns on
(lower)
is executed, the model code of the slave station specified in
Model code SD1741 is stored.
SD1761
(upper)
After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns on
Device
SD1762 is executed, the device version of the slave station specified
version
in SD1741 is stored.
After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns on
Diagnostic Module S (Status QnUDV*1
SD1764 is executed, the module information of the slave station New
information 2 information change)
specified in SD1741 is stored. LCPU*2
After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns on
SD1765 Error code is executed, the error code of the slave station specified in
SD1741 is stored.
Detailed
module
SD1766
information
(lower) After the END instruction in the scan where SM1741 turns on
is executed, the detailed module information of the slave
Detailed station specified in SD1741 is stored.
module
SD1767
information
(upper)
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "18112" or later
*2 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "18112" or later
(25)CPU module data backup/restoration function
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
(When Set) CPU
M9
Stores the The number of files which a backup or restoration is
Number of number of files uncompleted is stored.
S (Status
SD1925 backup/restoration which a backup Total number of files is stored at start, and reduced New QnUDV*2
change)
uncompleted files or restoration is one each time one file is backed up or restored. "0" is
uncompleted.*1 stored when a backup or restoration is completed.
Stores the
progression The progression status of a backup or restoration is
Backup/restoration S (Status
SD1926 status of a stored in percentage. (0 to 100%) "0" is stored at start New QnUDV*2
progression status change)
backup or of a backup or restoration.
restoration.*1
Set the upper limit value (1 to 100) for the number of
Upper limit
Upper limit value backup data with this register. This register set the
value for the
setting for the value of SD923 at the timing when the CPU module is S (Status
SD1928 number of New QnUDV*3
number of backup powered off and on or is reset. change)/U
backup data is
data Bit5 of SD910 is off: 0
set
Bit5 of SD910 is on: 1 to 100
*1 Since the registers cannot be monitored while the automatic restoration function is executed, check the operating status
of an automatic restoration with LED on the front side of the CPU module.
*2 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "17103" or later
*3 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "18052" or later
589
(26)Built-in I/O function
Set by Corresponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPUD9 CPU
This register stores values indicating functions assigned for
input signals. Each signal has 4-bit data.
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
SD1830
X3 X2 X1 X0
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
SD1831
X7 X6 X5 X4
SD1830 Functions Functions b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 S (Every
to selected for selected for SD1832
END New LCPU
SD1833 input signals input signals XB XA X9 X8 processing)
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
SD1833
XF XE XD XC
Values are stored according to functions as follows:
• 0: General-purpose input function
• 1: Interrupt input function
• 2: Pulse catch function
• 3: Positioning function
• 4: High-speed counter function
This register stores values indicating functions assigned for
output signals. Each signal has 4-bit data.
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
SD1834
Functions Functions Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
S (Every
SD1834, selected for selected for b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 END New LCPU
SD1835 output output SD1835
processing)
signals signals Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4
Values are stored according to functions as follows:
• 0: General-purpose output function
• 3: Positioning function
• 4: High-speed counter function
This register stores the operating status of the positioning
function and high-speed counter function.
b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
Operating Operating
status of status of Positioning function Axis 1
0: Not used
positioning positioning 1: Used S (Every
SD1836 and high- and high- Positioning function Axis 2 END New LCPU
0: Not used
speed speed 1: Used processing)
counter counter High-speed counter
function CH1
functions functions 0: Not used
1: Used
High-speed counter
function CH2
0: Not used
1: Used
Fixed to 0.
590
APPENDICES
Set by Corresponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPUD9 CPU
This register stores the current position value when the A
position where OPR control is completed is set as a base
point.
"0" is stored at power-on or reset of the CPU module.
An OP address is stored at the completion of machine OPR
control.
This register is cleared to "0" when speed control in
speed/position switching control is started.
Axis 1 • When the current feed value is changed, the value after S (Every
SD1840, Current feed
current feed current value change is stored. END New LCPU
SD1841 value
value • The current position read from a servo amplifier is stored processing)
at the completion of absolute position restoration.*1*2
*1 Range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 pulses
*2 Since the internal update cycle of the storage value is
1ms, the information of the current feed value may be
older than the actual command position by 1ms at
maximum depending on the refresh timing at END
processing.
This register stores the current speed. (Fractions are not
stored. If the current speed is slower than 1 pulse/s, "0" may
be displayed.)*1*2
Axis 1 S (Every
SD1842, Current *1 Range: 0 to 200000 pulses
current END New LCPU
SD1843 speed *2 Since the internal update cycle of the storage value is
speed processing)
1ms, the information of the current speed value may be
older than the actual command position by 1ms at
maximum depending on the refresh timing at END
processing.
This register stores the axis operating status.
• -1: Error occurring
• 0: Standing by
• 1: Stopped
• 2: In JOG operation
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
• 3: In OPR
• 4: In position control
Axis 1 axis Axis S (Every
• 5: In speed-position control (speed) (speed control in
SD1844 operation operation END New LCPU
speed/position switching control)
status status processing)
• 6: In speed-position control (position) (position control in
speed/position switching control)
• 7: Decelerating (axis stop ON)
• 8: Decelerating (JOG start OFF)
• 9: In high-speed OPR
• 10: In speed control
• 11: Analyzing
• This register stores the error code of the present axis
error. S (Every
Axis 1 error
SD1845 Error code • If another error occurs while an axis error occurs, the END New LCPU
code
latest error code is not stored. processing)
• This register is cleared to "0" by turning on SM1850.
• This register stores the warning code of the present axis
warning. S (Every
Axis 1 Warning
SD1846 • If another axis warning occurs, the latest warning code is END New LCPU
warning code code
written to this register. processing)
• This register is cleared to "0" by turning on SM1850.
591
Set by Corresponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPUD9 CPU
• This register stores the on/off status of external I/O
signals.
• When an OPR method with the OPR retry function (Near-
point dog method, Count 1, Count 2) is performed, a value
indicating the status of the upper limit signal or the lower
limit signal is stored to the external command signal.*1
b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
Lower limit signal
0: OFF
1: ON
Upper limit signal
0: OFF
1: ON
Axis 1 S (Every
External I/O Near-point dog signal
SD1847 external I/O 0: OFF END New LCPU
signals 1: ON
signal processing)
Drive unit ready signal
0: OFF
1: ON
External command signal
0: OFF
1: ON
Zero signal
0: OFF
1: ON
Fixed to 0.
*1 When an OPR method with the OPR retry function is
performed even once, a value indicating the status of
the upper limit signal or the lower limit signal will be
stored until when speed/position switching control is
started.
• This register stores "0" when machine OPR control is
started.
• After machine OPR control is started, this register stores a
Axis 1
Movement travel distance from the point where the near-point dog
movement S (Every
SD1848, amount after signal turns on (The point is set to "0".) to the point where
amount after END New LCPU
SD1849 near-point machine OPR control is completed.*1
near-point processing)
dog ON • When an OPR method is set to Stopper 3, this register
dog ON
always stores "0".
*1 Range: 0 to 2147483647 pulses
• This register stores the data No. of positioning being
executed. (A storage value will be held until the next
control starts.)
Axis 1 Data
Data No. of • "0" is stored when JOG operation or machine OPR control
No. of S (Every
positioning is started.
SD1850 positioning END New LCPU
being • "1" is stored when high-speed OPR control is started.
being processing)
executed • "1" is stored when positioning control is started by the
executed
IPDSTRT1 or IPDSTRT2 instruction.
• If an error occurs at the start of positioning control, the
previous value will be held.
592
APPENDICES
Set by Corresponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPUD9 CPU
This register stores the current position value when the A
position where OPR control is completed is set as a base
point.
"0" is stored at power-on or reset of the CPU module.
An OP address is stored at the completion of machine OPR
control.
This register is cleared to "0" when speed control in
speed/position switching control is started.
Axis 2 • When the current feed value is changed, the value after S (Every
SD1860, Current feed
current feed current value change is stored. END New LCPU
SD1861 value
value • The current position read from a servo amplifier is stored processing)
at the completion of absolute position restoration.*1*2
*1 Range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 pulses
*2 Since the internal update cycle of the storage value is
1ms, the information of the current feed value may be
older than the actual command position by 1ms at
maximum depending on the refresh timing at END
processing.
This register stores the current speed. (Fractions are not
stored. If the current speed is slower than 1 pulse/s, "0" may
be displayed.)*1*2
Axis 2 S (Every
SD1862, Current *1 Range: 0 to 200000 pulses
current END New LCPU
SD1863 speed *2 Since the internal update cycle of the storage value is
speed processing)
1ms, the information of the current speed value may
be older than the actual command position by 1ms at
maximum depending on the refresh timing at END
processing.
This register stores the axis operating status.
• -1: Error occurring
• 0: Standing by
• 1: Stopped
• 2: In JOG operation
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
• 3: In OPR
• 4: In position control
Axis 2 axis Axis S (Every
• 5: In speed-position control (speed) (speed control in
SD1864 operation operation END New LCPU
speed/position switching control)
status status processing)
• 6: In speed-position control (position) (position control in
speed/position switching control)
• 7: Decelerating (axis stop ON)
• 8: Decelerating (JOG start OFF)
• 9: In high-speed OPR
• 10: In speed control
• 11: Analyzing
• This register stores the error code of the present axis
error. S (Every
Axis 2 error
SD1865 Error code • If another error occurs while an axis error occurs, the END New LCPU
code
latest error code is not stored. processing)
• This register is cleared to "0" by turning on SM1870.
• This register stores the warning code of the present axis
warning. S (Every
Axis 2 Warning
SD1866 • If another axis warning occurs, the latest warning code is END New LCPU
warning code code
written to this register. processing)
• This register is cleared to "0" by turning on SM1870.
593
Set by Corresponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPUD9 CPU
• This register stores the on/off status of external I/O
signals.
When an OPR method with the OPR retry function (Near-
point dog method, Count 1, Count 2) is performed, a value
indicating the status of the upper limit signal or the lower limit
signal is stored to the external command signal.*1
b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
Lower limit signal
0: OFF
1: ON
Upper limit signal
0: OFF
1: ON
Axis 2 S (Every
External I/O Near-point dog signal
SD1867 external I/O 0: OFF END New LCPU
signals 1: ON
signals processing)
Drive unit ready signal
0: OFF
1: ON
External command signal
0: OFF
1: ON
Zero signal
0: OFF
1: ON
Fixed to 0.
*1 When an OPR method with the OPR retry function is
performed even once, a value indicating the status of
the upper limit signal or the lower limit signal will be
stored until when speed/position switching control is
started.
• This register stores "0" when machine OPR control is
started.
• After machine OPR control is started, this register stores a
Axis 2
Movement travel distance from the point where the near-point dog
movement S (Every
SD1868, amount after signal turns on (The point is set to "0".) to the point where
amount after *1
END New LCPU
SD1869 near-point machine OPR control is completed.
near-point processing)
dog ON • When an OPR method is set to Stopper 3, this register
dog ON
always stores "0".
*1 Range: 0 to 2147483647 pulses
• This register stores the data No. of positioning being
executed. (A storage value will be held until the next
control starts.)
Axis 2 Data
Data No. of • "0" is stored when JOG operation or machine OPR control
No. of S (Every
positioning is started.
SD1870 positioning END New LCPU
being • "1" is stored when high-speed OPR control is started.
being processing)
executed • "1" is stored when positioning control is started by the
executed
IPDSTRT1 or IPDSTRT2 instruction.
• If an error occurs at the start of positioning control, the
previous value will be held.
• This register stores the current counter value of CH1 at
END processing.
• When the ICCNTRD1 instruction is executed, this register S (Every
is updated by the current value at that moment. END
SD1880, CH1 current CH1 current
The current value is updated at END processing and by the processing/ New LCPU
SD1881 value value
ICCNTRD1 instruction only when Normal Mode is set for Instruction
Operation Mode Setting (high-speed counter function execution)
parameter). The range of a value that can be read is from -
2147483648 to 2147483647.
594
APPENDICES
Set by Corresponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPUD9 CPU
This register stores each status of CH1. A
b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
Addition/subtraction
0: Addition
1: Subtraction
Underflow detection flag
0: Not detected
1: Detected
Overflow detection flag
0: Not detected
1: Detected
S (Every
CH1 status CH1 status
SD1882 Sampling flag END New LCPU
monitor monitor 0: Not operating
1: Operating processing)
Frequency
measurement flag
0: Not operating
1: Operating
Rotation speed
measurement flag
0: Not operating
1: Operating
Pulse measurement flag
0: Not operating
1: Operating
PWM output flag
0: Not operating
1: Operating
Fixed to 0.
• This register stores a value indicating the external I/O
signal status of CH1.
• Unused signal status is fixed at off.
• When Normal Mode is set for Operation Mode Setting
(high-speed counter function parameter), a value
according to the setting configured for Function Input
Logic Setting (high-speed counter function parameter) is
stored in the function input status. Therefore, when a
voltage is applied to the function input terminal while
Negative logic is set for Function input logic setting, this
register turns off.
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
• When other than A Phase/B Phase is selected for Count
Source Selection (high-speed counter function
parameter), the phase A input status and phase B input
status are fixed at off.
CH1 external CH1 external S (Every
b15 to b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD1883 I/O status I/O status 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
END New LCPU
monitor monitor processing)
Phase Z input status
0: OFF
1: ON
Function input status
0: OFF
1: ON
Latch counter input status
0: OFF
1: ON
Phase A input status
0: OFF
1: ON
Phase B input status
0: OFF
1: ON
Coincidence output No.1
0: OFF
1: ON
Coincidence output No.2
0: OFF
1: ON
Fixed to 0.
This register stores a value indicating the operation mode for
high-speed counter of CH1 set by the parameter.
CH1 CH1 • 0: Not used
S (Every
operation operation • 1: Normal mode
SD1884 END New LCPU
mode mode • 2: Frequency measurement mode
processing)
monitor monitor • 3: Rotation speed measurement mode
• 4: Pulse measurement mode
• 5: PWM output mode
595
Set by Corresponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPUD9 CPU
This register stores a value indicating the counter type for
high-speed counter of CH1 set by the parameter.
Counter selection is disabled (fixed at "0") when a value S (Every
CH1 counter CH1 counter
SD1885 stored to CH1 operation mode monitor (SD1884) is other END New LCPU
type monitor type monitor
than "1" (normal mode). processing)
• 0: Linear counter
• 1: Ring counter
This register stores a value indicating the selected counter
function for high-speed counter of CH1 set by the parameter.
Counter selection is disabled (fixed at "0") when a value
stored to CH1 operation mode monitor (SD1884) is other
CH1 selected CH1 selected S (Every
than "1" (normal mode).
SD1886 counter counter END New LCPU
• 0: Count disabling function
function function processing)
• 1: Latch counter function
• 2: Sampling counter function
• 3: Count disabling/preset function
• 4: Latch counter/preset function
S (Every
CH1 error CH1 error This register stores the error code of an error occurred in
SD1887 END New LCPU
code code CH1.
processing)
S (Every
CH1 warning CH1 warning This register stores the warning code of a warning occurred
SD1888 END New LCPU
code code in CH1.
processing)
• This register stores the current counter value of CH2 at
END processing.
• When the ICCNTRD2 instruction is executed, this register S (Every
is updated by the current value at that moment. END
SD1900, CH2 current CH2 current
The current value is updated at END processing and by the processing/ New LCPU
SD1901 value value
ICCNTRD2 instruction only when Normal Mode is set for Instruction
Operation Mode Setting (high-speed counter function execution)
parameter). The range of a value that can be read is from -
2147483648 to 2147483647.
This register stores each status of CH2.
b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
Addition/subtraction
0: Addition
1: Subtraction
Underflow detection flag
0: Not detected
1: Detected
Overflow detection flag
0: Not detected
1: Detected
S (Every
CH2 status CH2 status Sampling flag
SD1902 0: Not operating END New LCPU
monitor monitor 1: Operating processing)
Frequency
measurement flag
0: Not operating
1: Operating
Rotation speed
measurement flag
0: Not operating
1: Operating
Pulse measurement flag
0: Not operating
1: Operating
PWM output flag
0: Not operating
1: Operating
Fixed to 0.
596
APPENDICES
Set by Corresponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPUD9 CPU
• This register stores a value indicating the external I/O A
signal status of CH2.
• Unused signal status is fixed at off.
• When Normal Mode is set for Operation Mode Setting
(high-speed counter function parameter), a value
according to the setting configured for Function Input
Logic Setting (high-speed counter function parameter) is
stored in the function input status. Therefore, when a
voltage is applied to the function input terminal while
Negative logic is set for Function input logic setting, this
register turns off.
• When other than A Phase/B Phase is selected for Count
Source Selection (high-speed counter function
parameter), the phase A input status and phase B input
status are fixed at off.
CH2 external CH2 external S (Every
b15 to b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD1903 I/O status I/O status 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
END New LCPU
monitor monitor processing)
Phase Z input status
0: OFF
1: ON
Function input status
0: OFF
1: ON
Latch counter input status
0: OFF
1: ON
Phase A input status
0: OFF
1: ON
Phase B input status
0: OFF
1: ON
Coincidence output No.1
0: OFF
1: ON
Coincidence output No.2
0: OFF
1: ON
Fixed to 0.
This register stores a value indicating the operation mode for
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
high-speed counter of CH2 set by the parameter.
CH2 CH2 • 0: Unused
S (Every
operation operation • 1: Normal mode
SD1904 END New LCPU
mode mode • 2: Frequency measurement mode
processing)
monitor monitor • 3: Rotation speed measurement mode
• 4: Pulse measurement mode
• 5: PWM output mode
This register stores a value indicating the counter type for
high-speed counter of CH2 set by the parameter.
Counter selection is disabled (fixed at "0") when a value S (Every
CH2 counter CH2 counter
SD1905 stored to CH2 operation mode monitor (SD1904) is other END New LCPU
type monitor type monitor
than "1" (normal mode). processing)
• 0: Linear counter
• 1: Ring counter
This register stores a value indicating the selected counter
function for high-speed counter of CH2 set by the parameter.
Counter selection is disabled (fixed at "0") when a value
stored to CH2 operation mode monitor (SD1904) is other
CH2 selected CH2 selected S (Every
than "1" (normal mode).
SD1906 counter counter END New LCPU
• 0: Count disabling function
function function processing)
• 1: Latch counter function
• 2: Sampling counter function
• 3: Count disabling/preset function
• 4: Latch counter/preset function
S (Every
CH2 error CH2 error This register stores the error code of an error occurred in
SD1907 END New LCPU
code code CH2.
processing)
S (Every
CH2 warning CH2 warning This register stores the warning code of a warning occurred
SD1908 END New LCPU
code code in CH2.
processing)
597
(27)Data logging
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set) CPU
D9
Data logging This register stores the latest file number. This register is
SD1940, S (Status QnUDV
setting No.1 Latest file No. cleared to "0" by a stop command from the CPU Module New
SD1941 change) LCPU
Latest file No. Logging Configuration Tool.
Data logging
This register stores the oldest file number. This register is
SD1942, setting No.1 S (Status QnUDV
Oldest file No. cleared to "0" by a stop command from the CPU Module New
SD1943 Oldest file change) LCPU
Logging Configuration Tool.
No.
This register stores free buffer space (unit: 1K byte).
If the value is small, processing overflow may occur.
Data logging
For trigger logging, this register stores the buffer size until
setting No.1 Free buffer S (Status QnUDV
SD1944 when data are collected by the number of records after New
Free buffer space change) LCPU
trigger.
space
This register is cleared to "0" by a stop command from the
CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool.
This register stores the number of times that data logging
processing overflow occurred.
If an overflow occurs, some data may not be collected.
When the storage value reaches to 65535, count is resumed
Number of from "0".
Data logging
times If Stop is specified for Operation occurring when number of
setting No.1 QnUDV
SD1945 processing saved files is exceeded, processing overflow may occur S (Error) New
Processing LCPU
overflow from when data collection by the number of specified
timeout count
occurred storage files is completed and until when data logging is
stopped.
This register is cleared to "0" by the registration of the
setting or a stop command from CPU Module Logging
Configuration Tool.
This register stores the cause of an error that occurred
during data logging.
• 0: No error
• Other than 0: For values stored at error occurrence, refer
Data logging
to the errors that occurs in data logging described in the
setting No.1 Data logging QnUDV
SD1946 following. ( QnUDVCPU/LCPU User's Manual (Data S (Error) New
Data logging error cause LCPU
Logging Function))
error cause
This register is cleared to "0" by the registration of the
setting or a stop command from CPU Module Logging
Configuration Tool.
This register stores the error code of the latest error
detected during execution of the data logging file transfer
Data logging function.
setting No.1 Data logging • 0: No error
Data logging file transfer • Other than 0: For values stored at error occurrence, refer QnUDV
SD1947 S (Error) New
file transfer function error to the errors that occurs in data logging described in the LCPU*1
function error code following. ( QnUDVCPU/LCPU User's Manual (Data
code Logging Function))
This register is cleared to "0" by the data logging start
command from the CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool.
598
APPENDICES
Corresponding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When Set)
D9
CPU
A
SD1950
Data logging
to
setting No.2
SD1957
SD1960
Data logging
to
setting No.3
SD1967
SD1970
Data logging
to
setting No.4
SD1977
SD1980
Data logging
to
setting No.5
SD1987
Same as in
SD1990 Same as in
Data logging data QnUDV
to data logging Same as in data logging setting No.1 (SD1940 to SD1947) New
setting No.6 logging LCPU*1
SD1997 setting No.1
setting No.1
SD2000
Data logging
to
setting No.7
SD2007
SD2010
Data logging
to
setting No.8
SD2017
SD2020
Data logging
to
setting No.9
SD2027
SD2030
Data logging
to
setting No.10
SD2037
*1 Modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "12112" or later support the data logging file transfer function error code
areas.
Appendix 3 List of Special Register Areas
599
Appendix 4 Battery Life
The batteries installed on the CPU module and SRAM card are used to retain data in the program memory, standard
RAM (including an extended SRAM cassette), and latch devices during the power failure. Special relays SM51 and
SM52 turn on due to the battery voltage drop. Even if the special relays turn on, the program and retained data are not
deleted immediately.
After the special relay SM51 turns on, replace the battery quickly within the backup power time for three minutes.
SM51 turns on when the battery voltage drops below the specified value, and remains on even after the voltage is recovered
to the normal value.
SM52 turns on when the battery voltage drops below the specified value, and turns off when the voltage is recovered to the
normal value.
After SM51 and/or SM52 turns on, replace the battery quickly.
SM51 and SM52 turn on when the battery voltage of the CPU module or SRAM card is lowered.
To identify the specific battery of the memory of which voltage is lowered, check the contents of the special resisters
SD51 and SD52.
b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD51, SD52 Fixed at 0
Battery error for CPU module When the battery
Battery alarm for SRAM card voltage is low, the
Battery error for SRAM card value is "1."
For details of SD51 and SD52, refer to Page 506, Appendix 3.
● As long as the programmable controller is powered on, the data is retained regardless of the installation status of a
battery.
● A battery of the CPU module cannot retain data in the SRAM card.
A battery of the SRAM card cannot retain data in the CPU module.
600
APPENDICES
Appendix 4.1 Display of battery consumption and reduction
measures of the consumption
(1) Battery consumption Note Appx.1
The battery consumption represents consumption of the CPU module battery energy.*1Note Appx.1
The larger the battery consumption value is, the more battery per time unit is consumed.
The battery consumption depends on the factors of (a) to (c) as follows.
The following table shows the relationship of the factors and the battery consumption.
Factor of battery consumption
(a) Battery life- (c) Size of file register file in Battery
(b) Module error log in standard
prolonging standard RAM (SR) consumption
RAM*3
function*2 <Unit: word>
Set ---- ---- 1
No file registers or 0K < SR 128K 2
128K < SR 384K 3
Absent
Not set 384K < SR 640K 4
640K < SR 5
Present Refer to a table below.
A
The following table shows the battery consumption when the module error log data are stored to the standard
RAM by the module error collection function.
Appendix 4.1 Display of battery consumption and reduction measures of the consumption
Appendix 4 Battery Life
Battery consumption
(c) Size of file register
Q10UD(E)H/
file in standard Q00U/Q01U/Q02U/
Q13UD(E)H/ Q50UDEH/
RAM (SR) Q03UD(E)/ Q06UD(E)HCPU
Q20UD(E)H/ Q100UDEHCPU
<Unit: word> Q04UD(E)HCPU
Q26UD(E)HCPU
0K SR 128K 2 3 3 3
128K < SR 384K ---- 3 4 4
384K < SR 640K ---- ---- 4 5
640K < SR ---- ---- ---- 5
*1 Applicable to the Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, and Q06UDHCPU if the serial numbers (first five digits) are
"10012" or later.
The current consumption level can be checked by referring to SD118 where the battery consumption value is stored.
*2 For details of the battery life-prolonging function, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3 For details of the module error log function, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User’s Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
High
Note Appx.1 Basic Redundant performance Process
The Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, and High-speed Universal
model QCPU do not support this function.
601
(2) Reduction measures of battery consumption
The following describes measures for reducing battery consumption.
• Enable the battery life-prolonging function.
• When storing a file register in standard the RAM, minimize the file register file.
• By performing the latch data backup function (to standard ROM), the battery life-prolonging function will be
enabled regardless of the parameter setting.*4
If not powering on the programmable controller for a long period of time for shipment or other reason, back
up the data to the standard ROM.
*4 Except when the battery life-prolonging function has already been enabled.
602
APPENDICES
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
(1) Battery (Q6BAT) lives of Basic model QCPUs
Battery life
Power-on time After SM52 turned on
CPU module Guaranteed Actual service value
ratio *1 (Backup power time
value*2 (Reference value)*3
after an alarm*4)
26,000 hours
0%
2.96 years
37,142 hours
30% 43,800 hours 710 hours
Q00JCPU 4.23 years
5.00 years 30 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
26,000 hours
0%
2.96 years
37,142 hours
30% 43,800 hours 710 hours
Q00CPU 4.23 years
5.00 years 30 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100% A
5,600 hours 25,175 hours
0%
0.63 years 2.87 years
8,000 hours 35,964 hours
30%
0.91 years 4.10 years
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
11,200 hours 420 hours
Q01CPU 50%
1.27 years 18 days
18,666 hours 43,800 hours
70%
2.13 years 5.00 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
*1 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
(When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50%.)
*2 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70°C, which is calculated based on the characteristic values of
manufacturer-supplied memory (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature range of
-25 to 75°C (operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55°C ).
*3 The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at
storage ambient temperature of 40°C. This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with characteristics of the
memory.
*4 In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes.
• The battery connector is disconnected.
• The lead wire of the battery is broken.
603
● Use the battery within the time shown by the guaranteed value of the battery life.
● If the battery may be used exceeding the time shown by the guaranteed battery life value, perform the following.
• Perform boot operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at the programmable controller power-off.
• Back up programs and data after SM52 turned on (within the backup power time after an alarm).
● When the battery (Q6BAT) is not connected to the CPU module, its service life is five years.
● When the battery-low special relay SM52 turns on, immediately change the battery.
Even if an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating
condition.
● The battery (Q7BAT and Q8BAT) is not available for the Basic model QCPU.
604
APPENDICES
(2) Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, and Q8BAT) lives of High Performance model QCPU,
Process CPU, and Redundant CPU
Battery life*5
Q6BAT Q7BAT
After SM52 After SM52
Power-on Actual Actual
turned on turned on
CPU module service service
time ratio*1 Guaranteed (Backup Guaranteed (Backup
value value
value *2 power time value *2 power time
(Reference (Reference
after an after an
value)*3 value)*3
alarm*4 ) alarm*4)
30,000 hours
0%
3.42 years
42,857 hours
30% 43,800 hours 120 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
Q02CPU 4.89 years
5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
2,341 hours 18,364 hours 5,000 hours
0%
0.26 years 2.09 years 0.57 years
30%
3,344 hours
0.38 years
26,234 hours
2.99 years
7,142 hours
0.81 years
A
Q02HCPU 4,682 hours 36,728 hours 120 hours 10,000 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
50%
Q06HCPU 0.53 years 4.19 years 5 days 1.14 years 5.00 years 10 days
7,803 hours 16,666 hours
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
70%
0.89 years 43,800 hours 1.90 years
43,800 hours 5.00 years 43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years
1,897 hours 14,229 hours 4,051 hours 38,727 hours
0%
0.21 years 1.62 years 0.46 years 4.42 years
2,710 hours 20,327 hours 5,787 hours
30%
0.30 years 2.32 years 0.66 years
Q02PHCPU 3,794 hours 28,458 hours 96 hours 8,102 hours 192 hours
50%
Q06PHCPU 0.43 years 3.25 years 4 days 0.92 years 43,800 hours 8 days
6,323 hours 13,503 hours 5.00 years
70%
0.72 years 43,800 hours 1.54 years
43,800 hours 5.00 years 43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years
1,260 hours 7,755 hours 2,900 hours 21,107 hours
0%
0.14 years 0.88 years 0.33 years 2.40 years
Q12HCPU 1,800 hours 11,079 hours 4,142 hours 30,153 hours
30%
Q25HCPU 0.20 years 1.26 years 0.47 years 3.44 years
Q12PHCPU 2,520 hours 15,510 hours 48 hours 5,800 hours 42,214 hours 96 hours
50%
Q25PHCPU 0.28 years 1.77 years 2 days 0.66 years 4.81 years 4 days
Q12PRHCPU 4,200 hours 25,850 hours 9,666 hours
Q25PRHCPU 70%
0.47 years 2.95 years 1.10 years 43,800 hours
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 5.00 years
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 5.00 years
605
Battery life*5
Q8BAT
CPU module Power-on time ratio*1 After SM52 turned on
Actual service value
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time
(Reference value)*3
after an alarm*4)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
Q02CPU 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
70%
100%
20,498 hours
0%
2.34 years
29,959 hours
30%
Q02HCPU 3.42 years 43,800 hours 240 hours
Q06HCPU 41,785 hours 5.00 years 10 days
50%
4.77 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
16,609 hours
0%
1.89 years
23,727 hours
30%
Q02PHCPU 2.70 years 43,800 hours 192 hours
Q06PHCPU 33,218 hours 5.00 years 8 days
50%
3.79 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
11,038 hours 29,609 hours
0%
1.26 years 3.38 years
Q12HCPU 16,200 hours 42,311 hours
30%
Q25HCPU 1.80 years 4.83 years
Q12PHCPU 22,075 hours 96 hours
50%
Q25PHCPU 2.52 years 4 days
Q12PRHCPU 37,055 hours 43,800 hours
Q25PRHCPU 70%
4.23 years 5.00 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
*1 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
(When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50%.)
*2 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70°C, which is calculated based on the characteristic values of
manufacturer-supplied memory (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage ambient temperature range of -25 to 75°C
(operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55°C).
*3 The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at
storage ambient temperature of 40°C. This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with characteristics of the
memory.
*4 In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes.
• The battery connector is disconnected.
• The lead wire of the battery is broken.
*5 For the High Performance model QCPU, these values are applicable when the serial number (first five digits) of the CPU
module is "05011" or later.
For the battery life of the CPU module whose serial number (first five digits) is "05010" or earlier, refer to Page 641,
Appendix 6.3.
606
APPENDICES
● Use the battery within the time shown by the guaranteed value of the battery life.
● If the battery may be used exceeding the time shown by the guaranteed battery life value, perform the following.
• Perform boot operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at the programmable controller power-off.
• Back up programs and data after SM52 turned on (within the backup power time after an alarm).
● When the battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, and Q8BAT) is not connected to the CPU module, its service life is five years.
● When the battery-low special relay SM52 turns on, immediately change the battery.
Even if an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating
condition.
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
607
(3) Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, and Q8BAT) lives of the Universal model QCPU
(a) Other than QnUDVCPU
Battery life
Q6BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value) *4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
30,100 hours
0%
3.44 years
43,000 hours
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 4.91 years
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
Q00U(J)CPU 70%
5.00 years
Q01UCPU 100%
Q02UCPU 25,300 hours
0%
Q03UD(E)CPU 2.89 years
36,100 hours
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 4.12 years
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
30,100 hours
0%
3.44 years
43,000 hours
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 4.91 years
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
4,300 hours 32,100 hours
0%
Q04UD(E)HCPU 0.49 years 3.66 years
6,100 hours
30%
0.70 years
8,600 hours 384 hours
2 50%
0.98 years 43,800 hours 16 days
14,300 hours 5.00 years
70%
1.63 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
608
APPENDICES
Battery life
Q6BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value) *4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
25,300 hours
0%
2.89 years
36,100 hours
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 4.12 years
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
4,200 hours 32,100 hours
0%
0.48 years 3.66 years
6,000 hours
30%
0.68 years
8,400 hours 384 hours
2 50%
0.96 years 43,800 hours 16 days
Q06UD(E)HCPU 14,000 hours 5.00 years
70%
1.60 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
0%
2,300 hours 19,200 hours A
0.26 years 2.19 years
3,200 hours 27,400 hours
30%
0.37 years 3.13 years
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
4,600 hours 38,400 hours 192 hours
3 50%
0.53 years 4.38 years 8 days
7,600 hours
70%
0.87 years 43,800 hours
43,800 hours 5.00 years
100%
5.00 years
609
Battery life
Q6BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value) *4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
22,600 hours
0%
2.58 years
32,200 hours
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 3.68 years
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
4,100 hours 26,200 hours
0%
0.47 years 2.99 years
5,800 hours 37,400 hours
30%
0.66 years 4.27 years
8,200 hours 384 hours
2 50%
0.94 years 16 days
13,600 hours 43,800 hours
70%
1.55 years 5.00 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
Q10UD(E)HCPU
2,300 hours 18,600 hours
Q13UD(E)HCPU 0%
0.26 years 2.12 years
Q20UD(E)HCPU
Q26UD(E)HCPU 3,200 hours 26,500 hours
30%
0.37 years 3.03 years
4,600 hours 37,200 hours 192 hours
3 50%
0.53 years 4.25 years 8 days
7,600 hours
70%
0.87 years 43,800 hours
43,800 hours 5.00 years
100%
5.00 years
1,500 hours 13,800 hours
0%
0.17 years 1.58 years
2,100 hours 19,700 hours
30%
0.24 years 2.25 years
3,000 hours 27,600 hours 144 hours
4 50%
0.34 years 3.15 years 6 days
5,000 hours
70%
0.57 years 43,800 hours
43,800 hours 5.00 years
100%
5.00 years
610
APPENDICES
Battery life
Q6BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value) *4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
19,000 hours
0%
2.16 years
27,100 hours
30%
3.09 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
1
38,000 hours 5.00 years 25 years
50%
4.33 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
4,000 hours 25,000 hours
0%
0.45 years 2.85 years
5,700 hours 35,700 hours
30%
0.65 years 4.07 years
8,000 hours 384 hours
2 50%
0.91 years 16 years
13,300 hours 43,800 hours
70%
1.51 years 5.00 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years A
Q50UDEHCPU 2,200 hours 18,000 hours
0%
Q100UDEHCPU 0.25 years 2.05 years
3,100 hours 25,700 hours
30%
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
0.35 years 2.93 years
4,400 hours 36,000 hours 192 hours
3 50%
0.50 years 4.10 years 8 years
7,300 hours
70%
0.83 years 43,800 hours
43,800 hours 5.00 years
100%
5.00 years
1,500 hours 13,500 hours
0%
0.17 years 1.54 years
2,100 hours 19,200 hours
30%
0.24 years 2.19 years
3,000 hours 27,000 hours 144 hours
4 50%
0.34 years 3.08 years 6 years
5,000 hours
70%
0.57 years 43,800 hours
43,800 hours 5.00 years
100%
5.00 years
611
Battery life
Q6BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value) *4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
1,160 hours 10,800 hours
0%
0.13 years 1.23 years
1,600 hours 15,400 hours
30%
0.18 years 1.75 years
Q50UDEHCPU 2,300 hours 21,600 hours 120 hours
5 50%
Q100UDEHCPU 0.26 years 2.46 years 5 years
3,800 hours 36,000 hours
70%
0.43 years 4.10 years
43,800 hours 43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years
612
APPENDICES
Battery life
Q7BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value)*4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q00U(J)CPU 70%
Q01UCPU 100%
Q02UCPU 0%
Q03UD(E)CPU 30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
11,700 hours
A
0%
1.34 years
Q04UD(E)HCPU 16,700 hours
30%
1.91 years
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
23,400 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
2.67 years 5.00 years 25 days
39,000 hours
70%
4.45 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
613
Battery life
Q7BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value) *4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
11,400 hours
0%
1.30 years
16,200 hours
30%
1.85 years
22,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
2.60 years 5.00 years 25 days
38,000 hours
Q06UD(E)HCPU 70%
4.34 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
5,000 hours
0%
0.57 years
7,100 hours
30%
0.81 years
10,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
3 50%
1.14 years 5.00 years 25 days
16,600 hours
70%
1.89 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
614
APPENDICES
Battery life
Q7BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value) *4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
11,100 hours
0%
1.27 years
15,800 hours
30%
1.80 years
22,200 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
2.53 years 5.00 years 25 days
37,000 hours
70%
4.22 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
5,000 hours
Q10UD(E)HCPU 0%
0.57 years
Q13UD(E)HCPU
Q20UD(E)HCPU 7,100 hours
A
30%
Q26UD(E)HCPU 0.81 years
10,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
3 50%
1.14 years 5.00 years 25 days
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
16,600 hours
70%
1.89 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
3,700 hours 36,100 hours
0%
0.42 years 4.12 years
5,200 hours
30%
0.59 years
7,400 hours 432 hours
4 50%
0.84 years 43,800 hours 18 days
12,300 hours 5.00 years
70%
1.40 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
615
Battery life
Q7BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value) *4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 years
70%
100%
10,900 hours
0%
1.24 years
15,500 hours
30%
1.76 years
21,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
2.48 years 5.00 years 25 years
36,300 hours
70%
4.14 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
4,900 hours
0%
0.55 years
7,000 hours
30%
0.79 years
9,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
3 50%
1.11 years 5.00 years 25 years
Q50UDEHCPU 16,300 hours
70%
Q100UDEHCPU 1.86 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
3,600 hours 35,200 hours
0%
0.41 years 4.01 years
5,100 hours
30%
0.58 years
7,200 hours 432 hours
4 50%
0.82 years 43,800 hours 18 years
12,000 hours 5.00 years
70%
1.36 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
2,700 hours 28,600 hours
0%
0.30 years 3.26 years
3,800 hours
30%
0.43 years
5,400 hours 336 hours
5 50%
0.61 years 40,800 hours 14 years
9,000 hours 4.65 years
70%
1.02 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
616
APPENDICES
Battery life
Q8BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value)*4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q00U(J)CPU 70%
Q01UCPU 100%
Q02UCPU 0%
Q03UD(E)CPU 30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
Q04UD(E)HCPU 38,800 hours
A
0%
4.43 years
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
2
50% 43,800 hours 5.00 years 25 days
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
70% 5.00 years
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
37,900 hours
0%
4.33 years
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
2
50% 43,800 hours 5.00 years 25 days
Q06UD(E)HCPU 70% 5.00 years
100%
20,500 hours
0%
2.34 years
29,200 hours
30%
3.33 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
3
41,000 hours 5.00 years 25 days
50%
4.68 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
617
Battery life
Q8BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value) *4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
37,000 hours
0%
4.22 years
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
2
50% 43,800 hours 5.00 years 25 days
70% 5.00 years
100%
20,200 hours
Q10UD(E)HCPU 0%
2.31 years
Q13UD(E)HCPU
Q20UD(E)HCPU 28,800 hours
30%
Q26UD(E)HCPU 3.29 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
3
40,400 hours 5.00 years 25 days
50%
4.61 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
14,000 hours
0%
1.60 years
20,000 hours
30%
2.28 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
4
28,000 hours 5.00 years 25 days
50%
3.20 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
618
APPENDICES
Battery life
Q8BAT
Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
CPU module
*1 *2 Actual service value on
consumption time ratio
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference value) *4 (Backup power time
after an alarm*5)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 years
70%
100%
36,200 hours
0%
4.13 years
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
2
50% 43,800 hours 5.00 years 25 years
70% 5.00 years
100%
20,000 hours
0%
2.28 years
28,500 hours
30%
3.25 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
3
40,000 hours 5.00 years 25 years
50%
4.56 years
A
Q50UDEHCPU 70% 43,800 hours
Q100UDEHCPU 100% 5.00 years
13,900 hours
0%
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
1.58 years
19,800 hours
30%
2.26 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
4
27,800 hours 5.00 years 25 years
50%
3.17 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
10,400 hours
0%
1.18 years
14,800 hours
30%
1.68 years
20,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
5 50%
2.37 years 5.00 years 25 years
34,600 hours
70%
3.94 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
619
*1 For the battery consumption, refer to Page 600, Appendix 4.
*2 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
(When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50%.)
*3 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70°C, which is calculated based on the characteristic values of
manufacturer-supplied memory (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage ambient temperature range of -25 to 75°C
(operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55°C).
*4 The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at
storage ambient temperature of 40°C. This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with characteristics of the
memory.
*5 In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes.
• The battery connector is disconnected.
• The lead wire of the battery is broken.
● Use the battery within the time shown by the guaranteed value of the battery life.
● If the battery may be used exceeding the time shown by the guaranteed battery life value, perform the following.
• Perform boot operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at the programmable controller power-off.
• Back up programs and data After SM52 turned on (within the backup power time after an alarm).
● When the battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, and Q8BAT) is not connected to the CPU module, its service life is five years.
● When the battery-low special relay SM52 turned on, immediately change the battery.
Even if an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating
condition.
620
APPENDICES
(b) QnUDVCPU
The battery life differs depending on the use of an extended SRAM cassette and the power-on time ratio.
Battery life
Q6BAT
Extended SRAM Power-on
CPU module After SM52 turned on
cassette time ratio*1 Actual service value
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time after
(Reference value)*3
an alarm*4)
41,400 hours
0%
4.72 years
30%
43,800 hours 600 hours
Unused
50% 43,800 hours 5.00 years 25 days
70% 5.00 years
100%
26,600 hours
0%
3.03 years
38,000 hours
30%
4.33 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-1MBS
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
23,100 hours
0%
2.63 years
33,000 hours
30%
43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-2MBS
50%
3.76 years
5.00 years 25 days A
43,800 hours
Q03UDVCPU 70%
5.00 years
100%
17,400 hours
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
0%
1.98 years
24,800 hours
30%
2.83 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-4MBS
34,800 hours 5.00 years 25 days
50%
3.97 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
11,000 hours
0%
1.25 years
15,700 hours
30%
1.79 years
22,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-8MBS 50%
2.51 years 5.00 years 25 days
36,600 hours
70%
4.17 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
621
Battery life
Q6BAT
Extended SRAM Power-on
CPU module After SM52 turned on
cassette time ratio*1 Actual service value
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time after
(Reference value)*3
an alarm*4)
31,700 hours
0%
3.61 years
30%
43,800 hours 600 hours
Not used
50% 43,800 hours 5.00 years 25 days
70% 5.00 years
100%
22,000 hours
0%
2.51 years
31,400 hours
30%
3.58 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-1MBS
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
19,600 hours
0%
2.23 years
28,000 hours
30%
3.19 years
43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-2MBS
39,200 hours 5.00 years 25 days
50%
4.47 years
Q04UDVCPU
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
15,300 hours
0%
1.74 years
21,800 hours
30%
2.48 years
43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-4MBS
30,600 hours 5.00 years 25 days
50%
3.49 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
10,100 hours
0%
1.15 years
14,400 hours
30%
1.64 years
20,200 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-8MBS 50%
2.30 years 5.00 years 25 days
33,600 hours
70%
3.83 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
622
APPENDICES
Battery life
Q6BAT
Extended SRAM Power-on
CPU module After SM52 turned on
cassette time ratio*1 Actual service value
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time after
(Reference value)*3
an alarm*4)
30,600 hours
0%
3.49 years
43,700 hours
30%
4.98 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
Not used
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
21,500 hours
0%
2.45 years
30,700 hours
30%
3.50 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-1MBS
43,000 hours 5.00 years 25 days
50%
4.90 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
19,100 hours
0%
2.18 years
27,200 hours
30%
3.10 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-2MBS
Q06UDVCPU 38,200 hours 5.00 years 25 days
50%
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
70%
4.36 years
A
43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
15,000 hours
0%
1.71 years
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
21,400 hours
30%
2.44 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-4MBS
30,000 hours 5.00 years 25 days
50%
3.42 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
10,000 hours
0%
1.14 years
14,200 hours
30%
1.62 years
20,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-8MBS 50%
2.28 years 5.00 years 25 days
33,300 hours
70%
3.80 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
623
Battery life
Q7BAT
Extended SRAM Power-on
CPU module After SM52 turned on
cassette time ratio*1 Actual service value
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time after
(Reference value)*3
an alarm*4)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Not used 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-1MBS 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-2MBS 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q03UDVCPU
70%
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-4MBS 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
28,500 hours
0%
3.25 years
40,700 hours
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-8MBS 4.64 years
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
624
APPENDICES
Battery life
Q7BAT
Extended SRAM Power-on
CPU module After SM52 turned on
cassette time ratio*1 Actual service value
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time after
(Reference value)*3
an alarm*4)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Not used 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-1MBS 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-2MBS 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q04UDVCPU 70%
100%
36,600 hours
0%
4.17 years
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-4MBS
50% 5.00 years 25 days
70%
43,800 hours
5.00 years A
100%
26,500 hours
0%
3.02 years
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
37,800 hours
30%
4.31 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-8MBS
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
625
Battery life
Q7BAT
Extended SRAM Power-on
CPU module After SM52 turned on
cassette time ratio*1 Actual service value
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time after
(Reference value)*3
an alarm*4)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Not used 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-1MBS 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
43,100 hours
0%
4.92 years
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-2MBS
Q06UDVCPU 50% 43,800 hours 5.00 years 25 days
Q13UDVCPU 5.00 years
70%
Q26UDVCPU
100%
36,200 hours
0%
4.13 years
30% 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-4MBS
50% 43,800 hours 5.00 years 25 days
70% 5.00 years
100%
24,800 hours
0%
2.83 years
35,400 hours
30%
4.04 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q4MCA-8MBS
5.00 years 25 days
50%
43,800 hours
70%
5.00 years
100%
626
APPENDICES
Battery life
Q8BAT
Extended SRAM Power-on
CPU module After SM52 turned on
cassette time ratio*1 Actual service value
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time after
(Reference value)*3
an alarm*4)
0%
30%
Not used 50%
70%
100%
0%
30%
Q4MCA-1MBS 50%
70%
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q03UDVCPU Q4MCA-2MBS 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
0%
30%
Q4MCA-4MBS 50%
A
70%
100%
0%
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
30%
Q4MCA-8MBS 50%
70%
100%
627
Battery life
Q8BAT
Extended SRAM Power-on
CPU module After SM52 turned on
cassette time ratio*1 Actual service value
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time after
(Reference value)*3
an alarm*4)
0%
30%
Not used 50%
70%
100%
0%
30%
Q4MCA-1MBS 50%
70%
100%
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q04UDVCPU Q4MCA-2MBS 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
0%
30%
Q4MCA-4MBS 50%
70%
100%
0%
30%
Q4MCA-8MBS 50%
70%
100%
628
APPENDICES
Battery life
Q8BAT
Extended SRAM Power-on
CPU module After SM52 turned on
cassette time ratio*1 Actual service value
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time after
(Reference value)*3
an alarm*4)
0%
30%
Not used 50%
70%
100%
0%
30%
Q4MCA-1MBS 50%
70%
100%
0%
30%
Q06UDVCPU
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q13UDVCPU Q4MCA-2MBS 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q26UDVCPU
70%
100%
0%
30%
Q4MCA-4MBS 50%
70%
100%
A
0%
30%
Q4MCA-8MBS 50%
Appendix 4.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
Appendix 4 Battery Life
70%
100%
*1 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
(When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50%.)
*2 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70°C, which is calculated based on the characteristic values of
manufacturer-supplied memory (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage ambient temperature range of -25 to 75°C
(operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55°C).
*3 The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at
storage ambient temperature of 40°C. This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with characteristics of the
memory.
*4 In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes.
• The battery connector is disconnected.
• The lead wire of the battery is broken.
● Use the battery within the time shown by the guaranteed value of the battery life.
● If the battery may be used exceeding the time shown by the guaranteed battery life value, perform the following.
• Perform boot operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at the programmable controller power-off.
• Back up programs and data After SM52 turned on (within the backup power time after an alarm).
● When the battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, and Q8BAT) is not connected to the CPU module, its service life is five years.
● When the battery-low special relay SM52 turned on, immediately change the battery.
Even if an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating
condition.
629
Appendix 4.3 SRAM card battery life
Battery life*3
Power-on After SM52
SRAM card Guaranteed value Actual service value turned on
time ratio*1
(MIN) (Reference value)*4 (Backup power time
after an alarm)
690 hours 6,336 hours
Q2MEM-1MBS 0%
0.07 years 0.72 years
Manufacturing control 8 hours
11,784 hours 13,872 hours
number "A"*2 100%
1.34 years 1.58 years
2,400 hours 23,660 hours
0%
Q2MEM-1MBS 0.27 years 2.7 years
Manufacturing control 2,880 hours 31,540 hours
30%
number "B"*2 0.32 years 3.6 years
20 hours
or 4,320 hours 39,420 hours
50%
"B"*2 0.49 years 4.5 years
6,480 hours
70%
B or later 0.73 years 43,800 hours
43,800 hours 5.0 years
100% 50 hours
5.0 years
2,400 hours 23,660 hours
0%
0.27 years 2.7 years
2,880 hours 31,540 hours
30%
0.32 years 3.6 years
20 hours
4,320 hours 39,420 hours
Q2MEM-2MBS 50%
0.49 years 4.5 years
6,480 hours
70%
0.73 years 43,800 hours
43,800 hours 5.0 years
100% 50 hours
5.0 years
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours
Q3MEM-4MBS 50% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0 years
70%
100%
36,300 hours
0%
4.1 years
30% 43,800 hours
Q3MEM-8MBS 50 hours
50% 43,800 hours 5.0 years
70% 5.0 years
100%
630
APPENDICES
*1 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
(When the total power-on and power-off times are 12 hours for each, the power-on time ratio is 50%).
*2 The manufacturer control number is the third digit from the leftmost of the alphanumeric characters written on the label
on the back of the SRAM card as shown below.
Written in the upper right hand corner Written in the lower right hand corner
Manufacturer
control number
Manufacturer
control number
*3 For the High Performance model QCPU, these values are applicable when the serial number (first five digits) of the CPU
module is "04012" or later.
For the battery life of the CPU module with a serial number (first five digits) is "04011" or earlier, refer to Page 641,
Appendix 6.3.
*4 The actual service value may vary depending on ambient temperature.
● Use the battery within the time shown by the guaranteed value of the battery life.
● If the battery may be used exceeding the time shown by the guaranteed battery life value, perform the following.
• Perform boot operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at the programmable controller power-off.
• Back up programs and data after SM52 turned on (within the backup time after an alarm).
● Note that the SRAM card battery is consumed even while the programmable controller is powered on with the CPU
A
module battery connected.
● When the battery-low special relay SM52 turns on, immediately change the battery.
Even if an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating
Appendix 4.3 SRAM card battery life
Appendix 4 Battery Life
condition.
● The SRAM card is not available for the Basic model QCPU.
631
Appendix 5 Checking Serial Number and Function
Version
The serial number and function version of the CPU module can be checked on the rating plate, on the front of the
module, and on the System monitor screen in programming tool.
(1) Checking on the rating plate
The rating plate is located on the side of the module.
Serial number (first 5 digits)
Function version
Relevant regulation
standards
(2) Checking on the front of the module
The serial number on the rating plate is printed on the front (at the bottom) of the module.
This does not apply to the following CPU modules.
• Redundant CPUs and Q00JCPU
090911090910001-B
Function version
Serial number
632
APPENDICES
(3) Checking on the System monitor screen (Product information list screen)
The serial number and function version of intelligent function modules can also be checked on the Product
Information List screen.
[Diagnostics] [System Monitor] [Product Information List] button
Serial Function Production
No. version number
Appendix 5 Checking Serial Number and Function Version
[Serial No., Ver., and Product No.]
• The serial number of the module is displayed in the "Serial No." column.
• The function version of the module is displayed in the "Ver." column.
• The serial number (product number) printed on the rating plate of the module is displayed in the "Product
No." column.*1
Note that "-" is displayed for a modules that does not support the product number display.
• Information on the extended SRAM cassette inserted is also displayed for the QnUDVCPU.
Information on the memory card or SD memory card inserted to the CPU module are not displayed.
*1 The product number is displayed only for the Universal model QCPU.
● The individual module product information can be displayed by selecting a module in the "Main Block" area and clicking
the button on the System Monitor screen.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)
● The serial number displayed on the Product Information List screen of the programming tool may differ from that on the
rating plate or on the front of the module.
• The serial number on the rating plate or on the front of the module indicates the management information of the
product.
• The serial number displayed on the Product Information List screen indicates the functional information of the
product. The functional information of the product will be updated when a function is added.
633
Appendix 5.1 Applicable software versions
The following table lists the software versions applicable to a single CPU system. For versions applicable to a multiple
CPU system or a redundant system, refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
Software version
CPU module
GX Works2 GX Developer PX Developer
Basic model QCPU 7.00A or later
1.15R or later N/A
High Performance model QCPU 4.00A or later
Q02PHCPU,
8.68W or later 1.18U or later*1
Q06PHCPU
Process CPU 1.87R or later
Q12PHCPU,
7.10L or later 1.00A or later*1*2
Q25PHCPU
Q00UJCPU,
Q00UCPU, 8.76E or later N/A
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU,
Q03UDCPU,
8.48A or later N/A
Q04UDHCPU, 1.15R or later
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU,
8.76E or later N/A
Q20UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU,
8.62Q or later N/A
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDVCPU,
Universal model
Q04UDVCPU,
QCPU
Q06UDVCPU, 1.98C or later N/A N/A
Q13UDVCPU,
Q26UDVCPU
Q03UDECPU,
Q04UDEHCPU,
Q06UDEHCPU, 8.68W or later N/A
Q13UDEHCPU, 1.15R or later
Q26UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU,
8.76E or later N/A
Q20UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU,
1.31H or later N/A N/A
Q100UDEHCPU
*1 To use PX Developer, use GX Works2 of Version 1.98C or later.
*2 To use PX Developer, use GX Developer of Version 7.20W or later.
634
APPENDICES
Appendix 5.2 GX Configurator versions applicable to a single
CPU system
The following table lists the GX Configurator versions applicable to a single CPU system.
The applicable versions differ depending on the intelligent function module used.
For the applicable versions, refer to the user's manual for the intelligent function module used.
(1) When Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, and Process QCPU
are used
Software version
Product Basic model High Performance
Process CPU
QCPU model QCPU
GX Configurator-AD SW0D5C-QADU 00A or later
GX Configurator-DA SW0D5C-QDAU 00A or later
GX Configurator-SC SW0D5C-QSCU 00A or later
GX Configurator-CT Version 1.10L or later SW0D5C-QCTU 00A or later Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-TI Version 1.00A or later
GX Configurator-TC SW0D5C-QCTU 00A or later
GX Configurator-FL SW0D5C-QFLU 00A or later
GX Configurator-QP Version 2.10L or later Version 2.00A or later Version 2.13P or later
A
GX Configurator-PT Version 1.10L or later Version 1.00A or later
Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-AS Version 1.13P or later Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-MB Version 1.00A or later Version 1.00A or later
Version 1.00A or later
Appendix 5.2 GX Configurator versions applicable to a single CPU system
Appendix 5 Checking Serial Number and Function Version
GX Configurator-DN Version 1.10L or later Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-DP Version 7.00A or later Version 7.00A or later Version 7.00A or later*1
*1 When using the GX Configurator with the Q02PH/Q06PHCPU, use the Version 7.04E or later.
635
(2) When Universal model QCPU is used
Software version
Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q00U(J), Q01U,
Q02U, Q03UD,
Product Q13UDH or Q06UDEH, Q10UDH, Q20UDH,
Q04UDH, or
Q26UDHCPU Q13UDEH, or Q10UDEH, or
Q06UDHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU
Version 2.05F Version 2.05F Version 2.05F Version 2.05F
GX Configurator-AD
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 2.06G Version 2.06G Version 2.06G Version 2.06G
GX Configurator-DA
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 2.12N Version 2.12N Version 2.17T Version 2.17T
GX Configurator-SC
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 1.25AB Version 1.25AB Version 1.25AB Version 1.25AB
GX Configurator-CT *1 *2 *3
or later or later or later or later*4
Version 1.24AA Version 1.24AA Version 1.24AA Version 1.24AA
GX Configurator-TI
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z
GX Configurator-TC
or later*1 or later *2
or later *3
or later*4
Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z
GX Configurator-FL *1 *2 *3
or later or later or later or later*4
Version 2.25B Version 2.29F Version 2.30G Version 2.32J
GX Configurator-QP
or later or later or later*5 or later
Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z
GX Configurator-PT
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 1.21X Version 1.21X Version 1.21X Version 1.21X
GX Configurator-AS
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 1.08J Version 1.08J Version 1.08J Version 1.08J
GX Configurator-MB *1 *2 *3
or later or later or later or later*4
Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.24AA Version 1.24AA
GX Configurator-DN *1 *2 *3
or later or later or later or later*4
Version 7.02C Version 7.03D Version 7.03D Version 7.04E
GX Configurator-DP*6
or later*7 or later or later or late
*1 The software can be used by installing GX Developer Version 8.48A or later.
*2 The software can be used by installing GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later.
*3 The software can be used by installing GX Developer Version 8.68W or later.
*4 The software can be used by installing GX Developer Version 8.78G or later.
*5 GX Configurator-QP Version 2.29F can be used when connected via USB.
*6 When using the GX Configurator with the Q50UDEH/Q100UDEHCPU, use the Version 7.07H or later.
*7 When using the GX Configurator with the Q02UCPU, use the Version 7.03D or later.
636
APPENDICES
Appendix 6 Added or Changed Functions
Functions and specifications of the CPU module are added and/or changed at each version upgrade.
Available functions and specifications differ depending on the function version and serial number of the CPU module.
Appendix 6.1 Basic model QCPU upgrade
(1) Specifications comparison
: Usable/compatible, ×: Unusable/incompatible
Serial number (first 5 digits) of the CPU module
Specifications Function version A Function version B
"04121" or earlier "04122" or later
Q00JCPU ×
Standard RAM capacity Q00CPU 64K bytes 128K bytes
Q01CPU 64K bytes 128K bytes
Q00JCPU ×
CPU shared memory Q00CPU ×
Q01CPU ×
Appendix 6.1 Basic model QCPU upgrade
Appendix 6 Added or Changed Functions
637
(2) Added functions and supported CPU module and programming tool versions
×: Not supported, ---: Not related to the programming tool
Serial Programming tool version
Function
Function number (first
version GX Works2 GX Developer
5 digits)
Function block ( Operating manual (for function block)
for the programming tool used) "04121" of
A
Structured text (ST) language ( MELSEC-Q/L earlier
Programming Manual (Structured Text))
MELSAP3 ( MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual
(PID Control Instructions))
PID operation function*1 ( MELSEC-Q/L/QnA
Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions)) Version 8.00A or
later
Real number operation*1*3
Intelligent function module event interruption*3
Version 1.15R or
Device initial value automatic setting function*3
later
Remote password setting function*3 "04122" or later
E-mail parameter ( Manual of the module that supports B
the e-mail function)
Online change using pointer*3
Increased file register capacity (32K points to 64K points)*2*3 ---
Multiple CPU system ( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple
Version 8.00A or
CPU System))
later
Online change (multiple blocks)*3
CC-Link Remote network additional mode ( CC-Link Version 8.03D or
"06112" or later
System Master/Local Module User's Manual) later
*1 When the CPU instruction installed by GX Developer Version 8 is read by GX Developer of Version 7 or earlier, it is
processed as an "instruction code error" by GX Developer.
*2 Unsupported by the Q00JCPU.
*3 For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
638
APPENDICES
Appendix 6.2 High Performance model QCPU upgrade
(1) Specifications comparison
: Usable/compatible, ×: Unusable/incompatible
Serial number (first 5 digits) of the CPU module
Function version A Function version B
Specifications
"02091" or "02092" or "02112" or "03051" or "04012" or "16021" or
earlier later later later later later
Q02CPU 64K bytes
Q02HCPU 64K bytes 128K bytes
Standard RAM capacity Q06HCPU 64K bytes 128K bytes
Q12HCPU 64K bytes 256K bytes
Q25HCPU 64K bytes 256K bytes
CPU shared memory × ×
SRAM card battery life extension*1 × × × ×
SRAM card (2M bytes) × × × ×
SRAM card (4M bytes) × × × × ×
*1 For details of the SRAM card battery life, refer to Page 630, Appendix 4.3.
(2) Added functions and supported CPU module and programming tool versions
A
×: Not supported, ---: Not related to the programming tool
Serial Programming tool version
Function
Function number (first GX
version GX Works2
Appendix 6.2 High Performance model QCPU upgrade
Appendix 6 Added or Changed Functions
5 digits) Developer
Automatic write to the standard ROM*1
External input/output forced on/off*1
Version 1.15R Version 6 or
Remote password setting*1 "02092" or
A or later later
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network*1 later
Interrupt module (QI60)*1
Programming module ( Page 51, Section 2.3.2) ---
639
Serial Programming tool version
Function
Function number (first GX
version GX Works2
5 digits) Developer
Version 7 or
Multiple CPU system*2 "02122" or later
later
Version 1.15R Version 7.10L or
Installation of a PC CPU module into a multiple CPU system*2 "03051" or later
or later later
Version 8 or
High speed interrupt*1
later
Index modification for module designation of dedicated
instruction ( Manuals of the intelligent function modules "04012" or later
that support the use of dedicated instructions) ---
Selection of refresh item for COM instruction ( MELSEC-
Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instruction))
Online change (files) of SFC programs*1 Version 8 or
"04122" or later
File memory capacity change*1 later
Version 1.15R
CC-Link Remote network additional mode ( CC-Link or later
Version 8.03D
System Master/Local Module User's Manual)
"05032" or later or later
Incomplete derivative PID operation function*3
Floating-point comparison instruction speedup
Read of the SFC active step comment ( MELSEC- ---
"07012" or later
Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC)) B
Version 1.15R Version 8.23Z or
Error detection in the redundant power supply system*1
or later later
Use of clock data of 1/1000 second*1 "07032" or later ---
Storage of sampling trace files in standard RAM*1 Version 8.23Z or
Individual setting of refresh device on multiple CPU system *2 later
Execution status selection of the fall instruction during online Version 8.27D
"07092" or later
change*1 or later
CC-Link block data assurance per station ( CC-Link
System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Details)) Version 1.15R
or later
Setting "8" for the number of modules in Network parameter for Version 8.32J or
"08032" or later
CC-Link later
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
(Details))
CC-Link IE Controller Network ( CC-Link IE Controller Version 8.45X
Network Reference Manual) "09012" or later or later
ATA card ( Page 237, Section 9.2.1)
---
SRAM card (4M bytes) ( Page 237, Section 9.2.1) "16021" or later
*1 For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2 For details, refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
*3 For details, refer to the following.
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions)
640
APPENDICES
Appendix 6.3 Precautions for using older versions of the High
Performance model QCPU
(1) Q6BAT/Q7BAT/Q8BAT battery life when the serial number (first five digits) of
the QCPU is "05010" or earlier
Battery life
Q6BAT Q7BAT
CPU Actual After SM52 Actual After SM52
Power-on
module Guaranteed service turned on Guaranteed service turned on
time ratio
model value value (Backup value value (Backup
(70°C) (Reference power time (70°C) (Reference power time
value) (40°C) after an alarm) value) (40°C) after an alarm)
5,433 hours 13,000 hours
0%
0.62 years 1.48 years
7,761 hours. 18,571 hours.
30%
0.88 years 2.11 years
10,866 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 26,000 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
Q02CPU 50%
1.24 years 5.00 years 5 days 2.96 years 5.00 years 10 days
18,110 hours 43,333 hours
70%
2.06 years 4.94 years
100%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours A
5.00 years 5.00 years
2,341 hours 14,550 hours 5,000 hours 38,881 hours
0%
0.26 years 1.66 years 0.57 years 4.43 years
Appendix 6.3 Precautions for using older versions of the High Performance model QCPU
Appendix 6 Added or Changed Functions
3,344 hours 20,786 hours 7,142 hours
30%
0.38 years 2.37 years 0.81 years
Q02HCPU 4,682 hours 29,100 hours 120 hours 10,000 hours 240 hours
50%
Q06HCPU 0.53 years 3.32 years 5 days 1.14 years 43,800 hours 10 days
7,803 hours 16,666 hours 5.00 years
70%
0.89 years 43,800 hours 1.90 years
43,800 hours 5.00 years 43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years
1,260 hours 6,096 hours 2,900 hours 16,711 hours
0%
0.14 years 0.69 years 0.33 years 1.90 years
1,800 hours 8,709 hours 4,142 hours 23,873 hours
30%
0.20 years 0.99 years 0.47 years 2.72 years
Q12HCPU 2,520 hours 12,192 hours 48 hours 5,800 hours 33,422 hours 96 hours
50%
Q25HCPU 0.28 years 1.39 years 2 days 0.66 years 3.81 years 4 days
4,200 hours 20,320 hours 9,666 hours
70%
0.47 years 2.31 years 1.10 years 43,800 hours
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 5.00 years
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 5.00 years
641
Battery life
CPU Q8BAT
Power-on
module After SM52 turned on
time ratio Guaranteed value Actual service value
model (Backup power time after an
(70°C) (Reference value) (40°C)
alarm)
0%
30%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q02CPU 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
100%
20,498 hours
0%
2.34 years
29,959 hours
30%
Q02HCPU 3.42 years 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q06HCPU 41,785 hours 5.00 years 25 days
50%
4.77 years
70% 43,800 hours
100% 5.00 years
11,038 hours
0%
1.26 years
16,200 hours
30%
1.80 years
Q12HCPU 22,075 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
50%
Q25HCPU 2.52 years 5.00 years 10 days
37,055 hours
70%
4.23 years
43,800 hours
100%
5.00 years
642
APPENDICES
(2) SRAM card battery life when the serial number (first five digits) of the QCPU is
"04011" or earlier
Battery life
Power-on After SM52 turned on
SRAM card Guaranteed value Actual service value
time ratio (Backup power time
(MIN) (Reference Value)
after an alarm)
690 hours 6,336 hours
0%
Q2MEM-1MBS 0.07 years 0.72 years
8 hours
Q2MEM-2MBS 11,784 hours 13,872 hours
100%
1.34 years 1.58 years
(3) Number of file register points according to the serial number (first five digits)
CPU module model name Number of file register points
Q02CPU 32K points
Q02HCPU Serial number (first five digits) is "04011" or earlier 32K points
Q06HCPU Serial number (first five digits) is "04012" or later 64K points
Q12HCPU Serial number (first five digits) is "02091" or earlier 32K points
Q25HCPU Serial number (first five digits) is "02092" or later 128K points
Appendix 6.3 Precautions for using older versions of the High Performance model QCPU
Appendix 6 Added or Changed Functions
643
Appendix 6.4 Process CPU upgrade
(1) Added functions and supported CPU module and GX Developer versions
×: Not supported, ---: Not related to the programming tool
Serial Programming tool version
Function
Function number (first
version GX Works 2 GX Developer
5 digits)
Index modification for module designation of the dedicated
instruction ( Manuals of the intelligent function modules
that support the use of dedicated instructions)
---
Selection of refresh item for the COM instruction
( MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common
Instruction))
Online change (files) of SFC programs*1
Version 8
File memory capacity change*1
(Version 8.22Y
CC-Link remote network additional mode Version 1.87R or
or earlier)
later
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual)
"07032" or later
Version 8.23Z or
Program memory check function*1
later
Read of the SFC active step comment ( MELSEC-
---
Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC))
Version 1.87R or Version 8.23Z or
Error detection in the redundant power supply system*1 C later later
*1 ---
Use of clock data of 1/1000 second
Storage of sampling trace files in standard RAM*1
Version 8.23Z or
Individual setting of refresh device on multiple CPU system
later
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System))
Execution status selection of the fall instruction during online Version 8.27D or
"07092" or later
change*1 later
CC-Link block data assurance per station ( CC-Link Version 1.87R or
System Master/Local Module User's Manual) later
Version 8.32J or
Setting "8" for the number of modules in Network parameter "08032" or later
later
for CC-Link ( CC-Link System Master/Local Module
User's Manual)
CC-Link IE Controller Network ( CC-Link IE Controller Version 8.68W
"10042" or later
Network Reference Manual) or later
SRAM card (4M bytes) ( Page 237, Section 9.2.1) "16021" or later ---
*1 For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
644
APPENDICES
Appendix 6.5 Redundant CPU upgrade
(1) Added functions and supported CPU module and GX Developer versions
×: Not supported, ---: Not related to the programming tool
Serial Programming tool version
Function
Function number (first
version GX Works 2 GX Developer
5 digits)
Read of the SFC active step comment ( MELSEC-
Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC)) ---
Use of clock data of 1/1000 second*1 "07032" or later
Version 8.23Z or
Storage of sampling trace files in standard RAM*1
later
Execution status selection of the fall instruction during online Version 8.27D or
"07092" or later
change*1 later
Extension base unit (Q6WRB) ( QnPRHCPU User's D Version 8.45X or
"09012" or later Version 1.87R or
Manual (Redundant System)) later
later
Setting 8 for the number of modules in Network parameter for
Version 8.58L or
CC-Link ( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's "09012" or later
later
Manual)
CC-Link IE Controller Network ( CC-Link IE Controller Version 8.68W
"10042" or later
or later
Network Reference Manual)
A
SRAM card (4M bytes) ( Page 237, Section 9.2.1) "16021" or later ---
*1 For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Appendix 6.5 Redundant CPU upgrade
Appendix 6 Added or Changed Functions
645
Appendix 6.6 Universal model QCPU upgrade
(1) Added functions and supported CPU module and programming tool
×: Not supported, ---: Not related to the programming tool
Function Serial number Programming tool version
Function
version (first 5 digits) GX Works2 GX Developer
Use of the PC CPU module*2 ( QCPU User's Manual
"09072" or later ---
(Multiple CPU System))
Version 8.62Q
Setting whether to use the local devices per program*1
or later
Program memory batch transfer execution status check
(SM165)*1
Multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedicated instruction*2 *8
( MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common ---
Instruction))
Version 1.15R or
Battery consumption display*2
later
( Page 601, Appendix 4.1)
Bit device extension*1
Executional conditioned device test*1
Sampling trace auto start function*1*2
CC-Link IE group cyclic communication function
( CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual)
Scan time measurement*1 Version 8.68W
"10042" or later
or later
External input/output forced on/off*1
Version 1.73B or
Monitoring condition setting*1*2
B later
*1*2
Redundant power supply system
32-bit indexing with "ZZ" specification ( MELSEC-Q/L
Programming Manual (Common Instruction))
"09042" or Version 8.70Y or
Extended data register (D) and extended link register (W)*1*2
later*3 later
Serial communication function (Q02UCPU)*1
CPU module change function with memory card*1*2
Local device setting of the index register*1*2
Version 1.15R or
Communication using the A-compatible 1C/1E frame (MC Version 8.76E or
"10102" or later later
protocol)*4*5 ( MELSEC-Q/L MELSEC Communication later
Protocol Reference Manual)
A QnA converted special relay/special register (SM1000 to
SM1255, SD1000 to SD1255) ( Page 454, Appendix 2,
Page 506, Appendix 3)
Socket communication function*2 ( QnUCPU User's Version 8.78G
"11012" or later
Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)) or later
Version 8.82L or
Module model name read*1 "11043" or later
later
Version 1.12N or
Module error collection function*1*2*6 "11043" or later ×
later
646
APPENDICES
Function Serial number Programming tool version
Function
version (first 5 digits) GX Works2 GX Developer
IP address change function ( QnUCPU User's Manual
"11082" or later --- ---
(Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port))*1
Local device batch read function*1
Version 1.31H or
CC-Link IE Field Network ( MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field "12012" or later ×
later
Network Master/Local Module User's Manual)
Send points expansion function (CC-Link IE Controller
Network module)*1*6
Online change of inactive blocks (SFC) ( MELSEC-
Version 1.40S or
Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC))*2
later
Expansion of SFC step relay points*1*2
Operation mode setting at SFC double block START
( MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC))*2 "12052" or later ×
SFC comment readout instruction ( MELSEC-Q/L/QnA
Programming Manual (SFC))*2
Data up to 10238 bytes can be exchanged with the
---
SP.SOCSND/S(P).SOCRCV(S)/S(P).SOCRDATA instructions
( QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in
Ethernet Port))*2
Version 1.40S or
Parameter-valid drive information*1 --- ×
later
A
Program cache memory auto recovery function*1 "12122" or later
Extension of available index register range (Z0 to Z19) when B
Jn and Un are used in the dedicated instruction
( Manuals for the network modules and the intelligent
Appendix 6.6 Universal model QCPU upgrade
Appendix 6 Added or Changed Functions
"13022" or later
function modules used) --- ---
Storage of device memory error information (Memory check
function) ( Page 555, Appendix 3 (9))
Storage of program error location (Memory check function)
"13042" or later
( Page 507, Appendix 3 (1))
Serial communication function
Version 1.62Q
(Q03UD/Q04UDH/Q06UDH/Q10UDH/Q13UDH/Q20UDH/ "13062" or later ×
or later
Q26UDHCPU)*1
SFC control target block switching ( MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Version 1.73B or
×
Programming Manual (SFC)) later
AnS/A series compatible extension base unit
"13102" or later
Communication using the A-compatible 1E frame (MC
--- ---
protocol) through built-in Ethernet port ( MELSEC-Q/L
MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual)
IP packet transfer function (for CC-Link IE Field Network)
Version 1.77F or
( QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in "14022" or later ×
later
Ethernet Port))*2*6
Own station number setting function for CC-Link IE Field
Version 1.87R or
Network ( MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network "14042" or later ×
later
Master/Local Module User's Manual)
647
Function Serial number Programming tool version
Function
version (first 5 digits) GX Works2 GX Developer
Writing/reading data to/from refresh devices by specifying a
station number*2
*11 --- ---
( MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common
Instruction))
Version 1.98C or
High-speed interrupt function*1*7 --- ×
later
Data logging function*7 ( QnUDVCPU/LCPU User's Version 1.98C or
--- ×
Manual (Data Logging Function)) later
IP packet transfer function (for CC-Link IE Controller Network)
Version 1.98C or
( QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in "14022" or later ×
later
Ethernet Port))*2*6
Use of file registers in communication using the A-compatible
1E frame (MC protocol) through built-in Ethernet port
*9
( QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in
Ethernet Port))
Increase in the number of routing parameters
--- ---
( MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common *10
Instruction))*2
"15043" or later
Latch clear by using the special relay and special register
(QnUDVCPU
areas*1*2
only)
Predefined protocol function "15103" or later 1.501X or later ×
Reading/writing device data from/to the CPU module on
another station by specifying an IP address ( QnUCPU "16043" or later 1.513K or later ---
B
User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port))
iQ Sensor Solution function (data backup/restoration only) for
AnyWireASLINK and CC-Link ( iQ Sensor Solution "17012" or later 1.530C or later ---
*2
Reference Manual)
iQ Sensor Solution function (data backup/restoration only) for
CC-Link IE Field Network ( iQ Sensor Solution × ---
Reference Manual)*2 "17052" or later
MELSOFT connection extended setting ( QnUCPU
1.535H or later ×
User’s Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port))*2
CPU module data backup/restoration function*1*7 "17103" or later --- ---
Upper limit value setting for the number of backup data (CPU
module data backup/restoration function)*1*7
"18052" or later --- ---
Retrying the automatic backup (CPU module data
backup/restoration function)*1*7
iQ Sensor Solution function (automatic detection of connected
device, system configuration check, communication setting
reflection, sensor parameter read/write, monitoring, and data "18072" or later 1.550Y or later ---
backup/restoration) for built-in Ethernet ( iQ Sensor
Solution Reference Manual)*2
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic function ( CC-Link IE
1.555D or later ×
Field Network Basic Reference Manual)*7
"18112" or later
SLMP frame send instruction ( QnUCPU User's Manual
--- ---
(Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port))*2
648
APPENDICES
*1 For details, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2 Some models do not support the function. For details, refer to the corresponding reference.
*3 Data of the extended data register (D) and extended link register (W) can be retained in the standard ROM by using the
latch data backup function if the serial number (first five digits) of the Universal model QCPU is "10042" or later.
*4 Communication using A-compatible 1E frame is available only via the Ethernet module. If the module is connected to the
Ethernet port built in the CPU, this function is not available.
*5 Communication using the A-compatible 1C frame is available only via any serial communication module. If the module is
connected to the built-in RS-232 interface of the CPU module, this function is not available.
*6 For the versions of the intelligent function modules that support the function, refer to the manual for the intelligent
function module used.
*7 Only the QnUDVCPU supports these functions.
*8 The serial number (first five digits) differs depending on the CPU module.
Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU: "10011" or later
CPU modules other than above: "10012" or later
*9 The serial number (first five digits) differs depending on the CPU module.
QnUDE(H)CPU: "14112" or later
QnUDVCPU: "15043" or later
*10 The serial number (first five digits) differs depending on the CPU module.
QnU(D)(H)CPU, QnUDE(H)CPU: "14112" or later
QnUDVCPU: "15043" or later
*11 The serial number (first five digits) differs depending on the CPU module.
QnUDE(H)CPU: "14072" or later
QnUDVCPU: "16043" or later
Appendix 6.6 Universal model QCPU upgrade
Appendix 6 Added or Changed Functions
649
Appendix 7 Specifications of L1MEM-2GBSD and L1MEM-
4GBSD
This sections describes the specifications of the SD memory cards.
Item L1MEM-2GBSD L1MEM-4GBSD
Type SD SDHC
Capacity 2G bytes 4G bytes
Number of writes 100000 times
H 32mm
External dimensions W 24mm
D 2.1mm
Weight 2g
For the handling of SD memory cards, refer to Page 243, CHAPTER 10.
650
APPENDICES
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
Compliance to the EMC Directive, which is one of the EU Directives, has been a legal obligation for the products sold
in European countries since 1996 as well as the Low Voltage Directive since 1997.
Manufacturers who recognize their products are compliant to the EMC and Low Voltage Directives are required to
declare that print a "CE mark" on their products.
(1) Authorized representative in Europe
Authorized representative in Europe is shown below.
Name : MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Address: Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1, 40882 Ratingen, Germany
Appendix 8.1 Requirements for compliance with the EMC
Directive
The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause
excessive electromagnetic interference (emissions) and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference
(immunity)".
This section summarizes the precautions for compliance with the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed with the
MELSEC-Q series programmable controllers.
These precautions are based on the requirements and the standards of the regulation, however, it does not guarantee A
that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions will comply with above-mentioned directive. The
method and judgement for complying with the EMC Directive must be determined by the person who construct the
entire machinery.
Appendix 8.1 Requirements for compliance with the EMC Directive
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
651
Appendix 8.1.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive
(1) Regulations regarding emission
Standard Test item Test description Value specified in standard
• 30M-230MHz
QP: 40dB µ V/m (10m in
Radio waves from
CISPR16-2-3 measurement range)*1
*2
the product are
Radiated emission • 230M-1000MHz
measured.
EN61131-2: QP: 47dB µ V/m (10m in
2007 measurement range)
• 150k-500kHz
CISPR16-2-1,
CISPR16-1-2
Noise from the product to the QP: 79dB, Mean: 66dB*1
power line is measured. • 500k-30MHz
Conducted emission*2
QP: 73dB, Mean: 60dB
*1 QP: Quasi-peak value, Mean: Average value
*2 Programmable controllers are open-type devices (devices designed to be housed inside other equipment) and must be
installed inside a conductive control panel. The corresponding tests were conducted with the programmable controller
installed inside a control panel.
652
APPENDICES
(2) Regulations regarding immunity
Standard Test item Test description Value specified in standard
EN61000-4-2 Immunity test in which
• 8kV Air discharge
Electrostatic discharge electrostatic is applied to the
• 4kV Contact discharge
immunity*1 cabinet of the equipment.
EN61000-4-3
80% AM modulation@1kHz
Radiated, Immunity test in which electric
• 80M-1000MHz: 10V/m
radio-frequency, fields are irradiated to the
• 1.4G-2.0GHz: 3V/m
electromagnetic field product.
• 2.0G-2.7GHz: 1V/m
immunity*1
EN61000-4-4 Immunity test in which burst • AC/DC main power, I/O power,
Electrical fast noise is applied to the power AC I/O (unshielded): 2kV
transient/burst immunity*1 line and signal line. • DC I/O, analog, communication: 1kV
• AC power line, AC I/O power,
AC I/O (unshielded):
Immunity test in which 2kV CM, 1kV DM
EN61000-4-5
EN61131-2: lightning surge is applied to • DC power line, DC I/O power:
2007 Surge immunity*1 0.5kV CM, DM
the power line and signal line.
• DC I/O, AC I/O (shielded),analog*2 ,
communication: 1kV CM
EN61000-4-6
Immunity test in which high
Immunity to conducted
disturbances, induced by
frequency noise is applied to
0.15M-80MHz, 80% AM modulation
@1kHz, 10Vrms
A
the power line and signal line
radio-frequency fields*1
EN61000-4-8 Immunity test in which the
Power-frequency product is installed in 50Hz/60Hz, 30A/m
Appendix 8.1 Requirements for compliance with the EMC Directive
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
magnetic field immunity*1 inductive magnetic field
• Apply at 0%, 0.5 cycles and zero-
EN61000-4-11 Immunity test in which power cross point
Voltage dips and supply voltage is momentarily • 0%, 250/300 cycles (50/60Hz)
interruption immunity*1 interrupted • 40%, 10/12 cycles (50/60Hz)
• 70%, 25/30 cycles (50/60Hz)
*1: Programmable controllers are open-type devices (devices designed to be housed inside other equipment) and must be
installed inside a conductive control panel. The corresponding tests were conducted with the programmable controller
installed inside a control panel.
*2 The accuracy of an analog-digital converter module may temporary vary within ±10%.
653
Appendix 8.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive
Programmable controller is an open type device and must be installed inside a control panel for use.*1
This not only ensures safety but also ensures effective shielding of programmable controller-generated
electromagnetic noise.
*1 Also, each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel. However, the waterproof type remote
station can be installed outside the control panel.
(1) Control panel
• Use a conductive control panel.
• When attaching the control panel's top plate or base plate, mask painting and weld so that good surface
contact can be made between the panel and plate.
• To ensure good electrical contact with the control panel, mask the paint on the installation bolts of the inner
plate in the control panel so that contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area.
• Ground the control panel with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to ground can be ensured
even at high frequencies.
• Keep the diameter of the holes on the control panel to 10cm or less. If the diameter is larger than 10cm,
electromagnetic wave may leak.
In addition, because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit,
reduce the clearance as much as practicable.
The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint
surface.
The tests were conducted by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation using a control panel having damping
characteristics of 37dB (maximum) and 30dB (average) (measured at 3m distance, 30 to 300MHz).
(2) Connection of power line and ground wire
Ground wire and power supply cable for the programmable controller system must be connected as described
below.
• Provide an grounding point near the power supply module. Ground the power supply's LG and FG terminals
(LG : Line Ground, FG : Frame Ground) with the thickest and shortest wire possible. (The wire length must
be 30cm or shorter.) The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the programmable
controller system to the ground, so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured. As the wires
are used to relieve the noise, the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the
wire is prevented from acting as an antenna.
• The ground wire led from the grounding point must be twisted with the power supply wires. By twisting with
the ground wire, noise flowing from the power supply wires can be relieved to the ground. However, if a filter
is installed on the power supply wires, the wires and the ground wire may not need to be twisted.
654
APPENDICES
Appendix 8.1.3 Cables
The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise component. On the outside of the control
panel, therefore, they serve as antennas to emit noise.
To prevent noise emission, use shielded cables for the cables which are connected to the I/O modules and intelligent
function modules and may be extracted to the outside of the control panel.
The use of a shielded cable also increases noise resistance.
The signal lines (including common line) of the programmable controller, which are connected to I/O modules,
intelligent function modules and/or extension cables, have noise durability in the condition of grounding their shields by
using the shielded cables. If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly, the noise resistance will not meet
the specified requirements.
(1) Grounding of shield section of shielded cable
• Ground the exposed shield section of the shielded cable close to the module. Confirm that the grounded
cables are not induced to electromagnetic from the cables, which are not yet grounded.
• Ground the exposed shield section of the shielded cable to large area on the control panel.
A clamp fitting can be used as shown below.
In this case, apply a cover on the painted inner wall surface of the control panel, which comes in contact with
the clamp, to prevent the surface from being painted.
Screw
Shield section
A
Clamp fitting
Paint mask
Appendix 8.1 Requirements for compliance with the EMC Directive
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
Shielded cable
Note) The method of grounding with a vinyl-coated wire soldered onto the shielded section of the shielded
cable as shown below is not recommended. Doing so will raise the high-frequency impedance,
resulting in loss of the shielding effect.
Shielded cable
Wire
Solderless terminal, crimp contact
655
(2) Grounding cables using a cable clamp
Use shielded cables for external wiring of the following modules, and ground the shield section of the shielded
cable to the control panel using the AD75CK cable clamp (Mitsubishi). (Ground the shield section within 20 to
30cm from the module.)
• CC-Link IE Field Network module
• Positioning module
• Channel isolated pulse input module
• Multichannel high-speed counter module
• Loop control module
• Load cell input module
• Temperature control module
• 4Mpps capable high-speed counter module
• Multi function counter/timer module
• Analog I/O module
Inside control box
Module
20 to 30cm
AD75CK
The AD75CK enables up to four cables to be grounded together if the outside diameter of the shielded cable is
about 7mm.
For details of the AD75CK, refer to the AD75CK-type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual.
(3) MELSECNET/H module
Always use a double-shielded coaxial cable (MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD.: 5C-2V-CCY) for the
coaxial cables MELSECNET/H module. Radiated noise in the range of 30HMz or higher can be suppressed by
using double-shielded coaxial cables. Ground the double-shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to
the ground.
Shield Ground here
Refer to (1) for the grounding of the shield.
656
APPENDICES
(4) Built-in Ethernet port QCPU module, Ethernet module, FL-net module, Web
server module, MES interface module, high speed data logger module, high
speed data communication module, MODBUS/TCP interface module
Precautions for using AUI cables, twisted pair cables and coaxial cables are described below.
• Always ground the AUI cables*1 connected to the 10BASE5 connectors. Because the AUI cable is a
shielded type, strip part of the jacket as shown below and ground the exposed shield section to the ground
as much as possible.
AUI cable
Shield
Refer to (1) for the grounding of the shield.
*1 Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable.
As a ferrite core, ZCAT2032 manufactured by TDK is recommended.
• Use a shielded twisted pair cable for connection to the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX connector.
Strip a part of the jacket as shown below and ground the exposed shield section to the ground as much as
possible.
Shielded twisted pair cables
A
Shield
Refer to (1) for the grounding of the shield.
Appendix 8.1 Requirements for compliance with the EMC Directive
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
• Always use double-shielded coaxial cables as the coaxial cables*2 connected to the 10BASE2 connectors.
Ground the double-shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground.
Shield Ground here
Refer to (1) for the grounding of the shield.
*2 Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable.
As a ferrite core, ZCAT3035 manufactured by TDK is recommended.
(5) CC-Link IE Field Network module
This section describes the precautions for using the CC-Link IE Field Network cable.
• Use the CC-Link IE Field Network cable (SCE5EW-S M).
• Because the CC-Link IE Field Network cable is a shielded type, strip part of the jacket as shown below and
ground the exposed shield section to the ground as much as possible.
CC-Link IE Field Network cable
Shield
657
(6) CC-Link module
• Be sure to ground the cable shield that is connected to the CC-Link module close to the exit of control panel
or to any of the CC-Link stations within 30cm from the module or stations.
The CC-Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable. Remove a part of the jacket as shown below and ground
the exposed shield section to the ground as much as possible.
CC-Link dedicated cable
Shield
• Always use the specified CC-Link dedicated cable.
• Use the FG terminals of the CC-Link module and CC-Link stations as shown below to connect to the FG line
inside the control panel.
Master module Remote module Local module
(Blue)
DA DA DA
Terminating resistor (White) Terminating resistor
DB DB DB
(Yellow)
DG DG DG
SLD CC-Link SLD CC-Link SLD
FG dedicated FG dedicated FG
cable cable
• Use a CE-marked power supply to which the module power supply or external power supply is connected.
Ground the FG terminals.
Power supply model name DLP75-24-1 DLP100-24-1 DLP120-24-1 DLP180-24-1 DLP240-24-1
Rated input voltage 100 to 240VAC
Voltage 24VDC
Rated output
Current 3.1A 4.1A 5.0A 7.5A 10.0A
• Each power line connecting to the external power supply terminal or module power supply terminal must be
30m or less.
• Install a noise filter to the external power supply. Use the noise filter having an attenuation characteristic,
MA1206 (TDK-Lambda) or equivalent. Note that a noise filter is not required if the module is used in Zone A
defined in EN61131-2.
• Keep the length of signal cables connected to the analog input terminals of the following modules to 30m or
less. Wire cables connected to the external power supply and module power supply terminal in the control
panel where the module is installed.
AJ65BT-64RD3
AJ65BT-64RD4
AJ65BT-68TD
• For the cable connected to the power supply terminal of the AJ65SBT-RPS, AJ65SBT-RPG or AJ65BT-
68TD, install a ferrite core with attenuation characteristic equivalent to that of the ZCAT3035-1330 from TDK
Corporation. Twist the cable around the ferrite core by one as shown below.
658
APPENDICES
• To supply the module power supply terminal of the AJ65BTB2-16R/16DR, AJ65SBTB2N-
8A/8R/8S/16A/16R/16S with power using the AC/DC power supply, follow as shown below.
• Install the AC/DC power supply in the control panel where the module is installed.
• Use a CE-marked AC/DC power supply and ground the FG terminals.
(The AC/DC power supply used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: TDK-Lambda Corporation: DLP-
120-24-1)
• For the cable connected to the AC input terminal and DC output terminals of the AC/DC power supply,
attach a ferrite core. Twist the cable around the ferrite core by one as shown below.
(Ferrite core used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: NEC TOKIN Corporation: ESD-SR-250)
(7) CC-Link/LT module
To supply the CL2DA2-B and CL2AD4-B with power using the CL1PAD1, keep the length of the power cable
connected from the CL1PAD1 to the external power supply to 30m or less.
(8) Positioning module
• Use the cables with following length when connecting a drive unit to the QD75.
• QD75PN/QD75P : 2m or less
• QD75DN/QD75D : 10m or less
A
• Use the cable whose length is 30m or less when connecting it to an external device for the QD75. (except for
a pulse output)
Appendix 8.1 Requirements for compliance with the EMC Directive
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
(9) 4Mpps capable high-speed counter module
• Keep the length of a power cable connected to the external coincidence output power supply terminal to 10m
or less.
• Keep the length of a cable connected to an external device to 30m or less.
(10)Multi function counter/timer module
• Install the DC power connected to the encoder inside the same control panel where the module is installed.
• Install a ferrite core to each DC power cable connected to the module and the controller.
The ferrite core ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK Corporation) is recommended.
• Keep the length of a cable connected to the encoder to 3m or less.
• Keep the length of a cable connected to the controller or external output terminal to 30m or less.
• Keep the length of a DC power cable connected to the external device to 3m or less.
659
(11)Q68TD-G (-H01/-H02) type channel isolated thermocouple input module and
Q68RD3-G type channel isolated RTD input module
Wiring as shown below is required.
A6CON4
Q68TD-G-H02(H01)
In a control panel
AD75CK
Relay
terminal
block
Strip off the outer
sheath
20 to 30cm
• Use a shielded cable for connection between the external device connector and relay terminal block, and
ground the shield section of the cable to the control panel. Keep the wiring length to 3m or less.
• Use a shielded cable for external wiring, and ground the shield section of the cable to the control panel using
the AD75CK cable clamp (Mitsubishi). (Ground the shield section within 20 to 30cm from the relay terminal
block.)
• Before handling the relay terminal block, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity
from the human body.
660
APPENDICES
(12)Analog I/O module
• Install a ferrite core to the external power supply connection cable, keeping a distance of 4cm from the
module.
Ferrite core: ZCAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK Corporation
Power supply
Q64AD2DA
QCPU
module
External power supply
connector
External power supply
4cm connection cable
Ferrite core
Externally-connected
power supply
24VDC
(13)Redundant CPU
Use the QCTR tracking cable, and ground the shield section of the cable to the control panel using the AD75CK A
cable clamp (Mitsubishi). For the grounding method, refer to (2).
(14)I/O signal cables and other communication cables
Appendix 8.1 Requirements for compliance with the EMC Directive
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
• For I/O signal cables (including common lines) and other communication cables (such as cables for RS-232,
RS-422, and CC-Link), ground the shield sections (in the same way as explained in (1)) when the cables are
extended out of the control panel.
• To set the input response time of the input module and the interrupt module to 0.1ms or less, keep the each
cable length of I/O signal cables (including common lines) to 30m or shorter.
(15)Extension cables
For extension cables, ground the shield sections (in the same way as explained in (1)) when the cables are
extended out of the control panel.
661
(16)Power cables for external power supply terminal
• Use a CE-marked AC-DC power supply as an external power supply for the following modules. Install the
AC-DC power supply inside the same control panel where the module is installed. Keep the length of a
power cable connected to the external power supply terminal to 30m or less.
• Analog-digital converter module • Digital-analog converter module
• Analog I/O module • Load cell input module
• Temperature input module • Temperature control module
• Loop control module • Pulse input module
• High-speed counter module • Positioning module
• Use a CE-marked AC-DC power supply as an external power supply for the QJ71LP21S-25.
• Use a CE-marked AC-DC power supply as an external power supply for the QJ71E71-B5 and QJ71FL71-
B5(-F01). Keep the length of a power cable to 3m or less.
(17)Peripheral cable
Install ferrite cores at both ends of a peripheral cable (RS-232 cable or USB cable) extended out of the control
panel.
(Ferrite core used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: TDK ZCAT3035-1330)
Appendix 8.1.4 Installation environment of the CC-Link/LT module
and the AS-i module
(1) CC-Link/LT module
Use the module under the environment of Zone A*1. For the applicable zone of the following products, refer to the
manual came with each product.
• CL1Y4-R1B1
• CL1Y4-R1B2
• CL1XY4-DR1B2
• CL1XY8-DR1B2
• CL1PSU-2A
(2) AS-i module
Use the module under the environment of Zone A*1.
*1 Zone defines categories according to industrial environment, specified in the EMC and Low Voltage Directives,
EN61131-2.
Zone C: Factory mains (isolated from public mains by dedicated transformer)
Zone B: Dedicated power distribution, secondary surge protection (rated voltage: 300V or less)
Zone A: Local power distribution, protected from dedicated power distribution by AC/DC converter and insulation
transformer (rated voltage: 120V or less)
Appendix 8.1.5 Power supply part of the power supply module,
Q00JCPU, and Q00UJCPU
Ground the LG and FG terminals by using a ground wire as thick and short as possible (2mm in diameter).
662
APPENDICES
Appendix 8.1.6 Precautions when using a MELSEC-A series module
This section describes precautions when a MELSEC-A series module is used by connecting the QA1S5B,
QA1S6B, QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B, QA6B, or QA6ADP+A5B/A6B extension base unit to the system.
(1) Cable
(a) Grounding the shield section of shielded cable
For the grounding method, refer to, refer to Page 655, Appendix 8.1.3 (1).
Shield section
(b) Positioning modules
Precautions for configuring the machinery compliant with the EMC Directives using the A1SD75P-S3
(abbreviated as A1SD75 hereafter), AD75P-S3 (abbreviated as AD75 hereafter) are described below.
1) When wiring cable of a 2m or less
• Ground the shield of the external device connection cable with a cable clamp. (Ground the shield at the
closest location to the A1SD75/AD75 external wiring connector.)
• Wire external device connection cables to drive modules and external devices by the shortest distance.
• Install the drive unit in the same panel.
Connector for external device connection
A
Power supply module
A1SD75
Cable clamp
Appendix 8.1 Requirements for compliance with the EMC Directive
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
External device connection cable (within 2 m)
Drive unit
2) When wiring with cable that exceeds 2m, but is 10m or less
• Ground the shield of the external device connection cable with a cable clamp. (Ground the shield at the
closest location to the A1SD75/AD75 external wiring connector.)
• Wire external device connection cables to drive modules and external devices by the shortest distance.
• Install a ferrite core.
Connector for external device connection
Power supply module
A1SD75
Ferrite core
Cable clamp
External device connection cable (over 2 m to less than 10 m)
Drive unit
663
3) Ferrite core and cable clamp types
• Cable clamp
Type: AD75CK (Mitsubishi)
• Ferrite core
Type: ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK ferrite core)
Number of ferrite cores
Cable length Prepared part
1 axis 2 axes 3 axes
Within 2m AD75CK 1 1 1
AD75CK 1 1 1
2m to 10m
ZCAT3035-1330 1 2 3
4) Cable clamp mounting position
Refer to Page 656, Appendix 8.1.3 (2).
(c) I/O signal lines
Ground the shield section of an I/O signal cable (including common line) in the same way as explained in Page
655, Appendix 8.1.3 (1) when it is extended out of the control panel.
(d) Extension cable
Ground the shield section of an extension cable in the same way as explained in Page 655, Appendix 8.1.3 (1)
when it is extended out of the control panel.
(2) Power supply module
The following table lists the precautions required for each power supply module. Always observe the items noted
as precautions.
Model Precautions
A1S61P, A1S62P, A61P, A62P Not usable
*1 Use the CE marked 24VDC panel power equipment.
A1S63P , A163P
A1S61PEU, A1S62PEU, A1S61PN, A1S62PN,
Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short-circuiting them.
A61PN, A61PEU, A62PEU, A68P
*1 Installing a filter to a power line is not required if the version of the A1S63P is F or later.
Make sure to use the CE-marked 24VDC panel power equipment.
664
APPENDICES
Appendix 8.1.7 Others
(1) SD memory card
The SD memory cards manufactured by Mitsubishi (NZ1MEM-GBSD and L1MEM-GBSD) conform to IEC
61131-2 when being used in a CPU module.
(2) Ferrite core
A ferrite core has the effect of reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz band.
It is not required to fit ferrite cores to cables, but it is recommended to fit ferrite cores if shield cables pulled out of
the enclosure do not provide sufficient shielding effects.*1
Note that the ferrite cores must be fitted to the cables in the position immediately before they are pulled out of the
enclosure. If the fitting position is improper, the ferrite will not produce any effect.
*1 For some models, a ferrite core needs to be installed on the appropriate position.
Page 655, Appendix 8.1.3
Page 663, Appendix 8.1.6
(3) Noise filter (power supply line filter)
A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise.
It is not required to attach the noise filter to the power supply line except the A61PEU, A62PEU power supply
modules and some models, however, attaching it can suppress more noise.
(The noise filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of 10 MHz or less.) A
The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below.
• Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter. When bundled, the output side
Appendix 8.1 Requirements for compliance with the EMC Directive
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
noise will be induced into the input side wires from which the noise was filtered.
Input side Input side
(power supply side) (power supply side)
Induction
Filter Filter
Output side Output side
(device side) (device side)
The noise will be included when the Separate and lay the input
input and output wires are bundled. and output wires.
• Ground the noise filter grounding terminal to the control cabinet with the shortest wire possible (approx.
10cm).
Remark
Noise filter model name FN343-3/01 FN660-6/06 ZHC2203-11
Manufacturer SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER TDK
Rated current 3A 6A 3A
Rated voltage 250V
665
(4) Isolation transformer
An isolation transformer has an effect on reducing conducted noise (especially, lightning surge).
Lightning surge may cause a malfunction of the programmable controller.
As a measure against lightning surge, connect an isolation transformer as shown below.
The use of an isolation transformer reduces an impact of lightning.
Programmable Isolation
Main controller power transformer
power supply supply
100VAC Programmable
200VAC controller
Relay
terminal block T1
I/O power supply
I/O equipment
Motor power supply
Motor equipment
Inside a control panel
666
APPENDICES
Appendix 8.2 Requirements to compliance with the Low Voltage
Directive
The Low Voltage Directive requires each device that operates with the power supply ranging from 50 to 1000VAC and
75 to 1500VDC to satisfy the safety requirements.
This section summarizes the precautions for installation and wiring of the MELSEC-Q series programmable controllers
to comply with the Low Voltage Directive.
These descriptions are based on the requirements and standards of the regulation, however, it does not guarantee that
the entire machinery manufactured based on the descriptions complies with the above-mentioned directive. The
method and judgment for the low voltage directive must be left to the manufacturer's own discretion.
Appendix 8.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-Q series
programmable controller
The standard applied for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller is EN61131-2 safety of devices used in
measurement rooms, control rooms, or laboratories.
The MELSEC-Q series programmable controller which operate at the rated voltage of 50VAC/75VDC or above are
also developed to conform to the above standard.
The modules which operate at the rated voltage of less than 50VAC/75VDC are out of the Low Voltage Directive
application range.
For CE-marked products, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
A
Appendix 8.2.2 MELSEC-Q series programmable controller
selection
Appendix 8.2 Requirements to compliance with the Low Voltage Directive
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
(1) Power supply module
There are dangerous voltages (voltages higher than 42.4V peak) inside the power supply modules of the
100/200VAC rated I/O voltages. Therefore, the CE marked models are enhanced in insulation internally between
the primary and secondary.
(2) I/O module
There are dangerous voltages (voltages higher than 42.4V peak) inside the I/O modules of the 100/200VAC rated
I/O voltages. Therefore, the CE marked models are enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and
secondary.
The I/O modules of 24VDC or less rating are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range.
(3) CPU module, memory card, SD memory card, extended SRAM cassette, base
unit
Using 5VDC circuits inside, the above modules are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range.
(4) Intelligent function modules (special function modules)
The intelligent function modules such as analog-digital converter modules, digital-analog converter modules,
network modules, and positioning modules (special function modules) are out of the scope of the low voltage
directive because the rated voltage is 24VDC or less.
667
(5) Display device
Use the CE marked display device.
Appendix 8.2.3 Power supply
The insulation specification of the power supply module was designed assuming installation category II. Be sure to use
the installation category II power supply to the programmable controller.
The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by a thunderbolt. Category I has
the lowest durability; category IV has the highest durability.
Category IV Category III Category II Category I
Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers
from the public power distribution.
Appendix 8.2.4 Control panel
Programmable controller is an open type device (a device designed to be housed inside other equipment) and must be
installed inside a control panel for use.*1
*1 Also, each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel.
However, the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel.
(1) Electrical shock prevention
The control panel must be handled as shown below to protect a person who does not have adequate knowledge
of electricity from an electric shock.
• Lock the control panel so that only those who are trained and have acquired enough knowledge of electric
facilities can open the control panel.
• The control panel must have a structure which automatically stops the power supply when the box is
opened.
• For electric shock protection, use IP20 or greater control panel.
668
APPENDICES
(2) Dustproof and waterproof features
The control panel also has the dustproof and waterproof functions. Insufficient dustproof and waterproof features
lower the insulation withstand voltage, resulting in insulation destruction.
The insulation in our programmable controller is designed to cope with the pollution level 2, so use in an
environment with pollution level 2 or below.
Pollution level 1: An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist.
Pollution level 2: An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist, but occasional temporary
conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust. Generally, this is the level for inside the
control box equivalent to IP54 in a control room or on the floor of a typical factory.
Pollution level 3: An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the
accumulated dust.
An environment for a typical factory floor.
Pollution level 4: Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain, snow, etc. An outdoor environment.
As shown above, the programmable controller can realize the pollution level 2 when stored in a control panel
equivalent to IP54.
Appendix 8.2.5 External wiring
(1) Module power supply and external power supply
For the remote module which requires 24VDC as module power supply, the 5/12/24/48VDC I/O module, and the
intelligent function module (special function module) which requires the external power supply, use the
5/12/24/48VDC circuit which is doubly insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit or use the power supply
A
whose insulation is reinforced.
(2) External devices
Appendix 8.2 Requirements to compliance with the Low Voltage Directive
Appendix 8 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the programmable controller, use a
model whose circuit section of the interface to the programmable controller is intensively insulated from the
hazardous voltage circuit.
(3) Reinforced insulation
Reinforced insulation means an insulation having the following withstand voltage.
Surge withstand voltage
Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area
(1.2/50µs)
150VAC or lower 2500V
300VAC or lower 4000V
669
Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements
When the programmable controller is powered on and off, normal control output may not be done momentarily due to
a delay or a start-up time difference between the programmable controller power supply and the external power supply
(DC in particular) for the control target.
For example, if the external power supply for the controlled object is switched on in a DC output module and then the
programmable controller power supply is switched on, the DC output module may provide false output instantaneously
at power-on of the programmable controller. Therefore, it is necessary to make up a circuit that can switch on the
programmable controller power supply first.
Also, malfunction may occur if an external power supply or the programmable controller is faulty.
To prevent any malfunction which may affect the whole system and in a fail-safe viewpoint, provide an external circuit
to the areas which can result in machine breakdown and accidents (e.g. emergency stop, protective and interlock
circuits) must be constructed outside the programmable controller.
The following page gives examples of system designing in the above viewpoint.
670
APPENDICES
(1) System design circuit example (when not using ERR. terminal of power supply
module, or using Q00JCPU)
Power supply
FOR AC FOR AC/DC
Power supply
Transformer Transformer
Transformer Input switched
when power Fuse Fuse
Fuse supply
established. CPU module
CPU module
SM52 DC
SM52 RUN/STOP circuit Ym power
Ym (-)(+)
interlocked with SM403
SM403 RA1 Yn
Yn (run monitor relay) Fuse
XM
TM Set time for DC
power supply to
Program TM be established.
START
NO MC1 NO M10
SW RA1
MC M10
MC STOP
SW START Program
Input module
SW RA1
MC
MC STOP
SW
Output module
Ym
Low battery alarm RA2
RA2 Voltage relay is
(Lamp or buzzer) XM
L recommended
Yn ON when run by
RA1
SM403
Output module
Output module Low battery alarm
(Lamp or buzzer)
A
MC Power to output
equipment is turned Ym
off when the STOP L ON when run by
MC SM403
signal is given. Yn
In the case of an RA1
emergency stop or a
Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements
MC2 stop caused by a
MC1
limit switch. Output module MC MC
MC1
MC2 Interlock circuits
Power to output
equipment is turned
Provide external off when the STOP
interlock circuits for MC2 signal is given.
conflicting operations, MC1
such as forward rotation In the case of an
and reverse rotation, MC1 emergency stop or a
and for parts that could MC2 stop caused by a
damage the machine or limit switch.
cause accidents .
The power-on procedure is as follows:
For AC For AC/DC
1) Power on the programmable controller. 1) Power on the programmable controller.
2) Set CPU to RUN. 2) Set CPU to RUN.
3) Turn on the start switch. 3) When DC power is established, RA2 goes ON.
4) When the magnetic contactor (MC) 4) Timer (TM) times out after the DC power reaches 100%. (The TM set
comes on, the output equipment is value must be the period of time from when RA2 goes on to the
powered and may be driven by the establishment of 100% DC voltage. Set this value to approximately 0.5
program. seconds.)
5) Turn on the start switch.
6) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the output equipment is
powered and may be driven by the program. (If a voltage relay is used
at RA2, no timer (TM) is required in the program.)
671
(2) System design circuit example (when using ERR. terminal of power supply
module)
Power supply FOR AC/DC
Transformer Transformer
Input switched Fuse Fuse
when power supply
established. CPU module
SM52 DC power
RUN/STOP circuit
Ym
(-) (+)
interlocked with RA1 SM403
(run monitor relay) Yn Fuse
XM Set time for DC power
TM supply to be established.
TM
NO MC1 NO M10
M10
Program
START SW
RA1 RA3
MC
MC STOP SW
RA2
RA2 Voltage relay is
XM recommended
Output module
Ym Low battery alarm
L (Lamp or buzzer)
Yn
RA1
OFF at ERR contact OFF
ERR (stop error occurrence)
Power supply module RA3
Output module
MC MC
Interlock circuits as
necessary. Power OFF of output equipment
Provide external interlock at stop
circuits for conflicting At an emergency stop
operations, such as forward At a stop caused by a limit switch
rotation and reverse MC2
At ERR contact OFF
rotation, and for parts that MC1
could damage the machine
or cause accidents if no MC1
interlock were used. MC2
The power-on procedure is as follows:
For AC/DC
1) Power on the programmable controller.
2) Set CPU to RUN.
3) When DC power is established, RA2 goes on.
4) Timer (TM) times out after the DC power reaches 100%. (The TM set value must be the period of time from when RA2
goes ON to the establishment of 100% DC voltage. Set this value to approximately 0.5s.)
5) Turn on the start switch.
6) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the program. (If
a voltage relay is used at RA2, no timer (TM) is required in the program.)
672
APPENDICES
(3) Fail-safe measures against failure of the programmable controller
Failure of a CPU module or memory can be detected by the self-diagnostic function. However, failure of I/O
control area may not be detected by the CPU module.
In such cases, all I/O points turn on or off depending on a condition of problem, and normal operating conditions
and operating safety cannot sometimes be maintained.
Though Mitsubishi programmable controllers are manufactured under strict quality control, they may cause failure
or abnormal operations due to unspecific reasons. To prevent the abnormal operation of the whole system,
machine breakdown, and accidents, fail-safe circuitry against failure of the programmable controller must be
constructed outside the programmable controller.
A system configuration example and fail-safe circuit example are shown below.
Output
Input
Input
Input
Input
Extension cable
No. of slots 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points
Output module for fail-safe purpose 1
Y80 to Y8F Output
A
Output
Output
Output
Empty
Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements
No. of slots 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points
*1 The output module for fail-safe purpose must be mounted in the last slot of the system. (Y80 to Y8F in the above
system.)
On delay timer
Internal program Y80 T1
1s
SM412 Off delay timer
Y80 T2
1s
External load MC
Load
Y81
Load
Y80 Y8F
24V
0.5s 0.5s
0V
24VDC
CPU module Output module *2
T1 T2
MC
*2 Y80 repeats turning on and then off at 0.5s intervals.
Use a no-contact output module (transistor in the example shown above).
673
Appendix 10 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable
Controller
The ambient temperature inside the panel storing the programmable controller must be suppressed to an ambient
temperature of 55°C or less, which is specified for the programmable controller.
For the design of a heat releasing panel, it is necessary to know the average power consumption (heating value) of the
devices and instruments stored inside.
Here the method of obtaining the average power consumption of the programmable controller system is described.
From the power consumption, calculate a rise in ambient temperature inside the panel.
How to calculate average power consumption
The power consuming parts of the programmable controller are roughly classified into six blocks as shown below.
(1) Power consumption of power supply module
The power conversion efficiency of the power supply module is approx. 70 %, while 30 % of the output power is
consumed as heat. As a result, 3/7 of the output power is the power consumption.
Therefore the calculation formula is as follows.
3
W PW = × {(I5V×5) + (I15V×15) + (I24V×24)} (W)
7
I5V : Current consumption of logic 5VDC circuit of each module
I15V : Current consumption of 15VDC external power supply part of intelligent function module
I24V : Average current consumption of 24VDC power supply for internal consumption of the output module
In a redundant power supply system, the same calculation method is applied.
(When 2 redundant power supply modules are placed in parallel, they run sharing the load current half-and-half.)
(2) Total power consumption for 5VDC logic circuits of all modules
(including CPU module)
The power consumption of the 5VDC output circuit section of the power supply module is the power consumption
of each module*1. (The current consumption of the base unit is included.)
W5V = I5V × 5 (W)
*1 For the power consumption of the motion CPU and PC CPU module, refer to the user's manuals of the corresponding
modules.
(3) Total of 24 VDC average power consumption of the output module
(power consumption for simultaneous ON points)
The average power of the 24VDC external power supply is the total power consumption of each module.
W24V = I24V × 24 × Simultaneous ON rate (W)
674
APPENDICES
(4) Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the
output module
(power consumption for simultaneous ON points)
WOUT = IOUT × Vdrop × Number of output points × Simultaneous ON rate (W)
IOUT : Output current (current in actual use) (A)
Vdrop : Voltage drop in each output module (V)
(5) Average power consumption of the input section of the input module
(power consumption for simultaneous ON points)
WIN = IIN × E × Number of input points × Simultaneous ON rate (W)
IIN : Input current (effective value for AC) (A)
E : Input voltage (voltage in actual use) (V)
(6) Power consumption of the external power supply section of the intelligent
function module
WS = I+15V × 15 + I-15V × 15 + I24V × 24 (W)
The total of the power consumption values calculated for each block is the power consumption of the entire A
programmable controller system.
W = WPW + W5V + W24V + WOUT + WIN + WS (W)
Appendix 10 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller
According to the calculated power consumption (W), calculate the heating value and a rise in ambient
temperature inside the panel.
The outline of the calculation formula for a rise in ambient temperature inside the panel is shown below.
W
T= C
UA
W : Power consumption of the entire programmable controller system (value obtained above)
A : Surface area inside the control panel [m2]
U : When the ambient temperature inside the panel is uniformed by a fan....................................6
When air inside the panel is not circulated................................................................................4
If the temperature inside the control panel is expected to exceed the specified range, it is recommended to install a heat
exchanger to the panel to lower the temperature.
If a normal ventilating fan is used, dust will be sucked into the programmable controller together with the external air, and it
may affect the performance of the programmable controller.
675
(7) Example of calculation of average power consumption
(a) System configuration
Q61P-A1
Q02HCPU
Q35B
QX40 Q62DA
QY40P QJ71LP21-25
(b) 5VDC/24VDC current consumption of each module
Module model name 5VDC 24VDC
Q02HCPU 0.64A ----
QX40 0.05A ----
QY40P 0.065A 0.01A
QJ71LP-25 0.55A ----
Q62DA 0.33A 0.12A
Q35B 0.11A ----
(c) Power consumption of power supply module
WPW = 3/7 × (0.64 + 0.05 + 0.05 + 0.065 + 0.55 + 0.33 + 0.11) × 5 = 3.85 (W)
(d) Total power consumption for 5VDC logic circuits of all module
W5V = (0.64 + 0.05 + 0.05 + 0.065 + 0.55+ 0.33 + 0.11) × 5 = 8.98(W)
(e) Total of 24VDC average power consumption of the output module
W24V = 0.01 × 24 × 1 = 0.24 (W)
(f) Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the output
module
WOUT = 0.1 × 0.2 × 16 × 1 = 0.32 (W)
(g) Average power consumption of the input section of the input module
WIN = 0.004 × 24 × 32 × 1 = 3.07 (W)
(h) Power consumption of the external power supply section of the intelligent function
module
WS = 0.12 × 24 = 2.88 (W)
(i) Power consumption of overall system
W = 3.85 + 8.98 + 0.24 + 0.32 + 3.07 + 2.88 = 19.34 (W)
The value of the heat generated in a redundant system (when the Redundant CPU is used) is the sum of the two values for
the control and standby systems, each of which is calculated by the same method as that for the single system.
676
APPENDICES
Appendix 11 Precautions for Battery Transportation
When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations.
(1) Regulated models
The batteries for the CPU module (including memory cards) are classified as shown below.
Classification for
Product name Model Product supply status
transportation
Battery Q8BAT Lithium battery (assembled battery)
Lithium battery (assembled battery)
Battery Q8BAT-SET
+ Q8BAT connection cable Dangerous goods
Battery Q7BAT Lithium battery
Battery Q7BAT-SET Lithium battery with holder
Battery Q6BAT Lithium battery
Q2MEM-BAT
SRAM card battery Lithium coin battery
Q3MEM-BAT
Q2MEM-1MBS Packed with lithium coin battery
Q2MEM-2MBS (Q2MEM-BAT) Non-dangerous goods
Memory card
Q3MEM-4MBS Packed with lithium coin battery A
Q3MEM-8MBS (Q3MEM-BAT)
Packed with lithium coin battery
Q3MEM-4MBS-SET
(Q3MEM-BAT)
Q3MEM- 8MBS-SET
Appendix 11 Precautions for Battery Transportation
+ Memory card protective cover
(2) Transport guidelines
Comply with IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG code and the local transport regulations when
transporting products after unpacking or repacking, while Mitsubishi ships products with packages to comply with
the transport regulations.
Also, consult with the shipping carrier.
677
Appendix 12 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-
in Batteries in EU Member States
This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries
and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.
Appendix 12.1 Disposal precautions
In EU member states, there is a separate collection system for waste batteries. Dispose of batteries properly at the
local community waste collection/recycling center.
The symbol shown below is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built-in batteries used
for Mitsubishi programmable controllers.
Note: This symbol is for EU member states only.
The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) Article 20 "Information for end-users"
and Annex II.
The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes.
678
APPENDICES
Appendix 12.2 Exportation precautions
The new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) requires the following when marketing or exporting batteries and/or
devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.
• To print the symbol on batteries, devices, or their packaging
• To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products
(1) Labelling
To market or export batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries, which have no symbol, to EU member states
on September 26, 2008 or later, print the symbol shown in Page 678, Appendix 12 on the batteries, devices, or
their packaging.
(2) Explaining the symbol in the manuals
To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU member states on September 26, 2008
or later, provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol.
If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided, separately attach
an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices.
The requirements apply to batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the
new EU Battery Directive(2006/66/EC).
A
Appendix 12.2 Exportation precautions
Appendix 12 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States
679
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
Appendix 13.1 CPU modules
(1) Q00JCPU
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
80±0.3
98
7
98 15.5 224.4±0.3
244.4
Unit: mm
(2) Q00UJCPU
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
80±0.3
98
7
4
98 15.5 224.4±0.3
244.4
Unit: mm
680
APPENDICES
(3) Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU,
Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
98
4
23
89.3 27.4
Unit: mm A
(4) Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
Appendix 13.1 CPU modules
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
Q02HCPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
98
PULL
USB
RS-232
23
4
89.3 27.4
Unit: mm
681
(5) Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
98
23
4
89.3 27.4
Unit: mm
(6) Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU
98
23
4
115 27.4
Unit: mm
682
APPENDICES
(7) Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU
98
23
A
4
115 27.4
Unit: mm
Appendix 13.1 CPU modules
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
(8) Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
Q12PRHCPU
MODE BACKUP
RUN CONTROL
ERR. SYSTEM A
USER SYSTEM B
BAT.
BOOT
TRACKING
98
PULL
USB
4
50.8
89.3 2 55.2
Unit: mm
683
(9) When the Q7BAT-SET is mounted on the CPU module
98
30
89.3 27.4
Unit: mm
98
30
89.3 2 27.4
Unit: mm
684
APPENDICES
(10)When the Q3MEM-4MBS or Q3MEM-8MBS is mounted on the CPU module
98
89.3 24.5 5
118.8 27.4
Unit: mm
Appendix 13.1 CPU modules
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
685
Appendix 13.2 Power supply modules
(1) Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q62P, Q63P
98
90 55.2
Unit: mm
(2) Q64P
98
115 55.2
Unit: mm
686
A
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
Appendix 13.2 Power supply modules
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
APPENDICES
687
55.2
27.4
98
14
98
90
115
(3) Q64PN
(4) Q61SP
(5) Q63RP
98
115 83
Unit: mm
(6) Q64RPN, Q64RP
98
115 83
Unit: mm
688
A
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
Appendix 13.2 Power supply modules
Unit: mm
APPENDICES
689
54.5
130
(7) A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P
93.6
6.5
Appendix 13.3 Main base units
(1) Q33B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
OUT
5V
SG
80±0.3
98
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2
FG
7.5 15.5 169±0.3
44.1 189
Unit: mm
(2) Q35B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
OUT
5V
SG
80±0.3
98
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
FG
7
7.5 15.5 224.4±0.3
44.1 245
Unit: mm
690
APPENDICES
(3) Q38B
(a) With 5 base mounting holes
5-mounting screws
(M4×14)
OUT
5V
SG
80±0.3
a1
98
b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG
7
7.5 15.5 170±0.3 138±0.3
44.1 328
Unit: mm
(b) With 4 base mounting holes
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
A
OUT
5V
Appendix 13.3 Main base units
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
SG
80±0.3
98
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
CPU
FG
7
7.5 15.5 308±0.3
44.1 328
Unit: mm
691
(4) Q312B
(a) With 5 base mounting holes
5-mounting screws
(M4×14)
OUT
5V
SG
80±0.3
98
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
FG
7
7.5 15.5 170±0.3 249±0.3
44.1 439
Unit: mm
(b) With 4 base mounting holes
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
OUT
80±0.3
98
7
7.5 15.5 419±0.3
44.1 439
Unit: mm
Remark
The Q38B and Q312B manufactured in August 2006 or later have five base mounting holes.
692
APPENDICES
(5) Q32SB
4-mounting screws (M4×12)
5V
80±0.3
SG
98
CPU I/O0 I/O1
POWER
7
7.5 8.5 101±0.3
114
Unit: mm
(6) Q33SB
4-mounting screws (M4×12)
A
5V
80±0.3
SG
98
CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2
POWER
Appendix 13.3 Main base units
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
7
7.5 8.5 129±0.3
142
Unit: mm
693
(7) Q35SB
4-mounting screws (M4×12)
5V
80±0.3
SG
98
7
7.5 8.5 184.5±0.3
197.5
Unit: mm
(8) Q38RB
5-mounting screws
(M4×14)
OUT
5V 5V
SG SG
80±0.3
98
CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG FG
7
7.5 15.5 170±0.3 249±0.3
44.1 439
Unit: mm
(9) Q35DB
4-mounting screws
(M4×14)
80±0.3
98
7
7.5 15.5 224.5±0.3
44.1 245
Unit: mm
694
APPENDICES
(10)Q38DB
5-mounting screws
(M4×14)
OUT
5V
SG
80±0.3
a1 b1
98
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG 38D
7
7.5 15.5 170±0.3 138±0.3
44.1 328
Unit: mm
(11)Q312DB
5-mounting screws
(M4×14)
A
Appendix 13.3 Main base units
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
OUT
5V
80±0.3
SG
98
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
FG 312D
7
7.5 15.5 170±0.3 249±0.3
44.1 439
Unit: mm
695
Appendix 13.4 Extension base units
(1) Q52B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
IN OUT
80±0.3
98
I/O0 I/O1
7.5 7
15.5 83.5±0.3
44.1 106
Unit: mm
(2) Q55B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
IN OUT
80±0.3
98
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
7
7.5 15.5 167±0.3
44.1 189
Unit: mm
(3) Q63B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
IN OUT
5V
SG
80±0.3
98
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2
FG
7
7.5 15.5 167±0.3
44.1 189
Unit: mm
696
APPENDICES
(4) Q65B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
IN OUT
5V
SG
80±0.3
98
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
FG
7
7.5 15.5 222.4±0.3
44.1 245
Unit: mm
(5) Q68B
(a) With 5 base mounting holes
5-mounting screws
(M4×14)
A
IN OUT
Appendix 13.4 Extension base units
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
5V
SG
80±0.3
98
a1 b1
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG
7
7.5 15.5 190±0.3 116±0.3
44.1 328
Unit: mm
(b) With 4 base mounting holes
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
IN OUT
5V
SG
80±0.3
98
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG
7
7.5 15.5 306±0.3
44.1 328
Unit: mm
697
(6) Q612B
(a) With 5 base mounting holes
5-mounting screws
(M4×14)
IN OUT
5V
SG
80±0.3
a1
98
b1
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
FG
7
7.5 15.5 190±0.3 227±0.3
44.1 439
Unit: mm
(b) With 4 base mounting holes
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
IN OUT
5V
SG
80±0.3
98
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9
FG
7
7.5 15.5 417±0.3
44.1 439
Unit: mm
Remark
The Q68B and Q612B manufactured in August 2006 or later have five base mounting holes.
698
APPENDICES
(7) QA1S51B
3-mounting screws (M5×25)
110±0.3
(93)
130
17±0.3
10
16.4 10 80±0.3
50.7 100
Unit: mm
(8) QA1S65B
4-mounting screws (M5×25)
A
IN OUT
5V
110±0.3
SG
130
FG
Appendix 13.4 Extension base units
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
QA1S65B
10
16.4 10 295±0.3
51.2 315
Unit: mm
699
(9) QA1S68B
4-mounting screws (M5×25)
IN OUT
5V
110±0.3
SG
130
FG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
QA1S68B
10
16.4 10 400±0.3
51.2 420
Unit: mm
(10)QA65B
Base cover 2×6-M4 screw 4- 6 installation holes
(for mounting module) (M5 installation screw)
200±0.3
250
46.6 332±0.3
352
Hand hold
Unit: mm
700
APPENDICES
(11) QA68B
Base cover 2×9-M4 screw 4- 6 installation holes
(for mounting module) (M5 installation screw)
200±0.3
250
46.6 446±0.3
466
Hand hold
Unit: mm
(12) Q68RB
A
5-mounting screws
Appendix 13.4 Extension base units
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
(M4×14)
IN OUT
5V 5V
SG SG
80±0.3
98
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG FG
7
7.5 15.5 170±0.3 247±0.3
44.1 439
Unit: mm
701
(13) Q65WRB
5-mounting screws
(M4×14)
IN1 IN2 OUT
5V 5V
80±0.3
SG SG
98
POWER 1 POWER 2 I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
7
7.5 15.5 170±0.3 247±0.3
44.1 439
Unit: mm
702
APPENDICES
Appendix 13.5 Other optional items
(1) Extension cables
QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
42.0
7.0 34.2 6.0
10.0
Unit: mm
(2) Tracking cable
QC10TR, QC30TR
A
B
39.7
B A
12.4 33.5
Appendix 13.5 Other optional items
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
Unit: mm
703
(3) Q8BAT-SET
Q8BAT
4.5mounting screws
(M4×14)
87 55.2
Q8BAT
89.8
98
OUTPUT
3VDC
49
4.5×5.1mounting screws
5.8 47.1 (M4×14)
4.5
Unit: mm
QC10BAT
QC10BAT
55 30
39 1000
Unit: mm
704
A
Appendix 13 External Dimensions
Appendix 13.5 Other optional items
APPENDICES
705
Memo
INDEX
0 to 9 External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Installation and removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5VDC internal current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
CPU shared memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
A
D
A series power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
A5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
A6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Data register [D] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Allowable momentary power failure time . . . . . . . . 147 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Annunciator [F] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Device
AnS series power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Annunciator [F] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
ATA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Counter [C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
Automatic write to the standard ROM . . . . . . . . . . 185 Data register [D] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
Edge relay [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
B File register [R, ZR ] . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
Function input [FX] . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 147
Backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Function output [FY] . . . . . . . . . . .......... 147
Base unit Function register [FD] . . . . . . . . . .......... 147
Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Index register [Z] . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 147
Extension stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Intelligent function module device . .......... 147
External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 Internal relay [M]. . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
Installation and removal of module . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Interrupt pointer [I] . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 147
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Latch relay [L] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
Mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Link direct device . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 147
Mounting orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Link register [W] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Link relay [B] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
Multiple CPU high speed main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Link special register [SW] . . . . . . .......... 146
Redundant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Link special relay [SB] . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
Redundant power extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Pointer [P] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 147
Redundant power main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Retentive timer [ST] . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
Redundant power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Special register [SD] . . . . . . . . . . .......... 147
Redundant type extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Special relay [SM] . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 147
Slim type main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Step relay [S] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 147
Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Timer [T] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 146
Battery DIN rail
Battery for QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Applicable DIN rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Battery for SRAM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 DIN rail mounting Adapter type . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 DIN rail mounting screw intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Replacement procedure (CPU module) . . . . . . . 255
Replacement procedure (SRAM card) . . . . . . . . 261 E
Replacement reference period . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Boot operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Edge relay [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
C Extended scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Extended SRAM cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,246
Calculating heat generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Extension
Category II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Circuit Extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fail-safe circuit . . . . . . . . ................ 673 External dimensions
System design circuit . . . ................ 671 CPU module . . . . . . . . . . ............... 680
Clock function . . . . . . . . . . ................ 147 Extension base unit . . . . . ............... 696
Constant scan . . . . . . . . . . ................ 145 Extension cable . . . . . . . . ............... 703
Control method . . . . . . . . . ................ 145 Main base unit . . . . . . . . . ............... 690
Control system. . . . . . . . . . ................ 128 Power supply module . . . . ............... 686
Counter [C] . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ 146 Tracking cable . . . . . . . . . ............... 703
CPU module
706
F Battery Installation into the Memory Card . . . . . . 241
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fail-safe List of usable memory cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 I
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Loading/unloading procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Ferrite core. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Specifications of the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 2
File register [R, ZR ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Memory size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Flash card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Module
Forcibly Disabling the SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . 245 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Function input [FX] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Function output [FY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Module change
Function register [FD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Function version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 Redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Multiple CPU high speed main base unit . . . . . . . . . 22 4
G
N
GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
No. of device points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
H No. of device tracking words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
No. of I/O device points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
High Performance model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 No. of I/O points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
High-speed Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Noise filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
I O
I/O control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Online module change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Operation mode change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Index register [Z] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8
Installing and Removing an Extended P
SRAM Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Installing and Removing an SD Memory Card . . . . . 99 Part name
Intelligent function module Base units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Intelligent function module device . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Intelligent function module parameter . . . . . . . . . 146 High Performance model QCPU,
Internal current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Process CPU and Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . 125
Internal relay [M] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Interrupt pointer [I] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Isolation transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Periodic inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
L Pointer [P] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Power supply module
Latch clear operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 A series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Latch range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 AnS series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Latch relay [L] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Connecting to the power supply module . . . . . . . 105
LED External dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Life detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Link direct device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Names of Parts and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Link register [W] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Q series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Link relay [B] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Redundant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Link special register [SW] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Slim type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Link special relay [SB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Low Voltage directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 Precaution
Connection of GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
M Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Precaution on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Max. number of files stored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Precautions for battery transportation . . . . . . . . 677
MC protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Precautions for using coaxial cables . . . . . . . . . 657
MELSECNET/H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Startup and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Memory capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Memory Card
707
When only the Q5B is connected to the Specifications
extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 248
Wiring precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Battery for memory card . . . . . ............ 239
Process control language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 117
Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 237
Processing speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 119
Program capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Power supply module . . . . . . . ............ 196
Program language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 SRAM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 236
Program size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Standard RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 145
Standard ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 145
Standards
Q
Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . ............ 651
Q series power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Standby system . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 128
Q3B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Step relay [S] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 147
Q3DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 surge absorber for lightning . . . . ............ 104
Q3RB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 671
Q3SB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 128
Q5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Standby system . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 128
Q6BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 System A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 129
Q6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 System B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 129
Q6RB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 System A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 129
Q6WRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 System B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 129
Q7BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 System configuration
Q7BAT-SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Applicable software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Q8BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Bus connection of GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Q8BAT-SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
QA1S5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Overall configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
QA1S6ADP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Peripheral device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
QA1S6ADP+A1S5B/A1S6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
QA1S6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Sequence control language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
QA6ADP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Single CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
QA6ADP+A5B/A6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 System switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
QA6B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
QnUD(H)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 T
Timer [T] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
R
Tracking cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Redundant base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Tracking execution time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Redundant CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Troubleshooting
Redundant power extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . 22 Basic measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Redundant power main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 U
Redundant power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Redundant system Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Debug mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
W
Operation mode change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Separate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Weight
Redundant type extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Reinforced insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 CPU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Reset operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Retentive timer [ST] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
RUN/PAUSE contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,207
Wiring
S Extension cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
I/O equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
SD memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,243 I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Separate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 Wiring of I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Single power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Slim type main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Slim type power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Special register [SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Special relay [SM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
708
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print date *Manual number Revision
Jun., 2004 SH(NA)-080483ENG-A First edition
Dec., 2004 SH(NA)-080483ENG-B
Addition
Section 12.2.21
Partial correction
CONTENTS, Section 2.1.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 9.1.2, 9.2.4, 10.3.1, 10.4, 10.5, 10.6.1, 11.1,
11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.1, 12.3.1, 12.3, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2,
Appendix 3.1
May, 2005 SH(NA)-080483ENG-C Addition
Section 12.2.22, 12.2.23, 12.2.24, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Chapter 1, Section 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.5, 2.2,
4.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3, 6.1.4, 7.2.1, 7.2.2, 9.1.3, 10.2, 10.3.2, 10.6.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.2,
11.3.3, 11.3.4, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.3, 12.2.5, 12.2.7, 12.3.2, 12.4.1, 12.4.2,
12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.5, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 3
Aug., 2005 SH(NA)-080483ENG-D Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 2.1.1,
4.1, 5.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3, 7.1.2, 10.6.2, 11.3.3, 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 12.4.2, 12.6, 12.7,
Appendix 1.2
Apr., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-E
Model Addition
QA65B,QA68B
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.1, 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 5.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.3,
6.1.1, 6.1.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 9.1.6, 10.3.1, 10.3.3, 12.3.2, Appendix 1.4, Appendix 2.2,
Appendix 2.4, Index
Aug., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-F
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.1.5, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 9.1.5, 10.2, 10.3.1, 12.5.1,
12.5.2, Appendix 1.3, 1.4
Sep., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-G Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 7.1.2, 9.1.6, 10.3.1, 11.3.3, 12.3.4,
12.3.6, 12.7
Oct., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-H Addition
Section 12.3.11
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.1, 2.1.1, Chapter3, Section 4.1, 4.2.1, 5.1, 5.2.1,
5.2.2, 5.3, 6.1.1, 9.1.1, 9.1.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 9.2.3, 9.2.5, 10.2, 10.3.1, 10.6.1, 10.6.2,
11.3.1, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.19, 12.3.2, 12.3.3, 12.3.5, 12.3.10, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.2,
Appendix 2.2
709
Print date *Manual number Revision
Apr., 2007 SH(NA)-080483ENG-I Universal model QCPU model addition,
Revision involving High Performance model QCPU and Redundant CPU serial
No.09012
Model Addition
Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q65WRB
Addition
Section 4.4, 12.2.25
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, ABOUT MANUALS,
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Chapter 1, Section 1.1, 2.1, 2.1.1, 2.1.2,
2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, 2.2, 4.1, 4.2.2, 4.3.2, 5.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 7.1.1,
7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.1.5, 7.1.6, 7.1.7, 7.2.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 10.3.1, 10.3.3, 10.4, 10.6.1, 10.6.2,
11.1, 11.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.3, 11.3.4, 11.4, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.3, 12.2.10,
12.2.15, 12.2.21, 12.2.22, 12.2.23, 12.3.1, 12.3.2, 12.3.3, 12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.6, 12.3.7,
12.3.8, 12.3.9, 12.3.11, 12.4.1, 12.5.1, 12.5.2, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3,
Appendix 1.4, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 3
Jan., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-J Revision due to the support for Redundant CPU serial number 09102
Model Addition
QA6ADP, Q64PN
Addition
Appendix 2.6
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTION, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.1, 2.1.1,
2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.5, 4.1, 4.2.1, 4.3.1, 4.4.1, Chapter 3, Section 5.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3,
6.1.2, 6.1.3, 9.1.1, 9.1.2, 9.1.5, 9.1.6, 9.2.3, 10.1, 10.3.1, 10.3.3, 10.6.1, 10.6.2, 11.2,
11.3.1, 11.3.4, 12.2.13, 12.2.22, 12.3.3, 12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.9, 12.4.1, 12.4.2, 12.5.1,
12.5.2, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 2.5, Index
Mar., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-K
Model Addition
Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
Addition
Section 11.3.1
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, PRECAUTIONS FOR USE, Chapter 1,
Section 1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, 4.1, 4.4.1, 5.2.1, 5.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.3, 7.1.1, 7.1.6, 7.2.1,
10.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.4, 12.3.1, 12.3.3, 12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.6, 12.6,
12.7, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5,
Appendix 2.6
Section11.3.1 11.3.2, Section11.3.2 11.3.3, Section11.3.3 11.3.4,
Section11.3.4 11.3.5
May, 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-L Revision due to the addition of Process CPU and Universal model QCPU.
Addition
Section 12.2.26, 12.2.27, 12.2.28, 12.2.29, 12.2.30, 12.2.31, 12.5.2
Model Addition
Chapter 1, Section 1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, 2.2, 4.1, 4.3.1, 4.4.1, 6.1.3, 7.1.2,
11.3.2, 12.2.1, 12.3.3, 12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.6, 12.3.9, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix1.1,
Appendix 2, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 2.6
710
Print date *Manual number Revision
Sep., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-M Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTION, Section 1.1, 2.2, 7.1.6, 7.2.1, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, Appendix 2.6
Addition
Appendix 4
Dec., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-N Universal model QCPU model additions
Revision and overall review for support to the Universal model QCPU serial number
"10101".
Model Addition
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU
Mar., 2009 SH(NA)-080483ENG-O Revision due to the support for Universal model QCPU serial number "11012".
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INTRODUCTION, GENERIC TERMS AND
ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.1, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 4.1.3, 4.1.5, 4.3.1, 4.3.2, 4.3.5, 4.4.1, 5.2.1,
5.2.3, 5.2.4, 5.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 7.1.2, 7.1.6, CHAPTER 8, Section 9.1.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 9.2,
9.2.4, 10.1, 10.3.1, 10.3.3, CHAPTER 11, Section 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.3, 12.1, 12.2.1 to
12.2.12, 12.2.14 to 12.2.36, 12.3.11, 12.5.1, 12.6, 12.7, 12.8, Appendix 2.6
Addition
12.2.37 to 12.2.39
Jul., 2009 SH(NA)-080483ENG-P Revision because of function support by the Universal model QCPU having a serial
number "11043" or later
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 2.1.3, 2.1.6, 7.2.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.2,
11.3.3, 11.4, 11.5, 12.3.3, 12.3.4, 12.4, 12.7, 12.8, Appendix 2.6
Dec., 2009 SH(NA)-080483ENG-Q Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 5.3, 11.3.2, 11.3.4, 12.3.3, 12.7, 12.8
Addition
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
Apr., 2010 SH(NA)-080483ENG-R Revision on the new models and functions of the Universal model QCPU (The added
functions are supported in the module whose serial number is "12012" or later.)
Model Addition
Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INTRODUCTION, MANUALS,
MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS,
Section 1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.6, 4.1.5, 4.4.1, 5.2.1, 6.1.4, 7.1.1, CHAPTER 8,
Section 9.1.3, 10.1, 10.3.3, CHAPTER 11, Section 11.3.1, 11.3.2, Appendix 1.1,
Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 2.6
Aug., 2010 SH(NA)-080483ENG-S Revision on the new functions of the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first
5 digits) is "12052" or later
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 4.1.5, 9.1.2, 10.1, 12.3.1, 12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.6,
12.3.9, Appendix 2.6
Jan., 2011 SH(NA)-080483ENG-T
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 6.1.1, 9.1, 9.2, 12.2.2, 12.3.3, 12.3.4,
12.3.11, 12.8, 12.9, Appendix 2.6
711
Print date *Manual number Revision
May, 2011 SH(NA)-080483ENG-U Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.8,
CHAPTER 3, Section 5.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 9.1.1, 10.3.1, 10.6.1, 12.3.3, 12.3.11, 12.9,
Appendix 1.3, Appendix 2.6
Jul., 2011 SH(NA)-080483ENG-V Revision due to the layout change of the manual
Oct., 2011 SH(NA)-080483ENG-W Revision on the new functions of the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first
five digits) is "13102" or later
Model Addition
QA1S51B
Partial correction
ISAFETY PRECAUTIONS, NTRODUCTION, TERMS, Section 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.3.1,
4.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.6.1, CHAPTER 5, Section 6.1.1, 7.1.1, 7.2.1, 7.2.3, 8.1, 8.2,
8.3, 11.3.2, 13.1.4, 13.2, 13.3.4, Appendix 1.4, Appendix 1.5, Appendix 1.7,
Appendix 1.9, Appendix 2, Appendix 3, Appendix 5, Appendix 5.2, Appendix 6.6,
Appendix 7.1.6, Appendix 12.2, Appendix 12.4
Feb., 2012 SH(NA)-080483ENG-X Revision on the new functions of the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first
five digits) is "14022" or later
Partial correction
Section 2.3, 4.6.4, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.5, Appendix 1.11, Appendix 2, Appendix 3,
Appendix 6.6, Appendix 7.1
May, 2012 SH(NA)-080483ENG-Y Motion CPU model addition
Revision on the new functions of the Universal model QCPU whose serial
number (first 5 digits) is "14042" or later
Model Addition
Q172DCPU-S1, Q173DCPU-S1, Q172DSCPU, Q173DSCPU
Partial correction
TERMS, Section 2.2, 2.3.2, 7.1, 7.2.2, 8.2, CHAPTER 12, Section 12.1, 12.2, 13.1.1,
13.1.4 to 13.1.6, 13.3.1 to 13.3.4, 13.3.6, 13.3.8, 13.3.9, Appendix 1.1 to 1.9, 1.11, 2, 3,
5.1, 6.4 to 6.6
Aug., 2012 SH(NA)-080483ENG-Z Revision on the new functions of the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first
5 digits) is "14072" or later
Partial correction
Section 7.1, 11.3.1, Appendix 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.11, 2, 3, 6.6, 7.2
Feb., 2013 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AA Revision on the new models of the Universal model QCPU
Model Addition
Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU
Sep., 2013 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AB Revision on the new model of the C Controller module, and the new functions of the
Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first 5 digits) is "15043" or later
Jan., 2014 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AC Revision on the new functions of the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first
five digits) is "15103" or later
Revision on the new functions of the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU,
Redundant CPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "16021" or later
Partial correction
Section 2.2, 2.3, 2.3.2, 4.8.1, 4.8.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 6.2.2, 6.2.3, 6.2.4, 7.1, 7.2.1,
15.3.8, Appendix 1.6, 3, 5.1, 6.2, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 12.1, 12.2
Addition
Section 15.3.7
Feb., 2014 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AD Partial correction
Section 9.1.1
712
Print date *Manual number Revision
Jul., 2014 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AE Revision on the new functions of the High-speed Universal model QCPU whose serial
number (first five digits) is "16043" or later
Model Addition
QA1S6ADP
Partial correction
TERMS, Section 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.3.1, 4.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.4, 4.8.3, 7.1.1, 8.2, 13.2,
Appendix 1.4, 1.6, 1.11, 2, 3, 7.1.6
Sep., 2014 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AF Redundant power supply module model addition
Model Addition
Q64RPN
Partial correction
TERMS, 4.8.1, 7.1, 7.1.1, 7.2.1, 7.2.3, Appendix 3,12.2
Dec., 2014 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AG Partial correction
Appendix 12.4
Jan., 2015 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AH Revision on the new functions of the High-speed Universal model QCPU whose serial
number (first five digits) is "17012" or later
Model Addition
NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM-4GBSD, NZ1MEM-8GBSD, NZ1MEM-16GBSD
Partial correction
TERMS, Section 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.3.1, 2.3.2, 2.3.4, 4.5, 6.1.2, 10.1, 10.2, 13.3.1, 15.1.4,
Appendix 1.4, 1.6, 1.11, 2, 3, 6.2, 6.6, 8.1, 8.1.7, 13.1, 13.4
Addition
Appendix 7
Feb., 2015 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AI Partial correction
Appendix 13
Mar., 2015 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AJ Partial correction
Appendix 6.6
Jun., 2015 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AK Revision on the new functions of the High-speed Universal model QCPU whose serial
number (first five digits) is "17052" or later
Partial correction
Appendix 1.11, 2, 3, 6.6
Dec., 2015 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AL Revision on the new functions of the High-speed Universal model QCPU whose serial
number (first five digits) is "17103" or later
Partial correction
Section 6.1.3, 9.1, Appendix 1, 2, 3, 6, 13
Jul., 2016 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AM Revision on the new functions of the High-speed Universal model QCPU whose serial
number (first five digits) is "18052" or later
Partial correction
Section 13.4, Appendix 1.5, 1.11, 2, 3, 6.6, 8.1.2
Oct., 2016 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AN Revision on the new functions of the High-speed Universal model QCPU whose serial
number (first five digits) is "18072" or later
Partial correction
MANUALS, Appendix 1.11, 3, 6.6, 8, 8.1.3
713
Print date *Manual number Revision
Jan., 2017 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AO Revision on the new functions of the High-speed Universal model QCPU whose serial
number (first five digits) is "18112" or later
Partial correction
MANUALS, Section 15.3, Appendix 1, 2, 3, 6.6
Apr., 2017 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AP Partial correction
Appendix 1
Japanese manual version SH-080472-AV
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the
contents noted in this manual.
© 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
714
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product
within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service
Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at
the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing
on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and
the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair
parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which
follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the
product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused
by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions
or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by
industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force
majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA
Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi.
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and
compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products.
(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
715
TRADEMARKS
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. in Japan.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
The SD and SDHC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies.
In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.
716 SH(NA)-080483ENG-AP
SH(NA)-080483ENG-AP(1704)MEE
MODEL: QCPU-U-HH-E
MODEL CODE: 13JR73
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.